TS-NTPC Darlipali PDF

NTPC Limited
(A Government of India Enterprise)
DARLIPALLI STPP STAGE-I

(2X800MW)
SECTION – VI
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
BIDDING document NO.: CS-9549-572-2
NTPC Limited

(2X800MW)
SECTION – VI
FOR
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
(This document is meant for the exclusive purpose of bidding against this specification and shall not be
transferred, reproduced or otherwise used for purposes other than that for which it is specifically issued.)
SECTION – VI
(TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION)
CONTENTS
S. No. Chapter Description

1 PART-I GENERAL
2 PART-II ELECTRICAL & CIVIL
3 PART-III TRANSMISSION LINES
4 PART-IV GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART CHAPTER DESCRIPTION NO. OF

NO. PAGES
PART - I GENERAL 38
PART - II ELECTRICAL
Chapter – E0 Switchyard Electrical General 10
Chapter – E1 Circuit Breakers 20
Chapter – E2 Disconnector 7
Chapter – E3 Instrument Transformers 13
Chapter – E4 Surge Arrestor 7
Chapter – E5 Post Insulator 4
Chapter – E6 Wave Trap 3
Chapter – E7 Lighting 24
Chapter – E8 VOID --
Chapter – E9 VOID --
Chapter – E10 Substation Automation System (SAS) 67
Chapter – E11 LT Power and Control Cables 3
Chapter – E12 Requirements of Auxiliary Items 19
Chapter – E13 Installation 19
Chapter – E14 Site Testing and Commissioning 3
PART - II CIVIL
Chapter – C0 Switchyard Civil Works 45
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART CHAPTER DESCRIPTION NO. OF
NO. PAGES
PART-III TRANSMISSION LINES
Chapter-T0 Transmission line General 9
Chapter-T1 Transmission line towers 18
Chapter-T2 Tower Foundations 10
Chapter-T3 Tower line erection and Stringing 7
Chapter-T4 Line material 9
Chapter-T5 Line material Testing 16
PART - IV GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Chapter- G1 General Technical Requirements 21
Appendix - I Sampling Testing and Quality Assurance 15

for Civil works
Annexure – I Indicative QA & QC Organisation Setup 1
Annexure - II List of Specialist Institutes/Organisation for 3

testing and Evaluation of Building Materials
Annexure - III Format for Request Letter for Evaluation of 3
Materials
Annexure - IV Typical QA/QC Lab Equipment 2
Annexure - V Indicative Field Quality Plan 16
Indicative Vendor List For Items Requiring Sub 8

Vendor/Quality Plan Approval
List of Items Requiring Quality Plan and Sub Supplier 7
Approval
QA formats 14
Chapter- G2 Additional Construction Work Split 15

responsibilities
Annexure – I Safety Plan 11
Annexure - II List of Tender Drawings 23
Annexure - III Additional Information to Bidders 7
Chapter – G3 Codes and Standards 6

PART-I
GENERAL
PART-I
GENERAL & BOQ
Clause no. Description Page no.
1.00.00 Intent of Specification 1
2.00.00 Project Information 2
3.00.00 Scope of Work 2
4.00.00 Spares 15
5.00.00 Type Test Requirements 17
6.00.00 Requirements in Respect of Supply Items 19
ANNEXURE-I : Project Synopsis- Darlipalli STPP-I (2X800MW) 23
APPENDIX- I : The criteria for Wind Resistant Design 24

of Structures and Equipments.
APPENDIX- II : The criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design 26

of Structures and Equipments.
Bill of Quantity 34
Clause No. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
SUB SECTION – GENERAL
1.00.00 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION
1.01.00 This specification intends to cover the following activities, services and works in
respect of Switchyard Package at Darlipalli STPP stage-I (2x800MW) situated in
the state of Orissa, India.
a) Complete design and engineering of all the systems, sub-systems, equipment,

material and services.
b) Providing engineering data, drawings and O&M manuals for Employer’s
review, approval and records.
c) Manufacturing, supply, testing, packing, transportation and insurance from the
manufacturer’s work to the site including port and customs clearance, if
required.
d) Receipt, storage, insurance, preservation and conservation of equipment at
the site.
e) All civil works as required.
f) Fabrication, pre-assembly (if any), erection, testing and putting into
satisfactory operation of all the equipment/material including successful
commissioning.
g) Furnishing of spares on FOR site basis.
h) Reconciliation with customs authorities, in case of foreign supplies.
i) Satisfactory conclusion of the contract.
Detailed scope of work under this package is listed at clause 3.00.00.
1.02.00 In addition to the requirements indicated in this section (Technical specifications), all
the requirements as stated in other sections shall also be considered as a part of
this specification as if completely bound herewith.
1.03.00 The Bidder shall be responsible for providing all material, equipment and services
specified or otherwise which are required to fulfill the intent of ensuring operability,
maintainability and the reliability of the complete work covered under this
specification.
1.04.00 It is not the intent to specify all aspects of design and construction of equipment
mentioned herein. The systems, sub-systems and equipment shall conform in all
respect to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship, and shall be
capable of performing in continuous commercial operation.
1.05.00 Whenever a material or article is specified or described by the name of a particular

brand, manufacturer or trade mark, the specific item shall be understood as
establishing type, function and quality desired. Products of other manufacturers may
DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I

BID DOC NO.
(2X800MW) TECHNICAL PART-I Page
CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI G-1/38
also be considered, provided sufficient information is furnished so as to enable the

Employer to determine that the products are equivalent to those named.
1.06.00 The drawings enclosed as per list at Part-IV to this section and forming a part of the
specification shall supplement the requirements specified herein. The scope and
terminal points for the equipment to be furnished under this contract are also
identified in these drawings and are to be read in conjunction with the text of the
specifications. These are preliminary drawings for bidding purpose only and are
subject to changes that may be necessary during detailed engineering after award
keeping the basic parameters as specified.
1. 07.00 Failure of any equipment to meet the specified requirements of tests carried out at
works or at site shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. Rejection of
any equipment will not be held as a valid reason for delay in the completion of the
works as per schedule. Contractor shall be responsible for removing all deficiencies,
and supplying the equipment that meet the requirement.
2.00.00 PROJECT INFORMATION
2.01.00 ‘Project Synopsis’ and other details about Darlipalli STPP Stage-I (2X800MW) is
enclosed at Appendix-I.
2.02.00 The criteria for wind resistance design of structure and equipment for Darlipalli
STPP Stage-I (2X800MW) is enclosed at Appendix -II.
2.03.00 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures and equipment for Darlipalli
STPP Stage-I (2X800MW) is enclosed at Appendix -III.
3.00.00 SCOPE OF WORK

3.01.01 The scope of work comprises of execution of 765KV & 132 kV Switchyards at
Darlipalli STPP Stage-I (2X800MW). The scope also includes 132 kV Transmission
Lines between Main power plant & Make up water pump house and 132kV
Substation at Makeup water Pump House end as shown in the Single Line
Diagram. The 765kV switchyard shall be with one and half breaker scheme and
132KV switchyard shall be with Double main bus switching scheme. The scope of
work on turnkey basis shall comprise, but not limited to the design, engineering,
manufacture, testing and inspection at manufacturer’s works, packing, supply,
transportation, transit insurance, delivery to site, unloading, storage and equipment
erection, associated civil and structural works including Switchyard Control Room
building. Further it shall include the cabling, lighting, earthing, association of sub
vendors if any in the erection, supervision, site testing, inspection and
commissioning of complete 765 kV & 132 kV Switchyard and 132 KV Substation at
Makeup water Pump House end including 132 kV Transmission Lines.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
Bay Details : As indicated in Single Line Diagram, the various bays envisaged
under this package are as follows:
I) Execution of following bays at 765 kV Switchyard
i. Two (2) Nos. of Generator Transformer bays.

ii. One (1) No. of Bus Reactor(3x1Ø 80 MVAR) bay including neutral
formation & earthing
iii. Two (2) Nos. of Line bays (D/C Line to Sundargarh Pooling)
iv. Two (2) Nos. of 255 MVA(3x1Ø 85 MVA) IBT bays (alongwith arrangement
for online switching of spare Single phase IBT on either bank) including
neutral formation & earthing
II) Execution of following bays at 132 kV Switchyard:
I. Two (2) Nos. of Make up water P/H bays
II. Two (2) Nos. of 255 MVA(3x1Ø 85 MVA) IBT bays (alongwith
arrangement for online switching of spare Single phase IBT on either
bank) including neutral formation & earthing
III. Two (2) Nos. of Station Transformer bays
IV. Two (2) Nos. of Misc. Service Transformer bays
V. Two (2) Nos. of Bus Coupler bays
VI. Two (2) Nos. of Bus Section bays
III) Execution of following bays at 132kV Substation at Makeup Water PH End
Two (2) Nos. of Makeup Water P/H Transformer bays
IV) Execution of following 132 kV transmission lines(with ACSR panther

conductor) between 132kV Switchyard(Main plant end) and Makeup Water PH
sub-station :
Two (2) Nos. of 132 kV Single circuit transmission lines (35 kms approx..)
3.01.02 132 KV overhead line and towers and associated equipment for make up water
system
The scope covers supply, erection, commissioning of 132 kV overhead transmission
lines on towers and associated equipment as shown in the single line diagram.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
The scope includes detailed route survey including survey for PTCC clearance, route
marking, survey and selection of tower locations (including all crossings), route
clearance / tree cutting, geo-technical investigation of soil, tower foundations for all
types of soil at each location etc.
The scope includes supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 132 kV

transmission lines on towers and their extensions, parts, conductor and
accessories, earthwire and accessories, insulator and insulator hardwares, vibration
dampers, anticlimbing devices, phase markers, danger plates, counterpoise
earthing, tower accessories etc
This scope also covers all the work required for detailed soil investigation and
preparation of a detailed report for 132 KV lines. It shall include mobilization of
necessary equipment, providing necessary engineering supervision and technical
personnel, carrying out field investigation and tests, laboratory tests, analysis and
interpretation of data and results, collecting data regarding geographical conditions
from local sources, giving flood details of the area (past history), preparations for
the type of foundations and the safe bearing capacity for different sizes of
foundations, different founding strata for the various locations along the
transmission lines. In addition the soil investigation may be required to be carried at
other locations
The weed/tree cutting shall be responsibility of the Contractor. The contractor shall
count, mark and put proper numbers with suitable quality of paint on all the trees
that are to be cut, cost of the same shall be included in the bid price. Contractor
may note that Employer shall not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to
the properties due to contractor’s tree cutting work. However, the approval for the
same shall be obtained by Employer.
3.01.03 The equipment and materials to be supplied by the Contractor shall form a complete
765KV & 132 kV switchyard and 132kV substations at MUWPH End including 132
kV Transmission lines. The equipment and services as detailed in all sections of the
bidding documents and as shown on the tender drawings shall be within the scope
of supply of the Contractor. The interpretation of the Employer in respect of the
scope, details and services to be performed by the Bidder shall be binding, unless
specifically clarified otherwise by the Employer in writing before the award of
contract.
3.02.00 The following is the list of items under the scope of contractor. However any items
though not specifically mentioned but which are required to make the switchyard
complete in all respects for its safe, efficient, reliable and trouble free operation shall
be supplied and erected by the Contractor, unless they are specifically excluded in
the text of exclusions given in Clause-3.05.00 of this section.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
- 765 & 132kV equipments: Circuit Breakers, Isolators (with/without earth switches),
Current Transformers, Surge arresters, Bus post insulators and Capacitor voltage
transformers
- 33KV Current Transformers, Disconnector & Bus Post Insulator
- 765 kV Wave traps.
- Switchyard Control Room building
- 765kV &132kV Switchyard & 132kV MUWPH Substation Civil Works
- Civil works associated with Two (2) nos. of 255 MVA (3x1Ø 85 MVA)
Interconnecting Transformers along with one no. of 1Ø 85 MVA spare pole IBT, One
(1) no. of 3x1Ø 80 MVAR Bus Reactor, Two nos. of 31.5 MVA Misc. Service
Transformers, Two nos. of 1000 kVA Switchyard service Transformers
- Civil & Structural works associated with 132 kV Cable Sealing ends
- 765KV &132 kV & 132KV MUWPH Substation Switchyard materials:
- 4.5’’/3” EHIPS Aluminum tube
- Bull AAC Conductor
- 10.98 mm dia G.S. Earthwire
- Insulators and hardware
- Clamps, connectors and spacers
- Bay Marshalling Kiosks
- AC Bay Kiosk
- Complete earthing grid (inclusive of supply of 40mm dia MS rod and GI flat)
earthing of all switchyard equipments and its connection to earthing grid
- Earth resistivity measurements at site (based on four electrode method) and
design the earthing grid as per IEEE: 80 (Latest edition) and connect the earthing
grid with power plant earthing grid.
- Complete Direct Stroke Lightning Protection of 765 & 132kV Switchyard and
132KV MUWPH Substation using Lightning Mast and/ or Shield wire and its
connection to earthmat based on detail engineering.
- Armoured Power, Control and Screen cable and cabling between Contractor
supplied equipments & Owner supplied equipments(LT Switchgears, ICTs, Bus
Reactors, 132 kV Misc. Service Transformers & 132 kV Make up water
Transformers etc.)

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
- Armoured Power, Control cables and cabling among Owner supplied equipment
(LT Switchgears, Battery & Battery chargers, Package AC's, 630 kVA Switchyard
Service Transformers, ICTs, Bus Reactors, 132 kV Misc. Service Transformers &
132 kV Make up water Transformers and RTCC panels etc.)
- Armoured Power, Control cables, optical fibre cable, screen cable and cabling
among Contractor supplied equipment
- Cable support angles, cable trays and accessories necessary for cable erection
such as glands, lugs, clamps for cables, ferrules, cable ties, hume pipe etc. cable
route markers for buried cable trench are also included in the scope.
- Power & Control cable schedule & termination schedules, opitcal fibre cable &
screened cable shall be prepared by the Contractor.
- Indoor and Outdoor lighting system for Switchyard control room building and
765 kV & 132 kV switchyard and 132KV MUWPH Substation. Lighting Mast/
Lightning mast shall be used for mounting lighting fixtures for outdoor switchyard
lighting. No lighting fixtures shall be mounted on tower/ gantries.
- Substation Automation System for 765/132KV switchyard and Make-up Water

Pump House, protection and metering system including Generator Relay
protection panel, Disturbance Recorder, Fault Locators, Islanding Scheme, Bus
Bar protection scheme, Relay test kit, GPS Time Synchronization Equipment,
panel mounted Phasor Measurement units(PMU) and dummy panels for
mounting Owner's supplied energy meters as per specification.
- Relay setting calculations and Substation Configuration Description/IED

Configuration Description files shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved
by Owner.
- Testing of the total Integrated Substation Automation System to establish complete

functionality including the third party interfaces as indicated in SAS architecture
drawing.
- Supply, erection & commissioning of Air Conditioned Bay kiosks for housing of
control and relay panels as per philosophy specified in Chapter- E10 for 765 & 132
kV Switchyard at Darlipalli STPP Stage-I (2X800MW).
- Supply, erection, commissioning of Automatic start/ stop type centrifugal pump for
sump pit.
- 132 kV transmission line, towers, conductors, earth wire, insulator, hardware,
other material and accessories etc.
3.03.00 Services and Items

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
The scope also include but not limited to the following services/items described
herein and elsewhere in specification:
a) System design and engineering

b) Supply of equipment and material
c) Civil works
d) Structural works
e) Erection works
f) Project management and site supervision
g) Testing and commissioning
h) Interface coordination
i) Performance testing
j) Clearance from statutory authority
3.03.01 System Design and Engineering

a) The Contractor shall be responsible for detailed design and engineering of
overall system, sub-systems, elements, system facilities, equipments, auxiliary
services, etc. It shall include proper definition and execution of all interfaces
with systems, equipment, material and services of Employer for proper and
correct design, performance and operation of the project.
b) Contractor shall provide complete engineering data, drawings, reports,

manuals, etc. for Employer’s review, approval and records.
c) The scope shall also include the design and engineering as per details
elaborated elsewhere in this specification.
d) Relay setting calculations shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved

by Employer.
e) For all structural works, the Contractor shall prepare all fabrication drawings.
Similarly for civil works, the detailed construction drawings shall be prepared
for those items whose design is to be done by the Contractor.
3.03.02 Supply of Equipment and Material

a) The Contractor shall be responsible for design, engineering, manufacture,
testing, inspection at manufacturer’s works, supply, transportation, insurance,

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
delivery at site, unloading, storage, in plant transportation at site, complete

erection & supervision, site testing & inspection, and successful
commissioning of all the equipment and material as detailed elsewhere in
specification and as shown on the tender drawings. Any item though not
specifically mentioned, but is required to complete the project works in all
respects for its safe, reliable, efficient and trouble free operation shall be
supplied and erected by the Contractor unless it is explicitly excluded as given
in clause 3.05.00 below.
b) All consumables, wastages and damages shall be to the account of

Contractor.
3.03.03 Civil & Structural Works
The scope of civil works shall include design, engineering & construction of all civil,
structural and architectural works including supply of all materials complete for all
equipments, gantry structures and associated facilities for the switchyard package.
The nature of work generally involves earthwork in excavation and filling in all types
of soils/ rock, dressing to the required profile, dewatering till the structures are
constructed/erected up to required level or as directed by the engineer, shoring,
backfilling around completed structures and plinth filling, disposal of surplus earth,
concreting including reinforcement and formwork, fabrication and erection of all
structural steel and miscellaneous steel (i.e. cable/pipe supports, ladders, railings,
inserts, embedments, gratings, chequered plate covers, platforms, anchor bolts,
etc.), rail track for movement of transformers, reactors, fabrication, galvanising,
Proto-assembly & erection of Gantry Structure, Lighting Mast & Equipment
supporting structure, R.C.C. cable trench & precast covers, cable ducts / duct
banks, soil sterlisation / anti-weed treatment, gravel filling, drainage, fencing,
gates, final grading, supplying and laying earthing mat and any other work required
for completion and proper functioning of the switchyard
All material including cement, reinforcement steel and structural steel required for
completion of the work covered under this package are in the scope of the bidder.
The scope of work described below is general in nature. The Bidder shall provide
all structures / facilities required for the effective functioning of switchyard of the
power plant, whether or not they are specifically mentioned. The scope of Bidder
for civil, structural and architectural works shall include but not limited to the
following:
a) Detailed design criteria including basis of design shall be prepared by the

Bidder based on various requirements specified elsewhere in the
specifications. All the above documents shall be finalised after Owner’s
approval and the same shall form the basis of Detailed Engineering Work.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
b) Civil and structural works associated with switchyard gantry structure (Towers
& Beams) and Lightning Mast including proto assembly and substructure as
required complete.
c) Civil and structural works associated with switchyard equipment supporting

structures and cable sealing ends including proto assembly and substructure
as required complete.
d) Civil structural and architectural works associated with RCC switchyard control
room building with brick wall cladding including substructure, superstructure,
installation of owner’s supplied Switchgear, Battery & charger etc. and all
other related works complete as per system requirement.
e) Civil and structural works associated with foundations for Seven (7) nos. of
Single Phase 765/132KV Inter Bus Transformer (IBT) alongwith fire walls,
Three(3) nos. of Single Phase 765KV Bus Reactors alongwith firewall, Two
(2) nos. of Three phase 132KV Misc. Service Transformer and Two (2) nos. of
1000 kVA Switchyard Service Transformer including oil pit, stone filling, laying
and fixing of rails for movement of Transformers/ reactors, rail cum road and
jacking pad as required, arrangement for cabling etc. all complete.
f) Civil and structural works associated with foundations for AC Bay Kiosk inside
Switchyard bays including supporting/fixing arrangement, cabling
arrangement etc., for cabling etc. all complete as per electrical requirement
g) All necessary embedments, inserts, supporting structures, supporting

members as per requirement. All cable tray supporting structures including
angles/bends/insert plates etc. inside control room building are also in scope
of bidder.
h) All pipe and cable supporting arrangement/structures, pipe and cable trenches
etc.
i) All culverts (i.e. box culverts/ pipe culverts/ duct-banks) at the crossing of
cable trenches/drains with roads, railway lines and drains, etc. as required..
j) Supply of all materials for the construction of structures / facilities in the

switchyard package. Bidder has to make arrangements for supply of all
materials. Employer will not supply any material to the Bidder.
k) Storm water drainage system for switchyard area and connecting to the
Employer’s nearby storm water drains along road side.
l) Septic tank and soak pit for buildings

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
m) Water supply for toilet and office in the buildings and connecting water supply
line to Employer’s nearest located water supply line. Providing wash basin
facility in battery rooms.
n) Single lane concrete road in switchyard including approach to control room

building & major equipments/facilities and connecting to the Employer’s road.
o) Site Preparation, soil sterilization /anti-weed treatment including gravel filling

but excluding major levelling.
p) Fencing along with gates for switchyard area.
q) Foundation for Lighting Poles.
r) Disposal of surplus excavated soil up to a lead of 5.0 km as directed by the

Engineer.
s) Any other facility / structure that would be required as per system

requirements.
t) All protection measures to prevent any damage to the adjoining structures /

facilities.
u) Scope of the Bidder shall also include supply and laying of 40mm dia MS
Rods as earthing mat as per requirement.
v) Geotechnical investigation for switchyard area is not in the scope of the Bidder
and the soil data to be considered shall be as specified in the specification.
All works relating to design, preparation of drawings including fabrication

drawings, procurement of material, fabrication, proto assembly, mass fabrication,
transportation to site, handling, storage and erection of all Towers & Beams,
Lighting Mast and Equipment supporting structures (both lattice type and pipe
type) for the switchyard as per design and drawings to be prepared by the
Contractor and approved by the Owner. This shall also include all types of bolts,
nuts, hangers, shackles, clamps, step bolts etc. and any other items those are
required to complete the job.
The Contractor shall construct, erect and install all structures, equipments and
material of switchyard covered under the project. He shall be responsible for
provision of all labour, tools and plant, and supervisory staff for safe, reliable,
proper and correct erection of project components.
The tools and plant shall include, but not limited to, special hoisting equipment,
cranes, stringing equipment, slings, consumables and all other articles and
supplies as required.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
The Contractor shall ensure periodic cleaning of work sites and removal of all
waste material, packing material, surplus earth and left-overs and their proper
disposal.
3.03.04 Construction Facility

The following are also in the Bidder’s scope of work pertaining to construction
facilities for the project.
a) Development of Bidder’s temporary staff colony and labour colony along

with fencing etc. wherever required.
b) Bidder’s temporary construction office, construction stores (open/ covered),

workshops, material/ field testing laboratory and any other temporary
building and construction equipment, labour and materials.
c) All necessary fire fighting devices/ equipment/ fire tender etc. required for
safety purpose during the project execution stage.
d) All tools and tackles required for the work.
e) Bidder shall arrange skilled/ semiskilled/ unskilled labour from local sources
as far as available in this country and supervisory staff for quality execution
of all civil, structural and architectural works.
f) Construction water
The contractor shall arrange for construction water, service water and also
potable water for labour and other personnel at the worksite/ colony from
underground source. The quality of water should meet the requirements, for
which it is proposed to be used. All Civil and Structural work associated with
the above including borings, pipe lines, valves, pumps, tube wells, pump
house, underground storage tank, over ground storage tank, water tankers
etc, whatsoever required for taking the water from the underground source
to the site of work shall be provided/ erected/ constructed/ maintained by
the contractor at his own cost.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation on account of the

expenditure incurred in arranging the construction water.
g) Construction Power
Construction power shall be provided by the Owner as per the provision of
General conditions/ Special conditions of contract for works to be executed
within the plant boundary. For works to be executed outside the plant

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
boundary, power for the construction purposes shall be arranged by the

contractor at his own cost.
3.03.05 Scope of supply shall also include:
a) Access such as stairs.
b) All steel inserts, plates, bolts, nuts, sleeves etc. to be grouted in concrete
work and used to hold / support the equipment / system being supplied and
erected under this specifications.
3.03.06 Scope of Services:
a) Any additional civil works, materials and services, which though not
specially mentioned but are required to make the system complete.
b) Drawing, data sheets, design calculations and erection operation for

complete system.
c) As built drawing for all structures and layout.
3.03.07 Erection Works

a) The Contractor shall construct, erect and install all equipment and material
of switchyards covered under the project. He shall be responsible for
provision of all labour, tools and plant, and supervisory staff for safe,
reliable, proper and correct erection of project components.
b) The tools and plant shall include, but not limited to, special hoisting
equipment, cranes, stringing equipment, slings, consumables and all other
articles and supplies as required.
c) The Contractor shall ensure periodic cleaning of work sites and removal of
all waste material, packing material, surplus earth and left-over and their
proper disposal.
3.03.08 Project Management and Site Supervision

a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the overall management and
supervision of works. He shall provide experienced, skilled, knowledgeable
and competent personnel for all phases of the project, so as to provide the
Employer with a high quality system.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
b) The Contractor shall be responsible for training of Employer’s operation

and maintenance personnel as to be able to operate & maintain the project
and its components properly, safely and efficiently over long period of time.
c) The Contractor’s supervisory personnel shall provide operation and

maintenance assistance during the warranty period.
d) A project execution schedule called Master Network (MNW) in the form of

PERT chart/network and based on `Work break down structure’ shall be
prepared by the Contractor for Employer’s approval. The MNW shall
identify milestones of key events for each work/component in the areas of
engineering, procurement, manufacture, dispatch, erection and
commissioning. It shall also indicate interfaces and inputs required to be
given by Employer.
3.03.09 Testing and Commissioning
a) The scope includes testing and commissioning of all equipment, sub-
systems and systems of the project and putting them into successful
commercial operation. The scope shall include but not limited to the
requirements given elsewhere in the specification.
b) The Contractor shall be responsible to provide all necessary testing and

commissioning personnel, tools and plant, test equipment, etc.
3.03.10 Interface Coordination

a) The Contractor shall identify all interface issues with Employer and other
agencies, and shall be responsible for such interfacing, coordination and
exchange of all necessary information.
b) The Contractor shall submit to the Employer all drawings for review. He
shall list the detailed requirements of interface between Contractor’s work
and the material and services to be supplied by Employer.
3.03.11 Site supervision of Equipment :
The contractor shall undertake supervision of erection, testing and commissioning

from the respective equipment manufacturer(s) for the main equipment and
SAS/relays. All the necessary protocols for same shall be recorded jointly with
Site in-charge.
3.04.00 Terminal Points

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
The Contractor shall be responsible for making all connections at terminal points,
and shall supply necessary jointing material, connectors, nuts, bolts, etc. The
following are the project terminal points for the purposes of the scope of this
contract as indicated in the single line diagram:
3.04.01 For 765kV Switchyard:
a) “A” row of power plant column for termination of overhead stringing and
connections to Generator Transformers.
b) Terminations at the switchyard line take off gantry for 765 kV lines:
The clamps and connectors for droppers to equipment connections/ line
terminations including suspension string (if required) are in the bidder’s
scope however the line side tension string shall be provided by the line
contractor.
c) 765 kV bushings of Employer’s Bus Reactor.
d) 765 kV bushings of Employer’s 765/132 kV IBTs.
3.04.02 For 132 kV Switchyard & 132KV Substation at MUWPH End:
a) 132 kV bushings of Employer’s Station & Misc. Service

Transformers.
b) 132 kV bushings of Employer’s 765/132 kV IBTs.
c) 132 kV bushings of Makeup Water PH Transformers.
d) 132 kV Employer's Cable sealing ends
3.04.03 Other Terminations:
a) LT terminals of owner supplied Switchyard Service Transformers
b) Terminals of owner supplied LT Switchgear boards.
c) Terminals of owner supplied Lighting Transformers/Batteries/Battery

Chargers etc.
3.05.00 Exclusions

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
The following are excluded from the scope of Contractor under this contract:
a) Supply, erection and commissioning of PLCC equipment, HF cable and

telemetry equipment for 765kV lines.
b) Supply, erection and commissioning of Generator transformers, Bus

Reactors, IBT, Station Transformers, Misc. Service Transformer, Makeup
Water HT Transformers & Switchyard Service Transformers.
c) Fire protection for Bus Reactors, Transformers and Switchyard Control

room building.
d) HVAC and ventilation system for Switchyard Control room building.
e) L T Switchgear(ACDB/DCDB/Lighting Boards)
f) 220 V and 48 V DC distribution board, Battery and Battery Chargers.
3.06.00 Inputs by Employer

a) Legally cleared and generally levelled land with approach road.
b) The Construction power supply (415 V, 3phase, AC Supply) will be made

available at one point.
3.07.00 Arrangement by the Contractor
Contractor shall make his own necessary arrangements for the following and for
those not listed anywhere else:
a) Extension of construction power supply at all work areas

b) Construction, Service and potable water
c) Construction office and store (open & covered)
d) Construction workshop and material/field testing laboratory
e) Boarding & lodging arrangement for their personnel
f) Fire protection and security arrangements during construction stage
4.00.00 SPARES

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
4.01.00 All spares supplied under this contract shall be strictly interchangeable with the
parts for which they are intended for replacement. The spares shall be treated and
packed for long term storage in the climatic conditions prevailing at the site. Small
items shall be packed in sealed transparent plastic covers with desiccant bags as
necessary.
4.02.00 Each spare part shall be clearly marked and labeled on the outside of the packing
together with the description when more than one spare part is packed in single
case. A general description of the contents shall be shown on outside of the case
and detailed list enclosed. All cases, containers and other packages must be
suitably marked and numbered for the purpose of identification.
4.03.00 Commissioning spares: The Bidder shall include in his scope of supply all
commissioning spares. List of such spares along with the quantities shall be
indicated in the bid.
4.03.01 The Contractor shall supply spares which he expects to consume during installation
testing and commissioning of system. The quantity of these spares shall be decided
based on his previous experience, such that site works shall not be hampered due
to non-availability of these spares. Contractor shall submit a complete list of such
spares along with the bid, the cost of which shall be deemed to have been included
in the lump sum proposal price of the package. The unused commissioning spares
may be left at the site for use by the Owner, if so agreed at a cost to be negotiated.
4.03.02 No mandatory or recommended spares will be used during the commissioning of

the equipment/plant before take over by the Employer.
4.04.00 Mandatory spares and Maintenance Equipment
4.04.01 The mandatory spares as listed elsewhere in this chapter are those spares and
maintenance equipments which are considered essential by the Employer. The
Employer reserves the right to buy any or all of these mandatory spares and
mandatory maintenance equipments. The Bidder shall furnish the itemized and total
prices for these spares in the offer.
4.04.02 In compliance with the requirements of tender documents, the prices for mandatory
spares and maintenance equipments must be given separately, and shall be used
for bid evaluation purposes. All mandatory spares and equipments shall be
delivered at site.
4.05.00 Recommended spares
4.05.01 In addition to the mandatory spares, the Contractor shall also provide a list of
recommended spares giving unit prices and total prices for 3 years of normal
operation of equipment in the relevant schedule of the Section-VII. This list shall

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
take into consideration the specified mandatory spares and should be a separate
list. The Employer reserves the right to buy any or all the recommended spares. The
recommended spares parts shall be delivered at the site. The list of recommended
spares to be furnished by the Bidder should also contain the following:
a) Population of each item installed along with reference drawing number.

b) Service life expectancy of each item.
c) Offer validity period.
4.05.02 Price of recommended spares will not be used for evaluation of bids. The prices of
these spares will remain valid for a period of six months after the date of
placement of Notification of Award. Whenever recommended spares are the same
as mandatory spares, then the prices of the mandatory spares and such common
recommended spares shall be the same. Further, the prices of any recommended
spares, which are not common with mandatory spares listed in the volume, shall
be subject to review by the Employer and shall be finalised after mutual
discussions.
4.06.0 Tools & tackles
The Contractor shall also supply at site one set of all special tool & tackles, etc.
which are required by the Employer’s maintenance staff to maintain the works
successfully, cost of the same shall be included in bid price. The list of such tools
and tackles shall be enclosed with the offer.
5.00.00 TYPE, ROUTINE AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
5.01.00 TYPE TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR 765 kV CIRCUIT BREAKER
5.01.01 The Contractor shall carry out the type tests as listed in this specification on the
Circuit Breaker to be supplied under this contract. The Bidder shall indicate the
charges for each of these type tests separately in the relevant schedule of Section
VII (Forms & Procedures) and the same shall be considered for the evaluation of
the bids. The type test charges shall be paid only for the test(s) actually conducted
successfully under this contract and upon certification by the Employer’s engineer.
5.01.02 The type test shall be carried out in presence of Employer’s representative for which
minimum 15 days notice shall be given by contractor. The Contractor shall obtain
the Employer’s approval for the type test procedure before conducting the type test.
The type test procedure clearly specify the test set up, instruments to be used,
procedure, acceptance norms, recording of different parameters, interval of
recording, precautions to be taken etc. for the type test(s) to be carried out.
5.01.03 In case Contractor has already conducted such specified type test(s), he may
submit during detailed engineering the type test reports to the owner for waival of

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
conductance of such type test(s). These reports should be for the tests conducted
on the equipment similar to those proposed to be supplied under this contract and
test (s) should have been either conducted at an independent laboratory or should
have been witnessed by a client. The Owner reserves the right to waive conducting
of any or all the specified type test(s) under this contract. In case type tests are
waived, the type test charges shall not be payable to the Contractor.
5.01.04 All acceptance and routine tests as per the specification and relevant standards
shall be carried out. Charges for these shall be deemed to be included in the
equipment price.
5.01.05 The type test reports once approved for any projects shall be treated as reference.
For subsequent projects of NTPC, an endorsement sheet will be furnished by the
manufacturer confirming similarity and “No design Change”. Minor changes if any
shall be highlighted on the endorsement sheet.
5.02.00 TYPE TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENTS OTHER THAN 765 kV

CIRCUIT BREAKER
5.02.01 All equipments to be supplied shall be of type tested design. During detail
engineering, the Contractor shall submit for Owner’s approval the reports of all the
type tests as listed in this specification and carried out within last ten years (other
than that of transmission line towers for which the type tests reports conducted prior
to ten years shall also be accepted) from the date of techno-commercial bid
opening. These reports should be for the test conducted on the equipment similar to
those proposed to be supplied under this contract and the test(s) should have been
either conducted at an independent laboratory or should have been witnessed by a
Client.
5.02.02 However, if Contractor is not able to submit report of the type test(s) conducted
within last ten years from the date of bid opening, or in the case of type test
report(s) are not found to be meeting the specification requirements, the Contractor
shall conduct all such tests under this contract at no additional cost to the Owner
either at third party lab or in presence of client/ owners representative and submit
the reports for approval.
5.02.03 All acceptance and routine tests as per the specification and relevant standards
shall be carried out. Charges for these shall be deemed to be included in the
equipment price.
5.02.04 The type test reports once approved for any projects shall be treated as reference.
For subsequent projects of NTPC, an endorsement sheet will be furnished by the
manufacturer confirming similarity and “No design Change”. Minor changes if any
shall be highlighted on the endorsement sheet.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
6.00.00 REQUIREMENTS IN RESPECT OF SUPPLY ITEMS

6.01.00 All the major equipments to be supplied for the project shall meet the following
requirements:
(A) 765 kV EQUIPMENTS
I. 765 kV CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(a) 765kV Circuit Breakers being offered should be from Manufacturer who have
manufactured and supplied at least five(5) nos. of three phase Circuit Breakers
suitable for Air Insulated Substation/ Switchyard of 715 kV or above class which
should have been in successful operation for minimum two(2) years prior to the
date of Techno-Commercial bid opening.
OR
(b) Indian Manufacturers, who have manufactured and supplied at least ten (10)
nos. of three phase Circuit Breakers suitable for Air Insulated Substation/Switchyard
of 400kV or above class, which should have been in successful operation for
minimum two (2) years prior to the date of Techno-Commercial bid opening and
have manufactured and supplied 715kV or above class Circuit Breakers prior to the
date of Techno-Commercial bid opening, can also supply 765kV Circuit Breakers
provided their Collaborator meet the requirement stipulated under clause I (a)
above. The Collaborator will be responsible for satisfactory performance of the
offered equipment manufactured by Indian Manufacturer. In such a case the Bidder
shall arrange a Deed of Joint Undertaking to this effect jointly executed by the
Bidder, Indian Manufacturer and its Collaborator prior to placement of order for the
said equipment. In this case Collaborator of Indian Manufacturer will be required to
furnish an on demand Bank Guarantee for 0.5 % of the contract price.
I. 765 kV INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS (Current Transformer /Capacitor

Voltage Transformer as applicable)
(a) 765 kV Instrument Transformers being offered should be from Manufacturer who
have manufactured and supplied at least fifteen (15) nos. of single phase Instrument
Transformers suitable for Air Insulated Substation/ Switchyard of 715 kV or above
class which should have been in successful operation for minimum two (2) years
prior to the date of Techno-Commercial bid opening.
OR
(b) Indian Manufacturers, who have manufactured and supplied at least thirty (30)
nos. of single phase Instrument Transformers suitable for Air Insulated
Substation/Switchyard of 400kV or above class, which should have been in
successful operation for minimum two (2) years prior to the date of Techno-
Commercial bid opening and have manufactured and supplied 715kV or above
class Instrument Transformers prior to the date of Techno-Commercial bid opening,

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
can also supply 765kV Instrument Transformers provided their

Collaborator meet the requirement stipulated under clause II (a) above. The
Collaborator will be responsible for satisfactory performance of the offered
equipment manufactured by Indian Manufacturer. In such a case the Bidder shall
arrange a Deed of Joint Undertaking to this effect jointly executed by the Bidder,
Indian Manufacturer and its Collaborator prior to placement of order for the said
equipment. In this case Collaborator of Indian Manufacturer will be required to
furnish an on demand Bank Guarantee for 0.5 % of the contract price for Current
Transformer and 0.1 % of the contract price for Capacitor Voltage Transformer as
applicable.
II. 765 kV DISCONNECTORS
(a) 765kV Disconnectors being offered should be from Manufacturer who have
manufactured and supplied at least five (5) nos. of three phase Disconnectors
suitable for Air Insulated Substation/ Switchyard of 715kV or above class which
should have been in successful operation for minimum two (2) years prior to the
OR
(b) Indian Manufacturers, who have manufactured and supplied at least five (5) nos.
of three phase Disconnectors suitable for Air Insulated Substation/Switchyard of
400kV or above class, which should have been in successful operation for minimum
two (2) years prior to the date of Techno-Commercial bid opening and have
manufactured and supplied 715kV or above class Disconnectors prior to the date of
Techno-Commercial bid opening, can also supply 765kV class Disconnectors
provided their Collaborator meet the requirement stipulated under clause III (a)
above. The Collaborator will be responsible for satisfactory performance of the
offered equipment manufactured by Indian Manufacturer. In such a case the Bidder
shall arrange a Deed of Joint Undertaking to this effect jointly executed by the
Bidder, Indian Manufacturer and its Collaborator prior to placement of order for the
said equipment. In this case Collaborator of Indian Manufacturer will be required to
furnish an on demand Bank Guarantee for 0.5% of the contract price.
III. 765 kV SURGE ARRESTORS
(a) 765kV Surge Arrestors being offered should be from Manufacturer who have
manufactured and supplied at least fifteen (15) nos. of single phase Surge Arrestors
OR
(b) Indian Manufacturers, who have manufactured and supplied at least fifteen(15)
nos. of single phase Surge Arrestors suitable for Air Insulated
Substation/Switchyard of 400kV or above class, which should have been in
successful operation for minimum two (2) years prior to the date of Techno-

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
Commercial bid opening and have manufactured and supplied 715kV or above
class Surge Arrestors prior to the date of Techno-Commercial bid opening, can also
supply 765kV class Surge Arrestors provided their Collaborator meet the
requirement stipulated under clause IV (a) above. The Collaborator will be
responsible for satisfactory performance of the offered equipment manufactured by
Indian Manufacturer. In such a case the Bidder shall arrange a Deed of Joint
Undertaking to this effect jointly executed by the Bidder, Indian Manufacturer and its
Collaborator prior to placement of order for the said equipment. In this case
Collaborator of Indian Manufacturer will be required to furnish an on demand Bank
Guarantee for 0.1 % of the contract price.
(B) 132 kV EQUIPMENTS
I. 132 kV CIRCUIT BREAKERS
132kV Circuit Breakers being offered should be from Manufacturer who have
manufactured and supplied at least five(5) nos. of three phase circuit breakers
suitable for Air Insulated Substation/ Switchyard of 132 kV or above class which
should have been in successful operation for minimum two(2) years prior to the
II. 132 kV INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS (Current Transformer /Capacitor

Voltage Transformer as applicable)
132 kV Instrument Transformers being offered should be from Manufacturer who

have manufactured and supplied at least fifteen (15) nos. of single phase Instrument
Transformers suitable for Air Insulated Substation/ Switchyard of 132 kV or above
class which should have been in successful operation for minimum two (2) years
prior to the date of Techno-Commercial bid opening.
III. 132 kV DISCONNECTORS
132kV Disconnectors being offered should be from Manufacturer who have

manufactured and supplied at least five (5) nos. of three phase Disconnectors
suitable for Air Insulated Substation/Switchyard of 132kV or above class which
IV. 132 kV SURGE ARRESTORS
132kV Surge Arrestors being offered should be from Manufacturer who have
manufactured and supplied at least fifteen (15) nos. of single phase Surge Arrestors

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
(C) SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM & PROTECTIVE RELAYS
The Substation Automation System offered with distributed architecture should have
been in successful operation in at least one (1) Substation/Switchyard of not less
than 220 kV class for minimum one(1) year prior to the date of techno-commercial
bid opening. The Generator Protection Relays, the Bay Protection Units including
the Bus bar protection and the Energy Metering System offered should be from
Manufacturer(s) who have manufactured and supplied the offered type of devices
for respective equipment, which should have been in successful operation in a 100
MW or above unit/ 220 kV class or above Substation/Switchyard for minimum one
(1) year prior to the date of Techno-Commercial bid opening.
(D) 132 kV TRANSMISSION LINE TOWER
The Bidder/Sub-Vendor should have fabricated, erected and commissioned

Transmission line towers of 132 kV or above voltage class.
6. 02.00 The Bidder shall clearly and unambiguously identify and name the proposed Sub-
Vendors for various equipments and enclose detailed documents for each proposed
sub-vendor with the bid to establish that such sub-vendors meet the above stipulated
requirements. Any vague statements like ‘… make or equivalent’ shall not be
accepted.
6.03.00 Any Bidder who fails to comply with the above clause 6.01.00 to 6.02.00 is liable to
be disqualified and his bid is liable to be rejected.
7.00.00 Bidder shall furnish undertaking from respective equipment manufacturer(s) for the
equipments indicated above that erection, testing and commissioning shall be
carried out under their supervision.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
ANNEXURE-I
PROJECT SYNOPSIS
1.00.00 BACKGROUND
Details of proposed Stage / Units
Project name : DARLIPALLI STPP-I

No. of Units x capacity: 2 x 800 MW
Project setting up by : NTPC
2.00.00 LOCATION AND APPROACH
Project Location : (i.) Place : Darlipalli

: (ii) District : Brajarajnagar
: (iii.) State : Odisha
Nearest Railway station : Darlipalli

Distance of project location from : 20 kms (approx.)
the Railway station
Nearest Major Town : Ranchi
Distance of the town from the : 140 km

Project site
Nearest Commercial Airport : Ranchi

Distance of airport from the project
site : 220 kms
Nearest Highway : National Highway-200

Any other information: : Further to the informations given in this
sub-section , Bidders are advised to
visit the project site and collect data on
local site conditions like metrological
data etc.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
APPENDIX-I
CRITERIA FOR WIND RESISTANT DESIGN OF STRUCTURES AND

EQUIPMENT
All structures shall be designed for wind forces in accordance with I

S:875 (Part-3) and as specified in this document. See Annexure – B for site specific
information.
Along wind forces shall generally be computed by the Peak (i.e. 3 second gust)
Wind Speed method as defined in the standard.
Along wind forces on slender and wind sensitive structures and structural elements
shall also be computed, for dynamic effects, using the Gust Factor or Gust
Effectiveness Factor Method as defined in the standard. The structures shall be
designed for the higher of the forces obtained from Gust Factor method and the
Peak Wind Speed method.
Analysis for dynamic effects of wind must be undertaken for any structure which
has a height to minimum lateral dimension ratio greater than “5” and/or if the
fundamental frequency of the structure is less than 1 Hz.
Susceptibility of structures to across-wind forces, galloping, flutter, ovalling etc.

should be examined and designed/detailed accordingly following the
recommendations of IS:875(Part-3) and other relevant Indian standards.
It should be estimated if size and relative position of other structures are likely to
enhance the wind loading on the structure under consideration. Enhancement
factor, if necessary, shall suitably be estimated and applied to the wind loading to
account for the interference effects.
Damping in Structures
The damping factor (as a percentage of critical damping) to be adopted shall not be
more than as indicated below for:
a) Welded steel structures : 1.0%

b) Bolted steel structures : 2.0%
c) Reinforced concrete structures : 1.6%
d) Steel stacks : As per IS:6533 & CICIND
Model Code whichever is more critical.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
ANNEXURE-A
SITE SPECIFIC DESIGN PARAMETERS
The various design parameters, as defined in IS: 875 (Part-3), to be adopted for the
project site shall be as follows:
a) The basic wind speed “Vb” at ten metres above the mean ground level :
39 metres/second
b) The risk coefficient “K1” : 1.06
c) Category of terrain : Category-2
Note: Notwithstanding the values of the above mentioned parameters, the design
wind pressure so computed at any point shall not be taken less than 1500 N/Sq.
metre for all classes of structures, i.e. A, B & C, as defined in IS: 875 (Part-3).

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
APPENDIX-II
CRITERIA FOR EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DESIGN OF STRUCTURES AND

EQUIPMENT
All structures and equipment shall be designed for seismic forces adopting the site
specific seismic information provided in this document and using the other
provisions in accordance with IS:1893 (Part 1):2002 and IS:1893 (Part 4):2005.
Pending finalisation of Parts 2, 3 and 5 of IS:1893, provisions of part 1 shall be
read along with the relevant clauses of IS:1893:1984, for structures other than the
buildings and industrial structures including stack-like structures.
A site specific seismic study has been conducted for the project site. The peak
ground horizontal acceleration for the project site, the site specific acceleration
spectral coefficients (in units of gravity acceleration ‘g’) in the horizontal direction
for the various damping values and the multiplying factor (to be used over the
spectral coefficients) for evaluating the design acceleration spectra are as given at
Annexure-I.
Vertical acceleration spectral values shall be taken as 2/3rd of the corresponding

horizontal values.
The site specific design acceleration spectra shall be used in place of the response
acceleration spectra, given at figure-2 in IS:1893 (Part 1) and Annex B of IS:1893
(Part 4). The site specific acceleration spectra along with multiplying factors
specified in Annexure-I includes the effect of the seismic environment of the site,
the importance factor related to the structures and the response reduction factor.
Hence, the design spectra do not require any further consideration of the zone
factor (Z), the importance factor (I) and response reduction factor (R) as used in
the IS:1893 (Part 1 and Part 4).
Damping in Structures
The damping factor (as a percentage of critical damping) to be adopted shall not be
more than as indicated below for:
a) Steel structures : 2%
b) Reinforced Concrete structures : 5%
c) Reinforced Concrete Stacks : 3%
d) Steel stacks : 2%

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
Method of Analysis
Since most structures in a power plant are irregular in shape and have irregular
distribution of mass and stiffness, dynamic analysis for obtaining the design
seismic forces shall be carried out using the response spectrum method. The
number of vibration modes used in the analysis should be such that the sum total
of modal masses of all modes considered is at least 90 percent of the total seismic
mass and shall also meet requirements of IS:1893 (Part 1). Modal combination of
the peak response quantities shall be performed as per Complete Quadratic
Combination (CQC) method or by an acceptable alternative as per IS:1893 (Part
1).
In general, seismic analysis shall be performed for the three orthogonal (two
principal horizontal and one vertical) components of earthquake motion. The
seismic response from the three components shall be combined as specified in
IS:1893 (Part 1).
For buildings, if the design base shear (VB) obtained from modal combination is
less than the base shear (VB) computed using the approximate fundamental
period (Ta) given in IS:1893:Part 1 and using site specific acceleration spectra with
appropriate multiplying factor, the response quantities (e.g. member forces,
displacements, storey forces, storey shears and base reactions) shall be enhanced
in the ratio of VB/ VB. However, no reduction is permitted if VB is less than VB.
For regular buildings less than 12m in height, design seismic base shear and its
distribution to different floor levels along the height of the building may be carried
out as specified under clause 7.5, 7.6 & 7.7 of IS:1893 (Part 1) and using site
specific design acceleration spectra. The design horizontal acceleration spectrum
value (Ah) shall be computed for the fundamental natural period as per clause 7.6
of IS:1893 (Part 1) using site specific spectral acceleration coefficients with
appropriate multiplying factor given in Annexure-I. Further, the spectral
acceleration coefficient shall get restricted to the peak spectral value if the
fundamental natural period of the building falls to the left of the peak in the spectral
acceleration curve.
Design/Detailing for Ductility for Structures
The site specific design acceleration spectra is a reduced spectra and has an in-
built allowance for ductility. Structures shall be engineered and detailed in
accordance with relevant Indian/International standards to achieve ductility.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
ANNEXURE – B
SITE SPECIFIC SEISMIC PARAMETERS FOR DESIGN OF STRUCTURES

AND EQUIPMENT
The various site specific seismic parameters for the project site shall be as
follows:
1) Peak ground horizontal acceleration (MCE) : 0.10g
2) Multiplying factor to be applied to the site specific

horizontal acceleration spectral coefficients (in units of
gravity acceleration ‘g’) to obtain the design acceleration
spectra
a) for ordinary moment resisting steel frames designed and

detailed as per IS:800 : 0.029
b) for braced steel frames designed and detailed as per : 0.022

IS:800
c) For special moment resisting RC frames designed and

detailed as per IS:456 and IS:13920 : 0.018
d) for steel chimney : 0.044
e) for design of structures not covered under 2 (a) to 2 (d)

above and under 3 below : 0.029
3) Multiplying factor to be applied to the site specific

horizontal acceleration spectral coefficients (in units of
gravity acceleration ‘g’) for design of equipment and
structures where inelastic action is not relevant or not : 0.058
permitted
Note: g = Acceleration due to gravity
The horizontal seismic acceleration spectral coefficients are furnished in

subsequent pages.

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
ANNEXURE – B
HORIZONTAL SEISMIC ACCELERATION SPECTRAL COEFFICIENTS

(In units of ‘g’)
Damping Factor (as a percentage of critical

Time Period
damping)
(Sec) 2% 3% 5%
0.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
0.030 1.000 1.000 1.000
0.031 1.031 1.026 1.020
0.050 1.618 1.502 1.371
0.060 1.921 1.736 1.534
0.070 2.221 1.963 1.687
0.080 2.519 2.183 1.832
0.086 2.697 2.312 1.915
0.088 2.756 2.355 1.943
0.090 2.815 2.398 1.970
0.095 2.962 2.503 2.036
0.098 3.050 2.566 2.076
0.100 3.109 2.607 2.102
0.103 3.196 2.669 2.141
0.108 3.342 2.772 2.204
0.110 3.401 2.813 2.229
0.112 3.459 2.854 2.254
0.115 3.546 2.914 2.291
0.118 3.633 2.975 2.328
0.121 3.720 3.035 2.364
0.122 3.749 3.055 2.376
0.125 3.836 3.114 2.412
0.127 3.893 3.154 2.436
0.129 3.951 3.193 2.460
0.130 3.980 3.213 2.471
0.132 3.980 3.252 2.495
0.134 3.980 3.291 2.518
0.140 3.980 3.408 2.587
0.141 3.980 3.410 2.598

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
ANNEXURE – B


Time Period
damping)
(Sec) 2% 3% 5%
0.150 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.200 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.250 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.300 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.350 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.400 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.431 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.442 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.450 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.474 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.495 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.500 3.980 3.410 2.700
0.517 3.849 3.298 2.611
0.525 3.790 3.248 2.571
0.542 3.672 3.146 2.491
0.550 3.618 3.100 2.455
0.562 3.541 3.034 2.402
0.576 3.455 2.960 2.344
0.588 3.384 2.900 2.296
0.597 3.333 2.856 2.261
0.603 3.300 2.828 2.239
0.609 3.268 2.800 2.217
0.615 3.236 2.772 2.195
0.625 3.184 2.728 2.160
0.640 3.109 2.664 2.109
0.658 3.024 2.591 2.052
0.667 2.984 2.556 2.024
0.690 2.884 2.471 1.957
0.700 2.843 2.436 1.929
0.750 2.653 2.273 1.800

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
ANNEXURE – B


Time Period
damping)
(Sec) 2% 3% 5%
0.755 2.636 2.258 1.788
0.800 2.488 2.131 1.688
0.850 2.341 2.006 1.588
0.900 2.211 1.894 1.500
0.950 2.095 1.795 1.421
1.000 1.990 1.705 1.350
1.050 1.895 1.624 1.286
1.100 1.809 1.550 1.227
1.150 1.730 1.483 1.174
1.200 1.658 1.421 1.125
1.250 1.592 1.364 1.080
1.300 1.531 1.312 1.038
1.350 1.474 1.263 1.000
1.400 1.421 1.218 0.964
1.450 1.372 1.176 0.931
1.500 1.327 1.137 0.900
1.550 1.284 1.100 0.871
1.600 1.244 1.066 0.844
1.650 1.206 1.033 0.818
1.700 1.171 1.003 0.794
1.750 1.137 0.974 0.771
1.800 1.106 0.947 0.750
1.850 1.076 0.922 0.730
1.900 1.047 0.897 0.711
1.950 1.021 0.874 0.692
2.000 0.995 0.853 0.675
2.050 0.971 0.832 0.659
2.100 0.948 0.812 0.643
2.150 0.926 0.793 0.628
2.200 0.905 0.775 0.614

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
ANNEXURE – B


Time Period
damping)
(Sec) 2% 3% 5%
2.250 0.884 0.758 0.600
2.300 0.865 0.741 0.587
2.350 0.847 0.726 0.574
2.400 0.829 0.710 0.563
2.450 0.812 0.696 0.551
2.500 0.796 0.682 0.540
2.550 0.780 0.669 0.529
2.600 0.765 0.656 0.519
2.650 0.751 0.643 0.509
2.700 0.737 0.631 0.500
2.750 0.724 0.620 0.491
2.800 0.711 0.609 0.482
2.850 0.698 0.598 0.474
2.900 0.686 0.588 0.466
2.950 0.675 0.578 0.458
3.000 0.663 0.568 0.450
3.050 0.652 0.559 0.443
3.100 0.642 0.550 0.435
3.150 0.632 0.541 0.429
3.200 0.622 0.533 0.422
3.250 0.612 0.525 0.415
3.300 0.603 0.517 0.409
3.350 0.594 0.509 0.403
3.400 0.585 0.501 0.397
3.450 0.577 0.494 0.391
3.500 0.569 0.487 0.386
3.550 0.561 0.480 0.380
3.600 0.553 0.474 0.375
3.650 0.545 0.467 0.370
3.700 0.538 0.461 0.365

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
ANNEXURE – B


Time Period
damping)
(Sec) 2% 3% 5%
3.750 0.531 0.455 0.360
3.800 0.524 0.449 0.355
3.850 0.517 0.443 0.351
3.900 0.510 0.437 0.346
3.950 0.504 0.432 0.342
4.000 0.498 0.426 0.338

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
BILL OF QUANTITY
PART-I
SUB SECTION- BOQ
I. Bill of Quantities for Mandatory Spares
II. Bill of Quantities for Mandatory Maintenance Equipments

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
I. BILL OF QUANTITY FOR MANDATORY SPARES

A. MANDATORY SPARES FOR 765kV and 132kV EQUIPMENTS
Sl. No. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
(1) (2) (3)

I CIRCUIT BREAKERS 765kV 132kV
1 Relays, power contactors, switch-fuses for 1 set 1 set
electrical control circuit (consisting of one no.
each of all types and ratings)
2 Set of gaskets, rings & seals 2 sets 1 set
3 Molecular filter for Circuit breaker 1 set 1 set
4 Tripping and closing coil (each type) 6 nos. 6 nos.
5 Density monitoring system for Circuit breaker 1 set 1 set
6 Set of spares for pneumatic/ Spring/ 2 sets 1 set
hydraulic operated mechanism (as
applicable) as per details below:
Spare for pneumatic operated mechanism
a. Motor for compressor- One no.
b. Pressure switch and valve- One no. of
each type
Spare for spring operated mechanism

a. Motor with gears - One no.
b. Limit switch - One no. of each type
Spare for hydraulic operated mechanism

a. Motor with gears- One no.
b. Limit switch - One no. of each type
7 Fixed and moving arcing contact 2 sets 2 sets
8 Terminal connector (of each type) 3 nos. 1 no.
9 SF6 Gas Filling valve 1 No. of 1 No. of
each type each type
10 One complete Pole including operating 2 nos.- 3150 (i) 1 no.-
mechanism without controlled switching and A 2000 A
without closing resistor and excluding support (ii) 1 no.-
structure, common control cubicle and 1250 A
terminal connectors.
ISOLATORS
II 765kV 132kV
1. One complete pole of Isolator with 1E/S 2 nos. (i) 1 no.-
along with insulators & operating mechanism 3150A 2000 A

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
etc. without support structure and terminal (ii) 1 no.-

connectors 1250 A
2. Copper contact fingers for female contacts 6 nos. of 6 nos. of
each type each type
3. Relay, power contactors, switch fuses for 1 set 1 set
electrical control circuit (one no. of each type
and rating)
4. Limit switch & aux. switch 6 nos. 6 nos.
5. Terminal connectors 3 no. of 3 no of each

each type type
6. Rotary Bearing for Isolator 3Nos. of 3Nos. of
each type each type
III CURRENT TRANSFORMER complete in all 2 nos. of (i) 1 no. of
respects including terminal connectors etc. 3000A 2000A (120
(120 % % extended
extended rating)
rating) (ii) 1 no. of
1200A(120
% extended
rating)
IV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (i)1 no 1 no

complete in all respects (4400pF) (8800pF)
including terminal (ii)1 no
connectors etc. (8800pF)
V SURGE ARRESTER complete in all respects 3 nos. 3 nos.

with surge counter, terminal connector etc.
Notes: 1.Set means for complete

replacement of one circuit
breaker and isolator. (three phase)
2. For CT, CVT and Surge Arrestor
number(no.) Means for complete
replacement of one pole/phaseof
the
equipment
VI String insulator & hardware, Clamp 10% of total 10% of total
connectors, spacers and Corona bells quantity of quantity of
each type each type
and rating and rating

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
B. MANDATORY SPARES FOR 765&132 kV SUBSTATION AUTOMATION

SYSTEM INCLUDING GENERATOR RELAY PANELS
SL.
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
NO.
1. Bay Control unit (complete with all components) 2 Nos.
Numerical Relays comprising various bay
2. protection units, Bus Bar protection relays and 1 No. of each type
Islanding relays
3. Numerical Relays comprising GRP 1 No. of each type
PMU (complete with all necessary accessories,
4. 1 Set
cables etc. as per specification)
Cards/modules of Generator Disturbance
5. 1 No. of each type
Recorder, Line DR ( if stand-alone)
6. Energy Meter 1 no. of each type

Operator work station (OWS) along with
7. 1 No.
software, monitor, mouse, keyboard ,printer etc.
Complete Network Controller / Server along with
8. 1 No.
software
Complete Programming station along with
9. 1 No.
software, monitor etc.
10. LAN switches (If included in main package) 1 No. of each type
11. Media cleaning solution 2 bottles
100% of each type
12. Fuses
and rating
5 nos. of each type,
13. Terminal Blocks make, model and
rating
Interface cables containing standard length of
14. each type of cable and its connector for each 2 Sets
type of peripheral
50% of each type,
15. MCBs make and model
used in the system
10% of each type of
16. Relays other than numerical relays total population (min
1 no.)

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
17. Gateways 1 no. of each type
18. Modem (if applicable) 1 no. of each type
19. LIU of OFC including necessary connectors 1 no. of each type
20. Transducers 1 no. of each type
21. Auxiliary CT/PT 1 no. of each type
50% of Total Quantity

22. Lamps used in LVS (rounded to next
integer)
II. BILL OF QUANTITY FOR MANDATORY MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENTS
A. FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER

Sl.
No.
1. SF6 gas filling and evacuating plant (portable) 1 No.
2. SF6 Gas recycling and purifying plant (300 ltrs) 1 No.
3. SF6 Gas leak detector 2 Nos.
4. Operation Analyser with DCRM kit 1 No.
B. FOR SURGE ARRESTER

Sl.
No.
Leakage Current Analyser (for Gapless Surge
1. 1 No.
Arrester)
Self powered hydraulic aerial working platform 1 No.
with articulated and fly boom for General purpose
C.
maintenance in 765 kV &132 kV switchyard.
(Suitable for 16 m working height)

BID DOC NO.
CS-9549-572-2
PART-II
ELECTRICAL
PART-II
CHAPTER -E0
SWITCHYARD ELECTRICAL
GENERAL
PART-II
CHAPTER -E0: SWITCHYARD ELECTRICAL GENERAL

Clause no. Description
Page no.
1.00.00 Scope and General Information E0-1
2.00.00 Clearances E0-5
3.00.00 Services to be performed by the Equipment E0-6

being supplied
4.00.00 Insulation Co-ordination and Selection of Surge Arrester

for 765 kV Switchyard E0-6
5.00.00 System parameters E0-7
6.00.00 Corona and RIV Tests and Seismic Withstand test E0-7
Annexure-A: Corona and RIV Test E0-8
Annexure-B: Seismic Withstand Test E0-10

CHAPTER - E0: SWITCHYARD ELECTRICAL GENERAL
1.00.0 SCOPE, GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESIGN CRITERIA
1.01.00 In addition to the detailed scope and other requirements specified in Part-I, the
intent of the specifications for various electrical equipments shall also cover the
following scope:
1.01.01 Contractor shall be responsible for design and engineering of overall

system/station, and all elements, systems, sub-systems, facilities, equipments,
material, etc.. The Contractor shall submit design calculations, drawings, codes,
codes of practices, construction drawings, etc. for Employer’s approval.
1.01.02 The basic design shall include, but not limited to, the following:
a) Development of general arrangement.

b) Development of detailed layout (plan & section/elevation) drawings.
c) Development of single line diagram with parameters of equipment and details of
protection.
d) Protection and control philosophy and selection of protection, control and
annunciation schemes.
e) Development of interlocking schemes.
f) Development of switchyard structure loading details.
g) Development of earthing system.
h) Development of direct stroke lightning protection system.
i) Insulation coordination of the EHV equipment.
j) Calculation of static and dynamic force load, and selection of spacer spans and
equipment terminal loading.
k) Development of clearance diagrams.
l) Lighting design, Lux level calculation and conduit wiring diagram.
m) Development of power & control cable laying and termination schedules.
n) Relay setting calculations.
o) Development of erection key diagram with bill of material.
p) Foundation design and construction drawings.
q) Development of cable trench layout and sections and construction drawings.
r) Calculation of electric and magnetic field strength, corona extinction voltage for
conductor and bus/equipment height selection. Wherever values are above the
desired limit contractor has to take suitable measures to bring it to allowable limit.
s) Effect of nearby conductors due to electric field adjoining building and providing
shielding
1.01.03 Contractor shall furnish detailed drawings for the various equipments covered in
their scope for Employer’s approval. The equipment shall conform to type tests as
per specification and applicable standards. Equipments shall be type tested for
tests as per specification and relevant standards.

(2X800MW) Bid DOC. NO: TECHNICAL PART-II Page
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE CS-9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI E0- 1 of 10
1.01.04 Contractor shall furnish design calculations and construction drawings for all civil
works showing details of pockets to be left in foundations and embedments to be
provided in cable trenches.
1.01.05 Contractor shall furnish the schematics, general arrangement drawings, cable
schedules, interconnection schedules, panel wiring diagrams, etc. for various
control and relay panels for Employer’s approval. Contractor shall also furnish the
recommended relay settings to be adopted.
1.01.06 The Contractor shall note that the list of standards specified elsewhere in this
specification is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be
considered in conjunction with specification, IS & IEC. In case governing
standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the salient points shall be
clearly brought out along with English language version of the same.
1.01.07 Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the
requirements of Indian Electricity Rules and other statutory codes. All
responsibilities regarding co-ordination with Electrical Inspection Agencies and
obtaining clearance certificate from them rests with the Contractor.
1.01.08 For 765kV Switchyard, the strung bus shall be Quad AAC Bull and for 132kV
Switchyard, the strung bus shall be of Twin AAC Bull conductor. The equipment
inter connections shall be through min. 4.5” IPS Al. tube/ Quad AAC Bull for 765kV
Switchyard and 3’’ IPS Al. tube/min. single AAC Bull conductor for 132KV
Switchyard & Substation respectively. The spacing for quadruple AAC Bull
conductor shall be min. 450 mm for 765kV and spacing for twin AAC bull
conductor shall be min. 250 mm for 132KV level respectively. All the ‘T’ off
connections shall be provided with a by pass utilizing two PG clamps for each ‘T’
off. As far as possible the conductor shall pass without cut/joints unless otherwise
necessary for planned shutdown/ maintenance.
1.01.09 All equipment shall be supplied with suitable terminal connectors. The terminal
connector shall be well coordinated with the type/size of conductor and equipment
to be connected. The conductor terminations for equipment shall be either rigid or
expansion type suitable for tube or horizontal or vertical take off suitable for
quad/twin/single AAC bull conductor. The exact requirement to terminal clamps
would be finalised by the Contractor in consultation with Employer based on layout
requirement. The terminal pads shall preferably be capable of taking the required
conductor span under normal, short circuit and meteorological conditions, without
effecting the performance of the equipment.
1.01.10 The rigid busbars for equipment inter connections shall have rigid connections at
one end and expansion/flexible at other end. The tubular Al .connections shall
have not more than one joint per span. Since no wastages are permissible, the
bidder shall workout the cut lengths of Aluminium tube based on the finalised

layout & dispatch the same to site without requiring Owner’s approval. Corona Bell
shall be provided at the bare end of the rigid Aluminium tubular busbars.
1.01.11 The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of the
bushing, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of the
equipment structure, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be 2550 mm.
The various minimum heights of the switchyard shall be as given below from plinth
level:
Voltage level Eqpt./1st level Busbar/2nd level 3rd level

765 kV(One and 14000mm 27000mm 39000mm
half breaker
scheme)
132kV(Double 4600mm 8500mm 12200mm
bus scheme)
The peak of towers for 765kV & 132kV shall be 8000mm & 5200mm respectively.
1.01.12 The minimum Bay width for 765kV switchyard shall be 54m and for 132KV
Switchyard bay width shall be 12m. The width of gantries shall be 30m and 12m for
765KV and 132KV Switchyard respectively.
1.01.13 All gantries and towers (including intermediate/required for turning etc.) as required
from 'A' row of power plant ( where Generator & Station transformers are located)
and switchyard take off gantry/within plant boundary are to be provided by the
Contractor. The anchoring point at 'A' row shall be provided by the Owner at
approximately 27m for conductor and 35 m for earthwire. The minimum height of
intermediate gantry tower for 765kV wherever required shall be 29 m and the
peak(s) shall be of 8.0 m.
1.01.14 Short circuit force calculation shall be submitted by the bidder as per relevant IEC
for flexible bus and rigid bus. This short circuit force shall be considered for
designing of Tower, Girder and equipment structure and their foundation.
1.01.15 All equipment shall be suitable for hot line washing.
1.01.16 The Contractor shall cooperate in all respects and exchange the necessary
technical data/ drawings with other agencies and Employer’s other Contractors
under intimation to Employer to ensure proper coordination and completion of work
in time.
1.01.17 The sag tension, conductor spacing, spacers location, conductor swing and
clearances shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60865 to achieve the
specified clearances.

1.01.19 All overhead stringing shall be carried out by minimum double tension string
insulator assembly. The earthwire for shielding purpose shall be double anchored
at the towers/other locations and shall run through without cutting wherever
feasible so as to avoid snapping. The earthwires crossing each other shall also be
bolted together for additional safety. In case of 765 kV suspension insulator, double
suspension string insulator shall be used.
1.01.20 Post insulators shall be provided at line entry and near transformers so as to avoid
mechanical forces on the LA's and Bushings etc.
1.01.21 The pit size of transformer shall be designed for minimum 1000 mm beyond the
physical dimension of the transformer.
1.01.22 Gravel filling shall be provided in the entire switchyard area inside the fence with
coordinates as marked in ‘General Layout Plan’ with broken stone filling which shall
consist of two layers. The first layer shall be 75mm thick base course of 20mm of
normal size and second layer shall be 75 mm thick surface course of 40 mm
nominal size.
1.01.23 The towers and gantries shall be suitable for a normal conductor tension of
minimum 2T/conductor in case of Twin/Single AAC Bull and 1.5T/conductor in case
of quad AAC Bull conductor. The foundations and structures etc shall be designed
accordingly.
1.01.24 In 765 KV Switchyard, for one dia. ie two feeders and one tie, only two bay
marshalling boxes (BMK) are to be provided. One (1) Bay Marshalling Box (BMK)
per feeder for 132kV switchyard shall be provided. The duplicated power supplies
for two (2) BMKs shall be looped.
1.01.25 The switchyard shall be provided with peripheral roads and roads for approach for
all major equipments for maintenance purpose.
1.01.26 The location of Switchyard control room building is indicated in the tender drawings
and the work stations shall be located in the switchyard control room building.
1.01.27 Necessary fire wall shall be provided between single phase of reactors and
transformers. The fire wall height shall be minimum 600 mm above transformer
bushing. Two(2) nos. of suitable industrial socket and suitable power cable for oil
filtration equipment for ICT's & Bus Reactor shall be provided.
1.01.27 For calculating nos. of AC bay Kiosk, refer clause no. 9.00.00 (vi), Chapter- E10.
These AC Kiosk shall be located suitably in the switchyard. The kiosk shall be
provided with fire alarm system with at least two detectors and it shall be wired to
SAS.

Two nos. of suitable separate power supply from LT switchgear shall be provided to
each AC kiosk to cater power supply to panels and AC separately. All internal
power supply distribution shall be provided accordingly.
1.01.28 The cable trenches from control room to switchyard shall be designed to cater for
present and future bays as indicated in SLD. The Contractor shall construct the
common sections suitably of appropriate sizes upto common points so that the
same can be extended in future.
1..01.29 For earthing 50x6 mm GS flat shall be used in all cabinets, MOM boxes, panels and
balance all other earthing such as all equipments, towers cable trenches etc shall
be through 75x12mm GS Flat. The Switchyard earthing criteria is given in
Annexure-I of Chapter E13 -Installation.
1.01.30 Voltage drop for sizing of power cables shall not be more than 6%.
1.01.31 The illumination level shall be minimum 20 lux in general and minimum 50 lux on
equipment boxes.
1.01.32 The connectors and clamps shall be rated same as the connected equipments.
1.01.33 Contractor shall provide panel mounted automatic start / stop type centrifugal self
priming pump for sump pit alongwith its associated local panels to drain the water
in approximately one (1) hour. The contractor shall also provide suitable pedestal/
foundation for this pump. The pump shall be complete with all necessary fittings
such as NRV, inlet & outlet pipes of suitable length and dia.
1.01.34 For 33KV Switchyard equipment and miscellaneous items of supply (clamps,
connectors, insulator strings & hardware, power & control cables, lighting systems),
the Bidder shall supply equipment/accessories from the Manufacturer who have
designed, manufactured and type tested similar items.
1.01.35 Circuit breakers shall be supplied with necessary interpole cabling and its cost shall
be included in the cost of equipment.
1.01.36 The civil design criteria is given in Part-II, Technical specification-Civil.
1.01.37 The switchyard control philosophy and substation automation system is described
in chapter E10
2.00.00 CLEARANCES

The minimum clearances for 765kV &132kV switchyards shall be as given below:
765kV 132kV
Phase to earth clearance 4900 mm (conductor to structure) 1300mm

6400 mm (rod to structure)
Phase to phase clearance 7600mm (conductor to conductor) 1300mm

9400 mm (rod to conductor)
Section clearance 10300 mm 4000mm
The Contractor shall supply the structures suitable to meet the above clearances.
For 765KV Switchyard, Contractor shall confirm the adequacy in respect of corona
requirements. The average limit of 10kV per meter and 500 micro tesla for electric
and magnetic field respectively are to be met at a height of 1.8 meter from ground
level. The Contractor shall furnish calculations in support of same for approval of
Owner.
3.00.00 SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE EQUIPMENT BEING SUPPLIED
The 800 kV systems is being designed to limit the power frequency over voltage of
1.4 p.u.(base=462KV) and the switching surge over voltage to 1.9 p.u. (base=653).
In 765 kV system, the initial value of temporary over voltage could be 1.6 p.u. for 1-
2 cycles. All the equipment/materials covered in this specification shall perform all
its function satisfactorily without undue strain, restrike etc. under such over voltage
conditions.
4.00.00 INSULATION CO-ORDINATION AND SELECTION OF SURGE ARRESTOR FOR

765KV SWITCHYARD
4.01.0 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for complete insulation co-ordination of
switchyard. Contractor shall carry out detailed calculations to evolve the required
parameters, locations, energy capability etc. of surge arrestors such that an
adequate protective margin exits between the peak impulse voltage occurring due
to other connected sub stations. Please note that surge arrester parameters given
elsewhere are indicative, and shall be finalised after insulation coordination studies
by the Contractor.
4.02.0 The quantity of surge arresters shown in the tender drawings is minimum required.
Additional arresters, if required based on the insulation coordination study, shall be
provided by the Contractor.

4.03.0 The Contractor shall provide surge arrestors and other devices as required to
protect all the equipments from fundamental frequency, harmonics, ferro-
resonance, switching surges, and lightning impulses over voltages under steady
state, dynamic & transient conditions.
5.00.00 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
The system parameters shall be as under:

765 kV 132kV 33KV
a) Highest system voltage : 800 kV rms 145kVrms 36KV
b) Lightning Impulse voltage : 2100kVp  650kVp  170kVp
c) Switching impulse voltage : 1550kVp ----- ----
d) Power frequency withstand : 830 kV(rms) 275kV(rms) 70KV (rms)

for 1 min. (rms) :
e) Max. fault level (1 sec.) : 50 kA 31.5kA 25KA
f) Minimum creepage distance : 20000 mm 3625mm 900mm
g) Max Radio Interference : 2500micro volt 1000micro volt

level for 0.5MHz to 2.0MHz at 508KV (rms) at 92 KV
h) Corona extinction voltage : 508KV (rms min.) ----- ---
6.00.00 CORONA AND RIV TESTS AND SEISMIC WITHSTAND TEST:
Other than type tests as specified in the relevant standards and as specified
elsewhere in the specification, corona(for 765 kV only) and RIV tests shall confirm
to the requirements as per Annexure A to this chapter. The seismic withstand test
for 765kV shall conform to requirements as per Annexure B to this chapter.

Annexure – A
CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) TEST
1.0 General
Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated connectors
where applicable shall be tested for external corona both by observing the voltage
level for the extinction of visible corona under falling power frequency voltage and
measurement of radio interference voltage ( RIV).
2.0 Test Levels
The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV and for corona extinction
voltage are listed under the relevant clauses of the specification.
3.0 Test Methods for RIV:
3.1 RIV tests shall be made according to measuring circuit as per International Special
– committee on Radio Interference ( CISPR) Publication 16 -1 ( 1993) Part – I. The
measuring circuit shall preferably be tuned to frequency with 10 % of 0.5 MHz but
other frequencies in the range of 0.5 MHZ to 2 MHz may be used, the measuring
frequency being recorded. The result shall be in microvolts.
3.2 Alternatively, RIV tests shall be in accordance with NEMA standard Publication No.
107 – 1964 except otherwise noted herein.
3.3 In measurement of RIV temporary additional external corona shielding may be

provided. In measurement of RIV only standard fittings of identical type supplied
with the equipment and a simulation of the connections as used in the actual
installation will be permitted in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals.
3.4 Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure
that there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest
ambient noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be
measured at increasing and decreasing voltages of 85% , 100%, 115% and 130%
for the specified RIV test voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The
specified RIV test voltage for 765 kV & 132 kV level is listed in the detailed
specification together with maximum permissible RIV level in microvolts.
3.5 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendations or equivalent

device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.

3.6 The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration procedure of
the frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall establish the ratio of
voltage at the high voltage terminal to the voltage read by the noise meter.
4.0 Test Methods for visible Corona
The purpose of this test is to determine the corona extinction voltage of the
apparatus, connectors etc. The test shall be carried out in the same manner as RIV
test described above with the exception that RIV measurements are not required
during test and a search technique shall be used near the onset and extinction
voltage, when the test voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise
values. The test voltage shall be raised to 130 % of RIV test voltage and
maintained there for five minutes. The voltage will then be decreased slowly until
all visible corona disappears. The test procedure shall be repeated at least 4 times
with corona inception and extinction voltage. The corona extinction voltage for
purposes of determining compliance with the specification shall be the lowest of the
four values at which the visible corona (negative or positive polarity) disappears.

Annexure – B
SEISMIC WITHSTAND TEST
The seismic withstand test on the complete equipment shall be carried out along
with supporting structure.
The bidder shall arrange to transport the structure from his contractor’s premises /
owner’s sites for purpose of seismic withstand test only.
The seismic level specified shall be applied at the base of the structure. The
accelerometers shall be provided at the terminal pad of the equipment and at any
other point as agreed by the owner. The seismic test shall be carried out in all
possible combinations of the equipment. The seismic test procedure shall be
furnished for approval of the purchaser.

PART-II
CHAPTER – E1:
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART-II
CHAPTER – E1: CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1.00.00 General E1-1
2.00.00 Duty Requirements E1-1
3.00.00 Constructional Features E1-2
4.00.00 Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) Gas Circuit Breaker E1-2
5.00.00 Operating Mechanism E1-3
6.00.00 Fitting and Accessories E1-7
7.00.00 Tests E1-10
8.00.00 Parameters E1-10
ANNEXURE-I E1-15
ANNEXURE-II E1-18
ANNEXURE-III E1-19
CHAPTER - E1: CIRCUIT BREAKER
1.00.00 GENERAL
Circuit Breakers shall be outdoor type, comprising three identical single pole units,
complete in all respects with all fittings and wiring. The circuit breakers and
accessories shall conform to IEC- 62271-100 or equivalent Indian Standard.
The requirement of control switching is at Annexure-III of this chapter
2.00.00 DUTY REQUIREMENTS
2.01.00 Circuit breaker shall be totally restrike free (C-2 class) under all duty conditions and
shall be capable of performing their duties without opening resistor.
2.02.00 765 KV circuit breakers shall meet the M2 class and 132KV Circuit Breaker shall
meet M1 Class of mechanical endurance requirements as per IEC.
2.03.00 The circuit breaker shall meet the duty requirement of any type of fault or fault
location and shall be suitable for line charging and dropping when used on 765/132
kV effectively grounded or ungrounded systems and perform make and break
operations as per the stipulated duty cycles satisfactorily.
2.04.00 The circuit breaker shall be capable for breaking the steady & transient
magnetizing current corresponding to 765/132 kV transformers up to1000 MVA 3
Phase rating and 765KV Shunt Reactor of 330MVAR. It shall also be capable of
breaking line charging currents as per IEC- 62271-100 with a voltage factor of 1.4.
2.05.00 The rated transient recovery voltage for terminal fault and short line faults shall be
as per IEC:62271-100.
2.06.00 The circuit breakers shall be reasonably quiet in operation. Noise level in excess of
140 dB measured at base of the breaker would be unacceptable. Bidder shall
indicate the noise level of breaker at distance of 50 to 150 m from base of the
breaker.
2.07.00 The Bidder may note that total break time of the breaker shall not be exceeded
under any duty conditions specified such as with the combined variation of the trip
coil voltage, pneumatic/hydraulic pressure and arc extinguishing medium pressure,
etc. While furnishing the proof of the total break time of complete circuit breaker,
the Bidder may specifically bring out the effect of non-simultaneity between same
pole and poles and show how it is covered in the guaranteed total break time.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE CS-9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI E1-1 of 20
2.08.00 While furnishing particulars regarding the D.C. component of the circuit breaker,
the Bidder shall note that IEC-62271-100 requires that this value should
correspond to the guaranteed minimum opening time under any condition of
operation.
2.09.00 The critical current which gives the longest arc duration at lock out pressure of
extinguishing medium and the duration shall be indicated.
2.10.00 All the duty requirements specified above shall be provided with the support of
adequate test reports to be furnished along with the bid.
3.00.00 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
3.01.00 All making and breaking contacts shall be sealed and free from atmospheric effect.
In the event of leakage of extinguishing medium to a value, which cannot withstand
the dielectric stresses specified in the open position, the contacts shall preferably
self close. Main contacts shall be easily accessible for inspection and replacement.
If there are no separately mounted arcing contacts, then the main contacts shall be
easily accessible for inspection and replacement. Main contacts shall have ample
area and contact pressure for carrying the rated current under all conditions. The
interrupter sectional drawing showing the following conditions shall be furnished for
information with the bid:
a) Close position
b) Arc initiation position
c) Full arcing position
d) Arc extinction position
e) Open position.
3.02.00 All the three poles of the breaker shall be linked together either
electrically/pneumatically or electro hydraulically in case of single phase reclosing.
3.03.00 Circuit breakers shall be provided with two (2) independent trip coils, suitable for
trip circuit supervision. The trip circuit supervision relay would also be provided.
Necessary terminals shall be provided in the central control cabinet of the circuit
breaker.
4.00.00 SULPHUR HEXAFLOURIDE (SF6) GAS CIRCUIT BREAKER
4.01.00 Circuit breakers shall be single pressure type.
4.02.00 Design and construction of the circuit breaker shall be such that there is minimum
possibility of gas leakage and entry of moisture. There should not be any
condensation of SF6 gas on insulated surfaces of the circuit breaker.

4.03.00 In the interrupter assembly, there shall be absorbing product box to eliminate SF6
decomposition products and moisture. The details and operating experience with
such filters shall be brought out in additional information schedule.
4.04.00 Each pole shall form an enclosure filled with SF6 gas independent of two other
poles. Common monitoring of SF6 gas can be provided for the three poles of circuit
breaker having a common drive. The interconnecting pipes in this case shall be
such that the SF6 gas from one pole could be removed for maintenance purposes.
4.05.00 Material used in the construction of circuit breakers shall be such as fully
compatible with SF6.
4.06.00 The SF6 gas density monitor shall be adequately temperature compensated to
model the density changes due to variations in ambient temperature within the
body of circuit breaker as a whole. It shall be possible to dismantle the monitor
without removal of gas. Temperature compensated SF6 pressure gauge shall be
provided which will be visible from ground level.
4.07.00 Sufficient SF6 gas shall be supplied to fill all the circuit breakers installed plus an
additional 20% of the quantity as spare.
5.00.00 OPERATING MECHANISM
5.00.01 Circuit breaker shall be operated by pneumatic mechanism or electrically spring

charged mechanism or electro-hydraulic mechanism or a combination of these. It
shall be gang operated in case of 3-phase reclosing operation as applicable.
5.00.02 The operating mechanism shall be anti-pumping and trip free (as per IEC
definition) electrically and either mechanically or pneumatically under every method
of closing. The mechanism of the breaker shall be such that the position of the
breaker is maintained even after the leakage of operating media and/or gas.
5.00.03 The operating mechanism shall be such that the failure of any auxiliary spring will
not prevent tripping and will not cause trip or closing operation of the power
operated closing devices. A mechanical indicator shall be provided to show open
and close positions of breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be
visible to a man standing on the ground with the mechanism housing door closed.
An operation counter shall also be provided.
5.00.04 Closing coil shall operate correctly at all values of voltage between 85% and 110%
of the rated voltage. Shunt trip coils shall operate correctly under all operating
conditions of the circuit breaker upto the rated breaking capacity of the circuit
breaker and at all values of supply voltage between 70% and 110% of rated

voltage. If additional elements are introduced in the trip coil circuit their successful
operation for similar applications of outdoor breaker shall be clearly brought out in
the bid.
5.00.05 Working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion resisting material. Bearings
requiring grease shall be equipped with pressure type grease fittings. Bearing pin,
bolts, nuts and other parts shall be adequately pinned or locked to prevent
loosening or changing adjustment with repeated operation of the breaker.
5.00.06 Operating mechanism shall normally be operated by remote electrical control.

Electrical tripping shall be performed by shunt trip coil. Provision shall also be
made for local electrical control. ‘Local / remote’ selector switch and close & trip
push buttons shall be provided in the breaker central control cabinet. Remote
located push buttons and indicating lamps shall also be provided.
5.00.07 Operating mechanism and all accessories shall be in local control cabinet. A
central control cabinet for the three poles of the breaker shall be provided along
with supply of necessary tubing, cables, etc. The local control cabinet shall be
provided with hinged doors for approaching the TBs for maintenance wherever
applicable.
5.00.08 Provisions shall be made on breakers for attaching an operation analyser to

perform speed tests after installation at site to record contact travel against time
and measure opening time.
5.00.09 The Bidder shall furnish curve supported by test data indicating the opening time
under close-open operation with combined variation of trip coil and operating media
along with the bid.
5.01.00 PNEUMATICALLY OPERATED MECHANISM
5.01.01 Bidder shall offer unit compressor with each circuit breaker. The unit compressor
are to be located outdoor near the breaker(s).
5.01.02 The breaker local air receivers shall comply with the requirement specified, and
shall have sufficient capacity for two ‘CO’ operations of the breaker at the lowest
pressure for reclose duty without refilling.
5.01.03 Independently adjustable pressure switches with potential free ungrounded

contacts to actuate lockout device shall be provided. This lock out device with
provision for remote alarm indication shall be incorporated in the circuit breaker to
prevent operation whenever the pressure of the operating medium is below that
required for satisfactory operation at the specified rating. The scheme should
permit operation of all block and alarm relays as soon as the pressure transient

present during the rapid pressure drop has been damped and a reliable pressure
measurement can be made. Such facilities shall be provided for following
conditions:
a) Trip lockout pressure -2 nos.

b) Close lockout pressure -1 no.
c) Extreme low pressure -1 no.
d) Auto reclose lock out pressure -1 no.
5.01.04 The compressed air mechanism shall be capable of operating the circuit breaker
under all duty conditions with the air pressure immediately before operation
between 85% and 110% of the rated supply pressures. The make/break time at
this supply pressure shall not exceed the specified make/ break time within any
value of trip coil supply voltage as specified.
5.02.00 SPRING OPERATED MECHANISM
5.02.01 Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor, opening spring &
closing spring with limit switch for automatic charging and other necessary
accessories to make the mechanism a complete operating unit. Opening spring
shall be supplied with limit switch for automatic charging and other necessary
accessories.
5.02.02 As long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of closing and
opening operations shall be possible. The motor shall have adequate thermal
rating for this duty. After failure of power supply to the motor, one close-open
operation shall be possible with the energy contained in the operating mechanism.
5.02.03 Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor, which shall be used solely for
compressing the closing spring.
5.02.04 Motor shall comply with the requirements specified in Chapter-E12. Motor ratings
shall be such that it requires not more than 30 seconds for fully charging the
closing spring.
5.02.05 Closing action of the circuit breaker shall compress the opening spring ready for
tripping.
5.02.06 When closing springs are discharged, after closing a breaker, closing springs shall
automatically be charged for the next operation and an indication of this shall be
provided in the local and remote control cabinet.
5.02.07 The spring operating mechanism shall have adequate energy stored in the
operating spring to close and latch the circuit breaker against the rated making

current and also to provide the required energy for the tripping mechanism in case
the tripping energy is derived from the operating mechanism.
5.03.00 HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED MECHANISM
5.03.01 Hydraulically operated mechanism shall comprise operating unit with power
cylinder, valves, and low pressure reservoir, motor, etc.
5.03.02 The hydraulic oil used shall be fully compatible for the specified temperature range.
5.03.03 The oil pressure controlling the oil pump and pressure in the high pressure
reservoir shall have adequate number of spare contacts for continuous monitoring
of low pressure, high pressure, etc., in control room. The necessary remote
equipment shall also be provided.
5.03.04 The mechanism shall be suitable for at least two close open operations after failure
of ac supply to the motor starting at pressure equal to lowest pressure of auto-
reclose duty.
5.03.05 The hydraulically operated mechanism shall be capable of operating the circuit
breaker correctly and performing the duty cycle specified under all conditions with
the pressure of hydraulic operated fluid in the operating mechanism at the lowest
permissible pressure before make up. The operating time at the lowest pressure for
a particular operation shall not exceed the guaranteed operating time within any
value of trip coil-supply voltage as specified.
5.03.06 Trip lockout shall be provided to prevent operations of the circuit breaker below the
minimum specified hydraulic pressure. Alarm contacts for loss of nitrogen shall be
provided and wired suitably upto the central control cabinet.
5.03.07 All hydraulic joints shall have no oil leakage under the site conditions and joints
shall be tested at factory against oil leakage at a minimum of 1.5 times maximum
working pressure.
5.04.00 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
5.04.01 Following is partial list of some of the major fittings and accessories to be furnished
as integral part of the breakers. Number and exact location of these parts shall be
indicated in the bid.
Control unit / Central control cabinet in accordance with Chapter-E12 complete

with:

a) Double compression type cable glands, lugs, ferrules, etc.

b) Local/remote changeover switch
c) Operation counter
d) Fuses, as required
e) Anti-pumping relay/contactor
f) Rating and diagram plate in accordance with IEC including year of manufacture,
etc.
g) Gauges for SF6 gas pressure, pneumatic/hydraulic pressure.
h) Gas density monitor with alarm and lockout contacts
6.01.00 Hollow insulator columns
The insulators shall conform to requirements stipulated in Chapter-E12. All routine

tests shall be conducted on the insulators as per relevant IEC. In addition the
following routine tests shall also be conducted on hollow column insulators :
a) Ultrasonic test
b) Pressure test
c) Bending load test in 4 directions at 50% specified bending load.
d) Bending load test in 4 directions at 100% specified Bending load as a sample test.
The tested insulator will not be used in CB.
e) Burst pressure test as a sample test.
6.02.00 SUPPORT STRUCTURES
The minimum height of equipment supports shall be adequate so that lowest part
of support insulator of equipment is minimum 2550 mm from plinth level. The
height of center line of conductor shall be as given elsewhere in the specification.
6.03.00 Terminal connectors shall conform to requirements stipulated in Chapter E12.
6.04.00 ADDITIONAL FITTINGS FOR PNEUMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKER
a) Unit compressed air system.

b) Breaker local air receivers
c) Pressure gauge, spring-loaded safety valve and pressure switch with adjustable
contacts
d) Pressure switch to initiate an alarm if the pressure in the auxiliary reservoir falls
below a preset level for longer than it is normally necessary to refill the reservoir.
e) Stop, non-return and other control valves, piping and all accessories upto breaker
mechanism housing.

6.05.00 UNIT COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM
The unit compressed air system for each breaker shall be provided with
compressed air piping, piping accessories, control and non-return valves, filters,
coolers of adequate capacity, pressure reducing valves(if any), isolating valves,
drain ports, etc.
6.05.01 Air Compressor:
a) The air compressor shall be driven by automatically controlled motor. It shall be of

air cooled type complete with preferably oil-less cylinder lubrication. The
compressors or pumps shall be mounted within the operating mechanism housing
or a separate weather-proof and dust-proof housing. The motors shall conform to
requirements of Chapter-E12.
b) The compressor size shall be such that it is capable of performing following

operations satisfactorily :
i) Total running time of compressor not exceeding 45 minutes per day, considering
2% leakage and 2 CO-operations.
ii) Air charging time not exceeding 20 minutes after one CO operation of the
breaker.
c) The compressor shall be provided with automatic adjustable unloading device, if
necessary, during starting. Each compressor shall be equipped with a time
totaliser.
d) In accordance with the requirements stipulated under Part-I, the compressors and
its accessories shall conform to the type tests and shall be subject to routine tests
as per applicable standards.
6.05.02 Intercooler and After cooler :
Intercooler between compressor stage and after cooler at discharge of H.P.

cylinder shall be included in Contractor’s scope. They shall be of air cooled type
and shall be designed as per ASME Code of IEMA Standards. The design
pressure on the air side of cooler shall be 1.25 times the working pressure. A
corrosion allowance of 3mm shall be included for all steel parts.
6.05.03 Air Receivers :
a) The capacity of receivers shall be sufficient for two (2) CO operations of the
breaker.

b) Air receiver shall be designed in accordance with the latest edition of the ASME
Code for Pressure Vessel - Section VIII of BS:5179. A corrosion allowance of 3.0
mm shall be provided for shell and dished ends. Receivers shall be hot dip
galvanized.
c) Accessories such as suitable sized safety valve to relieve full compressor

discharge at a set pressure equal to 1.1 times the maximum operating pressure,
dial type pressure gauge with isolating and drain valve and test connection shall be
provided.
d) Quality of Air :
Compressed air used shall be dry and free of dust particles. Arrangement for
conditioning the compressed air shall be provided as an integral part of air
compressor system. The quality of air shall be compatible with the parts used in the
system. All necessary components required to make it compatible shall be
included.
6.06.00 Controls and Control Equipment:
a) The compressor control shall be of automatic start stop type initiated by pressure
switches on the receiver. Supplementary manual control shall also be provided.
b) All control equipment shall be housed in a totally enclosed cabinet. Pressure

gauges and other indicating devices, control switches shall be mounted on the
control cabinet.
c) Facility to annunciate failure of power supply to the compressor control shall also
be provided.
6.07.00 Compressed Air Piping, Valves and Fittings:
a) The flow capacity of all valves shall be at least 20% greater than the compressor
capacity.
b) The high pressure system shall be such that after one 0 - 0.3 Sec - CO operation,
the breaker shall be capable of performing one CO operation within 3 minutes.
c) All compressed air piping shall be bright annealed, seamless phosphorous

Deoxidized Non-Arsenical Copper alloy or stainless steel pipe (C-106 of BS:2871).
d) All joints and connections in the piping system shall be brazed or flared as
necessary.

e) Compressed air piping system shall be supplied in clean, sealed and packed
condition. Before installation, the pipes shall be again cleaned properly to remove
dust, brazing particles, etc.
6.08.00 Spare Parts and Mandatory Maintenance Equipment:
The Contractor shall include in his proposal mandatory spare parts and
maintenance equipment as specified in scope. These shall be in accordance with
requirements attached at Annexure – I of this chapter.
7.00.00 TESTS
7.01.00 In accordance with the requirements stipulated under part-I, the circuit breakers
alongwith its operating mechanism shall be type tested for all the type tests as per
annexure-II to this chapter.
7.02.00 ROUTINE TESTS
Routine tests as per IEC-62271-100 on the complete breaker/ pole alongwith its
own operating mechanism and pole column shall be performed on all circuit
breakers.
7.03.00 SITE TESTS
All routine tests except power frequency voltage dry withstand test on breaker shall
be repeated on the completely assembled breaker at site.
8.00.00 PARAMETERS
8.01.00 General
a) Type of circuit breaker Outdoor SF6, single pressure, Live tank type
b) Rated frequency 50 Hz
c) Number of poles Three (3)
d) Rated operating duty cycle O - 0.3 sec. - CO - 3min. – CO
e) Rated line charging breaking As per IEC

Current (voltage factor of 1.4)
f) Reclosing Single and three phase high speed auto reclosing

(as required)

g) Total closing time Not more than 150 ms.
h) Maximum difference in the a) 2.5millisec within pole

instants of closing/opening b) 3.3ms between poles for opening, 5ms for closing
of contacts This shall be at rated control voltage and rated
operating quenching media pressures.
i) Trip and closing coil voltage 220V DC
j) Auxiliary contacts As required plus 10 NO and 10 NC contacts per pole

as spare. The contacts shall have continuous rating
of 10A and breaking capacity of 2A with circuit time
constant of minimum 20 millisecond at 220V DC.
k) Noise level Maximum 140dB at the base of

circuit breaker
l) Rated terminal load Adequate to withstand 100kg static load as well as

wind, seismic and short circuit forces without
impairing reliability or current carrying capacity.
m) Temperature rise over As per IEC: 62271-100

Ambient
n) Type of operating mechanism Pneumatic/spring/hydraulic/or a combination of

these
o) Minimum creepage distance As indicated in Section – E0
p) Rated ambient temperature 50 degree Centigrade
q) System neutral earthing Effectively earthed
r) Seismic acceleration 0.3 g horizontal
s) Support structure height Adequate so that lowest part of support insulator of

equipment is minimum 2550 mm from ground/ plinth
level.
8.02.00 765kV Class Circuit Breakers

a) Rated voltage 800 kV rms
b) Rated continuous current Minimum 3150 A at rated ambient temperature

current capacity

c) Rated short circuit breaking 50kA with percentage of DC component as per IEC
current at rated voltage corresponding to minimum opening time under
operating conditions specified.
d) Symmetrical interrupting 50 kA rms

Capability
e) Short time current carrying 50 kA rms for One (1) second

Capability
f) Short circuit making current 125 kAp

Capability
g) Rated out-of-phase breaking 12.5 kA rms
h) Rated line charging breaking 900A at 90 C leading power factor with maximum
Current (voltage factor of 1.4) permissible switching overvoltage of 2.0 pu.
i) Rated small inductive current Corresponding to interrupting steady and transient

Breaking capacity magnetising current of 1000 MVA transformers and
330MVAr shunt reactor with overvoltage less than
2.0 pu
j) First pole to clear factor 1.3
k) Rated break time
i) 40 ms under test duties 2, 3 & 4 at rated values

ii) 45 ms under test duties 1 to 5 and short line fault test duties and combined
variation of trip coil voltage, operating pressure and quenching media pressure,
etc.
l) Rated one minute power i) 830 kV rms between live terminals and earth.
frequency withstand voltage ii) 1150 kV rms across isolating distance.
m) Rated lightning impulse i) 2100 kVp between live terminals and earth.
withstand voltage ii)  2100 kVp impulse on one terminal and 455kVp
power freq. voltage of opposite polarity on other
terminal (across isolating distance).

n) Rated switching impulse i)  1550 kVp between live terminals and earth
withstand voltage ii)  1175 kVp impulse on one terminal and 650 kVp
power freq. voltage of opposite polarity on other
o) Max. Radio interference as specified in Chapter – E0
p) Corona extinction voltage as specified in Chapter – E0
q) Controlled switching The controlled switching requirement are given in

Annexure-III
8.03.00 132 kV Class CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
a) Rated voltage 145 kVrms
b) Rated continuous current Minimum 2000A/1250A at rated ambient

capacity temperature
c) Rated short circuit breaking 31.5kA with percentage of DC component as

current at rated voltage per IEC corresponding to minimum opening
time under operating conditions specified
d) Symmetrical interrupting 31.5 kA rms

Capability
e) Short time current carrying 31.5 kA rms for One (1) second
Capability
f) Short circuit making current 80 kAp

Capability
g) Rated out-of-phase breaking 7.8 kA rms
h) Rated line charging breaking As per IEC

Current (voltage factor of 1.4) .
i) Rated small inductive current 0.5 to 10 A

switching capability with over voltage
less than 2.3 p.u.
j) First pole to clear factor 1.5

k) Maximum total break time 60 ms

under any duty condition for any
current under limiting condition of
voltage and pressure as per IEC
l) Total break time 65 ms
m) Rated one minute power

frequency withstand voltage
(Dry & Wet)
i) Between line terminals and ground 275KV rms
ii) Between terminals with circuit breaker 275KV rms

open
n) Rated lightning impulse

withstand voltage (1.2/50 micro sec)
i) Between line terminals and ground 650 kVp
ii) Between terminals with circuit breaker 650 kVp impulse on one terminal and
open other terminal earthed
o) Max. Radio interference as specified in Section – E0
p) Phase to phase spacing 3000mm (other type tested spacing is

also acceptable)

ANNEXURE-I
SPECIFICATION OF MANDATORY MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

(Refer cl. 6.08.00 of this section)
1.0 SF6 Gas Handling Plants:-
a) SF6 gas filling and evacuating equipment(Portable):
The capacity of this plant shall be such that it shall not take appreciable time for
filling or evacuating of the complete 3 pole breaker. The required vacuum for
complete evacuation shall be attained with the help of this plant.
b) SF6 gas filtering, drying, storage and recycling plant:
-Equipment should perform recovery, evacuation of air, purification in liquid stage,

storage in liquid stage, and refilling of SF6 Gas in Circuit Breaker and GIS
chambers.
The Gas Service Cart should perform the following functions:

a. Recovery speed of 8.5kg/hr.
b. Vaccum Capacity of 10m3/hr.
c. SF6 compressor capacity of 1.3m3/hr.
-Purify SF6 Gas by re-circulating through the filter system.

a. Water content down to 10 ppmW or less.
b. Particulate Filtration: 0.1 microns.
c.Removes decomposition products.
-The capacity of the plant shall be such as to handle and store gas of single pole
of breaker in one single operation.
-This shall include all the necessary devices for measurement of purity, moisture
content, decomposition products etc. of SF6 gas mixing with air/oil/moisture
during above process should be proved to be Nil during testing.
-The plant shall be complete with accessories and fittings so that SF6 gas from
the breaker can be directly filled in the plant storage reservoir.
-In case purging of the equipment before filling with SF6 gas is desirable, then the
required equipment for dry gases etc. shall be furnished as a part of the plant.
-For heavy items within the plant, the lifting hooks shall be provided for lifting and
moving with the overhead cranes.

-The capacity of the plant shall be such as to handle and store 300 kg of SF6 gas.
1.1 i) These SF6 gas handling plants shall be complete with all the necessary
pipes, couplings flexible tubes and valves for coupling to the equipment.
ii) The design and construction of the plant, valves, couplings, connections
shall be such that leakage of SF6 gas shall be minimum. Similarly valves,
couplings and pipe work shall be so arranged that accidental loss of gas to
the atmosphere shall be minimum.
1.2 SF6 gas decomposition analyzing equipment and instruments should have
capacity for performing the following functions:
a) The moisture content measurement or alternatively dew point measurement.

b) The air content measurement.
c) Sensitivity should not be affected by dust, humidity, heat & wind etc.
NOTE: The equipments should have in-built calibration facility. The
calibration/sensitivity check shall be demonstrated at breaker supplier’s works.
d) Measuring method should be based on Infrared technology for better accuracy &
interference free measurement.
e) Equipments should be equipped with pump back facility so that no SF6 gas is
wasted.
f) Following acidic/impurities products should be detected as per IEC60480 and
IEC60376.
i) SF6 Purity Range : 0- 100%
ii) Dew Point Range: -60 to+20 °C
iii) SO2 Range: 0-150ppm
iv) CF4 Range: 0-60% vol
v) HF Range: 0-200ppm
vi) Air
g) Instrument should work on AC source as well as on rechargeable battery.
h) Input gas pressure: up to 10bar.
i) It should be housed in a robust IP67 case with wheels.
1.3 SF6 Gas leak detector:
The SF6 gas leak detector shall meet the following requirements:
a) The detector shall be free from induced voltage effects.

b) The sensing probe shall be such that it can reach all the points on the breaker
where leakage is to be sensed.
c) The accuracy of the equipment shall be at least 10 ppm.
d) Operational Analyser ( along with DCRM Kit) suitable for complete 3 Phase
765KV Circuit Breaker
The operational analyser shall meet the following requirements:

a) Operational analyser shall be one complete system, which once installed should
record all the parameters, as laid down in subsequent clauses.
b) It shall have facility to record the breaker contact movement during opening,
closing, auto reclosing and make-break operation, the speed of contacts at
various stages of operation, travel of contacts, opening time, closing time and
make break time ,etc. of a complete 3 phase breaker simultaneously.
c) All necessary transducer(i.e three nos. for complete 3 phase speed and travel
record of breaker), cables, pickups, attachments required for the breaker shall be
supplied with the analyser. The cables supplied shall be sufficient enough for
recordings at site on a completely assembled and erected breaker.
d) The operational analyzer must have facility to measure Dynamic Contact
Resistance of arcing contact and main contact with minimum 100 A DC current
while closing / opening of circuit breaker. The necessary software ( window
based) for analysis of the measured data shall also be supplied along with the kit
excluding computer / laptop). This software shall be demonstrated at site during
commissioning. The DCR test kit shall be suitable for simultaneous measurement
of DCR of both the breaks of a pole of the circuit breaker.
e) The analyser shall be suitable for operation outdoor and shall be suitably shielded
against induced charges.
f) The output of the analyser shall be on a plain paper or any paper having infinite
shelf life and the output thus obtained shall have a long life and shall not require
any special storage facility. Photographic paper is not acceptable.
g) All the necessary catalogues, write up for operation and maintenance of the
analyser shall be furnished alongwith each analyser and peripheral system.
h) Demonstration at breaker manufacturer’s premises/site for functional/operational
check and compatibility with breaker.
i) The sensitivity of the equipment shall be at least 3 g SF6 / year (0.10 oz / year).

ANNEXURE-II
List of type tests to be included by Bidder
a) Dielectric tests
b) Radio interference voltage test
c) Temperature Rise test
d) Short time withstand current and peak
withstand test
e) Mechanical endurance
f) Short circuit test duties
g) Short line fault test
h) Out of phase making & breaking test
i) Line charging current breaking test
j) Corona test for 765KV Only

k) IP:55 test on each type of box
l) Seismic withstand test with structure for 765
only
m) Test for reactor switching duty for 765KV CB

only (For Bus reactor)

ANNEXURE-III
Requirement of Controlled Switching Device for 765KV Circuit Breaker
The circuit breaker with controlled switching as indicated in single line diagram
shall meet the following requirement:
1. The Switching controlled Device shall be used to reduce increased over voltages,
re-ignition between circuit breaker contacts that may be caused by normal
switching of high voltage circuit breakers and hence optimize the stresses on
circuit breaker while switching the circuit. The switching controlled device will be
called device henceforth. The switching controlled device shall make suitable
adjustments to the switching instants of Main/Tie breakers so as to optimise the
switching behaviour of Generator transformers and Bus reactors. These switching
controlled devices shall be installed in Main and Tie breakers of Generator
transformers and Bus reactors. The switching controlled device for Generator
transformers shall be primarily used for charging of Generator transformers from
the grid side and optimisation of switching behaviour.
2. The device shall be such that only switching commands (for operating purpose)
are processed in the device. Open command triggered by protection on fault shall
be forwarded directly to the breaker. In these cases switching instance is not
controlled.
3. Circuit breaker should be able to be switched while switching controlled device is

not in operation e.g. during maintenance work or power supply is not connected, a
bypass shall be provided to the device. In these cases the switching commands
will then be forwarded directly to the circuit breaker via this Bypass. The switching
time will not be controlled with these switching operations.
4. The device shall meet the requirements of IEC-60255-4 Appendix ‘E’ class III
regarding HF disturbance test, and fast transient test shall be as per IEC-61000 –
4 level III and insulation test as per 60255 – 5.
5. The device shall have functions for switching ON & OFF the circuit breakers.
6. The device shall get command to operate the breakers manually or through auto
re-close relay at random. The controller shall be able to analyze the current and
voltage waves available through the signals from secondaries of CTs & CVTs for
the purpose of calculation of optimum moment of the switching the circuit breaker
and issue command to circuit breaker to operate.
7. The device shall also have an adaptive control feature to consider the next
operating time of the breaker in calculation of optimum time of issuing the

switching command and optimize the switching behavior as necessary. In

calculation of next operating time of the breaker the controller must consider all
factors that may affect the operating time of the breaker.
8. The device should have display facility at the front for the settings and measured
values.
9. The device shall have self monitoring facility.
10. The device shall be suitable for operation considering transient and dynamic state
values of the current and voltage from the secondary of the CTs and CVTs.
11. The controller shall be PC compatible for setting of various parameter,

downloading of the settings and measured values, date & time of Switching etc..
Window based software for this purpose shall be supplied by the contractor to be
used in Owner’s PC.
12. It shall have self monitoring facilities. Faults which impair the functioning of the
device or peripheral components, failure of trip voltage or sensors shall be
displayed visually and shall give alarm.
13. The device shall be designed to operate correctly and satisfactorily with the
excursion of auxiliary A/C & DC voltages and frequency as specified elsewhere in
the specification.
14. The device shall have time setting resolution of 0.1 ms or better.
15. The device shall have sufficient number of output/input potential free contacts for
connecting the monitoring equipment and annunciation system available in the
control room. Necessary details shall be worked out during engineering the
scheme.
16. Supply of all the necessary accessories required for the successful operation of
controlled switching device shall be in the scope of supplier of the device.

PART-II
CHAPTER – E2: DISCONNECTORS

PART-II
CHAPTER – E2: DISCONNECTORS
4.00.00 Earthing Switches E2-3
5.00.00 Operating Mechanism and Control E2-3
6.00.00 Operation E2-3
7.00.00 Tests E2-3

CHAPTER- E2: DISCONNECTORS
1.00.0 GENERAL
1.01.00 The isolators and accessories shall conform in general to IEC 62271-102 (or
equivalent Indian standard) except to the extent explicitly modified in specification.
1.02.00 Earth switches shall be provided on isolators wherever called for.
1.03.00 The isolators and earth switches shall be motor operated .
1.04.00 Complete isolator with all the necessary items for successful operation shall be
supplied.
1.05.0 Isolators shall be three pole/Single pole as required.
2.01.00 Isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and
thermal effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the system in their
closed position. They shall be constructed such that they do not open under
influence of short circuit current and wind pressure together. The earth switches
wherever provided shall be constructional interlocked so that the earth switches
can be operated only when the isolator is open and vice-versa.
2.02.00 In addition to the constructional interlock, isolator and earth switches shall have
provision to prevent their electrical and manual operation unless the associated
and other interlocking conditions are met. All these interlocks shall be of fail safe
type. Suitable individual interlocking coil arrangements shall be provided. The
interlocking coil shall be suitable for continuous operation from DC supply and
within a variation range as stipulated in relevant section. The interlock coil shall be
provided with adequate contacts for facilitating permissive logic for ‘DC’ control
scheme of the isolator as well as for AC circuit of the motor to prevent opening or
closing of isolators when the interlocking coil is not energised.
2.03.00 The earthing switches shall be capable of discharging trapped charges of the
associated lines. Isolator and earth switches shall be able to bear on the terminals
the total forces including wind loading and electro dynamic forces on the attached
conductor without impairing reliability or current carrying capacity.
2.04.00 The isolator shall be capable for making / breaking normal currents when no
significant change in voltage occurs across the terminals of each pole of the
isolator on account of making / breaking operation.

2.05.00 800KV isolators shall be of mechanical endurance class M2 as per IEC and 145kV
and 36KV isolator shall be M1 class. All earth switches shall be of class M1 duty.
Electrical endurance duty for earth switches shall be E0.
3.01.00 The isolators shall be provided with high pressure current carrying contacts on the
hinge/ jaw ends and all contact surfaces shall be silver plated. The thickness of
silver plating should not be less than 25 microns. The contacts shall be accurately
machined and self aligned.
3.02.00 The isolator shall be provided with a galvanised steel base provided with holes and
designed for mounting on a lattice/pipe support structure. The base shall be rigid
and self supporting. The position of movable contact system (main blades) of each
of the isolator and earthing switch shall be indicated by a mechanical indicator at
the lower end of the vertical rod of shaft for the isolator and earthing switch. The
indicator shall be of metal and shall be visible from operating level.
3.03.00 All metal parts shall be of non-rusting and non-corroding metal. Current carrying
parts shall be from high conductivity electrolytic copper/aluminium. Bolts, screws
and pins shall be provided with lock washers. Keys or equivalent locking facilities, if
provided on current carrying parts, shall be made of copper silicon alloy or
equivalent. The live parts shall be designed to eliminate sharp joints, edges and
other corona producing surfaces.
3.04.00 The isolators shall be so constructed that the switch blade will not fall to the closed
position if the operating shaft gets disconnected. Isolators and earthing switches
including their operating parts shall be such that they cannot be dislodged from
their open or closed positions by gravity, wind pressure, vibrations shocks or
accidental touching of the connecting rods of the operating mechanism. The switch
shall be designed such that no lubrication of any part is required except at very
infrequent intervals.
3.05.00 The insulator of the isolator shall conform to the requirements stipulated under
Chapter-E 12 and shall have a min. cantilever strength of 800 kg for 765kV and
600kg for 132kV. Pressure due to the contact shall not be transferred to the
insulators after the main blades full close. The insulators shall be so arranged that
leakage current will pass to earth and not between terminals of the same pole or
between phases.
3.06.00 The terminal connectors shall conform to requirements stipulated under Chapters-
E0 and E12.

4.00.00 EARTHING SWITCHES

Where earthing switches are specified these shall include the complete operating
mechanism and auxiliary contacts. The earthing switches shall form an integral part
of the isolator and shall be mounted on the base frame of the isolator. Earthing
switches shall be suitable for local operation only. The earthing switches shall be
constructional interlocked with the isolator so that the earthing switches can be
operated only when isolator is open and vice versa.
5.00.00 OPERATING MECHANISM AND CONTROL

5.01.00 The Contractor shall offer, motor operated switches having padlock arrangement
on both ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ positions.
5.02.00 Limit switches for control shall be fitted on the isolator/ earth switch shaft, within the
cabinet to sense the open and close positions of the isolators and earth switches.
5.03.00 It shall not be possible, after final adjustment has been made for any part of the
mechanism to be displaced at any point in the travel sufficient enough to allow
improper functioning of the isolator when the isolator is opened or closed at any
speed.
5.04.00 Control cabinet/operating mech. box shall conform to requirements stipulated in

Chapter-E12 and IS:5039/IS 8623/IEC 439 as applicable.
6.00.00 OPERATION
6.01.00 Isolator shall be gang operated for main blades and earth switches. The operation
of the three poles shall be well synchronised and interlocked.
6.02.00 The design shall be such as to provide maximum reliability under all service
conditions. All operating linkages carrying mechanical loads shall be designed for
negligible deflection. The length of inter insulator and interpole operating rods shall
be capable of adjustments.
6.03.00 The design of linkages and gears be such so as to allow one man to operate the
handle with ease for isolator and earth switch.
7.00.00 TESTS
7.01.00 In continuation to the requirements stipulated under Part-I the isolator alongwith
operating mechanism shall conform to the type tests and shall be subjected to
routine tests and acceptance tests in accordance with IEC 62271-102. Minimum 50
nos. mechanical operations will be carried out on 1 (one) isolator assembled
completely with all accessories as acceptance test. During final testing of isolator

sequential closing/ opening of earth switch shall also be checked only after isolator
is fully open/close. Acceptance test shall be carried out with operating box.
7.02.00 The insulator shall conform to all the type tests as per IEC 168. In addition to all
type, routine and acceptance tests, as per IEC-168, the following additional routine/
acceptance tests shall also be carried out:
a) Bending load test in four directions at 50% min. bending load guaranteed in all
insulators.
b) Bending load test in four directions at 100% min. bending load guaranteed on
sample insulators in a lot.
c) Torsion test on sample insulator of a lot.
8.00.00 PARAMETERS
8.01.00 General (800KV & 145KV)
a) Type of isolator Outdoor type, Vertical break/ Double break/

knee type (for 800KV)
Outdoor type, Horizontal Center Break
(for 145KV)
Outdoor type, Horizontal Double Break
(for 36KV)
b) Rated frequency 50 Hz
c) Number of poles Three (3)/Single (1) as required
d) Operating time Not more than 12 sec.
e) Control voltage 220V DC
f) Auxiliary contacts on Isolator As required plus 8NO and 8NC contacts per
pole/isolator as spare for 800KV & 145KV
and 4NO and 4NC for 36KV. The contacts
shall have continuous rating of 10A and
breaking capacity of 2A with circuit time
constant of minimum 20 millisecond at 220V
DC. Additionally MBB contacts as required
shall also be provided.
g) Auxiliary contacts on earth switch Total 6NO and 6NC for 800KV & 145KV and
4NO and 4NC for 36KV

h) Rated mechanical terminal load As per table III of IEC 62271-102
i) Temperature rise over As per IEC:62271-102

ambient
j) Minimum creepage distance As indicated in Section – E0
k) Rated ambient temperature 50 degree Celcius
l) System neutral earthing Effectively earthed
m) Seismic acceleration 0.3 g horizontal
n) Support structure height Adequate so that lowest part of support

insulator of equipment is minimum 2550 mm
from plinth level.
o) Rated mechanical terminal As per table III of IEC 62271-102

Load
p) Operating mechanism of A. C./ D.C./ Universal Motor operated

Isolator and Earth Switch
q) Temperature rise As per Table III of IEC 60694 for an ambient

of 50 deg. C.
8.02.00 765kV Isolators:
a) Voltage Class 800 kV rms
b) Rated continuous current Minimum 3150 A at rated ambient

temperature
c) Rated short time withstand current 50 kA rms for One (1) second
of isolator and earth switch
d) Rated dynamic short circuit withstand 125 kAp

current of isolator and earth switch
e) Rated Insulation levels

i. Rated one minute power i) 830 kV rms between live terminals and earth.
Frequency withstand voltage ii) 1150 kV rms across isolating distance.
ii. Rated lightning impulse i) 2100 kVp between live terminals and earth.
Withstand voltage ii)  2100 kVp impulse on one terminal and 455
kVp power freq. Voltage of opposite polarity on
other terminal (across isolating distance).
iii. Rated switching impulse i)  1550 kVp between live terminals and earth.
Withstand voltage ii)  1175 kVp impulse on one terminal and 650
kVp power freq.voltage of opposite polarity on other
f) Creepage distance As specified in Chapter E-0
g) Max. Radio interference As specified in Chapter E-0

voltage
h) Corona extinction voltage As specified in Chapter E-0
8.04.00 132 kV Isolators:
a) Voltage Class 145 kV
b) Rated current at 500 C ambient 2000A/1250A

Temperature
c) Rated short time withstand Current 31.5 kA for 1 sec.

d) Rated dynamic short circuit withstand 80 kA (Peak)

Current of isolator and earth switch
e) Rated insulation levels:
1.2/50 micro sec. One minute power frequency

lightning impulse withstand voltage
withstand voltage (Between live terminal and
(+ ve or – ve polarity) earth)
impulse on one terminal
and other terminal earthed.

To earth  650 kV (Peak) 275 kV (rms)

Across isolating distance  750 kV peak 315 kV (rms)
f) Phase to phase spacing 3000 mm
g) Creepage distance (total) As specified in Chapter E-0
h) Radio interference level for As specified in Chapter E-0
8.05.00 33KV Isolators:
a) Voltage Class 36 kV rms
b) Rated continuous current Minimum 1000A at rated ambient

temperature
c) Rated short time withstand current 25 kA rms for One (1) second
d) Rated dynamic short circuit withstand 62.5 kAp

current of isolator and earth switch
e) Rated Insulation levels
i. Rated one minute power 70 KV (rms)

Frequency withstand voltage
ii. Rated lightning impulse 170 kV (Peak)

Withstand voltage

PART-II
CHAPTER – E3:
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
PART-II
CHAPTER – E3: INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
1.00.00 Codes and Standards E3-1
2.00.00 General Requirements E3-1
3.00.00 Current Transformers (CTs) E3-1
4.00.00 Voltage Transformers (CVTs) E3-2
5.00.00 Marshaling Box E3-3
6.00.00 Parameters for Current Transformers E3-4
7.00.00 Parameters for Voltage Transformers E3-6
8.00.00 Tests E3-8
Table-IA: Core details of 765 kV CTs E3-9
Table –IB & IC: Core details of 132 kV CTs E3-10 &11
Table -ID: Core details of 33 kV CT E3-12
Table -IIA: Core details of 765 kV CVTs E3-13
Table -IIB: Core details of 132 kV CVTs E3-13

CHAPTER- E3: INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
1.00.00 CODES AND STANDARDS
Current transformers IEC 60044, BS:3938, IS: 2705, IEC 61869

Voltage transformers IEC 60186, IEC 186A, IEC 358, IS:3156, IEC 61869
Insulating oil IS: 335
2.00.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2.01.00 The instrument transformers i.e. current and voltage transformers shall be single
phase transformer units and shall be supplied with a common marshaling box for a
set of three single phase units.
2.02.00 All exposed mild steel metallics shall be hot dip galvanised or painted with Grey color
RAL 9002. No oil shall come in contact with Zinc galvanised surface.
2.03.00 The instrument transformers shall be hermetically sealed units. The instrument
transformers shall be provided with filling and drain plugs.
2.04.00 Polarity marks shall indelibly be marked on each instrument transformer and at the
lead terminals at the associated terminal block.
2.05.00 The insulators shall have a cantilever strength of more than 500 kg.
3.00.00 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTs)
3.01.00 The CTs shall have single primary of either ring type or hair pin type or bar type.
Wound primary is not acceptable.
3.02.00 In case of "Bar Primary" inverted type CTs, the following requirements shall be met:
3.03.00 The secondaries shall be totally encased in metallic shielding providing a uniform
equipotential surface for even electric field distribution.
3.04.00 The lowest part of insulation assembly shall be properly secured to avoid any risk of
damage due to transportation stresses.
3.05.00 The upper part of insulation assembly sealing on primary bar shall be properly
secured to avoid any damage during transportation due to relative movement
between insulation assembly and top dome.
3.06.00 The insulator shall be one piece without any metallic flange joint.

(2X800MW) Bid Doc. No.: TECHNICAL PART-II Page
3.07.00 The CT shall be provided with oil sight glass/ oil level indicator.
3.08.00 The core lamination shall be of cold rolled grain oriented silicon steel or other
equivalent alloys. The cores shall produce undistorted secondary current under
transient conditions at all ratios with specified parameters.
3.09.00 Different ratios shall be achieved by secondary taps only, and primary reconnections
shall not be accepted.
3.10.00 The guaranteed burdens and accuracy class are to be intended as simultaneous for
all cores.
3.11.00 The instrument security factor at all ratios shall be less than ten (10) for 800KV CT
and five (5) for 145KV & 36KV CT for metering core. If any auxiliary CT/reactor is
used, then all parameters specified shall be met treating auxiliary CTs/reactors as
integral part of CT. The auxiliary CT/reactor shall preferably be in-built construction of
the CT. In case it is separate, it shall be mounted in secondary terminal box.
3.12.00 The physical disposition of protection secondary cores shall be in the same order as
given under CT requirement table(s) given below.
3.13.00 The CTs shall be suitable for high speed auto-reclosing.
3.14.00 The secondary terminals shall be terminated on stud type suitable no’s of non-
disconnecting and disconnecting terminal blocks inside the terminal box of degree of
protection IP: 55 at the bottom of CT.
3.15.00 The CTs shall be suitable for horizontal transportation.
3.16.00 The CTs shall have provision for taking oil samples from bottom of CT without
exposure to atmosphere to carry out dissolved gas analysis periodically. Contractor
shall give his recommendations for such analysis, i.e. frequency of test, norms of
acceptance, quantity of oil to be withdrawn, and treatment of CT.
3.17.00 The CT shall have provision for measurement of capacitance and tan delta as erected
at site.
4.00.00 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVTs)
4.01.00 Voltage transformers shall be of capacitor voltage divider type with electromagnetic
unit.
4.02.00 The CVTs shall be thermally and dielectrically safe when the secondary terminals are
loaded with guaranteed thermal burdens.

4.03.00 The electro-magnetic unit (EMU) shall comprise of compensating reactor,

intermediate transformer and protective and damping devices. The oil level indicator
of EMU with danger level marking shall be clearly visible to maintenance personnel
standing on ground.
4.04.00 The secondaries shall be protected by HRC cartridge type fuses for all windings In
addition fuses shall also be provided for protection and metering windings for
connection to fuse monitoring scheme. The secondary terminals shall be terminated
on stud type non-disconnecting terminal blocks via the fuse inside the terminal box of
degree of protection IP: 55. The access to secondary terminals shall be without the
danger of access to high voltage circuit.
4.05.00 The damping device shall be permanently connected to one of the secondary winding
and shall be capable of suppressing ferro-resonance oscillations.
4.06.00 CVTs shall be suitable for high frequency (HF) coupling for power line carrier
communication. Carrier signals must be prevented from flowing into potential
transformer (EMU) metering circuit by means of RF choke/reactor suitable for
effective blocking the carrier signals over the entire frequency range of 40 to 500 kHz.
HF terminal shall be brought out through a suitable bushing and shall be easily
accessible for connection to the coupling filters of the carrier communication
equipment. The HF terminal shall be provided with earthing link with fastener.
4.07.00 A protective surge arrester/spark gap shall preferably be provided to prevent break
down of insulation by incoming surges and to limit abnormal rise of terminal voltage of
shunt capacitor, tuning reactor, RF choke, etc. due to short circuit in transformer
secondary. The details of this arrangement (or alternative arrangement) shall be
furnished by Contractor for Employer's review.
4.08.00 The protection cores shall not saturate at about 1.5 times the rated voltage for a min.
duration of 30 secs.
4.09.00 The accuracy of metering core shall be maintained through the entire burden range
upto total simultaneous burden of 100VA for 765 kV CVTs & 150VA for 132 kV CVTs
respectively on all three windings without any adjustments during operations.
5.00.00 MARSHALLING BOX
5.01.00 Marshaling box shall conform to all requirements as given in Section E12. The wiring
diagram for the interconnection of three phase instrument transformer shall be pasted
inside the box in such a manner so that it is visible and it does not deteriorate with
time. Terminal blocks in the marshaling box shall have facility for star/delta formation,
short circuiting and grounding of secondary terminals. The box shall have enough
terminals to wire all control circuits plus 20 spare terminals.

6.00.00 PARAMETERS FOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
6.01.00 General Parameters
a) One minute power frequency 5 kV

withstand voltage between
secondary terminal and earth
b) Partial discharge level 10 pico Coulombs max.
c) Temperature rise As per IEC 60044
d) Type of insulation Class A
e) Number of cores Five (5): Details are given in table below.
f) Rated frequency 50 Hz
g) System neutral earthing Effectively earthed
h) Installation Outdoor (up right)
i) Seismic acceleration 0.3 g horizontal
j) Number of terminals in marshalling All terminals of control circuits wired upto

box marshalling box plus 20 terminals spare.
6.02.00 765 kV Current Transformers (oil filled type)
a) Rated short time thermal current 50 kA for 1 sec.
b) Rated dynamic current 125 kA (peak)
c) Rated system voltage (Um) 800 kV (rms)
d) Corona extinction voltage (min) As specified in Chapter E-0
e) Radio Interference Voltage at As specified in Chapter E-0
f) Rated insulation levels
i. 1.2/50 micro-sec. impulse 2100 kVp

ii. 250/2500 micro-sec. switching 1550 kVp

surge withstand voltage

(dry & wet)
iii. One minute power frequency 975 kV rms

withstand voltage
g) Rated extended primary current 120% of rated primary current as per SLD
6.03.00 132 kV Current Transformers (Oil filled type)
a) Highest system voltage (um) 145 kV
b) Rated short time thermal current 31.5 kA for 1 sec.
c) Rated dynamic current 80 kA (Peak)
d) Rated insulation level :
i) 1.2/50 micro seconds 650 kV (Peak)

(impulse voltage)
ii) 1 minute (dry and wet) 275 kV (rms)
power frequency withstand voltage
e) Maximum temperature rise at an As per IEC-60044

ambient temperature of 500 C.
f) Radio interference voltage at As specified in Chapter E-0
g) Rated Extended primary Current - 120% of rated primary current as per SLD
h) Partial discharge level immediately 10 picocoulumbs (max.)

After p.f. test
6.04.00 33 kV Current Transformers
a) Highest system voltage (Um) 36 kV
b) Rated short time thermal current 25 kA for 1 sec.
c) Rated dynamic current 62.5 kA (Peak)
d) Rated insulation level :


(impulse voltage)
ii) 1 minute (dry and wet) 70kV (rms)
power frequency withstand
voltage
e) Rated Extended primary Current 120% of rated primary current as per SLD
7.00.00 PARAMETERS FOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
7.01.00 General Parameters
a) Rated frequency 50 Hz
b) System neutral earthing Effective earthed
c) Installation Outdoor
d) Seismic acceleration 0.3 g horizontal
e) System fault level 50/31.5kA for 1 sec for 765/132kV

respectively.
f) Standard reference range of frequencies 96% to 102% for protection and 99% to
for which the accuracies are valid 101% for measurement.
g) High frequency capacitance for Within 80% to 150% of rated entire

carrier frequency range capacitance
h) Equivalent resistance over Less than 40 ohms

entire carrier frequency range
i) Stray capacitance and stray As per IEC:358

conductance of LV terminal over
entire carrier frequency range
j) One minute power frequency

withstand voltage
a) between LV (HF) terminal 10kV rms for exposed terminals or 4 kV

and earth rms for terminals enclosed in a weather
proof box.
b) For secondary winding 2 kV rms

k) Temp. rise over an ambient temp. As per IEC 60044

of 50 deg. C
l) Number of terminals in control All terminals of control circuits wired upto

Cabinet marshalling box plus 10 terminals spare.
m) Rated total thermal burden 750 VA
n) Partial discharge level 10 pico Coulombs max.
o) Number of cores As per details given in Tables below.
P) Rated Voltage factor 1.2 continuous , 1.5 – 30sec
7.02.00 765 kV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
a) Rated system voltage 800 kV (rms)
b) Rated insulation levels
i) One minute power frequency 975 kV rms

withstand voltage
ii) 1.2/ 50 micro sec. impulse 2100kV (peak)
iii) 250/2500 micro sec. switching 1550 kV (peak)

surge withstand voltage (dry & wet)
c) Radio Interference voltage at 266 kV As per the chapter E-0

at frequency range 0.5 to 2 MHz(rms)
d) Corona extinction voltage (min.) As per the chapter E-0
e) HF Capacitance 4400 pf / 8800pf (nominal)
7.03.00 132 kV Voltage Transformers
a) Highest system voltage (um) 145 kV
b) Rated insulation level :


(impulse withstand voltage)
ii) 1 minute (dry and wet) 275 kV (rms)
power frequency withstand
voltage
c) HF capacitance 8800 pF (nominal)
d) Radio interference voltage at As per the chapter E-0
8.00.00 TESTS
The current and voltage transformers shall confirm to type tests and shall be
subjected to routine & acceptance tests in accordance with the relevant IS/IEC. CTs
and CVTs shall also conform to the following additional type tests as applicable:
1) Radio Interference Voltage & Corona test.
2) Thermal withstand test i.e. application of rated voltage and rated current
simultaneously by synthetic circuit (For CT only).
3) Seismic withstand test along with structure for 765kV only.
4) Thermal co-efficient test i.e. measurement of Tan- Delta as a function of
temperature (at ambient, 80 deg. C, 85 deg. C and 90 deg. C) and voltage (at
0.3, 0.7, 1.0 and 1.1 Um/√3) (For CT only).
5) Multiple chopped impulse test on primary winding.
In addition to routine tests as per IEC/IS, measurement of partial discharge in

continuation with power frequency withstand test required for 765KV & 132 kV current
transformer. ISF (Instrument Security Factor) test will be done as part of Routine
acceptance test.

TABLE– IA
CORE DETAILS OF 765 KV CT (3000 A)
Core Application Current Output Accuracy Min. Max. CT Max. exciting

No. Ratio(A) Burden(VA) Class as knee Sec. wdg. current in mA
per IEC 185 point Resistance at knee point
voltage (ohms) voltage
(V)
1 Bus 3000/ - PS 3000/ 15/ 20 on 3000/1
Differential 2000/ 2000/ 10/ TAP
Main 1 1000/ 1000/ 5/ 30 on 2000/1
500/1 500 2.5 TAP
60 on 1000/1
TAP
120 on 500/1
TAP
2 Bus 3000/ - PS 3000/ 15/ 20 on 3000/1

Differential 2000/ 2000/ 10/ TAP
Main 2 1000/ 1000/ 5/ 30 on 2000/1
500/1 500 2.5 TAP
60 on 1000/1
TAP
120 on 500/1
TAP
3 Metering and 3000/ 20 0.2s - - -

synchronizing 2000/ 20
1000/ 20
500/1 20
4 Transformer 3000/ - PS 4500/ 15/ 20 on 3000/1
back up/ 2000/ 3000/ 8/ TAP
Line 1000/ 1500/ 4/ 30 on 2000/1
protection 500/1 750 2 TAP
60 on 1000/1
TAP
120 on 500/1
TAP
5 Trans. 3000/ - PS 4500/ 15/ 20 on 3000/1

Differential/ 2000/ 3000/ 8/ TAP
Line 1000/ 1500/ 4/ 30 on 2000/1
protection 500/1 750 2 TAP
60 on 1000/1
TAP
120 on 500/1
TAP
Note: The rated extended primary current of the CTs shall be 120% continuous of
3000A. ISF for metering core should be less than 10.

TABLE-IB
Core Applicat Current Output Accura Min. Max. Max. exciting

No. ion Ratio(A) Burden cy knee CT current in mA at
(VA) Class point Sec. knee point
as per voltage wdg. voltage
IEC Resist
185
(V) ance
(ohms)
1 Bus 2000/ - PS 2000/ 10/ 30/60
Differential 1000/1 1000 5
Main-1
2 Bus 2000/ - PS 2000/ 10/ 30/60
Main-2
3 Metering 2000/ 20 0.2S - - -
and 1000/ 20
Synch. 500/1 20
4 Trans. 2000/ - PS 2000/ 10/ 30/60

back up/ 1000/ 1000/ 5/ /120
Line 500/1 500 2.5
protection
5 Trans. 2000/ - PS 2000/ 10/ 30/60
Diff./ 1000/ 1000/ 5/ /120
Line 500/1 500 2.5
protection

TABLE-IC
Core Applicat Current Output Accura Min. Max. Max. exciting

No. ion Ratio(A) Burden cy knee CT current in mA at
(VA) Class point Sec. knee point
as per voltage wdg. voltage
IEC Resist
185
(V) ance
(ohms)
1 Bus 1200/ - PS 1200/ 6/ 30/60
Main-1
2 Bus 1200/ - PS 1200/ 6/ 30/60
Main-2
3 Metering 1200/ 20 0.2s - - -
and 600/ 20
Synch. 300/1 20
4 Trans. 1200/ - PS 1200/ 6/ 30/60/120

back up/ 600/ 600/ 3/
Line 300/1 300 1.5
protection
5 Trans. 1200/ - PS 1200/ 6/ 30/60/120
Diff./ 600/ 600/ 3/
Line 300/1 300 1.5
protection

TABLE-ID
CORE DETAILS OF 33 KV CT
CT Core Application Current Output Accuracy Min. Max. CT Max.

No No. Ratio(A) Burden Class as knee Sec. wdg. exciting LOCATION
. (VA) per IEC point Resistance current
voltage (ohms) in mA
(V) at knee
point
voltage
1 1 IBT HV REF 1000/1 --- PS 1000 5 30 IBT HV
NEUTRAL
2 1 IBT LV REF 2000/1 --- PS 2000 10 30 IBT LV
NEUTRAL
2 IBT Backup 2000/1 15 5P20 - - -
E/F
rated current.

TABLE-IIA
CORE DETAILS OF 765 KV CVTs
Particulars Secondary I Secondary II Secondary III
Rated secondary voltage 110 / v 3 110 / v 3 110 / v 3
Application Protection Protection Metering
Accuracy 3P 3P 0.2
Output Burden (minimum) 50 VA 50 VA 50 VA
The accuracy of 0.2 on secondary III should be maintained through the entire burden
range up to total simultaneous burden of 100 VA on all the three windings without
any adjustments during operation.
TABLE-IIB
CORE DETAILS OF 132 KV CVTs
Particulars Secondary I Secondary II Secondary III
Rated secondary voltage 110 / v 3 110 / v 3 110 / v 3
Application Protection Protection Metering
Accuracy 3P 3P 0.2
Output Burden (minimum) 75 VA 75 VA 75 VA
The accuracy of 0.2 on secondary III should be maintained through the entire burden
range up to total simultaneous burden of 150 VA on all the three windings without
any adjustments during operation.

PART-II
CHAPTER – E4:
SURGE ARRESTORS
PART-II
CHAPTER – E4: SURGE ARRESTORS

4.00.00 Fittings and Accessories E4-2
6.00.00 Tests E4-7

CHAPTER- E4: SURGE ARRESTORS
1.00.00 GENERAL
1.01.00 The surge arrestors shall conform in general to IEC-60099-4 and IS:3070 except to
the extent modified in the specification and shall be in accordance with
requirements under Part-I.
1.02.00 Arrestors shall be hermetically sealed units, self supporting construction, suitable for
mounting on lattice/tubular type support structures.
2.01.00 The Surge Arresters (SAs) shall be capable of discharging over-voltages occurring
due to switching of unloaded transformers, reactors and long lines.
2.02.00 The reference current of SAs shall be high enough to eliminate the influence of
grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference voltage. Values and
calculations shall be furnished with offer.
2.03.00 The SAs shall be fully stabilised thermally to give a life expectancy of one hundred
(100) years under site conditions and take care of effect of direct solar radiation.
2.04.00 The SAs shall be suitable for circuit breaker duty cycle in the given system.
2.05.00 The SAs shall protect power transformers, circuit breakers, disconnecting switches,
instrument transformers, shunt reactors, etc with insulation levels specified in this
specification.
2.06.00 The SAs shall be capable of withstanding meteorological and short circuit forces
under site conditions.
3.01.00 Each Surge Arrester (SA) shall be hermetically sealed single phase unit.
3.02.00 The non linear blocks shall be sintered metal oxide material. The SA construction
shall be robust with excellent mechanical and electrical properties.
3.03.00 SAs shall have pressure relief devices and arc diverting ports suitable for preventing
shattering of porcelain housing and to provide path for flow of rated fault currents in
the event of SA failure.
3.04.00 The SA shall not fail due to porcelain contamination.

3.05.00 Seals shall be effectively maintained even when SA discharges rated lightning
current.
3.06.00 Porcelain shall be so coordinated that external flashover will not occur due to
application of any impulse or switching surge voltage upto maximum design value
for SA. The cantilever strength of the insulator shall be minimum 500kg. The
insulator shall meet the bending load test requirements in 4 directions.
3.07.00 The end fittings shall be non-magnetic and of corrosion proof material.
3.08.00 The Contractor shall furnish the following:
a) The heat treatment cycle details with necessary quality checks used for
individual blocks alongwith insulation layer formed across each block.
b) Metalizing coating thickness for reduced resistance between adjacent discs
alongwith procedure for checking the same.
c) Details of thermal stability test for uniform distribution of current on individual
discs.
d) Detailed energy calculations to prove thermal capability of discs.
4.01.00 Each SA shall be complete with insulating base for mounting on structure.
4.02.00 SAs shall be provided with grading and/or corona rings as required.
4.03.00 Self contained discharge counters, suitably enclosed for outdoor use (IP:55 degree
of protection) and requiring no auxiliary or battery supply shall be fitted with each SA
along with necessary connections to SA and earth. Suitable leakage current meters
shall also be supplied in the same enclosure. The reading of milliammeter and
counter shall be visible through an inspection glass panel to a man standing on
ground. A pressure relief vent/suitable provision shall be made to prevent pressure
build up. The earth connection for the Surge Arrestor shall be carried out in such a
manner so that the discharger current path is diverted to earth and the path through
structure is avoided.
4.04.00 The Contractor shall also supply micro-processor based with field compensation
portable maintenance equipment for monitoring resistive current of SA as listed in
Part-I.

5.00.00 PARAMETERS
5.01.00 General
a) System neutral earthing Effectively earthed

b) Installation Outdoor
c) Discharge Current
i) Nominal discharge current 20 kA of 8/20 microsec. wave (For
800 kV) & 10 kA of 8/20 microsec.
wave (For 145kV)
ii) Discharge current at which 20 kA of 8/20 microsec. wave

insulation coord. is done
d) Rated frequency 50 Hz
e) Long duration discharge class 3
f) Current for pressure relief test 50/31.5kA rms for 765/132kV

resptly.
g) Prospective symmetrical fault current 50/40kA rms for 1 second for

765/132kV resptly.
h) Low current long duration test 800 A (for 145KV)

value (2000 micro sec.) 2100 A (for 800KV)
i) Pressure relief class Class A of Table VII of IS:3070 or

equivalent IEC.
j) Partial discharge at 1.05 MCOV Not more than 50 p.C.
(Continuous operating voltage)
k) Siesmic acceleration 0.3 g horizontal
l) Reference ambient temp. 50 deg. C
5.02.00 800 kV class Surge Arrestor
a) Rated system voltage 800 kV
b) Rated arrestor voltage 624 kV

c) Minimum discharge capability 13kJ/kV or corresponding to minimum

discharge characteristics given in
clause m) below whichever is higher.
d) Continuous operating voltage 490 kV rms
(COV) at 50 deg. C
e) Min. Switching surge residual 1180 kVp

voltage at 1 kA
f) Maximum residual voltage at
i) 20kA nominal discharge current 1480 kVp
h) Steep fronted wave residual 1480 kVp

voltage at 10kA
i) High current short duration test 100 kAp

value (4/10 microsec. wave)
j) Switching Impulse withstand As per IEC

voltage of arrestor housing
k) Impulse withstand voltage of arrestor As per IEC

Housing with 1.2/50 micro sec. wave.
l) RIV As specified in Chapter –E0
m) The surge arrestors are provided to protect the following equipment whose
insulation levels are indicated in the table I given below. The contractor shall carry
out the insulation coordination studies for deciding the location of the surge
arrestors.
TABLE – I
S.NO. EQUIPMENT TO BE INSULATION LEVEL

PROTECTED
___________________________________________________________________
LIGHTNING SWITCHING
IMPULSE (kVp) SURGE 250/2500 (kVp)
FOR 765 KV FOR 765kV
SYSTEM SYSTEM
1. Power Transformer  1950  1550

2. Instrument Transformer  2100  1550
3. Reactor  1950  1550
CB/Isolator
- Phase to ground  2100  1550
- Across open  2100  1175

contacts ( 457) ( 650)
n) Surge arrestors shall be capable of discharge on severe re-energisation

switching surges on 800KV, 350KM long line with Surge impedance of 270
ohms and capacitance of 13nf/Km and over voltage factor of 1.9p.u. Surge
arrestor shall be capable of discharging energy equipment to class 5 of IEC for a
800 kV system on two successive operations followed immediately by 50 Hz
energisation with a sequential voltage profile as specified below:
1000 kVp for 3 peaks

910 kVp for 0.1 second
885 kVp for 1 second
866 kVp for 10 seconds
5.03.00 132 kV CLASS SURGE ARRESTOR
a) Rated System voltage 145 kV
b) System neutral earthing Effectively earthed
c) Installation Outdoor
d) Rated arrestor voltage 120 kV (Not less than)
e) Nominal discharge current 10 kA of 8/20 micro sec.
f) Rated frequency 50 Hz
g) Minimum discharge capability 5 kilo joule/kV (referred to rated

arrestor voltage corresponding
to minimum discharge characteristics)
h) Continuous operating voltage 102 kV (rms)

at 500 C.
i) Maximum switching surge 280 kVp

residual voltage (1 kA)
j) Max. residual voltage at
i) 5 kA 310 kVp
ii) 10 kA 330 kVp
k) Max. steep current residual 370 kVp

voltage at 10 kA
l) Long duration discharge class 3

(2 successive shots)
m) Low current long duration test As per IEC

value (2000 micro sec.)
n) High current short duration test 100 kAp

value (4/10 micro sec.)
o) Current for pressure relief test 40 kA (rms)
p) Minimum creepage distance (total0 As specified in Chapter- E0
q) One minute power frequency 275 kV (rms)

withstand voltage of arrestor
housing (dry and wet)
r) Impulse withstand voltage of 650 kV (Peak)

arrestor housing with 1.2/50
micro sec. Wave
s) Pressure relief class Class A of Table VII of IS: 3070 Part-I
t) Radio interference voltage As specified in Chapter- E0
u) Seismic acceleration 0.3g horizontal
v) Partial discharge at 1.05 MCOV Not more than 50 p.c.

(continuous operating voltage)

The surge arrestors are being provided to protect the following equipment whose
insulation levels are indicated in the Table – I given below :
TABLE – I
___________________________________________________________________
SL.NO. EQUIPMENT TO BE INSULATION LEVEL
PROTECTED ______________________________
LIGHTNING IMPULSE
(kVp) FOR 132 kV SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________
1. Power Transformer  550
2. Instrument Trf.  650
3. CB/Isolator
- Phase to ground  650

- Across open contacts  650
___________________________________________________________________
6.00.00 TESTS:
Surge Arrestors shall conform to all type tests as per IEC and shall be subjected to
routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IEC -60099-4.
The resistive current drawn by the arrestor at rated voltage shall be indicated in the
routine test report.

PART-II
CHAPTER – E5: POST INSULATOR

PART-II
CHAPTER – E5: POST INSULATOR
Clause no. Description Page
no.
3.00.00 Tests E5-1

CHAPTER- E5: POST INSULATOR
1.00.00 GENERAL
1.01.00 The post insulators shall conform in general to latest IS:2544 and IEC – 60815,
60168.
2.01.00 Post type insulators shall consist of a porcelain part permanently secured in a metal
base to be mounted on the supporting structures. They shall be capable of being
mounted upright. They shall be designed to withstand any shocks to which they may
be subjected to by the operation of the associated equipment. Only solid core
insulators shall be accepted. Height of post insulator shall be preferably as given in
clause No. 4.00.00 of this section.
2.02.00 The other requirements of insulator as given in Section – E12 shall also be
applicable.
3.00.00 TESTS
3.01.00 In accordance with the stipulations under part-I the post insulators shall conform to
type tests and acceptance, sample and routine tests as per IS:2544, IEC-60168 &
60273.
3.02.00 In addition to acceptance/sample/routine tests as per IS:2544, IEC-60168 & 60273,

the following tests shall also be carried out.
a) Ultrasonic tests on all cutshells as routine check.
b) Visual examination and magnaflux test on all flanges prior to fixing.
c) Check for uniformity of thickness and weight of zinc coating as a sample test from
each lot of flanges prior to fixing.
d) Bending load test shall be carried out at 50% minimum failing load in four directions
as a routine test.
e) Bending load in four directions at 100% minimum bending load guaranteed on

samples as per clause-2.3 of IEC. Subsequently this post insulator shall not be
used.
f) Tests for deflection measurement at 20, 50, 70% of specified minimum failing load
on sample.

3.03.00 The post insulator shall conform to following type tests as applicable according to
voltage class:
a) Switching Impulse withstand test (dry & wet)
b) Lightning Impulse withstand test (dry)
c) Power frequency withstand test (dry & wet)
d) Measurement of RIV
e) Corona extinction voltage test (Only applicable for 400 kV or above )
f) Test for deflection under load.
g) Test for mechanical strength,
4.00.00 PARAMETERS
I. 765 kV class Bus Post Insulator
a) Type Solid core type
b) Voltage class (kV) 800
c) Dry and wet one minute power frequency 830

withstand voltage (kV)
d) Dry impulse withstand positive and +/- 2100

negative (kVp)
e) Wet switching surge withstand voltage (kVp) +/-1550
f) Max. radio interference voltage ( V) As specified in Chapter – E0
g) Corona extinction voltage (kV rms) As specified in Chapter – E0
h) Total min. cantilever strength (kg) 800
i) Min. torsional moment (N m) As per IEC 60273
j) Creepage (mm) As specified in Chapter – E0

k) i) Top p.c.d. (mm) 225

ii) Bottom p.c.d. (mm) 325
l) No. of bolts : Top 4

: Bottom 8
m) Diameter of bolt holes (mm)

: Top M18
: Bottom M18
Note: If corona extinction voltage is to be achieved with the help of corona ring or
any other similar device, the same shall be deemed to be included in the scope of
the bidder without any price implication.
n) Pollution level as per IEC-815 Class III, Heavy
II. 132 kV BUS POST INSULATOR
a) Type Solid core
c) Dry and wet one minute power 275

frequency withstand voltage (kV)
d) Dry impulse withstand positive and 650

negative (kVp)
e) Max. radio interference voltage 1000

(Microvolts) for any frequency
between 0.5 MHz to 2 MHz at voltage
of 92 kV (rms) between phase to ground
f) Total min. cantilever strength (Kg) 600
g) Min. torsional moment (Kg m) 500
h) Total height of insulator (mm) 1500
i) i) Top p.c.d. (mm) 127


j) No. of bolts : Top : 4

Bottom : 4
k) Diameter of bolt holes (mm)

Top : M16
Bottom : M18
III. 33 kV BUS POST INSULATOR
a) Type Solid core
c) Rated Insulation levels
i. Rated one minute power 70 KV (rms)

Frequency withstand voltage
ii. Rated lightning impulse 170 kV (Peak)

Withstand voltage
d) Total min. cantilever strength (kg) As per IEC 60273
e) Min. torsional moment (N m) As per IEC 60273
f) Creepage (mm) min.900mm
g) i) Top p.c.d. (mm) 76

h) No. of bolts : Top : 4

Bottom : 4
i) Diameter of bolt holes (mm)

Top : M12
Bottom : M12

PART-II
CHAPTER—E6: WAVE TRAP

PART-II
CHAPTER—E6: WAVE TRAP
2.00.00 Location of equipment E6-1
3.00.00 Technical requirements E6-1
4.00.00 Wave trap mounting E6-3
5.00.00 Terminal Connector E6-3

CHAPTER- E6: WAVE TRAP
1.00.00 GENERAL
The Wave Trap covered under the package shall conform to IEC 353 or IS:8792,
IS:8793 and relevant IEC/IS Specifications except to the extent modified by the
specification.
2.00.00 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT
2.01.01 Wave Traps as specified under this section shall be installed at the respective
transmission line bays in two phases as required. The foundation shall be provided
for all the three phases however the location of wave trap shall be decided based on
the attenuation results.
3.00.00 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.01.00 Wave Trap shall be inserted into high voltage transmission line to prevent undue
loss of carrier signal for all power system conditions. Its impedance shall be
negligible at power frequency (50 Hz) so as not to disturb power transmission but
shall be relatively high over the frequency band appropriate to carrier transmission.
3.01.01 Wave trap shall consist of a main coil designed to carry continuously the rated
current without exceeding the limit of temperature rise. It shall be supplemented
with a protective device and tuning device.
3.01.02 Wave trap shall be Broad Band tuned for its entire carrier frequency range.
Resistive component of impedance of the Wave trap within its carrier frequency
blocking range shall not be less than 570 ohms.
3.01.03 Wave trap shall be provided with a protective device in the form of lightning arrestor
which shall be designed and arranged such that neither significant alternation in its
protective function nor physical damage shall result from either temperature rise or
the magnetic field of the main coil at continuous rated current or rated short time
current. The protective device shall neither enter into operation nor remain in
operation, following transient actuation by the power frequency voltage developed
across the line trap by the rated short time current. The protective device shall be
shunt connected to the main coil and tuning device.
The lightning arrestor shall be of gapless type. Its rated discharge current shall be
10 kA. Coordination, however, shall be done by taking 20 kA discharge current into
account.
3.01.04 The lightning arrestor provided with the Wave trap of each rating shall fully comply
with the requirements of IS-3070-Part-I (1974)/IEC-60099-4. It shall conform to type

tests as applicable and type test certificate for the same shall be submitted by the
Bidder.
3.01.05 The lightning arrester provided with the Wave trap shall be subject to routine and
acceptance tests as per IEC – 60099.
3.01.06 The Wave trap on 765 kV lines shall show no visual corona at extinction voltage of
508 kV rms. Suitable corona rings shall be incorporated in the line trap for 765 kV.
3.01.07 Wave trap shall be equipped with bird barriers.
3.01.08 Wave trap shall preferably be spray painted with Grey paint.
3.01.09 Wave trap shall conform to IEC - 60353 (latest) fulfilling the following technical
particulars.
a) Rated power frequency 50 Hz

b) Rated system voltage 765 kV
c) Highest system voltage 800 kV
d) Rated continuous current 3150 Amps
at 50degreeC ambient
e) Rated short time current for 1sec. 50 kA
f) Nominal discharge current of 20 kA
protective device
g) Type of tuning Broad Band
h) Rated Blocking band-width 50-500 KHZ for 1.0 mH
90-500 KHZ for 0.5 mH
i) Inductance 1.0 mH / 0.5 mH as required
j) Radio Inteference voltage not more than 2500 micro volts at 508
level for 0.5 MHz to 2.0 MHz kV
k) Corona extinction voltage level 508 kV rms/ (min) -
3.01.10 The Bidder shall indicate continuous current rating of the Wave trap at 65 deg.C
ambient.
3.01.11 In accordance with the requirements stipulated under Part-I, the Wave Trap shall
confirm to following type tests and shall be subjected to routine and acceptance
tests as per IEC-60353.
a) Measurement of inductance of the main coil

b) Measurement of temperature rise
c) Insulation tests
d) Short time current tests
e) Corona Extinction Voltage Measurement for 765kV only.

f) Radio Interference Voltage measurement
4.00.00 WAVE TRAP MOUNTING
4.00.01 The Wave Trap for 765 kV shall be suitable for outdoor pedestal mounting and shall
be mechanically strong enough to withstand the stresses due to maximum wind
pressure of 195 kg/square metre.
4.00.02 For pedestal mounting, each Wave trap shall be mounted on a tripod structure
formed by three solid core type insulators shall be of non-magnetic material.
5.00.00 TERMINAL CONNECTOR
5.00.01 The Wave traps for 765kV shall be suitable for connecting to min 4.5” IPS tube or
Quad ACC Bull conductor as required.
5.00.02 Terminal Connectors shall conform to IS-5561 and shall be in accordance with
requirements stipulated in Section E12.
5.00.03 Terminal Connectors for conductor(s) shall be suitable for either horizontal or
vertical take-off of the conductor(s).
5.00.04 Clamps/connectors shall conform to type test and shall be subject to routine tests
as per IS: 5561. In case of 765 kV, test reports shall be also submitted for following
additional type tests.
a) Visual Corona Extinction Test

b) Radio Interference Voltage Measurement

PART-II
CHAPTER – E7: LIGHTING

PART-II
CHAPTER – E7: LIGHTING
1.00.00 General E7 -1
2.00.00 Codes and Standards E7- 1
3.00.00 Lighting System Description E7- 1
4.00.00 Equipment Description E7-2
5.00.00 Installation E7-13
6.00.00 Earthing of Lighting System E7-18
7.00.00 Quality Assurance program E7-19
8.00.00 Tests E7-19
9.00.00 Commissioning Checks E7-20
10.00.00 Illumination Levels and Type of Fixture E7-21
ANNEXURE-I E7-22
CHAPTER- E7: LIGHTING
1.00.00 GENERAL
1.01.00 This specification covers the general description of design, manufacture and
construction features, testing, supply, installation and Commissioning of the Station
Lighting system equipments for switchyard and control room building.
2.01.00 All standards and codes of practice referred to herein under Part-I, Section-III shall
be the latest edition including all applicable official amendments & revisions as on
date of bid opening. In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS
codes, standards etc.) referred to herein, the former shall prevail. All work shall be
carried out as per the relevant standards & codes.
3.00.00 LIGHTING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.01.00 The Lighting system covers the illumination of various indoor and outdoor areas in
the 765KV/132KV Switchyard, 132KV Substation at MUWPH end and switchyard
control room. The lighting system of various areas shall comprise of one or more of
the following systems:
a) Normal AC Lighting System
b) DC Lighting System
3.02.00 Normal AC Lighting System
Normal AC lighting system 415V, 3Phase, 4wire, will be fed from lighting panels
(LPs) which in turn will be fed from the lighting distribution boards (LDBs)/Switch
board/MCC.
3.03.00 DC Lighting System
At strategic locations, a few lighting fixtures fed from 220V DC supply, shall be to
enable safe movement of operating personnel and access to important control
points during an emergency, when the normal AC system fails. These lighting
fixtures will be fed from 220V DC LDBs which in turn will be fed from DC lighting
panels.
3.03.01 The supply to the DC lighting panels shall be automatically switched ON in case of
loss of AC supply. The DC supply will be automatically switched OFF after about 3
minutes following the restoration of supply to normal AC lighting system.

3.03.02 In addition, emergency DC lighting is to be provided through self contained DC

emergency fixture at strategic locations. The fixtures shall be switched ‘ON’
automatically in case of failure of AC supply.
4.00.00 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
4.01.00 Lighting Fixture, Lamps & Accessories
4.01.01 All lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed for continuous operation for
its life under atmospheric conditions existing at site.
4.01.02 AC lighting fixtures and accessories shall be suitable for operation on 240 V,AC, 50
Hz supply with supply voltage variation of +/-10%, frequency variation of +/-5% and
combined voltage and frequency variation (absolute sum ) of 10% DC lighting
fixtures and accessories shall be suitable for operation on 220 V, with variation
between 190 V & 240 V.
4.01.03 Power factor of fluorescent lamp fixtures shall be not less than 0.90 and that of High
Pressure Sodium Vapour and Mercury Vapour (HPSV & HPMV) lamp fixtures shall
not be less than 0.85. Suitable power factor improvement capacitors shall be
provided for this purpose. Capacitors shall be hermetically sealed to prevent
seepage of moisture.
4.01.04 All lighting fixtures shall be complete with lamp(s), lamp holder (s), terminal blocks,
clamps, locking arrangements, fixing brackets etc. Control gears shall be provided
as applicable / specified. The fixtures shall be fully wired upto terminal block. The
internal wiring of the fixtures shall be done with suitable thermo-plastic or silicon
rubber insulated copper conductor wires of suitable size and type. However, the
normal cross section of conductor shall be not less than 0.5 Sq. mm and minimum
thickness of insulation shall be 0.6 mm. The wiring shall be capable of withstanding
the maximum temperature to which it will be subjected under specified service
conditions without deterioration and affecting the safety of the luminaire when
installed and connected to the supply. All fixing /locking screws, washers, nuts,
brackets, studs etc, shall be zinc plated and passivated.
4.01.05 All fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with terminal blocks of ELMEX-EP/or
Equivalent make inside the fixture for loop in loop out at Fixture. The terminal block
shall be suitable for 4 sq. mm. wire termination.
4.01.06 All lighting fixtures shall be provided with an external, brass/GI earthing terminal
suitable for connecting 14 SWG, GI earthing wire. All metal or metal enclosed parts
of the housing and accessories shall be bonded and connected to the earthing
terminal as so to ensure satisfactory earthing continuity through out the fixture.

4.01.07 The lighting fixtures shall be designed for minimum glare. The finish of the fixtures
shall be such that no bright spots are produced either by direct light source or by
reflection.
4.01.08 Generally all lighting fixtures (except for street light & post top lantern type fixture)
shall be provided with 20 mm dia. conduit knock-out for connection to the incoming
supply.
4.01.09 The diffusers/louvers used in fluorescent fixtures shall be made of impact resistant
polystyrene sheet and shall have no yellowing property over a prolonged period.
4.01.10 Twin fluorescent lamp fixtures shall be wired in lead lag circuit to minimise
stroboscopic effect.
4.01.11 High bay fixtures shall be suitable for pendant mounting and provided with safety
chain. Flood lights shall have suitable base plate/frame for mounting on structural
steel members.
4.01.12 The reflectors shall be manufactured from CRCA sheet steel or aluminium as
specified. The aluminium reflectors shall be made of high purity aluminium sheet,
polished electrochemically brightened and anodized. Alternately ALGLASS finish is
also acceptable.
4.01.13 Lamp holders for fluorescent tubes shall be of spring loaded, low contact resistance,
bi-pin rotor type, resistant to wear and suitable for holding in normal position under
condition of shock and vibration. Live parts of the lamp holder shall not be exposed
during insertion or removal of the lamp or after the lamp has been taken out. Lamp
holders for incandescent, HPMV & HPSV lamps shall be of porcelain, screwed type.
4.01.14 Starters shall have bi-metal electrodes and high mechanical strength. Starters shall
be replaceable without disturbing the reflector or lamps and without use of any tool.
Starter shall have brass contacts and radio interference suppressing capacitor.
4.01.015 Lamps
a) Incandescent, HPMV & HPSV lamps shall be provided with screwed (G.E.S)
type caps.
b) The lamps shall be capable of withstanding small vibrations and the connections
at lead-in wires and filaments/electrodes shall not break under such
circumstances.
c) Incandescent (GLS) lamps shall be of ‘clear’ type unless otherwise specified.
d) The fluorescent lamps shall be 28 watts slim tube type having ‘cool day light’
colour designation.
e) High pressure mercury vapour (HPMV) lamps shall be of elliptical shape, colour
corrected type with special fluorescent coating to increase lumen out put and
improve colour rendition.

f) High pressure sodium vapour (HPSV) lamps shall be of elliptical shape and
provided with external ignitor for rapid restart facility. Halogen lamps shall be of
tungsten filament, quartz glass type with ceramic base.
4.01.16 Ballasts
(a) All HPSV and HPMV lamp fixtures shall be provided with wire-wound ballasts.
All fluorescent fixtures except type’FR2 shall be provided with electronic
ballasts. Type FR2 fixtures shall be provided with wire-wound ballasts.
(b) Wire-wound Ballasts shall have annealed copper wire wound coil, electrical
grade silicon sheet steel laminations and hermetically sealed with suitable
insulating compound housed in sheet steel enclosure finished stove enamelled
grey outside. Class of insulation shall be suitable for temp. rise of winding. End
connnections and taps shall be brought out in a suitable terminal block rigidly
fixed to the ballast enclosure. Ballast shall be suitable for use on nominal
voltage of 240 V +/- 10%, 50 Hz supply. Ballast for HPSV and HPMV lamps
shall be provided with tap settings of 220 & 240 V. Separate ballast shall be
provided for each lamp in case of multi-lamp fixtures. Ballasts shall be free from
hum.
(c) Electronic ballasts shall be capable of satisfactory performance in adverse
environment like that of thermal power station. Electronic ballasts shall consists
of AC/DC Convertor, high frequency power oscillator and low pass filter. The
ballast shall be suitable for use on nominal voltage of 240 V+ 10%, 50 Hz
supply. The filter circuit shall suppress the feed back of high frequency signals
to the mains. The ballast shall be rated for 28 W fluorescent fixtures.
4.01.17 Ignitors for HPSV lamps shall be of solid state electronic type.
4.01.18 Controlgear box compartment for HPSV & HPMV fixtures shall be complete with
ballast, capacitor, electronic ignitor (for HPSV lamps only) etc. fully wired upto
terminal block, housed in cast aluminium or CRCA sheet steel enclosures as
specified, finished powder coated grey of shade 631 of IS:5. The box shall be
provided with hinged door and neoprene/synthetic rubber gasket to achieve IP-54
degree of protection.
4.01.19 Lighting fixtures of Philips/Bajaj/Crompton Greaves make shall be acceptable.

Fixtures of any other make shall be subject to Employer’s approval.
4.01.20 Neoprene/synthetic rubber gasket shall be provided to achieve specified degree of

protection. All outdoor fixtures shall be weather proof type (IP-55 as per IS:2147).
4.01.21 Flood light fixtures shall be provided with graduated disc facilities for aiming angle of
luminaire.

4.01.22 Self Contained Emergency lighting fixtures (Type PF) shall be automatic, totally
enclosed single unit suitable to receive 240 V+10% AC, 50 Hz supply. The fixtures
shall switch ‘ON’ automatically in the event of failure of AC supply. The unit shall
comprise of 1.6 mm thick CRCA M.S. sheet enclosure, finished stove enamelled
grey outside, accommodating 6/12 Volt Nickel-Cadmium batteries, battery charger,
2 x 10W fluorescent lamps, reflector etc. The unit shall be complete with mounting
brackets suitable for mounting on wall/column. Battery shall be rated for operation
of 2 x 10W fluorescent lamps continuously for 4 hours. Nickel-Cadmium Battery
shall be of NTPC approved make.
4.01.23 Fans & Regulators
a) Ceiling Fans shall be suitable for operation on 240 V, 50 Hz, AC supply

comprising of class ‘F’ insulated copper wound single phase motor, 1200mm
sweep, aerodynamically designed well balanced MS blades (3 Nos.), down rod,
die cast aluminium housing, capacitor, suspension hook, canopies etc. finished
in stove enameled white. Power factor of fans shall not be less than 0.9.
b) Fan regulators shall be conventional wire-wound type suitable for operation on

240 V AC supply. Cost of regulator shall be included in cost of ceiling fan.
c) Fan & regulators shall have ISI mark and shall be of NTPC approved make.
4.02.00 Lighting Panels (LPs)
4.02.01 Lighting panels shall be constructed out of 2 mm thick CRCA sheet steel. The door
shall be hinged and the panel shall be gasketted to achieve specified degree of
protection. The panel shall be provided with terminal blocks for incoming and
outgoing circuits, earthing terminals, M.S. mounting brackets suitable for surface
mounting on wall/column/structure, allen keys with bolts as locking arrangements,
circuit directory plate & circuit diagram fitted on the inside of the door etc.
Removable gland plates shall be provided for entry of cables/conduits. For outdoor
type panel a canopy shall be provided slope towards the rear side of the panel.
4.02.02 Wiring inside the panel shall be carried out with 1100 V grade. PVC insulated
stranded copper wires of adequate size. On both ends of each wire engraved
identification ferrules shall be provided.
4.02.03 All MCBs/Isolators/Switches/Contactors etc. shall be mounted inside the panel and
a bakelite/ fibre glass sheet shall be provided inside the main door such that the
operating knobs of MCBs etc., shall project out of it for safe operation against
accidental contact.
4.02.04 Equipment mounted inside the panel shall be provided with individual labels with
equipment designation/rating. Front of the panel shall be provided with label

engraved with designation of the panel as furnished by the employer. Labels shall
be made of 3 ply lamicoid/engraved PVC having white letters on black background.
4.02.05 Terminal bocks shall be 750 V grade, clip-on stud type, moulded in melamine,
suitable for terminating multicore 35 or 70 Sq. mm. stranded aluminium conductor
incoming cable and 10 Sq. mm. stranded aluminium conductor for each outgoing
circuits voltage. All terminals shall be shrouded, numbered and provided with
identification strip for the feeders.
4.02.06 MCB’s shall be current limiting type with magnetic and thermal release suitable for
manual closing and automatic tripping under fault condition. MCB’s shall have short
circuit interrupting capacity of 9 KA rms. MCB knob shall be marked with ON/OFF
indication. A trip free release shall be provided to ensure tripping on fault even if the
knob is held in ON position. MCB terminal shall be shrouded to avoid accidental
contact.
4.02.07 Isolators of AC lighting panels shall be of TPN, 63 A, continuous duty, load make-
break type suitable for 415 V, 3 phase 4 wire system. Isolator knob shall be
marked with ON/OFF indication. Terminals shall be shrouded to avoid accidental
contact. The isolator shall be suitable for withstanding let through energy of 125 A
HRC fuse.
4.02.08 DC switches shall be rotary type, 2 pole, continuous duty, load break type, quick
make quick break, suitable for 220 V DC, 2 wire system. Switch knob shall be
provided with ON/OFF indication.
4.02.09 Fuses shall be of HRC plug in type complete with fuse fittings. Fuse fittings shall
incorporate fully insulated shrouded contacts. Visible indication of operation of fuse
shall be provided.
4.02.10 Contactors shall be triple pole, air break, electromagnetic type, provided with 2 NO
and 2 NC auxiliary contacts. The coil shall be suitable for 240 V AC/ 220 V DC
supply as required. The main contacts shall be silver plated.
4.02.11 Synchronous timers shall be quartz controlled electronic type, complete with
rechargeable nickel cadmium cell, 24 hours range day dial, NO/NC contacts etc.
and suitable for operation on 240 AC supply.
4.02.12 The exterior side of panel, shall be powder coated with smoke grey, shade 692 of
IS:5 and the interior side of the panels shall be white.
4.02.13 Lighting Panels shall be of following types:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TYPE INCOMER OUTGOING DETAIL OF CONTENTS
FEEDER FEEDERS
LP-1 1No. 415V,63A, 18Nos.,20A, 415V,63A AC2 duty
TPN Isolator 240V MCB contactor and Synchronous
(3½Cx70sq.mm timer of 24 hour range 10A,
cable) 240V selector switch,
fuse, etc. outdoor type and
IP:55 degree of protection
LP-2 1No. 415V,63A, 9Nos.,20A, 415V,63A AC2 duty contactor

TPN Isolator 240V MCB and Synchronous timer of 24
(3½Cx35sq.mm hour Range 10A, 240V
cable) selector switch, Fuse, etc.
outdoor type and IP:55
degree of protection
LP-D1 1No. 220V, 32A, 6Nos.,16A 220V,32A DC contactor,

DP isolator 220V DP Fuse, etc. outdoor type and
Switch & Fuse IP:55 degree of protection
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.03.00 Switch Boxes
4.03.01 Switch boxes shall be made of 1.6 mm thick, MS sheet with 3 mm. thick decorative,
bakelite/perspex cover. Switchbox shall be hot dip galvanised, provided with
earthing terminal, mounting holes and screws, specified number of conduit
knockouts on both the top and the bottom sides etc. The switch boxes shall be
suitable for surface/flush mounting.
4.03.02 Switches shall be Piano Key Type single pole, quick make quick break, suitable for
operation on 240 V AC supply and shall be of reputed make subject to employer’s
approval.
4.03.03 Sockets shall be of 3 pin type, suitable for 240 V AC supply.
4.03.04 Switch box shall be adequately sized to accommodate switch/fan regulators/sockets

and terminal blocks. All switch box mounted items shall be fully wired upto terminal
blocks located inside the box by 650 V grade PVC insulated flexible copper wire.

4.03.05 Terminal blocks provided for all incoming and outgoing wires shall be of 1100 V
grade, moulded in melamine, suitable for loop-in loop-out of 10 sq. mm. stranded
aluminium wire and tap off of 1.5 sq.mm. copper wire.
4.03.06 Switch boxes shall be of following types :

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NTPC Switch Fan Socket
TYPE No. Regulator*
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SWB 1 5 A - 3 Nos. - 5A - 1.No.
SWB 2* 5 A - 5 Nos. 1 5A - 1.No.
SWB 3* 5 A - 7 Nos. 3 5A - 1.No
* Space provision shall be kept for fan regulator in switch boxes.
4.04.00 Receptacles
4.04.01 Receptacles boxes shall be fabricated out of MS sheet of 2mm thick and hot dip
galvanised or of die-cast aluminium alloy of thickness not less than 2.5 mm. The
boxes shall be provided with two nos. earthing terminals, and gasket to achieve
degree of protection, terminal block for loop-in loop-out, of wire/cable of specified
size, mounting brackets suitable for surface mounting on wall/column/structure,
conduit entry/gland plate etc.
4.04.02 The On/Off switches shall be rotary type, heavy duty, double break, AC 23 category,
suitable for AC supply.
4.04.03 Plug & socket shall be of shrouded die-cast aluminium. Socket shall be provided
with lid safety cover.
4.04.04 Robust mechanical interlock shall be provided for receptacles type RA such that the
switch can be put ON only when the plug is fully engaged and plug can be
withdrawn only when the switch is in Off position.
4.04.05 Wiring inside the box shall be carried out with 1100 V grade PVC insulated stranded
aluminium/copper wire of adequate size.
4.04.06 Terminal block shall be of 1100 V grade, clip on stud type, moulded in Malamine,
suitable for terminating specified cable size. All the terminals shall be shrouded.
4.04.07 Receptacles shall be of following types :

NTPC Item Description
Type Switch Socket Type & Terminal Block

No. rating & plug rating make of size
plug & Socket
RA 20 A, SP 20A, 3 pin NTPC 1-4 way, suitable

240V AC 240 V AC appd. for loop-in loop-
(Industrial) make out of 10 sq.mm.
alu. Conductor
RB 15-A, S.P 5A+15A, NTPC

240V AC 6 Pin appd. make
decorative
Piano-key
Type Switch
4.05.00 Junction Boxes
4.05.01 Junction box for outdoor type lighting fixtures shall be deep drawn or fabricated
type made of 1.6 mm thick CRCA Sheet. The box shall be hot dip galvanised,
provided with terminal blocks, earthing terminals, mounting bracket and screws,
conduit knockouts on three sides etc. conforming to class of protection IP:55. The
J.B. shall be of following types suitable for surface/flush mounting on
wall/ceilings/structures. The J.B. cover shall be hinged and bolted with captive nuts
and bolts. Terminal block shall be stud type. All the junction boxes to be used indoor
shall be made of fire retardant material such as thermoplastic or thermosetting or
FRP type.
___________________________________________________________________
NTPC Terminal block size Remarks
Type No.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
JB-F 1.No-2 way, suitable for loop-in
Loop-out upto 2 numbers 10 sq.
mm. aluminium conductor and
tap off of 1.5 Sq. mm. copper
conductor
JB-FE -DO- Epoxy coated Instead of

Galvanised, 50 Microns
Shall be coated on surface

4.05.02 Fuses shall be HRC, plug in type, complete with bakelite fuse fittings.
ON/OFF switch shall be TPN, rotary type, load break suit able for 415V AC system.
4.05.03 Terminal blocks shall be of 1100 V grade clip-on, stud type molded in melamine.
The terminals shall be shrouded and numbered.
4.06.00 Conduits, Fittings & Accessories
4.06.01 Conduits offered shall be complete with fittings and accessories (like tees, elbows,
bends, check nuts, bushings, reducers, enlargers, couplings caps, nipples, etc.).
4.06.02 Rigid Steel Conduits
i) Rigid steel conduits conforming to IS : 9537 Part-I & II shall be suitable for heavy
mechanical stresses, threaded on both sides and threaded length shall be
protected by zinc rich paint. Conduits shall be smooth from inside and outside .
It shall be possible to pass wooden ball in a straight length of conduit. Diameter
of ball shall be 2 mm less than the internal dia of conduit. Conduit shall be
plugged by PVC caps for storage and transportation.
ii) Outside and inside surfaces of conduits shall be hot dip galvanized and shall
have high protection against corrosive and polluting substances.
iii) For installation in corrosive areas, conduits shall be of epoxy coated MS.
iv) Fittings and accessories for conduits shall also be hot dip galvanised. However
for corrosive areas accessories & fittings shall have additional epoxy coating.
v) Salient Dimensional parameters of conduit fittings and accessories shall be as

follows with symbolic alphabets bearing the meaning as given in respective IS.
4.06.03 Flexible Steel Conduits
Flexible conduit shall be 16mm dia. water proof and rust proof made of heat
resistant lead coated steel. Conduit diameter shall be uniform throughout its length.
Internal surface of the conduit shall be free form burrs and sharp edges. Conduit
shall be complete with necessary accessories for proper termination of the conduit
with junction boxes and lighting fixtures. Conduits shall be of PLICA make or
approved equivalent.
4.06.04 Pull-out Boxes
Pull out boxes shall be provided at approximately 4 (four) metre interval in a conduit
run .Boxes shall be suitable for mounting on Walls, Columns, Structures, etc. The

bolts, nuts, screws, etc. required for the installation shall be included in the
installation rates. Pull-out boxes shall have cover with screw and shall be provided
with good quality gasket lining. Pull out boxes used outdoor shall be weather proof
type suitable for IP :55 degree of protection and those used indoor shall be suitable
for IP :52 degree of protection. Pull out box & its cover shall be hot dip galvanised.
The pull out boxed shall be suitable for surface flush mounting on wall / ceiling.
Bidder shall include the cost of pull out boxes in the installation rates for conduits &
accessories.
4.07.00 Lighting Wires
Lighting wires shall be 1100 V grade, light duty PVC insulated unsheathed,
stranded copper/aluminium wire for fixed wiring installation. Colour of the PVC
insulation of wires shall be Red, Yellow, Blue and Black for R,Y,B phases & neutral,
respectively and white & gray for DC positive & DC negative circuits, respectively.
4.08.00 Lighting Poles
4.08.01 The various lighting fixtures complete with lamps and accessories for the outdoor of
switchyard shall be installed on the lighting masts and lighting poles along the road.
4.08.02 The poles shall be of ERW tubes of specified lengths, stepped tubular or swaged
tubular and joined together. Poles shall be smooth cylindrical and swan neck or
straight as specified. Poles shall be complete with base plates & taper plugs, and
necessary pipe reducer/fixing brackets for fixing the light fixture.
Lighting poles shall be of following types.

___________________________________________________________________
NTPC Overall Pole Overhang Application
Type No. Height projection
A1 13m 1.2m For single street Light fixture.

C1 11m - For flood light fixture
C2 13m - For flood light fixture
E1 4m - For post top lanterns.
___________________________________________________________________
4.08.03 Lighting poles shall be painted with two coats of red Oxide and Zinc chromate in
Synthetic compound primer on the exposed outside surface and with Bituminous
paint all along the inside of the pole and outside portion which shall be embedded in
foundation at manufacturing stage.

4.09.00 Lighting Mast
Lighting Mast shall be of continuously tapered polygonal cross section hot dip
galvanised presenting a pleasing appearance. The Mast shall be of 30M height with
lantern carriage to enable raising/lowering for ease of maintenance, including the
Head Frame, Double Drum Winch, continuous stainless steel wire rope, in built
power tool, luminaires, suitable aviation warning light, lightning alongwith necessary
power cables within the mast. The mast shall be delivered only in three/ four
sections & shall be joined together by slip stressed fit method at site. No site
welding or bolted joints shall be done on the mast.
a) The Mast together with the fixtures shall be capable of withstanding the
appropriate wind loads as per IS: 875. The Mast shall be fabricated from
special steel plates conforming to BS-EN10-025 and folded to form a polygonal
section.
b) Lantern Carriage shall be fabricated suitably and hot dip galvanised for fixing
and holding flood light fixtures and their control gear boxes. Lantern carriage
shall be suitable for mounting 16 nos. twin 400W HPSV flood light fixtures.
c) Junction box shall be weather proof conforming to IP: 55 and made of cast
aluminium and mounted on the carriage to facilitate interconnection to lighting
fixtures. A suitable winch arrangement shall be provided to lower & raise the
Lantern Carriage Assembly.
d) Winch shall be of completely self sustaining type without the need for brake
shoe, springs or clutches. The min. working load shall not be less than 750 kg.
The winch drum shall be grooved to ensure perfect seat for stable and tidy rope
lay with no chances for slippage. Winch shall be operated by an internally
mounted three phase motor/power tool with necessary reduction gear
mechanism. A handle for manual operation of winch shall also be provided. An
adequate door opening shall be provided at the base of the Mast.
e) A timer shall be provided in the Mast for switching ON & OFF the luminaires.
f) A finial (heavy duty, hot dip galvanized) with a height of 1.2M shall be provided
at the centre of the head frame for providing lighting protection. It shall be
solidly bolted with the mast body to provide a conducting path. Earthing
terminals shall be provided for earthing the mast.
4.10.00 PAINTING
4.10.01 All sheet steel work for lighting panels, lighting fixtures etc. shall be treated in tanks
in accordance with IS 6005. Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust
and scale shall be removed by pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be

washed in running water and rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. After
phosphating the surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated. Treatment as per IS:6005
shall be provided. Two coats of lead oxide primer followed by powder painting with
final shade of 692 of IS:5 shall be done.
4.10.02 All welds, bolt holders, conduit/cable entry holes etc. made during installation shall
be wire brushed and touched up with metal primer of lead oxide and zinc chromate
in synthetic medium..
4.11.00 GALVANISING
4.11.01 Galvanising of switch boxes, junction boxes, conduits, other steel components and
accessories shall conform to IS: 2629 and IS: 2633. Galvanising shall be uniform,
clean, smooth, continuous and free from acid spots. Should the galvanising of the
samples be found defective, the entire batch of steel shall have to be regalvanised
at Contractor’s cost after pickling.
4.11.02 The amount of zinc deposit over threaded portion of bolts, nuts, screws and
washers shall be as per IS: 1367 (Part-13). The removal of extra zinc on threaded
portion of components shall be carefully done to ensure that the threads shall have
the required zinc coating on them.
5.00.00 INSTALLATION
5.01.00 Lighting Fixture Installation
5.01.01 Lighting fixture of appropriate type as per lighting layout drawings shall be installed
by the Contractor. The type of mounting will generally be indicated on the layout
drawings. The exact mounting will be decided at site depending upon the actual
space/other facilities available at site. Lighting fixtures shall not be suspended
directly from the junction box in the main conduit run.
5.01.02 Wooden plugs in walls and ceilings for fixing of lighting fixtures and accessories are
not acceptable. A suitable fool-proof method preferably using nylon rawl plug for
fixing these shall be offered and this shall be subject to the Employer’s approval.
5.01.03 The lighting fixtures complete with lamps and accessories for the outdoor
switchyard area shall be installed on lighting/lightning masts and lighting poles.
Flood lights shall be mounted on steel base of structures/walls. Fixing slots shall be
provided to turn the fixture by about 5 deg. on both sides. Bolts shall be tightened
with spring washers. Terminal connection to the flood lights shall be made through
flexible-conduits.

5.01.04 In the rooms where false ceiling is provided the lighting fixtures shall be supported
separately by false ceiling grid or roof over false ceiling and not by the ceiling board.
5.01.05 The installation of lighting fixtures shall include the supply of all steel brackets,
channels, angles, supporting, & anchoring material and hardware, steel
brackets/hangers for bridging the gap above false ceiling and other accessories.
5.01.06 Fan clamps shall be rigid enough and shall be made to suit the position suitable for
reinforced concrete roofs or steel structures as required. Suspension rod shall be of
adequate strength to withstand the dead and impact forces imposed on it.
5.01.07 Ballasts which, produce humming sound after commissioning at site shall be
replaced free of cost by the contractor.
5.01.08 All steel installation accessories shall be brushed-up and shall be painted with red
lead primer followed by two coats of aluminium paint/enamel paint to the satisfaction
of Project manager.
5.02.00 Lighting Panel Installation
5.02.01 Lighting panel shall be mounted at a height of 1200 mm from floor level.
5.03.00 Installation of Switch Boxes, Receptacles and Junction Boxes
5.03.01 Switch boxes, Receptacles and Junction boxes shall be adequately

supported/mounted on wall/column by means of anchor fasteners/expandable bolts
or shall be mounted on angle/plate or other structural supports fixed to
floor/wall/ceiling.
5.01.02 In office areas and control rooms, switch boxes shall be flush mounted in wall and
junction boxes shall be recess mounted.
5.03.03 Mounting height of switch boxes and receptacles from floor level shall be as
follows :
___________________________________________________________________
S.No. Item Mounting Location
Height
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Light control switch box 1500 mm -
2. 20 A Receptacles 900 mm Outdoor location
3. 5/15 A Receptacles 500 mm Indoor location
5.03.04 Necessary conduit /cable entry shall be made by drilling/punching during installation
depending on the requirement. No gas cutting shall be used.

5.04.00 Conduit Installation
5.04.01 In corrosive areas like Battery room, water treatment plant, etc. only epoxy coated
MS conduit and accessories shall be installed for wiring purpose.
5.04.02 All accessories/fittings required for making the installation complete shall include
tees, elbows, check nuts, brass or galvanised steel end caps, pull boxes, saddles,
spacers and required supporting steel work.
5.04.03 In rooms with false ceiling, conduits shall be embedded in the wall. Embedded
conduits shall be securely fixed in position to preclude any movement. For
embedded conduits fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be avoided and all
curves shall be made bending the conduits itself. Spacing of embedded conduit
shall be such as to permit flow of mortar between them and in no case shall be less
than 40 mm. Embedded conduits shall have a minimum mortar cover of 50 mm.
Positioning and ensuring proper alignment during concreting by other agencies shall
be the responsibility of the contractor.
5.04.04 All openings in the floor/wall/ceiling etc, made for conduit installation shall be sealed
and made water proof.
5.04.05 Size of conduit shall be selected considering no. of wires drawn in line with IS: 732
and as indicated below.
Size of the Conduit (in mm)
Size of the Wire 20 25 40
Maximum Number of Wire
1.5 Sq.mm. 5 10 21
2.5 Sq.mm. 5 8 19
4 Sq.mm. 3 6 16
6 Sq.mm. 2 5 12
10 Sq.mm. - 4 8
5.04.06 For long conduit runs pull out boxes shall be provided at suitable intervals not
exceeding 4 m to faciliate wiring. However pull out boxes need not to be provided
wherever junction box exists in circuit.
5.04.07 Conduits shall be securely terminated at lighting panels, switch boxes, junction
boxes/lighting fixtures by proper fasterning with a lock nut on insde and outside.
The number of conduit s terminating at lighting panel shall not exceed the
permissible number considering the glanding area of lighting panel. Conduit
termination shall be made water and vermin proof.
5.04.08 Conduit lengths shall be jointed by screwed couplers. Running thread equal to
twice the length of coupling shall be provided on any one length to facilitate easy

dismantling. The contractor shall have at site die for threading conduit. All field
threaded ends shall be reamed after threading and anti-corrosive paint applied.
Conduits shall be cleanly cut. The cut ends shall be within three (3) degree of
square with a conduit axis. Cut ends shall be reamed and all burrs and sharp edges
removed. Conduit joints and connections shall be made thoroughly water-tight and
rust-proof by application of the thread compound which will not insulate the joints.
5.04.09 Conduits shall be kept, wherever possible, at least 300 mm away from hot pipes,
heating device etc.
5.04.10 Slip joint shall be provided when conduits cross structural expansion joints or where
long run of exposed conduits are installed so that temperature change will cause no
distortion due to expansion or contraction of conduit run.
5.04.11 Field bends shall have a minimum radius of four (4) times the conduit diameter. All
bends shall be free of kinks, indentations or flattened surfaces. Heat shall not be
applied in making any conduit bend. For bending of conduits, bending machine
shall be arranged at site by the Contractor to facilitate cold bend. The bends formed
shall be smooth.
5.04.12 The entire metallic conduit system shall be electrically continuous and thoroughly
grounded. When slip joints are used, suitable bonding shall be provided among the
joint to ensure a continuous ground circuit. G.I. Pull wire of adequate size shall be
laid in all conduits before installation.
5.04.13 All conduits installed outdoor shall be sloped towards pull boxes, hand
holes/manholes for drainage. Low points of conduits not terminating in pull boxes,
hand holes/manholes shall be provided with weep holes for drainage. Care shall be
taken to see that no rough edge is left around the weep holes. Where no provision
for drainage can be made, both ends of conduit shall be sealed after cable is laid
through. Minimum slope of 1 in 400 shall be provided.
5.04.14 Each conduit run shall be marked with its designation as indicated on the drawings.
Identifications shall be by means of painting so located that each run of conduit is
readily identified at each end. Where conduits terminate at panels, switch boxes,
junction boxes, or other enclosures, the designations shall also be painted on the
inside of the enclosure adjacent to the conduits.
5.05.00 Lighting Pole (8 m high)
5.05.01 Installation of poles shall include construction of required foundation and all other
associated civil works.
5.05.02 For lighting Poles M15 PCC foundation shall be made for planting depth of minimum
1/6th of the pole height.

5.05.03 Junction box shall be fixed to the pole with ‘U’ clamps for wiring. 25 mm dia holes
shall be made on poles for wiring of lighting fixtures from junction box.
5.05.04 Flood light fixtures shall be mounted on galvanised M.S base making use of shop
drilled holes or by suitable clamps. No cutting or drilling of galvanised structure is
permitted. For mounting flood light fixtures on poles, required supporting frame work
shall be made.
5.05.05 For loop-in loop out of the cables, 50 mm dia G.I. conduits with minimum 500 mm
radius shall be laid along pole mast embedding in PCC foundation. The 50 dia G.I.
conduit shall be part of installation.
5.05.06 G.S. Earthing bolt (Size M6) shall be welded to pole/mast for earthing pole/mast.
Fixture and junction box shall be inter connected by earthing wire to pole/mast
earthing bolt. Earth connection between pole/mast and earth electrode shall be
made by 25x3 mm GS flat. Welding between GS flat and electrode shall be
provided with protective coating.
5.05.07 2 C X 2.5 mm2 cable from street lighting pole JB to the lighting fixture, 4 CX 16
mm2 cable from the lighting mast JB-M to JB-M1 and 2 C X 2.5 mm2 cable for
wiring of fixtures on top of the mast shall be laid and terminated by the Contractor.
5.05.08 Lighting poles shall be painted with two coats of aluminium paint after completion of
installation.
5.06.00 Wiring Installation
5.06.01 Wiring installation of various areas between lighting panels, switch boxes, junction
boxes, fixtures, fans, receptacles etc. shall be done in G.I. conduits.
5.06.02 Lighting fixtures shall generally be group controlled directly from lighting panel.
However, in office areas, control shall be provided through switch boxes.
5.06.03 A junction box with two way terminal block of suitable size shall be provided near
the fixture except the fluorescent fixtures and last fixture in a circuit for loop -in-loop-
out and T-off connection.
5.06.04 All wires in a conduit shall be drawn simultaneously. No subsequent drawing is

permissible. Call bell wiring in office area shall also be done by the Contractor.
5.06.05 Wires shall not be pulled through more than two equivalent 900 bends in a single
circuit run. Wherever required, suitable conduit junction boxes/pull boxes shall be
provided. All types of wiring, concealed or unconcealed shall be capable of easy
inspection.

5.06.06 Receptacles and lighting circuit shall be fed from different circuits. The switch
controlling these circuits shall be on the phase wire of the circuits.
5.06.07 A.C. normal and DC system wiring shall run throughout in separate conduits.
5.06.08 Wiring shall be spliced only at junction boxes/terminal blocks. Maximum two wires
shall be connected at each terminal. In vertical run of conduit the wires shall be
suitably supported by means of wooden/hard rubber plugs at each pull/junction
box.
5.06.09 For group controlled of lighting fixtures, single phase receptacles and switch boxes,
aluminium wire of 4/6/10 sq. mm. shall be used from lighting panel as circuit wiring,
as applicable. However, T-off connection to the lighting fixture shall be done by 1.5
sq.mm. copper.
5.06.10 The wiring between switch box and lighting fixtures and fans shall be done by 1.5
sq.mm. copper wire.
5.06.11 All lighting wires shall be crimped using solderless crimping type tinned copper lugs
suitable for the specified type of terminal block.
5.07.00 Ceiling Fans and Regulators
5.07.01 The contractor shall install the ceiling fans and regulators at suitable locations.
The exact locations will however, be decided at site in consultation with Project
manager.
5.07.02 The fan regulator shall be mounted on the lighting control switch box provided in
that area.
5.07.03 Hook along with rubber bush shall be supplied and grouted in ceiling for mounting
the fan. All necessary, material and hardware for installation shall be supplied by
the Contractor.
6.00.00 EARTHING OF LIGHTING SYSTEM
6.01.01 Lighting panels, etc. shall be earthed by two separate and distinct connections with
main earthing system. Switch boxes, junction boxes, lighting fixtures, fans, single
phase receptacles etc. shall be earthed by means of separate earth continuity
conductor. The earth continuity conductor 14 SWG GI wire shall be run alongwith
each conduit run. Cable armours shall be connected to earthing system at both the
ends.

6.01.02 Earthing conductors shall be free from pitting laminations, rust scale and other
mechanical defects.
6.01.03 Connection between earth leads and equipment shall normally be bolted type.
Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connections. Equipment
bolted connections after being tested and checked shall be painted with anti-
corrosive paint/compound.
6.01.04 Earthing conductors along their run on column, walls, etc. shall be supported by
suitable welding/cleating at an interval of 1000 mm.
6.01.05 20 mm dia M.S. electrode of 3 meter long shall be embedded below permanent
moisture level for earthing every lighting pole and mast.
5.01.06 On completion of installation, continuity of earth conductors shall be checked.
7.00.00 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM
Bidder shall furnish detailed Quality Assurance Programme and Quality Plans for all
materials and accessories to be supplied and installed under the scope of the
specification as per General Technical Conditions of technical specification. The
Quality Plans shall include all tests/checks as per relevant National/International
Standards and the requirements of this specification including tests listed under
clause 8.0.0 of this Section.
8.00.00 TESTS
8.01.00 All the equipment, device and materials being supplied shall be type tested type as
per relevant IS.
8.02.00 Acceptance Test and Routine Test
8.02.01 All lighting fixtures, lamps shall be subjected to acceptance and routine test, as per
relevant specified standards.
8.02.02 Junction boxes, switch boxes, receptacle enclosure etc. shall be subjected to
physical and dimensional checks.
8.03.00 Galvanizing Tests
8.03.01 The quality of galvanizing shall be smooth, continuous, free from flux stains and
shall be inspected visually.
8.03.02 In addition following tests shall be conducted as acceptance tests.

i) Uniformity of coating - The coating of any article shall withstand for 1minute dips
in standard copper sulphate solution without the formation of an adherent red
spot of metallic copper upon the basic metal.
ii) The quality of cadmium/zinc plating on items with screw threads shall be free
from visible defects such as unplated areas, blisters and modules and shall be
inspected visually.
iii) In addition, the plating thickness shall be determined microscopically/chemically

or electronically.
9.00.00 COMMISSIONING CHECKS
9.01.00 On completion of installation work, the Contractor shall request the Project manager
for inspection and test with minimum of fourteen (14) days advance notice.
9.02.00 The Project manager shall arrange for joint inspection of the installation for
completeness and correctness of the work. Any defect pointed out during such
inspection shall be promptly rectified by the Contractor.
9.03.00 The installation shall be then tested and commissioned in presence of the Project
manager.
9.04.00 The contractor shall provide all, men material and equipment required to carry out
the tests.
9.05.00 All rectifications repair or adjustment work found necessary during inspection,
testing and commissioning shall be carried out by the Contractor without any extra
cost. The handing over the lighting installation shall be effected only after the
receipt of written instruction from the Employer/his authorised representative.
9.06.00 The testing shall be done in accordance with the applicable Indian Standards and
codes of practices. The following tests shall be specifically carried out for all lighting
installation.
a. Insulation Resistance.
b. Testing of earth continuity path.
c. Polarity test of single phase switches.
d. Functional checks.
9.07.00 The lighting circuits shall be tested in the following manner :
a. All switches ON and consuming devices in circuit, both poles connected

together to obtain resistance to earth.

b. Insulation resistance between poles with lamps and other consuming devices
removed and switches ON.
10.00.00 ILLUMINATION LEVELS AND TYPE OF FIXTURE
Location Avg. Lux level Type of Fixture
Street light 10 HPSV

Switchyard 20 (general) HPSV
50 (on strategic eqpt) HPSV
Control room 300 FR2
Cable Vault 50 FB
Switchgear room 150 FI
Battery room 150 FC
Charger room 100 FR1
Offices 300 FR1
Toilet - FB1
Staircase - FB1
Emergency DC
Control room 20 IR
Battery room 20 IB
Staircase 20 IB
Refer Annexure-I for type of fixture details.

Annexure –I
Type Description Type of Philips Bajaj Type Crompton

Type
No. Installation Type
IB 100W incandescent Surface NXC-101 BJDB-100 IBH xx10

industrial bulk head mounting on
fixtures comprising die Column/ wall/
cast aluminum body ceiling
finished powder coated,
heat resistant glass,
neoprene/ synthetic
gasket, MS powder
coated wire guard, lamp,
etc. complying to IP 54
class of protection.
IR 100 W incandescent Recessed DN 622 BJDR-100 DDLVxx10
down light fixtures, mounting in
electrochemically false ceiling
brightened, anodised, areas
high purity aluminium
reflector comprising of
lamp, galvanized /
Powder coated
mounting bracket, etc.
FB Twin 28 watts T5 type Surface / TMS 122/ BTIR 228 T5SF228EB
fluorescent fixture of rail pendent 228 HF
type comprising CRCA mounting
channel powder coated,
CRCA cover plate
powder coated, fitted
with lamp, electronic
ballast, etc.
FB1 Single 28 watts T5 type Surface / TMS 122/ BTIR 128 T5GP28 EB
fluorescent fixture of rail pendent 128 HF
type comprising CRCA mounting
channel powder coated,
CRCA cover plate
powder coated, fitted
ballast, etc.
FC Twin 28 watts T5 type Surface / TCW 097/ BTI 228 FG T5IPFC 228
fluorescent fixture, totally pendent 228 HF EB
enclosed, corrosion mounting OR
proof, comprising TDC

Annexure –I

Type
ABS/Polycarbonate 10/228
Canopy, CRCA sheet HF
steel gear tray finished
stove enameled white,
Polycarbonate cover,
stainless steel toggle
clips & neoprene/
synthetic rubber gasket
lining, fitted with lamp,
electronic ballast, etc.
complying to IP 52 class
of protection.
FI Twin 28 W T5 type Surface / TMS BTIV 228 T5RSF228
industrial trough type, pendent 122/228 EB
fluorescent fixture mounting HF &
comprising single piece GMS
CRCA channel, CRCA 122/228
cover plate powder R
coated & with MS
reflector powder coated,
fitted with lamp,
electronic ballast, etc.
FR 1 Twin 28 W T5 type Recess TBS BTLM 228 T5FA228

mirror optics type mounting 669/228 EB
fluorescent fixture ( false M2 HF
comprising CRCA sheet ceiling)
steel housing powder
coated, high purity
aluminium
reflectors/louvres, fitted
ballast, etc.
FR 2 Twin 28 W T5 type Recess TBS 669/ BTDL 228 T5FD11228

mirror optics anti glare mounting 228 D6 EB
type fluorescent fixture ( false HF
comprising CRCA sheet ceiling)
steel housing powder
coated, high purity
aluminium High gloss

Annexure –I

Type
mat optics parabolic

reflectors, etc. fitted with
lamp, electronic ballast,
etc. and with Anti glare
louvres.
PF Self contained Wall / column

emergency lighting mounting
fixture with 2x10W
Fluorescent lamp with
nickel cadmium battery,
charger etc.
HPSV Heavy duty flood light Lightning
Luminaries with 1x400W Mast
High Pressure Sodium mounting
Vapour lamps and with
necessary control gear
box ( Type SF3)

PART-II
CHAPTER – E8: VOID

PART-II
CHAPTER-E9- VOID
PART-II
CHAPTER – E10:
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
(SAS)
PART-II
CHAPTER – E10: SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM (SAS)
Clause No. Description Page no.

2.00.00 SAS Reliability Requirements E10-3
3.00.00 SAS Performance Requirements E10-3
4.00.00 Software License and Upgrades E10-4
5.00.00 Design and Operating Requirements of SAS E10-5
6.00.00 Substation Level Functionality E10-6
7.00.00 Substation Controllers and Operator Workstations E10-11
8.00.00 Communication Network Bus E10-14
9.00.00 Bay Level Functionality E10-16
10.00.00 Energy Meters E10-44
11.00.00 Time Synchronization Equipments E10-48
12.00.00 Relay Test equipment E10-49
13.00.00 NIL E10-50
14.00.00 Panels E10-50
15.00.00 Control Cabling Philosophy in Switchyard E10-52
16.00.00 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) E10-53
17.00.00 Site/ Commissioning Tests E10-56
18.00.00 Type Test requirement E10-59
19.00.00 Settings E10-66
20.00.00 Furniture E10-67
CHAPTER – E10
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM (SAS)
1.00.00 General Requirements
1.00.01 The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be based on the communication
protocol IEC61850 and meet the requirements stipulated herein.
1.00.02 It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure proper information flow between the
sub-systems of Main Plant DDC and SAS.
1.01.01 For major information exchange, following gateways (stand-alone / in-built in network
controller), as specified elsewhere in the specification shall be provided:
 Main Plant DDC
 RLDC, Owner’s remote control room
1.02.00 The point-to-point testing of all signals for the EHV network at the plant end and
protection equipment end and the terminal end (Substation Controller and Operator
Workstations) at the substation shall be the responsibility of the contractor.
1.03.00 The point-to-point testing of all signals of the Employer’s OPC Compliant Main Plant
DDC gateway shall also be the responsibility of the contractor. The contractor shall
be responsible for all the works on switchyard SAS.
1.04.00 The architecture for the SAS is enclosed in the attached “Substation Automation
System Architecture”. The Contractor shall provide full details of the offered system
Architecture with the Bid.
1.05.00 The SAS shall be a computer-based system that shall integrate independently
operating subsystems, such as Bay Control Units, Bay Protection Units, Metering,
and alarm annunciation, into a unified data acquisition, monitoring, protection and
control system in the substation. The Substation Controllers, Bay Control Units, Bay
Protection Units, disturbance recorders, time synchronizing equipment, Energy
Metering System, PMU and relay test kit offered should meet the proven-ness criteria
specified elsewhere. The contractor shall state any limitations in this regard during
bidding, and provide details of any similar systems supplied by the contractor that are
in successful operation.
1.06.00 The SAS architecture shall be flexible to allow future extensions in switchyard. Only
IEC 61850 protocols shall be used for inter-device communication.
1.07.00 The SAS at substation level and the communication network(s) shall be designed in
a dual redundancy configuration. No single failure of any component / module of the
SAS, including the communication links, shall cause loss of functionality of the SAS
of more than a single bay.

Bid DOC. NO: PART-II
(2X800MW) TECHNICAL Page
CS-9549-572-2 SECTION-VI
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE SPECIFICATIONS E10- 1 of 67
1.08.00 Each component / module of SAS, including all the communication links, shall be
provided with built-in supervision and self-diagnostic features and any failures shall
be alarmed to the operator.
1.09.00 The SAS shall be designed such that no periodic testing and maintenance is required
for various subsystems comprising SAS. On-line testing routines for various
subsystems of SAS shall be provided.
1.10.00 SAS shall be designed such that maintenance, modification or extension of its
components / modules shall not cause shutdown of the complete SAS.
1.11.00 The SAS and all its components shall be synchronized from a GPS time referenced
clock receiver. The Time Synchronization Equipment shall also be in Contractor’s
scope of supply. A timing accuracy of better than 1 milli sec shall be achieved for all
the devices within the SAS except PMU.
1.12.00 The Contractor shall provide all the documentation required during project
implementation and during the life cycle of SAS for operation and maintenance. A
list of such documentation shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner during
detailed engineering.
1.13.00 Owner intends to ensure interoperability of any third party IEC61850 compatible IEDs
to be incorporated in future with the offered SAS. Contractor to provide all necessary
data, configuration files, information in this regard.
1.14.00 Contractor shall also provide adequate training for site personnel for operation,
maintenance and troubleshooting of total system for 5 working days at NTPC site.
1.15.00 The SAS supplied as per this specification shall be designed and constructed to meet
all specification requirements for 15 years. Further, the Contractor should guarantee
for hardware and software support for 15 (fifteen) years to guard against
obsolescence. All requirements / devices of the SAS that are not listed under
recommended spares shall have a normal life expectancy exceeding the specified
expected life of the SAS.
1.16.00 The General lay out plan of the whole plant and switchyard showing the geographical
location of SWYD, SWYD CR, CCR, CERs, is enclosed as tender drawing.
1.17.00 Contractor shall offer the Bay Level Units for the EHV system (each circuit breaker
with associated circuit breaker and associated dis-connector, Earth switches and
instrument transformer shall comprise one bay) complete with Bay Control Units
(BCUs) and Bay Protection Units (BPUs). Bay Level Units, common panels like bus
bar protection/ islanding panels/ metering panels for owner supplied meters, owner
supplied PLCC/ communication panels of transmission lines, RTCC panels of
transformers etc. shall be housed in AC Kiosks in SWITCHYARD. Station HMI, LVS
and other work stations/gateways etc. shall be located in SWITCHYARD CR/ CCR/
CERs suitably as shown in the enclosed SAS architecture diagram.

1.18.00 BCUs shall be provided for the control and monitoring of breakers pertaining to 415V
switchyard service switchgear from SAS. One additional LAN switch for switchyard
LT switchgear is to be supplied loose. The numerical relays of switchyard LT
switchgear are to be integrated with SAS. The required ICD files shall be made
available by owner. Adequate number of BCU shall also be provided for control &
monitoring of all Auxiliary Buses and associated isolators. Control shall be provided
as specified elsewhere in this specification.
1.19.00 The interface between BCU and control switching devices shall be in Bidder’s scope.
These control switching devices shall be mounted in respective bay control panel.
1.20.00 One set of relay test tool kit including Test Plugs shall also be supplied.
2.00.00 SAS Reliability Requirements
2.01.00 Each component and equipment offered by the Contractor shall be of established
reliability. The minimum target reliability of each piece of equipment like each
electronic module/card, power supply, peripheral etc. shall be established considering
its failure rates/meantime between failures (MTBF), meantime to repair (MTTR), such
that the availability of the complete system is assured. The guaranteed annual
system availability shall not be less than 99.9%.
2.02.00 The Contractor shall submit reliability and maintainability values including detailed
calculation for the projected overall system availability along with all assumptions
supported by relevant standard for each device/equipment/system module which,
with the help of a schematic of various systems connected in series or in parallel as
the case may be, and Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) & Mean Time to Repair
(MTTR) values for the various equipment shall show that availability calculation is as
specified in IEEE standard-P-1046 or equivalent.
2.03.00 The contractor shall furnish in the bid a composite list of bought out items (i.e. items
not from his own manufacturing range) which the Contractor has included in his
proposal along with the name of proposed sub-vendors, as a part of his proposal.
However, the make and model of all bought out items supplied by the Contractor shall
be as approved by the Owner during the detailed engineering stage.
3.00.00 SAS Performance Requirements
3.01.00 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to predict and indicate in the bid, the
worst case loading conditions and design the system accordingly to meet the same.
The worst case loading conditions shall include the following tasks as a minimum:
3.01.01 All analog inputs scanning and processing is in progress and all the data is being
transmitted over the system bus every one second.
3.01.02 Four operator comments for information from any Operator Workstation with in a base
period of one minute.

3.01.03 A burst of 100 alarms is generated over a period of 10 s.

3.01.04 One operator control is generated every 10 s.
3.01.05 Data collection for logs/reports is in progress.
3.01.06 Data collection for historical storage and trend function in progress.
3.01.07 Data collection of fault records is in progress.
3.01.08 All health monitoring functions/diagnostics in progress.
3.01.09 All output devices are in operation with rated performance/speed.
3.01.10 All data are transferred to the Operator Workstations.
3.02.00 Duty Cycle Time
The Substation Controller processor spare duty cycle (free time): Under the worst
case loading conditions, each processor shall have:
a) 40% free time when measured over any two second period
b) 60% free time when measured over any one minute period
3.03.00 Inter Bay Bus and Substation Network Spare Duty (free time)
The Inter bay Bus and Substation Network shall have minimum 50% free time during
the worst case loading conditions measured over any two-second period.
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary data to fully satisfy the Owner that the
processor spare duty cycle figures quoted by the contractor are realistic and based
on configuration and computational capability of the offered system and these shall
be actually implemented system as commissioned at project site.
3.04.00 Display Response Time
The display response time under worst case conditions for all displays shall not be
worse than 1.5secs for HMI displays. The display response time is defined as the
time interval between the pressing of the last key demanding a display and completion
of the requested display on CRT with full foreground and background information,
and/or the updating of status indications according to plant changes, and/or the
updating of event / alarm register according to alarm conditions.
4.00.00 Software License and Upgrades
4.01.00 The contractor shall provide all software licenses for all the software being used in
SAS system. The license shall be provided on a site license basis and shall be valid
for the plant / equipment life cycle. The license shall not be hardware / machine
specific i.e. if any hardware / machine is changed / upgraded, the same software
license shall be valid and the Owner shall not have to seek fresh license or renewal

of license. The contractor shall provide the license considering sufficient number of
I/O s catering to the complete switchyard as shown in tender SLD including future
bays.
In the case of anti-virus software, the license shall include regular updates until the
end of warranty.
The Contractor shall guarantee that all software are defect free and meet the system
specifications, and undertake to fix any defects which may arise during the life of the
system at no cost to the Owner.
4.02.00 All software versions in components of the SAS shall be the latest official releases as
on the date of shipment from works and shall include all software updates etc.
released till that date. A certificate to this effect shall be furnished by the contractor
at the time of pre-dispatch inspection for each software package. All new software
revisions and/or patch updates that are released before the end of the warranty period
which addresses system defects shall be implemented on site and the system re-
tested to validate system integrity by the contractor at no cost to the Owner (This
excludes new revisions which provides additional functionality). The contractor shall
periodically inform the designated officer of the Owner about software updates / new
releases that would be taking place after the system is commissioned.
5.00.00 Design and Operating Requirements of SAS
5.01.00 The control hierarchy and control levels of the SAS shall be based on the logical
structure of the SAS, which is as follows:
Control Level 3 Remote Control Center (OS Control Room)
Control Level 2 Substation Level (HMI)
Control Level 1 Bay Control Units
Control Level 0 Switchgear Equipment

5.02.00 The data exchange between Control Level 3 and Control Level 2 shall take place via
the communication links provided by the Owner for remote telemetry and control of
the substation using the IEC60870-5-101/104/OPC protocol.
5.03.00 The data exchange between Control Level 2 and Control Level 1 shall take place via
the inter-bay/Station communication bus using the IEC61850 protocol. The inter-bay
communication bus shall support peer-to-peer communications capability.
5.04.00 The data exchange between Control Level 1 and Control Level 0 shall be by means
of hard-wired status / control signals between Switchgear Equipment and Bay Control
/ Protection Units and analog signals from CTs / CVTs.
6.00.00 Substation Level Functionality
6.01.00 Control Functions
i) The SAS shall perform control functions on various switchyard equipment
based on the status, analog and logical inputs acquired by SAS from various
bay control units.
ii) It shall be possible to monitor and control all the switchyard bays in the
Contractor’s scope and the status of the Generator plant (status and analog
signals such as MW, MVAR, Generation Voltage, GRP Relay Status,
information etc) from any of the Operator Workstations at Control Level 2 i.e.
either from SWITCHYARD Control Room or Main Plant control Room.
However, in the case of maintenance, failure or emergency, it shall be
possible to control the individual bays from the Bay Control Units at Control
Level 1.
iii) Clear control priorities shall ensure that operation of particular bay equipment
(Circuit Breaker or Isolator) cannot be initiated simultaneously from more than
one of the control levels. The priority shall always be on the lowest enabled
control level. The selected control level shall be indicated at all the levels so
that the operator is aware of his control capabilities.
iv) The SAS shall have provision of Device Tagging for all the substation devices.
This function is to block the control of any substation device in such a manner
that its command is prevented from Operator’s Workstations.
v) Interlocking shall be implemented and shall ensure that no illegal switch
operation can be performed by any control initiated from Control Level 3,
Control Level 2 or Control Level 1. Interlocking shall be implemented on bay
level as specified in relevant section of this specification.
6.02.00 Sequence of Events and Alarm Management

i) The SAS shall be capable of reporting on all Operator Workstation and

printers, the time sequenced record of events occurring in the substation.
Separate logs shall be created for alarms and events and both the logs shall
be time-tagged. Suitable filters, based on date and time, bay number, device
number, function etc. shall be provided for both alarm as well as event logs
for ease of viewing.
ii) The SAS shall record in non-volatile memory all changes of alarms and plant
statuses of switchyard equipment, including the alarms generated by Bay
Control and Bay Protection units. It shall be possible to print historic events
and real-time (unacknowledged and non-cleared) alarms after a system failure
or reset with no loss of information.
iii) All the alarms and events shall be time tagged at the Bay Controller or Bay
Protection unit with a time resolution of 1 ms.
iv) The SAS shall include all the alarms and changes of plant statuses of the EHV
networks.
v) The SAS shall acquire the alarm signals from Bay Control Units and Bay
Protection Units with preset priorities and on receipt of an alarm, shall
generate an audible signal and report it either upon request or automatically
to the respective printer.
vi) The Owner shall approve the list of alarms and plant statuses to be wired for
Sequence of Events log and Alarm Management, during detailed engineering
stage.
6.03.00 Historical Data Management and Trending
i) The SAS shall maintain historical data in bulk non-volatile memory. The
historical data shall be available for review and editing by authorized user.
ii) The SAS shall monitor specified incoming information for historical data base,
perform calculations on some of the incoming data and store incoming and
calculated data in the non-volatile memory as historical data.
iii) The historical data shall include Digital Fault Records and Sequence of Event
logs received from bay protection units and bay control units.
iv) It shall be possible to trend any measurement signal or summation of signals
available in real time or data available in the historical database, in the shape
of trend curves.
6.04.00 Operations Log

It shall be possible to create a daily operations log, in a user-defined format, about

the substation operations as well as any failures / tripping therein. It shall also be
possible to include on daily basis all the information required to keep a historical
record of equipment behavior.
6.05.00 Reports
The SAS should be capable of generating different types of reports, which can be
presented in the operator interface screens upon request or programmed for
automatic presentation in printers. It shall be possible to generate reports with
information from both historical data base and real time information.
6.06.00 Mass Storage Back up
Either an industry standard DVD writer or tape streamer shall be provided to permit
mass storage of all information existing in the computer hard disks such as application
programs, database configuration, historical data, operations log etc.
6.07.00 System Security
i) Security features shall be provided at each level for safeguarding against
unauthorized access. An alarm message will be displayed at the Control
Centre and recorded in the logs for any unauthorized access attempts. The
contractor shall provide software locks and passwords to the Owner’s
engineers at site for all operating and application software at all levels.
ii) The system shall maintain a SYSTEM CHANGE log, recording all system
changes made along with the identification of the person making the change,
date, time and area of the system modified. The format and details of this log
shall be finalized during detailed engineering.
iii) No single failure either of equipment or power source shall result in rendering
any part / subsystem of SAS inoperative, except that the information related
to failed part / component is not available.
iv) To ensure system security, the complete functionality of SAS shall be divided
into various system security levels, to be decided by Owner during detailed
engineering. Each security level shall offer certain functionality of the SAS to
users e.g.
Security Level 0 – Display only of Graphics, Real Time data and Historical
Data
Security Level 1 – Normal Control Operations, Access to acknowledge alarm
logs
Security Level 2 – Restricted Control Operations; access to edit / defeat bay
interlocks

Security Level 3 – Complete access, engineering and maintenance of

configurations and databases.
v) The users shall be grouped into various user-groups with each user having a
user name and password. The level of accessibility to each user group shall
be pre-defined.
vi) The system administrator group shall have complete access to SAS and shall
be able to add / remove users and redefine access rights.
vii) The various system security levels and various user groups shall be defined
by the Owner during detailed engineering.
6.08.00 Remote Interface with RLDC
6.08.01 The SAS shall have provision for interfacing with remote RLDC through suitable
gateways with adequate number of ports along with modems at Substation Level as
shown in the tender drawing. The modems shall be suitable for use with PLCC/
OPGW Communication, being provided for EHV lines and to be used for data
communication between switchyard and RLDC using communication protocol IEC
60870-5-101 and on IEC 60870-5-104 in future. Each port shall allow for remote
telemetry and control of the EHV networks in the substation using IEC 60870-5-
101/104. The interface ports for communication with RLDC shall use V.24/V.28
communication standard (CCITT Std.) for interfacing with modems. The
interoperability requirements for above shall be furnished during detailed engineering.
One (1) number of suitable modem shall also be supplied as loose item for each of
the above serial ports for the remote end.
6.08.02 Only selected information such as bus voltage, frequency, active / reactive power
through various feeders, status of OLTC, open / close status of circuit breakers,
isolators etc. is required to be shared with RLDC. However, actual list of information
to be shared with RLDC shall be finalized during detailed engineering. The contractor
shall have to demonstrate the availability of desired information at the output of
modem at site.
6.08.03 Necessary hardware/software to ensure provision for Remote Interface with RLDC
shall also be provided by the contractor.
6.08.04 Provision for interfacing with owners PI (Plant Information) system on OPC.
6.08.04.01 OPC Server requirement:
1. The OPC Server is envisaged for connectivity with owner’s PI Server of OSI
soft, USA.
2. OPC Data Access Server with OPC version 2.05a shall be supplied. Any other
higher version should be backward compatible with version 2.05a.

3. Vendor shall ensure that data is accessible from the OPC Server to a PI Server
of OSISoft – version 3.4.375.38 and later (or any other 3rd party system) using
PI-OPC client of OSIsoft – version 2.3.7.0 and later (or any other 3rd party OPC
Client).
4. Timestamp when the measurement was made is to be used in the OPC Server.
OPC Server should not use the time of the server as timestamp of the measured
signal.
5. Vendor to indicate the latency between measurement and availability in OPC
server.
6. All data like MW, MVAR, CB status, Metering Master Station Data etc shall be
communicated through this OPC Server. The number of tags to be licensed for
the OPC Server as well as the maximum number of tags the OPC server can
support shall be approved during detailed engineering.
7. Vendor should inform the method of testing the OPC Compliance. Vendor
should demonstrate that data is accessible from the OPC server using a
standard 3rd party OPC client such as PI-OPC client of OSI soft, OPC client of
Matricon.
6.09.00 Employer’s OPC Compliant DDC INTERFACE
6.09.01 Suitable hardware and software, including adequate number of LAN switches /
gateways, shall be provided to interface the switchyard SAS with each of the
Employer’s OPC Compliant Main Plant DDC as shown in “Substation Automation
System Architecture”.
6.09.02 Also, necessary data such as Status of EHV Circuit Breakers, associated Isolator &
Earth switch, Bus Voltage / frequency etc can be provided to the Main Plant.
6.09.03 The exact signals shall be finalized during detailed engineering. (Note: The I/O list for
above shall be made available to the Bidder during detailed engineering).
6.09.04 The cable and associated hardware required for connecting SAS network to the
Employer’s OPC Compliant main plant DDC terminal shall also be provided by the
contractor.
6.10.00 Interface with Other Third Party Devices/Substation Automation System (SAS)
6.10.01 A fiber-optic extension of the Substation Network LAN from switchyard to the Main
Plant is to be provided by the contractor along with all associated hardware.
6.10.02 The HMI software at Substation Level shall be so designed that it will require
insignificant changes during interface with third party devices in future. In any case,
such an interface would not impair the working of existing SAS in anyway. Further,
no shutdown of the SAS shall be required to achieve this integration.

6.10.03 Technical Requirements for Standalone Network Firewall
S No Feature Required parameter

1 Form Factor The firewall should be a 19” Rack with redundant
power supply.
2 High Availability The system is to be offered in High availability (1+1)
configuration
A. Hardware Specifications & Performance Parameters
A1 Device Throughput 3 (Three) Gbps or higher firewall throughput.
A2 Interfaces  At least 8 nos of gigabit 10/100/1000 base T
Ethernet ports must be provided
 Provision for Later addition of at least 2 nos of 10G
fiber ports must be present.
B Firewall Inspection
B1 Granular Access control Source IP/ Destination IP/ Port
Time and date access
Type of service/ application/ protocol
Customizable services
Time based
Combination of one or multiple of above mentioned
parameter
B2 NAT & PAT Dynamic NAT as well as one to one NAT Port / IP
Address Forwarding
7.00.00 Substation Controllers and Operator Workstations

a) Redundant Controllers and Operator Workstations shall be provided and shall
be based on the latest state of the art workstations and servers and technology
suitable for industrial applications and switchyard environments.
b) The main memory shall be sized sufficient to meet the functional and parametric
requirements as specified. The bulk memory shall be sized at least 1.5 times
the capacity required sufficient to meet the functional and parametric
requirements. However, both the main and the bulk memory shall be subject to

minimum hardware specification. The exact system configuration and sizing

shall be approved by the Owner during detailed engineering.
c) Graphic Mimic display for entire switchyard shall be provided in each OWS.
d) All operators’ functions shall be possible from any of the OWS at any point of
time regardless of which controller is active. Each OWS shall be able to access
all the substation information related data under all operating conditions.
e) Single failure in any Controller shall not lead to non-availability of any of the
OWS.
f) The Workstation shall be based on industry standard hardware and software
which will ensure easy connectivity and portability of all the software being
provided for various IEDs under this contract.
g) Power Fail Auto Restart (PFAR) facility, with automatic time synchronization to
GPS time shall be provided. The only operation required will be the login of
operators.
h) All AC powered Workstations, Communication and/or other SAS devices shall
be powered from 2X100% Inverter Supply connected to the station batteries so
as to have bump less changeover in case of failure of one of the inverters or
Un-interruptible Power Source (UPS) providing a standby time equal to the
specified station battery standby time.
i) All DC (Station Battery) powered SAS components shall also be acceptable.
j) One workstation shall also be provided in the provided in each of Central Control
room, to enable the operators in the Power station to monitor the status of the
EHV substation network and alarms. The ability to control the switchyard from
this workstation will only be possible in emergency situations, and subject to the
security level implementation. A fibre-optic extension of the Substation Network
LAN is to be provided in the Central control room/ Control equipment rooms as
shown in the tender drawing for this purpose
k) A color wall mounted rear projection MIMIC display shall be provided in the
SWITCHYARD control room on which a dynamic substation overview display
screen is projected. The MIMIC shall be flat. The rear projection MIMIC display
shall be on a single screen LVS having minimum 80 inches diagonal. The
MIMIC shall be suitable for continuous operation in a substation control room
environment, and shall be clearly visible during all hours from the operator
positions at the control desk. The Contractor shall include consumables for 1
year operation of the unit according to specification.
Display of Mimic view selected from any of the OWS in the SWITCHYARD
Control Room shall be possible. Details of the MIMIC offered shall be provided

during Biding, with an indication of the maintenance required and typical

operating cost of the unit.
7.01.00 Functional Requirements of the HMI Software
i) The HMI shall have an intuitive graphical design to ensure effective use of the
SAS with minimal confusion. The amount of keyboard typing needed for using
the SAS shall be minimized.
ii) The HMI shall be strictly divided into various levels depending on the system
security levels.
iii) The complete Single Line Diagram of the EHV network, including the status of
the plant equipment, shall be displayed on one or more graphical displays. A
high-level overview display shall be provided, with the ability to zoom to more
detailed displays. Different colors shall be used to differentiate voltage levels,
earthed network components, selected object on screen, selected object for
command, blocked / tagged equipment etc. on the graphical displays. A library
of standard symbols shall be used to represent switchyard equipment on the
graphical displays. The same symbols and colors used on the EHV network
SAS shall be used. The graphic displays shall be subject to Owner’s approval.
iv) The process status of the complete switchyard in terms of actual values of
currents, voltages, frequency, active and reactive powers, summated
MW/MVAR of all GT bays, as well as the positions of the circuit breakers,
isolators and earth switches, tap positions, winding temperature etc, shall be
displayed on the station single line diagram.
v) All the Substation Level Functionality described in relevant Clause of this
specification shall be possible through HMI.
vi) Highest degree of security shall be provided to prevent unwanted operation of
any equipment through SAS. Simultaneous switching of more than one device
from the same or different Control Levels shall not be possible. The security
features to achieve these requirements shall be clearly brought out in
appropriate project-specific documentation of SAS, which shall be approved by
Owner. Once a device is “Selected” for operation, the operator shall be able to
recognize the “Selected” device on all the graphical and other displays. All other
devices shall be blocked as long as a device is selected for operation. The
“execution” of a command shall be possible only if the device is not blocked and
no interlocking condition is being violated. The interlocking scheme,
implemented at the Bay Level, shall be checked before releasing the “execute”
command. The operator shall receive suitable feedback about the successful
or unsuccessful execution of the command. In case of unsuccessful execution,
the reason for non-execution of command shall be indicated to the operator,
which shall include details of the blocking condition in the interlocking logic. In

case of successful execution, the operator shall receive confirmation about the
new switching position of the equipment depending on the command. The
ability to override the interlocking shall also be available, subject to the security
access (see section 6.07.00).
vii) The following functionality shall be available at the Engineer and Fault
Recording Workstation.
- Formulation and Implementation of interlocking logic for various bay
equipment into Bay Control Units
- Downloading or altering the protection relay settings in the Bay Protection
Units.
- Automatically upload, archive, review and analyze graphically the Digital
Fault Data available from the BCU and Bay Protection Units.
- Ability to export fault records in COMTRADE format.
viii) All workstations shall work on the same Operating system, preferably Windows
(latest version). The Contractor shall state any other recommendations during
Biding. Latest anti-virus software shall be supplied on all workstations.
8.00.00 Communication Network Bus
8.01.00 General
i) The data communication network (substation/ inter-bay bus) shall have bus
configuration with either ring or star topology. The dual redundant buses, in
case of star topology, shall be physically separate and shall be routed
separately. Typical network architecture with ring topology is enclosed as
“Substation Automation System Architecture”.
ii) The contractor shall submit details regarding the communication system like
communication protocol, bus utilization calculations etc. during detailed
engineering.
iii) Built-in diagnostics shall be provided for easy fault detection and to alarm any
single bus failures. The design and installation of the main communication bus
shall take care of the environmental conditions and hazardous area
classification as applicable to similar services.
iv) The system architecture shall allow a number of application protocols to co-exist
on the application layer of the LAN stack.
8.02.00 Substation Network Bus
i) The substation network LAN configuration / protocol shall be as per the tender
drawing. The substation network LAN shall be an Ethernet LAN based on
IEEE802.3 Ethernet standard using the IP protocol. It shall allow inter-

operability with LANs from other vendors or with IEDs (Intelligent Electronic
Devices) from other vendors in future, supporting IEC 61850.
ii) CAT5e or better UTP cables or fibre optic cables shall be employed for all
Ethernet data communication bus. The data exchange between the electronic
devices on bay and station level shall take place via the communication
infrastructure. This shall be realized using fibre-optic cables, thereby
guaranteeing disturbance free communication. Data exchange is to be realized
using IEC 61850 protocol with a redundant managed switched Ethernet
communication infrastructure. The communication shall be made in 1+1 mode,
excluding the links between individual bay IEDs to switch, such that failure of
one set of fibre shall not affect the normal operation of the SAS. Each fibre optic
cable shall have four (4) spare fibres.
Fibre optic cables shall be used wherever the Ethernet connection is in excess
of 50m, or where the connection extends between rooms/ kiosks or buildings.
The Contractor shall ensure that structured cabling philosophy and good
engineering practices as per internationally accepted standards are followed,
for ease of maintenance and traceability, and that fibre-optic cables are
adequately protected. Armored Fibre Optic cables shall be used in all cable
routes containing other armored electrical cables. The armored fibre optic
cables shall be run in G.I. conduit wherever laid underground or without trays.
iii) The LAN shall have a data communication speed of minimum 1 GBPS. It shall
be sufficient to meet the responses of the system in terms of displays,
monitoring and control commands according to the design.
iv) Suitable hardware and software interface shall be provided to link Employer’s
OPC Compliant main plant DDC station bus.
8.03.00 EHV Inter bay Network Bus
i) An Inter bay Communication bus shall be provided for the EHV network, which
shall support peer-to-peer communication, and communication to the
Substation Controller.
ii) The communication protocol used for all devices including Bay Control Units
and Bay Protection Units shall be the IEC61850 protocol. No hardwiring of
alarms shall be permitted between Bay Protection Units and Bay Control
Units. As a minimum, all Bay Controller Units and primary relays i.e. Distance,
Differential, Bus-Bar protection and multi-functional Over current and Earth
fault protection relays offered shall support the IEC61850 protocol.
iii) Fibre optic cables shall be used for Inter bay/Station Level Communication
Bus. Contractor shall ensure that structured cabling philosophy and good
engineering practices as per internationally accepted standards are followed,

for ease of maintenance and traceability. Electrical data connections may only
be used within a cubicle of the same bay.
8.04.00 For the requirements for Generator Circuit LAN, tender drawing “Substation
Automation System Architecture” may be referred.
9.00.00 Bay Level Functionality
i) All the Bay Level Functionality shall be built into Bay Control Units (BCUs) and
Bay Protection Units (BPUs).
ii) Dedicated Bay Control Units and Bay Protection Units shall be provided for
each bay in the Contractor’s scope of work including 132kV Make-Up water
bays at plant end & MUPWH end. Also one number BCU shall be provided for
the control of SWYD service LT Switchgear. Adequate number of BCU shall
also be provided for control & monitoring of ALL Auxiliary Buses and
associated isolators. Controls shall be provided as specified elsewhere in this
specification.
iii) BCUs and Bay Protection Units shall be provided at Control Level 1 i.e. Bay
Level of Logical Architecture, to facilitate control, monitoring and protection of
switchyard equipment. One Bay Control Unit shall provide complete
functionality for one EHV bay. Each set of BCUs shall have sufficient analog
and digital inputs to acquire the status of each and every circuit breaker,
isolator, earth switch, Transformer gas parameters / tap position etc. of all the
bays in Contractor’s scope. A minimum of 64 Digital Inputs and 24 Digital
Outputs per bay shall be provided in associated Bay Control Units. A minimum
number of 16 Analogue input channels per bay shall also be provided in the
associated BCU. Rating of the various analogue input channels (110 V /1 A
/4-20 mA) shall be decided during detail engineering.
iv) All the Bay Control Units and Bay Protection Units at Plant end shall be
installed in AC Kiosks in SWITCHYARD. BCU & BPU shall be mounted in
different panels. The protection relays for Generators shall be located in
respective power station control equipment rooms. All the Bay Control Units
and Bay Protection Units associated with 132kV Make-up Water Pump House
shall be installed in the Make-up Water Control Room. BCU & BPU shall be
mounted in different panels.
v) All BCUs and Bay Protection Units shall be provided with self-diagnosis and
supervision functions to ensure maximum availability. BCUs shall require no
periodic routine maintenance and testing. An alarm contact shall be provided
for hardware failures, failures of internal and external auxiliary supplies etc.
Special algorithms shall be provided to check the microprocessor’s memories.
A watchdog function shall supervise the execution of program by the
microprocessor.

vi) A minimum of one number of Bay Kiosk per diameter of 765 kV switchyard,
one number of Bay Kiosk for two numbers of 132kV bays shall be provided.
Adequate number of additional kiosks shall be provided for common
protections like bus Bar protection, islanding scheme, Metering scheme etc
as well. In case of incomplete diameter, the kiosk shall have necessary space
for accommodating the future bay IEDs. Similarly, for 132kV bays space is to
be provided for any intervening future bays marked in the tender drawing.
vii) Space for mounting Controlled Switching Device of circuit breaker shall be
provided in respective BCU panel
viii) The layout of equipment/panel in SWITCHYARD control Room/ AC Kiosks
shall be subject to Owner’s approval.
9.01.00 Bay Control Units (BCU)
9.01.01 Control and Protection Features of BCUs
The Bay Control Units shall have following built-in functions:
i) Mimic control panel to display graphically the bay configuration, status of the
plant, analogue measurands, alarms, and offer bay level control.
ii) Switching of Switchyard Bay Equipment depending on conditions such as
interlocking, synch-check, control mode, or external status condition.
Adequate safety features like prevention of double operation, command
supervision, block/de-block, over-riding the interlocking etc. shall be provided.
All such security features shall be finalized and approved by Owner during
iii) Status Supervision of switchyard equipment
iv) Interlocking Function to prevent unsafe operation of switchyard equipment
such as circuit breakers, isolators, earth switches etc. Interlocking shall be
implemented on bay level, by user-friendly, menu-driven configuration
software within the BCU, Interlocking shall operate independent from the
Substation Controller. Signaling of statuses between bays shall be performed
by inter-bay communication (peer-to-peer) i.e. Goose messaging. The
auxiliary contacts of each of the equipments shall be wired to the BCU for this
purpose. However for those equipment, which are required for interlock of
other bay equipment, two sets of their contacts shall be wired to BCUs of two
different bays. Such interlocks involving more than one bay equipment shall
be realized through goose messaging. An over-riding / bypass function for
bay-level interlocking shall be provided at appropriate security level for
maintenance or during emergency conditions. Failure of any one BCU shall
not affect the interlocking at any other bay, only the bay with failed BCU shall
not be able to operate. This shall be achieved by providing a backup

mechanism in case of failure of one BCU which affects the interlocking in

another BCU (e.g. a backup mechanism for monitoring the status of the bus
bar earths), to allow the remainder BCUs to function with full interlocking.
The interlocking logic shall be defined during the details engineering phase to
prevent illegal operation.
v) Analog Measurements for bay voltage (per phase), current (per phase),
frequency, MW and MVAR, tap position / gas parameters / winding
temperature of Transformers. These measurements shall not require the use
of any intermediate transducers. The accuracy of measurement shall be 0.5%
for voltage, current and frequency, and 1.0% for MW and MVAR. The
measured and computed values shall be displayed locally on BCU and on
operator’s workstation located in central control room.
vi) Event and Alarm Handling: BCUs shall acquire all the bay level alarms and
events from field inputs with a resolution and time tagging of 1 milli sec and
shall transfer these to operator’s workstation over substation LAN.
vii) Synchronization Check Feature: Synchronization Check feature shall
determine the difference between the amplitudes, phase angles and
frequencies of two voltage vectors. Checks shall be provided to detect a dead
line or bus bar. The voltage difference and phase angle difference settings
shall be adjustable.
9.02.00 Bay Protection Units
9.02.01 General
i) Trip commands from Bay Protection Units shall be hard-wired directly to
appropriate switchyard equipment. Also, critical interlocking data between
Bay Protection Units and Bay Control Units, including the substation level
interlocks such as bus bar protection trip etc. shall also be hard-wired to
ensure complete bay level functionality even in case of failure of substation
LAN. The interlocking information to be hard-wired between Bay Protection
Units and Bay Control Units shall be decided by Owner during detailed
engineering stage.
ii) Bay Protection Units for Main Generator Circuits shall be as described in
clause 9.02.03.
iii) The interface of Bay Protection Unit for EHV lines with PLCC / communication
panels shall be in contractor’s scope.
iv) Relay parameterization for SWYD/ GRP relays shall be possible from the
respective EWS.
9.02.02 General Requirements of Numerical Relays and Auxiliary Relays

i) All numerical relays, auxiliary relays and devices comprising the Bay
Protection Units shall be of types, proven for the application, satisfying the
requirements specified elsewhere and shall be subject to the Owner’s
approval.
ii) The necessary auxiliary relays, trip relays, etc. required for complete scheme,
interlocking, alarm, logging, etc. shall be provided. No control relay, which
shall trip the circuit breaker when the relay is de-energized, shall be employed
in the circuits.
iii) Relays shall be provided with self-reset contacts except for the trip lockout,
which shall have contacts with a manual reset feature. Manual resetting shall
be possible from Control Level 2 as well as Control Level 1 with suitable
authorization.
iv) Transients present in CT & VT connections due to extraneous sources in the
EHV system shall not cause damage to the numerical and other relays. CT
saturation / transients shall not cause mal-operation of numerical relays.
v) Only DC/DC converters shall be provided in the solid state devices / numerical
relays wherever necessary to provide a stable auxiliary supply for relay
operation. Except for event logging, alarm and annunciation type of non-trip
functions, protective relay contact multiplication shall be done through high
speed trip relay only.
vi) DC batteries inside protective relays necessary for relay operation shall not
be acceptable. Equipment shall be protected against voltage spikes in the
auxiliary DC supply.
vii) Each numerical relay shall have a serial interface on the front for local
communication to a Personal Computer and Printer. Additionally, facilities
shall be provided to access each discrete protection function including
modification in relay settings and monitoring of the relay from a HMI or a
separate Protection / Disturbance Recorder Station provided and permanently
wired to all the numerical relays comprising various Bay Protection Units, as
shown in NTPC tender drawing. For numerical relays of switchyard, the HMI
shall be located in SWYD control room at the Substation Level and for those
in GRP, dedicated engineering /DR work station has to be provided in CER -
1. A print out of all settings, scheme logic, event records etc. shall be
accessible through the HMI. The display of various measured parameters
during normal as well as fault conditions on a segregated phase basis shall
be provided. LEDs and a backlit LCD screen shall be provided for visual
indication and display of messages related to major trips / alarms. Necessary
multilevel password protection shall be provided.

viii) The Bay Protection Units shall be arranged to provide two independent, high
performance and reliable systems housed in different panels with separate
DC supplies, separate CT/VT cores, separate cables and trip relays to obtain
100% redundancy. Associated trip relays of the two systems shall be
separate, having a sufficient number of contacts for all the functions.
ix) The numerical relays shall be provided with built-in disturbance recording
functionality. The data from DR function shall be available in
IEEE/COMTRADE format and shall be compatible with the dynamic relay test
system being supplied under this contract.
x) The manufacturer of the numerical protection system offered shall carry out
the complete engineering, testing and commissioning on site of the offered
protection equipment including the associated relays and protection panels.
The testing and commissioning protocols for the numerical protection systems
offered shall be approved by the Owner before commissioning on site.
xi) Pick up range of the Binary inputs shall be minimum 70 V DC/AC.
xii) All the numerical relays shall have adequate processor capability to carry out
programmable scheme logics (PSL) required for implementing approved
protection and control schemes over and above its inbuilt protection functions
algorithm.
xiii) All numerical relays shall be supplied with all the protection function/features
in disabled condition. Relevant features/protection function shall be enabled
at the time of commissioning at site as per approved logic and relay settings.
xiv) BPU offered shall have adequate I/Os for function realization. Use of auxiliary
relays (contact multiplication) shall be permitted only when the entire product
range does not support any further hardware augmentation for additional I/Os.
xv) Configuration/ scheme logics / relay settings shall be submitted by the
Contractor for approval during detailed engineering.
9.02.03 Protection for Main Generator Circuit
a) For protection purpose, each Main Generator Circuit comprises the
Generator, associated Generator Transformer, Excitation transformer and the
Unit Transformer. Dedicated Bay Protection Units (BPUs), comprising
numerical relays for various protection functions listed in following clauses,
shall be provided for each Main Generator Circuit to achieve comprehensive
protection for all types of faults and abnormal operating conditions. Numerical
relays constituting the BPUs shall meet the requirements of clause 9.02.02
above.

b) The BPU for each Generator Circuit shall be mounted in Generator Relay
Panels to be located in the Control Equipment Room (CER) for respective
Generator Unit. The Engineering and Fault Recording Stations shall be
connected to the Substation Level LAN operating on IEC 61850.
c) The Engineering Stations shall allow following functionality related to
Numerical Relays for all the Generator Circuits:
- Extract all the alarms, events and fault data captured by numerical relays.
- Change / upload Relay Settings for various numerical relays.
- Share the data as above with switchyard SAS through Substation Level
LAN.
d) The numerical relays constituting the BPU for each Main Generator Circuit,
shall be configured into two independent Numerical Protection Systems,
each fed from a separate DC supply, such that one numerical protection
system shall be always available to detect and operate for any type of fault in
the Generator Circuit, under condition of failure of the other numerical
protection system AND/OR on failure of the associated DC supply systems of
other numerical protection system. Group II of Generator protection shall be
on a different hardware platform than Group I protection. The individual
protection systems shall be connected to independent set of hand re-set trip
relays. Trip circuit supervision shall be provided for continuous monitoring of
trip relays, trip circuit and associated trip coils and the discontinuity shall be
annunciated in Unit / Switchyard Control Room as applicable. Further the
system shall have facilities to accept digital input signals of various alarms and
trip conditions of the Generator transformer, Excitation Transformer and unit
transformer with complete galvanic separation. All interface and coordination
requirements with the control, interlock and protection schemes provided for
the switchyard shall be achieved.
e) The alarm/status of each individual protection function and trip operation shall
be communicated to Main Plant DDC. The numerical system shall have built-
in features/ hardware interface to provide such inputs to DDC for analog/digital
values.
f) Protection function of two different equipment’s shall not be clubbed except
87GT
The Numerical Generator Protection System shall comprise the protections
indicated in the following table, which also contains the preferred grouping of
various protections:
Table: I

S. Preferred Grouping of
Protection Function
No. Protection Functions
1. Duplicated Generator Protection (87G)
2. Overall Differential Protection (87GT)
3. Generator Transformer Differential Protection 87T & 87GT shall be realized

(87T) in different relays.
4. Stator Earth Fault Protection covering 100% 64G1 and 64G2 shall be on
of winding (64G1) based on frequency two different channels of
injection principle protection.
5. Stator Standby Earth Fault Protection covering 95% of

winding (trip) (64G2)
6. Inter-turn Fault Protection (95G)
7. Duplicated Loss of field protection (40G1/2) 40G1 and 40G2 shall be on

two different channels of
protection.
8. Duplicated Back up Impedance Protection,

Three pole (21G)
9. Backup Earth Fault Protection on Generator

Transformer HV neutral (51NGT)
10. Duplicated Negative Sequence Current

Protection, alarm and I22t element for trip
(46G) matching with the machine
characteristics
11. Duplicated Low-Forward Power / Reverse 37/32 G1 and 37/32 G2 shall

power Interlock for steam turbine generator be in two different channels
(37/32G1 & 37/32 G2), (with a MINIMUM of protection.
setting range of 0-1%) each having following
two stages
a) Short time delayed interlocked with
turbine trip (0-10 sec)

Protection Function
b) Long time delayed independent of
turbine trip (0-60 sec)
12. Two Stage Rotor Earth Fault Protection (64F) Setting Rage for Rotor E/F
based on frequency injection principle. The Protection (Alarm/Trip) –
relay should be capable of monitoring the 1KΩ to 20KΩ
healthiness of injection circuit and raising an
alarm in case of open discontinuity in injection
circuit.
13. Duplicated Definite Time Delayed Over-

Voltage Protection (59G)
14. Duplicated Generator Under Frequency

Protection (81G) with df/dt elements
15. Over Fluxing Protection for Generator /

Generator Transformer (99 GT)
16. Duplicated Accidental Back Energization 50 GDM based on the two

(Dead Machine) protection (50GDM) on two principle shall be on two
principles different channels.
a) based on U/V and O/C
b) based on CB status and O/C
17. Duplicated Generator Pole slipping

protection(98G)
18. Unit Transformer Differential Protection, 3 87UT & 51UT shall be in

pole (87UT) different channels.
64UT LV & 51NUT shall be
19. Unit Transformer back-up over current in different channels.
protection (51UT)
20. Unit Transformer LV REF (64UT LV)
21. Unit Transformer LV back-up earth fault

protection (51NUT)

Protection Function
22. Gen Transformer OTI / WTI trip OTI & WTI trip shall be on
different channels
23. Gen Transformer Buchholz / PRV / other

mechanical Protections
24. Unit Transformer OTI / WTI trip OTI & WTI trip shall be on
different channels
25. Unit Transformer Buchholz, PRV / other

mechanical Protections
26. Alarm for all cooler / OLTC trouble for GT/UT

as applicable.
27. Excitation Transformer Differential 87ET & 51ET shall be on two

Protection,(87ET) different channels.
28. Excitation Transformer back-up over current

protection,(51ET)
30. Following general functions shall also be provided

a) VT fuse failure relay (based on voltage balance principle)
b) Trip relays as required
c) Trip circuit supervision / trip relay / DC supervision
9.02.03.01 Generator Disturbance Recorder

a) One Disturbance / Fault Recorder (DFR) shall be provided for each
generator.
b) Offered DFR shall be Microprocessor based used to record the graphic form
of instantaneous values of voltage and current in all three phases and neutral,
open and closed positions of relay contacts and breaker during disturbances.
c) It shall have the facility of fast scan as well as slow scan to record transient as
well as dynamic performance of the system.
d) The DFR for each generator circuit shall have 8 analog/16 digital inputs in
both slow scan and fast scan.

e) Slow Scan Feature

- The input for slow scan rate shall at least be MW, MVAR, field voltage,
frequency and generator terminal voltage. Any transducers, if required,
shall be supplied.
- Shall be suitable to record the frequency excursions and response of
generator field and governor control on system fluctuations.
- Shall have scan rate in the range of 2.0 to 50.0 Hz
- The Non-volatile memory in the DR shall be suitable for recording for a
minimum of 15 minute at scan rate corresponding to the offered lowest
scan rate with possibility to dedicate 10% of the memory space in pre-fault
zone of recording.
- The frequency response of analog signals shall be 25 Hz or better.
f) Fast Scan Feature
The fast scan feature of generator DFR shall meet the requirements specified
elsewhere for the Digital Fault Recording for EHV Lines in clause 9.02.07.
g) The DFR provided for each generator circuits of shall be wired to an
Engineering and Fault Recording Station to be located in the respective CER
as shown in the relevant NTPC drawing. It shall be possible to extract the DFR
records from this Engineering and Fault Recording Station for review and
analysis. In addition, a laptop shall also be supplied to facilitate downloading
of DFR records locally. Suitable communication port shall be provided for this
in each of the DFRs. The configuration of the laptop shall be finalized during
9.02.03.02 Relays / transducers for owner’s use Main Plant DDC interface
a. Four (04) interposing relays and one as mandatory spare shall be provided for
each generator circuit breaker in respective Generator relay panels for Main
Plant DDC Interface (closing and tripping of each 765kV generator bay breakers
from Unit Control Room). These relays shall be energized from 24V DC supply
and the auxiliary contacts shall be suitable for using the EHV control circuit.
b. Following transducers shall be provided in each of the generator relay panel for
DDC Interface:
i) 765kV Bus 1 voltage As per system

requirement
ii) 765kV Bus 2 voltage

iii) 765kV Bus 1 frequency

iv) 765kV Bus 2 frequency
v) Generator Current R phase
vi) Generator Current Y phase
vii) Generator Current B phase
viii) Generator voltage (R-Y)
ix) Generator voltage (Y-B)
x) Generator voltage (B-R)
xi) Generator frequency
xii) Generator Power factor
xiii) Generator Active Power
xiv) Generator Reactive Power
Multifunction Transducer with independent output for each parameter can also be
provided. However in this case two sets of multifunctional transducers shall be
provided.
9.02.03.03 METERING for Generator circuit.
The following integrating meters shall be provided in the generator circuit:
(a) ABT meter for generator circuit and each LV incomer of Unit Transformer
(b) Meter shall be as per requirements outlined in clause 10.02.00. These meters
shall be located in Generator Relay Panel.
9.02.04 Protection for EHV System (EHV)
i) The general protection requirements for the EHV systems are indicated in the
tender drawing for switchyard protection SLD.
ii) The total critical fault clearing time, including the circuit breaker operating time,
from fault initiation in any part of the system under all conditions shall not be
more than 80 ms for faults within differential Zone/ zone-I reach (i.e. up to 80%
of line length) and 100 ms for end zone faults including carrier transmission
time of 20ms.
iii) The SIR values to be considered for the operating time of relays for the SWYD
feeders shall be between 4 and 15. The rated break time for the EHV circuit-

breaker, as offered, shall be considered for the purpose of circuit-breaker

operating time. The Contractor shall furnish the operating time curves at
various SIR values for all types of faults.
9.02.05 EHV Line Protection

9.02.05A 765kV Line Protection
Each 765kV line shall be provided with the following protection:
i) Main-I : Numerical Line Distance protection scheme suitable for carrier
aided protection.
ii) Main-II : Numerical Line Distance protection scheme suitable for carrier
aided protection and with a hardware platform different than that of Main-I
The Main-I and Main-II distance protection shall be of equal performance
capability.
The Main-I and Main–II distance protection relays shall be connected to two
different protection groups to meet the requirements of relevant clause above.
9.02.05B Other Protections to be implemented for all lines are mentioned below
i) Local Over voltage Function: The over voltage function shall have
adjustable voltage and time settings. It shall monitor all phases and be tuned
to power system frequency. The over voltage function shall have two
independent voltage and time stages. It is also acceptable for the local over
voltage function to be a built-in feature of the Main-I and Main-II Distance
Protection relays.
ii) Compensated Overvoltage Function: A compensated overvoltage function
shall be provided to measure and protect for remote end over voltages caused
by the Ferranti rise along a line open at the remote end or lightly loaded. The
function shall have three settable voltage/time stages to facilitate an inverse
voltage/time withstand measurement and protection function. It is also
acceptable for the compensated overvoltage function to be a built-in feature
of the Main-I and Main-II distance protection relays. This is applicable for
765kV lines only.
iii) Back-up IDMT Earth fault Function: A back-up IDMT Directional earth fault
protection function shall be provided in each Main protection system. The

function shall measure zero sequence current and have a current/timer setting
range.
iv) Open Jumper Protection: The open jumper protection function shall operate
upon detecting negative sequence current and shall provide an alarm. The
open jumper protection function, as a built-in feature of the Main-I and Main-II
protection is also acceptable.
v) The protective relays shall be suitable for use with capacitor voltage
transformers (CVTs) having non-electronic damping and transient response
as per IEC.
vi) Back-up over-current Protection: Distance protection gets disabled, in case
of its connected VT fuse, failure. Consequent to this, a back-up over-current
function shall get activated in the respective distance relay.
9.02.05C The following protections shall be provided for each 132kV line:
i) Main-I : Numerical Line Distance protection scheme suitable for carrier
aided protection.
ii) Main-II : Back up Directional Overcurrent Function: Shall be based on
numerical technology with various characteristics such as Instantaneous,
DMT/IDMT, very inverse etc.
The Main-I and Back up directional Overcurrent protection relays shall be
connected to two different protection groups (Main-I to Group-A and Backup
O/C to Group-B) to meet the requirements of 9.02.02 clause above.
9.02.06 Numerical Distance Protection Scheme

i) The numerical distance relays shall be the latest version meeting the in-
service criteria specified elsewhere.
ii) The distance protection schemes shall be such as to facilitate compatibility
with the protection at the remote ends of the EHV transmission lines.
iii) The reaches of relay for zones 1, 2 & 3 should be able to cover line lengths
associated with this contract.
iv) The distance protection shall be of the non-switched type with separate
measurements for all phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground fault types.
v) The protection shall have two, independent, continuously variable, time
settings each with a range of 0 to 5 s for zone-2 and zone-3.
vi) The characteristics shall have adjustable characteristic angle setting ranges
of 45 to 85.

vii) Tripping characteristics shall be polygonal and / or mho circle with adjustable
offset and with independently adjustable reactive and resistive reaches (for
polygonal characteristics) separately settable for each zone. The type of
tripping characteristics shall be user selectable.
viii) The protection shall operate correctly for close-up three-phase faults and
other adverse conditions. It shall operate instantaneously when the circuit-
breaker is closed onto a zero-volt 3-phase fault.
ix) The protection shall provide Phase segregated tripping i.e. single phase as
well as three-phase tripping.
x) The protection shall have a maximum resetting time of 60 milliseconds.
xi) Zone 3 shall have a reverse offset capability adjustable to 10 to 20% of zone-
3 setting, or alternatively, an independent reverse zone 4 shall be provided.
xii) The earth fault measurements shall have zero sequence compensation
variables from 0.5 to 5 (scalar Z0/Z1).
xiii) The setting / reach should not be affected by mutual coupling effects
xiv) It shall have a continuous current rating of 2 times rated current. The relay
shall also be capable of carrying a high short time current of 100 times the
rated current without damage for a period of 1.0 s. The voltage circuit shall
be capable of continuously withstanding 1.2 times the rated voltage and 1.7
times for 3 s.
xv) The protection shall include Power Swing Blocking protection. The power
swing blocking feature shall:
- be of three pole type
- Block/unblock tripping during power swing conditions, separately for each
zone.
- Have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of 0 to 5s.
- Be in service during the dead time of a single pole Reclosing cycle.
- Have user configurable unblocking criteria in the case of fault detection
during a power swing.
xvi) Shall include Fuse Failure Protection, which shall
a) Monitor all the three fuses of the CVT and associated cabling against open
circuit
b) Inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation
c) Have an operating time of less than 7.0 ms

d) Remain inoperative for system earth faults

xvii) It shall have user configurable scheme logic such as permissive under-reach
(PUTT), Permissive over-reach (POTT), Direct Transfer Trip, Blocking
scheme etc. using communication channels. The scheme shall be complete
so that the user can select any option on site without any modification. Non-
carrier aided schemes such as Zone-1 extension, Loss of Load etc. shall be
provided to ensure high-speed clearance during channel failure.
xviii) The protection shall be able to distinguish between short circuit and heavy
load conditions.
xix) It shall have supplementary over current and earth fault protection functions.
xx) The dead line charging feature shall have adjustable minimum and maximum
voltages.
xxi) The protection shall have a multiple settings group feature. It shall be possible
to switch between the various available setting groups when the relay is in
service without compromising the protection during the switch-over.
xxii) The protection shall include the following additional functions:
- Weak-in feed tripping
- Echo function
- Current reversal guard
- Switch onto fault logic
- It shall be suitable for series compensated lines.
9.02.07 Digital Fault Recording

A Digital Fault Recorder shall be provided for each EHV line. The Digital Fault
Recorder shall meet the following requirements:
a) Shall be used to record the graphic form of the instantaneous values of analog
inputs such as voltages and currents in all the three phases, open delta voltage
and neutral current in the primary circuits in the case of a short circuit (fault)
and a disturbance in the Power System, as per the required technical
parameters.
b) Shall be provided with a self-monitoring facility.
c) Fault / disturbance logs shall be clearly identified by Fault ID, Fault date and
time (hour, minutes, seconds and ms). Time stampings on fault records shall
be synchronized with a GPS clock.

d) The disturbance recorder shall comprise distributed individual acquisition units,

one for each feeder and an evaluation unit which is common for the entire
substation. The acquisition units shall acquire the disturbance data for the pre-
fault, fault and post-fault periods and transfer them to the evaluation unit
automatically for storage on a mass storage device. The acquisition unit shall
be suitable for inputs from current transformers with 1 A rated secondary and
capacitive voltage transformers with 63.5 V (phase-to-neutral voltage) rated
secondary.
e) Shall have Scan rate of 1000 Hz or better for sampling each of the analog
channels having a fundamental frequency of 50 HZ. The frequency response
for these channels shall be DC on the lower side to 500 HZ or better on the
upper side. Any interposing devices provided with the DFR system shall not
compromise this frequency response.
f) Shall be provided with sensors based on threshold values of voltage, current
and frequency and rate of change of system frequency. External signals if
required can also be used for triggering the DR. The starting sensors of the
DFR, and pick-up, shall preserve the disturbance/fault data on the non-volatile
solid state memory of the acquisition unit. The setting of the starting sensors
shall be flexible, and shall have reasonable range/steps. The settings of the
starting sensors shall be field programmable.
g) The fault data from the Digital Fault Recording feature shall be available in IEEE
/ COMTRADE format. The data format shall be compatible for dynamic
protection relay testing with the relay test kit to be supplied by the Contractor.
The necessary equipment for interfacing and transfer of data shall also be
supplied by the Contractor.
h) All the fault records shall be transferred to the Protection / DR Station at the
Substation Level automatically or on request for further detailed analysis. The
software for analyzing the fault data shall be available at the Substation Level.
The software shall be capable of the complete analysis of fault data, including
the display of RMS/Peak envelop of any voltage / current, fundamental power
frequency deviation, display of instantaneous values of Real Power (computed
value), Reactive Power (computed value), power factor angle etc. A facility to
edit the fault data shall also be provided.
i) Following analog values shall be recorded –
Currents (R-phase, Y-phase, B-phase and Neutral), Voltages (V RY, VYB, VRB, Open
Delta).
The pre-fault recording time shall be at least 200 ms and the post-fault recording time
shall be at least 5.0secs.

8 Analogue channels (IR, IY, IB, IN, VRY, VYB, VBR AND OPEN DELTA)
16 Nos. Digital Channel
Amplitude Résolution of Analogue Channel (minimum): 16 bit
Event Resolution of Digital Channel (minimum): 1 milli sec
Aux. voltage: 220VDC (+10%,-20%)
DFR system offered shall also have a built-in Distance-to-Fault Locator Function. This
function shall be an on-line function and shall be suitable for circuit-breaker operating
times of 2 cycles. The computed distance-to-fault shall be available as a percentage
of line length or kilometers without requiring any further calculations. It shall have a
provision for mutual zero sequence compensation. It shall have an accuracy of 3%
or better for all types of faults and fault levels. This accuracy shall not be impaired
under following conditions:
- Presence of remote end in-feed
- Predominant DC component in fault current
- High fault arc resistance
- Severe CVT transients
- Mutual zero sequence coupling between adjacent lines
Digital Fault Recorder, having specified technical Parameters, as a built in feature in
Main Numerical Distance Relay is also acceptable.
9.02.08 Sequence-of-Event Recording
Sequence of event functionality pertaining to the main protection applications shall

be provided as a part of the individual protection devices. Sequence of event
recording pertaining to the monitoring of non-protection device, status information
such as switchyard open and close status which are not catered by the main
protection relays, shall be recorded by the bay controller.
The sequence of event recording shall:

(a) Have a time resolution of 1 millisecond or better.
(b) Be able to cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10 millisecond interval.
(c) The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1 millisecond followed by a
tag describing the point which has operated.

(d) events that occur while another event is in the process of being printed are to
be stored for subsequent printing. Over 100 such events must be stored.
The event printouts shall contain at least the station identification, date and time (in
hour, minutes, seconds and milliseconds), event number and event description (at
least 40 characters).
9.02.09 Auto-Reclose and Synchronizing Check
Auto-reclose (AR) and Synchronizing Check (SC) functionality shall be provided in a
separate device i.e other than distance protection relay. The interfacing between
BCUs and Bay Protection Units for achieving the AR function logic shall be achieved
at Bay Level using communication LAN as well as standby hard-wired logic between
BCU and Bay Protection Units. The intent of providing the hard-wired logic as a back-
up to the software logic is to ensure that in the event of failure of Substation LAN, the
bay level functionality is not hampered. The AR function shall meet the following
criteria:
- Be of single shot type
- Have single-phase and/or three phase Reclosing facilities. It shall have a user-
selectable option of single phase, three phase, single & three phase Reclosing
or non-auto reclosure mode.
- Incorporate a normal/delayed auto reclosure option with a time range of 1 to 60
s.
- Have a continuously variable three-phase and single-phase dead time of 0.1 to
5 s.
- Have a continuously variable reclaim time of 5 to 300 s.
- Be properly configured for the breaker-and-a-half arrangement, permitting
sequential closing of breakers.
- Incorporate the necessary auxiliary relays and timers to provide a
comprehensive reclosing and synchronizing scheme.
- Have facilities for selecting check synchronizing or dead line charging features.
The user shall have an option to change the required feature.
The built-in Synchronization Check feature shall determine the difference between
the amplitudes, phase angles and frequencies of two voltage vectors. Checks shall
be provided to detect a dead line or bus bar. The voltage difference, phase angle
difference and slip frequency settings shall be adjustable.
9.02.10.00 Transformer / Reactor Protection

i) The Bay Protection Unit offered for each transformer/ Reactor should be such
that it provides a comprehensive protection for the transformer/ Reactor for all
types of faults and abnormal operating conditions.
ii) The numerical relays, comprising the Bay Protection Unit, for each
transformer / reactor shall be configured into two protection groups operating
on two separate DC supplies, such that one protection group shall always be
available to detect and operate for any type of fault in the transformer/
Reactor, under condition of failure of other protection group or of associated
DC supply of the other protection group.
iii) Should the protection functions specified for a transformer/ Reactor be
available as a single discrete numerical relay, two such relays shall be
supplied to meet the requirements of relevant clause above. Differential, REF
and Back-up protection of any transformer/shunt reactor shall be realized in
separate numerical relays with Differential , Back-up E/F in one channel and
REF, Back-up O/C in another channel.
9.02.10.01 Transformer/ Reactor differential protection shall:
(a) be of numerical type and shall have continuous self-monitoring and diagnostic
features;
(b) be three-pole type, with faulty phase identification/indication. The operating
time of the relay shall not be greater than 30ms at 5 times the setting.
(c) be stable for magnetizing inrush currents and shall be stable under normal
over-fluxing conditions. Magnetizing inrush stability shall not be achieved
through the use of an intentional time delay;
(d) have an internal feature in the relay to take care of the angle and ratio
correction;
(e) have a disturbance recording feature to record the analogue form of
instantaneous values of the current in all three windings (i.e. nine analog
channels) during faults and disturbances for the pre-fault and post-fault
periods. The disturbance recorder shall have the facility to record the
following external digital channel signals in addition to the digital signals
pertaining to the differential relay itself:
. HV breaker (main and tie) status
. LV breaker status
. Buchholtz/On-load tap-changer Buchholtz alarm/trip
. Winding temperature/Oil temperature/Pressure relief alarm/trip of
transformer

The necessary hardware and software for downloading the data captured by the
disturbance recording function to a personal computer available in the
substation shall be included in the scope.
(f) be acceptable with built-in features of definite time overload protection (alarm)
relay provided the technical requirements of these relays specified under the
relevant clauses are met.
9.02.10.02 Restricted Earth Fault Protection shall:

(a) be single-pole type;
(b) be of current/voltage operated high impedance type;
(c) have a suitable non-linear resistor to limit the peak voltage
(d) shall have setting range from 5-80%
9.02.10.03 Transformer/ Reactor over fluxing Protection shall
(a) Operate on the principle of voltage to frequency ratio
(b) Have inverse time characteristics compatible to transformer over fluxing
withstand capability and also a separate high set feature.
(c) Provide an independent alarm with continuously adjustable time delay.
(d) Tripping time shall be governed by V/ F Vs time characteristic of the relay
(e) Have a set of characteristics for various multiplier settings.
(f) Have a resetting ratio of 98% or better.
9.02.10.04 Transformer/ Reactor Backup Over current Protection (51) shall
(a) Be triple pole type
(b) Be of definite time over current type
(c) Have an adjustable setting range of 20-80% or 150-600% of rated current (as
applicable) and 0.3 to 3.0 sec time delay.
(d) Be provided with operation indicator
9.02.10.05 Transformer/ Reactor Backup Earth Fault Protection (51LN) shall
(a) Be single pole type
(b) Be of definite time over current type
(c) have an adjustable setting range of 10-80% of rated current as applicable and
0.3 to 3.0 sec. Time delay

(d) Be provided with operation indicator
9.02.10.06 Void
9.02.11 EHV Circuit-breaker Protection
Each circuit breaker in the EHV switchyard shall be provided with following protection
functions:
i) Numerical Local Breaker Back up Protection Function: Duplicated LBB
protection function shall be provided for each circuit breaker in the EHV
switchyard.The LBB protection function for each main circuit-breaker shall be
interfaced with the Bus bar protection at the Bay Level over by hard-wired
signals between the Bay Protection Unit and the Bus bar protection panels.
The intent of providing the hard-wired logic as a back up to the software logic
is to ensure that in the event of failure of Substation LAN, the bay level
functionality is not hampered. The LBB function as a built-in function of Bay
Protection Unit is acceptable provided it meets all the requirements specified
for the LBB function. However, Tie LBB of incomplete dia shall not be realized
not be realized as in built function of BB protection. In addition, the LBB
protection function shall meet following criteria:
- Be three pole type having three single phase units
- Shall operate for stuck breaker conditions
- Have an operating/resetting time each of less than 15 ms.
- The LBB function shall be initiated by external trip contacts from the Bay
Protection Units and after a set time delay shall energize the trip bus in
the bus bar protection scheme on which the stuck breaker is connected
for tripping of all breakers connected to the particular bus. For all EHV
CBs other than that of Line breakers, an instantaneous repeat trip
command from LBB shall be given to the primary breaker through
two separate self-reset trip relay on different DC source.
- Have a setting range of 5 to 80% of rated current
- Have a continuous thermal withstand of 2 times rated current irrespective
of the setting.
- Have time delay feature with a continuously adjustable setting range of
0.1 to 1 s.
- Shall be an individual phase comprehensive scheme.
- Shall not operate during the single-phase auto-reclosing period.

- Shall provide end-fault protection that initiates a direct transfer trip to the
remote end.
ii) Trip Coil Supervision: A Trip Coil supervision function shall be provided for
each lockout trip relay and each of the circuit-breaker trip coils. It shall
incorporate both the pre-close and post-close supervision of trip coils and
associated trip circuits. An audible alarm shall be given in the event of
operation of trip coil supervision function. It shall have a time delay on drop-
off of not less than 200ms. Trip coil supervision function as a built-in feature
of the BCUs / Bay Protection Units is also acceptable, provided it meets all
other requirements specified here, including loss of DC supply.
iii) High Speed Trip Relays supplied under this package shall be:
- With operating time of less than 10ms.
- With reset time of less than 20ms.
- Provided with operation indicator for each element/coil.
- Have adequate contacts to meet the scheme requirements of trip,
interlock, LBB, auto-reclose, DR, fault locator, etc.
- Hand reset or self-reset, depending on the application. Further, the trip
relays shall be provided with a feature to receive manual reset command
from engineering workstation located in remote.
9.02.12 Bus bar Protection
9.02.12.01 Each EHV(765kV & 132kV) bus bar shall be covered with a duplicated
decentralized high-speed bus bar protection scheme connected to two different CT
cores. Bus bar protection of each EHV bus shall operate in a two-out-of-two mode
so as to achieve better security.
9.02.12.02. Each bus bar protection scheme shall:
- Be numerical having modular construction and three pole type.
- Main I and Main II shall be connected to different DC source such that even
under the failure of either Main I or Main II relays AND/OR failure of the
associated DC, the bus bar protection will operate in one out of two mode.
- Bay units shall be mounted in respective BPU Panels.
- Have a maximum operating time for all types of faults of 20ms at five times the
setting value.
- Operate selectively for each bus bar.
- Give 100% security up to a 50kA fault level.

- Incorporate continuous supervision for the CT secondary against any possible

open circuit and if it occurs, shall render the relevant zone of protection in-
operative. The zone protection contact shall be bypassed automatically and
the affected zone shall be protected by the appropriate healthy zone only.
- Not give any false operation during normal load flow in bus bars.
- Shall not mal-operate for an out-of-zone fault, particularly with current
transformer saturation under maximum through fault current with maximum DC
offset
- Shall provide independent zones of protection and incorporate clear zone
indication.
- Include individual high speed tripping relays for each feeder, including future
ones, as identified in single line diagram.
- Be transient free in operation.
- Incorporate protection "In-Out" switches for each zone.
- Be a biased differential type, have operate and restraint characteristics and self-
monitoring facilities.
- Shall be of phase segregated type with three-pole tripping
- Shall include individual high speed hand reset tripping relays for each bay
including Future bays as per Tender SLD
- Shall include continuous DC supply supervision
- Shall include modules for future bays as per Tender SLD.
9.02.12.03 The Bus bar protection relay shall be connected to the Inter bay communication bus.
Use of external CT-switching relays and CT ratio correction relays is not acceptable.
The bus bar relay settings and analysis of bus bar fault data shall be possible from
the Substation Level.
9.02.13 TEE Differential Protection
Duplicated numerical differential Protection (87TT-I and 87TT-II) shall be provided for
each ‘TEE’ zone of the one and half breaker scheme.
The ‘TEE’ Differential Protection shall:
a) be of numerical Type and shall have continuous self-monitoring and diagnostic
features
b) be three-pole type, with faulty phase identification/indication

c) 87TT-1 shall be based on Low Impedance Principle and 87TT-2 shall be based
on high impedance Principle. However, 87TT-2 may be configured as Low
Impedance in case of mismatch in CT Parameters.
9.03.00 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
The specification identifies some minimum requirements for each of the major
component which are essentially required for measurement of complex quantities
and transmitting the same to the PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator). The delivered
system is expected to provide meaningful measurement of the acquired data so
that it is useful to the operators in assessing the current state of grid and can also
be used for carrying out the post- facto analysis.
The offered panel mounted PMUs shall be complete in all respect so that they can
be installed at the substation and can communicate with Phasor Data
Concentrator (PDC). The necessary cable, connector and installation hardware,
as required, shall be in bidder’s scope. PMUs shall be considered for 765kV line
bays and shall be installed in switchyard air conditioned bay kiosk and adjacent to
line BPU panels. CT/CVT connections to the PMU shall be extended from the
control & relay panels. In case of multiple PMUs the Router shall be provided which
shall interface PMUs on one side and communication equipment on the other side.
The offered PMUs shall conform to IEEE C37.118.1-2011 & C37.118.2-2011
standard for both P and M class performance and shall be designed to meet the
following requirements:
i. The PMU shall be capable of receiving time from reliable and accurate Global
Positioning System (GPS). GPS shall provide time traceable to coordinated
universal time with sufficient accuracy. The PMU with supplied GPS shall keep
the total vector error (TVE), the frequency error (FE), and the Rate of Change
of Frequency (ROCOF) within the limits specified as per IEEE C37.118.1-2011
& IEEE C37.118.2-2011 standard.
ii. The supplied PMU shall be mounted in the panel, which shall be supplied by
the Contractor as required.
iii. The PMU shall support Data Reporting Rates at 10, 25 & 50 frames per second
at System Frequency of 50 Hz. The actual rate to be used shall be user
selectable.
iv. PMU shall meet all requirements as specified for both P and M Class of
Performance, which shall be user selectable as specified in IEEE C37.118.1-
2011 & C37.118.2-2011 standard.
v. The auxiliary power supply to PMUs will be provided from the station DC which
is used for control and protection of substation devices. Accordingly the PMUs
shall be suitable to operate on unearthed 220 V or 110V (+10%, -15%) DC
power supply depending upon the station DC supply available.

vi. The minimum configuration of offered PMUs shall have at least 2 set of 3-phase
voltages, two set of 3-phase current and 8 digital inputs. In case of substations
& power plants where all the Control & Relay panels are installed in a single
room, the Bidder may offer PMUs with up to 4 set of three phase voltages and
4 set of 3-phase current to meet the requirement of multiple feeders and BOQ
shall be adjusted accordingly during detailed engineering.
vii. The PMUs shall be used to measure the following:
a) Single phase as well as positive sequence phasors for current and voltages
b) Frequency
c) Rate of change of Frequency (ROCOF)
d) Provision shall be made for user selection of measured value.
viii. The PMU output shall communicate with the PDC as per latest IEEE C37.118.2-
2011.
ix. The PMUs shall have continuous self-monitoring ,diagnostic feature and
capable to identify & communicate problems and shall generate alarm in case
of any abnormality which shall be displayed locally as well as shall be
transferred to the PDC. The indication shall be available for each module on the
front panel of the PMU.
x. The offered PMUs shall meet the measurement compliance for both P & M class
of measurements as given in Section 5.5 of IEEE C37.118.1-2011 standard.
The Bidder shall submit the test reports for measurement compliance along with
the Bid.
xi. The PMUs shall communicate with PDC over the communication link provided
by the employer. For this, PMU shall be provided with One Ethernet port of
10/100/1000 Base Tx and one optical fiber port for streaming the data in
TCP/UDP method as per IEEE C37.118.2-2011 format.
xii. There shall be provision for HMI (Human Machine Interface) in PMU to perform
setting changes. The HMI shall also display the real time measured values.
Alternatively Portable configuration device for PMUs can be provided for
configuring the PMUs. Testing & configuration accessories such as test switch,
connector, software, hardware etc which are required for testing and
configuration changes locally shall be supplied.
xiii. Remote configuration facility shall be provided in PMU and the supplier shall
supply the necessary hardware/software required for remote configuration of
PMU.
xiv. The PMU shall have internal clock, which shall be synchronized with GPS clock.
Upon loss of signal from the GPS source, the PMU shall detect a loss-of-signal

and generate an alarm which will be transferred to PDC. Upon loss of signal,
the PMU time facility shall revert to an internal time base. The internal clock
shall have minimum stability of 1 pps. Within one minutes of re-acquisition of
signal, the time shall return to within 0.2 micro-second of UTC. Proper correction
of leap second shall be provided.
xv. PMU shall be capable of sending data in Uni-cast and Multi-cast both
simultaneously.
xvi. PMU shall support multiple data stream i.e. a PMU shall be capable to transmit
its data in one or more separate data streams. Each stream shall be
configurable independently based on the following.
a) Contents
b) Sampling rate
c) Class of service (P or M)
d) Communication mode (TCP/UDP)
e) Different destinations with separate IDCODE.
All these features shall be demonstrated during testing at factory and at
.
The PMU shall support data ‘Reporting Rates’ of 10, 25, and 50 frames
per seconds for 50 Hz System. The actual rate to be used shall be user
selectable. All the hardware and software shall be sized considering 25
frames per second. The typical network architecture of PMUs at substation
is given at Fig 1.1 below

Fig 1.1: Typical Network Architecture at Substation having Bay Kiosk at

Switch Yard.
9.03.01 PMU Functional Requirements
i. GPS based Time Facility for PMU application
GPS based time facility to synchronize PMU clock with Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC), shall be provided. At least one GPS System shall be provided at each
Substation synchronize all the PMUs. The Contractor shall ensure that the time
accuracy of PMU as specified is met. In case, more than one GPS is required to meet
the accuracy requirement, The Contractor shall provide the same.
The time receiver shall include propagation delay compensation and shall also
include an offset to permit correction to local time to achieve time accuracy of at least
± 0.2 microseconds (µs). Within one minutes of reacquisition of signal, the time shall
return to within 0.2 micro-second of UTC. Proper correction of leap second shall be
provided.
GPS module should be equipped with adequate no of IRIG-B ports to synchronize
the PMUs so that at any given location having more than one PMU, all the PMUs

can be synchronized with single GPS Module provided the specified time accuracy
is met. All additional required interface in this regard shall be included in the scope
of supply.
ii. Industrial Grade Router
In case of multiple PMUs at a substation/power plants all the PMUs shall be
connected to the communication equipment through an industrial grade router. The
industrial grade router shall interface PMUs on one side and communication
equipment on the other side. The router shall operate on 48V (+10%, -15%) DC
supply voltage.
Router shall be provided with following features:-
S. Description of the Minimum Quantity of the features
No. Features
1. Functions High performance Routing for data
2. Routing Capability Static& Dynamic routing
3. Processing capacity Minimum 2Mpps
4. IPSec VPN tunnels Minimum 10
5. Features to support QoS, MPLS, Security, Broadband,
Multiservice, Voice, IP to IP Gateway
6. Routing protocols EIGRP, IGRP, IS-IS, OSPF, BGP, ARP,
IPCP, IP forwarding, VLAN & MPLS etc.
7. Network protocols TCP/IP, IPv4,IPv6, OSI, Telnet, UDP,
DHCP
8. Network management Using SNMP Protocol
9. Minimum inbuilt software a) Data encryption supported DES (56
firewall features required BITS) 3des (168 bits) and hashing
algorithm like MD5and SHA-1
b) Filtering of packets based on Source
address, Destination address, Protocol
type, User, Port number, URL
c) Filtering of Protocols such as FTP,
SMTP, HTTP, SNMP, UDP, ICMP, RPC,
DNS, DHCP, ARP
d) Detailed system logging
10. Speed Configurability at All ports shall be configurable from 64kbps
each port to 2Mbps

11 Interface ports a) For connecting to communication

equipment on 1Gbps Ethernet port or
G.703 Port.
b) 1Gbps Ethernet port for each PMU
12 Mounting Rack mountable
13 Minimum no. of concurrent 10
TCP sessions
iii.Environmental Requirements
The PMU & GPS system will be installed inside switchyard ac kiosks within the EHV
substation environment. The PMU & GPS shall be capable of operating in ambient
temperatures from -10 deg C to +55 deg C and relative humidity up to 10-90% non-
condensing.
9.04.00 Islanding Scheme
Islanding scheme shall be provided for the entire765kV switchyard as below:-
i. An under frequency with df/dt based islanding scheme for the whole generating
station shall be provided and shall be located in the switchyard.
ii. Shall employ two out of three channels of U/F and df/dt for high reliability for each
bus
iii. Each of the three channels of under frequency islanding scheme shall be
independent from each other, starting from the VT measuring core, control cables,
dc supplies, under frequency or df/dt measuring relay, etc. till the islanding trip relay
of the breaker.
iv. Shall be a multi-step scheme and each step shall have setting range of + 5% to -
8% with timers of required setting.
v. Shall have a separate dedicated islanding trip relay for each of the EHV breaker
including all EHV bays and future bays as per switchyard SLD
vi. Separately fused 220V DC supplies shall be employed.
10.00.00 Energy Meters

One no. class 0.2s accuracy energy meters suitable for ABT requirement as specified
below in clause 10.02.00 shall be provided at each location indicated in respective
tender protection SLD.These energy meters shall be located in the respective BPU
panels

This metering system shall have following features:

i. Meters shall be microprocessor-based MWH meters having an accuracy
class of 0.2S or better. MVARH meters shall have accuracy class of 0.5 or
better.
ii. These meters shall have provision for downloading of data through an
optical port and /or through RS 232/485 port.
iii. Even under absence of VT input, energy meter display shall be available
and it shall be possible to download data from the energy meters.
iv. All these meters shall be networked and connected to the Metering Master
Station (MMS), provided for the ABT meters.
v. It shall be possible to download the energy meter data into the MMS.
Dummy panels shall be supplied for mounting of owner’s supplied energy meters.
These energy meters shall be two (2) nos for each EHV line bay and one (1) no. for
each generator / generator transformer bay / transformer bay / reactors bay.
Terminal blocks (disconnecting type) shall also be provided with these panels
Quantity and dimension of these panels shall be decided during detailed
engineering.
10.02.00 Technical Requirements of Energy Meters for ABT Requirement

Contractor shall supply energy meters along with metering station, 4 Nos. machine
Clients, 20 nos web client license. MRI or lap top (as applicable) as per the technical
specification given below:
a) Shall be microprocessor-based conforming to IEC 62052-11, IEC 62053-22, IS
14697
b) Shall carry out measurement of active energy (both import and export) and
reactive energy (both import and export) by 3-phase, 4 wire principle suitable
for balanced/ unbalanced 3 phase load.
c) Shall have an accuracy of energy measurement of at least Class 0.2S for active
energy and at least Class 0.5 for reactive energy.
d) The active and reactive energy shall be directly computed in CT & VT primary
ratings.
e) The reactive energy shall be recorded for each metering interval in four
different registers as MVARh (lag) when active export, MVARh (Lag) when

active import, MVARh (lead) when active export, MVARh (Lead) when active
import.
f) Two separate registers shall be provided to record MVARH when system
voltage is 103% and when system voltage is  97%.
g) Shall compute the net MWh and MVARh during each successive 15-minute
block metering interval along with a plus/minus sign, instantaneous MWh,
instantaneous MVARh, average frequency of each 15 minutes, net active
energy at midnight, , net reactive energy for voltage low and high conditions at
each midnight.
h) Each energy meter shall have a display unit. It shall display the net MWh and
MVARh with a plus/minus sign and average frequency during the previous
metering interval; peak MWh demand since the last demand reset;
accumulated total (instantaneous) MWh and MVARh with a plus/minus sign,
date and time; and instantaneous current and voltage on each phases.
i) i) All the registers shall be stored in a non-volatile memory. Meter registers for
each metering interval, as well as accumulated totals, shall be downloadable.
All the net active/reactive energy values displayed or stored shall be with a plus
/minus sign for export/import.
j) At least the following data shall be stored before being over-written for the
following parameters.
Parameters Details Min No of days

1. Net MWH 15 min block 40 days in meter
2. Aver Freq 15 min block 40days in meter
3. Net MVARH for V > 103% 15min block 40days in meter
4. Net MVARH for V < 97% 15min block 40days in meter
5. Cumulative Net MWH at 10 days in meter/
every midnight 40 days in PC
6. Cumulative Net MVARH for 10 days in Meter/
V> 103% at every midnight 40 days in PC
7. Cumulative Net MVARH for V 10 days in Meter/
< 97% At every midnight 40 days in PC
8. Date and time blocks of VT
failure on any phase.

k) Shall have a built in clock and calendar with an accuracy of less than 15
seconds per month drift without assistance of external time synchronizing
pulse.
l) Date/time shall be displayed on demand. The clock shall be synchronized by
GPS time synchronization equipment being supplied by the contractor.
m) The voltage monitoring of shall be inbuilt feature provided to signal failures to
the Substation Automation System, The meter shall be suitable to operate with
power drawn from the VT supplies. The burden of the meters shall be less than
2 VA.
n) The power supply to the meter shall be healthy even with a single-phase VT
supply. An automatic backup, in the event of non-availability of voltage in all
the phases, shall be provided by a built in long life battery and shall not need
replacement for at least 10 years with a continuous VT interruption of at least
2 years. Even under absence of VT input, energy meter display shall be
available and it shall be possible to download data from the energy meter.
Incase data downloading is not possible in absence of VT supply, meter with
provision of 220V DC auxiliary power shall be provided. Date and time of VT
interruption and restoration shall be automatically stored in a non-volatile
memory.
o) Shall have an optical port on the front of the meter for data collection from either
a hand held meter reading instrument (MRI) having a display for energy
readings or from a notebook computer with suitable software . The contractor
shall supply the MRI and/or notebook complete with all optical interface unit
required.
p) A dedicated Metering Master Station (MMS), hardwired to all the energy meters
in contractor’s scope shall be provided. The MMS shall be complete to offer
the following functionality:
 To automatically/manually downloaded the meter data from each meter
point at scheduled daily intervals. Manual data download in MMS should
not interfere with automatic real time data downloading.
 To create calculated metering points by addition, subtraction, and applying
multiplication factors to meter points
 To present the demand of each meter point and calculated meter points in
graphical format over specified intervals.
 To calculate the total energy exchanged on meter points or calculated
meter points for different time-of-use periods over specified intervals.
 Modify ABT parameters as notified by CERC from time to time.

 To export meter data to Excel format for external analysis.

 Real time display of generation data Unit wise and station.
 Real time block wise generation data with SG, DC, Frequency, UI etc. unit
wise and station.
 Commercial report day wise
 Monthly commercial performance of station, stage wise and unit wise.
 Auto schedule updating into server after schedule updating in local file
/folder of MMS.
 Data polling rate for each meter to be in the range of 3-5 sec.
 Cycle time of server to be less than 1 sec.
 Refresh rate of client screen to be less than 5 sec.
 Alert on non-commercial generation based on frequency, fuel cost etc.
q) The meter shall have means to test MWh and MVARh accuracy and calibration
at site in-situ and test terminal blocks shall be provided for the same.
r) Each meter shall have a unique identification code provided by the Owner and
shall be permanently marked on the front of the meter and stored in the non-
volatile memory of the meter.
s) The MMS shall be connected to substation LAN so as to facilitate display of
energy data at other locations of the LAN and communication of these data to
owner’s Plant Information (PI) System on OPC as detailed in Cl.No.6.08.04.
11.00.00 Time Synchronization Equipment
i) Time Synchronization equipments shall be provided and shall be located one
in the switchyard Control Room and one in CER-1. It shall receive Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC) transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite (GPS) for
time synchronization of all components of the SAS/ generator relay panel.
ii) Shall be complete in all respects including antenna, all cables, processing
equipment, etc.
iii) All auxiliary systems and special cables required for synchronization of the
equipment shall be supplied and commissioned by the Contractor.
iv) Shall work from DC supplies only and the Contractor to clarify if any built-in
battery backup is provided, in which case, same shall be of long life lithium
batteries.

v) Shall be immune to hostile electrical environment. Suitable protections are to

be provided against lightning surges and over-voltages in power supply
systems and antenna feeders.
vi) The system shall be fully tested to the relevant international standards such
as IEC: 801 and IEC: 255. One copy of all the test reports shall be enclosed
with the bid.
vii) All components of the SWYD SAS, including Substation Controllers,
Workstations, Bay Control Units (BCU) and Bay Protection units (BPU) and
all numeric protection relays shall be synchronized with an accuracy of 1ms.
viii) The system should be able to track more than 1 satellite at a time to ensure
no interruptions of synchronization signals.
ix) The system shall have provisions for combination of any of the following
output signals::
 NTP (network time protocol) 100Mbits Ethernet port
 IRIG-B00x (TTL, pulse width modulated signal)
 2 x Pulse per half-hour/ Pulse per minute/ Pulse per second outputs via
potential free contacts
 Any other output port as may be required for the offered system.
 Alarm status contact indicating healthy status of system
x) These output ports shall be compatible with the requirement of the equipment
to be synchronized i.e. BCUs and BPUs. The master clock in control room
shall also be synchronized with the time synchronization system. The actual
port requirements (no./type) in line with the system offered shall be finalized
during detailed engineering.
xi) The equipment should have a periodic time correction facility of one-sec.
periodicity. The equipment shall also have real time display in hour, minute,
second (24 hour mode) and have a separate time display unit to be mounted
on top of the MIMIC panel, having display size of approx. 144mm height.
12.00.00 Relay Test Equipment
i) The required relay test equipment shall comprise the following:
- One dynamic portable relay test system based suitable for allowing dynamic
and steady state testing.
- Any other auxiliary items like phantom loads, etc. required for testing all the
protection relays supplied under this contract.

ii) It shall have the capability to replay the Disturbance / Fault records acquired by
the numerical relays / stand-alone DR in IEEE / COMTRADE format or EMTP
simulations, to facilitate dynamic testing of all the numerical relays supplied
under this contract. The required software for steady state/dynamic testing of
all the numerical protection relays, energy meters and transducers, along with
a laptop PC, shall also be supplied.
iii) All commissioning tests on protection relays, energy meters and transducers
shall be carried out with this relay test equipment being supplied under this
contract and test reports shall be maintained as per the agreed protocols.
13.00.00 NIL
14.00.00 Panels
14.01.00 All panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and completely metal enclosed.
Cable entries shall be from the bottom. Panels shall be of IP 31 class or better.
14.02.00 Panels shall have removable gland plates with glands made of brass and shall be
suitable for armoured cables.
14.03.00 Thickness of panel sides shall be 2mm for Cold Rolled Sheet Steel, 2.5mm for Hot
Rolled Sheet Steel.
14.04.00 Panels shall be painted. The colour of paint for exterior of the panel shall be as
follows:
a) Ends: Colour-Blue, Shade-RAL5012
b) Front and Rear: Colour-Grey, Shade-RAL9002
14.05.00 Panels shall have a lockable front toughened glass door and a swing frame/ fixed
rack. Panels shall facilitate direct access to any component mounted inside and shall
have at least 20% free space for future expansion.
14.06.00 Shall be supplied complete with interconnecting wiring between all devices mounted
therein.
14.07.00 All equipment mounted on front and rear side of the panels shall have individual name
plates with equipment designation engraved. Each panel shall also have circuit/feeder
designation name plate.
14.08.00 Each panel shall be provided with a 240V AC fluorescent lighting fixture controlled by
door switch as well as a 5A, 240V AC switch-socket unit.
14.09.00 Shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving, distributing, isolating
and fusing of AC & DC supplies for various circuits for control, signaling, lighting,
interlocking, etc. Selection of main and sub-circuit fuse rating shall ensure selective
clearance of the sub-circuit faults.

14.10.00 Voltage circuits for protection and metering shall be protected by fuses. Suitable fuse
failure relays shall be provided to give an alarm for voltage circuits of
protection/metering. Voltage selection scheme based on relays shall be provided for
meters wherever applicable.
14.11.00 The DC supplies at the individual relay and protection panels shall be monitored and
failure of DC supplies shall be annunciated.
14.12.00 Earthing
a) The panels shall be equipped with an earth bus of at least 50x6mm2 galvanized
steel flat bar or equivalent copper.
b) Earth buses of adjoining panels shall be connected for continuity. The continuous
earth bus so formed shall be connected to the main earth grid at one end only.
c) All metallic cases of the mounted equipment shall be separately connected to the
earth bus by 2.5mm2 copper wires. No loops in the earth wiring shall be permitted.
d) CT/VT neutral secondary shall only be earthed at the terminal block of the panel
through links, such that the earthing of one group may be removed without
disturbing others.
e) An independent Electronic Earth System shall be provided as per contractor’s
standard. The electronic earth shall be connected to the substation earth mat
through a dedicated riser.
14.13.00 Wiring
a) Internal wiring to be connected to external equipment shall terminate on terminal
blocks.
b) The terminal blocks for CTs and VTs shall be provided with test links and isolating
facilities. The CT terminal blocks shall be provided with short circuiting and
earthing facilities.
c) Shall have 20% terminals as spare terminals in each panel.
d) All equipment mounted on front and rear side of the panels shall have individual
name-plates with equipment designation engraved. Each panel shall also have
circuit/feeder designation name plate.
e) All wiring shall be with 660V grade, single core, PVC insulated stranded copper
conductor. 660V grade terminal blocks shall be provided.
f) Wires shall be vermin proof. Minimum size of conductor shall be 1.5 mm2 in
general, but for CT & VT circuits it shall be 2.5 mm2. Minimum number of strands
shall be three.

g) Contractor shall be solely responsible for completeness and correctness of all the
wiring, and for proper functioning of the connected equipment.
15.00.00 CONTROL CABLING PHILOSOPHY IN SWITCHYARD
(a) Each secondary core of all the phase CT/CVT shall be brought to the
equipment marshalling box through independent cables.
(b) Each three phase secondary core of each CT/CVT shall be brought to the
associated control/relay panel from the equipment marshalling box through
independent cables.
(c) Duplicated cores with at least 2 x 2.5 sq.mm2 CU/equivalent core cross-
sectional area per connection shall be used for connection of all CT/CVT
circuits.
(d) VT leads used for tariff metering shall have an equivalent core cross-
sectional area of at least 10 mm2 CU/equivalent per phase/neutral
connection.
(e) Duplicate channels of protection shall have independent cables for tripping,
DC supply, etc. Duplicated cores shall be used for ALL closing/tripping
commands and interlocking signals involving long (MORE THAN 500 m)
cable lengths, such as interfacing between SWYD and SWGR/ GRP.
(f) For the following applications multiple cores with at least 2 x 2.5 mm2 CU /
equivalent core cross - sectional area per connection shall be used:
i) DC supply to Bay Marshalling box
ii) DC supply to circuit-breaker cubicle
iii) DC looping for closing and tripping circuits of circuit-breaker
(g) All the interconnections (both AC/DC) within the switchyard and between
switchyard and other systems required for the successful implementation
of the control, interlocks and protection schemes under present package,
as shown in the tender drawings for protection, control philosophy and
substation automation architecture, shall be in the scope of the bidder. Such
interconnections between switchyard and other system shall include but not
limited to the following:
- CT connections from owner’s 11kV switchgear / transformer MB to
SWYD AC Kiosk /Control Room for transformer protections as per
relevant protection SLD. General Layout Plan of the plant showing
the location of all such systems are included as a tender drawing.
- CT connections from SWYD to GRP for overall differential protection
and overhang differential protection in line with GRP protection SLD.

- Extension of switchyard bus voltages to respective GRPs for

transducer circuit and Generator synchronizing circuit.
- Extension of manual closing and tripping commands from the
coupling relays in GRP to EHV generator breakers through BCU /
control panel.
- Necessary cabling from SWYD CR to GRP for protection interfacing,
Generator EHV breaker closing interlock and signal exchange
between switchyard and GRP.
- Any special cables (other than 1.5 sq.mm unarmoured required for
the implementation of the protections being provided by the
bidder.(eg: 100% stator E/F, Rotor E/F etc)
- Necessary interconnections for the Inter tripping / closing
interlocking between upstream and downstream systems for station
transformer / miscellaneous transformer / unit transformer/ excitation
system.
- Necessary interconnections from transformer MB to RTCC / BCU
(located in SWYD Bay Kiosks) for OLTC control & monitoring.
- Any screened cable required for connecting 4-20 mA analog signals.
- Necessary interfacing between Transformer, Reactor MBs and
SWYD Bay Kiosks / Control Room for various Transformer &
Reactor protection , monitoring system and fire protection system.
- Cables from Bay-kiosk to SAS for monitoring / control of Air-
conditions and Fire-detection system
- Necessary interconnections for signal exchange between SWYD /
SWYD CR to interfacing panels of RLDC where ever applicable.
(h) Spare cores shall be provided as per following norms:
Up to 3-core cable - Nil
5 Core Cable - Min. 1 core
7 to 14 core cables - Min. 2 cores
More than 14 core - Min. 3 cores
16.00.00 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)

16.01.01 All equipment furnished under this specification shall be subject to test by authorized
quality assurance personnel of the contractor and Owner’s representatives during
manufacture, erection and on completion. The approval of the Owner or passing such

inspections or tests will not, however, prejudice the right of the Owner to reject the
equipment if it does not comply with the specifications when erected or fails to give
complete satisfaction in service. The detailed requirement of operational and pre-FAT
tests as well as FAT test (Integrated Test) is given in this Section.
16.01.02 The FAT shall be mutually agreed upon and approved by Owner during detailed
engineering.
16.02.00 Operational and Pre-FAT Tests
a) The authorized quality assurance personnel of the contractor shall conduct all
tests as per the requirements of this clause 16.02.00 and clause 16.03.00 and
fully satisfy themselves regarding completeness of hardware, software and full
compliance with specification requirements by all equipment/sub-systems and the
system as a whole before sending notification for FAT to the Owner. Contractor
shall maintain accurate records for all pre-FAT tests which shall be properly
documented and duly certified documents shall be furnished to Owner at least
two weeks prior to FAT tests, while giving inspection call.
b) Each individual item of equipment/ sub-system/ software package furnished by
the Contractor as well as the complete system as per this specification shall be
inspected and tested by the Contractor in his works for full compliance with
specification requirements, completeness, proper assembly, proper operation,
cleanliness and state of physical condition as applicable.
c) The Contractor shall conduct a point by point wiring continuity check to every input
and output and verify that the wiring connections agree with the documentation.
d) Contractor shall conduct all tests as per requirements of clause 16.04.00 (Factory
Acceptance Tests) to fully satisfy himself regarding completeness of the system
and full compliance with specification requirements for SAS as a whole as well as
for individual components/ software module. This test will be done for 100%
samples, even if the FAT requires tests for only some smaller percentages.
e) The pre-FAT report shall be in the format of FAT procedure as approved by the
Owner. It shall be accompanied by a very detailed report, in a log form, of the
performance of all pre-FAT Tests. These records shall list not only the
successfully completed tests, but shall detail all system, test and component
failures.
16.03.00 Notification for FAT
a) Contractor shall send notification regarding readiness for FAT and indicate the
proposed date for commencement of FAT to enable the Owner to depute
representatives for participating in these tests. The notification shall be sent to the
Owner not less than one week prior to commencement of the FAT along with the
copies of documents covering pre-FAT results as per clause 16.02.00.

b) The Contractor shall ensure that all hardware and software required for fully
implementing the system as per requirements of this specification is available and
the adequacy of hardware, software, system configuration, etc., is fully
established during the pre-FAT Tests conducted by the Contractor. In case any
deficiencies in hardware and/or software are noticed by the Contractor during the
pre-FAT Tests, the Contractor shall make good all such deficiencies and re-
conduct the required tests to fully satisfy him regarding completeness of the
system and full compliance with specification requirements before sending
notification to the Owner regarding FAT Tests.
16.04.00 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)
16.04.01 Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) shall include all tests required to fully demonstrate
to Owner’s satisfaction that each equipment/sub-system/system as well as software
modules furnished as per this specification as well as SAS as a whole, fully meets the
functional, parametric and other requirements of this specification and Owner’s
approved drawings/documents under all operating regimes. The testing shall be
conducted with the all the SAS components fully interconnected as per the final
system configuration, including BCU, BPU and other protection relays. The Owner
shall witness all FAT tests.
16.04.02 The Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT) shall include all reasonable exercises which the
combination of equipment and software can be expected to perform. These tests shall
be divided into, as a minimum, but not limited to the following categories:
a) Pre power on checks
b) Power on checks
c) Hardware tests
d) Functional tests
e) Parametric tests
f) Specific tests on electronic hardware
g) Power failure auto-restart tests
h) Testing of interlocking
16.04.03 The Contractor shall submit a detailed FAT procedure for Owner’s approval during
detailed engineering stage based on the above guidelines. The FAT procedure to be
submitted by the Contractor shall be detailed and exhaustive enough such that Owner
is satisfied that all the SAS System specification requirements and features are being
tested and the system meets these requirements. The test results obtained shall be
properly documented by the Contractor and furnished in the Owner approved format
as decided during detailed engineering and submitted in the requisite number of

copies with all annexes irrespective of the fact that Owner‘s representative was
present during the tests.
16.04.04 For integrated testing of the total SAS system, the Contractor shall provide an I/O
generator/simulator, which will be connected, to the BCUs simulating the plant status
and plant operation. This will help in generating desired rate and sequence of I/O to
test various BCU and HMI functionality under worst case loading conditions. With the
I/O generator/simulator, all possible interlocking conditions shall be simulated and
controls tested.
16.04.05 Following the tests, if in the opinion of the Owner, the system has not been adequately
manufactured, programmed, tested or debugged the Contractor shall make good all
deficiencies including system parametric specifications of display response time,
processor duty cycle, SOE resolution, etc., and re-run the test to fully satisfy the
Owner regarding full compliance with specification requirements and requisite quality
standards. The Contractor shall be responsible for all travel and accommodation
costs of the Owner related to re-visits and/or re-testing required.
16.04.06 The system shall not be shipped without approval of Owner in writing. Upon
successful completion of FAT, the Owner will provide the Contractor with a written
authorization for shipment of the system equipment to the project site.
16.04.07 Contractor shall note that no payments towards dispatch of equipment and
subsequent activities shall be due and payable to the Contractor till the Contractor is
able to successfully demonstrate to Owner’s satisfaction that the SAS and parts
thereof fully meet the FAT requirements.
16.04.08 The tests shall include the verification of all I/O functions at all Control Levels. The
interface to the control center(s), interface to the EHV SAS and interface to the
owner’s DDC shall be tested with the use of a protocol simulator.
16.04.09 Performance test: The duty cycle time as specified in cl 3.00.00 shall be checked
under the worst loading conditions.
17.00.00 Site / Commissioning Tests
17.01.00 Site tests shall include all tests to be carried out at site upon receipt of equipment. It
shall include but not be limited to testing calibration, configurations and pre-
commissioning trials start up tests, trial operation and performance and guarantee
tests. The Contractor shall be responsible for all site / commissioning tests.
17.02.00 The Contractor shall maintain all tests, calibration records in Owner approved
formats, and these shall be countersigned by authorized quality assurance personnel
of the Contractor supervising these works.
17.03.00 The Contractor shall maintain master checklists to ensure that all tests and calibration
for all equipment/devices furnished under these specifications are satisfactorily

completed under the supervision of the authorized quality assurance personnel of the
Contractor.
17.04.00 the site / commissioning tests shall be categorized under following categories:
a) Start- up tests
b) Calibration and configuration checks
c) Pre-commissioning tests
d) Trial Operation
e) Availability Tests
17.05.00 Point-to-point testing of all the I/O signals in the EHV network & GRP end shall be
done by the Contractor.
17.06.00 Point-to-point testing shall include:
 Verification of all status indications by operating the plant
 Verification of event / alarm indications by simulating alarm conditions
 Verification of all analogue indications by injection testing
 Verification of all controls by operating the plant
17.08.00 Availability Tests
a) The Contractor shall guarantee 99.9 percent availability for a continuous
period of 180 days. Availability guarantee test shall be conducted to assure
this level of availability. If the accrued down time exceeds 0.1% of 180 days,
during availability test run, a new 180 days test run shall start at the time
when the system becomes available again. Loss of availability (unavailable
system) shall be defined as the loss of the systems guaranteed accuracy
and repeatability or of any system function, except however, that the loss of
a function for not more than five percent of the points shall not be considered
loss of availability. Loss of function for not more than 5% of the points shall
be treated as partial unavailability and the corresponding outage time shall
be weighted with respect to the function and the percentage of the points for
which the function is unavailable. Loss of each function shall have one
weighing factor and unavailability of each equipment, peripherals device or
process I/O card etc. shall have another weighing factor. The guaranteed
accuracy and repeatability and system parametric requirements specified in
clauses on system parametric requirements shall be maintained for the
entire 180 days run without any manual re-calibration or any other changes
made to the SAS.

b) Downtime shall start upon loss of a system function and shall end upon full
restoration of the affected system function. A minimum of one hour’s down
time shall be charged for each loss of availability in determining system
availability.
c) The Contractor shall submit the Availability Test Procedure for Owner’s
approval. The details regarding outage time, weighing factors for various
systems functions equipment to calculate the down time shall be discussed
and finalized during detailed engineering.
d) The availability test shall start at a date, which will occur, between the
commissioning date and 5 months after commissioning. The contractor will
be notified the date during PG test.
e) The availability test shall be expressed as percentage, which shall be
calculated as (100% x (test duration time – Accumulated test outage
time/Test duration time).
f) System outage time will be accumulated over test duration and calculated
as outage time x weighing factor. The contractor shall submit a list of
weighing factors for all system components along with the bid and the same
will be mutually finalized before contract award. Outage time shall be
weighted by each function’s weighing factor.
17.09.00 Conditions for Availability Tests
a) Down time shall start with the notification to contractor about any loss of
function. Downtime shall be exclusive of travel time required by the
Contractor, but not in excess of 8 hours.
b) The contractor shall furnish in his bid recommended spare parts inventory,
along with unit price, to be maintained at site during availability test run. If
the spare parts required for maintenance as recommended by contractor
are not available with Owner for fault repair the outage time necessary for
obtaining spare will not be counted. If the required spare are not
recommended by the Contractor and are required for repairs, then the time
required to obtain the part by the Contractor shall be multiplied by weighting
factor or 0.05 and counted as a accumulated outage time. The spare parts,
which are used by the Contractor and not replaced by the contractor, shall
accumulate outage time at the rate of time required to obtain the spare parts
multiplied by the weighing factor of 0.05 if the part is required on a
subsequent outage.
c) The contractor shall be responsible for replacing any of the Owner’s spare
parts which are used in the availability run free of cost to the Owner.

d) Failure of peripheral output devices shall be counted as outage time if failure

of the device affects any for part of the system function.
e) Any degradation of function shall accrue outage time regardless of
processor configuration.
f) During a period of system outage, the Owner shall use operable functions
of the system provided that such use does not interfere with maintenance of
the inoperable functions or hardware as determined by the Contractor.
g) Should the contractor determine that partial use of the system by the Owner
will interfere with the contractor’s maintenance procedures, system outage
time shall accumulate with a weighing factor of 1.0 since no functions are
available to the Owner. This shall include offline servicing.
h) Outage time for each function shall stop at the time the contractor returns
each of the functions in full service and relinquishes full use of the system
to the Owner.
17.09.01 The contractor shall prepare a detailed site / commissioning tests procedure based
on the guidelines given here and submit to Owner for approval during detailed
engineering stage.
17.10.00 System Hand-over and Final Acceptance
17.10.01 The system will be handed-over to the Owner for commercial operation after the site
/ commissioning tests have been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. A hand-
over certificate will be issued by the Owner. The Contractor will still be responsible
for the Availability Tests.
17.10.02 Final acceptance of the system by the Owner will take place after the Availability Tests
have been done to the satisfaction of the Owner.
18.00.00 Type Test Requirements

18.01.00 Test reports for following type tests shall be submitted for all BCUs / BPUs / DR /
Energy Meter. Reports / Certificates of tests conducted in accredited Laboratories
(accredited by the national accrediting body of the country where the lab is located)
are also acceptable.
18.01.01 BCU/BPU
A. Insulation Tests:
Sl. No. Description Standard
1. Dielectric Withstand Tests IEC 60255-5

 2kV rms for 1 minute between all

case terminals connected together
and the case earth.
 2kV rms for 1 minute between all
terminals of independent circuits with
terminals on each independent circuit
connected together.
ANSI/ IEEE C37.90
 1kV rms for 1 minute across the open
contacts of the watchdog relays.
 1kV rms for 1 minute across open
contacts of changeover output relays.
 1.5kV rms for 1 minute across open
contacts of normally open output
relays.
2. High Voltage Impulse Test, IEC 60255-5
class III  5 kV peak; 1.2/50 sec; 0.5 J; 3
positive and 3 negative shots at
intervals of 5 sec
B. Electrical Environment Tests:
1. DC Supply Interruption IEC 60255-11
2. AC Ripple on DC supply IEC 60255-11
3. AC voltage dips and short IEC 61000-4-11
Interruptions
4. High Frequency Disturbance IEC 60255–22–1, class III
 At 1MHz, for 2s with 200Ω source
impedance:
 2.5 kV peak; 1 MHz; T = 15 sec;
400 shots/sec; duration 2 sec
between independent circuits and
independent circuits and case earth.
1.0kV peak across terminals of the
same circuit.
5. Fast Transient Disturbance IEC 60255-22-4, class IV

 4kV, 2.5kHz applied directly to

auxiliary supply
 4kV, 2.5kHz applied to all inputs.
6. Surge Withstand Capability IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
 4kV fast transient and 2.5kV
oscillatory applied directly across
each output contact, optically isolated
input and power supply circuit.
7. Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4
 15kV discharge in air to user
interface, display and exposed metal
work.
8. Surge Immunity IEC 61000-4-5: 1995 Level 4
 4kV peak, 1.2/50ms between all
groups and case earth.
 2kV peak, 1.2/50ms between
terminals of each group.
C. EMC Tests:
1. Radiated Immunity C37.90.2-2004
 25MHz to 1000MHz,
2. Radiated Electromagnetic IEC 60255-22-3
Field Disturbance Test  80-1000 MHz, Amplitude Modulated
3. Disturbances Induced by IEC 60255-22-6
Radio Frequency fields,  150kHz – 80 MHz;
Amplitude Modulated
(Conducted Immunity)
4. Power Frequency Magnetic IEC 61000-4-8, class IV
Field
5. Interference Voltage, Aux. EN 50081-2, 1994 or equivalent
Voltage (Conducted  150 kHz to 30 MHz
Emission)
6. Interference Field Strength EN 50081-2, 1994 or equivalent
(Radiated Emission)  30 MHz to 1000 MHz
D. Atmospheric Environment Tests:


1. Humidity IEC 60068-2-3
2. Temperature IEC 60255-1
IEC 60068-2-1 for Cold
IEC 60068-2-2 for Dry heat
E. Mechanical Stress Tests:
1. Vibration (during Operation IEC 255-21-1; IEC 68-2-6
and Transportation)
2. Shock (during Operation and IEC 255-21-2, IEC 68-2-27
Transportation)
3. Seismic Vibration (during IEC 60255-21-3
Operation)
18.01.02 ENERGY METER
All type test reports as per IEC 62052-11/IEC 62053-22
18.01.03 DISTURBANCE RECORDER.
Type test reports for the following tests shall be submitted
High Voltage Impulse Test, class III as per IEC 60255-5
High Frequency Disturbance as per IEC 60255–22–1, class III
Fast Transient Disturbance as per IEC 60255-22-4, class IV
18.01.04 PMU TESTING
i. Type Testing
A complete integrated unit shall be type tested to assure full compliance with the
functional and technical requirements of the Specification. The list of Type tests to
be performed on the PMU is mentioned in Table-1 & type test requirements are
mentioned in Table-2.
The contractor may optionally submit type test reports for all the EMI/EMC tests
conducted at accredited laboratory as specified elsewhere for review & approval by
Employer. However, in the event, the type test reports are not meeting the
specification requirement, Employer may ask for the type testing of any or all of the
above tests as required at no additional cost.
ii.Routine Testing

Each complete unit shall undergo routine testing. The list of Routine tests to be
performed in the factory is mentioned in Table-1.
iii.Field Tests
After PMU panel installation and interface cabling with C&R panels and
communication equipment, the Contractor shall carry out the field-testing. The list
of field tests is mentioned in Table-1.
iv.Availability Tests
After field testing, PMU shall exhibit 98% availability during test period of 500 hours.
Availability tests shall be performed along with Master station. The PMU shall be
considered available only when all its functionality and hardware is operational. The
non-available period due to external factors such as failure of DC power supply,
communication link etc. shall be treated as hold-time & availability test duration shall
be extended by such hold time.
xvii. Table-1: List of Tests on PMU:
Test DESCRIPTION OF THE TEST Type Routin Fiel
No. test e test d
test
FUNCTIONAL TESTS FOR PMU
1 Check for BOQ, Technical details, Construction & √ √ √
Wiring as per PMU drawings
2 Check for PMU database & configuration settings √ √ √
3 Check the operation of all Analog inputs, Digital √ √ √
and Status input points of PMU
4 Check operation of all communication ports of √ √ √
PMU
5 Check for communication between PMU and PDC √ √
6 Test for downloading of PMU database from PDC √ √
7 Test for PMU time synchronization from GPS √ √
8 Test Power Supply Voltage Margin, Ripple Levels √
and Short Circuit Protection
9 Test for PMU operation with DC power supply √
voltage variation
10 Check for auto restoration of PMU on DC power √ √ √
recovery after its failure
11 Test for PMU diagnostic feature √

12 Accuracy tests as per IEEE C37.118.1-2011 & √

IEEE C37.118.2-2011.
13 Test for PMU internal Clock stability √
14 Test for PMU Noise level measurement √
15 Test for Control Security and Safety for Control √
outputs
16 Other functional tests as per technical specification √
requirements
17 End to end test (between PMU & PDC) for all I/O √
points
EMI/EMC IMMUNITY TESTS FOR PMU
18 Surge Immunity Test as per IEC 60870-2-1 √
19 Electrical Fast Transient Burst Test as per IEC- √
60870-2-1
20 Damped Oscillatory Wave Test as per IEC 60870- √
2-1
21 Electrostatic Discharge test as per IEC 60870-2-1 √
22 Radiated Electromagnetic Field Test as per IEC √
60870-2-1
23 Damped Oscillatory magnetic Field Test as per √
IEC-60870-2-1
24 Power Frequency magnetic Field Test as per IEC- √
60870-2-1
INSULATION TEST FOR PMU
25 Power frequency voltage withstand Test as per IEC √
60870-2-1
26 1.2/50 μs Impulse voltage withstand Test as per √
IEC 60870-2-1
27 Insulation resistance test √
ENVIRONMENTAL TEST FOR PMU
28 Dry heat test as per IEC60068-2-2 / 2-3 √
29 Damp heat test as per IEC60068-2-78 √
30 Cold Test as per IEC60068-2-1 √
Note: Test levels for above type tests are elaborated in Table 2

xviii. Table-2: PMU Type Test Requirements
Tes Test Name EUT Test Power I/O points Pass

t Statu Leve Supply criteri
No s l Points a
s.
CM DM CM DM
1 Surge Immunity Test ON Level 2 kV 1kV 2 kV 1kV A

3
2 Electrical Fast Transient Burst ON Level 2 KV 1kV 2kV 1kV A
Test 3
3 Damped Oscillatory Wave Test ON Level 2.5 kV 1kV 2.5 kV 1KV A
3
4 Electrostatic Discharge Test ON Level +/- 6 kV in Contact discharge A
3 mode or +/- 8 kV in Air
discharge mode
5 Radiated Electromagnetic Field ON Level 10 V/m electric field strength A
Test 3
6 Damped Oscillatory Magnetic ON Level 30 A/m at 1MHz of magnetic A
Field Test 3 field strength
7 Power frequency magnetic field ON Level 30 A/m of magnetic field A
3 strength (Continuous
duration sine wave)
8 Power frequency voltage OFF - 1 KVrms for 1 minute No
withstand flasho
ver or
break
down
9 1.2/50μs impulse voltage OFF - 2 kVp -do-
withstand
10 DC Voltage Dips & ON - -
Interruptions / Variation as per
IEC 61000-4-29
11 Insulation Resistance Test OFF - Measure Insulation As per
resistance using 500 V DC manuf
Megger before & after Power acture
Freq & Impulse voltage standa
withstand tests rd
12 Dry heat test ON - Continuous operation at 550 0
C for 16 hrs

13 Damp heat test ON - at 95% RH and 400 C for 16 0

hrs
14 Cold test ON - Continuous operation at 00 0
C for 96 hrs
Note:-
1. EUT - Equipment Under Test
2. CM - Common Mode; DM - Differential mode
3. I/O pints do not include Communication ports
4. Passing Criteria
0 - no failure: normal performance within the specified limits
A: minor failure: temporary degradation or loss of function or performance which is
self- recoverable
Functional test as per the sl. nos. 1-18 of Table-1 shall also be done during type
testing
18.02.00 Functional Tests
All the numerical relays shall be tested for the functions specified in NTPC
technical specifications. In case of Numerical Distance Relays, test reports for
dynamic tests clearly indicating the operating time under different system / fault
conditions shall be submitted.
19.00.00 Settings
Fault levels will be provided to the Contractor by the Owner. The Contractor shall,
based on this information, compile a complete and detailed report for the setting of
the protection elements on all the protection equipment, to the approval of the
Owner. Any additional information required to complete this exercise shall be
timely requested by the Contractor.
The contractor shall provide the Owner with a philosophy document clearly setting
out the philosophy the contractor will use in determining setting levels. Each
setting will have a brief description of the specific function or element. The setting
calculation and formula will also be shown on the document. All relevant system
parameters, line data, transformer data additionally used for calculating the setting
will appear in the setting document. The contractor will conduct system studies in
determining fault levels on different locations. These study results will also form
part of the setting document. Any additional information required to complete this
exercise shall be timely requested by the Contractor.

The setting document will be presented and discussed with the Owner prior to final
issue of the document. The final accepted setting document should be made
available to the Owner in PDF format.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to configure each protection relay to provide the
protection and control facilities required. A full set of relay configuration and setting
files shall be included in the design and documentation submissions. The contractor
will issue three sets of setting documents once accepted by the client and consultant.
20.00.00 Furniture
The furniture required for the officials/ operators & for locating the various items in
the control/ relay room shall be supplied. The exact requirement/ details shall be
finalized during detail engineering. However, a minimum requirement is specified
below:
i) Desk (Size for 01 workstation and 8

printer) for workstations and printers
covered under this package
ii) Chairs 12
iii) Filing Cupboard 5

PART-II
CHAPTER – E11:
LT POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
PART-II
CHAPTER – E11: LT POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
1.00.00 Codes and Standards E11-1
3.00.00 Testing E11-3

CHAPTER- E11: LT POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
Cables IS:1554, IS:7098, IS:502, IS:6380, IS:9968
2.01.00 All cables shall be suitable for high ambient, high humid tropical Indian climatic
conditions. All cables shall be Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) type designed
to withstand the mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under the foreseen
steady state and transient/fault conditions, and shall be suitable for the proposed
method of installation.
2.02.00 The aluminium/copper wires used for manufacturing the cables shall be true
circular in shape before stranding and shall be of uniformly good quality, free from
defects. All aluminium used in the cables shall be of H2 grade.
2.03.00 The fillers and inner sheath shall be of non hygroscopic, fire retarding material,
softer than insulation and outer sheath shall be suitable for the temperature of the
cable.
2.04.00 For cables having more than five (5) cores, each core shall be identified by number
marking. However, for cables upto five (5) cores, the same shall be by colour.
2.05.00 The normal current rating of all the PVC insulated cables shall be as per IS 5831.
2.06.00 All the cables used in the switchyard shall be armoured. All the lugs and glands as
required are deemed to be included in the cost of cables.
2.07.00 Other parameters of the cables are as follows:
Particulars Power cables Control cables

XLPE PVC
Conductor
i) Material Stranded Aluminium Stranded plain annealed copper
ii) Size As required As required, but min.

Min. 6 sq.mm size 2.5 sq.mm. size
iii) Shape Circular / Circular /

sector shaped sector shaped

Particulars Power cables Control cables

XLPE PVC
Main Insulation
i) Material XLPE PVC PVC
ii) Continuous withstand 90 70 70

temperature (deg.C)
iii) Short circuit withstand 250 160 160

temperature (deg.C)
iv) Colour identification As per relevant codes and standards
Inner Sheath All armoured and multicore unarmoured cables have distinct
extruded inner sheath
i) Material PVC PVC PVC
ii) Colour Black Black Black
Armour
i) Material Aluminium wire for GS wire/flat
single core cable and as per
GS wire/flat for multi- relevant
core cables as per IS. Min.
Relevant IS. Minimum coverage of
Coverage of 90% 90%
ii) Breaking load of joint 95% of normal armour 95% of normal armour
Outer sheath
i) Material PVC PVC PVC Heat resistant
(Polyethylene based
halogen free material
not acceptable)
ii) Colour Black Black Grey

iii) Marking - Cable size & voltage Same as for
grade (by embossing) Power cables
- Word "FRLS" @ 5m
(by embossing)
- Sequential marking @1m

FRLS properties Oxygen Index : Min. 29 (As per IS 10810 Part-58)

on outer sheath Acid gas generation : Max. 20% (As per IEC754-I)
Smoke density rating : Max. 60% (As per ASTMD 2843)
Flamability test on all

types of cables As per IEC 332 Part-3 (Category B)
3.00.00 Testing:
3.01.00 All cables shall conform to type test and shall be subjected to routine and
acceptance tests as per relevant IS. The cables shall be tested for oxygen index,
temperature index and fire resistance test.

PART-II
CHAPTER – E12:
REQUIREMENTS OF AUXILIARY
ITEMS
PART-II
CHAPTER – E12: REQUIREMENTS OF AUXILIARY ITEMS
Clause no. Description Page

no.
1.00.00 Aluminium Tubular Conductor E12-1
2.00.00 AAC Bull E12-1
3.00.00 Clamps and Connectors E12-2
4.00.00 Insulator String Hardware E12-2
5.00.00 Spacers E12-3
6.00.00 Earthing Conductor E12-4
7.00.00 Earth wire for Lighting Protection E12-4
8.00.00 Cable Racks including Supports, Trays and Accessories E12-5
9.00.00 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support Insulators
And Disc Insulators E12-6
10.00.00 Cabinets, Boxes, Kiosks, Panels etc. E12-7
11.00.00 Bay Marshalling Box E12-8
12.00.00 Terminal Blocks E12-9
13.00.00 Wiring E12-9
14.00.00 Cable Glands and Lugs E12-10
15.00.00 Conduits, Pipes and Accessories E12-10
16.00.00 Motor Control Centre E12-11
17.00.00 Motors E12-11
18.00.00 Auxiliary Switch E12-13
19.00.00 Type Tests E12-13
Annexure-I: Specification for Bay Kiosks E12-14
Annexure-II: Technical specification of Hydraulic Aerial
Working Platform & Leakage Current Analyzer E12-18
CHAPTER- E12: REQUIREMENT OF AUXILIARY ITEMS
1.00.00 ALUMINIUM TUBULAR CONDUCTOR
1.01.01 The aluminium tube shall be grade 63401 WP(range2) as per IS 5082.
1.01.02 There shall be no negative tolerance on OD and thickness of the tube. Other
tolerances shall be as per IS:2678 and 2673.
1.01.03 Tests: In accordance with stipulations of specification routine tests shall be

conducted on tubular conductor as per IS:5082. Also the wall thickness and ovality
shall be measured by ultrasonic method. In addition 0.2% proof tests on both
parent material and aluminium tube after welding shall be conducted.
Parameters:
For 765kV
a) Size 4.5" IPS (EH type),
b) Outer diameter 120.00 mm with no negative tolerance
c) Thickness of tube 12.00 mm with no negative tolerance
d) Cross-sectional area 4071.5 sq. mm.
e) Weight 11.034 kg/m
f) Aluminum grade 63401 WP(range 2) conforming to IS:5082.
For 132kV
a) Size 3" IPS (EH type),
b) Outer diameter 88.90 mm with no negative tolerance
c) Thickness of tube 7.62 mm with no negative tolerance
d) Cross-sectional area 1947 sq. mm.
e) Weight 5.25 kg/m
f) Aluminum grade 63401 WP(range 2) conforming to IS:5082.
2.00.00 AAC Bull CONDUCTOR
a) Code and standard IS 398

b) Name AAC Bull
c) Overall diameter 38.25 mm
d) Weight 2.4 kg/m
e) Ultimate tensile strength 139.0 kN minimum
f) Strands and wire diameter of
- Aluminium 61 /4.25 mm

3.00.00 CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS
3.01.00 The material of clamps and connectors shall be Aluminium alloy casting
conforming to designation A6 of IS:617 for connecting to equipment terminals and
conductors of aluminium. In case the terminals are of copper, the same
clamps/connectors shall be used with 2mm thick bimetallic liner.
3.02.00 The material of clamps and connectors shall be Galvanised mild steel for
connecting to shield wire.
3.03.00 Bolts, nuts and plain washers shall be hot dip galvanised mild steel for sizes M12
and above. For sizes below M12, they shall be electro-galvanised mild steel. The
spring washers shall be electro-galvanised mild steel.
3.04.00 All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All
sharp edges and corners shall be rounded off to meet specified corona and radio
interference requirements.
3.05.00 They shall have same current rating as that of the connected equipment. All current
carrying parts shall be at least 10 mm thick. The connectors shall be manufactured
to have minimum contact resistance.
3.06.00 Flexible connectors, braids or laminated strips shall be made up of

copper/aluminium.
3.07.00 Current rating and size of terminal/conductor for which connector is suitable shall
be put on a suitable sticker on each component which should last atleast till
erection time.
4.00.00 INSULATOR STRING AND HARDWARES
4.00.01 The insulator hardware shall be of bolted type and shall be of forged steel except
for insulator cap, which can be of malleable cast iron. It shall also generally meet
the requirements of clamps and connectors as specified above.
4.00.02 In one span, Tension string assembly at one end shall be supplied with suitable
turn buckle.
4.01.00 Disc Insulator

The disc insulator shall meet the following parameters:

a. Type : Antifog type insulator
b. Size of insulator : 255x145
c. Electro mechanical strength : 120kN(132 kV ) & 210 kN (765kV)
d. Leakage distance (mm) : 430mm minimum or as required to

meet the total creepage.
e. Power frequency withstand voltage: 85 kV (dry), 50kV (wet)
4.02.0 Insulator string
4.02.01 Insulator string (for 800KV voltage class)
a) Type Porcelain type

b) Creepage distance as given in E0
c) PF withstand voltage 830KV 1 min(rms)
(dry and wet )
d) L / I withstand voltage +/- 2100 KVp
e) S / I Withstand voltage +/- 1550 KVp
f) Pollution level (as per IEC 71) Class -III, Heavy
g) No. of disc insulator min 47nos.
h) Electro mechanical strength 210 KN
4.02.02 Insulator string (for 145KV Voltage class)
a) Type Porcelain type

b) Impulse withstand voltage (Dry & Wet)  650 kVp
c) Power frequency withstand voltage (dry and wet) 275kV (rms)
d) Total creepage distance as given in E0
e) Pollution level (as per IEC 71) Class -III, Heavy
f) No. of disc insulator 10 nos.
f) Electro mechanical strength 120 KN
5.00.00 SPACERS
5.01.00 Spacers shall conform to IS: 10162. They shall be of non-magnetic material except
nuts and bolts, which shall be of hot dip galvanised mild steel.
5.02.00 Spacers shall generally meet the requirements of clamps and connectors as
specified above. Its design shall take care of fixing and removing during installation
and maintenance.

5.03.00 In addition to the type tests as per IS:10162, clamp slip test should have been
conducted. In this test the sample shall be installed on test span of twin/quad
bundle string at a tension of 44.2 kN (4500 kg). One of the clamps when subjected
to a longitudinal pull of 2.5 kN (250 kg) parallel to the axis of conductor shall not
slip, i.e. permanent displacement between conductor and clamp after the test shall
not exceed 1.0 mm. This test should have been performed on all other clamps of
the sample.
6.00.00 EARTHING CONDUCTOR
a) The main conductor buried in earth shall be 40mm dia rod for main and auxiliary
mat. The earthing conductors over the ground shall be of 75x12 mm GS flat. The
earthing leads for columns and auxiliary structures, cable trenches shall be of
75x12 mm GS flat. The earthing of the lighting fixtures shall be carried out by 16
SWG wire.
b) All conductors above the ground level shall be galvanised steel.
7.00.00 Earthwire for Lightning Protection
a) Number of strands 7 of steel

b) Strand diameter 3.66 mm
c) Overall diameter 10.98 mm
d) Weight 583 kg/km approx.
e) Ultimate tensile strength 68.4 kN minimum
f) Total cross-sectional area 73.65 sq.mm.
g) Calculated d.c. resistance 2.5 ohms/km at 20 deg.C.
h) Direction of lay of outer layer Right hand
i) Protective coating for storage Boiled linseed oil to avoid wet storage stains
(white rust)
The earth wire shall be of preformed and post formed quality.
7.01.00 Earthwire Compression type tension Clamp & Flexible Copper Bond
7.01.01 Tension Clamp For Earthwire
The details shall be as per IS:2121 part-3. Compression type tension clamp shall
be used to hold 7/3.66 mm galvanised steel earthwire. Anchor shackle shall be
supplied which shall be suitable for attaching the tension clamp to strain plates.
The strain plates supplied with the towers will have a minimum thickness of 8 mm
with a hole of 17.5 mm diameter. Suitable lugs for jumper connection shall also be
supplied alongwith necessary bolts and nuts.
The dimensions and the dimensional tolerance of the tension clamp shall be as
given below:

__________________________________________________________________
Item Dimensions before compression Dimension after compression
Corner to Face to face
Inner Dia. outer Dia. Corner width width
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
__________________________________________________________________
Steel 11.10.2 210.5 20.20.5 17.50.5

Dead-end
7.02.00 Flexible copper bond: As detailed in IS: 2121 part 3. The flexible copper bond
shall be fitted with 2 nos. tinned copper connecting lugs which will be pressed
jointed to either ends of the bond. One lug shall be suitable for 12 mm dia bolt and
other for 16 mm dia bolt. The complete assembly shall also include one 16 mm dia
40 mm lug with ms bolt hot dip galvanised with nut and lock washer.
8.00.00 CABLE RACKS INCLUDING SUPPORTS, TRAYS AND ACCESSORIES
8.01.00 Cable Support Structures & Accessories
8.01.01 The Contractor shall fabricate and install mounting arrangements for the support
and installation of all the cables on GI angles in the trenches, as shown in the
drawing enclosed with specification. These mounting shall be fabricated from
structural steel members (channels, angles and flats) of the required size. The
fabrication, welding and erection of these structures shall conform to the relevant
clauses of Part-C0.
8.01.02 Ungalvanised M.S. cable supports shall be painted after installation. The painting
shall be in conformity with stipulated in Chapter-C0. All welding works inclusive of
the consumables required for fabrication and installation shall be in the scope of
the Contractor.
8.02.00 Cable Trays
8.02.01 Hot dip galvanised ladder type cable trays of adequate width are to be provided for
cables in the control room building.
8.02.02 Aux. power cables are to be laid on the top tray and DC control cables in bottom
trays. Cable trays shall be designed to carry cables load without bending and
proper tray supports shall be provided at every 1 m interval.

8.02.03 Cable trays having power and control cable are spaced at 300 mm and between
control cable trays, the spacing is 225 mm. For tray lengths more than 2.5 m
coupler plates are to be used for joining the two standard tray lengths. Suitable ‘L’
and ‘T’ bends are included under the scope of this contract.
8.02.04 Cable trays shall be made of 2 mm thick sheet steel having a slotted rung spacing
of 250 mm. Height of cable tray channel shall be 75 mm and the standard length of
trays shall be 2.5 m.
8.02.05 All nuts, bolts, washers etc. to be supplied by the Contractor shall be hot dip
galvanised after fabrication.
8.02.06 The Contractor shall perform all tests and inspection to ensure that material and
workmanship are according to the relevant standards.
9.00.00 BUSHINGS, HOLLOW COLUMN INSULATORS, SUPPORT INSULATORS, AND

DISC INSULATORS
9.01.00 Bushings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS:2099 & IEC:137
while hollow column insulators shall be manufactured and tested in accordance
with IEC 233/IS 5621. The support insulators shall be manufactured and tested as
per IS:2544 / IEC 168/IEC 273. The insulators shall also conform to IEC 815 as
applicable.
Support insulators/ bushings/ hollow column insulators shall be designed to have
ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for the conditions under which
they will be used.
9.02.00 Porcelain used shall be homogenous, free from laminations, cavities and other
flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and
shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture. Hollow porcelain
should be in one integral piece in green & fired stage.
9.03.00 Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free form blisters, burns
and other similar defects.
9.04.00 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge
between conductor and insulators which would cause corrosion or injury to
conductors or when operating at normal rated voltage.
9.05.00 The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall be lead to deterioration. All ferrous
parts shall be hot dip galvanised.
9.06.00 Contractor shall make available data on all the essential features of design
including the method of assembly of shells and metal parts, number of shells per

insulator, the manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted through shells
to adjacent parts, provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of corona and
thermal shock tests, recommended working strength and any special design or
arrangement employed to increase life under service conditions.
9.07.00 Post type insulators shall consist of a porcelain part permanently secured in metal
base to be mounted on supporting structures. They shall be capable of being
mounted upright. They shall be designed to withstand all shocks to which they may
be subjected to during operation of the associated equipment.
9.08.00 Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal
pressures likely to occur in service. The design and location of clamps, the shape
and the strength of the porcelain flange securing the bushing to the tank shall be
such that there is no risk of fracture. All portions of the assembled porcelain
enclosures and supports other than gaskets, which may in any way be exposed to
the atmosphere shall be composed of completely non hygroscopic material such as
metal or glazed porcelain.
9.09.00 All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanised and all joints shall be air tight. Surface of
joints shall be trued, porcelain parts by grinding and metal parts by machining.
Insulator/ bushing design shall be such as to ensure a uniform compressive
pressure on the joints.
9.10.00 In accordance with the requirements stipulated under Chapter-G0, bushings,

hollow column insulators and support insulators shall conform to type tests and
shall be subjected to routine tests and acceptance test/ sample test in accordance
with relevant standards.
9.11.00 The parameters of bushings/ Hollow column insulators/ support insulators are
given in section E0. Insulator shall also meet requirement of IEC - 815 as
applicable, having alternate long & short sheds.
10.00.00 CABINETS, BOXES, KIOSKS, PANELS, ETC.
10.01.00 All types of control cabinets, junction boxes, marshaling boxes, lighting panels,
terminal boxes, operating mechanism boxes, Kiosks etc. shall generally conform
to IS:5039, IS:8623 and IEC:439 as applicable.
10.02.00 They shall be of Stainless steel or Aluminium. The thickness of Stainless steel
sheet shall be 1mm.The thickness of aluminium shall be 3mm and shall provide
rigidity. Top of the boxes shall be sloped towards rear of the box. However, the
junction and switch boxes shall be of hot dip galvanised sheet steel of 1.6mm
thickness.

10.03.00 The cabinets/boxes/kiosks/panels shall be free standing or wall mounting or

pedestal mounting type. They shall have hinged doors with padlocking
arrangement. All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around
with neoprene gaskets.
10.04.00 The degree of protection of all the outdoor boxes shall not be less than IP 55 as
per IS 2147.
10.05.00 The cable entry shall be from bottom, for which removable gasketed cable gland
plates shall be provided.
10.06.00 Suitable 240V, single phase, 50Hz ac heaters with thermostats controlled by switch
and fuse shall be provided to maintain inside temperature 10deg. above the
ambient.
10.07.00 The size of enclosure and the layout of equipment inside shall provide generous
clearances. Each cabinet/box/kiosk/panel shall be provided with a 15A, 240V ac, 2
pole, 3 pin industrial grade receptacle with switch. For incoming supply, MCB of
suitable rating shall be provided. Illumination of each compartment shall be with
door operated incandescent lamp. All control switches shall be of rotary switch
type.
10.08.00 Each cabinet/box/kiosk/panel shall be provided with two earthing pads to receive
75mmx12mm GS flat. The connection shall be bolted type with two bolts per pad.
The hinged door shall be connected to body using flexible wire. The
cabinets/boxes/kiosks/panels shall also be provided with danger plate, and internal
wiring diagram pasted on inside of the door. The front label shall be on a 3mm thick
plastic plate with white letters engraved on black background.
10.09.00 AC Bay Kiosk for SAS System
In addition to requirements listed in this section the Bay Kiosks shall meet the
requirements listed in Annexure – I of this section.
11.00.00 BAY MARSHALLING BOX
11.01.00 Each bay of the switchyard shall be provided with a Bay Marshaling Box located at
a convenient location to receive and distribute cables within the bay. It shall meet
all the requirements as specified for cabinets/boxes above.
11.02.00 It shall have three separate distinct compartments for following purposes:
- To receive two incoming 415V, three phase, AC supplies controlled by 100A four
pole MCBs with auto changeover provision, and to distribute five (5) three phase ac

supplies controlled by 32A four pole MCBs. It shall also be provided with 63A, 3
phase 4 pin industrial grade receptacle with rotary switch.
- To receive three phase incoming from first compartment and to distribute ten (10)
single phase ac supplies controlled by 16A two pole MCBs.
- min. 150 nos. terminal blocks in vertical formation for interlocking facility.
12.00.00 TERMINAL BLOCKS
12.01.00 They shall be non-disconnecting stud type of extensible design equivalent to Elmex
type CAT-M4.
12.02.00 The terminal blocks shall be of min. 650 V grade, and rated to continuously carry
maximum expected current. The conducting part shall be tinned or silver plated.
12.03.00 They shall be of moulded, non-inflammable thermosetting plastic. The material

shall not deteriorate with varied conditions of temperature and humidity. The
terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent, non-
deteriorating plastic material. Insulating barriers shall be provided between the
terminal blocks so that the barriers do not hinder the wiring operation without
removing the barriers.
12.04.00 The terminals shall be provided with marking tags for wiring identification.
12.05.00 Unless otherwise required (expected current rating) or specified, terminal blocks
shall be suitable for connecting the following conductors on each side:
All CT & VT circuits - Min. four 2.5 sq.mm. copper flexible conductor
AC & DC power supply -Two 16 sq.mm. aluminium conductor
Circuits
Other control circuits - Min. two 2.5 sq.mm. copper flexible conductor
12.06.00 The terminal blocks for CT and VT secondary leads shall be provided with test links
and isolating facilities. CT secondary leads shall also be provided with short
circuiting and earthing facilities.
13.00.00 Wiring
13.01.00 All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade stranded copper wires. The
minimum size of the stranded conductor used for internal wiring shall be as follows:
a) All circuits except CT circuits 2.5 sq.mm

b) CT circuits 4 sq. mm (minimum number of strands shall be 3 per conductor).
13.02.00 All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged readily accessible
and connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks.

13.03.00 Wire terminations shall be made with solderless crimping type of tinned copper
lugs which firmly grip the conductor and insulation. Insulated sleeves shall be
provided at all the wire terminations. Engraved core identification plastic ferrules
marked to correspond with the wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each
wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wires shall not fall off when the wires and shall
not fall off when the wire is disconnected from terminal blocks.
13.04.00 All wires directly connected to trip circuit breaker shall be distinguished by the
addition of a red coloured unlettered ferrule. Number 6 & 9 shall not be included for
ferrules purposes.
13.05.00 All terminals including spare terminals of auxiliary equipment shall be wired upto
terminal blocks. Each equipment shall have its own central control cabinet in which
all contacts including spare contacts from all poles shall be wired out. Interpole
cabling for all equipment’s shall be carried out by the Contractor.
14.00.00 CABLE GLANDS AND LUGS
14.01.00 Cable glands shall be Double compression type, tinned/Nicked plated (coating
thickness not less than 20 microns in case of tin and 10 to 15 microns in case of
nickel) brass cable glands for all power and control cables. They shall provide dust
and weather proof terminations. They shall comprise of heavy duty brass casting,
machine finished and tinned to avoid corrosion and oxidation. Rubber components
used in cable glands shall be neoprene and off tested quality. Required number of
packing glands to close unused openings in gland plates shall also be provided.
14.02.00 The cable glands shall be tested as per BS:6121. The cable glands shall also be
duly tested for dust proof and weather proof termination.
14.03.00 Cables lugs shall be tinned copper solder less crimping type conforming to IS:8309
and 8394 suitable for aluminum or copper conductor (as applicable). The cable
lugs shall suit the type of terminals provided. The cable lugs shall be of Dowell
make or equivalent.
15.00.00 CONDUITS, PIPES AND ACCESSORIES
15.01.00 The Contractor shall supply and install all rigid conduits, mild steel pipes, flexible
conduits, hume pipes, etc. including all necessary sundry materials, such as tees,
elbows, check nuts, bushing reduces, enlargers, wooden plugs, coupling caps,
nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes, etc.
15.02.00 Rigid conduits shall be flow-coat metal conduits of Nagarjuna Coated Tubes or
equivalent make. The outer surface of the conduits shall be coated with hot-dip
zinc and chromate conversion coatings. The inner surface shall have silicone

epoxy ester coating for easy cable pulling. Mild steel pipes shall be hot-dip
galvanised. All rigid conduits/ pipes shall be of a reputed make.
15.03.00 Flexible conduits shall be heat-resistant lead coated steel, water-leak, fire and rust
proof, and be of PLICA make or equivalent.
16.00.00 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE
16.01.00 The 415 Volt motor control centres (if provided separately) shall conform to the
requirements for boxes/cabinets/kiosks. They shall be fixed type, shall be fully
sectionalised and shall be equipped with load break switches. Motor feeders shall
be provided with isolating switch fuse unit and Contractor with thermal overload
relay and single phase protection. The motor Contractor shall have one normally
open auxiliary contact for alarm purposes. The motor control circuit shall be
independent from all other control circuits.
16.02.00 Isolating Switches
The incoming power supply isolating switch operation handle shall be interlocked
with the control cabinet door as to prevent opening of door when main switch is
closed. Device for by passing the door interlock shall also be provided. Switch
handle shall have provision for locking in both fully open and fully closed positions.
16.03.00 Fuses
All fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type, conforming to IS:2208 and suitable to
mount on plugin type of fuse bases. Fuses shall be provided with visible operation
indicators to show that they have operated. All accessible live connections shall be
adequately shrouded, and it shall be possible to change fuses with the circuit alive,
without danger of contact with live conductor. Insulated fuse pulling handle shall be
supplied with each control cabinet.
17.00.00 MOTORS
17.01.00 Motors shall be “Squirrel Cage” three phase induction motors of sufficient size
capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the
driven equipment and shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine
tests as per applicable standards.
17.02.00 Enclosures

a) For motors to be installed outdoor, the motor enclosure shall have degree of
protection IP:55. For motors to be installed indoor, i.e. inside a box, the motor
enclosure shall be dust proof equivalent to IP:44.
b) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the motor
for bolted connection of earthing conductor.
c) Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water resulting
condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor casing.
d) Motors weighing more than 25 kg shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other
means or facility for lifting.
17.03.00 Operational Features :
a) Continuous motor ratings (name plate rating) shall be at least suitable for the driven
equipment at design duty operating point of driven equipment that will arise in
service.
b) Motors shall be capable of giving rated output without reduction in the expected life
span when operated continuously in the given system.
17.04.00 Starting Requirements
a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct on-line starting. These
shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed alongwith the
driven equipment without exceeding the acceptable winding temperature even
when the supply voltage drops.
b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electrodynamic stresses and heating

imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value.
c) The locked rotor current shall not exceed six(6) times the rated full load current for
all motors subject to tolerance given in IS:325.
d) Motors when started with driven equipment imposing full staring torque and supply
voltage conditions specified shall be capable of withstanding at least two
successive starts from cold condition at room temperature and one start from hot
condition without injurious heating of winding. The motors shall also be suitable for
three equally spread starts per hour under the above referred supply condition.
e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated voltage shall
be more than starting time with the driven equipment of minimum permissible
voltage by a least two seconds or 15% of the accelerating time whichever is
greater. In case it is not possible to meet the above requirement, the Contractor

shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the motor shaft which shall
remain closed for speeds lower than 20% and open for speeds above 20% of the
rated. The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding 120% of the rated speed
in either directions of rotation.
17.05.00 The maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient temperature shall be
within the limits specified in IS:325 (for 3 phase induction motors) after adjustment
due to increased ambient temperature specified.
17.06.00 The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits specified in
IS:729. Vibration shall also be within the limits specified by the relevant standard
for the driven equipment when measured at the motor bearings.
17.07.00 All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of rated voltage for a
period of 5 minutes.
18.00.00 AUXILIARY SWITCH
The auxiliary switch shall conform of following type tests:
a) Electrical endurance test - A minimum of 1000 operations for 2A. D.C. with a time
constant greater than or equal to 20 milliseconds with a subsequent examination of
mV drop/ visual defects/ temperature rise test.
b) Mechanical endurance test - A minimum of 5000 operations with a subsequent

checking of contact pressure test/ visual examination
c) Heat run test on contacts
d) IR/HV test, etc.
19.00.00 Type tests
All equipment with their terminal connectors, control cabinets, main protective
relays, etc. as well as insulators, insulator strings with hardwares, clamps and
connectors, marshalling boxes, etc., shall conform to type tests and shall be
subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with the requirements
stipulated under respective equipment sections.

ANNEXURE-I
Specification for Bay Kiosk
1. Construction:
The Bay Kiosk shall be made of “sandwich insulated panels” 80 mm thick with
polyUrethane Foam (PUF) as filler material between polyester pre-coated cold
rolled Steel. The insulation characteristics of PUF material shall conform to
following requirement
Sl. No. Particular Parameters

1. Thickness 78.6 mm
2. Density 40 kg/m3 (CFC free)
3. Compressive Strength 1.2 kg/cm2
4. Tensile Strength 3.6 kg/cm2
5. Bending Strength 4.0 kg/cm2
6 Adhesion Strength 2.9 kg/cm2
7. Dimension Stability At -25o C : 0.1% and at 38oC : 0.4%
8. Temperature Range -15oC to 95oC

9. Thermal Conductivity 0.02 kcal/hr/m/oC
10. Fire Resistance As per BS-4735 Horizontal
Burn <125 mm
0.2% @ 100%
11. Water absorption
RH
0.08/0.12
12. Vapour Permeability
g/hr/m2
13. Self Extinguishing Yes
The Size of AC Bay kiosk shall be 7mX3.5mX3m (LXBXH) for 765 kV level & .
5mX3.5mX3m (LXBXH) for 132 kV level respectively. The thickness of the inner-
side and outer steel sheet except floor panel sheet shall be minimum 0.8 mm and
0.6 mm respectively. The outer bottom sheet shall be hot dip galvanised steel
sheets of minimum 1.0 mm thickness to avoid rusting at bottom. The sandwich
panels shall be manufactured by high pressure injection techniques. The floor of
the kiosk shall be suitably designed for accommodating the control and relay
IEDs in the panels. The adequate lighting shall be provided in the kiosk. The
Kiosk shall have adequate space for working and maintain Clearances as per
requirement of Indian Electricity Rules. The kiosk shall be provided with locking
arrangement. The Kiosks shall have IP-55 degree of protection. The cable entries
in the Kiosk shall be provided only from the side of the Kiosk. It shall be possible
to lay additional cables in future for the panels without disturbing the existing
facilities. An EPABX handset with provision of suitable socket shall be provided in
the kiosk.

2. Air-Conditioning:
The air conditionings system shall be provided in the Kiosks to be used for
housing panels having control and protection IEDs for performing sub-station
automation and protection functions. generally comply with relevant IS codes .
These kiosks shall be placed in the switchyard area generally unmanned;
therefore, the air-conditioning system shall be rugged, reliable, maintenance free
and designed for long life.
i. Operation:
The air conditioning is required for critical application i.e. for maintaining the
temperature for critical sub-station control and protection equipment. To provide
redundancy for such critical applications, each kiosk shall be installed with
environment control system comprising of two units of air conditioners working in
conjunction through a micro processor based controller for desired operation.
The system shall be designed for 24 Hours, 365 Days of the year to maintain the
inside kiosk temperature for proper operation of the critical equipment.
One of the air-conditioner shall be running at a time and shall be sufficient

enough to maintain the temperature inside the kiosk to specified value (ie. 23+2
deg. C) and on failure of the same or as described hereunder, the other unit shall
start automatically. To ensure longer life of the system, the redundant units shall
also be running in cyclic operation through the controller. However, during
running of one air-conditioner unit, if inside temperature of the shelter reaches to
a predefined (i.e. 35 deg C), the other unit shall start running to maintain the
temperature to specified value (i.e.23+2degC) and gives alarm for such situation.
After achieving this temperature, the other unit shall again shut off.
ii. Sequence of Operation of the Unit:
Suitable arrangement shall be made to operate the unit in the following order.
However, the actual operation arrangement shall be finalised during detailed
engineering.
1. Evaporator Fan
2. Condenser Fan
3. Compressor
iii. Construction:

The air conditioning unit shall be completely self-contained. All components of the
units shall be enclosed in a powder coated cabinet and colour of same shall be
matched with kiosk colour. The unit shall be assembled, wired, piped, charged
with refrigerant and fully factory tested as a system to ensure trouble free
installation and start up. Suitable isolation or other by passing arrangement shall
be provided such that any unit/component could be maintained/ repaired without
affecting the running standby unit. The maintenance of unit shall be possible
from outside the kiosk.
iv. Required Features of Various Components:
The compressor shall be very reliable, trouble free and long life i.e. hermitically
sealed Scroll type of reputed make suitable for operation. Compressor should be
installed on vibration isolated mountings or manufacturer’s recommended
approved mounting. Valve shall be provided for charging/topping up of
refrigerant. The bidder shall furnish details of their compressor indicating the
MTBF, life of compressor and continuous run time of compressor without failure.
The contractor shall also furnish details of all accessories i.e. refrigeration
system, evaporator coil, condenser coil, evaporator blower filter, cabinet, indoor
supply and return grill etc.
v. The kiosk shall be erected at least 300 mm above the finished ground level
with suitable pedestal to avoid any entry of water.
3. Proto Testing:
One kiosk meeting the specified requirement as described above, shall be

fabricated at the factory and offered for proto inspection at the factory. This proto
shall be equipped with all required accessories like air-conditioning system, fire
and smoke detector, lighting, various cut outs etc. The offered kiosk shall be
inspected for finish, all fittings and accessories, opening including doors and
locks. The kiosk shall be tested for dust and rain protection to check out any
leakage and air tightness. The following main tests shall be carried out:
(a) Illumination inside the kiosk shall be switched off and it shall be checked that
no light enters through panel joints, holes and other joints in the kiosk.
(b) Water Leakage Test (with a water pipe with suitable pressure from all sides
for one hour.)
(c) Working and functional tests of all accessories like air-conditioning system,fire
and smoke detector, lighting arrangements as per technical specification
(d) Start up test for air conditioner

(e) Satisfactory operation of air conditioner installed on Kiosk.
(f) The total heat load for panels and devices to be placed inside the kiosk
including PLCC, all IEDs etc. shall be calculated and equivalent calculated
heating load (maximum value from among the calculated values for various
kiosk) shall be placed inside the kiosk and the kiosk shall be made operational
for four hours with all accessories and inside & outside temperature of kiosk
shall be recorded.
On successful completion of proto testing, all other system shall be

manufactured after incorporation of all alteration/modifications
observed/suggested during/after proto testing.
The detail test procedure shall be submitted by the contractor and get it
approved from the owner before commencement of proto testing.
4. Distribution Panel for AC Kiosk
The kiosk shall be provided with fire alarm system with at least two detectors and
it shall be wired to SAS. Two nos. of suitable separate power supply from LT
switchgear shall be provided to each AC kiosk to cater power supply to panels
and Air Conditioner’s separately. All internal power supply distribution shall be
provided accordingly.
It shall have three separate distinct compartments for following purposes:

- To receive two incoming 415V, three phase, AC supplies controlled by 63A
four pole MCBs with auto changeover provision, and to distribute three(3)
three phase ac supplies controlled by 32A four pole MCBs.
- To receive three phase incoming from first compartment and to distribute
five(5) single phase ac supplies controlled by 16A two pole MCBs.
- 100 nos. terminal blocks in vertical formation for interlocking facility.

ANNEXURE-II
Technical Specification of Hydraulic Aerial Working Platform
A) Aerial Working Platform, Self propelled, articulated, diesel operated boom

lift
Aerial Working Platform shall be suitable for carrying out maintenance work in
Switchyard at min. up to 765KV equipment height. The intent is that, 2 to 3 persons
can reach to a place at height or at a distance for carrying out maintenance work in
Switchyard with help of self propelled & controlled vehicle and attached platform.
Articulated boom function is to provide increased outreach at height and allows fast
operation from ground to full height. It should be suitable for movement with ease
on the gravel, turning radius should be minimum so that it can reach up to the
equipment for carrying out the maintenance. It should be rugged and have capacity
of movement on the gradient also. Following are the general parameter for Aerial
working Platform:
a) Boom movement: Proportional control

b) Platform Height (m), minimum: Min.16.0mt
c) Horizontal Outreach(m), minimum: Min 10.0mt
d) Platform Capacity(kg), minimum: 225
e) Fly jib range of motion, minimum: 130˚
f) Jib Length (m), minimum: 1.8
g) Platform rotation, hydraulic, deg, minimum: 160
h) Platform: To safely accommodate 2-3
persons
i) Stowed Height (m), maximum: 3.5
j) Ground Clearance (cm), minimum: 30
k) Drive system Four wheel drive and 4 wheel
steer
l) Brake system 4 wheel hydraulic
m) Drive Speed (km/h), minimum 4
n) Tyre: Foam filled
o) Platform Overload protection: Operation cutoff if overloaded
p) Machine tilt protection: If tilt > 5-7 deg, machine
should stop working
q) Platform control: Complete From platform and
emergency control from ground level
r) Emergency lowering in case of engine fail: Thru battery or any other
device
s) Instruction Manual in English: Three sets of Operation/
Maintenance manual with detail parts list

t) Installation & Commissioning: At site

u) Training: 10 mandays at site
v) Tools & Tackles: Set of tools and tackles
required for
running and doing routine maintenance must be supplied
w) Spares: Routine spares required in
first year
of operation are also to be supplied
x) Warranty: Two year on site against any
defect
B) Leakage Current Analyzer:
The LCM shall be suitable for measuring resistive leakage current of all LA’s in the
Switchyard and the accuracy shall be +/-1% of the reading. The technical
requirement of LCM shall be as per CBIP manual on EHV Substation Equipment
Maintenance.

PART-II
CHAPTER – E13: INSTALLATION

PART-II
CHAPTER – E13: INSTALLATION

1.00.00 Earthing E13 -1
2.00.00 Civil Works E13-1
3.00.00 Structural Steel Works E13-1
4.00.00 Bay Equipment E13-1
5.00.00 Lightning Protection E13-1
6.00.00 Equipment Erection Notes E13-2
7.00.00 Storage of equipment E13-2
8.00.00 Cabling E13-3
9.00.00 Conduits Pipes and Accessories E13-3
10.00.00 Junction Boxes E13-4
11.00.00 Cable tags and Markers E13-4
12.00.00 Cable Glands E13-5
13.00.00 Cable Lugs E13-5
14.00.00 Storage and handling of cable Drums E13-5
15.00.00 Cable Supports and Cable tray Mounting Arrangements E13-5
16.00.00 Cable Terminations and Connections E13-6
ANNEXURE-I: Earthing Notes E13-11

CHAPTER- E13: INSTALLATION
1.00.00 EARTHING
The earthing shall be done in accordance with requirements given in Annexure-I of

this section and drawing enclosed with the specifications. Earthing of panels shall
be done in line with the requirements given in respective equipment section of this
specification. The cost of welding laying etc of earth flats and rods is deemed to be
included in the cost of respective item.
2.00.00 CIVIL WORKS
The civil works shall be done in accordance with requirements stipulated under
Part-II, Section-II of this specification.
3.00.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
The structural steel works shall be done in accordance with requirements stipulated
under Part-II, Section-II of this specification.
4.00.00 BAY EQUIPMENT
4.01.00 The disposition of equipment to be supplied are shown in enclosed single line
diagrams and layout drawings.
4.02.00 The Contractor shall prepare layout drawings and submit the same for approval of
the Employer. The approval of drg. shall not absolve Contractor from his
responsibility regarding designing & engineering of switchyard and Contractor shall
be fully responsible for all works covered in the scope of this specification.
5.00.00 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
5.01.00 Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the switchyard by
lightning masts ( at least 50 m high) and shield wires.
5.02.00 Lightning protection System down conductors shall not be connected to other
conductors above ground level. Also no intermediate earthing connection shall be
made to Surge arrester, Voltage Transformer, earthing leads for which shall be
directly connected to rod electrode.
5.03.00 Every down conductor shall be provided with a test joint at about 150mm above
ground level. The test joint shall be directly connected to the earthing system.

5.04.00 The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground
metallic service ducts and cables.
6.00.00 EQUIPMENT ERECTION NOTES
a) All support insulators, circuit breaker interrupters and other fragile equipment shall
be handled with cranes with suitable booms and handling capacity.
b) Where, assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Contractor shall make
all necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections including the
connection between buses. Contractor shall also do necessary
adjustments/alignments necessary for proper operation of circuit breakers, isolators
and their operating mechanisms. All components shall be protected against
damage during unloading, transportation, storage, installation, testing and
commissioning. Any equipment damaged due to negligence or carelessness or
otherwise shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. The contractor
shall strictly follow manufacturer’s recommendations for handling and erection of
equipment.
c) The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid any damage to insulator due to
excessive swing, scratching by sling ropes etc. Handling equipment, sling ropes
etc. should be tested before erection and periodically thereafter for strength.
d) Bending of piping should be done by a bending machine and through cold bending
only. Bending shall be such that inner diameter of pipe is not reduced. The pipes
shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation.
e) Cutting of the pipes wherever required shall be such as to avoid flaring of the ends.
Hence only a proper pipe cutting tool shall be used. Hack saw shall not be used.
f) For cleaning the inside and outside of hollow insulators only Muslin or leather cloth
shall be used.
g) The rigid busbars for equipment interconnections shall have rigid connections at
one end and expansion / flexible at the other end. The tubular aluminium
connections shall have not more than one joint per span. Since no wastages are
permissible, the bidder shall work out the cut lengths of aluminum tube based on
finalized layout and dispatch the same to site without requiring owners’s approval.
Corona bells shall be provided at the end of the rigid busbars.
7.00.00 STORAGE OF EQUIPMENT
Contractor is responsible for the proper storage and maintenance of all

materials/equipment entrusted to him. The Contractor shall provide & construct
adequate storage shed for proper storage of equipment. Sensitive equipment shall

be stored indoors. All equipment during storage shall be protected against damage
due to acts of nature or accidents. Contractor shall take all required steps to
carryout subsequent inspection of materials/equipment stored as well as erected
until the same is taken over by the Employer. The storage instruction of the
equipment manufacturers/Engineer-in-Charge shall be strictly adhered to.
8.00.00 CABLING
8.01.00 Cabling shall be on cable racks, in trenches, vertical shafts, excavated trenches for
direct burial, pulled through pipes and conduits run clamped on steel structures etc.
8.02.00 Cables inside the switchyard shall be laid on bolted GI angle supports at 600mm
spacing with separate tiers for control and power cables. The GI angles shall be
bolted / welded to galvanized insert plates inside RCC trenches. Pre-fabricated GI
angles welded / bolted to galvanized insert plates before embedment in RCC shall
be preferred.
8.03.00 Cables shall be generally located adjoining the electrical equipment through the
pipe insert embedded in the ground. In the case of equipment located away from
cable trench either pipe inserts shall be embedded in the ground connecting the
cable trench and the equipment or in case the distance is small, notch/opening
shall be provided. In all these cases necessary bending radii as recommended by
the cable supplier shall be maintained.
8.04.00 Cabling in the control room shall be done on ladder type cable trays.
8.05.00 All interpole cables (both power & control circuit) for equipments shall be laid in
cable trenches/G.I. Conduit Pipe of NB 50/100mm which shall be burried in the
ground at a depth of 300mm.
9.00.00 CONDUITS, PIPES AND ACCESSORIES
9.01.00 The conductor shall supply and install all rigid conduits, mild steel pipes, flexible
conduits, hume pipes etc. including all necessary sundry materials, such as tees,
elbows, check nuts, bushings, reducers, enlargers, wooden plugs, coupling caps,
nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes etc. The size of the conduit/pipe shall be
selected on the basis of maximum 40% fill criterion. All conduits/pipes shall have
their ends closed by caps until cables are pulled. After cables are pulled, the ends
of conduits/pipes shall be sealed in an approved manner, to prevent damage to
threaded portion and entrance of moisture and foreign material.
9.02.00 Rigid conduits shall be flow-coat metal conduits of Nagarjuna Coated Tubes or
equivalent make. The outer surface of the conduits shall be coated with hot-dip
zinc and chromate coatings. The inner surface shall have silicone epoxy ester

coating for easy cable pulling. Mild steel pipes shall be hot-dip galvanised. All rigid
conduits/pipes shall be of a reputed make.
9.03.00 The hume pipes and accessories shall be of reinforced concrete conforming to
class NP2 of IS: 458. All tests on hume pipes shall be conducted as per IS: 458.
9.04.00 Flexible conduits shall be of heat-resistant lead coated steel, water-leak, fire and
rust proof and be of PLICA make or equivalent.
10.00.00 JUNCTION BOXES
Contractor shall supply and install junction boxes complete with terminals as
required. The brackets, bolts, nuts and screws required for the erection shall be
included in the installation price. The junction boxes shall conform to the
requirements of sec. AUX.
11.00.00 CABLE TAGS AND MARKER
11.01.00 Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the cable
and conduit schedule.
11.02.00 The tag shall be of aluminium with the number punched on it and securely attached
to the cable conduit by not less than two turns of 20 SWG GI wire conforming to IS:
280. Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for power cables and of circular
shape for control cables.
11.03.00 Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with cable
marker made of galvanised iron plate.
11.04.00 Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with an
additional inscription “Cable joint”.
11.05.00 The marker shall project 150mm above ground and shall be spaced at an interval
30 meters and at every change in direction. They shall be located on both sides of
road and drain crossings.
11.06.00 Cable tags shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering the
equipment enclosure), on both sides of a wall or floor crossing, on each
duct/conduit entry. Cable tags shall be provided inside the switchgear, motor
control centres, control and relay panels etc., wherever required for cable
identification, such as where a number of cables enter together through a gland
plate.
11.07.00 The price of cable tags and markers shall be included in the installation rates for
cables /conduits quoted by the Contractor.

11.08.00 Specific requirements for cabling, wiring ferrules as covered in respective

equipment section shall also be complied with.
12.00.00 CABLE GLANDS
12.01.00 Double compression type tinned/Nickel plated (coating thickness not less than 20
microns in case of Tin and 10 to 15 Microns in case of Nickel) brass cable glands
shall be provided by the Contractor for all power and control cables to provide dust
and weather proof terminations. The cable glands shall be tested as per BS :
6121. They shall comprise of heavy duty brass casting, machine finished and
tinned to avoid corrosion and oxidation. Rubber components used in cable gland
shall be neoprene and of tested quality.
12.02.00 Required number of packing glands to close unused openings in gland plates shall
also be provided.
13.00.00 CABLE LUGS
13.01.00 Cable lugs shall be tinned copper solderless crimping type conforming to IS: 8309
and 8394 suitable for aluminium or copper conductor (as applicable). Solderless
crimping of terminals shall be done by using corrosion inhibitory compound. The
cable lugs shall suit the type of terminals provided.
13.02.00 The cable lugs shall be of Dowell make or equivalent.
13.03.00 Crimping tool used shall be of approved design and make.
14.00.00 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CABLE DRUMS
Cable drums shall be unloaded, handled and stored in an approved manner and
rolling of drums shall be avoided as far as practicable. For short distances, the
drums may be rolled provided they are rolled slowly and in proper direction as
marked on the drum. In absence of any indication the drums may be rolled in the
same direction it was rolled during taking up the cables.
15.00.00 CABLE SUPPORTS AND CABLE TRAY MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
15.01.00 Cable trays in the control room are normally provided with embedded steel inserts
on concrete floors/walls. The Contractor shall secure supports by welding to these
inserts or available building steel structures.
15.02.00 However, in cases where no such embedded steel inserts are available, the
Contractor shall have to secure the supports on wall or floors by suitable anchoring

at no extra cost to the Employer. Details of fixing steel plates by anchor fasteners
shall be decided during detailed engineering stage. The provision of fixing
arrangement including supply of necessary angles etc. shall be included in the
installation rates quoted by bidder.
15.03.00 The cable supports shall conform to the requirements of Sec. E12 of this
Specification.
15.04.00 Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 600mm wherever cables are to be
supported without the use of cable trays, while at all other places these will be at
an interval of 2000mm.
16.00.00 CABLE TERMINATIONS AND CONNECTIONS
16.01.00 The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly in accordance with
cable and termination kit manufacturer’s instructions, drawing and/or as directed by
the Employer.
16.02.00 The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, drilling,
cutting, taping, heat shrinking, (where applicable), connecting to cable terminal,
shorting and grounding as required to complete the job.
16.03.00 Cost of all consumable material shall be included in the erection rates quoted.
16.04.00 The equipment will be generally provided with undrilled gland plates for
cables/conduit entry. The Contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland
plates, painting and touching up. Holes shall not be made by gas cutting.
16.05.00 The contractor shall tag/ferrule the control cable cores at all terminations, as
instructed by the Employer. In panels where a large number of cables are to be
terminated and cable identification may be difficult, each core ferrule may include
the complete cable number as well.
16.06.00 Spare cores shall be similarly tagged with cable numbers and coiled up.
16.07.00 Control cables shall have stranded copper conductor. Bare portion of the solid
conductors shall be tinned after removing the insulation and shall be terminated
directly without using cable lugs.
16.08.00 All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused
openings shall be effectively closed.
16.09.00 The entry of cables to the panels through floor openings shall be suitably sealed
by using fire proof cable penetration system as per BS – 476 part – 20, type A
sealing system which would be either silicone foam or equivalent foam system or

using individual blocks for each cable along with individual blocks for each cable
along with suitable frame work rated for one hour.
16.10.00 If the cable end box or terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is found
unsuitable and requires modification, the same shall be carried out by the
contractor as directed by the owner.
16.11.00 Directly Buried Cables
16.11.01 The Contractor shall construct the cable trenches required for directly burried
cables. The scope of work for construction of cable trenches for cables shall
include excavation, preparation of sand bedding, soil cover, supply and installation
of brick or concrete protective covers, back filling and reaming, supply and
installation of route markers and joint markers. The bidder shall ascertain the soil
parameters prevailing at site, before quoting the unit rates.
16.11.02 Laying the cable and providing protective covering shall be as per Owner's
approved drawing.
16.12.00 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
16.12.01 Power and control cables shall be laid in separate tiers. The order of laying of
various cables shall be as follows, for cables other than directly buried.
a) Power cables on top tiers.
b) Control, instrumentation and other service cables in bottom tiers.
16.12.02 Single core cables in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of four times the
diameter of cable between trefoil centre lines and clamped at every two meters .All
multicore cables shall be laid in touching formation. All power cables shall be laid
with a minimum centre to centre distance equal to twice the diameter of the cable.
After completion of cable laying work in the particular tray all the control cables
shall be bound to trays / supports by aluminum strips at every 5 meter interval and
at every bend. All power cables shall be laid with a minimum centre to centre
distance equal to twice the diameter of the cable.
16.12.03 Power and control cables shall be securely fixed to the trays/supports. Horizontal
runs in cable trays and trenches shall be secured by using self locking type nylon
cable straps with deinterlocking facilities at every 5 m interval. Vertical and inclined
cable runs shall be secured at every 1 m by nylon cable straps.
16.12.04 Cables shall not be bent below the minimum permissible limit. The permissible
limits are as follows :

a) Type of cable & voltage grade Minimum bending radius
b) Power cable 12 D
c) Control cables 10 D
Where D is overall diameter of cable.
16.12.05 Where cables cross roads, drains and rail tracks, the cables shall be laid in
reinforced spun concrete or steel pipes, burried at not less than one metre depth.
16.12.06 In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable one
(for LT Cables ) or two (for H.T cables) straight through joints to be made, should
the cable develop fault at a later date.
16.12.07 Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to avoid using straight
through joints. In case joints are necessary the same shall be supplied by the
Contractor. Cable splices will not be permitted except where called for by the
drawings, unavoidable or where permitted by the Employer.
16.12.08 Control cable terminations inside equipment enclosures shall have sufficient
lengths so that switching of termination in terminal blocks can be done without
requiring any splicing.
16.12.09 Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the
station, wherever required.
16.12.10 Rollers shall be used at intervals of about 2.0 metres, while pulling cables.
16.12.11 All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to
avoid damage due to twist, kink, sharp bends etc.
16.12.12 Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage.
16.12.013 Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in

accordance with IS: 1255 and other Indian Standard Codes of practices.
16.12.14 Wherever cables pass through floor or through wall openings or other partitions,
wall sleeves with bushes having a smooth curved internal surface so as not to
damage the cables, shall be supplied, installed and properly sealed by the
Contractor at no extra charges.
16.12.15 The erection work shall be carried out in a neat workmanlike manner and the areas
of work shall be cleaned of all scrap materials, etc. after the completion of work in
each area every day. Contractor shall remove the RCC/steel bench covers before

taking up the work and shall replace all the trench covers after the erection work in
that particular area is completed or when further work is not likely to be taken up for
some time.
16.12.16 Contractor shall furnish three copies of the report on work carried out in a particular
week, such as cable numbers and a date on which laid, actual length and route,
testing carried out, alongwith the marked up copy of the cable schedule and
interconnection drawing wherever any modifications are made.
16.12.17 Contractor shall paint the tray identification number on each run of trays at an
interval of 10m.
16.12.18 In case the outer sheath of a cable is damaged during handling/installation, the
Contractor shall repair it at his own cost, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-
Charge. In case any other part of a cable is damaged, the same shall be replaced
by a healthy cable, at no extra cost i.e. the Contractor shall not be paid for
installation and removal of the damaged cable.
16.12.19 All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and reliable
connections. The Contractor shall cover the exposed part of all cable lugs whether
supplied by him or not with insulating tape, sleeve or paint.
16.13.00 Conduits, Pipes and Duct Installation
16.13.01 Contractor shall supply all conduits, pipes and ducts as specified and to be shown
in detailed engineering drg. Flexible conduit should be used between fixed conduit
and equipment terminal boxes. Where vibration is anticipated, the flexible conduit
shall be as per the relevant IS.
16.13.02 Contractor shall have his own facility for bending, cutting and threading the
conduits at site. Cold bending should be used. All cuts & threaded ends shall be
made smooth without leaving any sharp edges. Anti corrosive paint shall be
applied at all field threaded portions. The Contractor shall supply and apply this
protective material.
16.13.03 All conduit/pipes shall be extended on both sides of wall/floor/openings. Exposed

conduits/pipes shall be adequately clamped at an interval of about 2m. The
fabrication and installation of supports and the clamping shall be included in the
scope of work by Contractor.
16.13.04 When two lengths of conduits are joined together through a coupling, running
threads equal to twice the length of coupling shall be provided on any length to
facilitate easy dismantling of two conduits.

16.13.05 Conduit installation shall be permanently connected to earth by means of special

approved type of earthing clamps. G.I. Pull wire of adequate size shall be laid in all
conduits before installation.
16.13.06 Each conduit run shall be painted with its designation as indicated on the drawings,
such that it can be identified at each end.
16.13.07 Embedded conduits shall have a minimum concrete cover of 50mm. Positioning
and ensuring proper alignment during concrete by other agencies shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
16.13.08 Conduit runs sleeves shall be provided with the bushings at each end.
16.13.09 Metallic conduit runs at termination shall have two locknuts and a bushing for
connection. Flexible conduits shall also be suitably clamped at each end.
Bushings shall have rounded edges so as not to damage the cables.
16.13.10 Where embedded conduits turn upwards from a slab or fill, the termination
dimensions shown on the drawings, if any, shall be taken to represent the position
of the straight extension of the conduit external to and immediately following the
bend. At least one half the arc length of the bend shall be embedded.
16.13.11 For underground runs, Contractor shall excavate and back fill as necessary.

ANNEXURE-I
1.00.00 EARTHING NOTES
1.00.01 GENERAL
Earthing of operating boxes, cubicles shall be done by 50 X 6 mm GS flat while
cable trenches and structure by 75 X 12 mm GS flat.
1.00.02 Neutral points of systems of different voltages, metallic enclosures and frame
works associated with all current carrying equipments and extraneous metal works
associated with electric system shall be connected to a single earthing systems
unless stipulated otherwise.
1.00.03 Earthing system installation shall be in strict accordance with the latest editions of
Indian Electricity Rules, relevant Indian Standards and Codes of practice and
Regulations existing in the locality where the system is installed.
1.00.04 Bolts and nuts required for earthing all main equipment structures and for
connecting with earthing system as explained in Cl. 1.00.02 above shall be in the
scope of the Contractor.
2.00.00 DETAILS OF EARTHING SYSTEM
2.00.01 Item Size Material

Main Earthing conductor 40mm dia rod Mild steel
Conductor above ground & 75 x 12/ G.S. Flat Galvanized

earthing leads 50 x 6 mm steel
(for equipment)
Rod Electrode 40mm dia, 3000mm Mild steel
G.I. Earthwire 7/8 SWG GI

2.00.02 For Step and Touch Potential the following shall be considered:
i) Current distribution factor – 1(one)

ii) Duration of fault current - 0.5 sec
iii) Human Body weight - 50kg
2.00.03 : Grid resistance shall be less than 1(one) ohm.
3.00.00 EARTHING CONDUCTOR LAYOUT
3.00.01 Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be burried atleast 600mm below
finished grade level unless stated otherwise.
3.00.02 Minimum 6000mm or higher spacing between rod electrodes shall be provided
based on the earthmat design calculations.

3.00.03 Wherever earthing conductors cross cable trenches, underground service ducts,
pipes, tunnels, railway tracks etc., it shall be laid atleast 300mm below them and
shall be re-routed in case it fouls with equipment/structure foundations.
3.00.04 Tap connections from the earthing grid to the equipment/structure to be earthed,
shall be terminated on the earthing terminals of the equipment/structure, if the
equipment is available at the time of laying the grid. Otherwise, “earth insert” with
temporary wooden cover or “earth riser” shall be provided near the equipment
foundation/pedestal for future connections to the equipment earthing terminals.
3.00.05 Earthing conductor along their run on cable trench ladder columns, beams, walls,
etc. shall be supported by suitable welding/cleating at intervals of 750mm.
Earthing conductors along cable trenches shall be on the wall nearer to the
equipment. Wherever it passes through walls, floors etc. galvanized iron sleeves
shall be provided for the passage of the conductor. Both ends of the sleeves shall
be sealed to prevent the passage of water through the sleeves.
3.00.06 Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum
distance of 1500mm from the outer boundary of the building. In case high
temperature is encountered at some location, the earthing conductor shall be laid
minimum 1500mm away from such location.
3.00.07 In outdoor areas, tap connections shall be brought 300mm above ground level for
making connections in future, in case equipment is not available at the time of grid
installations.
3.00.08 Earthing conductors crossing the road shall be either installed in hume pipes or laid
at greater depth to suit the site conditions.
3.00.09 Earthing conductors embedded in the concrete fibre shall have approximately
50mm concrete cover.
4.00.00 EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE EARTHING
4.00.01 The connection between earthing pads and the earthing grid shall be made by
short and direct earthing leads free from kinks and splices. In case earthing pads
are not provided on the item to be earthed, same shall be provided in consultation
with engineer.
4.00.02 Metallic pipes, conduits and cable tray sections for cable installation shall be
bonded to ensure electrical continuity and connected to earthing conductors at
regular interval. Apart from intermediate connections, beginning points shall also
be connected to earthing system.

4.00.03 Metallic conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor.
4.00.04 A separate earthing conductor shall be provided for earthing lighting fixtures,
lighting poles, receptacles, switches, junction boxes, lighting conduits, etc.
4.00.05 Wherever earthing conductor crosses or runs along metallic structures such as
gas, water, steam, conduits, etc. and steel reinforcement in concrete it shall be
bonded to the same.
4.00.06 Cable and cable boxes/glands, lockout switches etc. shall be connected to the
earthing conductor running alongwith the supply cable which, in turn, shall be
connected to earthing grid conductor at minimum two points, whether specifically
shown or not.
4.00.07 Railway tracks within switchyard area shall be bonded across fish plates and
connected to earthing grid at several locations.
4.00.08 Earthing conductor shall be buried 2000mm outside the switchyard fence. Every
post of the fence and gates shall be connected to earthing loop.
4.00.09 Flexible earthing connectors shall be provided where flexible conduits are
connected to rigid conduits to ensure continuity.
4.00.10 Equipment earthing (Riser & welding of two conductors) shall be done as per
enclosed sketch.
5.00.00 JOINTING
5.00.01 Earthing connections with equipment earthing pads shall be of bolted type.
Contact surfaces shall be free from scales, paint, enamel, grease, rust or dirt. Two
bolts shall be provided for making each connection. Equipment bolted
connections, after being checked and tested, shall be painted with anti-corrosive
paint/compound.
5.00.02 Connection between equipment earthing lead and between main earthing
conductors shall be welded/brazed type. For rust protections, the welds should be
treated with red lead and afterwards thickly coated with bitumen compound to
prevent corrosion.
5.00.03 Steel to copper connections shall be brazed type and shall be treated to prevent
moisture ingression.

5.00.04 Resistance of the joint shall not be more than the resistance of the equivalent
length of the conductor.
5.00.05 All ground connections shall be made by electric arc welding. All welded joints
shall be allowed to cool down gradually to atmospheric temperature before putting
any load on it. Artificial cooling shall not be allowed.
5.00.06 Bending of large diameter rod/thick conductor shall be done preferably by gas
heating.
5.00.07 All arc welding with large diameter conductors shall be done with low hydrogen
content electrodes.
6.00.00 POWER CABLE EARTHING
Metallic sheaths and armour of all multi core power cables shall be earthed at both
equipment and switchgear end. Sheath and armour of single core power cables
shall be earthed at switchgear end only.
7.00.00 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT FOR EARTHING SYSTEMS
7.00.01 Earthing terminal of each surge arrester, capacitor voltage transformer and
lightning down conductors shall be directly connected to rod electrode which in
turn, shall be connected to station earthing grid.
7.00.02 Auxilliary earthing mat of 1500mmX1500mm size comprising of closely spaced

conductors at 300mm x 300mm spacing and at 300mm below ground shall be
provided below the operating handles of the isolators. Operating handle shall be
directly connected to earthing mat.
8.00.00 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
8.00.01 Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the
conductors of the safety earthing system above ground level.
8.00.02 Down conductors shall be cleated on the structures at 2000mm interval.
8.00.03 Connection between each down conductor and rod electrodes shall be made via
test joint located approximately 150mm above ground level.
8.00.04 Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits.

8.00.05 Lightning protection system installation shall be in strict accordance with the latest
editions of Indian Electricity Rules, Indian Standards and Codes of practice and
Regulations existing in the locality where the system is installed.
A. PROCEDURE FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
a) LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION OF WELDED JOINTS
Evaluation of indications:
Relevant indications are those which result from mechanical discontinuities.

Rounded indications or indications which are circular or elliptical with the length
less than three times the width.
Linear indications are those indications in which the length is more than three times
the width.
Any questionable or doubtful indications, shall be retested to verify whether or not

actual defects are present.
Localised surface imperfections, such as may occur from machining marks, surface
conditions, may procedure similar indications which are not relevant to the
detection of unacceptable discontinuities.
b) Acceptance Standards
All surfaces to be examined shall be free of
linear indications;
four or more rounded defects with any dimensions more than 1.6mm in a line
separated by 1.16 inch (1.6mm) or less (edge to edge).
c) Defect removal and repair:
Unacceptable imperfections shall be removed and re-examination made to assure

the complete removal. Whenever a defect is removed and subsequent repair by
welding is not required, the excavated area shall be blended into the surrounding
surface so as to avoid sharp notches, crevices or corners. Where welding is
required after removal of a defect, the area shall be cleaned and welding
performed in accordance with a qualified welding procedure. Completed repairs
shall be re-examined by the method originally used for detection of the defect.
d) Treatment of imperfections believed non-relevant:

Any indication of an imperfection which is believed to be non-relevant shall be

regarded as a defect unless, on re-evaluation, it is shown by re-examination by the
same method or by the use of other non-destructive methods and/or by surface
conditioning that no unacceptable defect is present.
e) Examination of areas from which defects have been removed:
After a defect is thought to have been removed and prior to making weld repairs,
the area shall be examined by suitable methods to ensure the defect has been
eliminated.
f) Re-examination of repaired area:
After repairs are made, the repaired areas shall be blended.
B. RADIOAGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF WELDED JOINTS
Radiographic examination shall cover minimum 10% of weld seam and acceptance
standard for visual examination and Radiography shall be as follows:
Any of the following imperfections shall not be acceptable:
i) Cracks
ii) Zone of incomplete fusion or penetration, which exceed 10% of the weld length of
the joint. In longitudinal or transverse butt weld, where full penetration is intended
by the weld procedure, some lack of penetration is acceptable. The total length of
weld with lack of penetration shall not exceed 10% of the overall weld length. At no
place, shall weld penetration be less than 90% of the thickness of the material.
Continuous occurrence of lack of penetration is permitted, but shall not exceed
50mm in any 500mm length of weld.
iii) Inadequate weld dimensions, Root Cavity (shrinkage) and incompletely filled
groove greater than 10% effective throat thickness.
iv) Excess penetration shall be permitted provided it does not exceed 25% of the wall
thickness or 4mm whichever is smaller.
v) Weld reinforcement:
Build up in excess of 25% of the effective throat thickness shall be dressed. Any
reinforcement shall be substantially symmetrical about the centreline of the weld
and shall be of smooth contour blending smoothly at the toes with the parent
material.

vi) Undercutting and overlapping greater than 10% effective throat thickness.
vii) Elongated cavities and/or worm holes exceeding 3mm dia or equivalent area in
length provided the limitations on porosity are met with.
viii) Copper, tungsten or oxide inclusions greater than t/4 or 3mm dia or its
equivalentarea, whichever is smaller.
ix) Crater pipes exceeding 25% effective throat thickness or 3mm whichever is smaller.
x) Porosity:
Scattered porosity not exceeding 0.5% by volume is acceptable. In general, the

size of the pores shall not exceed 0.8mm dia, but occasional 1.6mm dia pores may
be acceptable, provided the following limits are not exceeded:
Where pore size is 0.4mm or less, upto 150t pores may be permitted in 1000mm
sq. area or radiograph.
Where pore size is 0.8 mm dia or less, upto 19t pores may be permitted in
1000mm sq. area or radiograph.
Where pore sizes are generally 0.8mm dia or less, but occasional 1.6mm dia pores
are present, upto 9t of 0.8mm dia may be permitted in 1000mm sq. area of
radiograph, provided the number of pores upto 1.6mm in dia does not exceed it.
However, visible surface porosity > 1mm dia is not acceptable.
Note:
In all cases, t = thickness of the thinnest section of the weld under examination.
Unacceptable weld defects shall be repaired in accordance with the original

welding procedure. All repairs shall be 100% inspected in accordance with original
testing procedure.

Erection Drawings to be submitted by the Contractor
1. Single line diagram
2. Switchyard layout (Plan & Section)
3. Equipment & Foundation Cable trench layout
4. Structural Arrangement Drawing
5. Earthmat Layout
6. Composite G.A. Drawing
7. Clearance Diagram
8. Cable Trench Section
9. Equipment Earthing details
10. Welding Details
11. All Design Calculations
12. G.A. of Clamps and Connectors Drawings
13. G.A. and Part Drawing of Insulator String and Hardware
14. G.A. and Schematics of all Marshalling Kiosks and cabinets
15. Data Sheets and Drawings of all Other Miscellaneous Items


PART-II
CHAPTER – E14:
SITE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PART-II
CHAPTER – E14: SITE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1.00.00 Introduction E14-1
2.00.00 General Checks E14-1
3.00.00 Circuit Breakers E14-1
4.00.00 Isolators E14-2
5.00.00 Current Transformers E14-2
6.00.00 Voltage Transformers E14-2
7.00.00 Surge Arrestors E14-2
8.00.00 Phasing out E14-2
9.00.00 Station Earthing E14-2
10.00.00 Conductor Stringing and Power Connectors E14-3
11.00.00 Insulators E14-3
12.00.00 Wave Trap E14-3

CHAPTER- E14: SITE TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1.00.00 INTRODUCTION
An indicative list of tests is given below. Contractor shall perform any additional test
based on specialties of the items as per the field QP/ instructions of the equipment
supplier or Employer without any extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall
arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests alongwith calibration
certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the Employer for approval.
2.00.00 GENERAL CHECKS
a) Check for physical damage.

b) Visual examination of zinc coating/ plating
c) Check from name plate that all items are as per older/ specification.
d) Check tightness of all bolts, clamps and connecting terminals using toque
wrenches.
e) For oil filled equipment check for oil leakage, if any. Also check oil level and top up.
f) Check ground connections for quality of weld and application of zinc rich paint over
weld joint of galvanized surfaces.
g) Check cleanliness of insulator and bushings.
h) All checks and tests specified by the manufactures in their drawings and manuals
as well as all tests specified in the relevant code of erection.
i) Check for surface finish of grading rings (corona control ring.)
j) Pressure test on all pneumatic lines at 1.5 times the rated pressure shall be
conducted.
3.00.00 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
a) Insulation resistance of each pole.

b) Check adjustments, if any, suggested by manufacturer.
c) Breaker closing and tripping time.
d) Slow and power closing operation and opening
e) Trip free and anti pumping operation.
f) Minimum pick up volts of coils
g) Contact resistance
h) Functional checking of compressed air plant and all accessories
i) Functional checking of control circuits, interlocks, tripping through protective relays
and auto-reclose operation.
j) Insulation resistance of control circuits, motor etc.
k) Resistance of closing and tripping coils.

4.00.00 ISOLATORS
a) Insulation resistance of each pole

b) Manual and electrical operation on interlocks
c) Insulation resistance of control circuits and motors.
d) Ground connections
e) Contact resistance
f) Proper alignment to minimise the vibration to the extreme possible during operation.
g) Measurement of operating torque for isolator and Earth switch
h) Resistance of operating and interlocking coils.
5.00.00 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
a) Insulation Resistance Test

b) Polarity test.
c) Ratio identification test-checking of all ratios on all cores by primary injection of
current.
d) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable)
e) Magnetizing characteristics test.
6.00.00 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
a) Insulation resistance test

b) Polarity test
c) Ratio test
d) Dielectric test of oil (if applicable)
7.00.00 SURGE ARRESTER
a) Grading leakage current

b) Resistance of ground connection.
8.00.00 PHASING OUT
The phasing out of all supplies in the station system shall be carried out.
9.00.00 STATION EARTHING
a) Check soil resistivity

b) Check continuity of grid wires
c) Check earth resistance of the entire grid as well as various sections of the same.
d) Check for weld joint and application of zinc rich paint on galvanised surface.
e) Dip test on earth conductor prior to use.

10.00.00 CONDUCTOR STRINGING AND POWER CONNECTORS
a) Physical check for finish

b) Electrical clearance check
c) Testing of torque by torque by torque wrenches on all bus power connectors and
other accessories.
d) Milli volt drop test on all power connectors.
e) Sag and tension check on conductors.
11.00.00 INSULATORS
Visual examination for finish damage, creepage distance, etc.
12.00.00 WAVE TRAP
a) Insulation resistance Test

b) Visual check

PART-II
CIVIL
PART-II
CIVIL
CHAPTER – C0:
SWITCHYARD CIVIL WORKS
PART-II
CIVIL
CHAPTER – C0: SWITCHYARD CIVIL WORKS

1.00.00 General C0-1
2.00.00 Submissions C0-3
3.00.00 Design Criteria C0-4
4.00.00 Transformer/ Reactor Foundations C0-11
5.00.00 Gravel Filling C0-12
6.00.00 Cable Trenches C0-12
7.00.00 Switchyard drains C0-12
8.00.00 Switchyard Road C0-12
9.00.00 Chain Link Fencing C0-13
10.00.00 Corrosion Protection Measures C0-14
11.00.00 Finishing Schedule C0-17
12.00.00 Miscellaneous Specifications C0-24
13.00.00 Requirement for Concrete and Reinforcement C0-26
14.00.00 Materials C0-28
15.00.00 Statutory Requirements C0-29
16.00.00 Geo-technical Investigation & Foundation system C0-29
17.00.00 Tests For Material / Workmanship C0-30
18.00.00 Drawings C0-30
19.00.00 Alteration in Specification and Design C0-30
20.00.00 Excavation in Rock Requiring Blasting C0-31
Appendix – I C0-33
CLAUSE NO. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
SWITCHYARD CIVIL WORKS
1.00.00 GENERAL
This chapter includes the technical requirements for Switchyard package including
associated design and preparation of all civil & structural drawings and execution of
all associated civil works. This Chapter deals mainly with technical specifications for
the design, supervision and construction of complete civil & structural works
complete under the scope of this contract.
The specifications are intended for general description of work, quality and
workmanship. The specifications are not however exhaustive to cover minute details
and the work shall be executed according to relevant latest Indian Standards / IRC or
IRS Specifications. In the absence of the above, the work shall be executed
according to the best prevailing practices in the trade, recommendations of relevant
American or British Standards or to the instructions of Engineer. The List of IS
standards / IRC or IRS specifications to be followed are mentioned in the technical
specifications. They shall be latest edition / version of the same issued 15 days prior
to the date of opening of this tender. The Bidder is expected to get himself clarified
on any doubts about the specifications etc. before bidding, and the discussions
recorded in writing with the Employer in respect of interpretation of any portion of this
document.
This specification covers design, preparation of general arrangement drawings,
construction and fabrication drawings, supply of materials and construction of all civil,
structural and architectural works.
Description of various items of work under this specification and nature of work in
detail are given hereinafter. Complete work under this scope is referred to as civil
works. List of various civil works covered under the scope is given in Part-I and
herein.
The work to be performed under this specification consists of design, engineering

and providing all labour, materials, consumable, equipment, temporary works,
temporary storage sheds, temporary labour and staff colony, temporary site offices,
constructional plant, fuel supply, transportation and all incidental items not shown or
specified but reasonably implied or necessary for completion and proper functioning
of the plant, all in strict accordance with the specifications and including revisions and
amendments thereto as may be required during execution of the work.
All materials including cement, reinforcement steel and structural steel etc. shall be
provided by the Bidder. The material arranged by the contractor shall conform to
quality standard specified elsewhere in the specification and shall be procured from
licensed agencies / sources only with prior approval of Employer.
The scope shall also include setting up by the Bidder a complete testing laboratory in
the field to carry out all relevant tests required for the civil works for the project.
Minimum facilities as specified in Sub-section-QA (Civil Work) shall be provided by
the Bidder in this laboratory.
DARLIPALLI STPP STAGE-I BID DOC. NO.: TECHNICAL PART-II Page

(2X800 MW) SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI C0- 1 of 45
CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
For his site office and covered store buildings, the contractor shall adopt pre-
engineered / pre-fabricated constructions made of steel with single / double skin,
insulated or uninsulated roof and wall coverings (fabricated out of permanently color
coated metal sheets). Alternatively, contractor can adopt readymade ‘Portacabin’ or
similar construction. Contractor shall ensure that all such constructions are well
engineered, neatly constructed and overall present a pleasing look.
In line with Gazette Notification on Ash Utilisation issued by MOEF and its
amendment thereafter, contractor shall use ash and ash based products in works as
specified in these specifications, drawings and as per instructions of the Engineer.
He shall also use ash and ash based products in construction of his offices, stores,
staff quarters and labour huts etc. He shall furnish a compliance report along with all
details of use of ash and ash based products along with each bill.
Contractor shall establish/ set up at site suitable repair facilities for construction plant,
equipment and machinery (like piling rigs, cranes, batching plant, dewatering pumps
etc.). In case of piling rigs, cranes, batching plant etc. he will also make
arrangements/ tie up with equipment manufacturers/ suppliers for periodic overhaul/
maintenance and for major breakdown, if any. He shall also keep adequate stock of
spares at site for various plant, equipment and machinery to meet day to day
requirements as recommended by the equipment manufacturer/ suppliers or as
instructed by the Engineer. Contractor shall deploy dedicated qualified, full time
mechanical/ electrical foreman/ supervisors for manning the repair facilities as
specified above.
The work shall be carried out according to the design/ drawings to be developed by
the Bidder and approved by the Employer. For all building & structures, foundations,
etc., necessary layout and details are to be developed by the Bidder keeping in view
statutory & functional requirements and providing enough space & access for
operation, use and maintenance. Certain minimum requirements are indicated in this
specification for guidance purpose only. However, the Bidder’s offer shall cover the
complete functional requirements as per the best prevailing practices and to the
complete satisfaction of the Employer.
All the quality standards, tolerances, welding standards and other technical
requirements as covered in this specification shall be strictly adhered to by the
Bidder.
The Bidder should fully appraise himself of the prevailing conditions at the proposed
site, locations of adjoining facilities/ structures, climatic conditions including monsoon
pattern, local conditions and site specific parameters and shall include for all such
conditions and contingent measures in the bid, including those which may not have
been specifically brought out in the specifications
The Bidder shall take all necessary precautions to protect all the existing equipments,
structures, facilities & buildings if applicable etc. from damage. In case any damage
occurs due to the activities of the Bidder on account of negligence, ignorance,
accidental or any other reason whatsoever, the damage shall be made good by the
Bidder at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Bidder shall also take
all necessary safety measures, at his own cost, to avoid any harm / injury to his
workers and staff from the equipment & facilities of the power station.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
During the progress of work, the Engineer will exercise supervision of the work to
ensure that the technical provisions of the contract are being followed and the work is
being executed accurately and properly. However, such supervision shall in no way
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for executing the work in accordance with
the specifications.
Before submitting the bid, the Bidder shall inspect and examine the site and its
surroundings and shall satisfy himself as to the nature of the ground and subsoil, the
availability of materials necessary for completion of the work, means of access to site
and in general shall himself obtain all necessary information as to risks,
contingencies and other circumstances which may influence or affect his offer. No
extra claim consequent on any misunderstanding or otherwise shall be allowed.
The layout and levels of all structures etc. shall be made by the Contractor at his own
cost from the general grid of the plot and bench marks given by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall give all help in instruments, material and men to the Engineer, at no
extra cost, for checking the detailed layout & correctness of the layout and levels.
However the Contractor shall be solely responsible for their correctness.
2.00.00 SUBMISSIONS
The following documents shall be submitted by the Bidder for approval of the
Employer, prior to commencement of fabrication and erection / construction. This list
is not exhaustive but indicative only:
1. G. A. drawing showing co-ordinates of various Gantry structures and facilities.
2. Drawing showing underground facilities with co-ordinates of all facilities such as

Tower/LM foundations, equipment foundations, Transformer/Reactor foundations
R.C.C cable trenches, cable ducts, drains, sump pits, culverts, other foundations
etc.
3. Proposed erection / construction scheme for various structural and civil works
envisaged as per design requirement.
4. Foundation design & drawing for Towers & LM.
5. Foundation design & drawing for equipment supports, their control cubicles, bus
post supports and bay marshalling kiosks
6. Details of RCC cable trenches and duct banks with necessary precast RCC
removable covers with lifting facility, sump pits, cable tray supports etc.
7. Foundation design & drawing for Interconnecting Transformers (ICT) / Shunt

reactors / Misc. transformers/ LT Transformers as required including associated
rail tracks, oil soak pits, oil collection pits, firewall etc.
8. Design & drawing of roads and drains within switchyard including

road/drain/trench crossings.
9. Site preparation, soil sterilization / antiweed treatment including gravel filling, but
excluding major leveling as required.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
10. Fencing along with gate for the switchyard wherever required
11. Design & drawings for new Switchyard Control Room Building or Modification
required in the existing switchyard control room building for installation of new
panels, as applicable
12. Architectural design and detailing aspect of the building shall be rendered
through professional services of a reputed architect registered with council of
architecture, having experience in similar kind of works. The consultant shall
evolve the design based on employer's guidelines and shall present it in the form
of Detail drawings, Perspective view. All drawing and documents shall be duly
stamped by the Registered Architect.
13. All architectural drawings required for execution of construction work such as
detail floor plans, detail elevations, detail sections and other miscellaneous
architectural details such as finishing schedule (internal and external), color
schemes (both internal and external), doors and windows, flooring details and
pattern, false ceiling etc., architectural facia and projections, miscellaneous
details and architectural details like coping, khurras, water proofing, surface
drain, rain water down comers, sanitary and plumbing etc.
14. Foundation design & drawing for switchyard bay KIOSK, if applicable
15. Structural steel fabrication drawings and Reinforcement bar bending schedules
for reference.
16. Electronic soft copy of all the approved drawings/calculations in Cat-II / Cat-I.
3.00.00 DESIGN CRITERIA
3.01.00 General
3.01.01 All switchyard structures and buildings including Control Room Building Gantry
Towers & Beams, Lightning mast, Equipments supporting structures, Switchyard bay
KIOSKS, Transformer foundations including oil pit, rail track, fire wall, cable trenches,
Roads, Culvert, Drains, sewers, water supply, fencing with gates, gravel filling &
antiweed treatment, disposal of soil, leveling/dressing of switchyard area etc. and
other related works all complete are covered in the specification.
3.01.02 Structures shall be designed for the most critical combinations of dead loads,
imposed loads, equipment loads, crane loads, piping loads (static and dynamic),
wind loads, seismic loads and temperature loads. In addition, loads and forces
developed due to differential settlement shall also be considered.
3.02.00 Loading
3.02.01 Dead Loads
Dead loads shall include the weight of structure complete with finishes, fixtures and
partitions and shall be taken as per IS: 875 (Part - I).

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
3.02.02 Imposed Loads
Imposed loads in different areas shall include live, erection, operation and
maintenance loads. Equipment loads (which constitute all loads of equipment to be
supported on the building frame) are not included in the imposed loads furnished
below and shall be considered in addition to imposed loads.
For consideration of imposed loads on structures, IS: 875 (Part – II) “Code of practice
for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings & structures” shall be followed.
The following minimum imposed loads as indicated for some of the important areas
shall, however, be considered for the design. If actual expected load is more than the
specified minimum load, then actual load is to be considered.
a) Roofs 150 Kg / Sq.m
b) Building floors 1000 Kg / Sq.m
c) RCC floors (General) outdoor platforms 500 Kg / Sq.m
d) Stairs, Landing and Balconies 500 Kg / Sq.m
e) Toilets 200 Kg / Sq.m
f) Chequered plates, Grating Floors etc. 500 Kg / Sq.m
g) Walkways 300 Kg / Sq.m
h) Roads As per IRC and MOST
i) Road Culverts and its allied structures Design for Class - ’AA’
including RCC pipes Crossings & Road loading (wheeled and
Crossings of Trenches tracked both) and checked
for Class - ’A’ loading as
per IRC standards.
j) Underground structures such sumps, In addition to the earth

pits, trenches, drains etc. pressure and ground water
pressure, the surcharge of
2000 Kg / Sq.m shall also
be considered.
k) Cable Trench Covers 400 Kg / Sq.m ( General )
l) Rail Culverts As per Railway ‘Bridge

Rules’

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
3.02.03 Equipment loads
Loads of all equipment like Electrical control and relay panels, cable load, Pipe load
(static and dynamic), Tanks, etc. shall be considered over and above the imposed
loads. Cable and piping loads not less than 5 kN/sq.m hanging from the underside,
shall also be considered additionally for floors where these loads are expected.
3.02.04 Crane Loads
For crane loads, an impact factor of 25% and lateral crane surge of 10% (of lifted
weight + trolley weight) shall be considered in the analysis of frame according to the
provisions of IS: 875. The longitudinal crane surge shall be 5% of the static wheel
load.
Monorail load shall be considered in the analysis of frame according to provisions of

IS: 875 (latest revision).
3.02.05 Wind Load

a) Switchyard gantries, towers, equipment supporting structures and lightning
mast shall be designed as per IS: 802. The wind load calculations shall be
made as per IS: 802 considering the basic wind speed (Vb) as stipulated in
“Criteria for wind resistant design of structures and equipment” Appendix-II of
Part–I of this specification.
b) All other structures covered under the present package shall be designed as
per IS: 456 / IS: 800. The wind load calculations to be made as per IS: 875
shall be with the parameters as stipulated in “Criteria for wind resistant design
of structures and equipment” Appendix-II of Part–I of this specification.
3.02.06 Seismic Load
Seismic forces shall be considered as specified in Appendix-III of Part–I of this

specification. Response spectrum method shall be used for the seismic analysis
using at least first five modes of vibration.
3.03.00 Design Parameters for Gantry Towers & Beams, Lightning Mast and Equipment
Supporting Structures
3.03.01 Gantry structure, which consists of open web towers connected by girders, shall be
made of structural steel conforming to Grade IS:2062 and duly galvanized
conforming to IS: 2629 and IS: 4759. All joints shall be bolted connections.
3.03.02 The analysis of towers and gantries shall be carried out with combined model of
critical configurations of towers and gantries using any established structural analysis
software like STAAD Pro. etc.
3.03.03 All bolts for connections shall be of 16mm dia conforming to IS: 12427, property class
5.6 as per IS: 1367 (Part 3). Nuts shall conform to I.S 1363 (Part 3) of property class
5. Foundation bolts shall conform to IS: 5624, and property class shall be 4.6 as per
IS: 1367 (Part 3).

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
3.03.04 Butt splice shall be used for splicing the main members and splice shall be located
away from the node point.
3.03.05 IS: 802 “Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead transmission line
towers” shall be followed for design of structures. Height & type of towers shall be
established based on electrical requirements. A provision of ± 30 degree angle of
deviation of line in horizontal plane and ± 20 degree deviation in vertical plane is
considered and the resulting worst combination of forces shall be considered for
design. For all outgoing and incoming feeders, the conductor span shall be taken as
200m for design purpose.
3.03.06 Loads and Loading Conditions
Switchyard structures shall be designed for the worst combination following loads:
1) Dead loads (load of wires/conductors, insulator, electrical equipment and

structural members),
2) live loads,
3) Wind load on bus bars, shield wires, insulator strings, electrical equipment,
structural members etc as per IS:802,
4) seismic loads,
5) loads due to deviation of conductor (gantries shall be checked for + 30 deg.

deviation in horizontal plane and ± 20 degree deviation in vertical plane),
6) loads due to unbalanced tension in conductor/wire,
7) Torsional load due to unbalanced vertical and horizontal forces,
8) Erection loads,
9) Short circuit forces including snap in case of bundled conductors, etc.
Note:
(i) The occurrence of earthquake and maximum wind pressure is unlikely to take
place at the same time. The structure shall be designed for either of the two.
However, temperature stresses can be ignored, as these towers are
freestanding structure in open space.
(ii) Short circuit force and wind shall be considered to act simultaneously for the
purpose of structure design.
(iii) Direction of wind shall be assumed such as to produce maximum stresses in

any member for the combination of wind load with conductor tensions. The

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
wind acting perpendicular and parallel to bus conductor and shield wire shall
be considered separately
(iv) The conductor tension shall be assumed as acting on only one side of the
gantry for the analysis and design of switchyard gantries for both normal and
short circuit condition.
(v) The distance between terminal and dead end gantry shall be taken as 200
meters.
3.04.07 Factor of safety:
The factor of safety for the design of members for switchyard structures shall be
considered as 2.0 for normal condition and 1.5 for short circuit condition.
3.03.08 Design consideration for Equipment support:
The supporting structure for B.P.I., LA, CVT and Isolator equipment’s shall be
comprised of GI (ERW) pipe of grade YST:210 or of higher grade conforming to IS:
1161 & shall be designed as per IS:806 “Code of Practice for use of steel tubes in
general building construction”.
Minimum diameter of the pipe type support for 765kV structure shall be 300NB,
400kV structure shall be 250NB, for 220kV & 132kV structures shall be 200NB and
that for 66kV & 33kV shall be 150 NB.
The supporting structure for CT, CSE & Wave Trap equipment shall comprise of
lattice structural steel conforming to IS 2062 and shall be designed as per IS: 802.
Common raft foundation shall be provided for each pole of isolator.
3.03.09 Special design consideration for Lightning Mast:
Diagonal wind condition shall be considered for Lightning Mast. Diagonal wind shall
be taken as 1.2 times the wind calculated on longitudinal/transverse side. Lightning
mast shall be provided with minimum two nos. of platforms as per requirement and
an external cage ladder for climbing purpose shall be provided up to the platforms.
Top of platform shall have grating, railing and two guard plates. The minimum width
of platform shall be 900mm.
Live load of 300kg/m2 above platforms shall be considered for design of Lightning
Mast.
The fabrication and erection of the switchyard works shall be carried out generally in
accordance with IS: 802 and IS: 800. All materials shall be completely shop
fabricated and galvanized.
3.03.10 Minimum Thickness of Members & Galvanization
All steel work used in construction of switchyard structures such as Towers & Beams,

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
Lightning mast and equipment supporting structures including nuts, bolts and
washers shall be galvanized.
Minimum section thickness shall not be less than 4 mm. Weight of zinc coating shall
be at least 0.610 kg/m2 and foundation bolts shall have heavier zinc coating of at
least 0.80 kg/m2.
3.03.11 Design consideration for Foundation
The F.O.S. for foundation shall be 10% more than factor of safety for supporting
structure i.e. 2.2 for normal condition and 1.65 for short-circuit condition.
3.04.00 Design Concepts for Buildings / Structures not covered under Cl. 3.03.00
3.04.01 i) All buildings shall have framed super structure
ii) The Control Room building shall have RCC framed super structure with brick
wall cladding on exterior face. The design shall generally be carried out using
limit state method of design as per IS: 456 “Code of practice for plain and
reinforced concrete for general building construction”.
iii) The Control room building shall consist of rooms/facilities/ equipments/

monorail as per system requirement.
iv) Open space shall be provided on the periphery of the panel rows and
equipment to allow easy operator movement and access for maintenance
purposes.
v) Unless specified, the wall cladding shall be with minimum one brick thick on
exterior face.
3.04.02 Individual members of the frame shall be designed for the worst combination of
forces such as bending moment, axial force, shear force, torsion, etc.
3.04.03 The different load combinations shall be taken as per IS: 875 (Part-V) and other
relevant IS Codes.
(a.) Wind and seismic forces shall not be considered to act simultaneously.
(b.) For the design of building during seismic condition, the water tanks on the roof
shall be considered full up to operating level. However, for other load
combinations, water tank on the roof in flooded condition shall be considered.
(c.) ‘Lifted load’ of crane shall not be considered during seismic condition.
3.04.04 The design and fabrication of steel structures shall be as per provisions of IS: 800
and other relevant IS standards. Flanges and web of crane girder and monorail hoist
beams should not have any joints between the supports.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
3.04.05 Welding shall be used for fabrication and joints. For site connections, welding or High
Strength Friction Grip (HSFG) bolts shall be used. In few cases, for shear
connections or removable beam connections, bolted joints with M.S. black bolts may
be adopted. IS: 4000 shall be followed for HSFG bolt connection. IS: 816 and IS:
9595 shall be followed for welding of structures.
3.04.06 All structures close to railway line shall have clearances conforming to Railway
norms.
3.04.07 a) Dispersion of load in any direction through soil shall be as per IS: 8009
(relevant part)
b) Dispersion of load through concrete shall be considered at an angle of 45 degree

with horizontal from the edge of contact area.
3.04.08 The design and construction of RCC structures shall be carried out as per IS: 456 -
2000. Generally limit state method as per IS: 456 shall be used for design and
working stress method shall be adopted for the design wherever specifically
mentioned in this specification.
For design and construction of steel - concrete composite members, IS: 11384 shall
be followed. For reinforcement detailing, IS: 5525 and SP: 34 shall be followed.
Two layers of reinforcement (on inner and outer face) shall be provided for RCC wall
sections having thickness more than 150mm.
3.04.09 For design of all underground structures/ foundations, ground water table shall be
considered at the finished ground level.
3.04.10 Earth pressure for all underground structures shall be calculated using coefficient of
earth pressure at rest, coefficient of active or passive earth pressure whichever is
applicable depending upon the structural configuration.
3.04.11 The storm water drainage shall be designed taking into account the finished grade
level of the surrounding area, area drainage pattern around the area, intensity of
rainfall etc. The maximum velocity for pipe drains and open drains shall be limited to
2.4m/ sec and 1.8 m/ sec. respectively. However, minimum velocity of 0.6m/ sec. for
self cleansing shall be ensured. Bed slope not milder than 1 in 1000 shall be
provided. Maximum rainfall intensity for design of drain shall be in line with the
provisions given elsewhere in this specification.
3.04.12 Sewers shall be designed for a minimum self cleansing velocity of 0.75m/ sec and
the maximum velocity shall not exceed 2.4m/ sec.
3.05.00 Architectural concepts

The switchyard control room building shall be architecturally treated in such a way
that it presents a pleasing composition of mass and void with suitable and
functionally designed projections and recesses. The overall impact of the building
shall be one of aesthetically unified architectural composition having a

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
comprehensive scale, bending tonal values with the surroundings and taking full
consideration of the climatic conditions and the building orientation. The buildings
shall be architecturally treated in such a way so as to be in harmony with the
surroundings The over all composition may have straight or curvilinear or sloping
profiles.
3.05.01 The buildings shall be also be designed:
(1) To the requirements of the National Building Code of India, and the standards
quoted there in. The building shall be designed on the principle of providing
barrier free environment for physically disabled person.
(2) To adequately suit the requirements of the equipment and apparatus

contained in the buildings and in all respects to be compatible with the
intended use and occupancy.
(3) With a functional space arrangement.
(4) To allow for easy access to equipment and maintenance of the equipment.
(5) With, wherever required, fire retarding materials for walls, ceilings and doors,
which would prevent supporting or spreading of fire.
(6) With materials preventing dust accumulation.
4.00.00 TRANSFORMER/REACTOR FOUNDATIONS

Foundations of transformers/reactors shall be designed for seismic and wind loads.
Block foundations shall be provided for the main transformer block.
The oil soak pit, if provided, shall be filled with gravel of size 40mm. The volume of
the soak pit shall be sufficient to store complete oil of the transformer/reactor along
with 10 minutes of fire water considering only 40% of the volume as available voids
between gravel filling. However, in case a separate oil collection tank is provided for
the transformer/reactor, oil soak pit of volume equivalent to one-third (1/3) the oil
volume of transformer/reactor shall be provided around transformer/reactor. The oil
collection tank, in such cases, shall be designed for an effective capacity of complete
oil of the transformer along with 10 minutes of fire water. The oil soak pit shall also be
provided with a sump at the corner to allow drainage of water/oil from the soak pit.
Arrangement for moving the transformer into place using rail cum road, jacking pads
and pulling blocks including inserts, as required, shall be provided along with the
transformer/reactor foundations.
RCC Firewall shall also be provided between the transformers wherever required.
300 mm thick PCC M20 encasement all around the Pylon supports inside soak pit for
fire fighting system shall be provided up to top of gravel filling. However, the supply
and erection of Pylon supports with anchor fasteners for HVW spray system are not
under the scope of this package. Coarse aggregate filling inside the transformer oil

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
soak pit shall be carried out only after construction/erection of Pylon supports and
PCC encasement.
5.00.00 GRAVEL FILLING
Gravel filling shall be provided as specified elsewhere in the specifications. Each

layer shall be compacted by using half ton roller with 4-5 passes and suitable water
sprinkling. Before laying the gravel/stone fill, the top layer of the soil shall be treated
for anti-weed considering the type of weeds found in the vicinity. The anti-weed - soil
sterilization details such as manufacturer's name, their specification, test certificate,
etc. shall be furnished for Owner's approval. Any modification if required in the
proposed anti-weed treatment chemical shall have to be done by the contractor at no
extra cost to the Owner. The contractor shall be required to furnish a performance
guarantee of three years for the anti-weed treatment. This guarantee shall be
commenced from the date of completion of work or date of handing over, whichever
is later.
6.00.00 CABLE TRENCHES
Cable trenches shall be provided for routing of cables as required and shall be of
adequate size. The trenches located within switchyard shall project at least 300 mm
above the finished formation level so that no storm water shall enter into the trench.
The bottom of trench shall be provided with a longitudinal slope of 1:500. The
downstream end of cable trenches shall be connected to sump pits. The precast
RCC covers shall be as per tender drawing. Lifting hooks shall be provided in the
precast covers Trenches shall be given a slope of 1:250 in the direction
perpendicular to the run of the trenches. Angle of size 50x50x6 mm (minimum) with
lugs shall be provided on the edges of RCC cable trenches and any other place
where breakage of corners of concrete is expected.
7.00.00 SWITCHYARD DRAINS
Open RCC storm water drains shall be provided on both sides of the road and inside
switchyard area for proper drainage. All drains shall be designed for maximum runoff
velocity of 1.8 m/sec. The thickness of side wall and bottom slab of RCC drains shall
be minimum 100 mm. RCC box/pipe culvert shall be provided for road, rail and
trench crossings.
8.00.00 SWITCHYARD ROAD
All roads shall be concrete roads. The road construction shall be as per section
shown in Tender Drawing and shall conform to IRC standards and MORTH
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works.
The sub grade shall be consolidated with 6 to 8 passes of power road roller of 8 to 12
tonne capacity. The sub grade shall be dressed to camber and consolidated with
road roller. Any undulations shall be made good and the sub grade shall be rerolled
to avoid any weak or soft spot.
Granular Sub-base (GSB) of minimum 300mm thickness shall consist of close

graded material conforming to Grade-II (size range 53mm to 0.075mm) as per

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
MORTH specifications. The granular material shall be spread in layer with motor
grader on prepared surface and compacted with roller to achieve at least 98% of
maximum dry density of the material. The thickness of each compacted layer shall
not exceed 100mm if vibratory roller is not used.
Dry Lean Cement (DLC) concrete sub base of minimum 150mm thickness shall be
laid over the granular sub-base with coarse and fine aggregate conforming to IS:383.
The size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 25mm and aggregate cement ratio
shall be limited to 15:1. The cement content shall not to be less than 150 Kg/cum and
optimum moisture content shall be determined during trial length construction. The
concrete shall be mixed in a batching plant and its strength shall not to be less than
10 MPa at 7 days. The concrete shall be compacted preferably using double drum
smooth-wheeled vibratory roller of min 8-10 tonne static weight.
The minimum dry density obtained shall be 97% of the dry density achieved during
trial length construction and the density achieved at the edges (i.e. upto 0.5m from
the edge) shall be not less than 95% of that achieved during trial length construction.
Cement Concrete Pavement of minimum 225mm thickness of M-35 grade concrete

shall be placed with controlled deposition on the dry lean concrete sub-base in
panels of 2.25m x 4.5m. Construction of the concrete pavement shall include
compacting, spraying of abrasion spray on the wearing course, finishing, including
drilling of holes, grooves, providing all contraction, expansion, construction and
longitudinal joints, dowel and tie bars, joint filler, joint sealants of specified grade
(bitumen sealant of Grade-A of IS-1834) including impermeable polyethylene film of
125 microns laid flat without creases (min lap of 300mm) between concrete
pavement and DLC, caulking strip, de-bonding strip, application of brush surface
texture, filler, keys, admixture etc. as per MORTH specifications and instructions of
the Engineer. The minimum cement content shall not be less that 350 kg per cum of
concrete and shall not exceed 425 kg per cum of concrete
9.00.00 CHAIN LINK FENCING
Chain link fence and fixing detail including materials, all quality control tests and
checks etc. for the work shall be as per IS:2721. The fence shall comprise of 2.4 m
high PVC coated G.I. chain link fencing of minimum 4 mm dia wire including PVC
coating and with 2.5 mm dia GI bare wire with mesh size of 75X75 mm with a 600
mm high galvanised concertina at the top.
The PVC coated chain link wire mesh will be stretched and attached by clips at 0.5 m
intervals to 3 strands of High Tensile Spring Steel (HTSS) wire of 4 mm dia
interwoven in chain link wire mesh and kept under tension which in turn are attached
to the fence post with security nuts and bolts. On every fourth post a clamping strip
will be threaded through the links of chain link and bolted to the fence post with the
help of security nuts and bolts. All nuts, fasteners, bolts, clamping strips, clamps,
clips, etc. shall be galvanised.
Above the chain link fence a 600 mm High Tensile Serrated Wire (HTSW) galvanised
Concertina shall be provided at a maximum spiral pitch of 300mm and attached to 3

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
strands of HTSS wire by means of 'C' clips at 0.6 m interval. The 3 HTSS wire
strands will be attached to angle iron posts with 12 mm diameter security fasteners.
All bolts provided in the fence work shall be minimum 12 mm diameter. Length of all
bolts shall be such that after fixing in position it shall have at least 12 mm projected
length beyond the nut. All nuts & bolts shall be high quality as per BIS standard and
heavy duty galvanized. The threads of projected length of the all bolts beyond nut
after fixing in position shall be destroyed by hammering or by any suitable means to
protect from any possible theft by miscreants.
All fence posts shall be 75X75X6 MS angles spaced at 2.5m c/c distance. All
straining posts i.e. end posts shall be 75X75X6 MS angles. All corner posts will have
two stay posts and every tenth post will have a transverse stay post.
Concrete foundations for the angle iron posts and stays shall be provided. Toe walls
of brick masonry shall be provided between the fence posts all along the run of the
fence with foundation. Toe wall shall be minimum 200 mm above the formation level
with 75 mm thick PCC coping (1:2:4).
M. S. Gate of minimum 4.0 mts wide and 2.25 mts. high shall be provided to provide
access through the fencing. It shall be made in two leafs with locking arrangement.
Hinges, aldrops, guide tracks, ball and bearing arrangement, castor wheel and other
accessories shall be provided for effective working of the gate.
All MS angles used in posts and gates shall be finished by blast cleaning of steel
surfaces to near white metal surface (Sa 2 ½ Swedish standard) and applying
inorganic zinc silicate primer of minimum 75 microns (DFT), followed by an
intermediate coat of minimum 75 micron (DFT) epoxy based titanium dioxide /
micaceous iron oxide, followed by finish painting with Epoxy based colour pigmented
finish Poly amide cured paint. All paints including primer shall be of reputed brand /
manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer.
10.00.00 CORROSION PROTECTION MEASURES
All structural steel and RCC members/ structures shall have to be provided with
corrosion protection treatment unless specified otherwise.
10.01.00 Structural Steel
Corrosion Protection
i) General
a) All Painting shall be done as per approved painting scheme of the Vendors/
Manufacturers, which shall be submitted by the Bidder and as approved by
the Employer. Painting scheme shall also include Item codification/
Description of all Coats of Paints for manufacturer’s, from whom the Paint is
intended to be procured.
b) All Steel structures (except those embedded in Concrete), unless specified

otherwise shall be provided with painting as given below which is designed

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
for a minimum maintenance free life of Ten (10) years (expected life, long
range Ten (10) years & expected life, long range Ten (10) to Twenty (20)
years , as per BS : 5493.
c) All Paints shall be of high build constitution.
ii) Painting of Steel Surfaces embedded in Concrete
For the portion of Steel surfaces embedded in Concrete, the surface shall be
prepared by Manual Cleaning and provided with Primer Coat of Chlorinated
Rubber based Zinc Phosphate Primer of Minimum 50 Micron Dry Film Thickness
(DFT).
iii) Painting of Steel Surface
a) All Steel surfaces shall be provided with self curing Inorganic Zinc Silicate
Primer Coat (Solid by Volume Minimum 60%) of Minimum 75 Micron Dry
Film Thickness (DFT) applied over blast cleaned surface to near white metal
conforming to Sa 2 ½ finish of Swedish standard SIS –05-5900.
b) Primer Coat shall be followed with the application of Intermediate Coat of

Polyamide Cured pigmented Titanium Dioxide (TiO2) or Micaceous Iron
Oxide (MIO) Epoxy based Paint (Solid by Volume Minimum 60%) of
Minimum 75 Micron DFT. This coat shall be applied in Shop after an interval
of Minimum overnight (from the application of Primer Coat).
c) Intermediate Coat shall be followed with the application of Finish Coat of

Polyamide Cured colour pigmented Epoxy based paint (Solid by Volume
Minimum 60%) of Minimum 75 Micron DFT. This Coat shall be applied after
an interval of Minimum overnight and maximum indefinite (from the
application of Intermediate Coat) either before Erection by Airless spray
technique or after Erection by brush and / or spray. Colour and shade of the
Coat shall be as approved by the Employer. The Finish Coat thickness of 75
Micron can be built up either in Single application at Shop or in two
applications one at Shop and the other at Site.
d) Finish Coat shall be followed with the application of Final Finish Coat of
Polyurethane based colour pigmented Paint (Solid by Volume Minimum
40%) of Minimum 30 Micron DFT. This Coat shall be applied within Seven
(7) days (from the completion of Finish Coat) after Erection by brush and/ or
spray. Colour and shade of the Coat shall be as approved by the Employer.
iv) Touch-up Painting on damaged areas
a) For Coatings damaged up to metal surface
Surface preparation shall be carried out by Manual Cleaning. Minimum 6

inches adjoining area with existing Coating shall be roughened by Wire
brushing, emery paper rubbing etc., for best adhesion of patch Primer.
Primer Coat of self-priming Epoxy Touch-up Primer applied by brush

immediately after the surface preparation. (Minimum DFT 100 Microns).

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
Over this Primer Coat, Intermediate Coat, Finish Coat and Final Finish Coat
shall be applied as covered above by brush with Intermediate Coat applied
within maximum seven (7) days of application of touch up Primer.
b) For Coatings damaged up to Intermediate Coatings (i.e. where Primer Coat

is intact).
Damaged area including Minimum 6 inches adjoining area with existing

Coating should be roughened by wire brushing emery paper rubbing etc., for
best adhesion of patch Primer without damaging the Primer Coat.
Touch-up Primer, Intermediate, Finish and Final Finish Coats shall be

applied as specified above for Coatings damaged up to metal surface.
v) Painting of Welded areas / painting of areas exposed after removal of temporary

supports/ Touch-up Painting on damaged areas of Employer’s Structures, where
inter-connection, Welding/ modification etc. has been carried out by the Bidder.
a) Clean the surface to remove flux spatters and loose rust, loose Coatings in
the adjoining areas of Weld seams by wire brush and emery paper.
b) Painting procedure to be followed as mentioned above for Touch-up Painting

on damaged areas.
vi) Coating for Mild Steel parts in contact with Water
All mild Steel parts coming in contact with water or water vapour shall be hot dip
galvanised. The Minimum Coating of zinc shall be 610 gms/ Sq. M. for galvanised
Structures and shall comply with IS: 4759 and other relevant Codes. Galvanising
shall be checked and tested in accordance with IS: 2629.
OR
All mild steel parts coming in contact with water or water vapour shall be pointed
with sealed sprayed zinc coating, conforming to BS:5493 (Table -3, part-8) for
very long (20 or more) years of maintenance interval.
vii) Gratings
All gratings shall be blast cleaned to Sa 2 ½ finish of Swedish standard SIS–05-

5900 and shall be hot dip galvanised at the rate of 610 gms / Sq.M.
viii) Hand Railings and Ladders
All handrails and ladders shall be galvanised at the rate of 610 gms / Sq.M as per
IS: 4736.
10.02.00 RCC Members (Superstructure)
The following preventive measures are required to be adopted by the bidder as

minimum requirement.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
i) For Indoor RCC Members
a) Dense and durable concrete is to be used. Minimum grade of concrete shall

be M25.
b) Water/ cement ratio shall generally be restricted to 0.5. Plasticizer, if required

may be used.
ii) For Outdoor (or exposed) RCC Members

a) Dense and durable concrete is to be used. Minimum grade of concrete shall
be M25.
b) Water/ cement ratio shall generally be restricted to 0.5. Plasticizer, if required
may be used.
10.03.00 RCC Members (Underground Sub-Soil Condition)
The type of corrosion protection measures for concrete reinforcement steel and
structural steel for under ground structures/ facilities shall be as specified elsewhere
in specification.
Protective measures shall be according to Geotechnical investigation and foundation

system. In addition Water/ cement ratio shall generally be restricted to 0.45.
11.00.00 FINISHING SCHEDULE
Floor finish, skirting, wall finish, dado:
11.01.00 Floor Finish:
The nominal thickness of floor finish shall be 50 mm.

a) Floors of Office rooms, Conference Rooms, PLC Room, BPU/BCU/SAS and
all AC areas shall be finished with minimum 9.5mm thick vitrified ceramic tiles
(polished finish ) of approved make and colour shade (50% premium colours
and 50% non-premium colours) and of 600mm x 600 mm size.
b) Suitable supporting arrangement shall be provided with M.S. angles /

channels on cable trenches in MCC and Substation/Switchgear/PLC rooms
for mounting Control panels / MCC.
c) Well polished 18mm thick Rajnagar Marble stone flooring shall be provided
for staircases, passages, lobbies and general circulation areas.
d) Toilets, laboratory and pantries shall be provide with 300mm x 300mm x 7mm
(minimum) heavy duty ceramic tile flooring and 300mm x 200mm x 7mm
(minimum) designer ceramic tile up to 2.2 m height.
e) IPS (Cement concrete flooring) with concrete hardener topping shall be

provided in rest of the other areas.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
f) Floors and sides of under ground RCC structures like valve pits, trenches and
tanks shall have simultaneous (integral) neat cement finish at the time of
concreting.
g) Skirting shall be minimum 150 mm high and shall match with floor finish. All
structural steel work including shutters shall be painted as specified
elsewhere in the specifications.
h) The colour scheme of various finishes shall be subject to the approval of the
Employer.
l) Battery room shall be provided with acid /alkali resistant tile flooring.
11.02.00 Internal Wall Finish
All paints shall be with low VOC content conforming to GRIHA rating for reduction of
VOC content of approved colour, shade and make.
Testing Lab, Conference Room, BPU/BCU/PLCC, PLC Rooms and Air-conditioned
areas shall be applied with minimum 2 coats of acrylic emulsion paint over 2mm of
polymer based water resistant putty (wall putty).
All other areas shall be applied with minimum 2 coats of acrylic distemper.
Toilet, Pantry / Kitchen & Testing lab areas shall have dado with minimum 7mm thick
ceramic tiles 300x200mm (matt finish) up to 2.2 m height and shall match with floor
finish. Above dado, Acrylic distemper shall be applied.
Battery room areas coming in contact with chlorine fumes or acid / alkali shall have
acid alkali resistant epoxy finish up to 1.2 m height, with chemical resistant
chlorinated rubber paint above on wall and ceiling.
The paint shall be of approved colour shade and make.
11.03.00 External Wall Finish
Premium Acrylic Smooth Exterior Paint with silicone additives shall be provided on
external wall surfaces. The paint should be applied in minimum 2 coats @ 1.43
litre/10 sqm over and including priming coat of exterior primer applied @ 2.20 kg/10
sqm, on new plastered surfaces inclusive of all required tools, material, scaffolding
and other painting accessories etc. The paint shall be applied as per the
manufacturer's specifications and instructions and to the entire satisfaction of
engineer-in-charge. The paint shall have excellend water repelling property.
Toe wall of chain link fencing shall be finished with two coats of water proof cement
paint of required shade and color.
11.04.00 Ceiling Finish
Ceiling shall have Three ( 3 ) coats of Acrylic distemper.

11.05.00 Flooring
11.05.01 The nominal total thickness of floor finish shall be 50mm i.e. underbed & topping. The
floor shall be laid on an already laid and matured concrete base and the tiles/stones

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
shall be laid with minimum 20mm thick 1:4 cement sand mortar. The underbed for
floors and similar horizontal surfaces shall consist of cement concrete (1 part cement,
2 part sand and 4 part stone chips by volume), Stone chips shall be 12.5mm down
well graded.
11.05.02 Sunken RCC slab shall be provided in false flooring area and toilet area so as to
keep the finished floor level of these areas same as that of the surrounding area.
11.05.03 Wherever specified concrete hardener topping shall be 12mm thick using uniformly
graded iron particles, properly treated.
11.05.04 Wherever specified Heavy duty ceramic tiles of size 300x300x7 mm thick (minimum)
of reputed manufacturer of approved finish shade and colour to be used.
11.05.05 Skirting in general shall be 150mm high, Dado in toilet shall be upto specified height
from finished floor level. Skirting and Dado shall match with the floor finish. For fixing
wall tiles, on vertical faces (in wall lining, facing, skirting etc.), 1:3 cement sand
mortar shall be used.
11.05.06 Paving
a) RCC paving in buildings shall be minimum 150mm thick of grade M15

(Minimum), with minimum reinforcement of 8 dia (HYSD) bars @ 200 c/c
bothways, top & bottom, over an underbed as specified herein and shall be
provided for areas mentioned below. The underbed shall consist of
preparation and consolidation of subgrade to the required level, laying of
stone soling of 225mm compacted thickness with 63mm and down aggregate
with interstices filled with selected sand followed by 75mm thick M-10 PCC (1
part cement, 4 parts sand and 8 parts stone aggregate) with 40 mm nominal
size aggregate.
b) PCC paving of nominal M-15 (1 part cement: 2 parts sand: 4 parts aggregate)
100mm thick laid over 75mm thick bed of dry brick aggregate shall be
provided for 750mm wide plinth protection around buildings.
11.05.07 Plinth level of all buildings shall be kept at least 500 mm above the finished grade/
formation level.
11.06.00 Roof
11.06.01 Roof of switchyard control room building shall have cast - in - situ RCC slab.
11.06.02 For efficient disposal of rain water, the run off gradient for the roof shall not be less
than 1:100. This gradient can be provided either in structure or subsequently by
screed concrete M-15 (using 12.5 mm coarse aggregate) and/ or cement mortar
(1:4). However, minimum 25 mm thick cement mortar (1:4) shall be provided on top
to achieve smooth surface before application of roof treatment. Rain water gutters
shall be provided as per requirement.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
11.06.03 Roof water proofing treatment shall be provided using high solid content liquid
applied elastomeric water proofing membrane with separate wearing course as per
ASTM C - 898. Thickness of the membrane shall be 1.5 mm. This treatment shall
include application of polymerised mastic over the roof to achieve smooth surface
and primer coat. Wearing course on the top of membrane shall consist of 25 mm
thick PCC (M-15) cast in panels of maximum 1.2.x1.2m size and reinforced with 0.55
mm dia. galvanised chicken wire mesh and sealing of joints using sealing compound/
elastomeric water proofing membrane. Pathways for handling of materials and
movement of personnel shall be provided with 22 mm thick chequered cement
concrete tiles as per IS: 13801 for width of 1000 mm Slope of the roof shall not be
less 1 in 100.
11.06.04 Medium class galvanised mild steel pipes conforming to IS: 1239/ IS: 3589 with
welded joints shall be provided for rain water down comers to drain off rain water
from the roof. These shall be suitably concealed with masonry work or sheeting, to
match with the exterior finish. The number and size of downcomers shall be
governed by IS: 1742 and IS: 2527. RCC roof shall be provided with 45 x 45 cm size
Khurras having minimum thickness of 30 mm with M-15 concrete over PVC sheet of
1mx1mx400micron and finished with 12 mm thick cement sand plaster 1:3.
11.06.05 The rainwater down comers shall be provided with suitable C.I. grating at inlet point.
11.06.06 RCC parapet wall of minimum 900 mm height for all accessible roofs and 600 mm
height for all non - accessible roofs shall be provided.
11.06.07 Roof of the bulding shall be provided with access through cage ladder.
11.06.08 Fillets at junction of roof and vertical walls shall be provided with cast - in - situ
cement concrete (M-15) nominal mix followed by 12 mm thick 1:4 cement sand
plaster.
11.07.00 Walls
11.07.01 All external walls shall be minimum 230 mm thick using bricks of minimum class
designation 7.5. Partition walls shall be 115 mm thick using bricks of minimum class
designation 75 and shall be provided with reinforcement consisting of 2 numbers of 8
mm dia. HYSD bars at every fourth layer. RCC transoms and mullions of size
115x115mm with suitable reinforcement shall be provided wherever necessary to
reinforce the brickwork. Thickness of brick encasement shall be minimum 230mm.
11.07.02 50 mm thick DPC in Cement concrete (M-20) with water proofing compound followed
by two layers of bitumen coating 85/ 25 grade as per IS: 702 @ 1.7 kg/ sq.m. shall be
provided at plinth level before starting the masonry work.
11.07.03 The bricks used shall be of minimum class designation 7.5. The bricks shall be laid
with cement mortar (1:6) for one brick thick walls and (1:4) for half brick thick walls
IS: 1905, IS: 2212 and SP-20 shall be followed for brick work design and
construction.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
11.08.00 Plastering
11.08.01 Outer face (i.e., rough side) of all brick walls shall have 18 mm thick and inner face
(i.e., smooth side) of all brick works shall have 12 mm thick cement sand plaster 1:6.
11.08.02 Wherever specified the water resistant putty (wall putty) shall be provided as
plastered on exposed concrete surface to give an even and smooth finish. The finish
surface shall be smooth and shall be of 2 mm nominal thickness.
11.08.03 All exposed faces of R.C.C. walls of buildings shall have minimum 12 mm thick
cement sand plaster 1:6.
11.08.04 All RCC ceilings (except areas provided with false ceilings and cable vault ceiling)
shall be provided with 6 mm thick cement sand plaster 1:4.
11.08.05 All plastering work shall conform to IS: 1661.
11.08.06 Parapets, chajjas, window / door heads, architectural facias, fins etc., shall be
provided with drip course in cement mortar ( 1 : 3 ).
11.09.00 Painting
11.09.01 All painting on masonry or concrete surface shall preferably be applied by roller. If
applied by brush then same be finished off with roller.
11.09.02 All paints shall be of approved make including chemical resistant chlorinated rubber
paint.
11.09.03 Minimum two finishing coats of paint shall be applied over a coat of primer.
11.09.04 Acrylic emulsion paint shall be as per IS: 5411 (Part - 1). Acrylic distemper shall be
as per IS: 428 -2000.
11.09.05 For painting on concrete, masonry and plastered & surface, IS: 2395 shall be
followed. For painting on steel work and ferrous metals, IS: 1477 shall be followed.
For painting on wood work IS: 2338 shall be followed.
11.10.00 Doors & Windows
11.10.01 Adequate Doors, Windows, Louvers and Ventilators shall be provided for proper
lighting and ventilation of all buildings. The area of windows shall be at least 10% of
the floor area of the respective building. In addition to the above, wherever room
height is more than 3.5 m, a band of ventilators of 600 mm height (minimum) shall be
provided at the top.
11.10.02 Unless specified all doors, windows and ventilators of air conditioned areas, entrance
lobby of all buildings and windows / ventilators provided on the outer face of all
buildings shall have electro colour coated (anodised) aluminium frame work with
glazing. All doors of toilet areas shall have prelaminated solid core wood shutter with
pressed steel frames. All doors of office and A/C areas shall be of aluminium frame
work with fixed glass.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
11.10.03 All windows on ground floor shall be provided with anodized aluminium grill of
approved design
11.10.04 All steel doors shall consist of double plate flush door shutters. The door shutter shall
be 45 mm thick with two outer sheets of 18 G rigidly connected with continuous
vertical 20 G stiffeners at the rate of 150 mm centre to centre. Side, top and bottom
edges of shutters shall be reinforced by continuous pressed steel channel with
minimum 18 G. The door shall be sound deadened by filling the inside void with
mineral wool. Doors shall be complete with all hardware and fixtures like door closer,
tower bolts, handles, stoppers, aldrops, etc.
11.10.05 Wherever functionally required, rolling shutters of suitable size approved by the
Employer, with suitable operating arrangement manual/geared/electric shall be
provided to facilitate smooth operations. Rolling shutters shall conform to IS: 6248.
11.10.06 Fire proof doors with panic devices shall be provided at all fire exit points. These
doors shall generally be as per IS: 3614 (Part – II). Fire rating of the doors shall be
minimum 2 hours. These doors shall be double cover plated type with mineral wool
insulation.
11.10.07 Hollow excluded Section of minimum 2 mm wall thickness as manufactured by

INDAL or equivalent shall be used for all aluminum doors, windows and ventilators.
11.11.00 Glazing
11.11.01 Tinted glass of minimum 6 mm thickness shall be used for all windows/ ventilators in
toilets.
11.11.02 Unless specified otherwise in this specification minimum thickness of plain float glass
used for windows shall be 6 mm. All ventilators and fixed glazing above 3.5 m height
shall have 6 mm thick toughened glass.
11.11.03 Float glass or flat transparent sheet glass shall conform to IS: 2835.
11.11.04 All glazing work shall conform to IS: 1083 and IS: 3548.
11.11.05 The door and window frames shall be suitable for glazing. Aluminium doors and
partitions shall be provided with minimum 8.0mm thick toughened glass glazing. All
accessible windows and ventilators shall be provided with minimum 4mm thick clear
float glass glazing. However windows in toilet areas shall have 6mm thick tinted glass
glazing. All doors /windows in A/C areas of building coming in interior shall have
hermetically sealed, composite double glazing 6mm tinted glass on outer face and
6mm plain glass on inner face, separated by 12mm air gap. All doors /windows in
A/C areas of building coming in exterior shall have Composite double glazing, 24mm
thick consisting of 6mm thick clear float glass on inner side and 6mm thick reflective
toughened glass on outer side. The two glasses shall be separated by 12mm air-gap
and hermatically sealed by beading of anodized aluminium with outer edge sealed

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
with silicon sealant. Composite double glazing shall have following technical
characteristics: Solar factor 25% or less, U-value less than 1.6 W/ SQMK,VLT min
40%: The glass to be used should be from the manufacturers of glass like Asahi
(India), Saint Gobain (India) or equivalent. The glass should be free from distortion
and thermal stress.
11.11.06 Doors and windows on external walls shall be provided with sunshade over the
openings with width 300 mm more than the opening width. The projection from the
finished face of the wall for sunshade shall generally be 450 mm over window
openings, 600 mm over door openings and 750 mm over Rolling shutter openings or
as decided and approved by the Engineer.
11.12.00 False Ceiling
11.12.01 Wherever required, 15 mm thick Mineral Fiber Board false ceiling shall be provided
with in flat shape. The false ceiling shall include all necessary suspension
arrangement with height adjustment clips from RCC slab as per manufacturer’s
recommendations. The false ceiling shall be finished in all respects including the
cutouts for lighting fixtures. Minimum headroom below false ceiling shall be 2.7 m.
11.12.02 Under - deck insulation shall be provided on the ceiling (underside of roof slab) and
underside of floor slab of air - conditioned areas and AHU room depending upon the
functional / air - conditioning requirements. The under - deck insulation shall consist
of 50 mm thick mineral wool insulation conforming to IS : 8183 backed with 0.05 mm
thick aluminium foil & 24 G x 25 mm mesh wire netting and shall be fixed to ceiling
with 24 G wire ties.
11.13.00 WATER SUPPLY AND SANITATION
11.13.01 Polyethylene water storage tank conforming to IS: 12701 shall be provided (for the
use of toilet) over the roof, with adequate capacity depending on the number of users
and 8 hours requirement complete with all fittings including float valve, stop cock etc.
The capacity of tank shall be minimum 500 litres.
11.13.02 Galvanised MS pipe of medium class conforming to IS: 1239 shall be used for
internal piping works for potable water supply.
11.13.03 Sand C.I. pipes with lead joints conforming to IS: 1729 shall be used for sanitary
works above ground level.
11.13.04 The facilities provided in the toilet block shall depend on the number of users.
However, minimum facilities to be provided shall be as stipulated below. IS: 1172
shall be followed for working out the basic requirements for water supply, drainage
and sanitation. In addition, IS: 2064 and IS: 2065 shall be also be followed. Sewage
system for switch yard area and connecting to Employer's nearest sewage supply
line located at nearby area shall be provided.
11.13.05 Each gents toilet block shall have:

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
a) European water closet with all fittings including photo-voltaic control flushing
arrangement of appropriate capacity and type -- 1 No.
b) Urinal with all fittings with photo voltaic control flushing system as per IS:
2556 (Part - 6, Sec. - 1) -- 1 No.
Conference toilet block shall have European WC as per IS with all fittings including
photo-voltaic control flushing arrangement of appropriate capacity and type -- 1 No.
Ladies toilet block shall have European water closet with all fittings including photo-
voltaic control flushing arrangement of appropriate capacity and type – 1 No
One toilet block with all required fittings shall also be provided as per NBC for
physically challenged persons
11.13.06 In addition to the above, following minimum facilities shall also be provided in each
toilet block:
a) Wash basin ( oval shape ) with all fittings including photo-voltaic control
system as per IS: 2556 to be fixed on concrete platform finished with 18 mm
thick polished granite stone -- 1 nos.
b) Wall to wall Bathroom mirror (6 mm thick float glass) with bevelled edges
including all fittings.
c) Stainless steel towel rail (600 x 20 mm) -- 1 No.
d) Stainless steel liquid soap holder cum dispenser -- 2 Nos
11.13.07 Provision for installation of drinking water facility and janitor room shall be provided in
each floor.
11.13.08 Unless specified all the fittings shall be of chromium plated brass (fancy type).
11.13.09 Cement concrete pipes of class NP-3 as per IS: 458 shall be used below ground
level for sewage disposal. However, for pressure pipes, spun C.I. pipes conforming
to IS:1536 of required class shall be used.
11.13.10 RCC manholes with CI cover shall be provided at every 30m along the length, at
connection points, and at every change of alignment, gradient or diameter of a sewer
pipeline. This shall be as per IS: 4111 (Part 1).
11.13.11 Sunken RCC slab shall be provided in toilet area at upper storey so as to keep the
floor level same as that of the surrounding area.
12.00.00 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIFICATIONS
12.01.00 Two - part polysulphide sealant conforming to IS: 12118 shall be used for sealing of
joints.
12.02.00 Preformed bitumen impregnated fibre board conforming to IS: 1838 shall be used as
joint filler.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
12.03.00 Monorails, monorail girders and fixtures shall be provided, wherever required to
facilitate erection/ maintenance of equipment.
12.04.00 In design of all buildings fire safety requirements conforming to IS: 1641 and IS: 1642
shall be followed in addition to TAC requirements. The height of RCC fire protection
wall between transformers shall be as per system requirement.
12.05.00 MS Angles of minimum size 50 x 50 x 6 mm with 8mm dia - 150mm Long MS lugs @
150mm c / c shall be provided for edge protection around all cutouts / openings in
floor slabs / walls, edges of indoor cable trenches, pits, manholes and any other
place where breakage of corners of concrete is expected.
12.06.00 Grouting of all pockets, blockouts, sleeves and the openings around the embedment,
inserts, bolts etc. and under pinning below the base / sole plate shall be with non -
shrink flowable grout. Grade of grout shall be one grade higher than concrete.
However minimum grade of grout shall be M - 30.
12.07.00 Peripheral drains around building shall have perforated precast RCC covers of
minimum 50mm thickness with provision of openable steel grating cover at about
4.0m interval. In areas where vehicular loads would be coming precast RCC covers
of suitable thickness without perforations and designed for the vehicular loading shall
be provided.
12.08.00 Anti termite chemical treatment shall be given to all vulnerable areas susceptible to
termite including column pits, wall trenches, foundations of buildings, filling below the
floors etc. as per IS: 6313 and other relevant Indian Standards.
12.09.00 Wherever possible minimum 900 mm high hand railing shall be provided around all
floor/ roof openings, projections/ balconies, platforms, walkways etc. All handrails
and ladder pipes shall be 32 mm nominal bore MS pipes (medium class) conforming
to IS: 1161 and shall be galvanised as per IS: 4736 and IS: 1239. All rungs and
ladders shall also be galvanised. Minimum weight of galvanising shall be 610g/ sq.m.
12.10.00 Suitable arrangement for draining out water collected from floor washings, fire
fighting etc. shall be provided for each floor with suitable floor drains.
12.11.00 Duct banks consisting of PVC conduits for cables shall be provided with proper
sealing arrangement consisting of fire retardant sealing compound.
12.12.00 All buildings shall be provided with peripheral drains by the side of plinth protection
for catering to the rain water from roofs and storm water from adjacent area.
12.13.00 Non - shrink flowable grout shall be used for under - pinning work below base plates.
Nominal thickness of grout shall be 50 mm. Non - shrink cum plasticizer admixture
shall be added in the grout. Crushing strength of the grout shall generally be one
grade higher than that of the base concrete. Minimum grade of grout shall be M-30.
12.14.00 Suitable expansion joints shall be provided in the longitudinal direction wherever
necessary with provision of twin columns.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
12.15.00 The building auxiliary services like air conditioning and ventilation systems, fire
protection and detection systems and all other miscellaneous services shall be
designed in accordance with the requirements specified in relevant section or
elsewhere in this Specification.
12.16.00 The building lighting shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of
relevant section.
12.17.00 Plywood formwork shall be used for all concrete works
12.18.00 Water supply line and drainage of buildings shall be connected to the drainage
network
12.19.00 Design, construction and joints of all the structures shall be as per relevant Indian
Standard Codes unless specified otherwise.
12.20.00 All foundation embedments, inserts, blockouts required for mounting of equipments
and supporting any other facility like pipes etc. shall be provided.
12.21.00 All cable trenches shall be provided with suitable insert plates for fixing support
angles of cable trays.
12.22.00 All internal cable trenches shall have minimum 6mm thick (o / p) chequered plate
covers while external cable trenches shall have pre - cast RCC covers. However, the
portion of the cable trench behind and sides of control panel / MCC shall be provided
with suitable chequered plate covers as directed by the Engineer.
12.23.00 Earthing mat shall be provided around buildings and structures as per specifications /
approved drawings.
12.24.00 Detailed scheme for dewatering shall be prepared before starting of deep excavation
work. IS: 9758 shall be followed as general guidance for dewatering.
12.25.00 Broad gauge rail (52kg/m minimum) shall be used for rail tracks required for
movement of ICT/Shunt Reactor.
13.00.00 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE
13.01.00 Structural concrete shall be of design mix complying with the relevant provisions of IS
Codes or any International Code of Practice as approved by the Employer. All
concreting shall be carried out using centralized batching plant, transit mixers and
concrete pumps. Numbers and capacity of batching plant, transit mixers and
concrete pumps to be deployed by the bidder to achieve the required progress of
work shall be specified in the relevant schedules of the bid documents.
13.02.00 Minimum grade of structural concrete shall be M25 as follows conforming to IS: 456:
Blinding concrete below foundations, cable trenches shall be 75mm thick PCC of
minimum grade M-7.5 and under brick foundations minimum 150mm thick PCC of
minimum grade M-10.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
13.03.00 Coarse and fine aggregates shall be specially selected to ensure that they are not
susceptible to alkali/ chloride attack or prone to disintegration at high temperatures.
The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be larger than 1/8th of narrowest
dimension between reinforcement bars nor more than 20 mm.
13.04.00 Washing and screening of coarse and fine aggregates to remove fines, dirt of other
deleterious materials shall be carried out by approved means if desired by the
Employer.
13.06.00 The maximum water cement ratio by weight shall be 0.45 or 0.50 as specified
elsewhere, including moisture in the aggregates, and slump should be suitably
decided to provide good quality concrete work, as specified elsewhere in the
specification.
13.07.00 Admixture
Admixtures may be permitted to be used in accordance with relevant IS codes to

modify the rate of hardening or setting, to improve workability or as an aid to control
concrete quality. The Employer reserves the right to direct the Bidder to conduct
laboratory tests or use test data, or other satisfactory reference before granting
approval. The cost of all tests conducted shall be borne by the Bidder. The admixture
shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions and/ or as
directed by the Employer. No extra payment will be made to the Bidder on account of
using admixtures.
13.08.00 Removal of air and water at the form surface shall be by vibration and rodding.
Particular attention shall be paid to accurately shape the corners at the openings.
13.09.00 Point of discharge of the concrete in to the forms shall be 1500 mm above the
concrete surface. Concrete shall be deposited in layers of approximately uniform
level not greater than 400 mm deep unless permitted otherwise.
13.10.00 Sampling and testing of concrete shall be carried out as stated elsewhere in this
Technical Specification and as per relevant Indian Standard Codes.
13.11.00 Cover to Reinforcement
Unless indicated otherwise the clear concrete cover for reinforcement shall be as per
IS Codes.
The correct cover shall be maintained by cement mortar cubes or other approved
means. Reinforcement for footings/ pile caps, grade beam, and slabs on subgrade
shall be supported on precast concrete cover block as approved by Employer. The
use of pebbles or stones as cover blocks shall not be permitted.
13.12.00 The 28 days crushing strength of cement mortar cubes/ precast concrete cover block
shall be atleast equal to the specified strength of concrete in which the cubes/ blocks
are embedded.
13.13.00 The minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with IS:
456 (Latest edition) or as specified elsewhere in this specification.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
13.14.00 All lapping of reinforcement bars shall be by lapping as per relevant codal provisions.
Prior approval of the Employer shall be taken for deciding the method of lapping the
reinforcement bars.
14.00.00 MATERIALS
14.01.00 Cement
Ordinary portland cement of Grade 43 conforming to IS : 8112 or fly ash based

portland pozzolana cement conforming to (IS : 1489 Part -1) with minimum 28 days
compressive strength of 43N/mm2 shall be used for all concrete construction.
However, in place of fly ash based portland pozzolana cement, OPC mixed with fly
ash can be used. Batching plant shall have facility for mixing fly ash. Fly ash shall
conform to IS 3812 (Part I & Part II). Percentage of fly ash to be mixed in concrete
shall be based on trial mix. Mix design shall be done with varying percentage of fly
ash with cement.
14.02.00 Aggregates
a) Coarse aggregate - Coarse aggregate for concrete shall be chemically inert,

hard, strong durable against weathering, of limited porosity and free from
deleterious materials. It shall be properly graded. It shall meet the
requirements of IS: 383.
b) Sand - Sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings of
organic matter and clay balls or pellets. Sand, when used as fine aggregate in
concrete shall conform to IS: 383. For plaster, it shall conform to IS: 1542 and
for masonry work to IS: 2116.
14.03.00 Reinforcement Steel
All reinforcement bars shall be TMT (Thermo Mechanically Treated) of grade Fe 500
conforming to IS: 1786 with minimum percentage elongation of 14.5 %.
Mild steel & medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire shall conform to
grade - 1 of IS: 432 (Part - I). Welded wire fabric shall conform to IS: 1566.
14.04.00 Structural Steel
Structural steel (including embedded steel) shall be straight, sound, free from twists,
cracks, flaw, laminations and all other defects. Quality of Rolled Structural Steel
sections shall be ‘BR’ with impact test for grades of E250 & E275. Quality of steel
plate sections shall be ‘B0’ for grades E300 and above. Structural Steel Rolled
Sections shall be semi-killed/killed and Structural Steel plates of all grades shall be
fully killed. Rolled sections shall be supplied in “As Rolled” condition. Plates less than
and including 12 mm thickness shall be supplied in ‘as rolled’ condition. Plates above
12mm and less than 40mm thickness shall be supplied in ‘normalised rolled’
condition. Plates of 40mm and above thickness shall be supplied in ‘vacuum
degassed’, ‘furnace normalised’ condition, and additionally shall be 100%
ultrasonically tested as per ASTM A578 Level-B-S2. All plates shall be supplied with

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
trimmed edges. Chequered plate shall conform to IS: 3502 and IS: 2062 and pipes
for hand rail shall conform to medium grade IS: 1161.
All gratings shall be pressure locked/ electroforged. Minimum thickness of the grating
shall be 40mm. The opening size shall not be more than 30mm x 100mm.The
minimum thickness of the main bearing bar shall be 3mm. All gratings located inside
the building shall be sand blasted and provided with two coats of suitable primer and
two coats of finish paint( black colour ) as per approved painting system. All gratings
located outside the building shall be hot double dip galvanised at the rate of 610 gms
/ Sq. M. Supply of all structural steel shall be in Bidder’s scope.
14.05.00 Bricks
Bricks shall be table moulded/ machine made of uniform size, shape and sharp
edges and shall have minimum compressive strength of 75 kg/cm2. Burnt clay fly ash
bricks and fly ash lime bricks shall conform to IS:13757 and IS:12894 respectively.
Minimum fly ash content in fly ash based bricks shall be minimum 25%. Common
burnt clay bricks shall conform to IS: 1077.
14.06.00 Water
Water used for cement concrete, mortar, plaster, grout, washing of coarse aggregate,
soaking of bricks, etc., shall be clean and free from oil, acids, alkalis, organic matters
or other harmful substances in such amounts that may impair the strength or
durability of the structure. Potable water shall generally be considered satisfactory for
all masonry and concrete works, including curing. The Bidder shall carry out
necessary tests in advance to prove the suitability of the water proposed to be used.
When water from the proposed sources is used for making the concrete, the
maximum permissible impurities, development of strength and initial setting time of
concrete shall meet the requirements of IS: 456.
15.00.00 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
15.01.00 Bidder shall comply with all the applicable statutory rules pertaining to Factories Act
(as applicable for the relevant state), Fire Safety Rules of Tariff Advisory Committee,
Water Act for pollution control, Explosives Act, etc.
15.02.00 Provisions of safety, health and welfare according to Factories Act shall be complied
with. These shall include provision of continuous walkway of minimum 500mm wide
along the crane - girder level on both sides of building/ pump house, comfortable
approach to EOT crane cabin, railing, fire escape, toilets, etc.
15.03.00 Statutory clearances and norms of State Pollution Control Board shall be followed.
15.04.00 Bidder shall obtain approval of Civil/Architectural drawings from concerned

authorities before taking up the construction work.
16.00.00 GEOTECHNICAL DATA & FOUNDATION SYSTEM
Geotechnical data and Foundation system to be adopted for switchyard area shall be
as per the details given in Chapter C1.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
For reference codes and standards, refer APPENDIX-I of this Sub-section.
17.00.00 TESTS FOR MATERIAL / WORKMANSHIP
All tests required for various bought out items, materials, quality of workmanship or
any other tests as desired by Project Manager and as specified in technical
specification shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own cost in the presence of
the authorised representative of the Engineer.
The quality assurance check lists are given separately in respective chapters /
sections of this specification. The Contractor shall submit comprehensive Quality
Assurance plan for all materials, equipment, workmanship, services etc. and get it
approved from the Engineer. This shall include setting up a test laboratory at site.
However, such check list shall in no way limit the liability and responsibility of the
Contractor in regard to quality of workmanship as detailed out in the specifications.
18.00.00 DRAWINGS
The successful Bidder shall first submit the structural design calculations along with
general arrangement drawings for approval. After the approval of the design
calculations by the Owner, detailed construction drawings shall be prepared and

submitted for Owner’s approval along with revised design calculations, if required,
within 15 days. Required number of sets of design calculations, drawings and
documents shall be submitted by the Contractor. All documents including design
calculations shall be prepared in MS office and all drawings shall be drafted using
AutoCAD (Release - 2000 or higher version). During every submission one soft copy
of the document shall also be submitted. When final approval is obtained from the
Employer the Contractor shall submit all the documents in TWO sets of CD ROM (
One + One Back - up ) together with minimum three sets of distribution prints well
documented and page controlled with details of Employer’s approval marked
thereon. Approval of drawings / documents shall not relieve the contractor of the
responsibility regarding the adequacy of design and correctness of drawings.
19.00.00 ALTERATION IN SPECIFICATION AND DESIGN
The Project Manager shall have the power to make any alteration and omissions
from, additions to or substitution for, the original specifications, drawings, designs
and instructions that may appear to him to be necessary during the progress of the
work, and the Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with any instruction
which may be given to him in writing signed by the Project Manager and such
alterations, omissions, additions or substitutions shall not invalidate the contract and
any altered, added or substituted work which the Contractor may be directed to do in
the manner above specified as part of the work shall be carried out by the Contractor
on the same conditions in all respects on which the Contractor agreed to do the
original contract work. The time for completion of work shall be altered in the
proportion that the altered, added or substituted work bears to the original contract

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
work, and the certificate of the Project Manager shall be conclusive as to such
proportion.
The rates for the altered items of work shall be worked out on the following basis and
necessary alternations in the total amount shall be made on that basis:
(d.) The rates to be reimbursed or recovered shall be taken as same as those given
in CPWD - DSR (latest) for those items for which the rates are available in
CPWD - DSR (latest). However, the premium as officially declared by CPWD’s
official circulars, at the time of carrying out these works, the same shall also be
applicable.
(e.) Rates for the items not covered under CPWD - DSR (latest) shall be derived
from the rates of similar items of CPWD schedule of rates. However, the
premium as officially declared by CPWD on the above DSR rates if existing or
prevalent through CPWD’s official circulars, at the time of carrying out these
works, the same shall be applicable.
(f.) In the event there is no similar class of work specified in the CPWD - DSR
(latest) the Contractor shall work on a rate for such an item on the basis of the
prevalent market rates for materials / men / machines and submit the same
together with the detailed analysis to the Project Manager with in 7 days. The
Project Manager shall thereafter review the correctness and then conduct
necessary negotiations with the Contractor to arrive at a mutually agreeable
rate. Engineer’s decision in regard to rates of such items shall be final and
binding on the Contractor.
In case of conflict between this chapter and other Chapters of Technical

Specifications, provisions given in this chapter shall govern.
20.00.00 Excavation in rock requiring Blasting
Wherever blasting is required, the same shall be done after obtaining license from
the competent authority. Following shall be adhered to:
i) All provisions of explosive acts shall be adhered to.
ii) The magazine for the storage of explosive shall be to suit as per the requirements
of explosive department.
iii) Where blasting is required, same shall be controlled blasting.
iv) Contractor shall prepare the detailed blasting scheme and get the same approved
from Engineer-in-charge before carrying out the blasting operation. All blasting shall
be done as per the approved blasting scheme.
v) The Contractor shall obtain Licenses from Competent Authorities for undertaking
blasting work as well as for procuring, transporting to site and storing the explosives
as per explosives act. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe transport, use,
custody and proper accounting of the explosive Materials.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
vi) The Contractor shall also observe any specific instructions given by the Engineer-
in-charge. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for any accident and injury /
damage which may occur to any person or property of the project or public on
account of any operations connected with the storage, transportation, handling or use
of explosives and the blasting operations. The Engineer-in-charge or his authorised
representative shall frequently check the Contractor's compliance with these
precautions and the manner of storing and accounting of explosives. The Contractor
shall provide necessary facilities for this the above.
vii) Controlled blasting shall be done by a specialised agency duly approved by

Engineer-in-charge. All controlled blasting shall be done by using time delay
detonators (i.e. excel type).
viii) All rules under the Explosives Act and other local rules in force shall be fully
observed. All blasting works shall be done in accordance with the stipulations
contained in IS: 4081.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
APPENDIX-I
1.01.00 All standards, specifications, acts and code of practice referred to herein shall be the
latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions.
1.02.00 In case of conflict between this specification and those (IS standards, codes etc. )
referred to here - in, the former shall prevail.
1.03.00 Some of the relevant Indian standards, Acts and Codesare referred to here below:
(a.) EXCAVATION AND FILLING

IS : 2720 ( Part - II, IV TO VIII, XIV, XXI, XXIII, XXIV, XXVII TO XXIX, XL )
Methods of test for soils - determination for water content etc.
IS : 4701 Code of practice for earth work on canals.

IS : 9758 Guide lines for Dewatering during construction
IS : 10379 Code of practice for field control of moisture and compaction
of soils for embankment and sub - grade.
(b.) PROPERTIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF COMMON BUILDING
MATERIALS
IS : 280 Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering
purposes.
IS : 456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS : 457 Code of practice for general construction of plain &

reinforced concrete for dams & other massive structures.
IS : 516 Method of test for strength of concrete.
IS : 650 Specification for standard sand for testing of cement.
IS : 1161 Specification for Steel tubes for structural purposes
IS : 1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete.
IS : 1791 General requirements for batch type concrete mixers.
IS : 1838 Specification for preformed fillers for expansion

( Part - I ) joints in concrete pavements and structures ( non - extruding
and resilient type ).
IS : 2062 Specification for Hot rolled medium and high tensile

structural steel.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
IS : 2438 Specification for roller pan mixer.
IS : 2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement.
IS : 2505 General requirements for concrete vibrators, immersion type.
IS : 2506 General requirements for concrete vibrators, screed board

type.
IS : 2514 Specification for concrete vibrating tables.
IS : 2645 Specification for Integral cement water proofing compounds.
IS : 2722 Specification for portable swing weigh batches for concrete. (

single and double bucket type )
IS : 2750 Specification for Steel scaffolding.
IS : 2751 Code of practice for welding of mild steel plain and deformed
bars for reinforced concrete construction.
IS : 3025 Methods of sampling and test waste water.
IS : 3366 Specification for Pan vibrators.
IS : 3370 ( Part I Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of
to IV ) liquids.
IS : 3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in

buildings.
IS : 3550 Methods of test for routine control for water used in industry.
IS : 3558 Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for

consolidating concrete.
IS : 4014 ( Parts I Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding.

& II )
IS : 4326 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and

construction of buildings.
IS : 4656 Specification for form vibrators for concrete.
IS : 4925 Specification for batching and mixing plant.
IS : 4990 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
IS : 5256 Code or practice for sealing joints in concrete lining on

canals.
IS : 5525 Recommendations for detailing of reinforcement in

reinforced concrete work.
IS : 5624 Specification for foundation bolts.
IS : 6461 Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete.
IS : 6494 Code of practice for water proofing of underground water

reservoirs and swimming pools.
IS : 6509 Code of practice for installation of joints in concrete

pavements.
IS : 7861 Code of practice for extreme weather concreting. ( Parts I &

II )
IS : 9012 Recommended practice for shot concreting.
IS : 9103 Specification for admixtures for concrete.
IS : 9417 Recommendations for welding cold worked steel bars for

reinforced concrete construction.
IS : 10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design.
IS : 11384 Code of practice for composite construction in structural

steel and concrete.
IS : 12118 Specification for two - parts poly sulphide.
IS : 12200 Code of practice for provision of water stops at transverse

contraction joints in masonry and concrete dams.
IS : 13311 Method of non - destructive testing of concrete.
Part - 1 Ultrasonic pulse velocity.
Part - 2 Rebound hammer.
SP : 23 Handbook of concrete mixes
SP : 24 Explanatory Handbook on IS : 456 - 1978
SP : 34 Handbook on concrete reinforcement and detailing.

(c.) CAST - IN - SITU CONCRETE AND ALLIED WORKS
IS : 280 Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
purposes.
IS : 456 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS : 457 Code of practice for general construction of plain & reinforced

concrete for dams & other massive structures.
IS : 516 Method of test for strength of concrete.
IS : 650 Specification for standard sand for testing of cement.
IS : 1199 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete.
IS : 1791 General requirements for batch type concrete mixers.
IS : 1838 Specification for preformed fillers for expansion

( Part - I ) joints in concrete pavements and structures ( non - extruding
and resilient type ).
IS : 2438 Specification for roller pan mixer.
IS : 2502 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement.
IS : 2505 General requirements for concrete vibrators, immersion type.
IS : 2506 General requirements for concrete vibrators, screed board type.
IS : 2514 Specification for concrete vibrating tables.
IS : 2645 Specification for Integral cement water proofing compounds.

IS : 2722 Specification for portable swing weigh batches for concrete.
(single and double bucket type )
IS : 2750 Specification for Steel scaffolding.
IS : 2751 Code of practice for welding of mild steel plain and deformed
bars for reinforced concrete construction.
IS : 3025 Methods of sampling and test waste water.
IS : 3366 Specification for Pan vibrators.
IS : 3370 ( Part I Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of
to IV ) liquids.
IS : 3414 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings.
IS : 3550 Methods of test for routine control for water used in industry.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
IS : 3558 Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for

consolidating concrete.
IS : 4014 ( Parts I Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding.

& II )
IS : 4326 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design and

construction of buildings.
IS : 4656 Specification for form vibrators for concrete.
IS : 4925 Specification for batching and mixing plant.
IS : 4990 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work.
IS : 5256 Code or practice for sealing joints in concrete lining on canals.
IS : 5525 Recommendations for detailing of reinforcement in reinforced

concrete work.
IS : 5624 Specification for foundation bolts.
IS : 6461 Glossary of terms relating to cement concrete.
IS : 6494 Code of practice for water proofing of underground water

reservoirs and swimming pools.
IS : 6509 Code of practice for installation of joints in concrete pavements.
IS : 7861 Code of practice for extreme weather concreting. ( Parts I & II )
IS : 9012 Recommended practice for shot concreting.
IS : 9103 Specification for admixtures for concrete.
IS : 9417 Recommendations for welding cold worked steel bars for

reinforced concrete construction.
IS : 10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design.
IS : 11384 Code of practice for composite construction in structural steel

and concrete.
IS : 12118 Specification for two - parts poly sulphide.
IS : 12200 Code of practice for provision of water stops at transverse

contraction joints in masonry and concrete dams.
IS : 13311 Method of non - destructive testing of concrete.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
Part - 1 Ultrasonic pulse velocity.
Part - 2 Rebound hammer.
SP : 23 Handbook of concrete mixes
SP : 24 Explanatory Handbook on IS : 456 - 1978
SP : 34 Handbook on concrete reinforcement and detailing.
(d.) PRECAST CONCRETE WORKS

SP : 7 National Building Code - Structural design of prefabrication
( PartVI / Sec.7 ) and systems building.
IS : 10297 Code of practice for design and construction of floors and

roofs using precast reinforced / prestressed concrete ribbed
or cored slab units.
IS : 10505 Code of practice for construction of floors and roofs using pre
- cast reinforced concrete units.
(e.) MASONRY AND ALLIED WORKS

IS : 1905 Code of Practice for Structural Safety of Buildings - Masonry
walls.
IS : 2212 Code of Practice for Brickwork.
IS : 2250 Code of Practice for Preparation and use of Masonry Mortar.
SP : 20 Explanatory hand book on masonry code.

(f.) SHEETING WORKS
IS : 277 Galvanised steel sheets ( plain or corrugated ).
IS : 459 Unreinforced corrugated and semi - corrugated asbestos

cement sheets.
IS : 513 Cold - rolled carbon steel sheets.
IS : 730 Specification for fixing accessories for corrugated sheet

roofing.
IS : 1626 Specification for Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe

fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
IS : 2527 Code of practice for fixing rain water gutters and down pipe
for roof drainage.
IS : 3007 Code of practice for laying of asbestos cement sheets.
IS : 5913 Methods of test for asbestos cement products.
IS : 7178 Technical supply conditions for tapping screw.
IS : 8183 Bonded mineral wool.
IS : 8869 Washers for corrugated sheet roofing.
IS : 12093 Code of practice for laying and fixing of sloped roof covering
using plain and corrugated galvanised steel sheets.
IS : 12866 Plastic translucent sheets made from thermosetting polyester

resin ( glass fibre reinforced ).
IS : 14246 Specification for continuously pre - painted galvanised steel
sheets and coils.
(g.) FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
IS : 2016 Specification for plain washers.
IS : 814 Specification for covered Electrodes for Metal Arc Welding for
weld steel.
IS : 1852 Specification for Rolling and Cutting Tolerances for Hot rolled
steel products.
IS : 3502 Specifications for chequered plate.
IS : 6911 Specification for stainless steel plate, sheet and strip.
IS : 3757 Specification for high strength structural bolts
IS : 6623 Specification for high strength structural nuts.
IS : 6649 High Tensile friction grip washers.
IS : 800 Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building

construction.
IS : 816 Code of practice for use of Metal Arc Welding for General
Construction.
IS : 4000 Code of practice for assembly of structural joints using high

tensile friction grip fasteners.
IS : 9595 Code of procedure of Manual Metal Arc Welding of Mild Steel.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
IS : 817 Code of practice for Training and Testing of Metal Arc

Welders.
IS : 1811 Qualifying tests for Metal Arc Welders ( engaged in welding

structures other than pipes ).
IS : 7215 Tolerances for fabrication steel structures.
IS : 12843 Tolerance for erection of structural steel.
IS : 4353 Recommendations for submerged arc welding of mild steel

and low alloy steels.
SP : 6 ( Part 1 to ISI Hand book for structural Engineers.

7)
IS : 1608 Method of Tensile Testing of Steel products other than

sheets, strip, wire and tube.
IS : 1599 Method of Bend Tests for Steel products other than sheet,
strip, wire and tube
IS : 802(1977)
Code of practice for use of Structural Steel inOver head
Transmission Line Towers.
IS : 228 Methods of chemical Analysis of pig iron, cast iron and plain
carbon and low alloy steel.
IS : 2595 Code of Practice for Radio graphic testing.
IS : 1182 Recommended practice for Radiographic Examination of

fusion welded butt joints in steel plates.
IS : 3664 Code of practice for Ultra sonic Testing by pulse echo

method.
IS : 3613 Acceptance tests for wire flux combination for submerged Arc
Welding.
IS : 3658 Code of practice for Liquid penetrant Flaw Detection.
IS : 5334 Code of practice for Magnetic Particle Flaw Detection of

Welds.
IS : 2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron and

steel
IS : 4759 Specification for Hot-dip zinc coatings on structural steel and

other allied products.
(h.) PLASTERING AND ALLIED WORKS

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
IS : 1635 Code of practice for field slaking of Building lime and

preparation of putty.
IS : 1661 Application of cement and cement lime plaster finishes.
IS : 2333 Plaster - of - paris.
IS : 2402 Code of practice for external rendered finishes.
IS : 2547 Gypsum building plaster.
IS : 3150 Hexagonal wire netting for general purpose.

(i.) WATER SUPPLY, DRAINAGE AND SANITATION
IS : 458 Specification for concrete pipes.
IS : 554 Dimensions for pipe threads, where pressure tight joints are
made on thread.
IS : 651 Specification for salt glazed stoneware pipes.
IS : 774 Flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals.
IS : 775 Cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and sinks.
IS : 778 Copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for water works
purposes.
IS : 781 Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves for
water services.
IS : 782 Caulking lead.
IS : 783 Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes.
IS : 1172 Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation.
IS : 1230 Cast iron rain water pipes and fittings.
IS : 1239 Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings.
IS : 1536 Centrifugally cast ( Spun ) iron pressure pipes for water, gas
and sewage.
IS : 1537 Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
IS : 1538 Cast iron fittings for pressure pipe for water, gas and sewage.
IS : 1703 Ball valves ( horizontal plunger type ) including float for water
supply purposes.
IS : 1726 Cast iron manhole covers and frames.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
IS : 1729 Sand cast iron spigot and socket, soil, water and ventilating
pipes, fittings and accessories.
IS : 1742 Code of practice for building drainage.
IS : 1795 Pillar taps for water supply purposes.
IS : 1879 Malleable cast iron pipe fittings.
IS : 2064 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of

sanitary appliances.
IS : 2065 Code of practice for water supply in building.
IS : 2326 Automatic flushing cisterns for urinals.
IS : 2470 ( Part - I Code of practice for installation of septic tanks.

& II )
IS : 2501 Copper tubes for general engineering purposes.
IS : 2548 Plastic seat and cover for water - closets.
IS : 2556 ( Part 1 Vitreous sanitary appliances ( vitreous china ).

to 15 )
IS : 2963 Non - ferrous waste fittings for wash basins and sinks.
IS : 3114 Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes.
IS : 3311 Waste plug and its accessories for sinks and wash basins.
IS : 3438 Silvered glass mirrors for general purposes.
IS : 3486 Cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes.
IS : 3589 Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (
200mm to 2000mm nominal diameter ).
IS : 3989 Centrifugally cast ( Spun ) iron spigot and socket soil, waste
and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories.
IS : 4111 ( Part I Code of practice for ancillary structure in sewerage system.

to IV )
IS : 4127 Code of practice for laying of glazed stone - ware pipes.
IS : 4764 Tolerance limits for sewage effluents discharged into inland -

surface waters.
IS : 4827 Electro plated coating of nickel and chromium on copper and

copper alloys.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
IS : 5329 Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for
buildings.
IS : 5382 Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers.
IS : 5822 Code of practice for laying of welded steel pipes for water
supply.
IS : 5961 Cast iron grating for drainage purpose.
IS : 7740 Code of practice for road gullies.
IS : 8931 Cast copper alloy fancy bib taps and stop valves for water
services.
IS : 8934 Cast copper alloy fancy pillar taps for water services.
IS : 9762 Polyethylene floats for ball valves.
IS : 10446 Glossary of terms for water supply and sanitation.
IS : 10592 Industrial emergency showers, eye and face fountains and

combination units.
IS : 12592 Specification for precast concrete manhole covers and

frames.
IS : 12701 Rotational moulded polyethylene water storage tanks.
SP : 35 Hand book on water supply and drainage.
- Manual on Sewerage and sewage treatment (Published by

CPH & EEO ) As updated.
(j.) PILING AND FOUNDATION
IS : 1080 Code of practice for design and construction of simple
spread foundations.
IS : 1904 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations

in Soils; General Requirements.
IS : 2950 (Part- I) Code of practice for designs and construction of Raft

foundation.
IS : 2974 ( Part - I Code of practice for design and construction of machine

TO V ) foundations.
IS : 6403 Code of practice for determination of Allowable Bearing

pressure on Shallow foundation.
IS : 8009 Code of practice for calculation of settlement of foundation
subjected to symmetrical vertical loads.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
Part - I Shallow foundations.
Part – II Deep foundations.
IS : 12070 Code of practice for design and construction of shallow

foundations on rocks.
DIN : 4024 Flexible supporting structures for machines with rotating

machines.
VDI : 2056 Criteria for assessing mechanical vibrations of machines.
VDI : 2060 Criteria for assessing rotating imbalances in machines.

(k.) ROADS
IRC : 5 Standard specifications and Code of practice for road
bridges, section - I general Features of Design.
IRC : 14 Recommended practice of 2cm thick bitumen and tar

carpets.
IRC : 16 Specification for priming of base course with bituminous

primers.
IRC : 19 Standard specifications and code of practice for water bound

macadam.
IRC : 21 Standard specifications and Code of practice for road

bridges, section - III - Cement concrete (plain and
reinforced).
IRC : 37 Guidelines for the Design of flexible pavements.
IRC : 86 Geometric Design standards for urban roads in plains.
IRC : SP : 13 Guidelines for the design of small bridges & culverts.
IRC - Publication Ministry of Surface Transport (Roads Wing), Specifications

for road and bridge works.
IS : 73 Specification for paving bitumen

(l.) Loading
IS : 875 ( Pt. I to Code of practice for design loads other than earthquake) for
V) buildings and structures.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
IS : 1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.
IS : 4091 Code of Practice for design and construction of foundation for

transmission line towers & poles.
IRC : 6 Standard specifications & code of practice for road bridges,
Section - II Loads and stresses.
M.O.T. Deptt. of railways Bridge Rules.
(m.) SAFETY
IS : 3696 ( Part I Safety code for scaffolds and ladders.
& II )
IS : 3764 Safety code for excavation work.
IS : 4081 Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations.
IS : 4130 Safety code for demolition of buildings.
IS : 5121 Safety code for piling and other deep foundations.
IS : 5916 Safety code for construction involving use of hot bituminous

materials.
IS : 7205 Safety code for erection on structural steelwork.
IS : 7293 Safety code for working with construction machinery.
IS : 7969 Safety code for handling and storage of building materials
IS : 11769 Guidelines for safe use of products containing asbestos.
Indian Explosives Act. 1940 as updated.

CS-9549-572-2
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE.
PART- III
TRANSMISSION LINES
PART- III
CHAPTER – T0
TRANSMISSION – GENERAL
PART- III
CHAPTER – T0
TRANSMISSION - GENERAL
Clause No. Description Page No.
1.00.00 Scope T0-1
2.00.00 Route and Terrain T0-2
3.00.00 Detailed Survey T0-2
4.00.00 Preliminary Line Schedule T0-5
5.00.00 Check Survey of Tower Locations T0-5
6.00.00 Electrical System Data T0-6
7.00.00 List of Standards T0-6

CHAPTER – T0 : TRANSMISSION GENERAL
1.00.00 SCOPE
In addition to the project information and scope of work given in Part-I, of this
specification, the following is the scope of work for overhead Transmission line
work:
1.01.00 This specification covers detailed survey, tower/pole spotting, optimization of

tower/ pole location, soil resistivity measurements and geo-technical
investigation, tower design, fabrication and supply of all types of transmission
line towers including tower which are already designed and tested for equal or
higher loads as specified in this specification, bolts, nuts and washers, hanger,
D-shackle and all type of tower accessories like phase plate, number plate,
danger plate, anti-climbing device, etc.; foundation design, selecting type of
foundation for different towers and casting of foundation for towers and
erection of towers, tack welding of bolts and nuts along with subsequent
application of zinc coating on the welded portion, supply and application of
zinc rich paint, tower earthing, fixing of insulator string, stringing of conductors
and earth wires along with all necessary line accessories and testing and
commissioning of the erected transmission lines.
Further if type tested towers are used, bidder shall also furnish design
calculation for transmission line tower structures along with foundation design
and drawing meeting the requirements of this technical specification.
1.02.00 This specification includes the design and supply of insulator and their
hardware conductor and earthwire, earthwire suspension and tension clamps
and all the other lien accessories to be incorporated in the towers during
erection and stringing.
1.03.00 All the raw materials such as steel, zinc for galvanising, reinforcement steel
and cement for foundation, coke and salt for earthing, bird guards, anti climbing
devices, bolts, nuts, washers, D-shackles, hangers, links, danger plates, phase
plate, number plate etc. required for tower manufacture and erection shall be
included in the scope of supply.
1.04.00 The entire stringing work of conductor and earthwire shall be carried out as per
standard stringing practice. The Bidder shall indicate in the offer, the detail
description of the procedure to be deployed for stringing operation.
1.05.00 The Contractor shall carry out the detailed survey and shall submit
report/results within one (1) month of date of mobilization at site. No other
details except those included in tender documents shall be furnished by the
Owner. Also no topographical maps shall be furnished by Owner. However,
Owner’s assistance may be given in obtaining these maps from Survey of
India.
DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I Bid Doc. No.: TECHNICAL PART-III Page

(2X800MW) CS-9549-573-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI T0- 1 of 9
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
1.06.00 The tree-cutting shall be responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
count, mark and put proper numbers with suitable quality of paint at his own
cost on all the trees that are to be cut. Contractor may note that Owner shall
not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to the properties or for tree
cutting due to Contractor’s work.
2.00.00 ROUTE AND TERRAIN
2.01.00 The preliminary survey drawing of the corridor showing details of the route,
crossing, ground profile and levels is enclosed with the tender documents.
2.02.00 Right of way and way leave clearance shall be arranged by the Owner.
2.03.00 To evaluate and tabulate the trees and bushes coming within 13.5 meters on
either side of the central line alignment, the trees will be numbered and marked
with quality paint serially from angle point 1 onwards and the corresponding
number will be painted on the stem of trees at a height of one meter from
ground level. The trees list should contain the following:
a) Girth (circumference) measured at a height of 1 meter from ground level.

b) Approximate height of the tree with an accuracy of + 2 meters.
c) Name of the type of the species/tree.
d) The bushy and under growth encountered in the 1.5 meters belt should also be
evaluated with its type, height, girth and area in square meters, clearly
indicating the growth in the tree/bush statement.
2.04.00 Payment of compensation towards the clearances, etc. will be the responsibility
of the Owner.
3.00.00 DETAILED SURVEY
3.01.00 The detailed survey shall be carried out along the Transmission Line alignment.
3.02.00 Route Marking
At the starting point of the commencement of route survey, an angle iron spike
of 65 x 65 x 6 mm section and 1000 mm long shall be driven firmly into the
ground to project only 150 mm above the ground level. A punch mark on the
top section of the angle iron shall be made to indicate location of the survey
instrument. Teak wood peg 50 x 50 x 650 mm size shall be driven at prominent
position at intervals of not more than 750 meter along the transmission line to
be surveyed upto the next angle point. Nails of 100 mm length should be fixed
on the top of these pegs to show the location of instrument. The pegs shall be
driven firmly into the ground to project 100 mm only above ground level. At
angle position stone/concrete pillar with “NTPC” marked on them shall be put
firmly on the ground for easy identification.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
3.03.00 Profile Plotting & Tower/Pole Spotting
From the field book entries the route plan with route details and level profile
shall be plotted and prepared as per approved procedure. Reference levels at
every 20 meters along the profile are also to be indicated on the profile besides
R/Ls at undulations. Areas along the profile, which in the view of the Contractor
are not suitable for tower spotting, shall also be clearly marked on the profile
plots. If the difference in levels is too high, the chart may be broken up
according to requirement. A 10mm overlap shall be shown on each following
sheet. The chart shall progress from left to right. Sheet shall be in accordance
with the IS Standard. For às built’ profile these shall be A1 size
3.04.00 Sag Template
Necessary data in respect of conductor, earthwire and insulator have been

given in the specifications. On the basis of these, the Contractor shall prepare
the sag template drawing and tower spotting data and submit the same
alongwith sag tension calculations for the approval of the Owner. Sag template
prepared based on the approved sag-template curve drawing shall only be
used for tower spotting on the profiles. Two numbers of the approved template,
prepared on rigid transparent plastic sheets, shall be provided by the
Contractor to the Owner for the purpose of checking the tower spotting. The
templates shall be on the same scale as that of the profile.
3.05.00 Tower Spotting
With the help of approved sag template and tower spotting data, tower
locations shall be marked on the profiles. While locating the towers on the
profile sheet, the following shall be borne in mind:
3.05.01 Span
The number of consecutive spans between the section points shall not exceed
15 spans Section point shall comprise of tension point with B type, C type or D
Type towers as applicable. For all crossing spans such as major road
crossings, railway crossings, power line crossings etc. the span shall not
exceed 80% of design span.
3.05.02 Extension
An individual span shall be as near to the normal design span as far as

possible. In case an individual span becomes too short with normal supports on
account of undulations in ground profile, one or both the supports of the span
may be extended by inserting standard body extension designed for the
purpose according to technical specification.
3.05.03 Loading
There shall not be any upward force on suspension towers under normal
working conditions and the suspension towers shall support at least the

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
minimum weight span as provided in the design. In case uplift is unavoidable, it

shall be examined if the same can be overcome by adding standard body
extensions to the towers failing which tension towers designed for the purpose
shall be employed at such positions.
3.05.04 Road Crossing
At all important road crossings, the towers shall be fitted with double tension
insulator strings depending on the type of towers but the ground clearance at
the roads under maximum temperature and in still air shall be such that even
with conductor broken in adjacent span, ground clearance of the conductor
from the road surfaces shall be in line with IE rules. At all national highway
crossings, tensions towers shall be used.
3.05.05 Railways Crossings
At the time of detail survey all the railway crossings coming enroute the
transmission line shall be finalised as per the regulation laid down by the
Railway Authorities. The following are the important features of the prevailing
regulations (revised in 1987):
a) The crossing shall be supported on D type tower on either side of railway line
with double tension insulator strings.
b) The crossing shall normally be at right angle to the railway track.
c) The crossing span shall be limited to 80% of design span.
d) The minimum distance of the crossing tower shall be at least equal to the
height of the tower plus 6 meters away measured from the centre of the
nearest railway track..
e) No crossing shall be located over a booster transformer, traction switching

station, traction sub-station or a track cabin location in an electrified area.
f) Minimum ground clearance above rail level of the lowest portion of any
conductor under condition of maximum sag shall be maintained as per IE rules.
The approval for crossing railway track shall be obtained by the Owner from the
Railway Authority. However, six copies of profile and plan, tower and
foundation design and drawings, required for the approval from the Railway
Authority shall supplied by the Contractor to the Owner.
3.05.06 River Crossings
In case of major river crossing, towers shall be of suspension type and the
anchor towers on either side of the main river crossing shall be C type tower.
Clearance required by navigation authority shall be provided. For non
navigable river, clearance shall be reckoned with respect to highest flood level
(HFL).

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
3.05.07 Power Line Crossing
Where this line is to cross over another line of the same voltage or lower
voltage, towers with suitable extension shall be used. Provisions to prevent the
possibility of its coming into contact with other overhead lines shall be made in
accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956. The Contractor may be
required to under-cross higher voltage lines by erecting gantries structures.
3.05.08 Telecommunication Line Crossing
The angle of crossing shall be as near 90 degree as possible. However,

deviation to the extent of 30 degree may be permitted under exceptionally
difficult situations. When the angle of crossing has to be below 60 degree, the
matter will be referred to the authority incharge of the telecommunication
system. On a request from the Contractor, the permission of the
telecommunication authority may be obtained by the Owner. Also, in the
crossing span power line support will be as near the telecommunication line as
possible, to obtain increased vertical clearance between the wires.
3.05.09 Details Enroute
All topographical details, permanent features, such as trees, building etc.

13.5m on either side of the alignment shall be detailed on the profile plan.
3.05.10 Ash Pipe Line (If applicable)
Adequate clearances shall be maintained from ash pipe line and adjacent road.
3.06.00 Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees, etc.
Clearance from ground, buildings, trees and telephone lines shall be provided
in conformity with the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 as amended upto date.
4.00.00 PRELIMINARY LINE SCHEDULE
The profile sheets, duly spotted, alongwith preliminary schedules indicating

type of towers, wind span, weight span, angle of deviation, river, power line,
railway or road crossing and other details shall be submitted for the approval of
the Owner. After approval, the Contractor shall submit six more sets of the
approved reports along with two sets in soft copy of final profile drawings to the
Owner for record purpose.
5.00.00 CHECK SURVEY OF TOWER LOCATIONS
5.01.00 The detailed survey shall be conducted to locate and peg mark the tower
positions on ground conforming to the approved profile and tower schedule. In
the process, it is necessary to have the pit centers marked according to the
excavation marking charts. The levels, up or down of each pit center with
respect to the center of the tower locations shall be noted and recorded for
determining the amount of earthwork required to meet the approved design

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
parameters.
5.02.00 Changes, if required, after detailed survey in the preliminary tower schedule
shall be carried out by the Contractor and he shall thereafter submit a final
tower schedule for the approval of Owner. The tower schedule shall show
position of all towers, type of towers, span length, type of foundation for each
tower and the deviation at all angles as set out with other details.
6.00.00 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DATA
a) Nominal voltage 132 kV

b) Maximum system voltage 145 kV
c) BIL (Impulse) 650 kVp
d) Power frequency withstand voltage (wet) 140 kV (rms)
7.00.00 LIST OF STANDARDS
Indian Standards Title International &

Internationally
recognised standards
1 IS:209 Specification for Zinc Ingot
2 IS:269 Specification for 33 grade

Ordinary
Portland Cement.
3 IS:278 Specification for barbed wire
4 IS:383 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural

sources for concrete.
5 IS:398 - Part-II Alum. Condr. Galvanised steel reinforced
6 IS:406-1964 Methods of Chemical Analysis of Slab Zinc
7 IS:432 Mild steel and medium tensile bars and

(Part 1 & 2) hard drawn steel wire for concrete
reinforcement
8 IS:456 Code of practice for plan and reinforced

concrete.
9 IS:731-1971 Porcelain Insulators for Overhead BS:137-1973 (I&II)

Power Lines with a Nominal Voltage IEC:274-1968
greater than 1000 volts IEC:383-1976
10 IS:800 Code of practice for use of structural CSA STEAM 16.1

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
steel in general Building construction.
11 IS:802 Code of practice for use of structural

steel in overhead transmission Line.
(Load, Permissible stresses. Fabrication,
Galvanising, Inspection, and Packing
and Testing)
12 IS:1363 Hexagonal Head bolts
13 IS:1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded

Fasteners
14 IS:1489 Portland Pozzolana Cement
15 IS:1573 Electroplated Coating of Zinc on Iron

& Steel
16 IS:1778-1980 Reels and Drums of Barewire
17 IS:1786 High strength deformed steel bars and wires

for concrete reinforcement
18 IS:1893 Criteria of Earthquake resistant design

of structures.
19 IS:2016 Plain Washers
20 IS:2070-1962 Method of impulse voltage testing
21 IS:2071 Part-I:1993 Method of high voltage testing

Part -2 : 1974
Part -3 : 1976
22 IS:2121-1981 Specification for conductors and

earthwire Accessories for Overhead
Power Lines
Part-I Armour Rods
Part-II Mid-span joints & repair sleeves for
Conductors
23 IS:2131 Method of Standard penetration test

for soils.
24 IS:2551-1982 Danger Notice Plates
25 IS:2486 Specification for Insulator Fittings for

overhead Power Lines with a nominal
voltage greater than 1000 volts

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
Part- I:1993 General Requirements and Tests BS:3288-1972

Part-II:1989 Dimensional Requirements IEC:120-1960
Part-III:1974 Locking Devices IEC:372-1976
26 IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot dip

galvanising of iron & steel.
27 IS:2633 Method of testing uniformity of coating

of zinc coated articles.
28 IS:3043-1987 Code of Practice for earthing

(with amendment No. 1 & 2).
29 IS:3063-1994 Single Coil Rectangular Section spring

washers for bolts, nuts, screws.
30 IS:3188-1980 Characteristics of string insulator units
31 IS:4091 Code of practice for design and

transmission line tower and poles.
32 IS:4218 Metric Screw Threads.
33 IS:4759 Hot-dip zinc coatings on structural steel and

other allied products
34 IS:4826 Galvanised coatings on round steel wire
35 IS:5300-1980 Porcelain Guy strain insulators
36 IS:5613 (Part-II) Code of practice for Design, installation

& maintenance of overhead power lines
37 IS:6610 Specification for heavy washers for

steel structures.
38 IS:6639 Hexagonal bolts for structure
39 IS:6745 Methods for determination of weight
Pub. No. 19 (N)/ Regulation for Electrical Crossing of

40 700-1963 Railway Tracks.
41 IS:7814 Phosphor bronze sheet, strip and foil
42 IS:8263-1976 Method of Radio Interference tests NEEMA:107 – 1964

On high voltage insulators CISPR/IEC:437-1937

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
43 IS:8269-1976 Method of switching impulse test IEC:506-1975

On high voltage insulators
44 IS:8500 Structural steel – Microalloyed (Medium and High

Strenght qualities) – Specification
45 IS:9708-1993 Specifications for Stockbridge Vibration

Dampers for overhead power lines
46 Thermal mechanical performance test IEC:575-1971

and mechanical performance test on
String insulator units
47 IS:12427 Fasteners - Threaded Steel Fasteners - Hexagon Head

Transmission Tower Bolts – Specification

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
PART- III
CHAPTER – T1
TRANSMISSION LINE TOWERS

PART- III
CHAPTER – T1
TRANSMISSION LINE TOWERS
1.00.00 General Description of Towers T1-1
2.00.00 Spans and Clearances T1-3
3.00.00 Loading Conditions T1-4
4.00.00 Design of Towers T1-6
5.00.00 Tower Materials T1-8
6.00.00 Tower Fabrication T1-10
7.00.00 Tower Earthing T1-12
8.00.00 Inspection and Tests T1-13
9.00.00 Packing T1-15
10.00.00 Design Calculations and Drawings T1-15

SECTION – T1: TRANSMISSION LINE TOWERS
1.00.00 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF TOWERS
1.01.00 Types of Towers
1.01.01 The towers shall be of self supporting lattice steel type, designed to carry the line
conductors with necessary insulators, earth wires and all fittings under all loading
conditions.
1.01.02 The tower shall be of a fully galvanised structure, using structural mild steel
sections for members. Bolts and nuts with spring washers shall be used for
connections.
1.01.03 Bidders can also use high tensile steel and cold formed steel for fabrication of
towers provided they furnish the justification for use of such steel with reference to
national or international standards. However, the factors of safety, limitation on
member length, requirement of fasteners and galvanisation shall be as specified in
this specification.
The towers shall be classified as given in Table 1-1
Table T1-1
Type of Tower Deviation limit Typical use
A 0 to 2 To be used as tangent/suspension
tower
B 0 to 15 a) Angle towers with tension

insulator string
b) Tension tower for uplift forces

resulting from an uplift span upto
half of ruling span under broken
wire conditon.
c) Also to be designed for unbalanced

tension resulting from unequal
ruling span as specified
in table T1-2.
B 0 d) to be used as section tower

(2X800MW) Bid Doc. No.: TECHNICAL PART-III Page
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE CS-9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI T1-1/18
C 15 to 30 degree. a) Angle tower with tension

insulator string
resulting from an uplift span
upto half of ruling span under
broken wire condition.
D 30 deg. To 60 deg. a) Angle tower with tension

insulator string.

resulting from an uplift span
upto half of ruling span under
broken wire condition.
c) Dead end with 0 deg. to 15 deg

deviation both on line and sub-
station side (slack span).
D 0deg. e) complete dead end.
D 90deg. f) to be used near switchyard

With reduced design and span
NOTE:
1) Special type of tower, wherever required shall also be provided by the bidder.
1.03.00 Extension
The single circuit tower shall be designed with 9 M body extension so as to be

suitable for adding 3M, 6M and 9M body extension.
For power line crossing 25 metre extensions with D type towers are required. The
25 metre extension should be designed in such a manner the same can also be
used as 18 metre extension to normal tower after removal of bottom panels.
For under line crossing of EHV transmission lines the bidder shall have to design
minus-three metres and minus six metre extensions to D type tower or provide
tower-gantry arrangement.
D type towers shall be designed to cater for 90deg. deviation with auxiliary cross
arm and reduced tension/span.
1.04.00 Stub Setting templates.

Stub templates shall be designed and arranged by the contractor at his own cost for
all types of tower with or without extension and also for leg extension. Stub
templates for standard towers and tower with extension shall be of adjustable type.
The stub templates shall be painted. One set of each type of stub setting template
for single and double circuit tower shall be supplied to the Owner, on completion of
the project, at no extra cost.
2.00.00 SPANS AND CLEARANCES
2.01.00 Normal Span
The normal ruling span of the line shall be 305 meters for 132 kV towers.
2.02.00 Wind Span
The wind span is the sum of the two half spans adjacent to the support under
consideration. For normal horizontal spans this equals to normal span.
2.03.00 Weight Span
The weight span is the horizontal distance between lowest point of the conductors
on the two spans adjacent to the tower. For design of structures, the span limits
given below shall prevail.
____________
Tower type Normal Condition Broken Wire Condition
Max. (m) Min. (m) Max. (m) Min. (m)
A, B, C & D (132 kV) 450 -200 270 -200
2.04.00 Electrical Clearance
2.04.01 Ground clearance
The minimum ground clearance from the bottom conductor shall be as per IE rules
at the maximum sag conditions i.e. at maximum temperature and still air. However,
to achieve the above clearance the height of tower shall be increased in the
following manner:
a) Allowance of 150 mm shall be provided to account for errors in stringing.
b) Conductor creep shall be compensated by over tensioning the conductor at a

temperature lower than the ambient temperature. The creep correction temperature
along with calculations shall be furnished by the Contractor.
c) Minimum spacing
The minimum electrical clearance between conductors shall be as per relevant
standards.

2.04.02 Rail Crossing
In case of rail crossing the min. height above rail level of the lowest portion of any
conductor under condition of max. sag, in accordance with the regulations for
Electrical Crossing of Railway tracks as prevailing at the time of construction of line
shall be applicable.
2.04.03 Power Line Crossing
Minimum clearance between power line to power line crossing shall be as per IE
rules.
2.04.04 Live Metal Clearance
The minimum live metal clearance to the provided between the live parts and steel
work of super-structure shall be as per relevant standards.
NOTE:
i) Bidder shall adopt same cross arm design where jumper is projecting outside of
cross-arm for `D' type tower to be used as dead end and angle tower.
ii) The design of the tower shall be such that it will satisfy all the conditions when
clearances are measured from any live point of the strings.
2.04.05 Angle of Shielding
2.04.06 The angle of shielding is defined as the angle formed by the line joining the center
lines of the earthwire and outer power conductor, in still air, at tower supports, to the
vertical line through the center line of the earthwire. Bidders shall design the tower
in such a way that the angle of shielding does not exceed 20 deg for 66 KV towers.
The drop of the earthwire clamp, which is in the scope of contractor supplied items,
should be considered while calculating the minimum angle of protection. For
estimating the minimum angle of protection the drop of earth wire suspension clamp
alongwith shackle shall be taken as 150mm.
2.04.07 Mid Span Clearance
The minimum vertical mid span clearance between the earthwire and the nearest
power conductor as per IE rules, which shall mean the vertical clearance between
earthwire and the nearest conductor under all temperatures and still air condition in
the normal ruling span. Further, the tensions of the earthwires and power
conductors, shall be so co-ordinated that the sag of earthwires shall be at least 10%
less than that of power conductors under all temperature loading conditions.
3.00.00 LOADING CONDITIONS

3.01.00 Loads at Conductor And Earthwire Points
Contractor shall consider the ultimate external loadings at conductor and earthwire
points base on IS 802-1, 1995. The Contractor shall develop the tower designs
considering these loadings. The towers are to be designed to cater for the following
loads:
a) Reliability Loads (Normal condition)

b) Security Loads (Broken wire condition)
c) Safety Loads (Construction & Maintenance loads)
Suspension towers shall be designed for full wind load under security
condition
3.02.00 Wind Loads on Tower Body
The wind load on tower body shall be calculated by the Contractor as per IS:802,
Part-I, 1995.
3.03.00 Maximum Tension
Maximum tension shall be based on either of the following (whichever is more

stringent):
a) at 0 deg C with 36% full wind pressure., or

b) at 32 deg C with full wind pressure
The value of drag co-efficient (Cd) shall be 1.2 for conductor/earthwire if the
diameter of the conductor/earth is 15mm or less.
3.04.00 Sag tension calculation for design purpose shall be calculated considering normal
span of 305 meter.
3.04.05 The initial conductor and earthwire tension at 32 degree C and without wind shall be
22% of the ultimate tensile strength of the conductor and 20% of the ultimate tensile
strength of the Earthwire.
3.06.00 Limiting Tensions of conductor & Earthwire
The ultimate tension of conductor and ground wire shall not exceed 70 per cent of
the ultimate tensile strengths.
3.07.00 Broken Wire Condition

The loads for broken wire conditions shall be considered as per clause 16 of IS 802
(Part I/ Sec 1): 1995. The tower type B & C shall be considered as small and
medium angle towers whereas tower type D shall be considered as large angle
tension tower/ dead end tower.
3.08.00 Design Loads
Owner’s requirement for most stringent design longitudinal and transverse loads is
summarized in Table T1-2.
4.00.00 DESIGN OF TOWERS
4.01.00 Design Criteria
Towers shall be designed based on spans and clearances, and loading conditions
as detailed above.
4.02.00 Design Temperatures
The following temperature range for the conductors and ground wires shall be
adopted for line design:
a) Minimum temperature : 0 deg.C

b) Everyday temperature of conductor : 32 deg.C
c) Max. temperature of Conductor : 75 deg.C
d) Max. temperature of Earthwire exposed to sun : 53 deg.C
4.03.00 Redundant Design
All redundants in the towers are to be triangulated. Redundants, having an angle of

15 deg or less with horizontal are to be designed for a concentric vertical ultimate
load of 1.5 KN acting at center of the unsupported length. The Contractor has to
furnish the calculation for the same. The redundants shall also be designed for 2.5%
of max. axial load of connecting members (i.e. leg members, bracing members etc.).
4.04.00 Steel Sections
For designing of towers, preferably rationalised steel sections shall be used. During
execution of the project, if any particular section is not available same shall be
substituted by higher section at no extra cost to Owner and the same shall be borne
by the Contractor. However, design approval for such substitution shall be obtained
from the Owner before any substitution.
4.05.00 Thickness of Members

The minimum thickness of angle sections used in the design of tower, unless
otherwise specified elsewhere in this Specification, shall be kept not less than the
following values:
a) Main corner leg members including the groundwire peak and main cross arm : 5
mm
b) For all other members : 4 mm
4.06.00 Bolts & Nuts
4.06.01 The minimum bolt spacing and rolled edge distance and sheared edge distance
from the centers of the bolt holes to be maintained are given below:
a) Diameter of bolts 16 mm
b) Hole diameter 17.5 mm
c) Min. bolt spacing 40 mm
d) Min. rolled distance 20 mm
e) Min. sheared edge distance 23 mm
4.06.02 Bolts sizes mentioned above shall only be used. The minimum width of the flanges
without bolt holes shall be 30mm.
4.06.03 For the purpose of calculating shearing stress and bearing stress for bolts, IS:802-
Part-II-1993 may be referred.
4.07.00 Slenderness Ratio
4.07.01 Slenderness ratio for members shall be computed in accordance with IS:802, Part-
II, 1993. Slenderness ratio for compression and tension members shall not exceed
the values specified therein.
4.07.02 The following maximum limit of the slenderness ratio i.e. the ratio of unsupported
length of the section in any plane to the appropriate radius of gyration will be
adopted:
a) For main corner leg members including the corner 120

members of earthwire peak and the lower corner
members of the cross-arms
b) For other members having calculated stresses 200
c) For redundant members 250
d) For members having tensile stress only 400
4.07.03 The bracing pattern, including that of secondary bracings (redundants) shall be
identical on transverse and longitudinal faces of the tower, i.e. staggering of primary
and secondary bracings are not permitted. Primary bracings and redundants shall

be properly triangulated, i.e. the overall pattern of bracing on tower body and cross
arms shall be triangular only.
4.08.00 Erection Stress
Where erection stress combined with other permissible co-existent stresses could
produce a working stress in any member appreciably above the specified working
stress, such other provisions are to be made as may be necessary to bring the
working stress within the specified limit.
5.00.00 TOWER MATERIALS
5.01.00 Tower Steel Sections
IS steel sections of tested quality in conformity with IS: 2062 are to be used in
towers, extensions and stub setting templates. No individual member shall be longer
than 6000mm. The Bidder can also use most efficient grades of structural steel
angle sections and plates conforming to latest international standards. However, the
Bidders are permitted to opt for not more than two (2) grades of steel for any
particular package.
5.02.00 Fasteners: Bolts, Nuts and Washers
5.02.01 All bolts and nuts shall conform to IS: 6639. All bolts and nuts shall be galvanised
and shall have hexagonal head and nuts, the heads being forged out of the solid,
truly concentric, and square with the shank, which must be perfectly straight.
5.02.02 The bolt shall be of 16 mm dia and of property class 5.6 as specified in IS:1367
(Part-III) and matching nut of property class as specified in IS:1367 (Part-VI).
5.02.03 Bolts upto M16 and having length upto 10 times the diameter of the bolt should be
manufactured by cold forging and thread rolling process to obtain good and reliable
mechanical properties and effective dimensional control. The shear strength of bolts
for 5.6 grade should be 310 MP a minimum as per IS:12427. Bolts should be
provided with washer face in accordance with IS:1363 Part-I to ensure proper
bearing.
5.02.04 To ensure uniformity of galvanizing, bolts and nuts should be galvanised by high
temperature hot-dip galvanizing.
5.02.05 Nuts should be double chamfered as per the requirement of IS:1363 Part-III. It
should be ensured by the manufacturer that nuts should not be overtapped beyond
0.4 MM oversize on effective diameter for size upto M16.

5.02.06 Fully threaded bolts shall not be used. The length of bolts shall be such that the
threaded portion will not extend into the place of contact of the members.
5.02.07 All bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nuts and threaded enough to
permit firm gripping of the members, but not further. It shall be ensured that the
threaded portion of each bolt protrudes not less than 3 mm and not more than 8mm
when fully tightened. All nuts shall fit and tight to the point where the shank of the
bolt connects to the head.
5.02.08 Flat and tapered washers shall be provided wherever necessary. Spring washers
shall be provided for insertion under all nuts. These washers shall be of steel
electro-galvanised, positive lock type and 3.5mm in thickness for 16mm dia.
5.02.09 The Bidder shall furnish bolt schedules giving thickness of members connected, the
nut and the washer and the length of shank and the threaded portion bolts and sizes
of holes and any other special details of this nature.
5.02.10 To obviate bending stress in bolts or to reduce to minimum, no bolt shall connect
aggregate thickness of more than three (3) times its diameter.
5.02.11 The bolt positions is assembled towers shall be as per IS:5613 (Part-II/Section-2).
5.02.12 Bolts at the joints shall be so staggered that nuts may be tightened with spanners
without fouling.
5.03.00 Tower Accessories
5.03.01 Step Bolts & ladders
Each tower shall be provided with step bolts of not less than 16mm diameter and
175 mm long, spaced not more than 450mm apart and extending from about 3.5
meters above the ground level to the top of the tower. Step bolt shall be provided
with two nuts on one end to fasten the bolt securely to the tower and button head at
the other end to prevent the feet from slipping away. The step bolts shall be capable
of withstanding a vertical load not less than 1.5 KN. For special structures, where
the height of the super structure exceeds 50 meters, ladders along with protection
rings shall be provided in continuation of the step bolts on one face of the tower
from 30 meters above ground level to the top of the special structure. From 3.5 m to
30 m height of super structure step bolts shall be provided. Suitable railing for
access from step bolts to the ladder and from the ladder to each cross arm tip and
the groundwire support shall be fixed on tower by using countersunk bolts.
5.03.02 Insulator Strings and Earthwire Clamps Attachments
a) For the attachment of suspension insulator string a suitable dimensioned swinging

hanger on the tower shall be provided so as to obtain requisite clearance under

extreme swinging conditions and free from swinging of the string. The hanger shall
be designed to withstand an UTS equivalent to that of insulators. The supply of
design & supply of hanger is in the scope of the Contractor.
b) At tension towers strain plates of suitable dimensions on the underside of each

cross-arm tip and at the top of earthwire peak, suitable plate should be provided for
taking the hooks or D-Shackle of the tension insulator strings or earthwire tension
clamps, as the case may be. Full details of the attachments shall be submitted by
the bidder for Owner's approval before starting the mass fabrication.
5.03.03 Earthwire peaks/crossarms are to be suitably designed to accommodate the

shackle of the suspension clamp/tension clamps.
5.03.04 Anti-climbing Device
Barbed wire type anti-climbing device shall be provided and installed by the
Contractor for all towers. The height of the anti-climbing device should be provided
approximately 3m above ground level. The barbed wire shall conform to IS-278-
1978. The barbed wires shall be given chromating dip as per procedure laid down in
IS:1340-1959.
5.03.05 Danger plate, Number plates, Circuit Plate, Phase plate & Bird Guards.
Danger, Number Plates, Phase Plates & Bird Guards shall be provided and installed
by the Contractor:
a) Each tower shall be fitted with a number plate, and danger plate. Each tension
tower shall be provided with a set of phase plates also. The arrangement for fixing
these accessories shall not be more than 4.5m above the ground level.
b) The letters, figures and the conventional skull and bones of data plates shall
conform to IS:2551-1963 and shall be in a single red on the front of the plate.
c) The corners of the number and danger plate shall be rounded off to remove sharp
edges.
d) To prevent birds from perching immediately above the suspension insulator strings
and thus fouling it with droppings suitable birdguards shall be provided at cross arm
tips of all suspension towers. The arrangement shall conform to IS:5613 part-
2/Sec.I.
6.00.00 TOWER FABRICATION
6.01.00 Except where hereinafter modified, details of fabrication shall conform to IS:802
(Part-II) or the relevant international standards.
6.02.00 Butt splices shall be used and the inside Angle and outside plate shall be designed
to transmit the load and inside cleat angle, shall not be less than half the thickness
of the heavier member connected plus 2mm. Lap splice may be used for connecting

members of unequal size and the inside angle of lap splice shall be rounded at the
heel to fit the fillet of the outside angle. All splices shall develop full stress in the
member connected through bolts. Butt as well as lap splice shall be made as above
and as close to the main panel point as possible.
6.03.00 Joints shall be so designed as to avoid eccentricity as far as possible. The use of
gusset plates for joining tower members shall be avoided as far as possible.
However, where the connections are such that the elimination of the gusset plates
would result in eccentric joints, gussets plates and spacer plates may be used in
conformity with modern practices. The thickness of the gusset plates required to
transmit stress shall not be less than that of members connected.
6.04.00 The use of filler in connection shall be avoided as far as possible. The diagonal web
members in tension may be connected entirely to the gusset plate wherever
necessary to avoid the use of filler and it shall be connected at the point of
intersection by one or more bolts.
6.05.00 The tower structures shall be accurately fabricated to connect together easily at site
without any undue strain on the bolts.
6.06.00 No angle member shall have the two leg flanges brought together by closing angle.
6.07.00 The diameter of the hole shall be equal to the diameter of bolt plus 1.5mm.
6.08.00 The structure shall be designed so that all parts shall be accessible for inspection
and cleaning. Drain holes shall be provided at all points where pockets depression
are likely to hold water.
6.09.00 All similar parts shall be made strictly inter-changeable. All steel sections before any
work is done on them, shall be carefully leveled, straightened and made true to
detailed drawings by methods which will not injure the materials so that when
assembled, the adjacent matching surfaces are in close contact through out. No
rough edges shall be permitted in the entire structure.
6.10.00 Drilling and Punching
6.10.01 Before any cutting work is started all steel sections shall be carefully straightened
and trued by pressure and not by hammering. They shall again be trued after being
punched and drilled.
6.10.02 Holes for bolts shall be drilled on punched with a jig but drilled holes shall be
preferred. The following maximum tolerance of accuracy of punched holes is
permissible.
a) Holes must be perfectly circular and no tolerance in this respect permissible.

b) The max. allowable difference in diameter of the holes on the two sides of plates or
angle is 0.8mm. i.e. the allowable taper in a punched holes should not exceed
0.8mm on diameter.
c) Holes must be square with the plates or angles and have their walls parallel.
6.10.03 All burrs left by drills or punch shall be removed completely. When the tower
members are in position the holes shall be truly opposite to each other. Drilling or
reaming to enlarge holes shall not be permitted.
6.11.00 Erection mark
6.11.01 Each individual member shall have erection mark conforming to the component
number given to it in the fabrication drawings. This mark shall be marked with
marking dies of 16mm size before galvanising and shall be legible after galvanising.
6.11.02 Erection Mark shall be “A - BB- CC – DDD”, where
A= Owner's code assigned to the Contractor Alphabet.

BB = Contractor's Mark-Numerical
CC = Tower Type-Alphabet
DDD = Number mark to be assigned by Contractor.
6.12.00 Quantities and Weights
6.12.01 The unit weight of each type of tower, stubs and extensions shall be furnished by
the bidder. The weight of tower shall mean the weight of tower calculated by using
the black sectional (i.e. un-galvanised) weight of steel members of the size indicated
in the approved fabrication drawings and bills of materials, without taking into
consideration the reduction in weights, holes, notches and bevel cuts etc, but taking
into consideration the weight of the fasteners, anti-climbing devices etc.
6.13.00 Galvanising
Fully galvanised towers and stub shall be used for the line. Galvanisation of the
member of the towers shall conform to IS:2629 and IS:4759. The minimum weight
of galvanisation shall be 610 gms/sqm. The galvanisation shall be done after all
fabrication work is completed, except that the nuts may be tapped or re-run after
galvanising. Threads of bolts and nuts shall have a neat fit and shall be such that
they can be turned with finger throughout the length of the threads of bolts and they
shall be capable of developing full strength of the bolts. Spring washers shall be
electro-galvanised as per Grade 4 of IS:1573.
7.00.00 TOWER EARTHING
The footing resistance of all towers shall be measured by the Contractor in dry
weather after tower erection but before the stringing of earthwire. All the tower are

to be earthed. In no case tower footing resistance shall exceed 10 ohms. Pipe type
earthing and counterpoise type earthing wherever required shall be provided in
accordance with the stipulations made in IS:3043-1987 and IS:5613 (part-II/Section-
2) 1985. The details for pipe and counterpoise type earthing are given in drawing
enclosed with the specification.
8.00.00 INSPECTION AND TESTS
8.01.00 All standard tests, including quality control tests, in accordance with appropriate
Indian/International standard, shall be carried out unless otherwise specified herein.
8.02.00 Inspection
In addition to the provisions as specified elsewhere in this specification, the

following shall also apply:
8.02.01 The Contractor shall keep the Owner informed in advance about the time of starting
and the progress of manufacture and fabrication of various tower parts at various
stages, so that arrangements could be made for inspection.
8.02.02 The acceptance of any part of items shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any
part of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the Specification.
8.02.03 The Owner or his representative shall have free access at all reasonable times to
those parts of the Contractor's works which are concerned with the fabrication of the
Owner's material for satisfying himself that the fabrication is being done in
accordance with the provisions of the specifications.
8.02.04 Unless specified otherwise inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture
prior to dispatch and shall be conducted so as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the work.
8.02.05 Should any member of the structure be found not to comply with the approved
design, it shall be liable to rejection. No member once rejected shall be resubmitted
for inspection, except in cases where the Owner or his authorised representative
considers that the defects can be rectified.
8.02.06 Defect which may appear during fabrication shall be made good with the consent of,
and according to the procedure proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Owner.
8.02.07 All gauges and templates necessary to satisfy the Owner shall be supplied by the
manufacturer.

8.02.08 The correct grade and quality of steel shall be used by the Contractor. To ascertain
the quality of steel used the inspector may at his discretion get the material tested at
an approved laboratory.
8.03.00 Tower Load Tests
8.03.01 The Contractor shall submit one set of shop drawings alongwith the bill of materials.
Further, Contractor shall submit one copy of test reports and final tracings of shop
drawings and Bill of materials for Owner's reference and record.
8.03.02 The Contractor shall ensure that the specification of materials and workmanship of
all towers actually supplied conform strictly to the towers which have successfully
under gone the tests. In case any deviation is detected, the Contractor shall replace
such defective towers free of cost to the Owner. All expenditure incurred in erection,
to and fro transportation and any other expenditure or losses incurred by the Owner
on this account shall be fully borne by the Contractor. No extension in delivery time
shall be allowed on this account.
8.04.00 Tower Testing Procedure
The testing of towers shall be as per the procedure described below:
8.04.01 Bolt Slip Test
8.04.02 In the bolt slip test, the test loads shall be gradually applied up to the 50% of design
loads under normal condition and held for two (2) minutes at that loads and then
released gradually.
The initial and final readings on the scales (for measurement of defection) before
application and after the release of Loads respectively shall be taken with the help
of theodolite. The difference between these readings gives the values of the bolt
slip.
8.04.03 Normal/Broken Wire Load Tests
All the loads, for a particular load-combination test shall be applied gradually upto
the full design loads in the following steps and shall also be released in the similar
manner:
50 percent
75 percent
90 percent
95 percent
100 percent

8.04.04 Observation Periods
a) Under normal and broken wire load tests, the tower shall be kept under observation
for sign of any failure for two minutes (excluding the time for adjustment of loads) for
all intermediate steps of loading upto and including 95 per cent of full design loads.
b) For normal, as well as broken wire tests, the tower shall be kept under observation
for five (5) minutes (excluding the time for adjustment of loads) after it is loaded upto
100 percent of full design loads.
c) While the loading operation are in progress, the tower shall be constantly watched,
and if it shows any tendency of failure anywhere, the loading shall be immediately
stopped, released and then entire tower shall be inspected. The reloading shall be
started only after the corrective measures are taken.
d) The structure shall be considered to be satisfactory, if it is able to support the

specified full design loads for five (5) minutes, with no visible local deformation after
unloading (such as bowing, buckling etc.) and no breakage of elements or
constituent parts.
e) Ovalization of holes and permanent deformation of bolts shall not be considered as

failure.
8.04.05 Recording
The deflection of the tower shall be recorded at each intermediate and final stage of
normal load and broken wire load tests by means of a theodolite and graduated
scale. The scale shall be of about one meter long with marking upto 5 mm accuracy.
8.04.06 Destruction Test
a) The destruction test shall be carried out under normal condition or broken wire
condition. The Owner at the time of approval of rigging chart/test data sheet shall
intimate the contractor. Under which load condition the destruction test is to be
carried out.
b) The procedure for application of load for normal/broken wire test shall also be
applicable for destruction test. However, the load shall be increased in steps of five
(5) percent after the full design loads have been reached.
9.00.00 PACKING
9.01.00 The packings shall be properly done to avoid losses/damages during transit. Each
bundle or package shall be appropriately marked.
10.00.00 DESIGN CALCULATION AND DRAWINGS

10.01.00 The following design calculation and drawings are required to be furnished during
a) Computation of wind load

b) Sag-tension calculation
c) Tower loading
d) Single line diagram of towers slowing electrical clearances and steel sections.
10.02.00 The Contractor shall also furnish following to the owner:
a) Detailed design calculation and drawing for towers and foundations.

b) Detailed structural drawings indicating section size, length of members sizes of
plate along with hole to hole distance, joint details etc.
c) Bill of materials, indicating cutting and bending details against each member.
d) Shop drawings showing all details relevant to fabrication.
e) All the drawings for the tower accessories.

TABLE-T1-2
DESIGN LOADS
S.No Tower Longitudinal Loads Transverse Loads

Type Reliabilit Security Reliability Security
y Condition Condition Condition
Conditio
n
1 2 3 4 5 6
a. A 0.0 0.5 x MT For WC + WI + 0.6 WC + WI
Conductor). DY +0.25 DY
1.0 x MT (For Earth (For Conductor)
Wire) 0.6 WC + 0.5 DY
(For Earth Wire)
b. B 0.0 1.0 x MT WC + WI + 0.6 WC + WI +0.5
(Section DY DY
Tower-
0o
Deviatio
n)
c. B ( 15o 0.0 1.0 x MT x Cos /2 WC + WI + 0.6 WC + WI +0.5
Deviatio DY DY
n)
d. C 0.0 1.0 x MT WC + WI + 0.6 WC + WI +0.5
(Section DY DY
Tower-
0o
Deviatio
n)
e. C (30o 0.0 1.0 x MT x Cos /2 WC + WI + 0.6 WC + WI +0.5
Deviatio DY DY
n)
f. D (60o 0.0 1.0 x MT x Cos /2 WC + WI + 0.6 WC + WI +0.5
Deviatio DY DY
n)
g. D (90o 0.0 1.0 x MT x Cos /2 WC + WI + 0.6 WC + WI +0.5
Deviatio DY DY
n)
h. D MT 1.0 x MT WC + WI 0.1 WC + WI
Complet
e Dead
End

DESCRIPTION SYMBOL REMARKS

Maximum Tension Of MT
Conductor/ Earth Wire
under everyday
temperature & full wind
condition or minimum
temperature & 36% 0f max.
wind which ever is more
stringent
Wind On Conductor WC Wind Span shall be the normal ruling
span.
Wind On Insulator WI In case of Double String Insulators, both
their strings shall be considered
Angle Of Deviation 
(Degrees)
Load Due To Deviation Of DY= 2 x MT x Sin
Tower /2
Note:
1. Vertical loads shall conform to IS 802 – Part I, 1995. Weight spans as furnished
under Clause 2.03.00 shall be considered for computation of vertical loads.
2. Safety loads and Anti-cascade loads as specified in IS 802- Part I, 1995 shall also
be considered for design of Towers.
3. Wind loads on the towers shall be considered in transverse loads as per clause 11,
12 and 13 of IS: 802 (Part-I/ Sec. I)- 1995.
4. Any additional loads apart from the loads mentioned above, as required as per IS:
802- 1995 shall be considered for design purpose.

PART- III
CHAPTER – T2
TOWER FOUNDATIONS
PART- III
CHAPTER – T2
TOWER FOUNDATIONS
1.00.00 Types of Foundation T2-1
2.00.00 Soil Investigation T2-1
3.00.00 Loads on Foundations T2-4
4.00.00 Stability Analysis T2-5
5.00.00 Properties of Concrete T2-5
6.00.00 Design of Foundations T2-6
7.00.00 Construction of Tower Foundation T2-6

SECTION – T2: TOWER FOUNDATIONS

1.00.00 TYPES OF FOUNDATION
1.01.00 General
1.01.01 Reinforced concrete footing shall be used for all type of tower in conformity with the
IS Codes and the specifications. All the four footings of the tower and their
extension shall be similar, irrespective of down thrust and uplift.
1.01.02 Foundation includes supply of materials such as cement, sand, coarse aggregates,
reinforcement steel etc., and all work related to construction of foundations including
excavation and backfilling, form work, stub setting, placing of reinforcement,
concreting etc.
1.02.00 Design criteria for Foundations
The foundation shall be designed for the actual soil parameters based on the soil
investigation carried out by the bidder and approved by the owner. For design
purposes:
(a) The angle of repose shall be considered as two-third (2/3) of the value as
obtained from the soil investigation
(b) Water table shall be considered up to the ground level.
(c) The weight of soil shall be considered as 1440 Kg/m3 under dry condition and
940 Kg/m3 under wet condition.
Well foundation or pile foundation shall be provided by the bidder wherever

necessitated.
2.00.00 SOIL INVESTIGATION
2.01.00 The Contractor is required to carry out detailed soil investigation at various tower
locations along the corridor, one borehole at centre of the tower, angle points,
crossings, etc. and also where soil strata is different from the other locations
investigated. In addition the soil investigation may be required to be carried at other
locations at the discretion of the Engineer.
The investigation comprises of field and laboratory testing. Field investigation

includes boreholes, Standard Penetration Test (SPT), Static Cone Penetration Test
(SCPT), Dynamic Cone Penetration Test (DCPT), collection of disturbed samples
(DS) and undisturbed soil samples (UDS), Trial Pits (TP), Plate Load Tests (PLT),
Electrical Resistivity Test (ERT), collection of water samples, etc. Laboratory tests
shall include, Physical, chemical and engineering properties of soil/rock.

2.02.00 This specification covers technical requirements for geotechnical investigation and
preparation of a detailed geotechnical report. It shall include mobilization of
necessary equipment, providing necessary engineering supervision and technical
personnel, carrying out field investigation and tests, laboratory tests, analysis and
interpretation of data and results, collecting data regarding change of course of
rivers from local sources, velocity, scour, etc., giving flood details of the area (past
history), safe bearing capacity for different sizes of foundations, different founding
strata for the various locations along the transmission lines and preparation of
geotechnical report.
2.03.00 The diameter of borehole shall be minimum 150 mm in soil and 76 mm in rock.
Depth of bore holes at river/bridge crossings shall be 40m, at angle points depth
shall be 15.0m and at the centre of tower along the corridor depth of BH shall be
10.0m. Boring shall be terminated at the above specified depth or 3.0m continuous
in rock with RQD>25% for river crossings and for balance areas 3.0m in refusal
whichever is earlier. Refusal means SPT ‘N’ value greater than 100.
SPT shall be carried out in all types of soil deposits and in all rock formations with
core recovery up to 20%, met within a borehole. This test shall be conducted at
every 3.0 m interval or at change of strata, up to the final depth. At refusal
penetration shall be measured and the same shall be reported in Borelog. UDS
shall be collected at every 3.0 m interval or at change of strata up to depth of
borehole. UDS may be replaced by additional SPT, if SPT’N’ value in the strata is
above 50. The diameter of UDS sampler shall be 100 mm minimum.
2.04.00 Laboratory tests shall be done as per relevant IS codes. The laboratory tests, not
be limited to the following shall be conducted on disturbed and undisturbed soil
samples, rock samples & water samples collected during field investigations in
sufficient numbers.
a) Laboratory Tests on Soil Samples
Laboratory tests shall be carried out on disturbed and undisturbed soil samples for
Grain Size Analysis, Hydrometer Analysis, Atterberg Limits, Triaxial Shear Tests
(UU), Natural Moisture Content, Specific Gravity and Bulk Unit Weight,
Consolidation Tests, Unconfined Compression Test, Free swell Index, Shrinkage
Limit, Swell Pressure Test, Chemical Analysis test on soil and water samples to
determine the carbonates, sulphates, chlorides, nitrates, pH, organic matter and any
other chemicals harmful to concrete and reinforcement/ steel.
b) Laboratory Tests on Rock Samples
Moisture content, porosity & density, Specific Gravity, Hardness, Soundness, Slake
durability index, Unconfined compression test (Both at saturated and in-situ water
content), Point load strength index and deformability test (Both at saturated and in-
situ water content) shall be carried out on rock samples.

2.05.00 The laboratory tests shall be carried out progressively during the field work after
sufficient numbers of samples have reached the laboratory in order that the test
results of the initial boreholes can be made use of in planning the later stages of the
field investigation and quantum of laboratory tests. All samples brought from field,
whether disturbed or undisturbed shall be extracted/prepared and examined by
competent technical personnel and the tests shall be carried out as per the
procedures laid out in the latest editions of the relevant IS codes. Soil shall be
classified as per the provisions of Indian standards.
2.06.00 On completion of all field & laboratory work, geotechnical investigation report shall
be submitted for Owner’s review/approval. The Geotechnical investigation report
shall contain geological information of the region, procedure adopted for
investigation, field & laboratory observations/ data/ records, analysis of results &
recommendations on type of foundation envisaged for all areas of work with
supporting calculations. Recommendations on treatment for soil, foundation, based
on subsoil characteristics, soft soils, aggressive chemicals, expansive soils, etc.
2.07.00 The Geotechnical report shall include, but not limited to the following:
a) Borelogs: A true cross section of all individual boreholes with reduced levels and
coordinates, showing the classification and thickness of individual stratum, position
of ground water table, details of various in-situ tests conducted and samples
collected at different depths and the rock stratum, wherever met with.
b) Results of all laboratory tests summarized for each Borehole along with a
consolidated table giving the layer wise soil and rock properties. All the relevant
charts, tables, graphs, figures, supporting calculations, conditions and photographs
of representative rock cores shall be furnished.
c) Recommendations : The report should contain specific recommendations on type of

foundations to be adopted for various structures, duly considering the sub soil
characteristics, water table, total/ differential settlement permissible for structures
and equipments, minimum depth and width of foundation. The
observation/recommendations shall include but not limited to the following:
i) Geological information of the area, past observations or historical data, if

available, for the area and for the structures in the nearby area, fluctuations of
water table etc.
ii) Net safe allowable bearing pressure on the soil at various depths for different
sizes of the foundations based on shear strength and settlements characteristics
of soil with supporting calculations for the recommendations.
iii) Based on the chemical nature of soil and ground water and exposure condition,
recommendations for protective measures on concrete and steel shall be
mentioned.

iv) If expansive soil is met with, recommendation and removal or retainment of the
same under structures/ roads etc. shall be given. In the later case detailed
specification of any special treatment required including specifications for
materials to be used, construction method, equipments to be deployed, etc. shall
be furnished.
iv) Additional investigation other then specified above, if any, the same shall be
carried out by the bidder at no extra cost to owner.
2.08.00 Indian Standard References

IS:1498 Classification and Identification of Soils for general Engineering
Purposes.
IS:1892 Code of practice for Subsurface Investigation for Foundation.
IS:1904 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations in Soils:
General Requirements.
IS:2131 Method of Standard Penetration Test for Soils.
IS:2132 Code of practice for Thin walled Tube Sampling of Soils.
IS:2470 Code of practice for design and construction of Septic
(Part-I) Tanks.
IS:2720 Method of Test for Soils (Relevant Parts).
IS:5313 Guide for Core Drilling Observations.
IS:4968 Method for subsurface Sounding for Soils - Dynamic
(Part-II) method using Cone and Bentonite slurry.
IS:4968 Method for subsurface Sounding for Soils- Static Cone
(Part-III) Penetration Test.
3.00.00 LOADS ON FOUNDATIONS
3.01.00 The foundations shall be designed to withstand the specific loads of the
superstructure and for the full footings reactions obtained from the structural stress
analysis in conformity with the relevant over load factors. The over load factor for
foundation design shall be 1.10 for all loads except dead loads.
3.02.00 The reactions on the footings shall be composed of the following type of loads for
which these shall be required to be checked:
a) Max. tension or uplift along the leg slope.
b) Max. compression or down-thrust along the leg slope.
c) Max. horizontal shear or side thrust.
3.03.00 The base slab of the foundation shall be designed for additional moments
developing due to eccentricity of the loads.

3.04.00 The additional weight of concrete in the footing below ground level over the earth
weight and the full weight of concrete above the ground level in the footing and
embedded steel parts will also be taken into account adding to the down thrust.
4.00.00 STABILITY ANALYSIS
4.01.00 In addition to the strength design, stability analysis of the foundation shall be done
to check the possibility of failure by over-turning, uprooting, sliding and tilting of the
foundation.
4.02.00 The following primary type of soil resistance shall be assumed to act in resisting the
loads imposed on the footing in earth:
4.02.01 Resistance against uplift
The uplift loads will be assumed to be resisted by the weight of earth in an inverted
frustum of a conical pyramid of earth on the footing pad whose sides make an angle
equal to the angle of repose of the earth with the vertical. However, the angle of
repose for uplift resistance shall be considered two-third (2/3) of the value as
obtained from the soil investigation report. The weight of concrete embedded in
earth and that above the ground will also be considered for resisting the uplift. In
case where the frustum of earth pyramids of two adjoining legs super-impose each
other, the earth frustum will be assumed truncated by a vertical plane passing
through the center line of the tower base.
4.02.02 Resistance against down thrust
The down-thrust load combined with the additional weight of concrete above earth
will be resisted by bearing strength of the soil assumed to be acting on the total area
of the bottom of the footings.
4.02.03 Resistance against side-thrust
The chimney portion of the foundation shall be designed as per limit state method of
IS-456, considering the chimney as a column subjected to axial loads (down thrust
loads) and biaxial bending moments resulting from side thrust forces. The passive
earth pressure (as per Rankine's formula) shall be considered for the design of
chimney against side thrust. If uplift and down thrust are computed in vertical
direction for the foundation design, full resultant horizontal shear shall be taken at
footing tip for design of the footing to resist side thrust.
5.00.00 PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE
5.01.00 The cement concrete used for the foundations shall be of grade M20 (nominal mix)
with 20mm coarse aggregate.
5.02.00 All the properties of concrete regarding its strength under compression tension,
shear, punching and bending etc. as well as workmanship will conform to IS:456.

5.03.00 The material properties for cement, aggregate and reinforcement steel shall be as
specified in Chapter-C0 “Switchyard Civil Works”.
5.07.00 The water used for mixing concrete shall be fresh, clean and free from oil, acids and
alkalies, organic materials or other deleterious substances. Potable water is
generally preferred.
6.00.00 DESIGN OF FOUNDATIONS
6.01.00 Structural design of the foundations shall be done by limit State method conforming
to IS 456.
6.02.00 The chimney should have all around clearance of 150mm from any part of stub
angle limiting to 450mm sq. minimum.
6.03.00 The chimney top or muffing must be at least 225 mm above ground level and also
the coping shall be extended upto lower most joint level between the bottom lattices
and the main corner legs of the tower.
6.04.00 Minimum thickness of foundation shall be 300 mm.
6.05.00 The distance between the lowest edge of the stub angle and the bottom surface of
concrete footing shall not be less than 150 mm or more than 200mm.
6.06.00 The total depth of foundations below the ground level shall not be less than 1.5
meters. To maintain the interchangeability of stubs for all types of foundations, for
each type of tower, the same depths of foundations shall be used for different types
of foundations.
6.07.00 The portion of the stub in the chimney and foundation slab shall be designed to take
full down-thrust or uplift loads by the cleats combined with the bond between stub
angles and concrete. The Contractor shall furnish the calculation for uprooting of
stub along with the foundation design.
6.08.00 Minimum 50mm thick pad of lean concrete corresponding to 1:3:6 nominal mix shall
be provided to avoid the possibility of reinforcement rod being exposed due to
unevenness of the bottom of the excavated pit.
6.09.00 Over Load Factor
The overload factor for foundations shall be considered as 1.1 i.e. the reaction
except due to dead loads on foundations shall be increased by 10 per cent.
7.00.00 CONSTRUCTION OF TOWER FOUNDATION
7.01.00 Excavation
7.01.01 Excavation work must not be started until the tower schedule & profile and
foundation drawing are approved by the Owner.

7.01.02 Except specified otherwise, all excavation for footing shall be made to the lines and
grades of the foundation. All excavation shall be protected so as to maintain a clean
subgrade, until the footing is placed, using timbering/shuttering, shoring etc., if
necessary. Any sand, mud, silt or other undesirable materials which may
accumulate in the excavated pit shall be removed by the Contractor before placing
concrete.
7.02.00 Rock excavation requiring Blasting
Wherever blasting is required for excavation in rock, the same shall be done after
obtaining license from the competent authority. Following shall be adhered to:
i) All provisions of explosive acts shall be adhered to.
ii) The magazine for the storage of explosive shall be to suit as per the requirements
of explosive department.
iii) Where blasting is required, same shall be controlled blasting.
iv) Contractor shall prepare the detailed blasting scheme and get the same
approved from Engineer-in-charge before carrying out the blasting operation. All
blasting shall be done as per the approved blasting scheme.
v) The Contractor shall obtain Licenses from Competent Authorities for undertaking
blasting work as well as for procuring, transporting to site and storing the
explosives as per explosives act. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe
transport, use, custody and proper accounting of the explosive Materials.
vi) The Contractor shall also observe any specific instructions given by the
Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for any
accident and injury / damage which may occur to any person or property of the
project or public on account of any operations connected with the storage,
transportation, handling or use of explosives and the blasting operations. The
Engineer-in-charge or his authorised representative shall frequently check the
Contractor's compliance with these precautions and the manner of storing and
accounting of explosives. The Contractor shall provide necessary facilities for this
the above.
vii) Controlled blasting shall be done by a specialised agency duly approved by

Engineer-in-charge. All controlled blasting shall be done by using time delay
detonators (i.e. excel type).
viii) All rules under the Explosives Act and other local rules in force shall be fully
observed. All blasting works shall be done in accordance with the stipulations
contained in IS: 4081.
7.03.00 Setting of Stubs

7.03.01 The stubs shall be set correctly in accordance with approved method at the exact
location and alignment and precisely at correct levels with the help of stub setting
templates and leveling instrument. Stubs shall be set in the presence of Owner's
representative available at site where required and for which adequate advance
intimation shall be given to the Owner by the Contractor.
7.03.02 Setting of stub at each location shall be approved by the Owner's representative.
7.03.03 Stub setting templates shall be designed and arranged by the Contractor at his own
cost for all types of towers with or without extension and also for leg extension. Stub
templates for standard towers and towers with extension upto 6M shall be of
adjustable type. The stub templates shall be painted. Generally for each
transmission line tower package, following numbers of stub setting templates shall
be deployed by the Contractor:
For each A type tower : 3 Nos.
For each of B, C and D type : 2 Nos.
However, if Owner feels that more number of templates are required for timely
completion of a particular line the Contractor shall have to deploy the same without
any extra cost to Owner.
7.03.04 One set of each type of stub setting template as applicable, shall be supplied to the
Owner, on completion of the project at no extra cost to Owner.
7.04.00 Mixing, Placing and Compacting of Concrete
7.04.01 The concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. However, in case of difficult
terrain hand mixing may be permitted at the discretion of Owner. The water for
mixing concrete shall be fresh, clean and free from oil, acids and alkalies. Saltish or
blackish water shall not be used.
7.04.02 Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of material and the mix is
uniform in colour and consistency, but in no case the mixing be done for less than
two minutes. Normally mixing shall be done close to the foundation, but in case it is
not possible the concrete may be mixed at the nearest convenient place. The
concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of final deposit
as rapidly as practicable by methods which shall prevent the segregation or loss of
any ingredient. The concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting
commences.
7.04.03 Form boxes shall be used for casting all type of foundations. The concrete shall be
well compacted such that no honey-combing is left in the concrete. The mechanical
vibrator shall be employed for compaction of the concrete. However, in case of
difficult terrain, manual compaction may be permitted at the discretion of Owner.
After concreting the chimney portion to the required height, the top surface should
be finished smooth with a slight slope towards the outer edge, to drain off any rain
water falling on the coping.

7.04.04 In wet locations, the site must be kept complete de-watered, both during the placing
of the concrete and for 24 hours thereafter. There should be no disturbance of
concrete by water during this period.
7.04.05 After the form-work has been removed if the concrete surface is found to be
defective, the damage shall be repaired with rich cement and sand mortar to the
satisfaction of the Owner's representative before the foundation pits are backfilled.
7.05.00 Back-Filling and Removal of Stub Template
7.05.01 After opening of form-work and removal of shoring and timbering, if any, backfilling
shall be started, after repairs, if any, to the foundation concrete. Backfilling shall
normally be done with excavated soil, unless it consists of large boulders/stones, in
which case the boulders shall be broken to a maximum size of 80 mm. At such
locations where borrowed earth is required for backfilling, shall be done by the
Contractor at his own cost, irrespective of lead.
7.05.02 The backfilling materials should be clean and free from organic or other foreign
materials. The earth shall be deposited in maximum 200 mm layers, leveled and
wetted and tempered properly before another layer is deposited. Care shall be
taken that the backfilling is started from the foundation ends of the pits, towards the
outer ends. After the pits have been backfilled to full depth, the stub template may
be removed.
7.05.03 The backfilling and grading shall be carried to an elevation of about 75 mm above
the finished ground level to drain out water. After backfilling 50 mm high earthen
embankment (bandh) will be made along the sides of excavation pits and sufficient
water will be poured in the backfilled earth for atleast 24 hours.
7.06.00 Curing
The concrete after setting for 24 hours shall be cured by keeping the concrete wet
continuously for a period of 10 days after laying. The pit may be back filled with
selected earth sprinkled with necessary amount of water and well consolidated in
layers not exceeding 200 mm of consolidated thickness after a minimum period of
24 hours and thereafter both the backfilled earth and exposed chimney top shall be
kept wet for the remainder of the prescribed time of 10 days. The uncovered
concrete chimney above the backfilled earth shall be kept wet by providing empty
cement bags dipped in water fully wrapped around the concrete chimney for curing
and ensuring that the bags are kept wet by the frequent pouring of water on them.
7.07.00 Benching
When the line passes through hilly/undulated terrain, for a few tower locations it
may be required to level the ground for casting of tower footings on same elevation.
All the activities related to make the required area of ground in same elevation for
casting of foundation, shall be termed as benching work. Benching work shall
include cutting of excess earth and removing the same to a suitable point of

disposal as required by the Owner. Benching shall be resorted to only after getting
specific approval from the Owner.
7.08.00 Protection of Tower Footing
7.08.01 The work shall include all necessary stone revetments, concreting and earth filling
above ground level in hilly/undulated terrain and special measures like RCC
retaining walls for protection of foundation close to or in nallah, river bed etc. The
top seal cover of the stone revetments shall be done with M20 concrete (nominal
mix). The Contractor shall furnish recommendations for providing protection at these
locations wherever required.
7.08.02 The quantity of excavated earth obtained from a particular location shall generally
be utilised in back-filling work in protection of tower footing of same locations,
unless it is unsuitable for such purpose. In the latter case, the back-filling shall be
done with borrowed earth of suitable quality. The consolidation of earth shall
however be done after backfilling.

PART- III
CHAPTER – T3
TOWER LINE ERECTION AND

STRINGING
PART- III
CHAPTER – T3
TOWER LINE ERECTION AND STRINGING
1.00.00 General Requirements T3-1
2.00.00 Treatment of Minor Galvanising Damage T3-1
3.00.00 Assembly T3-1
4.00.00 Insulator Hoisting T3-2
5.00.00 Handling of Conductor and Earthwire T3-2
6.00.00 Stringing of Conductor and Earthwire T3-4
7.00.00 Replacement T3-6
8.00.00 Final Checking, Testing and Commissioning T3-6

SECTION –T3 : TOWER LINE ERECTION AND STRINGING
1.01.00 The details of the scope of erection work shall include the cost of labour, all
tools and plants like tension stringing equipment and all other incidental
expenses in connection with erection and stringing work.
1.02.00 The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of all the materials to be
provided by the Contractor as per the scope of work to site, proper storage and
preservation at their own cost till such time the erected line is taken over by the
Owner.
1.03.00 The quantities of conductor, earthwire, insulators hardware, accessories of

conductor & earthwire, etc. are estimated by the Owner include excess material
towards wastages and damages during erection.
2.00.00 TREATMENT OF MINOR GALVANISING DAMAGE
In case any minor damage to galvanising is noticed, the same shall be treated
with zinc rich paint (having at least 90% zinc content) before erection.
3.00.00 ASSEMBLY
3.01.00 The method followed for the erection of towers, shall ensure the points
mentioned below :
a) Straining of the members shall not be permitted for bringing them into position.
It may, however, be necessary to match hole positions at joints and to facilitate
this, tommy bars not more than 450 mm long may be used.
b) Before starting erection of an upper section, the lower section shall be

completely braced and all bolts provided and tightened adequately in
accordance with approved drawings to prevent any mishap during tower
erection.
c)
All plan diagonals relevant to a section of tower shall be placed in position
before assembly of upper section is taken up.
d)
The bolt position in assembled towers shall be as per IS:5613 (Part-II/Section
e) 2)-1976.
Tower shall be fitted with number plate, danger plate, phase plate and anti-
f) climbing device as described.
All bank holes, if any left, after complete erection of the tower, are to be filled
up by bolts and nuts of correct size.
3.02.00 Tightening and Punching of Bolts and Nuts
3.02.01 All nuts shall be tightened properly using correct size spanner/torque wrench.
DARLIPALLI STPP Bid Doc.No.:CS- TECHNICAL PART-III Page

Stage-I (2 X 800MW) 9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI T3- 1 of 7
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
Before tightening, it shall be ensured that filler washers and plates are placed
in gaps between members wherever applicable, bolts of proper size and length
are inserted, and one spring washer is inserted under each nut. In case of step
bolts, spring washers shall be placed under the outer nut. The tightening shall
progressively be carried out from the top downwards, care being taken that all
bolts at every level are tightened simultaneously. The threads of bolts
projecting outside the nuts shall be punched at their position on the diameter to
ensure that the nuts are not loosened in course of time. If during tightening a
nut is found to be slipping or running over the bolt threads, the bolt together
with the nut shall be replaced.
3.02.02 The threads of all the bolts projected outside the nuts shall be welded at two
diametrically opposite places. The welding shall be provided from ground level
to waist level for single circuit towers and to bottom cross arm level for double
circuit towers. After welding, cold galvanised paint having at least 90% Zinc
content shall be applied to the welded portion. At least two coats of the paint
shall be applied. The cost of welding and paint including application of paint
shall be deemed to be included in the erection price.
3.02.03 In addition to the tack welding of nuts with bolts, as described above, the
Contractor can also propose some alternative arrangements, like use of epoxy
resin adhesive which can serve the purpose of locking the nut permanently with
the bolt and thus preventing pilferage of the tower members.
4.00.00 INSULATOR HOISTING
I-Suspension insulator strings shall be used on suspension towers and tension

insulator strings on angle and dead end towers. These shall be fixed on all the
towers just prior to the stringing. Damaged insulators and fittings, if any, shall
not be employed in the assemblies. Before hoisting, all insulators shall be
cleaned in a manner that will not spoil, injure or scratch the surface of the
insulator, but in no case shall any oil be used for the purpose. Corona control
rings/arching horn shall be fitted in an approved manner. The yoke
arrangements be horizontal for tensions strings. Torque wrench shall be used
for fixing different line materials and their components, like suspension clamp
for conductor and earthwire, etc., whenever recommended by the manufacturer
of the same of river crossing towers.
5.00.00 HANDLING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE
5.01.00 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to the towers or
conductors during stringing. While running out the conductors, care shall be
taken that the conductors do not touch or rub against the ground or objects
which could cause scratches or damages to the strands. The conductors shall
be run out of the drums from the top in order to avoid damage due to chafing.
Immediately after running out, the conductor shall be raised at the supports to
the levels of the clamps and placed into the running blocks. The groove of the
running blocks shall be of such a design that the seat is semi-circular and
larger than the diameter of the conductor earthwire and it does not slip over or
rub against the sides. The grooves shall be lined with hard rubber or neoprene

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
to avoid damage to conductor and shall be mounted on properly lubricated

bearings.
5.02.00 The running blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit the design of the
crossarm. All running blocks, especially those at the tension end, will be fitted
on the cross-arm with jute cloth wrapped over the steel work and under the
slings to avoid damage to the slings as well as to the protective surface finish
of the steel work. In case suspension, or section towers are used even for
temporary terminations, if this be unavoidable, they shall be well guyed and
steps shall be taken by the Contractor to avoid damage. Guying proposal
alongwith necessary calculations shall be submitted by the Contractor to
Owner by the Contractor for checking the tensions in the guy made available to
the Owner by the Contractor for checking the tensions in the guy wires. The
drums shall be provided with a suitable braking device to avoid damages, loose
running out and kinking of the conductor. The conductor shall be continuously
observed for loose or broken strands or any other damage. When approaching
end of a drum length, at least three coils shall be left when the stringing
operations are to be stopped. These coils are to be removed carefully, and if
another length is required to be run out, a joint shall be made as per the
recommendations of the manufacturers.
5.03.00 Repairs to conductors, if necessary, shall be carried out during the running out
operations, with repair sleeves. Repairing of conductor surface shall be done
only in case of minor damage, scuff marks etc. keeping in view both electrical
and mechanical safe requirements. The final conductor surface shall be clean
smooth and without any projections, sharp points, cuts, abrasions etc.
5.04.00 Conductor splices shall be so made that they do not crack or get damaged in
the stringing operation. The contractor shall use only such equipment/methods
during conductor stringing which ensures complete compliance in this regard.
5.05.00 Derricks shall be used where roads, rivers, channels, telecommunication or

overhead power lines, railway lines, fences or walls have to be crossed during
stringing operations. It shall be seen that normal services are not interrupted or
damage caused to property. Shut down shall be obtained when working at
crossing of overhead power lines. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible
for the proper handling of the conductor, earth-wire and accessories in the field.
5.06.00 The sequence of running out shall be from top to downwards i.e. the earthwire
shall be run out first, followed by the conductors in succession. Unbalances of
loads on towers shall be avoided as far as possible.
5.07.00 The proposed 132 kV transmission line may run parallel for certain distance
with the existing Transmission lines which may remain energised during the
stringing period. As a result there is a possibility of dangerous voltage build up
due to electromagnetic and electrostatic coupling in the pulling wire, conductors
and earthwires, which although comparatively small during normal operations
can be severe during switching. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
take adequate safety precautions to protect his employees and others from this
potential danger.
5.08.00 B and C type of towers are not designed for one side stringing. Therefore

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
proper guying arrangement shall be made for B and C type of towers during
stringing on one section while the other section is not strung. The Contractor
has to submit the detailed proposal alongwith the calculation for guying which
shall be approved by the Owner. Proper T&P shall be made available to the
Owner by the Contractor for checking the tensions in the guy wires. All the
expenditure on account of the above work is deemed to be included in the bid
price and no extra payment shall be made for the same.
6.00.00 STRINGING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE
6.01.00 The stringing of the conductor shall be done by standard stringing method.
6.02.00 After being pulled the conductor/earthwire shall not be allowed to hang in the
stringing blocks for more than 96 hours before being pulled to the specified
sag.
6.03.00 Conductor creep are to be compensated by over tensioning the conductor at

appropriate temperature for which calculations are to be submitted by the
contractor for Owner's approval.
6.04.00 The Bidder shall give complete details of the stringing methods which be
proposes to follow. Before the commencement of stringing the Contractor shall
submit the stringing charts for the conductor and earthwire for various
temperatures and span alongwith equivalent spans for the approval of the
Owner.
6.05.00 Jointing
6.05.01 All the joints on the conductor and earthwire shall be of compression type, in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer for which all
necessary tools and equipment like compressors, dies, processes etc. shall
have to be arranged by the Contractor. Each part of the joint shall be cleaned
by wire brush to make it free of rust or dirt etc. and properly greased with anti-
corrosive compound if required, and as recommended by the contractor before
the final compression is done with the compressors.
6.05.02 All joints or splices shall be made at least 30 meters away from the structures .
No joints or splices shall be made in spans crossing over main road, railways,
small rivers with tension spans. During compression or splicing operation the
conductor shall be handled in such a manner as to prevent lateral or vertical
bearing against the dies. After pressing the joint the aluminium sleeve shall
have all corners rounded, burrs and sharp edges removed and smoothened.
6.05.03 During stringing of conductor to avoid any damage to the joint, the Contractor
shall use a suitable protector with mid span compression joints in case joints
are to be passed over pulley blocks/aerial rollers. The size of the groove of the
pulley shall be such that the joint along with protection can be passed over it
smoothly.
6.06.00 Sagging-in-Operation

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
6.06.01 The conductor shall be pulled upto the desired sag and left in running blocks
for atleast one hour after which the sag shall be re-checked and adjusted, if
necessary before transferring the conductor from the running blocks to the
suspension clamps. The conductors shall be clamped within 36 hours of
sagging in.
6.06.02 The sag will be checked in the first and the last span of the section in case of
sections upto eight spans and in one intermediate span also for sections with
more than eight spans. The sag shall also be checked when the conductors
have been drawn up and transferred from running blocks to the insulator
clamps.
6.06.03 The running blocks, when suspended from the transmission structure for
sagging shall be so adjusted that the conductors on running blocks will be at
the same height as the suspension clamp to which it is to be secured,
6.06.04 At sharp vertical angles, the sags and tensions shall be checked on both sides
of the angle, he conductor and earthwire shall be checked on the running
blocks for equality of tension on both sides. The suspension insulator
assemblies will normally assume vertical positions when the conductor is
clamped.
6.06.05 Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in clam weather when
rapid changes in temperatures are not likely to occur.
6.06.06 Tensioning and Sagging of Conductors and Earthwire
The tensioning and sagging shall be done in accordance with the approved
stringing charts before the conductors and earthwire are finally attached to the
tower through the earthwire clamps for the earthwire and insulator strings for
the conductor. The Ìnitial' stinging chart shall be used for the conductor and
`final' stringing chart for earth-wire should be employed for this purpose.
Dynamometers shall be employed for measuring tension in the conductor and
earthwire. The dynamometers employed shall be periodically checked and
calibrated with the standard dynamometer.
6.07.00 Clipping In
6.07.01 Clipping of the conductors in positions hall be done in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer. Conductor shall be fitted with armour
rods where it is made to pass through suspension clamps.
6.07.02 The jumpers at the section and angle towers shall be formed to parabolic
shape to ensure maximum clearance requirements and shall match the jumper
drops shown in the tower drawings.
6.07.03 Fasteners in all fittings and accessories shall be secured in position. The
security clip shall be properly opened and sprung into position.
6.08.00 Fixing of Conductor and Earthwire Accessories

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
Vibration dampers for conductor and earthwire and other conductor and
earthwire accessories shall be installed by the Contractor as per the design
requirement and respective manufacturer's instructions within 24 hours of the
conductor/earthwire clamping. While installing the conductor and earthwire
accessories, proper care shall be taken to ensure that the surfaces are clean
and smooth and no damage shall occur to any part of the accessories.
7.00.00 REPLACEMENT
7.01.00 If any replacements are to be effected after stringing and tensioning or during
maintenance, leg members and bracings shall not be removed without
reducing the tension on the tower with proper guying or releasing the
conductor. If the replacement of cross arms becomes necessary after stringing,
the conductor shall be suitably tied to the tower at tension points or transferred
to suitable roller pulleys as suspension points.
7.02.00 The Contractor shall not be required to return to the Owner, empty conductor
and earthwire drums and shall dispose off the same at his cost except for steel
drums which shall be returned to Owner.
7.03.00 Any conductor and earthwire drum which has been opened by the Contractor
shall not be taken back by Owner and the unused conductor or earthwire in
such drum shall be treated as wastage permissible within the overall limits.
8.00.00 FINAL CHECKING TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
8.01.00 After completion of the works, final checking of the line shall be done by the
Contractor to ensure that all the foundation works, tower erection, and stringing
have been done strictly according to the specifications and as approved by the
Owner. All the works shall be thoroughly inspected keeping in view of the
following main points:
a) Sufficient backfilled earth is lying over each foundation pit and it is adequately
compacted.
b) Concrete chimneys and their copings are is good finally shaped conditions.
c) All the tower members are correctly used, strictly according to final approved
drawing and are free of any defect or damage, whatsoever.
d) All bolts are properly tightened and punched/tack welded.
e) The stringing of the conductors and earthwire has been done as per the
approved sag and tension charts and desired clearances are clearly available.
f) All conductor and earthwire accessories are properly installed.
g) All other requirements to complete the work like fixing of danger plate, phase
plate, number plate, anti climbing device etc., are properly installed.
h) Wherever required it should be ensured that revetment is provided.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
i) The original tracings of profile route alignment and tower, design, structural
drawings, bill of material, shop drawings of all towers are submitted to the
Owner for reference and record.
j) The insulation of line as a whole is tested by the Contractor by providing his

own equipment, labour etc. to the satisfaction of the Owner.
k) All towers are properly grounded.
l) The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning purpose.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
PART- III
CHAPTER – T4
LINE MATERIAL
PART- III
CHAPTER – T4
LINE MATERIAL
2.00.00 Earthwire T4-2
3.00.00 Conductor T4-2
4.00.00 Conductor Accessories T4-3
5.00.00 Earthwire Accessories T4-5
6.00.00 Hardware Fittings T4-6
7.00.00 Insulators T4-8

SECTION - T4 : LINE MATERIAL
1.00.00 GENERAL
1.01.00 All the equipment shall be of the latest design and conform to the best modern
practice adopted in the extra high voltage field. The Bidder shall offer only such
equipment as guaranteed by him to be satisfactory and suitable for 132 kV AC
transmission with single conductor and will give continued good performance.
1.02.00 The design, manufacturing process and quality control of all the materials shall
be such as to give maximum factor of safety, maximum possible working load,
highest mobility, elimination of sharp edges and a good finish.
1.03.00 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised, after all machining has been
completed, nuts may, however, be tapped (threaded) after galvanising and the
threads oiled. Spring washers shall be electrogalvanised. The bolt threads shall
be under cut to take care of increase in diameter due to galvanising .
Galvanising shall be done in accordance with IS:2629-1972. Fasteners shall
withstand four dips while spring washers shall withstand three dips. Other
galvanised materials shall be guaranteed to withstand at least six dips each
lasting one minute under the standard preece tests for galvanising.
1.04.00 The zinc coating shall be perfectly adherent, of uniform thickness, smooth,
reasonably bright, continues and free from imperfection such as flux, ash, rust
stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The zinc used for galvanising shall be
of grade Zn. 99.95 as per IS:209-1966.
1.05.00 Electrical System Data for 132 kV Lines
Nominal voltage 132 kV
Maximum voltage 145 kV
BIL(Impulse) 650 kV(peak)
Power Frequency 275 kV(rms)

Withstand Voltage
1.06.00 Line Data
Conductor
Name `Panther ” ACSR
Strand and wire diameter Al 30/3.00 Steel 7/3.00
Conductor per phase One
DARLIPALLI STPP Stage- Bid Doc.No.:CS- TECHNICAL PART-III Page

I (2 X 800MW) 9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI T4- 1 of 9
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
Inter Phase Spacing Vertical : 4390

Horizontal : 7650
Earthwire Size: 7/3.15 Dia : 9.45
Location of earthwire: one continuous earthwire to run horizontally on top of

the towers and conductors.
2.00.00 EARTHWIRE
2.01.00 The galvanised steel earthwire shall generally conform to the specification of
ACSR core wire as mentioned in IS 398 (Part-II)-1976 except where otherwise
specified herein.
2.02.00 Parameters of the earthwire
a) Stranding and wire diameter : 7/3.15 mm steel

b) Total sectional area : 54.55 sq.mm
c) Overall diameter : 9.45 mm
d) Approximate weight : 428 kg/km
e) Calculated D.C resistance at 20oC. : 3.375 ohms/km
f) Minimum ultimate tensile strength : 56 KN
g) Direction of lay of outer layer : Right Hand
2.03.00 The earthwire shall be performed and post-formed to avoid opening of strands
at the time of cutting or joining. The finished material shall have minimum
brittleness, as it will be subject to appreciable vibration while in use. It shall
withstand 3 and ½ number of one minute dips in the standard preece test.
2.04.00 There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished steel wire strand entering into
the manufacture of the earthwire. There shall be no strand joints or strand
splicer in any length of the completed stranded earthwire.
2.05.00 Standard length and random length shall be as per clause 3.05.00 below.
Bidder may offer two lengths in one drum.
3.00.00 CONDUCTOR
3.01.00 The conductor shall be Aluminium Core Steel Reinforced (ACSR) type. The
conductor shall confirm to IS:398 (Part-II) except where otherwise specified
herein.
3.02.00 Parameters of the conductor
a) Type Designation Panther ÀCSR’

b) Number and dia of steel strands 7/3.00 mm
c) Number and diameter of Aluminium strands 30/3.00 mm
d) Total sectiona area of ACSR 261.5 sq.mm
e) Total sectional area of aluminum 212.10 sq.mm
f) Overall diameter 21.00 mm
g) Approximate weight 974 kg/km
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
h) Calculated d.c. resistance at 20 deg.C 0.1391 Ohm/km

i) Minimum UTS 89.67 kN
3.03.00 The steel strands shall generally comply with the requirements stipulated for
earthwire at clause 2.00.00 above.
3.04.00 Joints shall be permitted in the individual Aluminium wires in all layers except
the outer most layer of the finished conductor. These joints shall be made by
cold pressure butt-welding and shall be such that no two such joints are within
15 metres of each other in the complete stranded conductor.
3.05.00 The standard length of the conductor shall be 2000 metres. A tolerance of 
5% on the standard length offered by the bidder shall be permitted. All lengths
outside this limit of tolerance shall be treated as random lengths. Random
lengths will be accepted provided no length is less than 70% of the standard
length and the total quantity of random lengths shall not be more than 10% of
the total quantity ordered.
4.00.00 CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES
4.01.00 Mid Span Compression Joint For Conductor
4.01.01 As per details given in IS:2121 Part-2..
4.02.00 Repair Sleeve
Repair Sleeve of compression type shall be used to repair conductor with not
more than two strands broken in the outer layer. The sleeve shall be
manufactured from 99.5% pure aluminium and shall have a smooth surface.
The repair sleeve shall comprise of two pieces with a provision of seat for
sliding of the keeper piece. The edges of the seat as well as the keeper piece
shall be of rounded that the conductor strands are not damaged during
installation.
4.03.00 The Bidder shall clearly specify the before and after compression dimensions
of the mid span compression joint and repair sleeve. The compression
pressure shall also be indicated by the Bidder. The dimensions and
dimensioanl tolerances for Mid Span Compression Joint and Repair Sleevs for
ACSR `PANTHER’ conductor shall be as follows:
_______________________________________________________________
Inner Dia. Outer Dia. Length Corner to Face to face
Corner width width
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
a) Al.Sleeve
Mid Span 23 +/- 1 38 +/- 1 610 +/- 5 37 +/- 0.5 32 +/- 0.5
Compression
Joint

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
b) Repair 23 +/- 1 38 +/- 1 250 +/- 5 37 +/- 0.5 32 +/- 0.5

Sleeve
Steel Sleeve
Mid Span 9.3+/-0.5 18+/-0.5 203+/-5 17.1+/-0.5 15.1+/-0.5

Compression
Joint
4.04.00 Vibration Damper for conductor and Earthwire
4.04.01 Vibration dampers of 4 R -Stock bridge type with four (4) different resonance
spread within the specified aeolian frequency bandwidth shall be used at all
suspension and tension points on each span to damp out the Aeolean
vibrations of the conductors to the specified level as mentioned hereinafter.
Two dampers minimum on each side per conductor/earthwire shall be used at
tension points and one damper minimum on each side per conductor at
suspension points for ruling design span.
4.04.02 The clamp of the vibration damper shall be made of high strength aluminium
alloy of type LM-6 or equivalent.
4.04.03 The messenger cable shall be made of high strength galvanised steel/stainless
steel with a minimum strength of 135 kg/mm2. It shall be of pre-formed and
post-formed quality in order to prevent subsequent droop of weight and to
maintain consistent flexural stiffness of the cable in service. The number of
strands in messenger cable shall be 19. The messenger cable other than
stainless steel shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the
recommendations of IS:4826-1979 for heavily coated wires.
4.04.04 The manufacturer must indicate the clamp bolt tightening torque to ensure that
the slip strength of the clamp is maintained between 2.5 KN and 5KN. The
clamp when installed on the conductor shall not cause excessive stress
concentration on the conductor leading to permanent deformation of the
conductor strands and premature fatigue failure in operation.
4.04.05 The vibration damper for conductor shall not have magnetic power loss more
than 0.5 watt at 350 amp at 50 Hz alternating current.
4.04.06 The vibration analysis of the system, with and without damper and dynamic
characteristics of the damper as detailed under Annexure-A shall have to be
submitted by the Bidder along with his bid. The technical particulars for
vibration analysis and damping design of the systems area follows:
Configuration Single conductor per phase and all the phases

In horizontal configuration
Span length
i) Ruling design span 300 meters
ii) Maximum Span 600 meters
iii) Minimum Span 50 meters
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
Tensile load in Conductor /earthwire As per sag tension calculations

Armour rods used Standard preformed armour rods/AGS
Max. Velocity of wind 30 kms per hour
Maximum permissible dynamic strains 150 micro strains
4.04.07 The damper placement chart for spans ranging from 50 m to 600 m shall be
submitted by the Bidder. All the placement charts should be duly supported by
relevant technical documents and sample calculations.
4.04.08 The damper placement charts shall include the following:

a) Location of the dampers for various combinations of spans and line tensions
clearly indicating the number of dampers to be installed per
conductor/earthwire per span.
b) Placement distances clearly identifying the extremities between which the
distances are to be measured.
c) Placement recommendation depending upon type of suspension clamp (viz
Free centre type, Armour grip type, etc.)
d) The influence of mid span compression joints, repair sleeves and armour rods
(standard and AGS) in the placement of dampers.
5.00.00 EARTHWIRE ACCESSORIES
5.01.00 Mid Span Compression Joint For Earthwire
It shall be used for joining two lengths of earthwire. The joint shall be made of
mild steel. The steel sleeve should not crack of fail during compression in it or
service period. The Brinnel Hardness of steel should not exceed 200. the steel
sleeve shall be hot dip galvanised. The joints shall not permit slipping off,
damage to , of failure of the complete earthwire or any part thereof at a load not
less than 95% of the ultimate tensile strength of the earthwire. The joint shall
have resistivity less than 75% of resistivity of equivalent length of earthwire.
The dimensions and the dimensional tolerance of the joint shall be as given
below:
_______________________________________________________________
Inner Dia. Outer Dia. Length Corner to Face to face
Corner width width
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
_______________________________________________________________
Steel 10.0 + 0.2 18  0.5 230  .5 20.2  0.5 17.5  0.5
Sleeve
5.02.00 Vibration Damper For Earthwire
5.02.01 Refer Clause 4.04.00 detailed above.
5.03.00 Flexible Copper Bond : As detailed in IS:2121 Part3.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
5.04.00 Suspension Clamp For Earthwire : As detailed in IS:2121 Part3
5.04.01 At all suspension towers, suitable suspension clamp shall be used to support
the earthwire of 7/3.15 mm size, the clamp shall be of either free-centre type or
trunion type and shall provide adequate area of support to the earthwire.
5.04.02 The total drop of the suspension assembly from the center point of the
attachment to the centre point of the Earthwire shall not exceed 150 mm. The
complete assembly shall be guaranteed for slip strength of not less than 9 kN
and not more than 14 kN. The breaking strength of the assembly shall not be
less than 25 kN.
5.05.00 Tension Clamp For Earthwire
5.05.01 The details shall be as per IS:2121 part-3. Only Compression type tension
clamp shall be used to hold 7/3.15 mm galvanised steel earthwire. Anchor
shackle shall be supplied which shall be suitable for attaching the tension
clamp to strain plates. The strain plates supplied with the towers will have a
minimum thickness of 8 mm with a hole of 17.5 mm diameter. Suitable lugs for
jumper connection shall also be supplied alongwith necessary bolts and nuts.
6.00.00 HARDWARE FITTINGS
6.01.00 The hardware fittings shall be as per the specification for hardware fittings
along with its component for the following insulator strings:
a) Single – Ì’ suspension insulator string.

b) Single Suspension –I string with Pilot Clamp
c) Double suspension insulator string.
d) Single tension insulator string.
e) Double tension insulator string.
6.02.00 Each hardware fittings shall be supplied complete in all respects and include
the following hardware parts:
a) Ball hook for suspension hardware fittings suitable for attaching to V-hanger of
the tower. Anchor shackle shall be supplied which shall be suitable for
attaching the tension hardware fittings to 12mm thick strain plate having 17.5
mm dia hole, of the tower.
b) Suitable yoke plates for double suspension and double tension hardware
fittings for the single conductor arrangement complying with the specifications
given hereinafter.
c) Suspension and deadend assembly to suit conductor size.
d) Other necessary fittings such as eye links, ball clevis, socket clevis, clevis eye,
U-clevis, ball link, arcing horn etc. to make the hardware fittings complete.
e) 2.5% extra fasteners shall be supplied along with the hardware fittings.
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
f) Socket fittings shall be provided with only R-shaped security clip in accordance
with IS-2486 (part-II).
6.03.00 Suspension Assembly
6.03.01 The suspension assembly shall include one AGS type suspension clamp
alongwith standard performed armour rods set suitable for ACSR PANTHER
conductor. The elastomer used for AGS clamp shall be neoprene rubber with
insert. This shall be suitable to withstand upto 75deg. Cetrigrade temperature
and atmospheric ozone.
6.03.02 The suspension clamp assembly alongwith standard armour rods shall have a
slip strength between 11to 16 KN.
6.03.03 The length and diameter of each rod shall be 1550+/-16 mm minimum and
6.35+/-.10 mm respectively. The tolerance in length of the rods in completed
set should be within 13 mm between the longest and shortest rod. The ends of
armour rod shall be parrot billed or ball ended.
6.03.04 The number of armour rods in each set shall be eleven. Each rod shall be
marked in the middle with paint for easy applications on the line.
6.03.05 The armour rod shall not loose, their resilience even after five applications.
The conductivity of each rod of the set shall not be less than 40% of the
conductivity of the International Annealed Copper Standard (IACS).
6.03.06 The armour rods shall be made of aluminium alloy of type 6061 or equivalent.
The alloy shall have a minimum tensile strength of 35 kg / mm2.
6.04.00 Dead And Assembly
6.04.01 The bidder shall clearly specify the before and after compression dimensions of
the deadend clamp. The compression pressure shall also be indicated by the
bidder. The dimensions and dimensional tolerances of the cross section of
aluminium dead-end for conductor shall be as given below:
_______________________________________________________________
Inner Dia. Outer Dia. Corner to Face to face
corner width width
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
_______________________________________________________________
Alum. Sleeve 23 +/- 1 38 +/- 1 37 +/- 0.5 32 +/- 0.5
Steel Sleeve 9.3+/-0.5 18+/-0.5 17.4+/-0.5 15.1+/-0.5
_______________________________________________________________

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
6.05.00 Yoke Plates
The strength of yoke plates shall be adequate to withstand the minimum

ultimate tensile strength, as specified in clause 7.01.00
The Plates shall be either triangular or rectangular in shape as may be

necessary. The design of yoke plate shall take into account the most
unfavourable loading conditions likely to be experienced as a result of
dimensional tolerances for disc insulators as well as components of hardware
fittings within the specified range. The plates shall have suitable holes for
fixing arcing horn. All the corners and edges should be rounded off with a
radius of atleast 3 mm. Design calculations, i.e. for bearing & tensile strength,
for deciding the dimensions of yoke plate shall be furnished by the bidder. The
holes provided for bolts in the yoke plate should satisfy shear edge condition as
per Clause No. 8.10 of IS:800-1984.
7.00.00 INSULATOR
7.01.00 The size of disc insulator, the number to be used in different type of strings,
their electromechanical strength and minimum creepage distance shall be as
follows :
_______________________________________________________________
Type of Size of disc Min. creepage No. of Electro-mechanical
String insulator distance of standard strength of insulator
(mm) each disc (mm) discs string (kN)
_______________________________________________________________
Single –I 255/280 x 145 292 1x9 70
Suspension
Double -do- -do- 2x9 2 x 70(140)

Suspension
Single tension -do- -do- 1x10 90
Double tension -do- -do- 2x10 2 x 90(180)
Note: Single Suspension (Pilot) string will be used for jumpers of tension type
towers. It will be similar to single suspension type except the clamp of the
conductor.
7.01.01 Disc Insulator: The insulator shall be pin and cap ; ball and socket type. The
disc insulator shall conform to IS:731.
7.01.02 Ball and Socket Designation

The dimensions of the balls and sockets shall be of 16mm designation , for 70
KN/90KN disc insulator in accordance with the standard dimensions stated in
IS:2486-(Part-II)/IEC:120.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
7.02.00 Materials
7.02.01 Porcelain : The porcelain used in the manufacture of shells shall be sound,
free from defects thoroughly vitrified and smoothly glazed.
7.02.02 Glaze: The finished porcelain shall be glazed in brown colour. The glaze shall
cover all exposed parts of he insulator and shall have a good lustre, smooth,
surface and good performance under the extreme weather conditions of a
tropical climate. It shall not be cracked or chipped by ageing under the normal
service conditions. The glaze shall have the same co-efficient of expansion as
of the porcelain body throughout the working temperature range.
7.02.03 Toughened Glass : In case of glass insulator, the glass used for the shells
shall be sound, free from defects such as flows, bubbles, inclusions etc. and be
of uniform toughness over its entire surface. All exposed glass surfaces shall
be smooth.
7.02.04 Cement: Cement used in the manufacture of the insulator shall not cause
fracture by expansion or loosening by contraction. The cement shall not give
rise to chemical reaction with metal fittings and its thickness shall be as small
and uniform as possible. Proper care shall be taken to correctly centre and
locate individual parts during cementing.
7.02.05 Pins and Caps: Pins and Caps shall be made of drop forged steel and
malleable cast iron/spheriodal graphite iron/drop forged steel respectively, duly
hot dip galvanised and shall not be made by jointing, welding, shrink fitting or
any other process from more than one piece of material.
7.02.06 Security Clips: Security clips shall be made of good quality stainless steel or
phosphor bronze as per IS:1385-1968 2.5% extra Security clip shall be
provided.
7.03.00 Hot Line Maintenance
The insulators offered shall be suitable for employment of hot line maintenance
technique so that the usual hot line operations can be carried out with ease,
speed and safety.
Bidders shall indicate the methods generally used in the routine hot and dead
line maintenance of HV lines for which similar insulator have been supplied by
them. Bidders shall also indicate the recommended periodicity of such
maintenance.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
PART- III
CHAPTER – T5
TESTS FOR
LINE MATERIAL
PART- III
CHAPTER – T5
TESTS FOR LINE MATERIAL
2.00.00 Type Test T5-1
3.00.00 Acceptance Tests T5-3
4.00.00 Routine Tests T5-5
5.00.00 Tests during Manufacture T5-5
Annexure-A : Norms and Procedures of Tests T5-6

CHAPTER – T5 : TESTS FOR LINE MATERIAL
1.01.00 The materials shall conform to all the type tests as per relevant standards. The
following acceptance, routine tests and tests during manufacturer shall be
carried out on the line material.
1.02.00 The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed
against them. Where a particular test is a specific requirement of this
specification, the norms and procedure of these shall be as specified in
annexure to this section.
1.03.00 For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values
guaranteed by the Bidder in his bid or the acceptance value specified in the
relevant standard, whichever is more stringent for that particular test.
2.00.00 TYPE TESTS
The line material shall conform to the following type tests -
2.01.00 Earthwire
a) UTS test - As per specification enclosed
b) DC resistance test - As per specification enclosed
2.02.00 Conductor (specification of following tests enclosed at Annexure)

a) UTS test on stranded conductor - As per specification enclosed
b) DC resistance test on stranded conductor - As per specification enclosed
2.03.00 Conductor and Earthwire Accessories
2.03.01 Mid Span Compression Joint for Conductor and Earthwire

a) Electrical Resistance Test – As per IS : 2121 - (Part-II) - 1981
b) Heating Cycle Test – As per IS:2486 (Part-I, 1971) (not applicable to mid span
compression joint for earthwire).
c) Slip Strength Test - As per IS:2486(part-I)-1971
d) Chemical analysis of material
2.03.02 Repair Sleeve for conductor

a) Chemical analysis of material
2.03.03 Flexible Copper Bond.

a) Slip strength test - As per specification enclosed
2.03.04 Vibration Damper for Conductor and Earthwire.

a) Dynamic characteristics test - As per specification enclosed
b) Vibration Analysis - As per specification enclosed
c) Clamp Slip Test - As per specification enclosed

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
d) Fatigue Test - As per specification enclosed

e) Chemical Analysis of Material
2.03.05 Earthwire Suspension clamp Assembly

a) Mechanical strength Test - As per specification enclosed
b) Clamp Slip Strength vs Torque test for suspension assembly - As per
specification enclosed
2.03.06 Earthwire Tension Clamp Assembly

a) Mechanical strength test (excluding Clamp) - As per specification enclosed
b) Slip strength test on tension assembly - As per specification enclosed
c) Electrical resistance test on tension Clamp - As per specification enclosed
2.04.00 Hardware Fittings
2.04.01 On the complete insulator string with hardware fittings

a) Power Frequency Voltage withstand test under wet condition - As per IS:731-
b) 1971
c) Impulse voltage withstand test under dry condition - As per IEC:383-1970.
d) Impulse voltage Flashover test under dry condition - As per IEC:383-1970.
e) Voltage distribution test- As per specification enclosed
f) Mechanical strength test for complete string - As per specification enclosed
Vibration test- As per specification enclosed
Notes:
1 All the type tests given above shall be conducted on single suspension and
single tension insulator strings alongwith hardware fittings.
2. The mechanical strength test given above shall also be conducted on
double tension and double suspension insulator string alongwith hardware
fittings.
2.04.02 On suspension hardware fittings only

Magnetic power loss test for suspension assembly - As per specification
enclosed
Clamp slip strength for clamp - As per specification enclosed
2.04.01 On Tension Hardware Fittings only (As per IS : 2486 -Part-I)

a) Electrical Resistance Test for dead end assembly
b) Heating Cycle Test for dead end assembly
c) Slip Strength Test for dead end assembly
2.05.00 On disc insulators

a) Verification of dimension – As per IS:731-1971
b) Thermal mechanical performance tests - As per IEC 575
c) Power frequency voltage withstand and Flashover test (wet) - As per IS:731-
d) 1971,
e) Impulse voltage withstand and flashover test (dry) - As per IS:731-1971
f) Visible discharge test (dry) - As per IS:731
RIV test (dry) - As per IS:8263-1976

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
3.00.00 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
3.01.00 Earthwire
a) Visual check on drum - As per specification enclosed
b) Visual check for joint etc. - As per specification enclosed
c) Dimensional check - As per specification enclosed
d) Galvanising test - As per specification enclosed
e) Lay length check - As per specification enclosed
f) Torsion test - As per specification enclosed
g) Elongation test - As per IS:398 (Part-II)
h) Wrap test - As per IS:398 (Part-II)
i) DC resistance test - As per IS:398 (Part-II)
j) Breaking load test - As per IS:398 (Part-II)
k) Chemical analysis of steel - As per IS:398 (Part-II)
3.02.00 Conductor
a) Visual and dimensional check on drum - As per specification enclosed
b) Visual check for joint scratches and length of conductor - As per specification
c) enclosed
d) Dimensional check on individual strands - As per specification enclosed
e)
f) Check for lay-rations of various layers - As per specification enclosed
g) Breaking load test on individual strands - As per IS:398 (Part IV)
h) Wrap test on aluminium strands - As per IS:398 (Part-IV)
i) DC resistance test on individual strands - As per IS:398 (Part IV)
Elongation test - As per IS:398 (Part IV)
Breaking load test on welded Aluminium strand - As per specification enclosed
Note: All the above tests shall be carried out on aluminium strands after
stranding only.

a) Visual examination & dimensional verification - IS:2121 (Part-II)
b) Galvanising Test - As per IS : 2121 (Part-II)
c) Hardness Test - As per specification enclosed
3.03.02 Repair Sleeve for conductor

a) Visual examination and dimensional verification – As per IS:2121 (Part-II)
3.03.03 Vibration Damper for Conductor and Earthwire.

a) Visual examination and dimensional verification – As per IS:2121 (Part-II)
b) Galvanising Test on - As per IS:2121 (Part-II)
i) Damper mass
ii) Messenger Cable
c) Verification of Resonance Frequencies - As per specification enclosed
d) Clamp Slip vs torque Test - As per specification enclosed

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
e) Clamp Bolt Torque Test - As per specification enclosed

f) Strength of the Messenger Cable - As per specification enclosed
g) Mass Pull Off Test - As per specification enclosed
3.03.04 Earthwire Suspension Clamp Assembly

a) Visual examination and dimensional verification – As per IS : 2121 (Part-II)
b) Galvanising test - As per IS:2121 (Part-II)
c) Clamp slip strength Vs Torque test - As per specification enclosed
d) Mechanical strength Vs Torque test each component
3.03.05 Earthwire Tension Clamp Assembly

a) Visual examination and dimensional verification - As per IS : 2121 (Part-II)
b) Galvanising test (excluding clamp) - As per IS : 2121 (Part-II)
c) Hardness test - As per specification enclosed
d) Mechanical strength test on each component (excluding clamp)
e) Slip strength test on tension clamp - As per specification enclosed
3.04.01 On both suspension and tension hardware fittings

a) Visual Examination - As per IS : 2486 - (Part-I) - 1971
b) Verification of dimension - As per IS : 2486 - (Part-I) - 1971
c) Galvansing/Electroplating - As per specification enclosed
d) Mechanical strength test of welded joint - As per specification enclosed
e) Mechanical strength test of each component - As per specification enclosed
f) Test on locking devices for ball and socket coupling – As per IEC:372(2)-1976
g) Chemical analysis, hardness test, grain size, inclusion rating and magnetic
particle inspection for forging /casting- As per specification enclosed
3.04.02 On suspension Hardware fittings only

a) Clamp slip strength vs Torque test for suspension clamp - As per specn.
enclosed
b) Shore hardness test of elastomer cushion for AG suspension clamp
c) Bend test for armour rod set - As per IS:2121-(Part-I)1981
d) Resilience test for armour rods set - As per IS:2121
e) Conductivity test for armour rods set. - As per IS:2121
3.04.03 On Tension Hardware Fittings only

a) Slip strength test for dead end assembly : As per IS:2486-(Part-I)1971
3.05.00 Disc insulator

a) Visual Examination - As per IS:731-1971
b) Verification of dimensions - As per IS:731-1971
c) Temperature cycle test - As per IS:731-1971
d) Galvanising test - As per IS:731-1971
e) Mechanical performance test – As per IEC:575-1977
f) Tests on locking device for ball and socket coupling – As per IEC:372(2) -1976
g) Eccentricity test - As per specification enclosed
h) Chemical analysis of zinc - As per specification enclosed
i) Electro-mechanical failing load - As per IEC:383-1993

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
j) Puncture test - As per IS:731-1971

k) Porosity test - As per IS:731-1971
4.00.00 ROUTINE TESTS
4.01.00 Earthwire
a) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands
b) Check for correctness of stranding.
c) Check that drums are as per specification.
4.02.00 Conductor
a) Check to ensure that the joints are assembly per specification
b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands
c) Check that drums are as per specification.
d) All acceptance test as mentioned in clause 3.02.00 above to be carried out on
each coil.

a) Visual Examination and Dimensional Verification - As per IS : 2121 -
(Part-II) - 1981

a) Visual Examination – As per IS:2486 (Part-I) 1971
b) Proof Load Test - As per specification enclosed
4.05.00 Insulators
a) Visual inspection - As per IS:731-1971
b) Mechanical routine test - As per IS:731-1971
c) Electrical routine test - As per IS:731-1971
5.00.00 TESTS DURING MANUFACTURE
5.01.00 Earthwire
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising – As per specification enclosed
b) Chemical analysis of steel
5.02.00 Conductor
a) Chemical analysis of aluminium used for making strands – As per specification
enclosed

a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising : Samples taken from the zinc
ingots shall be chemically analysed as per IS:209-1966
b) Tests on Malleable Castings, Forgings and Fabricated Hardware.
The Chemical analysis, mechanical and metalographic tests, inclusion rating
and magnetic particle inspection for malleable castings, chemical analysis,
hardness test, grain size and magnetic particle inspection for forgings and
chemical analysis and mechanical tests for fabricated hardware will be based
on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding these tests will
be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Owner in the

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
quality assurance programme.
5.04.00 Hardware Fittings (on all components as applicable)

a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising – As per specification enclosed
b) Chemical analysis, hardware tests, grain size, inclusion rating and magnetic
particle inspection for forgings/castings
c) Chemical analysis and proof load test for fabricated hardware - As per
specification enclosed
5.05.00 Insulators (on all components as applicable)

a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising - As per specification enclosed
b) Chemical analysis, mechanical and metalographic test and magnetic particle
inspection for malleable/castings - As per specification enclosed
c) Chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings
- As per specification enclosed
d) Hydraulic internal pressure tests on shell - As per specification enclosed
e) Verification of dimensions – As per IS:731-1971
ANNEXURE-A
NORMS AND PROCEDURES OF TESTS
1.00.00 TESTS ON EARTHWIRE
1.01.00 UTS Test
Circles perpendicular to the axis of the earthwire shall be marked at two places on a
sample of earthwire of minimum 5 m length suitably places compressed with dead end
clamps at both ends. The load shall be increased at a steady rate upto 50 % of UTS
and held for one minute. The circles drawing shall not be distorted due to relative
movement of strands. These after the load shall be increased at a steady rate to 100 %
of UTS and held for one minute. The earthwire sample shall not fail during this period.
The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and value
recorded.
1.02.00 DC Resistance Test
On an earthwire Sample of minimum 5 m length two contact clamps shall be fixed. The
resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin double - bridge by placing the clamps initially
zero meter and subsequently one meter apart. The test shall be repeated at least five
times and the average value recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to 20 o C.
The resistance corrected to 20 o C shall confirm to the requirement of this specification.
1.03.00 Visual Check for joints
One drum from each lot shall be rewound in the presence of the inspector. The
inspector shall visually check for scratches etc. and see that the earthwire generally
conforms to the requirements of this specification.
1.04.00 Torsion Test

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
The number of twists which a single steel strand shall withstand during torsion test
shall be at least eighteen for a length of 100 time the standard dia of that strand.
1.05.00 Visual check on Drums
The drums shall be visually checked to ensure that they conform to his specification.
1.06.00 Dimensional Check
The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform to
the requirements of this specification.
1.07.00 Lay length Check
The lay length shall be checked to ensure that they conform to the requirements of this
specification.
1.08.00 Galvanising Test
The test procedure shall be as specified in IS:4826-1968. The material shall conform
to the requirements of this specification.
1.09.00 Chemical Analysis of Zinc used for Galvanising
Samples taken from zinc ingots shall be chemically / spectrographically analysed. The
same shall be in conformity to the relevant standards.
1.10.00 Chemical Analysis of Steel
Sample taken from the steel ingots/coils/strands shall be chemically /

spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the relevant standards.
2.00.00 TESTS ON CONDUCTOR
2.01.00 UTS Test On Stranded Conductor
Circles perpendicular to the axis of the conductor shall be marked at two places on a
sample conductor of minimum 5 m length suitably compressed with dead end clamps
at either end. The load shall be increased at a steady rate upto 50% of rated UTS and
held for one minute. The circles drawing shall not be distorted due to the relative
movement of strands. Thereafter the load shall be increased at a steady rate to 100%
of the rated UTS for one minute. The conductor sample shall not fail during this period
the applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value
recorded.
2.02.00 DC Resistance Test On Stranded Conductor
On a conductor sample of minimum 5 m length two contact clamps shall be fixed. The
resistance shall be measured by a Kevin double bridge by placing the clamps initially
zero meter and subsequently one metre apart. The test shall be repeated at least five
times and the average value recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the
value at 20 deg.C as per IS:398 (Part-IV)-1979. The resistance corrected at 20 deg. C
shall conform to the requirements of this specification.
2.03.00 Chemical Analysis Of Aluminum

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
Samples taken from the heat treated batch/coils/strands, shall be chemically/

spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity to the requirements
stated in this specification.
2.04.00 Visual And Dimensional Check On Drums
The drums shall be visually and dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform to
2.05.00 Visual Check For Joints, Scratches, etc.
Conductor drums shall be rewound in the presence of the inspector. The inspector
shall visual check for scratches, joints etc. and that the conductor generally conform to
2.06.00 Dimensional Check On Aluminium Strands
The individual strands shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform to
the requirement of this specification.
2.07.00 Check For Lay-Rations Of Various Layers
The lay-rations of various layers shall be checked to ensure that they conform to the
requirements of this specification.
2.08.00 Elongations Test
The test procedure shall be as specified in IS-398 (Part-IV)-1979. The material shall
conform to the requirements of this specification.
2.09.00 Breaking Load Test On Welded Aluminium Strand
The aluminium wires shall be welded and shall be subjected to tensile load. The
welded point of the wire shall be able to withstand the minimum breaking load of the
individual strand guaranteed by the bidder.
3.00.00 CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE ACCESSORIES
3.01.01 Slip Strength Test
The minimum free length between grips and the tests sample shall be three meters for
conductor joint and one meter for earthwire joint. The test shall be carried out as per
IS:2121-(Part-II) 1981 clause 6.4 except that the load shall be steadily increased to
95% of minimum ultimate tensile strength of conductor/ earthwire and retained for one
minute at this load. There shall be no movement of the conductor/earthwire relative to
the fittings during this one minute period and not failure of the fittings.
3.01.02 Hardness Test
The Brineel hardness at various points on the earthwire compression joint and tension
clamp shall be measured.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
3.02.00 Flexible Copper Bond
Slip Strength Test
On applying a load of 3 KN (300kg) between the two ends, stranded flexible copper
cable shall not come out damaged. After the test, the lugs shall be cut open to
ascertain that the gripping of cable has not been affected.
3.03.00 Vibration Damper for Conductor and Earthwire
3.03.01 Dynamic Characteristics Tests
a) The damper shall be mounted with its clamp tightened with torque recommended by
the manufacturer on shaker table capable of simulating sinusoidal vibrations for
frequencies ranging from 8 Hz to 50 Hz conductor and 10 to 70 Hz for earthwire.
b) The damper assembly shall be vibrated shall be vibrated vertically with double
amplitude of 1 mm at different frequencies to determine the following characteristics
with the help of suitable record instruments:
i) Reactance Vs frequency.
ii) Phase angle Vs frequency.
iii) Power dissipation Vs frequency.
c) The above characteristics shall be determined by averaging the characteristics of the

damper by carrying out this test three times on a single damper. This test shall be
carried out on atleast five nos, of damper. The mean reactance and phase angle
curves shall be drawn with the criteria of best fit method.
d) The reactance Vs frequency curve shall not show steep peaks at resonance
frequencies and deep troughs between the resonance frequencies. The resonance
frequencies shall be suitably spread within the aeolian vibration frequency band
between the lower and upper dangerous frequency limits determined by the vibration
analysis of conductor without dampers. The mean damper force response Vs
frequency curve shall show a trend compatible with optimum force of the conductor
acting on the sinusoidal half wavelength at unit displacement of antinode and it shall lie
within the envelope of F1 and F2.
Where F1 = 2 fi and F2 = 0.5 fi

for vibration damper for conductor / earthwire
Where fi = 2 x 2  f  TM
T = tension of conductor
M = mass of conductor
e) F1 and F2 are forces in kg/mm and ‘f’ is the frequency in hertz. Similarly for mean
phase angle Vs frequency curve the phase angles shall lie between 25 deg. and 135
deg. within the frequency range of interest.
3.03.02 Vibration Analysis
The vibration analysis of the conductor/earthwire shall be done with and without
damper installed on the span. The vibration analysis shall be done on a digital

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
computer using energy balance approach, the following parameters shall be taken into
account for the propose of analysis:
a) The analysis shall be done for single conductor / earthwire without armour rods as per
the parameters given at relevant clauses of this specification. The tension shall be
taken as 2530 kg and 1255 kg for conductor and earthwire respectively for a span
ranging from 50 m to 600 m.
b) The self damping factor and flexural stiffness (E1) for conductor shall be calculated on
the basis of experimental results. The details of experimental analysis with the data
should be furnished.
c) The power dissipation curve obtained from dynamic characteristic. Test shall be used
for analysis with damper.
d) Examine the Aeolean vibration level of the conductor with and without vibration damper
installed at the recommended location for wind velocity ranging from 0 to 30 Km. Per
hour. Predicting amplitude, frequency and vibration energy input.
e) From vibrations analysis of conductor / earthwire without damper, antinode vibration

amplitude and dynamic strain levels at clamped span extremities as well as antinodes
shall be examined and thus lower and upper dangerous frequency limits between the
aeolan vibration level exceeding the specified limits shall be determined.
f) From vibrations analysis of conductor / earthwire without damper, antinode vibration
amplitude and dynamic strain levels at clamped span extremities as well as antinodes
shall be examined and thus lower and upper dangerous frequency limits between the
aeolean vibration level exceeding the specified limits shall be determined.
g) The dynamic strain levels at damper attachment points, clamped span extremities and
antinodes shall not exceed the specified limits. The damper clamp vibration amplitude
shall not be more than that of the specified fatigue limits.
3.03.03 Clamp Slip and Fatigue Tests
a) Test Set Up
The clamp slip and fatigue tests shall be conducted on a laboratory set up with a
minimum span length of 30 m. The conductor / earthwire shall be tensioned at KN/
KN and shall not be equipped with protective armour rods at any point. Constant
tension shall be maintained within the span by means of lever arm arrangement. After
the conductor/earthwire has been tensioned, a clamp shall be installed to support the
conductor/ earthwire at both ends and thus influence of connecting hardware fittings
are eliminated from the free span. The clamps shall not be used for holding the tension
on the conductor/ earthwire. There shall be no loose parts, such as suspension clamps,
U bolts etc. on the test span supported between clamps mentioned above. The Span
shall be equipped with vibrations inducing equipment suitable for producing steady
standing vibration. The inducing equipment shall have facilities for stepless speed
control as well as stepless amplitude arrangement. Equipment shall be available for
measuring the frequency, cumulative number of cycles and the amplitude of vibration
at any point along the span.
b) Clamp Slip Test
The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span. The damper clamp, after
tightening with the manufacturer’s specified tightening torque, when subjected to a

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
longitudinal pull of 2.5 KN paralleled to the axis of conductor/ earthwire for a minimum
duration of one minute shall not slip i.e. the permanent displacement between
conductor/ earthwire and clamp measured after removal of the load shall not exceed
1.0 mm. The lode shall be further increased till the clamp starts slipping. The load at
which the clamp slips shall not be more than 5 KN.
c) Fatigue Test
The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span with the manufacturer’s
specified tightening torque. It shall be ensured that the damper shall be kept minimum
three loops away from the shaker to eliminate stray signals influencing damper
movement. The damper shall then be vibrated at the highest resonant frequency of
each damper mass. For dampers involving torsional resonant frequencies tests shall
be done at torsional modes also in addition to the highest resonant frequencies at
vertical modes. The resonance frequency shall be identified as the frequency at which
each damper mass vibrates with the maximum amplitude on itself. The amplitude of the
damper clamp be maintained not less than  25 / f mm, where f is the frequency in Hz.
The test shall be conducted for minimum ten million cycles at each resonant frequency
mentioned above. During the test if resonance shift is observed the test frequency shall
be tuned to the new resonant frequency.
The clamp slip test as mentioned here in above shall be repeated after fatigue test
without retorquing or adjusting the damper clamp and the clamp shall withstand a
minimum load equal to 80% of the slip strength for a minimum duration of one minute.
After the above tests, the damper shall be removed from conductor/ earthwire and
subjected to dynamic characteristics test. There shall not be any major deterioration in
the characteristic of the damper. The damper then shall be cut open and inspected.
There shall not be any broken, loose, or damaged part. There shall not be significant
deterioration or wear of the damper. The conductor/ earthwire under clamp shall be
also be free from any damage.
For the purpose of acceptance, the following criteria shall be applied:
i)There shall not be any frequency shift by more than +/- 2 H for frequencies lower than
15 Hz and +/- 3 Hz for frequencies higher than 15 Hz.
ii)The percentage variation in reactance cure after fatigue test shall lie within the limit
which is to be guaranteed by the manufacturer.
iii)The reduction in power dissipation characteristic after the fatigue test shall not be
more than the value guaranteed by the manufacturer. However, in no case the
minimum power dissipation shall be less than governed by the lower limits of the
reactance and phase angle curves as indicated in clause 3 (a) above.
iv)The deterioration of characteristics in respect of reactance and power dissipation
shall be compared with respect to guaranteed value.
3.03.04 Verification of Resonance Frequencies
The damper shall be mounted on a shakar table and vibrated at damper clamp
amplitude of +/- 0.5 mm to determine the resonance frequencies. The resonance shall
be visually identified as the frequency at which damper mass vibrates with maximum
amplitude on itself. The resonance frequency thus identified shall be compared with
the guaranteed value.
3.03.05 Clamp Bolt Torque Test

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
The clamp shall be attached to section of the conductor / earthwire. A torque of 150%
of the manufacturers specified torque shall be applied to the bolt. There shall be no
failure of component parts.
3.03.06 Strength of the Messenger Cable
The messenger cable shall be fixed in a suitable tensile testing machine and the tensile
load shall be gradually applied until yield point in reached. The load shall not be less
than the value guaranteed by the Bidder.
3.03.07 Mass Pull Off Test
Each mass shall be pulled off in turn by fixing the mass in one jaw and the clamp in the
other of a suitable tensile testing machine. The longitudinal pull shall be applied
gradually until the mass begins to pull out off the messenger cable. The pull off loads
shall not be less than the value guaranteed by the Bidder (min 500 kg.)
3.04.00 Earthwire Suspension / Tension Clamp
3.04.01 Mechanical Strength test
The suspension assembly / tension assembly (excluding tension clamp) shall be

subjected to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength
(UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified.
This load shall be held for five minutes and ten removed. After removal of the load, the
components shall not show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to
disassemble them by hand. Hand tools may be used to loosen the nuts initially. The
components shall not show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to dis-
assemble them by hand. Hand tools may be used to loosen the nuts initially. The
assembly shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be
further increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS is reached and held
for one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then
be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
3.04.02 Clamp Slip Strength Vs Torque Test for Suspension assembly.
The suspension assembly shall be vertically suspended by means of a flexible

attachment. A suitable length of the G. S. Earthwire shall be fixed in the clamp. The
clamp slip strength at various tightening torque shall be obtained by gradually applying
the load at one end of the earthwire. The clamp slip strength Vs torques curve shall be
drawn. The clamp slip strength at the recommended tightening torque shall be more
than 9 KN but less than 14 KN.
3.04.03 Slip Strength Test of Tension Clamp
Tension clamps shall be compressed on a 5 m length of earthwire on both ends. The

assembly shall be mounted on a tensile testing machine and anchored in a manner
similar to the arrangement to be used in service. A tensile load f 50% of the specified
braking load of the earthwire shall be applied and the sample shall be marked in such a
way that movement relative to the fitting can easily by detected. Without any
subsequent adjustment of the fitting, the load shall be steadily increased to 95% of the
specified breaking load and maintained for one minute. There shall be no movement of
the earthwire relative to the fitting during this one minute period and no failure of the
fitting also.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
3.04.04 Resistance Test of Tension Clamp.
The tension clamp and the jumper shall be compressed on two suitable lengths of
earthwire. The electrical resistance shall be measured between points on earthwire
near the clamp and near the jumper mouth keeping 25 mm clearance of the fitting and
should not exceed 75% of the measured resistance of equivalent length of earthwire.
The test shall be conducted with direct current. The current connections shall be at a
distance not less than 50 times the diameter of earthwire from the fitting and shall be
made so that effective contact is ensured with all those strands of the earthwire which
would be taken into account in calculating its equivalent resistance. The test shall be
repeated with the polarity reversed and the average of the two results considered
assembly the measured value.
3.04.05 Hardness test.
The Brinnel hardness at various points on the steel portion of tension clamp shall be
measured.
3.04.06 Magnetic Power Loss Test
The sample shall be tested in a manner to simulate service conditions. A 50 Hz

alternating current over the range of 100 Amps to 500 Amps shall be passed and the
Wattmeter readings of the power loss with an without damper for the different values of
current shall be tabulated and plotted on a graph. The difference in the power loss with
and without damper shall be limited to 1 watt for 350 Amps (rms). The losses shall be
determined by averaging the figures obtained from at least four samples of vibration
dampers.
3.04.07 Chemical Analysis Test
Chemical analysis of the material used for the manufacturer of items shall be
conducted to check conformity of the same with technical specification and approved
drawings.
4.00.00 HARDWARE FITTINGS AND INSULATORS
4.01.00 Voltage Distribution Test
The voltage across each insulator Unit shall be measured by sphere gap method. The
result obtained shall be converted into percentage. The Voltage across any disc should
not exceed 20 % of the total voltage applied on the string.
4.02.00 Mechanical Strength Test for Complete String
The complete insulator string alongwith its hardware fittings excluding arcing horn, and
suspension assembly /dead end assembly shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of
the specified Minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a
steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. This load shall be held for five
minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the string component shall not
show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble term by hand.
Hand tools may be used to remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string
shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further
increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS in reached and held for one
minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then be

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
increased until the failing load in reached and the value recorded.
4.03.00 Vibration test
The suspension string shall be tested in suspension mode and tension string in tension
mode and tension string in tension mode itself in a laboratory span of minimum 30
metres. In the case of suspension string a tension more than 400 Kg shall be applied
with the help of turn buckle. The insulator string alongwith help of turn buckle. The
insulator string alongwith hardware fittings shall be strung at a tension of 2530Kg. and
shall be secured with clamps. Vibration dampers shall not be used. The conductor
shall be vibrated at the resonant frequency (f) of the insulator string (more than 10 Hz)
corresponding to two or more loops on the insulator string by the means of vibration
inducing equipment. The peak displacement in ‘mm’ at the antinode point nearest to
the string shall be measured and the same shall not be less than 900/ (f** 1.8), mm
depending upon ‘f’ selected. The insulator string shall withstand a minimum of 10
million cycles. After the test is over, the disc insulator shall be examined for looseness
of pins and cap or any crack in the cement. The hardware fittings shall be examined for
fatigue failure, slip strength and mechanical strength test. The slip strength of
suspension assembly shall be carried out without any adjustment/removal. The disc
insulators shall be further subjected to the following acceptance tests assembly per
relevant standards
a) Temperature cycle test followed by mechanical performance test assembly

per IEC:575 Clause 4.0 : 60% discs of be tested
b) Puncture test : 40% discs of be tested
4.04.00 Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analysed assembly per IS:209-
1979. The purity shall not be less than 99.95% and 99.7% for zinc used for galvanising
and sleeve respectively.
4.05.00 Test for forgings
The chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings, will
be assembly per the internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The
sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details
regarding test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the contractor and
Owner.
4.06.00 Tests on castings
The chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic tests and magnetic particle
inspection for castings will be as per the internationally recognised procedures for
these tests. The sampling will based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The
details regarding test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the contractor and
Owner.
4.07.00 Hydraulic internal pressure tests on shells
The test shall be carried out on 100% shells before assembly. The details regarding
test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the contractor and Owner.
4.08.00 Thermal mechanical performance test

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
The thermal mechanical performance test shall be performed in accordance with IEC-
575, clause 3, with the following modifications:
The applied mechanical load during this test shall be 70% of the rated electro-
mechanical of mechanical value. The acceptance criteria shall be :
a) X > R + 3S where X = Mean value of the individual electro-mechanical/

mechanical failing load.
R = Rated Electro-mechancal / mechanical failing load.
S = Standard deviation.
b) The minimum sample size shall be taken as 10.
c) The individual electro-mechanical/ mechanical failing load shall be at least
equal to the rated value. Also electrical puncture shall not occur before the
ultimate fracture.
4.09.00 Eccentricity Test :
The insulator shall be vertically on a fixture using dummy pin and socket. A vertical
scale with horizontal slider shall be used for the axial run out. The pointer shall be
positioned in contract with the bottom of the outermost petticoat of the disc. The disc
insulators shall be rotated with reference to the fixture and the slider shall be allowed
to more up and down on the scale but always maintaining contact with bottom of the
outermost petticoat. After one full rotation of the disc, the maximum and minimum
position the slider has reached can be found out. Difference between the above two
readings shall satisfy the guaranteed value for axial run out.
Similarly using a horizontal scale with a vertical slider the radial run out shall be
measured. The slider shall be positioned in the scale so as to establish contact with
the circumference of the insulator and disc insulator rotated on it’s fixture always
maintaining contact. After one full rotation the maximum and minimum position the
slider has reached on the scale are found out. The difference between the above
readings shall satisfy the guaranteed particulars for radial run out.
4.10.00 Magnetic power Loss Test for Suspension Assembly
Same as clause 3.04.06 above
4.11.00 Clamp slip strength Vs Torque Test and clamp slip for AG Suspension Clamp /
envelope type suspension clamp.
The suspension clamp shall be vertically suspended by means of a flexible attachment.

A suitable length of ACSR ‘PANTHER’ conductor shall be fixed in the clamp. The
clamp slip strength at various tightening torque shall be obtained by gradually applying
the load at one end of the conductor. The clamp slip strength vs torque curve shall be
drawn. The above procedure is applicable only for free centre type suspension clamp.
For AG suspension clamp only clamp slip strength after assembly shall be found out.
The clamp slip strength at the recommended tightening torque shall be more than 11
KN but less than 16 KN.
4.12.00 Galvanising / Electroplating Test
The test shall be carried out as per clause no. 5.9 of IS:2496 (Part-I) - 1971 except that
both uniformity of zinc coating and standard Preach test shall be carried out and the
results obtained shall satisfy the requirements of this specification.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
4.13.00 Mechanical Strength Test for welded Joints
The welded portion of the component shall be subjected to a load of 2000 kgs for one
minute. Thereafter, it shall be subjected to dei penetration/Ultrasonic test. There shall
not be any crack at the welded portion.
4.14.00 Mechanical strength test of each component
Each Component shall be subjected to a its 50 % Minimum UTS load which shall be
increased at a steady rate to 67 % of min. UTS. The load shall be held for 5 minute
and then removed. The component shall then be again be loaded to 50 % of UTS and
then load shall be increased at a steady rate till the specified UTS and held for one
minute. No fracture should occur. The load shall then be increased until the failing load
is reached and the value recorded.
4.15.00 Test For Forging, Casting and Fabricated Hardware
The Chemical analysis, hardness test, grain size, inclusion rating and magnetic particle
inspection for forging, casting and chemical analysis and proof load test for fabricated
hardware shall be as per the internationally recognised procedure for these tests The
sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details
regarding tests will be as in the quality Assurance programme.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
PART- IV
GENERAL TECHNICAL
REQUIRMENTS
PART- IV
CHAPTER – G1
GENERAL TECHNICAL
REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER-G1
1.00.00 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the technical requirements stipulated elsewhere in the

specification, the following requirements shall also be applicable.
1.01.00 General Requirements
1.01.01 The equipment must be new, of highest grade, best quality of their kind, to
best engineering practice and latest state of art, and in accordance with
purpose for which they are intended and to ensure satisfactory performance
throughout the service life.
1.01.02 The Contractor shall note that the equipment offered by him in the bid only
shall be accepted for supply, with the minimum modifications as
agreed/accepted.
1.01.03 The auxiliary power shall be of the following parameters:
Nominal Variations Frequency Phase Neutral

connection
Voltage in voltage (Hz) _____
415V + 10% 50 + 5% 3 Solidly earthed
240V + 10% 50 + 5% 4 Solidly earthed
Combined variation of voltage and frequency shall be + 10%. Fault level of

415V system shall not be less than 20kA.
1.01.04 All equipment/systems shall be designed for ambient temperature of 50

deg.C.
1.01.05 The equipment and systems shall conform in all aspects to high standards of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of continuous
commercial operation in the specified manner and shall also be in line with
the current practice for reliable and efficient functioning of system. The
Employer will interpret the meaning of the specifications, data, drawings,
etc., and shall have a right to reject or accept any work or material which in
his assessment does not meet the requirement of this specification and /or
applicable national and international standards, codes, rules, etc.
1.01.06 In the event of a conflict between requirements of any two clauses of the
specification, documents or requirements of different codes/standards
specified, interpretation of the Employer shall apply, unless confirmed
otherwise by the Employer in writing based on a written request from the
Contractor.
DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I B id Doc. No. TECHNICAL PART-IV Page

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI G1- 1 of 21
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
1.01.07 In addition the Employer shall have the right to reject any materials or
equipment which is not of type proven in service in similar applications or
which is not supplied by a manufacturer with the applicable experience.
Whenever a material or equipment is specified by reference to a particular
brand name, manufacturer or vendor, the Contractor may supply another
manufacturer’s equivalent product if sufficient information is furnished so as
to enable the Employer to determine, without the need for any additional
clarification/data, that the products proposed are proved and equivalent or
superior to those named.
1.01.08 In accordance with the specific instructions as shown on manufacturer’s

drawings or as directed by the Employer or his representative, the
Contractor shall unload, store, erect, install, wire, test and place into
commercial use all electrical equipment included in the contract. Equipment
shall be installed in a neat and workman like manner so that it is level, plumb
square and properly aligned and oriented. Commercial use of switchgear
equipment shall mean completion of all site tests specified and energisation
at rated voltage.
1.01.09 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearance from
the concerned authorities for commissioning the equipment and the
switchyard/substation.
1.01.10 Manufacturer’s drawings, instructions and recommendations shall be

correctly followed in handling, setting, testing and commissioning of all
equipment and structures. Care shall be exercised in handling to avoid
distortion to stationary structures, damage to the finish, damage to delicate
instruments or other electrical parts. Adjustment shall be made wherever
necessary to the stationary structures for plumb and level, for the sake of
appearance or to avoid twisting of frames or bending of hinged members.
1.01.11 During erection, the equipment furnished with finish coats of paint shall be
touched up by the Contractor if their surface is spoiled or marred while
handling.
1.01.12 The Contractor shall supply the normal consumables, adhesives, filling
compounds, touch up paints, soldering/brazing materials, wherever required.
1.01.13 The Contractor shall also supply the requisite name plates, number plates,
phase plates, colour plates, labels, etc.
1.01.14 The Contractor’s responsibility under the contract shall also generally
include:
a) The adherence to the dimensions of parts, specifications and locations

thereof as shown on the drawings/documents except for deviations or
variations specifically reviewed and authorized by the Employer/Engineer.
b) To ensure the strength of all parts, materials and equipment to withstand all
stresses including electrical, mechanical, seismic and other forces which
may be experienced or expected during long term operations as well as
those stresses caused by faults, switching operations and abnormal system
conditions.
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
c) The correct application, and the satisfactory and proper performance of all
material, equipment, structures, systems and auxiliary services under all
specified operating conditions without signs of undue strain and without
breakdown, damage or deterioration of any of the equipment due to faulty or
unsuitable material, equipment, workmanship, design, erection, construction,
installation and commissioning.
d) The correct, safe and proper installation of all equipment at the site.
e) The transportation of all temporary and permanent materials, equipment and

apparatus from the places of manufacture to the site, and the subsequent
removal of temporary materials, equipment and structures.
f) The supply of complete documentation including drawings, specifications,

reports, quality control documents, operating/maintenance/commissioning
procedures and manuals for all works equipment.
g) To replace/modify/correct any faulty equipment/systems found at any time

up to the completion of the guaranteed period.
1.01.15 The Contractor shall take utmost care while working so that no damage is
done to existing equipment. The Contractor shall be liable to pay for the
damage done by making good the loss.
1.01.16 The Contractor shall cooperate in all aspects and exchange the necessary
technical data /drawings with the other agencies and Employer’s
consultants/contractors to ensure proper coordination and completion of
work in time.
1.02.00 Limit of Contract
All the equipment, materials and services furnished by the Contractor shall
be complete in every respect with all mountings, fitting, fixtures and standard
accessories normally provided with such equipment, and needed for
erection, completion and safe operation of the equipment as required by
applicable codes though they may not have been specifically detailed in
technical specification and unless included in the list of exclusions. The
Contractor shall supply at no extra cost to Employer any additional
material/service not covered specifically but which are found to be required
for fulfillment of the scope of work under specification.
1.03.00 Standards
1.03.01 The Contractor is required to follow local statutory regulations stipulated in

the latest amended Electricity Supply Act 1948 and Indian Electricity Rules
1956, and other local rules and regulations.
1.03.02 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest
issue with all amendments of standards and/or codes specified under
respective section heads. The standards mentioned in the specification are
not mutually exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to
compliment each other. The Contractor shall also note that list of standards
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
presented in this specified is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of

standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC. When the
specified requirements stipulated in the specifications exceed or differ than
those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the
specification shall take precedence.
1.03.03 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better

performance that that specified in the standards referred under section shall
also be acceptable.
1.03.04 In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC,
the salient points of difference shall be clearly brought out in additional
information schedule alongwith English language version of standard of
relevant extract of the same. The equipment conforming to standards other
than IS/IEC shall be subject to Employer’s approval.
1.03.05 The list of standards for the various equipment is given in the Annexure-I of
this section.
1.03.06 The full names of the codes and standards mentioned in abbreviations
under various equipment heads are as follows:
BS British Standards
IEC/CISPR International Electro-technical Commission
IS Bureau of Indian Standards
ISO International Organisation for Standards
NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association
1.04.00 Name plate
1.04.01 The equipment nameplate should preferably be of stainless steel. In case of

aluminium, it should be at least 2mm thick.. The inscription on the name
plate shall be engraved and no punching shall be accepted except for
equipment serial number and year of manufacture. These nameplates shall
be black with white engraved lettering.
1.04.02 The rated current, extended current rating and rated thermal current shall be
clearly indicated in the name plate in case of current transformer.
1.04.03 Rated voltage, voltage factor and intermediate voltage shall be clearly
indicated on the nameplate in case of capacitor voltage transformer.
1.04.04 Name plates of cubicles and panels may be made of non-rusting metal or 3
ply lamicoid.
1.04.05 Each switch shall a clear inscription identifying its function. Switches shall
also have a clear inscription of each position indication.
1.05.00 Galvanising
1.05.01 The galvanised surface shall consist of a continuous film adhering to the
steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth, and shall be free from
defects like dissolved patches, base, spot, unevenness of coating, spelter
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
which is loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered

surfaces, flaking or peeling off, etc. The presence of any of these defects
shall render the material liable to rejection.
1.05.02 All exposed ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised as per IS:2629 &
IS:2633, Galvanising shall be uniform, smooth continuous and free from acid
spots. Should the galvanising of the sample be found defective, the entire
batch of steel shall have to be re-galvanised at Contractor’s cost. The
amount of zinc deposit shall be not less than 610 gms. per sq.m. of surface
area and in addition, the thickness of zinc at any spot shall not be less than
85 microns. The Employer reserves the right to measure the thickness of
zinc deposit by Elkometer or any other instrument acceptable to Employer
and reject any component which shows thickness of zinc at any location less
than 85 microns. The testing on the galvanised materials shall be carried out
as per IS:2633.
1.05.03 The amount of zinc deposit over threaded portion of the bolts, nuts and
screws shall not be less than 300 gms. per sq. meter of surface area. The
amount of zinc deposit on washers shall not be less than 340 gms. per sq.
meter of surface area. The threads having extra deposit of zinc shall be
removed by die cutting after the completion of galvanising. The removal of
extra zinc shall be carefully done so that threads shall have minimum
deposits of zinc on them as specified.
1.06.00 Painting
The sheet steel to be painted shall be pretreated in tanks in accordance with

IS:6005. Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scales
shall be removed by pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be
washed in running water. Then these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot
water and dried. The phosphate coating shall be “class-C” as specified in
IS:6005. The phosphated surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior to
application of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer application, two
coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint on panels shall be applied.
Electrostatic paining shall also be acceptable. Finishing paint on outside of
the panels shall be as required otherwise by the Employer. The inside of the
panels shall be glossy white. Each coat of finishing shall be properly stoved.
The paint thickness shall not be less than 50 microns. Finished parts shall
be coated by peelable compound by spraying method to protect the finished
surfaces from scratches, grease, dirt and oil spots during testing,
transportation, handling and erection.
1.07.00 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
1.07.01 The Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to ensure
that the equipment and services under the scope of contract whether
manufactured or performed within the Contractor’s works or at his sub-
contractor’s premises or at the Employer’s site or at any other place of work
are in accordance with the specifications. Such programmes shall be
outlined by the Contractor and shall be finally accepted by the
Employer/authorised representative after discussions before the award of
the contract. The QA programme shall be generally in line with ISO-9001/IS-
14001. A quality assurance programme of the contractor shall generally
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
cover the following:
i) His organisation structure for the management and implementation of the

proposed quality assurance programme
ii) Quality System Manual
iii) Design Control System
iv) Documentation Data Control System
v) Qualification data for Bidder’s key Personnel.
vi) The procedure for purchase of materials, parts, components and selection of
sub-contractor’s services including vendor analysis, source inspection,
incoming raw-material inspection, verification of materials purchased etc.
vii) System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including process,
fabrication and assembly.
viii) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions and
resolution of deviations.
ix) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.
x) Control of calibration and testing of measuring testing equipments.
xi) System for Quality Audits.
xii) System for identification and appraisal of inspection status.
xiii) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the Employer.
xiv) System for handling storage and delivery.
xv) System for maintenance of records, and

xvi) Furnishing quality plans for manufacturing and field activities detailing out
the specific quality control procedure adopted for controlling the quality
characteristics relevant to each item of equipment/component as per
enclosed formats No.: QS-01-QAI-P-09/F1 and QS-01-QAI-P-09/F2
respectively.
xvii) Furnishing Monthly Progress reports on sub-contractor (vendor) approvals
identified in "DR" category during pre-award discussions and MQP / FQP
submission/ approval on enclosed format No.: QS-01-QAI-P-02/F1 and QS-
01-QAI-P-02/F2 respectively.
xviii) Furnishing Monthly status of final placement of purchase order on identified

sub-contractors.
1.07.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.07.02.01 All materials, components and equipment covered under this specification
shall be procured, manufactured, erected, commissioned and tested at all
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
the stages, as per a comprehensive Quality Assurance Programme. An

indicative programme of inspection/tests to be carried out by the contractor
for some of the major items is given in the respective technical specification.
This is, however, not intended to form a comprehensive programme as it is
the contractor’s responsibility to draw up and implement such programme
duly approved by the Employer. The detailed Quality Plans for
manufacturing and field activities should be drawn up by the Bidder and will
be submitted to Employer for approval. Schedule of finalisation of such
quality plans will be finalised before award.
1.07.02.02 Manufacturing Quality Plan will detail out for all the components and
equipment, various tests/inspection, to be carried out as per the
requirements of this specification and standards mentioned therein and
quality practices and procedures followed by Contractor’s/ Sub-contractor"s/
sub-supplier's Quality Control Organisation, the relevant reference
documents and standards, acceptance norms, inspection documents raised
etc., during all stages of materials procurement, manufacture, assembly and
final testing/performance testing. The Quality Plan shall be submitted on
electronic media e.g. floppy or E-mail in addition to hard copy, for review.
Once the same is finalised, hard copies shall be submitted for approval. After
approval the same shall be submitted in compiled form on CD ROM.
1.07.02.03 Field Quality Plans will detail out for all the equipment, the quality practices
and procedures etc. to be followed by the Contractor’s site Quality Control
Organisation, during various stages of site activities starting from receipt of
materials/equipment at site.
1.07.02.04 The Bidder shall also furnish copies of the reference documents/plant
standards/acceptance norms/tests and inspection procedure etc., as referred
in Quality Plans alongwith Quality Plans. These Quality Plans and reference
documents/standards etc. will be subject to Employer’s approval without
which manufacturer shall not proceed.
These approved documents shall form a part of the contract. In these

approved Quality Plans, Employer shall identify customer hold points (CHP),
i.e. test/checks which shall be carried out in presence of the Employer’s
Project Manager or his authorised representative and beyond which the work
will not proceed without consent of Employer/Authorised representative in
writing. All deviations to this specification, approved quality plans and
applicable standards must be documented and referred to Employer
alongwith technical justification for approval and dispositioning.
1.07.02.05 The contractor shall submit to the Employer Field Welding Schedule for field
welding activities in the enclosed format No.: QS-01-QAI-P-02/F3. The field
welding schedule shall be submitted to the Employer alongwith all supporting
procedures, like welding procedures, heat treatment procedures, NDT
procedures etc. atleast ninety days before schedule start of erection work at
site.
1.07.02.06 No material shall be despatched from the manufacturer’s works before the
same is accepted subsequent to predespatch final inspection including
verification of records of all previous tests/inspections by Employer’s Project
Manager/Authorised representative and duly authorised for despatch by
issuance of MDCC.
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
1.07.02.07 All material used for equipment manufacture including casting and forging
etc. shall be of tested quality as per relevant codes/standards. Details of
results of the tests conducted to determine the mechanical properties,
chemical analysis and details of heat treatment procedure recommended
and actually followed shall be recorded on certificates and time temperature
chart. Tests shall be carried out as per applicable material standards and/or
agreed details.
1.07.02.08 All welding and brazing shall be carried out as per procedure drawn and
qualified in accordance with requirements of ASME Section IX/BS-4870 or
other International equivalent standard acceptable to the Employer.
All welding/brazing procedures shall be submitted to the Employer or its

authorised representative for approval prior to carrying out the
welding/brazing.
1.07.02.09 All brazers, welders and welding operators employed on any part of the
contract either in Contractor’s/his sub-contractor’s works or at site or
elsewhere shall be qualified as per ASME Section-IX or BS-4871 or other
equivalent International Standards acceptable to the Employer.
1.07.02.10 Test results or qualification tests and specimen testing shall be furnished to
the Employer for approval. However, where required by the Employer, tests
shall be conducted in presence of Employer/authorised representative.
1.07.02.11 For all pressure parts and high pressure piping welding, the latest applicable
requirements of the IBR (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall also be essentially
complied with. Similarly, any other statutory requirements for the
equipments/systems shall also be complied with.
1.07.02.12 All the heat treatment results shall be recorded on time temperature charts
and verified with recommended regimes.
1.07.02.13 No welding shall be carried out on cast iron components for repair.
1.07.02.14 Unless otherwise proven and specifically agreed with the Employer, welding
of dissimilar materials and high alloy materials shall be carried out at shop
only.
1.07.02.15 All non-destructive examination shall be performed in accordance with

written procedures as per International Standards, The NDT operator shall
be qualified as per SNT-TC-IA (of the American Society of non-destructive
examination). NDT shall be recorded in a report which includes details of
methods and equipment used, result/evaluation, job data and identification of
personnel employed and details of co-relation of the test report with the job.
1.07.02.16 a) The Contractor shall list out all major items/ equipment/ components to be
manufactured in house as well as procured from sub-contractors (BOI). All
the sub-contractor proposed by the Contractor for procurement of major
bought out items including castings, forging, semi-finished and finished
components/equipment etc., list of which shall be drawn up by the
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
Contractor and finalised with the Employer, shall be subject to Employer's

approval on enclosed format No. QS-01-QAI-P-01/F3. The Sub-vendors’
name which are not in NTPC provided list shall be deemed to be considered
in DR category.
b) NTPC follows a well defined sub-contractor’s/sub-vendor assessment and

approval process, the broad contours of which are also defined at NTPC
website www.ntpctender.com along with a FAQ which answers most of the
queries on the subject.
c) An indicative list of sub-vendors which has been accepted by NTPC in the

past for Corporate Awarded similar packages based on the respective
Technical Specifications are enclosed in the tender specification for
reference purpose only. The purpose of this list is to provide general
guidance to the prospective Bidders / Main Contractors for this package
only. Further, this list is indicative in nature and may undergo revision for
future packages based on the performance feedback received from NTPC
sites / other agencies about the supplier / sub vendors / supplied material.
However, it is not the intention to limit the subvendor to only such names
appearing in the above list and Main contractor is free to propose additional
sub-vendors in his bid offer which will be subject to NTPC sub-vendor
assessment system upon receipt of requisite details in a time bound mutually
agreed schedule. Moreover listed suppliers may or may not be able to
supply the material as per current Tech Specifications for the present
package. Bidder is required to enquire before finalizing the suppliers / sub
vendors for the present contract to meet provisions of the current Tech
Specs.
d) The contractor’s proposal shall include vendor’s facilities established at

the respective works, the process capability, process stabilization, QC
systems followed, experience list, etc. along with his own technical
evaluation for identified sub-contractors and shall be submitted to the
Employer for approval within a time bound schedule drawn during detailed
engineering process. Such sub-vendor proposed in his bid offer shall be
deemed to be identified in DR category and upon final acceptance by NTPC
in writing, contractor can place order on such accepted sub-vendor only.
e) Monthly progress reports on sub-contractor detail submission / approval

shall be furnished as per Engineering Co-ordination Procedure. Such vendor
approval shall not relieve the contractor from any obligation, duty or
responsibility under the contract. Sub-vendor whose details are not
submitted within the agreed cutoff date, shall be deemed to be withdrawn by
the contractor.
For components/equipment procured by the contractors for the purpose of

the contract, after obtaining the written approval of the Employer, the
contractor’s purchase specifications and inquiries shall call for quality plans
to be submitted by the suppliers. The quality plans called for from the sub-
contractor shall set out, during the various stages of manufacture and
installation, the quality practices and procedures followed by the vendor’s
1.07.02.17 quality control organisation, the relevant reference documents/standards
used, acceptance level, inspection of documentation raised, etc.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
Such quality plans of the successful vendors shall be finalised with the
Employer and such approved Quality Plans shall form a part of the purchase
order/contract between the Contractor and sub-contractor. Within three
weeks of the release of the purchase orders/contracts for such bought out
items/components, a copy of the same without price details but together with
the detailed purchase specifications, quality plans and delivery conditions
shall be furnished to the Employer on the monthly basis by the Contractor.
Employer reserves the right to carry out quality audit and quality surveillance
of the systems and procedures of the Contractor’s or their subvendor’s
quality management and control activities. The contractor shall provide all
necessary assistance to enable the Employer carry out such audit and
surveillance.
1.07.02.18 The contractor shall carry out an inspection and testing programme during
manufacture in his work and that of his sub-contractor’s and at site to
ensure the mechanical accuracy of components, compliance with drawings,
conformance to functional and performance requirements, identity and
acceptability of all materials parts and equipment. Contractor shall carry out
all tests/inspection required to establish that the items/equipments conform
1.07.02.19 to requirements of the specification and the relevant codes/standards
specified in the specification, in addition to carrying out tests as per the
approved quality plan.
Quality audit/surveillance/approval of the results of the tests and inspection

will not, however, prejudice the right of the Employer to reject the equipment
if it does not comply with the specification when erected or does not give
complete satisfaction in service and the above shall in no way limit the
liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in ensuring complete
conformance of the materials/equipment supplied to relevant specification,
1.07.02.20 standard, data sheets, drawings, etc.
For all spares and replacement items, the quality requirements as agreed for
the main equipment supply shall be applicable.
Repair/rectification procedures to be adopted to make the job acceptable

shall be subject to the approval of the Employer/ authorised representative.
1.07.02.21 Burn in and Elevated Temperature Test Requirement for Electronics Solid
State Equipment
1.07.02.22 All solid state electronic systems/equipment shall be tested as a complete

system/equipment with all devices connected for a minimum of 168 hours (7
Days) continuously under energized conditions prior to shipment from
1.07.02.23 Manufacturing works, as per the following cycle.
Elevated Temperature Test Cycle

a)
During the elevated temperature test which shall be for 48 hours of the total
168 hours of testing, the ambient temperature shall be maintained at 50
deg.C. The equipment shall be interconnected with devices which will cause
it to repeatedly perform all operations it is expected to perform in actual
b) service with load on various components being equal to those which will be
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
experienced in actual service.
During the elevated temperature test the cubicle doors shall be closed (or
shall be in the position same as they are supposed to be in the field) and
inside temperature in the zone of highest heat dissipating
components/modules shall be monitored. The temperature rise inside the
cubicle should not exceed 10 deg.C above the ambient temp. at 50 deg.C.
Burn in Test Cycle
The 48 hours elevated temperature test shall be followed by 120 hours of

burn in test as above except that the temperature shall be reduced to the
ambient temperature prevalent at that time.
c) During the above tests, the process I/O and other load on the system shall
be simulated by simulated inputs and in the case of control systems, the
process which is to be controlled shall also be simulated. Testing of
individual components or modules shall not be acceptable.
In case the Contractor/ sub-contractor is having any alternate established

procedure of eliminating infant mortile components, the detail procedures
followed by the Contractor/ sub- contractor alongwith the statistical figures to
validate the alternate procedure to be forwarded.
The Contractor/Sub-contractor shall carry out routine test on 100% item at

contractor/sub-contractor's works. The quantum of check/test for routine &
acceptance test by employer shall be generally as per
criteria/sampling plan defined in referred standards. Wherever
standards have not been mentioned quantum of check/test for routine /
acceptance test shall be as agreed during detailed engineering stage.
QUALITY ASSURANCE CIVIL WORKS : Please refer to Appendix – I to GI
QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS
The Contractor shall be required to submit two hard copies and two sets on
1.07.02.24 CDROM of the following Quality Assurance Documents as identifed in
respective quality plan with tick ( ) mark within three weeks after despatch
of the equipment.
1.07.03
Typical contents of Quality Assurance Document is as below:-
i) Quality Plan,
ii) Material mill test reports on components as specified by the

specification and approved Quality Plans.
1.07.03.01
iii) Factory test reports/results for testing required as per applicable
codes and standard referred in the specification and approved Quality
Plans.
iv) Type test report(wherever applicable).

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
v) Non-destructive examination results /reports including radiography

interpretation reports.
Sketches/drawings used for indicating the method of traceability of
the radiographs to the location on the equipment.
vi) Heat Treatment Certificate/Record (Time- temperature Chart)
vii) All the accepted Non-conformance Reports (Major/Minor) / deviation,

includeding complete technical details / repair
procedure)Verification sketches, if used and methods used to verify
that the inspection and testing points in the Quality Plan were
performed satisfactorily.
viii) CHP / Inspection reports duly signed by the Inspector of the

Employer and Contractor for the agreed Customer Hold Points.
ix) Certificate of Conformance (COC) whever applicable.

x) MDCC
Similarly, the contractor shall be required to submit two hard copies and two
sets on CD ROM of Quality Assurance Documents ( in line with above)
pertaining to field activities as per Approved Field Quality Plans and other
agreed manuals/ procedures, prior to commissioning of individual system.
Due to the large variety of equipment items, it is always possible to adapt the
1.07.03.02 content of the quality document to better match the particularities of any
equipment. This shall be done in agreement with the Supplier and the
Inspector.
The Quality Document file shall be progressively completed by the Supplier's

1.07.03.03 sub- supplier to allow regular reviews by all parties during the manufacturing.
Each quality document shall have a project specific Cover Sheet bearing
name & identification number of equipment and including an index of its
contents with page control on each document.
Before shipping any equipment, the Supplier shall make sure that
thecorresponding quality document or in the case of protracted phased
deliveries, the applicable section of the quality document file is
completed. The supplier will then notify the Inspector regarding the
readiness of the quality document (or applicable section) for review.
1.07.03.04 i) If the result of the review carried out by the Inspector of the Quality
document (or applicable section) is satisfactory.The Inspector shall stamp,
the quality document ( or applicable section) for release.
ii)If the quality document is unsatisfactory, the Supplier shall endeavor to

correct the incompleteness, thus allowing to finalize the quality document (
or applicable section) by time compatible with the requirements as per
contract documents. When it is done, the quality document ( or applicable
section) is stamped by the Inspector.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
iii)If a decision is made to ship equipment, whereas all outstanding actions

cannot be readily cleared for the release of the quality document by the time
as per contract documents ( or finalization of the applicable section of the
quality document within one month as per corresponding shipment date).
The supplier shall immediately, upon shipment of the equipment, send a
copy of the quality document Review Status ( signed by the Supplier
Representative) to the Inspector and notify of the committed date for the
completion of all outstanding actions & submission.The Inspector shall
stamp the quality document for applicable section when it is effectively
completed.
The final quality document will be compiled and issued at the final assembly
place of equipment before shipment.
1.07.03.05 TRANSMISSION OF QUALITY DOCUMENTS
As a general rule, two hard copies of the quality document and Two CD
ROMs shall be issued to the Employer not later than 1 month after the
delivery date for the corresponding equipment . One set of quality document
shall be forwarded to Corporate Quality Assurance Department and other set
to respective Site .
For the particular case of phased deliveries, the complete quality document
to the Employer shall be issued not later than 1 month after the date of the
last delivery similarly as stated above.
1.07.04 ENGINEER’S SUPERVISION
1.07.04.01 To eliminate delays and avoid disputes and litigation, it is agreed between
the parties to the Contract that all matters and questions shall be referred to
the Project Manager and without prejudice to the provisions of ‘Arbitration’
clause in Section GCC of Vol.I, the Contractor shall proceed to comply with
the Project Manager's decision.
1.07.04.02 The work shall be performed under the supervision of the Project Manager.
The scope of the duties of the Project Manager pursuant to the Contract, will
include but not be limited to the following:
i) Interpretation of all the terms and conditions of these documents and

specifications:
ii) Review and interpretation of all the Contractor’s drawing, engineering

data, etc:
iii) Witness or his authorised representative to witness tests and trials either
at the manufacturer’s works or at site, or at any place where work is
performed under the contract :
iv) Inspect, accept or reject any equipment, material and work under the
contract :
v) Issue certificate of acceptance and/or progressive payment and final

payment certificates
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
vi) Review and suggest modifications and improvement in completion

schedules from time to time, and
vii) Supervise Quality Assurance Programme implementation at all stages of

the works.
1.07.05 INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES
1.07.05.01 The word ‘Inspector’ shall mean the Project Manager and/or his authorised
representative and/or an outside inspection agency acting on behalf of the
Employer to inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the
works during its manufacture or erection.
1.07.05.02 The Project Manager or his duly authorised representative and/or an outside
inspection agency acting on behalf of the Employer shall have access at all
reasonable times to inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of
the works during its manufacture or erection and if part of the works is being
manufactured or assembled on other premises or works, the Contractor shall
obtain for the Project Manager and for his duly authorised representative
permission to inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on
the Contractor’s own premises or works.
1.07.05.03 The Contractor shall give the Project Manager/Inspector fifteen (15) days
written notice of any material being ready for testing. Such tests shall be to
the Contractor’s account except for the expenses of the Inspector’s. The
Project Manager/Inspector, unless the witnessing of the tests is virtually
waived, will attend such tests within fifteen (15) days of the date on which
the equipment is noticed as being ready for test/inspection failing which the
contractor may proceed with test which shall be deemed to have been made
in the inspector’s presence and he shall forthwith forward to the inspector
duly certified copies of test reports in two (2) copies.
1.07.05.04 The Project Manager or Inspector shall within fifteen (15) days from the date
of inspection as defined herein give notice in writing to the Contractor, or any
objection to any drawings and all or any equipment and workmanship which
is in his opinion not in accordance with the contract. The Contractor shall
give due consideration to such objections and shall either make
modifications that may be necessary to meet the said objections or shall
inform in writing to the Project Manager/Inspector giving reasons therein,
that no modifications are necessary to comply with the contract.
1.07.05.05 When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor’s or sub-
contractor’s works, the Project Manager /Inspector shall issue a certificate to
this effect fifteen (15) days after completion of tests but if the tests are not
witnessed by the Project Manager /Inspectors, the certificate shall be issued
within fifteen (15) days of the receipt of the Contractor’s test certificate by the
Project Manager /Inspector. Project Manager /Inspector to issue such a
certificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the works.
The completion of these tests, or the issue of the certificates shall not bind
the Employer to accept the equipment should it, on further tests after
erection be found not to comply with the contract.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
1.07.05.06 In all cases where the contract provides for tests whether at the premises or
works of the Contractor or any sub-contractor, the Contractor, except where
otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labour,
material, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be
reasonably demanded by the Project Manager /Inspector or his authorised
representatives to carry out effectively such tests on the equipment in
accordance with the Contractor and shall give facilities to the Project
Manager/Inspector or to his authorised representative to accomplish testing.
1.07.05.07 The inspection by Project Manager / Inspector and issue of Inspection

Certificate thereon shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of
the Contractor in respect of the agreed Quality Assurance Programme
forming a part of the contract.
1.07.05.08 To facilitate advance planning of inspection in addition to giving inspection

notice as per Clause 3.03.00, the Contractor shall furnish quarterly
inspection programme indicating schedule dates of inspection at Customer
Hold Point and final inspection stages. Updated quarterly inspection plans
will be made for each three consecutive months and shall be furnished
before beginning of each calendar month.
1.07.05.09 All inspection, measuring and test equipments used by contractor shall be
calibrated periodically depending on its use and criticality of the
test/measurement to be done. The Contractor shall maintain all the relevant
records of periodic calibration and instrument identification, and shall
produce the same for inspection by NTPC. Wherever asked specifically, the
contractor shall re-calibrate the measuring/test equipments in the presence
of Project Manager / Inspector.
1.07.06 Associated Document:-
1.07.06.01 Status of items requiring Quality plan and sub supplier approval Format
No.:QS-01-QAI-P-02/F1-R0
1.07.06.02 List of items requiring quality plan and sub – supplier approval Format No.:
QS -01-QAI-P-1/F3 – R0
1.07.06.03
Field welding schedule Format No. Format No.: QS-01-QAI-W-11/F1-R0
1.07.06.04
1.07.06.05 Manufacturing Quality Plan Format No.: QS-01-QAI-P-09/F1-R0
1.07.06.06 Field Quality Plan Format No.: QS-01-QAI-P-09/F2-R0
1.07.06.07 Module SQE 09 for LT switchgear
1.07.06.08 Module SQE 13 for LT power cable
1.07.06.09 Module SQE 15 for LT control cable
1.07.06.10 Module SQE 16 for cabling, earthing, lightening protection
1.07.06.11 Module SQE 18 for station lighting
1.07.06.12 Module SQE 19 for switchyard
Note : These formats are enclosed with this document.
1.08.00 Packing, Transportation And Storage
1.08.01 Packing, Marking and shipping

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
The packing and shipping shall be carried out in accordance with the
standard practice of Contractor and with the following additional
requirements:
a) The equipment shall be prepared in such a manner as to protect the

equipment from damage or deterioration during shipping or storage. The
shipments can be exposed to heavy rains, hot sun, high humidity and
sudden extreme changes of temperature. The equipment shall be packed
and shipped so as to protect it from all such conditions and any other
abnormal conditions, generally expected during shipping & storage.
b) The metallic containers, if any, shall be considered as the property of the

Contractor and he will be allowed to remove them from site once the
contents are unpacked, inspected, documented and placed in temporary
storage or in final position.
c) The equipment shall be shipped in such a manner as to facilitate unloading,

handling and storage enroute and at the site. The Contractor shall provide
lifting lugs and special lifting devices for proper handling and erection.
d) The Contractor shall be liable for any damage or loss resulting due to
careless, improper, poor or insufficient packing and handling.
e) Spare parts and spare equipment shall be packed separately in containers

adequate for long term storage, plainly marked “Spare Parts Only”. They
shall be crated individually or in kits to be used in one single renewal or
overhaul operation. Other spare part kits shall not be disturbed when using
one set or kit.
f) The Contractor shall at all times protect and preserve from damage, loss,
corrosion and all other forms of damage, all parts of the works.
1.08.02 Transportation
The Contractor shall make a careful examination of access rail/roadways to

a) the site in order to confirm the practical maximum transport weight and
dimensions as well as a careful examination of the ports of disembarkation
particularly with respect to the capacity of the cranes installed and access
roads.
b) All instruments and computer/microprocessor based equipment imported

into India from overseas for the purpose of this contract shall be air freighted
to the nearest possible point and further by rail/road taking due precautions
as per manufacturer’s recommendations. Employer shall have the right to
decide the items that should be air freighted and Employer’s decision shall
be binding on Contractor.
1.08.03 Insurance.
a) The Contractor shall insure all shipments and works at his own expense for
not less than the full replacement cost plus any additional cost for
accelerated manufacturing of the replacement parts.
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
Loss or the damage to equipment during shipping or transportation to the

site(s) or otherwise shall not constitute groups for claims for extension in
b) time or for extra payment.
1.08.04 Storage of Equipment
a) The Contractor shall provide and construct adequate storage sheds for
proper storage of equipment. Sensitive equipments shall be stored indoors.
All equipment during storage shall be protected against damage due to act
of nature or accidents. The storage instructions of the equipment
manufacturers shall be strictly adhered to.
b) The necessary transport packing shall be removed as soon as possible after

receipt of equipment at the work site(s)
1.09.00 Engineering Coordination Procedure
1.09.01 Identification of Principal Engineering Coordinators
The following principal engineering coordinators will be identified by

respective organisations at the time of award of contract. All engineering
correspondence shall be in the name of designated coordinators on behalf
of the respective organisations:
a) Engineering coordinator
b) Contracts coordinator
c) Site coordinator
d) QA&I coordinator
e) Project Engineering Management coordinator
1.09.02 Vendor Document Submission and Approval Procedure
The following procedure for submission and review/approval of the drawings,

data, reports, information, etc. shall be followed by Contractor:
a) All data/information furnished by Vendor in the form of drawings, documents,

catalogues or in any other form for NTPC’s information/interface and/or
review and approval are referred by the general term “drawings”.
b) The ‘Master drawings list’ shall be submitted for review and approval of
Employer before award of contract. The Contractor shall have to prepare
and submit any other drawings and reference documents in addition to the
drawings contained in the list, if so required during engineering stage as felt
necessary by the Employer. Number of copies of the list for the distribution
shall be as mutually agreed between Contractor and Employer.
c) All drawings (including those of subvendors’) shall bear at the right hand
bottom corner the ‘title block’ with all relevant information duly filled in. The
format of title block shall approved by Engineer within thirty (30) days after
the letter of award. The Contractor shall give this format to his subvendor
along with his purchase order for subvendor’s compliance. The size of title
block basic format and its contents shall not be changed. All drawings shall
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
be in English language. All dimensions shall be in metric units.
d) Contractor shall submit all the drawings in five (5) copies for review of
Employer. Employer shall forward their comments within four (4) weeks of
receipt of drawings.
e)
Upon review of each drawings, depending on the correctness and
completeness of the drawings, the same will be categorised and approval
accorded in one of the following categories:
CATEGORY I Approved
CATEGORY II Approved subject to incorporation of comments/

modification as noted. Resubmit revised drawing
incorporating the comments.
CATEGORY III Not approved. Resubmit revised drawings for

Approval after incorporating comments/modifications
as noted
CATEGORY IV For information and records.
f) Contractor shall resubmit the drawings approved under Category II and III
within three (3) weeks of receipt of comments on the drawings, incorporating
all comments. Every revision of the drawing shall bear a revision index
wherein such revisions shall be highlighted in the form of description or
marked up in the drawing identifying the same with relevant revision number
enclosed in a triangle (e.g 1.2.3. etc.)
g) In case Contractor does not agree with any specific comment, he shall
furnish the explanation for the same to Employer consideration. In all such
cases Contractor shall necessarily enclose explanations along with the
revised drawing (taking care of balance comments) to avoid any delay
and/or duplication in review work.
h) It is the responsibility of the Contractor to get all the drawings approved in

the Category I or IV (as the case may be) and complete engineering
activities within the agreed schedule. Any delay arising out of submission
and modification of drawings shall not alter the contract completion
schedule.
i) Contractor shall not make any changes in the portion of the drawing other
than those commented. If changes are required to be made in the portions
already approved, the Contractor shall resubmit the drawings identifying the
changes (alongwith reasons for changes) for Employer’s review and
approval.
j) Approval of drawings will not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
obligations of furnishing the equipment in accordance with the specification
and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment is later found to
be defective.
k) The drawing approval progress report shall be submitted in at least three (3)
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
copies within one (1) week from the last date of the every month
1.09.03 Erection Drawings.
a) Contractor shall furnish erection drawings for the guidance or

commencement of erection or the first shipment, whichever is earlier. These
shall generally comprise of fabrication/assembly drawings, various
component/part details drawing, assembly, clearance data requirements,
etc. The drawings shall contain details of components/ equipment with
identification number, match marks, bill of materials, assembly procedures
etc.
b) For all major equipment apart from above details, assembly sequence and
instructions with check-lists shall be furnished in the form of erection
manuals.
1.09.04 Technical Coordination Meetings
To resolve and sort out various technical matters and outstanding issues,
technical coordination meeting (TCM) shall be held periodically at venue to
be decided by the Employer.
1.09.05 Instruction Manual
a) The Contractor shall submit to the Employer preliminary instruction manuals

for all the equipments for review. The final instructions manuals incorporating
Employer’s comments and complete in all respect shall be submitted at least
thirty (60) days before the first shipment of the equipment. The instruction
manuals shall contain full details and drawings of all the equipments, the
transportation, storage, installation, testing, operation and maintenance
procedures, etc. separately for each component/equipment alongwith log
record format. These instruction manuals shall be submitted in five (5)
copies for approval.
b) If after commissioning and initial operation of the plant, the instruction

manuals require any modifications/additions/changes, the same shall be
incorporated and the updated final instruction manuals shall be submitted.
c) The operating and maintenance instructions together with drawings (other

than shop drawings) of the equipment, as completed, shall have sufficient
details to enable the Employer to maintain, dismantle, reassemble and
adjust all parts of the equipment. They shall give a step by step procedure
for all operations likely to be carried out during the life of the
plant/equipment, including erection, testing, commissioning, operation,
maintenance dismantling and repair. Each manual shall also include a
complete set of approved drawings together with performance/rating curves
of the equipment and test certificates, wherever applicable. The contract
shall not be considered completed for purpose of taking over until such
instructions and drawings have been supplied to the Employer.
d) A separate section of the manual shall be for each size/type of equipment

and shall contain a detailed description of construction and operation,
together will all relevant pamphlets, drawings and list of parts with
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
procedures for ordering spares. Maintenance instructions shall include

charts showing lubrication, checking, testing and replacement procedure to
be carried out daily, weekly, monthly and at longer intervals to ensure trouble
free operation. Where applicable, fault location charts shall be included to
facilitate finding the cause of mal-operation or breakdown. A collection of the
manufacturer'’ standard leaflets will not accepted to be taken as a
compliance of this clause. The manual shall be specifically compiled for the
concerned project.
1.09.06 Final submission of Drawings and Documents
The Contractor shall furnish the following after approval of all

drawings/documents and test reports:
a) List of drawings bearing the Employer’s and Contractor’s drawing number.

b) Eight (10) bound sets alongwith 3 CD-ROMs of all drawing.
c) All documents/designs in four (4) copies as noted above.
d) Contractor shall also furnish eight (8) bound sets of all as-built drawings
including the list of all as-built drawings bearing drawing numbers. The
Contractor shall also furnish three (3) sets of film reproducibles or CD-ROMs
of all as-built drawings as decided by the Employer.
e) The Contractor shall also furnish ten (10) copies of instruction manuals
(after approval) for all the equipments.
1.09.07 Test Reports
Four (4) copies of all test reports shall be supplied for approval before
shipment of equipment. The report shall indicate clearly the standard value
specified for each test to facilitate checking of the reports. After final
approval six bound copies of all type and routine test reports shall be
submitted to Employer.
1.10.00 Reference Drawings
1.10.01 The drawings enclosed with the specification are for information and for
purpose of tendering only. They give the basic scheme of the works and
associated services including the scope of work. In case of any discrepancy
between drawings and text of specification, the requirement of text shall
prevail.
1.10.02 The dimensions shown on the drawings between center line of various
equipment are tentative and are for guidance only. Contractor while
preparing the final drawings shall:
a) Co-ordinate with various suppliers for the actual dimensions of the

equipment.
b) Maintain the overall dimensions of the switchyard, bay length and bay width,
phase-to-phase clearance between buses, etc. but may alter the locations of
equipment to obtain the statutory electrical clearances required for the
switchyard. In this process he must follow all rules and satisfy all conditions
of:
i) BS:162 - Specification for electrical power switchgear and associated

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
apparatus.
ii) Indian Electricity Rules.
iii) Fire Protection Manuals issued by Tariff Advisory Committee of India.
iv) National Electricity Safety Code published by Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers, New York.
1.11.00 Taking Over
Upon successful completion of all the tests to be performed at site on

equipments furnished and erected by the Contractor, the Engineer shall
issue to the Contractor, a taking over certificate as a proof of the final
acceptance of the equipment. Such certificate shall not unreasonably be
with-held nor will the Engineer delay the issuance thereof on account of
minor omissions or defects which do not affect the commercial operation
and/or cause any serious risk to the equipments which otherwise survive, by
the terms and conditions of the contract after issuance of such certificate.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
Sampling, Testing and Quality Assurance for Civil Works
APPENDIX-I
Sampling, Testing and Quality

Assurance for Civil Works
DARLIPALLI STPP STAGE –I BID DOCUMENT NO. APPENDIX-I

TECHNICAL
(2X800 MW) CS-9549-572-2 PART IV, SECTION VI
SPECIFICATIONS Page 1 of 15
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
1.0.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1.0 This part of the specification covers the sampling, testing and quality assurance
requirement (including construction tolerances and acceptance criteria) for all civil and
structural works covered in this specification.
1.2.0 This part of the technical specification shall be read in conjunction with other parts of the
technical specifications, general technical requirements & erection conditions of the
contract. Wherever IS code or standards have been referred they shall be the latest
revisions.
1.3.0 The rate for respective items of work or price shall include the cost for all works,
activities, equipment, instrument, personnel, material etc. whatsoever associated to
comply with sampling, testing and quality assurance requirement including construction
tolerances and acceptance criteria and as specified in subsequent clauses of this part of
the technical specifications. The QA and QC activities in all respects as specified in the
technical specifications/ drawings / data sheets / quality plans / contract documents shall
be carried out at no extra cost to the owner.
1.4.0 The contractor shall prepare detailed construction and erection methodology scheme
which shall be compatible to the requirements of the desired progress of work execution,
quality measures, prior approvals if any and the same shall be got approved by the
Engineer. If required, work methodology may be revised/ reviewed at every stage of
execution of work at site, to suit the site conditions by the contractor at no extra cost to
the owner.
2.0.0 QA AND QC MANPOWER
2.1.0 The contractor shall nominate one overall QA coordinator for the contract detailing the
name, designation, contact details and address at the time of post bid discussions. All
correspondence related to Quality Assurance shall be addressed by the contractor’s QA
coordinator to NTPC. NTPC shall address all correspondence related to Quality issues to
the contractor’s QA coordinator. The contractor’s QA coordinator shall be responsible for
co-ordination of Quality activities between various divisions of the contractor and their
sub-vendors on one hand & with NTPC on the other hand.
2.2.0 The contractor shall appoint a dedicated, experienced and competent QA&QC in-charge
at site, preferably directly reporting to the Project Manager, supported as necessary by
experienced personnel, to ensure the effective implementation of the approved QAP. An
indicative structure of contractor’s QA&QC manpower required to be deployed at site is
enclosed at Annexure-I. Based on the finalized L-2 network and the approved Field
Quality plan, the contractor shall finalize and submit a deployment schedule of QA&QC
personnel along with their details to NTPC for approval/ acceptance and further shall
ensure their availability well before the start of the concern activity.
2.3.0 The QA&QC in-charge shall have the organizational freedom and authority to implement
the requirements of these quality assurance arrangements, free from commercial and
programme restraints. The QA&QC setup of the contractor shall consist of qualified and
experienced Civil, Electrical Engineers and Laboratory assistants with their supporting
staff both at their works and site.

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
2.4.0 The deployment of man power for QA & QC set up shall be affected on the basis of
agreed manpower deployment schedule, which shall be prepared by the contractor
based on the L-2 network and the same shall be submitted to the engineer-in-charge for
acceptance.
3.0.0 SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
3.1.0 The method of sampling for testing of construction materials and work / job samples shall
be as per the relevant IS / standards / codes and in line with the requirements of the
technical specifications / quality plans. All samples shall be jointly drawn, signed and
sealed wherever required, by the contractor and the engineer or his authorized
representative.
3.2.0 The contractor shall carry out testing in accordance with the relevant IS / standards /
codes and in line with the requirements of the technical specifications / quality plans.
Where no specific testing procedure is mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per
the best prevalent engineering practices and to the directions of the Engineer. All testing
shall be done in the presence of the engineer or his authorized representative.
3.3.0 Before execution of any civil work the contractor shall conduct full-scale suitability tests
on various construction and building material such as fine and coarse aggregates,
cement, reinforcement, construction chemicals, supplementary cementitious materials
and construction water to ascertain their suitability for use and the concrete mix designs
conducted from reputed institutes such as NCB-Ballabgarh, CSMRS-Delhi, IIT’s, etc. as
agreed by the engineer. A list of NTPC acceptable specialist laboratories is enclosed at
Annexure-II. The test samples for such full scale testing shall be jointly sampled and
sealed by the engineer and contractor, thereafter these shall be sent to the concerned
laboratory through the covering letter signed by field quality assurance (FQA)
representative of the engineer. Format for sampling and testing of cement, coarse
aggregate, fine aggregate, chemical admixture, fly ash, water, concrete mix design is
enclosed at Annexure-III.
3.4.0 The contractor shall timely initiate the action with regard to the evaluation of aggregates
and other building material including concrete mix design, so as to ensure completion of
these tests before start of civil works at site, thereby not affecting any project work. The
test reports and recommendations for suitability of the materials including concrete mix
design shall be promptly submitted by the contractor to the engineer.
3.5.0 Evaluation of aggregate for potential alkali-aggregate reactivity shall be carried out as
per following scope of work
A. Evaluation of Aggregates for Mechanical / Physical Properties
a) To carry out different tests on coarse aggregate sample i.e. specific gravity, water
absorption, sieve analysis, deleterious material; soundness, crushing value, impact
value, abrasion value, elongation index and flakiness index, as per IS: 2386.
b) To carry out different tests on fine aggregate sample i.e. specific gravity, water
absorption, sieve analysis, deleterious material, soundness, silt content, clay
content and organic impurities as per IS: 2386.
c) To prepare evaluation report based on test results of a) and b) above and to advise
regarding suitability of fine and coarse aggregates.
B. Evaluation of Aggregates for Potential Alkali-Aggregate Reactivity:

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
a) To carry out petrographic analysis and accelerated Mortar bar Test on aggregate
samples (1N NaOH at 80 deg. Centigrade for 14 days as per ASTM 1260, or the
method established/ developed by CSMRS for 22days test).
b) To prepare a report based on test results of a) above and to advise regarding
suitability of aggregates to be used and further testing required if any.
4.0.0 LABORATORY AND FIELD TESTING
4.1.0 The field laboratory for QA and QC activities shall be constructed and set-up by the
contractor in line with the indicative field QA&QC laboratory set-up enclosed at
Annexure-IV. The Laboratory building shall be constructed and installed with the
adequate facilities to meet the requirement of envisaged test setup. Temperature and
humidity controls shall be available wherever necessary during testing of samples. The
quality plan shall identify the testing equipments/ instrument, which the contractor shall
deploy and equip the field quality laboratory for meeting the field quality plan
requirements. The contractor shall furnish a comprehensive list of testing equipments/
instrument required to meet the planned/scheduled tests for the execution of works for
NTPC acceptance/ approval. The contractor shall mobilize the requisite laboratory
equipment and QA&QC manpower at least 15 days prior to the planned test activity as
per the schedule of tests.
4.2.0 All equipments and instruments in the field shall be calibrated before the commencement
of tests and then at regular intervals, as per the manufacturer’s recommendation and as
directed by the NTPC. The calibration certificates shall specify the fitness of the
equipments and instruments within the limit of tolerance for use. Contractor shall arrange
for calibration of equipments and instruments by an NABL / NPL accredited agency and
the calibration report shall be submitted to NTPC.
4.3.0 The tests which cannot be carried out in the field laboratory shall be done at a NTPC
acceptable laboratories enclosed at Annexure-II. The test samples for such test shall be
jointly selected and sealed by the engineer and thereafter these shall be sent to the
concerned laboratory through the covering letter signed by NTPC engineer. The test
report along with the recommendations shall be obtained from the laboratories without
delay and submitted to NTPC.
4.4.0 Based on the schedule of work agreed with the engineer-in-charge and the approved
FQP, the contractor shall prepare a schedule of tests and submit them to the engineer-
in-charge and organize to carry out the tests as scheduled / agreed.
5.0.0 PURCHASE AND SERVICE
5.1.0 Refer GTR (Chapter G1) for Bought Out Items for Civil Works
5.2.0 Structural / Reinforcement steel shall be procured from Main Steel Producers like SAIL,
TISCO, RINL, Jindal Steel & Power and Jai Balaji Industries Ltd, Durgapur (for 8-40mm
reinforcement steel).
5.3.0 In case any size /diameter specified is not available with main steel producers and are
proposed to be supplied from the conversion agent of the main steel producer, the name
of such conversion agent shall have to be approved by NTPC for which details such as
BIS approval, Main steel producer’s approval, Past experience for production of sections
of specified material, details of machines, plants testing facilities etc., and confirmation
that the process control and manufacturing of steel sections by conversion agent is the

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
same as that of main steel producers, that billets for conversion are sourced from main
steel producers only shall be furnished with regards to conversion agent. However,
methodology to be followed for procurement of Structural Steel and Reinforcement Bars
through conversion agent has to be agreed with NTPC in advance.
6.0.0 MANUFACTURING QUALITY PLAN AND FIELD QUALITY PLAN
6.1.0 Well before the start of the work, the contractor shall prepare and submit the Field
Quality Plans (FQP) on the format No. QS-01-QAI-P-09/F2-R1, and obtain approval of
NTPC, which shall detail out for all the works, equipments, services, quality practices
and procedures etc in line with the requirement of the technical specifications to be
followed by the contractor at site. This FQP shall cover for all the items / activities
covered in the contract / schedule of items required, right from material procurement to
completion of the work at site. An Indicative Field Quality Plan for civil works & Structural
works is enclosed at Annexure – V.
7.0.0 GENERAL QA REQUIREMENTS
7.1.0 The contractor shall ensure that the works, BOIs and services under the scope of
contract whether manufactured or performed within contractor’s works or at his sub-
contractor’s premises or at the NTPC’s site or at any other place of work are in
accordance with the NTPC technical specification, applicable standards / codes,
approved drawings / data sheets / quality plans and BOQ. All the works, BOIs and
services shall be carried out as per the best prevalent engineering practices and to the
directions of the Engineer.
7.1.1 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
All materials shall be stacked and stored by the Contractor as per IS-4082 and as per
the requirements specified in NTPC Technical Specification.
7.1.2 EXCAVATION AND FILLING WORKS
The contractor shall submit a work methodology covering various items of works for all
stages of excavation and filling works. This methodology shall broadly include the
quantity wise and classification wise identification of source of excavation and filling,
suitability tests as per specification requirements, method of stockpiling, transportation,
placement, spreading , compaction, equipment, list of protocols, in-situ tests, third party
lab test if required, acceptance checks for final clearance.
For blasting work at site if required, the contractor shall associate themselves with the
reputed specialized blasting agency such as CMRI, NIRM for trials blasts, design blasts,
blasting pattern, monitoring of blast during the blasting operations at site. The contractor
shall install and operate equipment (such as tri-axial seismograph) for continuous
monitoring and control of blast induced vibrations, noise level/ air pressure, dust, silica
and noxious gases during all blasting operations in line with the technical specification
requirements in association with the specialized blasting agency. The contractor shall
submit the un-priced copy of the award on the specialized blasting agencies to NTPC,
highlighting the scope of services / work awarded to them by contractor. The services of
such specialized blasting agency shall be available through out the period in which the
blasting work is undertaken at site. The blasting operation shall remain in charge of a
responsible, competent, authorized and experienced supervisor (man-in-charge) and

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
thoroughly acquainted workmen. All blasting work shall be done as per approved
blasting scheme/ design/ pattern in line with the technical specification requirements and
all statutory laws, rules, regulations, relevant standards pertaining to the acquisition,
transport, storage, handling along with use of explosives shall be strictly followed by the
contractor.
Tolerance for finished surface level shall be within 20 mm of the level shown in the
drawing. For an unimportant area, tolerance up to +75mm shall be acceptable at the
discretion of the engineer. However, these tolerances shall be applicable for localized
areas only.
Acceptance criteria shall be
a) When only one set of sample is tested, then all individual samples collected and
tested should pass without any deviation
b) For retest of any sample two additional samples shall be collected and tested, and
both should pass without any deviation.
c) Where a large number of samples are tested for a particular test then 9 samples out
of every 10 consecutive samples tested shall meet the specification requirement.
7.1.3 MASONRY AND ALLIED WORKS
The execution, finishing, testing and acceptance of masonry related works shall be as
per the provisions of technical specifications / relevant practices IS code. Local
depressions on account of faulty workmanship, broken / chipped edges shall not be
acceptable.
All masonry shall be built true and plumb within the tolerances prescribed as below.
Care shall be taken to keep the perpends properly aligned. Unless specified otherwise
the tolerances in construction of masonry works shall be as below:
Sl. No. Type of Check Tolerance

1 Deviation in verticality in total Shall not exceed  12.5mm (more
height of any wall of a building than one storey)
 6mm per 3m height (within a storey)
2 Deviation from the position Shall not exceed 12.5mm (more than
shown on the plan of any one storey)
brickwork
3 Relative displacement between Shall not exceed 6mm
load bearing walls in adjacent
storeys intended to be in vertical
alignment
4 Deviation of bed joint from Shall not exceed 6mm (upto 12m)
horizontal in any length, and it Shall not exceed 12.5mm total (in any
length over 12m)
5
Deviation from the specified Shall not exceed  3mm
thickness of bed-joints, cross-
joints or perpends
6 Finished plastered surface Deviation not more than 4 mm when
checked with a straight edge of 2 m
length placed against the surface

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
7 The average thickness of plaster Not be less than the specified

thickness
8 The minimum thickness over Not less than the specified thickness
any portion of the surface by more than 3 mm for plaster thick-
ness above 12mm and 1 mm for
ceiling plaster
7.1.4 CONCRETE WORKS
For concreting works provisions of technical specifications and IS: 456 shall apply. A
detailed methodology for concrete works shall be submitted by the contractor to NTPC
for approval. The methodology may require change / modification based on the site
conditions, for which suitable revisions shall be submitted.
The methodology for concrete works shall broadly contain the suitability of source of
aggregates, cement, admixture, water and reinforcement steel, etc. The available
concrete mix design recommended from a specialist institute, results of trial mix carried
out at site, method / control of batching, mixing, transportation, layer wise placement,
compaction, fixing / removal of form work, staging, fixing of water stops at appropriate
locations along with specials, expansion joints, contraction joints and construction joints,
cover blocks and method of curing, methodology of repair of newly placed hardened
concrete, testing and sampling of concrete during production and placement and
acceptance checks for final clearance.
The equipment, deployment of manpower and machinery shall arranged by the
contractor to ensure the continuous rate of placement of specified grade of concrete so
as to prevent segregation, bleeding, formation of cold joints, temperature control for
concreting in extreme weather conditions and for mass concreting works.
Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be kept continuously in a damp or wet condition for
at least seven days from the date of placing concrete in case of ordinary Portland
cement, not be less than 10 days for concrete exposed to dry and hot weather
conditions, at least 10 days or period may be extended to 14 days where mineral
admixtures or blended cements are used. Approved curing compounds may be used in
lieu of moist curing with the permission of engineer-in-charge.
Reinforcement steel shall conform to relevant IS codes. Lapping / spacing of
reinforcement shall be so staggered that under no circumstances more than 50% of bars
at any cross section shall be lapped. Corrosion resistance Steel shall be used for the
foundations wherever specified in the technical specification. Sample test for 3% of the
number of mechanical bars grips subject to a minimum of three, shall be carried out up
to the yield strength of reinforcement of bars.
Test shall be conducted for the water tightness of the liquid retaining structures as per
technical specifications, IS 3370 and IS 6494.
All the materials, equipments, processes used in pre cast concrete work shall conform to
the requirements for the cast-in-situ concrete.
If fly ash is used in concrete, source of supply shall be checked for suitability as per IS
3812 (Part-I). Routine tests for retention of particles on 45μ sieve and loss on ignition
shall be carried out on each lot of fly ash before its use. The storage of fly ash shall be
similar to that of cement. Separate Silo for fly ash shall be provided in the batching plant.
Validation of Mix design using fly ash shall be carried out by an approved specialist
agency, before start of concrete production.

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
The acceptance criteria of concrete shall be in accordance with clause no.16 of IS 456.
However in exceptional circumstances and that too in non-critical areas, the engineer
may accept concrete work which is marginally unacceptable as per the criteria laid down
in IS 456. For such accepted work, payment shall be made at a reduced rate pro rata to
the concrete cube strength obtained, against that stipulated.
All records of concreting, reinforcement, testing of materials, as-built dimensions, the
details of the rectification, etc, shall be maintained as given below. Four copies of such
record in a bound form shall be submitted to owner for their record and future reference.
a. Testing data / report of aggregates including petrographic examination & potential
reactivity of aggregate and repeated temperature cycle tests wherever specified
b. Mix design details and record of trial mixes carried out at site
c. Testing records of admixture as per IS-9103 / ASTM C494 including third party test
reports.
d. Approved scheme for concreting
e. Hourly records of concreting including pour card
f. Protocol indicating the dimensional tolerance and details of inserts
g. Records giving the details of rectification giving the location of grouting, the
quantity of grout used at each location, type of grout used
h. Bar bending schedule
i. Location and details of mechanical anchoring used for reinforcement
j. Protocol giving the details of checking of reinforcements before concreting and
conformance to the reinforcement details as shown in the construction drawings
k. Photographs showing the areas where rectification works have been carried out.
Photographs should be taken before and after rectification
l. Temperature control record of concrete at the time of placement if applicable
m. Details of curing, staging and fixing / removal of formwork, checklist for formwork
as per Clause 9.9 and Annexure-C of IS 14687 including all machine foundations
n. Batching Plant shall be calibrated regularly at least once in a 3 months.
Computerized output shall be taken for each batch of production of concrete. For
concreting works of ash pipe pedestals, mixer with weight batcher may be used.
o. Dimensions (length, cross sectional dimensions, straightness, squareness, and
flatness) and tolerances for pre cast members as per NTPC Technical
Specification. Load test on Pre cast members (except precast tiles to be laid in
the reservoir) shall be carried out @ 1% up to 1000 nos., @0.5% from more than
1000 nos. precast members of one type. The load test shall be carried out as per
the provisions of IS-456 and relevant IS code.

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
TOLERANCES
Description of Item/ Structural Element Max Min
(mm) (mm)
Cast In Situ Concrete
1. Faces of concrete in foundations and structural members +25 -10
against which back fill is placed
2. Eccentricity of footing as percentage of footing width in the 2% but limited
direction of placement to 50mm
3. Top surfaces of slabs and of concrete to receive base +5 -5
plates to be grouted
4. Alignment of beams, lintels, columns, walls, slabs and +5 -5
similar structural elements
5. Cross sectional dimensions of walls, slabs and similar +5 -5
structural elements
6. Deviation from specified dimensions of cross-section of +12 -6
columns and beams
7. Alignment of holding down bolts without sleeves +1.5 -1.5
8. Alignment of holding down bolts with sleeves +5 -5
9. Level of holding down bolt assemblies +10 -10
10. Embedded Parts (in any direction). +5 -5
11. Level of embedment for equipment support +1.5 0
12. Level of embedment for other embedded parts +5 -5
13. Centers of pockets or holes with greatest lateral dimension +10 -10
not exceeding 150mm
14. Variation in steps
 Riser +1.5 -1.5
 Tread +3.0 -3.0
Pre- Cast Concrete
15. Length: +/- 0.1 percent +/- 5 + 10
16. Straightness or Bow 1/750 of the length +/- 5 +/- 10
17. Cross-sectional +/- 3 mm or +/- 0.1 percent whichever is greater
dimensions
18. Squareness: When considering the squareness of the corner the
length of the two adjacent sides being checked shall be
taken as the base line. The shorter side shall not vary
in length from the perpendicular by more than 5 mm.
19. Flatness: The maximum deviation from a 1.5m straight edge
placed in any position on a nominal plant surface shall
not exceed 5 mm.
Placing of reinforcement and for cover (Cover blocks Clause 12.3.1
shall be of same grade of concrete in which these would and 12.3.2 of IS
be embedded) 456
Formwork Clause 9.6 of IS
14687 and 11.1
of IS 456
Batching Clause 10.2.2
of IS 456
7.1.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
For structural steel works provisions of technical specifications and IS: 800 shall apply. A
detailed methodology for structural steel works shall be submitted by the contractor to

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
NTPC for approval. The methodology may require change / modification based on the
site conditions, for which suitable revisions shall be submitted.
The contractor shall submit the welding procedures specification (WPS), heat treatment
procedures, NDT procedures etc. at least ninety days before scheduled start of erection
work at site. All welding and brazing shall be submitted to the NTPC and carried out as
per procedure drawn and qualified in accordance with requirements of ASME Section
IX/BS-4870 or other International equivalent standard acceptable to the NTPC.
All brazers, welders and welding operators employed on any part of the contract either in
the contractor’s / sub-contractor’s works or at site or elsewhere shall be qualified as per
AWSD1.1/ASME Section-IX or BS-4871 or other equivalent International Standards
acceptable to the NTPC.
The records of welding procedure qualification and welder qualification test results shall
be furnished to the NTPC for approval. However, where required by the NTPC, the tests
shall be conducted in presence of NTPC / authorized representative.
No welding shall be carried out on cast iron components for repair. All the heat treatment
results shall be recorded on time temperature charts and verified with recommended
regimes.
All Non-destructive examination shall be performed in accordance with written
procedures as per International Standards and as mentioned elsewhere in the technical
specification. The NDT operator shall be qualified as per SNT-TC-IA (of the American
Society of non-destructive examination). NDT shall be recorded in a report, which
includes details of methods and equipment used, result/evaluation, job data and
identification of personnel employed and details of co-relation of the test report with the
job. The records of RT (Films) and UT (inspection records or printed reports if possible)
shall be documented and produced to NTPC.
Low hydrogen electrode (AWS E-7018) for welding of High/Medium tensile steel, for M.S
(IS 2062) sections thickness above 20mm shall be used. Preheating and Post weld heat
treatment requirements shall be complied as specified in the technical specification /
approved WPS.
The requirements of pre-heating (Minimum) shall be
Thickness of thickest Welding using other Welding using low hydrogen
part at the area of than low hydrogen welding electrodes or submerged
welding / heat affected welding electrodes arc welding IS 2062
zone IS 2062
Upto 20 mm (including) None None
Over 20 mm to 40 mm Not allowed 200 C

(including)
Over 40 mm to 63 mm Not allowed 660 C

(including)
Over 63 mm Not allowed 1100 C

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
The following tests / checks shall be carried out for structural steel works
SL. TESTS / CHECKS QUANTUM / STANDARD

NO.
1. Physical and chemical properties of As per relevant codes, review of
material if supply in the scope of correlated mill test certificates or
contractor check testing in absence of MTC
2. Ultrasonic test on plates above 40mm As per ASTM A435
3. Welding procedure & welders AWSD1.1/ASME Section-IX or
qualification test BS-4871 or other equivalent
International Standards
Fillet Weld
4. Macro-etch examination on production Minimum one joint per built up
test coupons for main fillet welds beams, columns and crane girder
etc.
5. Tension member of crane girder Dye penetration test on 25% weld
length
6. All other fillet welds DPT on 5% of weld length with
minimum 300mm at each location
Butt Weld
7. DPT 100% after back gouging on all
butt welds
8. Mechanical testing of production test Minimum one joint per built up
coupons beam, column and crane girder.
9. Radiography test on butt welds 100% RT on butt welds of tension
(In case of failure of any welds in flange (bottom flange) of crane
SPOT/RT or UT the % of retesting girders
shall be doubled at that particular 10% RT weld length of each
location. Acceptance criteria of NDT welder on butt welds,
on welds shall be as per AWS D1.1.
Wherever RT is not feasible UT to be
carried out with the approval of the
engineer)
10. Ultrasonic testing on full penetration 100% UT on the web to flange

welds (other than butt welds) joint of crane girder
10% UT on other full penetration
joints
11. Control assembly check in shop 1st and further every 10th set of
before erection identical structure
12. Dimensional tolerances during as per IS-7215 and IS-12843
fabrication and erection
13. Surface Preparation and Paint SA 2 1/2 , By elcometer random
thickness after each coat, each member

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
7.1.6 PAINTING WORKS
Painting works shall be carried out as per the provisions of technical specifications. A
detailed methodology for painting works shall be submitted by the contractor to NTPC
for approval. The methodology may require change / modification based on the site
conditions, for which suitable revisions shall be submitted.
The methodology for painting works shall broadly contain the source of approved brand
of paints, shot / sand blasting as specified, minimum acceptable size of shot used for
blasting, application of primer, intermediate coat and final coat, experience of applicator,
etc. testing of painting work and acceptance checks for final clearance.
7.1.7 SHEETING WORKS
All bought out items shall be procured from the manufacturer’s approved by engineer
and tested as per relevant AS/ASTM/EN Codes/ Technical Specification. Raw material
of colour coated sheets shall meet the chemical & physical properties as per relevant
standards / codes referred in the approved data sheet. It shall be tested for colour
match, bare metal thickness, weight of Z/AZ coating, thickness of painting system,
reverse impact, T-Bend adhesion, scratch resistance, salt spray test for 1000 Hrs and
any other test / properties as specified in the technical specifications. Colour coated
sheets shall be marked with video jet printing at the interval not more than 2m bearing
manufacturer’s name, date and time of manufacturing. Fasteners shall also be tested for
1000 hrs salt spray test as per the requirement of technical specifications.
Bonded Mineral Wool Insulation shall meet the requirements of thickness, density,
thermal Conductivity, all other tests as per the technical specifications and IS-8183.
For sheet installation no gas cut opening shall be allowed at the site, whenever opening
is specified these shall be properly cut in the factory and shall be filled with lipping /
flashing for true shape / dimension etc. The sheets/ packets shall be stacked neatly
clear off the ground at an angle to the ground, over a base pallet to provide drainage.
Water / moisture should not be allowed to stagnate on surface, or in between layers.
This can damage the coating, and cause corrosion.
7.1.8 TILE WORKS
The contractor shall submit the work methodology which shall include the type, grade
and make of materials along with their technical data sheets, details, etc, clearance from
E-I-C regarding leak proofness and damp proofness of parent concrete surface, surface
preparation, the procedure of application, curing, testing and acceptance.
The agencies having adequate experience to execute the acid / alkali resistant lining
works shall be engaged for executing the acid / alkali resistant lining works after
obtaining the approval from the E-I-C.
The execution, finishing, testing and acceptance of tile works shall be as per the
provisions of technical specifications. The material for tile works shall be procured from
the NTPC approved brand / source. Local depressions on account of faulty
workmanship, tiles / natural stones with cracked or broken / chipped edges shall not be
acceptable.
The tests shall be carried out on acid resistant bricks / tile- water absorption,
compressive strength, resistance to acid, flexural strength, dimensions and all other
tests as per IS 4860 and IS 4457, bitumastic ready mixed paint as per IS 158, bitumastic
as per IS 9510, potassium silicate, resin type and sulphur type mortars as per IS 4832,

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
part I, II and III, surface preparation for painting as per IS 2395, epoxy painting shall be
carried for required coating thickness and dry film thickness.
7.1.9 FIRE PROOF DOORS
Fire Proof doors shall be tested for the requirements mentioned in the Technical
Specification. The type test of the doors shall be carried out at CBRI Roorkee for
minimum 2 hours fire rating and its Fabrication drawing shall also be approved by
CBRI, Roorkee. DFT of paint of Fire Proof Doors and its fittings and fixtures as per
BOQ shall be checked. The doors shall be finished with suitable fire retardant painting
system
7.1.10 WATER PROOFING
The execution, finishing, testing and acceptance of water proofing works shall be as per
the provisions of technical specifications. The material for the works shall be procured
from the NTPC approved brand / source and the works shall be executed by the
authorized applicator of the supplier.
Water proofing shall be tested for water tightness by creating a pond of water minimum
25 mm height on area of 6 m x 6 m, for the period of 48 hrs on fully dried elastomeric
membrane surfaces. Minimum 5% area of the roof shall be subjected to water tightness
test. Such test necessarily be conducted on vulnerable areas like drain channel / drain
head. No dampness shall be visible on the underneath side of roof (i.e. ceiling), parapet
and well junctions etc. which have been subjected for testing. The above testing shall be
carried out prior to application of wearing course.
7.1.11 PILING WORK (If Applicable)
For piling works provisions of technical specifications, approved drawings, BOQs and
relevant IS codes / standards shall apply. The piling works shall be executed by the
agency meeting the qualifying requirements as specified. A detailed methodology for
piling works shall be submitted by the contractor to NTPC for approval. The
methodology may require change / modification based on the site conditions, for which
suitable revisions shall be submitted.
The methodology for piling works shall broadly contain the method of boring, stability of
bore hole, termination criteria, tests / checks for termination level, fabrication of cage,
cage lowering, concrete batching / mixing, transportation, placing, recording of the time
of construction operations, method of conducting initial and routine load tests, testing
and sampling of concrete during production and placement and acceptance checks on
piles for final clearance.
The equipment, deployment of manpower and machinery shall be arranged by the
contractor to prevent the collapse of bore hole and to ensure continuous rate of
placement of specified grade of concrete.
The piling works shall be executed as per the technical specifications, approved
drawings, relevant codes / standards, FQP and BOQ. In addition to the requirements of
technical specifications, the following shall also be ensured while execution of piling
works:
a) Time gap between completion of pile boring and start of concreting should be kept to
the minimum. However the maximum time gap shall not be more than 6 hours.
b) Muck Debris should be removed from the pile bore by air lift technique(by keeping
the tremie & air pipe as close as to bottom of pile bore) i.e. after completion of boring,

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
after completion of SPT(wherever applicable), after lowering reinforcement cage, but

before start of concreting.
c) Density of bentonite slurry shall be checked from the sample taken from the bottom
of pile bore( not at 1.0 m above the bottom of the pile bore)
d) Minimum two welding sets shall be kept ready to join the two cages of reinforcement
by engaging 3 or more welders. This will ensure the lowering of R/F cage in minimum
time.
e) While lowering the R/F cage into the pile bore, two hooks shall always be used to
ensure balanced/symmetrical insertion of cage into the pile bore.
f) Concrete cover blocks at the junction of two R/F cage shall be ensured before
lowering the second segment.
g) Surge concreting of about 1.0 cum shall be ensured at the start of concreting (i.e. in
the first pour), by suddenly allowing to fall through the tremie pipe from the funnel.
This will help in displacing left out muck/debris in the pile bore (by the impact).
h) Continuous feeding of concrete shall be ensured by deploying at least two transit
concrete mixers (if required to be deployed) and mixing done through concrete
batching plant (if deployed). Cold joints in the pile shall be avoided.
i) In a pile group, SPT shall be carried out at termination level in the pile, taken up first.
j) Bentonite slurry circulation to be ensured from start of boring to start of concreting.
Flushing of bentonite slurry will only ensure maintaining of density of bentonite slurry
uniformly and will not allow bentonite jelly to settle at the bottom, whereas air lift
technique with bentonite circulation will ensure removal of muck debris from the
bottom of pile bore.
k) Properties of drilling mud shall be checked prior to commencement of the piling work
and thereafter, minimum once per week or as found necessary by the engineer. One
sample consisting of 3 specimens shall be tested for the above.
l) Low strain pile integrity test on all job piles and test piles shall be conducted as
specified in the Technical Specification. This test shall be suitably used to identify
the piles for routine tests. High Strain dynamic test shall be done as per the technical
specification. The frequency of the test shall be as per the BOQ
m) For Working Piles: Minimum one sample consisting of 6 test cubes shall be made for
first ten piles. Out of these 3 shall be tested for 7 days cube strength and 3 for 28
days cube strength. Minimum one sample of 6 test cubes for every 25 nos. of piles
shall be tested, out of these 3 shall be tested for 7 days cube strength and 3 for 28
days cube strength
PILE LOAD TEST

Pile load testing shall conform to the requirements of IS-2911 (Part IV) and the
technical specification. Initial load tests as specified in the contract documents shall be
conducted to assess the safe load carrying capacity of pile before start of work. To
verify the load carrying capacity of the working piles, routine load test shall be
conducted.
Pile load-testing procedure and the test setup / scheme shall be submitted for
approval of NTPC. The contractor shall use the test setup having arrangement for
anchor piles / rock anchors alone or combination of anchor piles / rock anchors and
kentledge for both vertical compression and uplift (tension) Load test (initial) on piles.
The cost of reaction system / piles shall deem to be included in the cost of test piles

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
All the gauges and instruments shall be calibrated before the start of the tests on test
piles and working piles and the calibration record shall be verified before start of
execution of the test.
7.1.12 WATER SUPPLY, DRAINAGE & SANITATION

Material used for sanitary and plumbing fittings and fixtures shall conform to and be
tested as per the requirements of relevant IS Codes specified in NTPC technical
specification.
The obstructions in sewer lines shall be checked by inserting a smooth ball, of diameter
13 mm less than the pipe bore at the high end of the sewer or drain. If absence of any
obstructions, such as yarn or mortar projecting through the joints, ball shall roll down the
invert of the pipe and emerge at the lower end. The straightness shall be checked by
means of a mirror at one end of the line and lamp at the other. If the pipeline is straight,
the full circle of the light may be observed. The mirror will also indicate obstruction in the
barrel, if the pipeline is not straight.
The service pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged with water, allowing all air to
escape avoiding all shock or water hammer. The service pipe shall then be inspected
under test / working condition of pressure and flow, when all draw-off taps are closed.
The service pipes shall be checked for satisfactory support and protection from damage,
corrosion and frost.
7.1.13 ARCHITECTURAL & MISC. WORKS

Material used for sanitary and plumbing fittings and fixtures, floor finishes and allied work
shall conform and tested as per the requirements of relevant IS Codes specified in NTPC
technical specification.
Fabricated item like metal doors, windows, ventilators, louvers, rolling shutters and grills
etc. shall be checked for correctness of locations and smoothness of operation and
fixtures. All controls and locking devices shall give fault free performance. Door and
window shutters shall operate without jamming. The clearance at head and jamb for door
shutters shall not exceed 1.5 mm. For double leaf doors, the gap at the meeting stiles
shall not be more than 2.5 mm.
Materials used in glass and glazing shall be procured from source approved by NTPC
and shall conform to the requirements of the Technical Specification and IS Codes.
False ceiling panels shall be best quality material in thickness and properties called for in
the specification / schedule of items. Material Test Certificate to be submitted before
bulk supply.
All bought items covered in the scope of contract shall be procured from sources
approved by NTPC and shall conform to the requirements of the technical specifications
and referred standards /codes.
7.1.14 ROAD WORK

Quality Assurance and testing requirements for roadwork shall be as per the MORTH-
Specification (Section 900), IRC specifications or CPWD specifications as specified in
the technical specifications and BOQ of the contract.
The testing and sampling shall include the checks on earth work for embankment and
subgrade, sub bases and bases and bituminous constructions. The sampling and testing
of concrete pavements shall be as per the respective items of earthwork, subgrade / sub-
base, concrete, etc.

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
ANNEXURE-I
INDICATIVE QA&QC ORGANISATION SETUP
Project Manager
Manager (QA&QC)
Civil Engineer for Laboratory-In-

Concrete / Earth Charge
/Road works
Field Lab-Assistant and

Supervisors other skilled Staff
NOTE:
1. The above organization setup is minimum however their deployment shall be as per
the agreed deployment schedule. The contractor shall prepare a manpower
deployment schedule in line with the finalized work plan and the same shall be
submitted to the engineer-in charge for acceptance/ approval.
2. The contractor shall mobilize the QA& QC manpower in line with the finalized
manpower deployment schedule and shall ensure their availability well in advance (15
days approx.) of the beginning of the concerned activity/ work.
3. The contractor shall further mobilize required number of skilled & supporting staff and
additional resources, if any to meet the work schedule.

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
ANNEXURE-II
LIST OF SPECIALIST INSTITUTES / ORGANIZATIONS FOR TESTING AND EVALUATION OF BUILDING MATERIALS
Sl No. Name of the Institute Contact Person Test Facilities Special Studies / Investigation
1 Indian Institute of Technology Head, Deptt of Civil Engg, Mix design and material properties on In situ non destructive testing (UPV) of
Bombay, Phone : 022 25722545 selective basis concrete structures, design of mass
Powai, Mumbai - 400076 concrete, temperature studies, distress
assessment
2 Indian Institute of Technology Head, Deptt of Civil Engg. Selective specialised studies such as design
Madras, Chennai- 600 036 Phone: 044 22574266/5255 of fly ash concrete and special concrete, non
destructive testing (UPV) of structures
3 Indian Institute of Technology Head, Deptt of Civil Engineering, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical In situ non destructive testing (UPV) of
Guwahati -781039 Phone : 0361 2582401, 258 2442, and chemical), aggregates (mechanical concrete structures (selective basis),
258 2440 properties), fly ash (physical and chemical), design of mass concrete, studies on
admixtures, water, steel reinforcement, properties of fly ash concrete
petrography, alkali aggregate reactivity, mix
design
4 Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur Head, Deptt of Civil Engineering, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical Non destructive testing (UPV) on concrete
(UP) - 208016 Phone: 0512 2597346 and chemical), aggregates (mechanical structures, structural health assessment
properties), fly ash (physical and chemical),
admixtures, water, mix design
5 Indian Institute of Technology Head, Deptt of Civil Engineering, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical
Kharagpur (WB) -721302 Phone: 03222 283421 and chemical), aggregates (mechanical
admixtures, water, mix design, petrography
6 Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, Head, Deptt of Civil Engineering, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical In situ non destructive testing (UPV) of
Hauz Khas, New Delhi - 1100 016 Phone:01126591191 and chemical), aggregates (mechanical concrete structures (selective basis)
7 Indian Institute of Technology, Head, Deptt of Civil Engineering, Testing and evaluation of cement(physical Various tests on other building materials
Roorkee - 247667 Phone: 01332 285439, 273560 and chemical), aggregates (mechanical), fly such as silica fume, mass concrete, steel,
ash (physical and chemical), admixtures, bricks, tiles, doors, ferrocement covers,
water, steel reinforcement, mix design, pipes, bridge bearings, PVC water tanks,
petrography, alkali aggregate reactivity etc
8 Indian Institute of Science Head, Deptt of Civil Engineering, Design of roller compacted concrete, IISc basically involved in r&d activities
Bangalore 560012 IISC Bangalore radiation shield concrete, high volume fly ash relatred to civil enginnering and may only
concrete, fire bahavior of concrete, micro be contacted in case of specific studies /
cracking of concrete, non destructive testing consultancy.
(research & development) activities, behavior
of concrete under shrinkage and creep,
assessment of fire damaged concrete
9 Institute of Technology, Banaras Head, Deptt of Civil Engineering, Testing and evaluation of cement physical
Hindu University (BHU) Varanasi Phone: 0542-2307016 properties), aggregates (mechanical
(UP) -221005 properties), admixtures, water, mix design,
petrography
0000-999-QOG-R-002 REV 01 DATE 31.10.2013

ANNEXURE-II
10 Central Building Research Institute Head, Structural engineering division, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical Fire rating of doors, non destructive testing
(CBRI), Roorkee - 247667 Phone: 01332 283382 and chemical), aggregates (mechanical), fly of structures, various tests on other
ash (physical and chemical), admixtures, building materials such as bricks, steel,
water, mix design, alkali aggregate reactivity tiles,etc
11 Central Soil and Materials Research Joint Director Testing and evaluation of cement (physical Various tests on other building materials
Station (CSMRS), Near IIT Phone: 011 26962608 and chemical), aggregates (mechanical such as steel, geotextiles, geomembrane,
Delhi, Olof Palme Marg, New Delhi - properties), fly ash (physical and chemical), soil, instrumentation, monitoring, etc
110016 admixtures, water, petrography, alkali
aggregate reactivity, mix design
12 National Council for Cement and Head, Center for Construction Testing and evaluation of cement (physical In situ non destructive testing (UPV) of
Building Materials (NCB), 34 KM Development & Research and chemical), aggregates (mechanical concrete structures and special studies,
Stone, Delhi Mathura Road Phone : 0129 2246173 properties), fly ash (physical and chemical), testing of bricks, paving blocks, steel bars,
Ballabgarh(Har) admixtures, water, petrography, alkali silica fume, etc
aggregate reactivity, temperature cycle test,
XRD, steel reinforcement, mix design
13 National Council for Cement and General Manager, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical In situ Non destructive testing (UPV) of
Building Materials (NCB), NCB Phone 040 23000344, 040- and chemical), aggregates (mechanical concrete structures (selective basis)
Bhawan, Old Bombay Road 23000343 properties) , fly ash (physical and chemical),
Hyderabad 500008 admixtures, water, petrography, alkali
aggregate reactivity, steel reinforcement, mix
design
14 National Test House, Taramani S.O.(Civil) Testing and evaluation of cement (physical Various tests on other building materials
Chennai 600 113 Phone:04422432374, and chemical) , aggregates (mechanical such as paving blocks, Gi pipes, wires,
Fax:04422433158 properties) , fly ash (physical and chemical), steel plate, flush doors, salt spray test, etc
admixtures, steel reinforcement, water, mix
design
15 National Test House, Block CP S.O. (Civil), Testing and evaluation of cement(physical Various tests on other building materials
Sector V, Salt Lake city Phone:033 2367 3870 and chemical), aggregates (mechanical such as paving blocks, GI pipes, wires,
Kolkata-700 091 properties) , fly ash (physical and chemical) , steel plate, flush doors, etc
admixtures, water, steel reinforcement, mix
design
16 National Test House (NTH), S.O. (Civil), NTH Ghaziabad Testing and evaluation of cement (physical Timber, clay products, water proofing
Kamla Nehru Nagar, Ghaziabad and chemical), aggregates (mechanical compound, flush doors, laminated sheets,
(UP) properties), fly ash (physical and chemical), plywood, etc
admixtures, water, stel reinforcement
17 Structural Engineering Research Head, Department of Material Testing and evaluation of cement (physical In situ Non destructive testing (UPV) of
Centre (SERC), Testing, and chemical) , aggregates (mechanical concrete structures (selective basis) and
Taramani, Chennai 600 113 Phone: 044 22549152, 22541735 properties), fly ash (physical and chemical), special studies such as cement admixture
admixtures, steel reinforcement water, mix compatibility, design of special concrete,
design evaluation of structures
0000-999-QOG-R-002 REV 01 DATE 31.10.2013

ANNEXURE-II
18 Vishveswaraiya National Institute of Director, VNIT Nagpur, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical In situ non destructive testing (UPV) of
Technology(VNIT), Phone:0712 2223710, 2222828 and chemical), aggregates (mechanical concrete structures and soil tests
Nagpur (MH) - 440010 properties), fly ash (physical and chemical),
admixtures, water, mix design, petrography
19 Anna University, Department of Head, Deptt of Civil Engineering Testing and evaluation of cement (physical
Structural Engineering, and chemical) , aggregates (mechanical
Chennai - 600 025 properties) , fly ash (physical and chemical) ,
20 Shriram Institute for Industrial Dr (Mrs) Laxmi Rawat, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical Various tests on other building materials
Research, 19 University Road, Delhi Asstt Director & Chief and chemical), aggregates (mechanical such as steel, geotextiles, geomembrane,
110007 Phone:011 27667267 properties), fly ash (physical and chemical), soil, bricks, tiles, etc
21 Spectro Analytical Lab, E-41, Okhla Phone: 011 26383048-49 Testing of cement (physical and chemical), Chemical and physical tests on steel
Indl Area, Ph II, New Delhi 110021 Fax: 40503150, 40503151 aggregates (mechanical properties), fly ash reinforcement
(physical and chemical), admixtures, water
22 Motilal Nehru National Institute of Director, MNIT Allahabad, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical In situ non destructive testing (UPV) of
Technology (MNIT), Allahabad - Phone: 0532 2271305, Fax: 0532 and chemical) , aggregates (mechanical concrete structures.
211004 2545341 properties), fly ash (physical and chemical),
admixtures, steel reinforcement water, mix
design
23 Govt Enginering College, Jalpaiguri Head Deptt of Civil Engg, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical ),
(WB) - 735102 Fax: 03561256143 aggregates (mechanical properties), water,
mix design
24 College of Engineering Head Deptt of Civil Engg, Testing and evaluation of cement (Physical &
Pune - 411005 Phone No : 02025507067, Chemical properties), fly ash (Physical &
Fax : 02025507299 Chemical properties), aggregates
(Mechanical properties except alkali
aggregate reactivity & Petrography), water,
admixtures and mix design
25 Maulana Azad National Institute of Head Deptt of Civil Engg, Testing and evaluation of cement (physical ), In situ non destructive testing (UPV) of
Technology, Bhopal (MP) Phone No : 07554051390 aggregates (mechanical properties),water, concrete structures and soil tests.
mix design
0000-999-QOG-R-002 REV 01 DATE 31.10.2013

ANNEXURE - III
Format of Request Letter for Evaluation of Materials
Ref:_____________ Date:_____________
To
Sub.: Evaluation of materials and concrete mix design
Dear Sir,
We have awarded the work of …………………… on M/s ……………….. vide our LOA No.
……………………….dated…………………for execution of Civil Works. Based on provisions of
contract, M/s ………………….. are expected to get the following tests/ evaluation done through your
laboratory and accordingly the tests have been described below.
M/s ………………… have been advised to deposit the requisite evaluation/ testing charges and to
deliver the test samples of quantities, specified below.
1. Evaluation of Cement:
a) To carry out different physical tests on cement samples i.e. Blaine’s fineness, initial and final
setting time, soundness and compressive strength at 3, 7 and 28 days as per IS: 4031 and
drying shrinkage and specific gravity in case of PPC.
b) To carry out chemical analysis of the cement samples as per IS: 4032, including the total
alkali content of the cement (Na2Oequivalent).
c) To advise the suitability of cement based on the test results of a) and b) above.
2. Evaluation of Aggregates:
a) To carry out different tests on coarse aggregate sample i.e. specific gravity, water absorption,
sieve analysis, deleterious material; soundness, crushing value, impact value, abrasion value,
elongation index and flakiness index, as per IS: 2386.
b) To carry out different tests on fine aggregate sample i.e. specific gravity, water absorption,
sieve analysis soundness, deleterious material, silt content, clay content and organic
impurities as per IS: 2386 and mica content.
c) To prepare evaluation report based on test results of a) and b) above and to advise regarding
suitability of fine and coarse aggregates to be used with the cement of 1) above.
3. Evaluation of Aggregates for Potential Alkali-Aggregate Reactivity:

a) To carry out petrographic analysis and accelerated Mortar bar Test on aggregate samples
(1N NaOH at 80 deg. Centigrade for 14 days as per ASTM 1260, or the method established/
developed by CSMRS for 22days test).
b) To prepare a report based on test results of a) above and to advise regarding suitability of
aggregates to be used with the cement of 1) above and further testing required if any.
4. Evaluation of Flyash Sample:
Page
DARLIPALI STPP-I (2 X 800 MW) Bid Doc. No. : TECHNICAL PART IV,
SWITCHYAD PACKAGE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION VI 1 of 3
CS-9549-572-2
a) To carry out various physical and chemical tests on fly ash sample i.e. Blaine’s fineness, lime
reactivity, specific gravity, loss on ignition and other chemical tests as per IS: 3812,
conforming to grade-I.
b) To advise the suitability of fly ash sample based on the test results of a) above.
5. Evaluation of water: To carry out various physical and chemical tests as per IS:456 and IS:3025.
6. Evaluation of admixtures: To carry out various physical and chemical tests as per IS:9103.
Note: Test certificate shall be obtained from the supplier to compare the values given in Table 2
of IS:9103 i.e. uniformity requirements.
7. Concrete Mix Design

Based on the provisions of technical specification, the Following may be specified by site
CCD/FQA **
a) For RCC Work
i) Grade of concrete
ii) Slump required, mm:
iii) Cement- Type and grade
iv) Max Size of Aggregates, mm
v) Exposure conditions
vi) Maximum water-cement ratio
vii) Minimum cement content
viii) Plasticizer/ admixture to be used or not (If yes, specify the brand/ type/batch no. of
plasticizer)
ix) Fly ash to be used or not (If yes, indicate % of fly ash to be used)
b) For PCC work: Same as i) to ix) of a) above

c) For piling work(if required): Same as i) to ix) of a) above
8. Details of material sampled

In order to facilitate the above mentioned tests, specified quantities of samples have been
collected and sealed jointly (by NTPC-FQA and contractors’ representative) is being sent for
testing. The impression of seal has also been punched below.
a) Quantity of material required for each mix-design:
Sl. Material Description Quantity Required

No.
i) Cement 2bags (sealed in double polythene bags)
ii) Coarse Aggregates 100Kg of each fraction as explained below :

e.g.; If Maximum size of aggregates (MSA) is 20mm, then
100 Kg each of 20-10mm and 10mm down are required. If
MSA is 40mm then 100Kg each of 40-20mm, 20-10mm and
10mm down are required.
iii) Fine Aggregates 200Kg
iv) Chemical Admixtures 2 litres
v) Water 100 litres
vi) Fly ash (If decided to be 100Kg

used)
Page
CS-9549-572-2
b) Quantity of material required for Alkali-Aggregate reactivity
Sl. Material Description Quantity Required

No.
i) Coarse aggregate
a) 80-40mm 60Kg
b) 40-20mm 60Kg
c) 20-10mm 60Kg
d) <10mm 60Kg
ii) Fine aggregates 60Kg
iii) Cement 2 samples (1 bag each), contemplated for use in

construction.
c) Impression/ Punch Mark of seal:
You are requested to kindly forward us the test reports along with the recommendations regarding
the suitability of materials to us at the earliest.
Thanking you,
Yours faithfully,
Name:
Contact Number:
Email ID:
(FQA Representative of NTPC)
Note:
1. Based on provisions of technical specification, the testing charges for all the above mentioned
tests shall be borne by the contractor.
2. The content of the letter is for guidance only, and if required may be suitably modified to suit
the specific requirements of the package in consultation with QA-Civil.
** This line may be deleted in the letter sent to the institute.
Page
CS-9549-572-2
CLAUSE NO.
ANNEXURE - IV
TYPICAL QA/QC LAB EQUIPMENT
S.No Equipment Nos.

1 Vicat Apparatus with deskpot 1
2 Le Chatelier flask 1
3 Le Chatelier Mould 1
4 Cube Moulds for cement testing 6
5 Vibration Machine 1
6 Length comparator 1
7 Shrinkage Bar mould 1
8 Sieve shaker 1
9 Sieves for sand, coarse & fine aggregate 1 set for each
10 Sieves for coarse aggregate for Road 1 set
11 Proctor testing equipment 2 sets + 18 cores
12 Slump testing equipment 2 sets
13 Oven 2
14 Physical balance 1
15 Rapid moisture meter 2
16 Thermometer 1
17 Burret 2
18 Measuring cylinders 1
19 Measuring flasks 1
20 Compression testing machine 2 sets
21 Cube moulds 18
22 Electronic balance 1 (12 kg capacity), 2(
200 mg capacity)
23 pH balance As per requirement
24 Radiographic facilities As per requirement, Party
should deploy BARC
approved agency for
carrying out RT
25 Mechanical weighing machine 1 (100 kg capacity)
26 Ultrasonic testing machine As per requirement
27 D.P. Test kit As per requirement
28 Vernier 300 mm, 600 mm 2
29 Micrometer (0.25 mm) out side (25.00) 2
30 Radiography film viewer (if required) 1
31 Inside Micrometer 25-750 dia 1
32 Digital elcometer for paint thickness 1
33 Baking oven for electrode 1
34 Portable ovens 2
35 Rebar detector to locate the reinforcement 1
before core cutting operation
36 Concrete coring machine (55mm, 60mm 1
upto 150 mm dia core bit)
37 Rebound hammer 1
38 Ultrasonic pulse velocity tester May be arranged from
specialist laboratory.

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
CLAUSE NO.
Note :
1. The equipments listed above are indicative and required to be mobilized as
minimum requirement. Additional equipment if any, required for successful
completion of work shall be provided /arranged by the contractor.
2. All test reports/ inspection reports have to be computerized and maintained on
LAN with an access to the owner.
3. Computers - 2 Nos. shall be deployed with Windows operating system and
connected to the NTPC server.
4. Based on the schedule (L2/L3 Network), Quality control & Quality Assurance
work plan shall be finalized by the contractor and the same shall be submitted to
the engineer-in-charge for acceptance/approval. The Finalized work plan shall
be maintained on the computer to be accessed by the owner for database and
day to day monitoring.

TECHNICAL
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
SUPPLIERS NAME AND INDICATIVE FIELD QUALITY PLAN ANNEXURE-V
ADDRESS: ITEM : CIVIL WORK QP NO. : 1 PROJECT: DARLIPALLI STPP STAGE-I (2X800 MW)
LOGO REV. NO .: 0 PACKAGE: SWITCHYARD
SUB-SYSTEM : CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORK DATE : CONTRACT NO. CS-9549-572-2
PAGE : Page 1 of 16 MAIN CONTRACTOR
Sl. No Activity and operation Characteristics / instruments Class of Type of Check Quantum Of check Reference Document Acceptance Format of Remarks
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
1 EXCAVATION AND FILLING IN FOUNDATION WORKS

Excavations-
1.1 Nature, type of soil/rock before and B Visual Random in eah shift SR
As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
during excavations
1.2 Initial ground level before start of B Measurement 100% SR 
excavations
1.3 Final shape and Dimensions of B Measurement 100% SR
excavations.
1.4 Final excavation lelvels As agreed / required B Measuement 100% Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
1.5 Side slope of final excavation As agreed / required B Measurement Random in eah shift Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
1.6 Excavation in Hard Rock- If required
i Receipt, Storage, accountability of B Physical Random in each week Indian Explosive Act 1940/all statutory SR  NTPC approved specialist blasting agency
As agreed / required
Explosive norms, Tech Specs and Const. Drawings such as CMRI, NIRM shall be deployed at
ii Execution of Blasting Operation As agreed / required B Physical Random in eah shift IS:4081, Tech Specs and Const. SR  site for trial blasts, design blasts, blast
iii Submission of Blasting report to EIC As agreed / required C Physical Each blast Tech Specs and Const. Drawings  vibration monitoring etc. Seismographs
1.7 Excavation in Hard Rock (Blasting B Physical 100% SR  shall be deployed at site for monitoring of
As per approved drawing/ scheme, Tech blast operation vibrations.
Prohibited) As agreed / required
Specs and Const. Drawings
Fill/ Backfill -
1.8 A Suitability of borrow fill material - If earth is brought from area within the NTPC acquired area
Suitability B Visual Randon in each shift
As agreed / required As per technical specifications
1.8 B Suitability of borrow fill material- Applicable in case the earth is brought from an area, out of the NTPC aquired land area
i Grain size analysis Set of Seives, B Physical One in every 2000 cum SR/TR 
Hydrometer etc. for each type and source The parameters should not be worse than
IS:2720 (Pt.IV), Tech Specs and Const.
of fill materials subject to the parameter of the existing soil in plant
Drawings
a min. of 2 samples area
ii Liquid & plastic limit Mechanical liquid limit B Physical One in every 2000 cum SR/TR 
device, grooving tools, for each type and source
The parameters should not be worse than
Evaporating of fill materials subject to IS:2720 (Pt.IV) , Tech Specs and Const.
the parameter of the existing soil in plant
Disc,Spatula, Palette a min. of 2 samples Drawings
area
knives, Balance oven
containers, etc.
iii Shrinkage limit -do- B Physical One in every 5000 cum SR/TR 
for each type and source The parameters should not be worse than
IS:2720 (Pt.IV), Tech Specs and Const.
of fill materials subject to the parameter of the existing soil in plant
Drawings
a min. of 2 samples area
iv Free Swell Index Measuring cylinders, B Physical One in every 5000 cum SR/TR  The parameters should not be worse than
IS:2720 (Pt.XI), Tech Specs and Const.
etc. for each type and source the parameter of the existing soil in plant
Drawings
of fill materials area
v Chemical Analysis
a Organic Matter Oven chemical B Physical One in every 5000 cum SR/TR 
balance, volumetric for each type and source
flasks, burettes, of fill materials
IS:2720 Pt.XXII, Tech Specs and Const.
pipettes, conical flasks,
Drawings
set of seives,
measuring cylinders
etc.
Page 1 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
b Calcium carbonate Reagents and B Physical One in every 5000 cum SR/TR 
Part XXIII of IS-2720, Tech Specs and
indicators,Burette,flask for each type and source
Const. Drawings
s,funnels etc. of fill materials
c pH value B Physical One in every 5000 cum SR/TR 
Part XXVI of IS-2720, Tech Specs and
As agreed / required for each type and source
Const. Drawings
of fill materials
d Total soluble sulphate B Physical One in every 5000 cum SR/TR 
Part XXVII of IS-2720, Tech Specs and
As agreed / required for each type and source
Const. Drawings
of fill materials
1.9 Standard proctor Test Optimum moisture content and max. dry As per IS: 2720, A Physical One in every 2000 cum SR/TR 
IS 2720 (Pt.VII), Tech Specs and Const.
density before fill Proctor needle for each type and source
Drawings
apparatus,etc. of fill materials
1.10 Moisture content Moisture content of fill before compaction As per IS: 2720, A Physical One in every 2000 cum SR/TR 
IS 2720 (Pt.II), Tech Specs and Const.
balance, oven etc. for each type and source
Drawings
of fill materials
1.11 Degree Of Compaction Of Fill / Backfill
i Dry density by core cutter method As per IS: A Physical i) For foundation fill/ SR/TR 
2720/compaction test backfill one for every 10 IS 2720 (Pt. XXIX), Tech Specs and
---- OR---- (core cutter), balance foundations for each Const. Drawings
etc. compacted layer.
Dry density in place by sand ii) For area filling, one SR/TR 
displacement method every 1000 SQM area IS 2720 (Pt. XXVIII), Tech Specs and
for each compacted Const. Drawings
layer.
ii Relative density (Density Index) As per IS: 2720, A Physical ----do----- (i) & (ii) above IS 2720 (Pt. XIV), Tech Specs and Const. SR/TR 
balance oven etc. Drawings
iii Dry Density by proctor needle As per IS-2720, proctor B Physical Random checks to be SR/TR 
penetration nedle apparatus etc. carried out for each Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
compacted layer
2.0 MATERIALS
2.1 CEMENT
Retesting of cement as per IS:4031 A Testing At Random As per relevant IS Codes Test  Each consignment of cement shall be duly
Report correlated with manufactureres TC,in case
the cement is supplied by the contractor
one sample from each lot shall be tested
for stetting time and compressive strength
. Acceptance norms shall be as per
relevant IS. If cement is
stored more than 60 days in godown of
contractor same shall be retested for
comp. Strength & setting time.
2.2 Coarse Aggregate Moisture content as per IS:2386 B Physical Once for each stack of IS : 456 SR/LB  Accordingly water content of the concrete
100 Cu.M. or part there IS : 383/Tech Spec will be adjusted
of Except during
monsoon when this has
to be done every day
before start of concreting
ii Specific gravity, water absorption IS:2386 A Physical Once for each source & IS: 2386 Part-III, IS:456, SR/LB/  These tests will be carried out while
for every change of IS:383/Tech Spec Test establishing design mix and the results to
source Report be intimated to NTPC.
Page 2 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
iii Sieve analysis, flakiness index, IS:2386 B Physical One per 100 cum., or IS: 2386 Part-I, IS:383/Tech SR/LB  -do-
elongation index, part thereof Spec
iv Deleterious materials (coal & lignite, clay IS:2386 A Physical Once per source/ on IS: 2386 Part-II, IS:383/Tech SR/LB/  Experts opinion regarding suitability of the
lumps, material finer than 75 micron every change of source Spec Test aggregates shall be obtained from the
sieve, soft fragment, shale) Report specialist agency finalised during
preaward.
v Soundness IS:2386 A Physical -do- IS: 2386 Part-V, IS:383 SR/LB/  Experts opinion regarding suitability of the
Test aggregates shall be obtained from the
Report specialist agency finalised during
preaward.
vi Alkali aggregate reactivity A Physical -do- IS: 2386 (Part-VII), IS:383 SR/LB/  The aggregate type
/Tech Spec/ASTM C-1260 / ASTM 1293 Test (deleterious/innocuous result should be
Report supported by petrographic examination
vii Petrographic examination IS:2386 Pt VIII A Physical -do- IS: 2386 Part-VIII, IS:383 SR/LB/  Petrographic report shall be supported by
/Tech Spec Test the analysis and recommendation by a
Report specialist instute.
viii Crushing value abrasion value and IS:2386 A Physical -do- IS:383, IS-2386 Part IV/Tech Spec SR/LB/ 
impact value Test
Report
2.3 Fine Aggregate
i Moisture content, water absorption balance , oven etc B Physical To be done every day IS: 2386 Part-III IS:383 SR/LB/T  Accordingly water content of the concrete
before start of work R will be adjusted
ii Deleterious materials (coal & lignite, clay IS:2386 B Physical Once per source& for on IS: 2386 Part-II, IS:383 SR/LB/T  Acceptance limit as per relevant IS
lumps, material finer than 75 micron every change of source R code
sieve, soft fragment, shale)
iii All other tests similar to coarse IS-2386, IS-383 SR/LB/T  except test for flankiness index,elongation
aggregates as mentioned above. R index, abrasion value, impact value
2.4 Water
i Test for acidity & alkalinity, sulphate and Buret, conical flask, B Testing One per 3 month for IS:3025 part 22 and 23 (for test procedure SR/LB/T 
chloride content. pipette etc each source. ), IS:456(for acceptance criteria ) R
ii Tests for ascertaining limit of solids As per IS Code B Physical One per 3 month for IS:3025 part 18 (organic),IS:456 SR/LB/T 
each source. R
iii Tests for pH Value pH meter B Testing One per 3 month for IS:3025, IS:456 SR/LB/T 
each source R
2.5 CONCRETE
i 4 Trial mixes to ascertain the workability After receiving the A Physical One for each mix NTPC tech specification SR/LB  Necessary correction for moisture content
and cube strength recommended mix proportion and water absorption according to mix
design from specialist design recommendation may be carried
agency, out during the trial mix
ii Crushing strength (works Tests cubes) IS:516 A Physical One set of 6 cubes per IS:516, IS:456, NTPC Tech. Spec. SR/LB/  Min. of 6 cubes for each mix, 3 specimen
50 CuM or part thereof Test shall be tested at 7 days remaining 3 shall
for each grade of Report be for 28 days comp. Strength.
concrete per shift
whichever is earlier.
iii Workability - slump test IS:1199 B Physical At the time of concrete IS:456/NTPC Tech. Spec. SR/LB/TR 
pouring at site every two
hrs
iv Water content B Physical Once per shift As per approved design mix. SR/LB  At batching plant
Page 3 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
2.5.1 Admixtures for Concrete Type of admixture As per IS:9103 A Testing For each lot received at Designed mix and IS:9103 Test  Admixture of appd. Brand and tested
site Report quality shall be used (each lot of
admixture will included with brochure in
which the type of admixture and its
properties shall be clearly indicated)
Complete testing of admixtures As per IS:9103 A Physical / For each approved IS:9103 Test  Test report from NTPC acceptable
Chemical brand / type of admixture Report Laboratory for the jointly sampled
laboratory test admixture
Suitability and review of MTC A Testing For each lot received at SR/LB/T  Relative density, pH and slump retention
site R on each batch / lot of admixture and to
compare these properties with MTC and
test report of specialist agency
2.6 Concrete conveying,
placing& compaction
i Mixing of concrete mixing of concrete shall be done in a To be calibrated at the Review of calibration chart/ Certificate, IS 
approved mixer such as to produce a time of starting and 4926
homogenous mix subsequently once in
three months, and shall
conform to IS:4925
ii Arrangement for transportation & As required C Visual 100% Before clearance for concreting Inspectio 
placement of concrete. n Report
iii Calibration of Batching Plant batcher should comply A Physical To be calibrated at the Review of calibration chart/ Certificate Calibrati  Cement consumption at batching plant
with reqirement of IS time of starting and on shall also be obtained through comp.
4926/IS:4925 subsequently once in Certificat Output.Provision of online printer is
three months, and shall e manadatory
conform to IS:4925
iv Handling and Transportation of concrete As required B Physical 100% As per construction/erection methodology SR Free fall or drop shall be limited to 150
(to be approved one week prior to start of cm unless permitted. Concrete should be
work) placed within 30 min of its removal from
mixure .
v Placement of concrete Visual B Physical 100% As per construction/erection methodology SR 
and tech.specs / No segregation
vi Temperature Control of Concrete for top Thermometer B Physical 100% Temperature as per technical SR 
deck of TG Foundations. specification
vii Placement Visual B Physical 100% As per approved construction SR  No bleeding and segregation
methodology
viii Compacting As required B Physical At Random IS:456 SR  No bleeding and segregation
ix Curing As required B Physical At Random Period of curing as per IS 456 (use gunny SR  Exposed concrete surface shall be
bags / curing compound) protected against heating and drying for
atleast 72 hrs after placement, curing
compound and gunny bags may be used
Page 4 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
2.7 TEST/CHECK ON RCC STRUCTURE IN HARDENDED CONDITIONS
i Rebound Hammer Test IS:13311 A Physical As required by NTPC Test  Rebound hammer test is applicable to
Engineer. report assess the inplace uniformity of concrete,
to delineate regions in a structure of poor
quality or deteriorated concrete and to
estimate in-place strength development.
IS:13311
This test method is not intended as the
basis for acceptance or rejection of
concrete because of the inherent
uncertainty in the estimated strength.
ii Core Test IS:516 A Physical As required by NTPC As per IS:456, IS 516 SR/LB/  Compressive strength based on core test
Engineer. Test is required to be carried out only if in case
Report of doubt regarding the grade of concrete
used, either due to poor workmanship or
based on the results results of cube
strength test as per 2.5 ii) above.
iii Dimensional check on finished structures As required B Measurement Approved Drawing As per IS:456/ tech. Specification. SR/LB 
& Dimensional tolerances
2.8 REINFORCEMENT STEEL
i Physical and Chemical Properties for As required/ agreed A Review of MTC Each batch of delivery IS : 1786, IS:432, IS:1566, Tech Specs MTC Applicable if steel is procured by
each lot as per relevant IS codes  Contractor
and Const. Drawings
ii Freedom from cracks surface flaws, B Visual Random in each shift SR To be checked at site. Steel collected
Lamination. IS: 1852, IS:432, IS:1786, Tech Specs from source should be free from
and Const. Drawings excessive rust. To be stored as per
Technical Specs.
2.9 PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT STEEL
i Bar bending schedule with necessary B Visual & Random in each shift Approved Drawings, Tech Specs and SR
As agreed / required 
lap, Spacers & Chairs Measurement Const. Drawings, IS:2502
ii Bending of bars, cutting tolerance B Visual & Random in each shift Approved Drawings, Tech Specs and SR
Measurement Const. Drawings
iii Acceptance - Cover, spacing of bars, B Visual & Random in each shift SR
spacers and chairs after the Measurement Approved Drawings, Tech Specs and
reinforcement cage is put inside the As agreed / required 
Const. Drawings
formwork
2.10 STAGING AND FORMS
i Materials and accessories B Visual Once before start of As per relevant IS, Tech Specs and SR
work Const. Drawings
ii Soundness of staging, shuttering and B Visual Once before start of As per manufacturer's spec.and as per SR
scaffolding including application of mould As agreed / required work 3696,4014, 4990, Tech Specs and Const.
oil / release agent Drawings
iii Acceptance of formwork before start of B Physical / visual Before start of each As per provisions and tolerances, Tech SR
concreting concreting 
2.11 EMBEDDED PART(INCLUDING LAYING OF RAILS & ANCHOR
FASTENERS)
i Position / alignment / levels of embedded B Physical/ 100% SR/ Exposed surfsce of the embeded parts
parts / bolt hole / pipe sleeves / rails / measurement As per drawing, Tech Specs and Const. Protocol other than holding down bolts are to be
PVC pipes / etc As agreed / required  painted with primer ,chlorinated , rubber
Drawings
baed zinc phosphate
ii Welding / tieing of embeddment to B Physical/ Random in each shift As per drawing, Tech Specs and Const. SR
reinforce-ment As agreed / required measurement Drawings
2.12 PRE-CAST CONCRETE
Page 5 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
i Crushing strength compression strength A Physical one sample of six cubes IS:516 & IS: 456 SR/LB A minimum of three specimen shall be
testing machine per 50m m3 or part  tested for 7 and 28 days compressive
thereof strength
ii Workmanship and dimentions Visual B Physical 100% As per IS:456/NTPC Tech. specification. Register
iii Load Test As required B Physical 2% up to 1000 nos. and IS:456/ As decided by NTPC Site Engr. Inspectio
1% for more than 1000 Incharge. n Report

nos. for each type
2.13 JOINTS IN CONCRETE

i Joint material - bitumen impregnated As per manufacturer A Review of MTC Each batch of delivery Tech Specs and Const. Drawings, IS MTC
fibre board, PVC water stops, Sealing Standards 1838, IS 1834, IS12200
compound, Expanded polystyrene board, 
Hydrophillic strip, Acrylic polymer etc.
ii Acceptance of installation B Acceptance Each installation

randomly
2.14 DAMP PROOF COURSE Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
Material - Hot bitumen and water A Review of MTC Each batch of delivery at
i As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings, IS 702 SR 
proofing materials etc site
ii Acceptance of damp proof course As agreed / required B Acceptance 100% Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
2.15 GROUTING
i Material As agreed / required A Review of MTC Each batch of delivery Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
Type of mix - fluid mix, plastic mix, stiff B Physical Prior to start of work
mix etc. As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
ii Mixing, placement, application and grout B Physical Random in each shift

pressure As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
iii Compressive strength A Physical Random in each shift

As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
iv Acceptance of the grouts As agreed / required B Physical Each grout section Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
3.00 BRICK MASONARY

3.1 Test on Bricks
Dimensions , shape, compressive A Measurement/ As per relevant IS Code/ Inspectio Efflorescence shall be checked at each
strength, water absorption, warpage, Physical Test One Sample for 30,000 IS: 1077, IS:13757, IS: 12894 / Tech n Report source.
efflorescence. nos. or part thereof Specs and const. Drawings
3.2 Test on Mortar

i Compressive strength, consistency B Test At random IS 2250-1981, Tech Specs and Const. LB
Drawings
ii Sand Grading As agreed / required B Test IS:2116 SR/LB
3.3 Masonry construction Workmanship, verticality and alignment B Visual/ Physical 100% IS 2212, IS 1905 , Tech Specs and Const. SR/LB
Drawings
4.00 FINISHING AND ALLIED WORKS .
4.1 PLASTERING- MATERIAL
i Sand Deleterious Material B Physical Once per source IS : 2386 (Part-I &II) & IS :2116, Tech SR
As agreed / required Specs and Const. Drawings
ii Grading B Physical 50 Cum./or part thereof IS:1542 & Apprd. drgs, Tech Specs and SR Table –I of IS:2116
As agreed / required Const. Drawings
iii Galvanised wire mesh Galvanized hexagonal wire netting for B Review of MTC/ Each batch of delivery SR
As agreed / required IS:3150 Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
lath plastering Test Report
Page 6 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
4.2 PLASTERING - WORKMANSHIP
i Physical 100% Tech specifications, construction
Curing As agreed / required C SR
drawings and agreed methodology
ii Thickness and finishing of plaster, B Visual/ Random in each shift As per IS 1661 , Tech Specs and Const. SR/LB
grooves etc Measurement Drawings
iii Truness of plastering system B Visual/ Physical Random in each shift SR Deviation not more than 4 mm when
As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings checked with straight edge of 2 m length
4.3 STONE GRIT PLASTER/ GRANULAR TEXTURED COAT FINISH

i Approved source For each lot received at
Material As agreed / required B and review of site Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
MTC
ii Thickness, finishing and grooves etc Visual/
As agreed / required B Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
Measurement Random in each shift
5.00 SHEETING AND OTHER WORKS
5.1 PAINTING SYSTEM - CONCRETE WORKS AND PLASTERED MASONARY SURFACES
i Materials and accessories- Oil A Review of MTC Each batch of delivery SR/MTC Mfr.’s T.C. shall be correlated with the
Bound, Acrylic Emulsion, Shade, type from brand and consignment received.
As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings 
Chemical Resistant, Oil manufacturer as approved by NTPC EIC
Resistant Paint etc.
ii Surface prepration As required As agreed / required C Physical /visual Random in each shift IS:2935 (Part - I), Tech Specs and Const. SR
iii Acceptance of painted surfaces As required B Physical Each surface at random SR
6.00 DOORS , WINDOWS VENTILATORS & GRILL

6.1 Steel doors
i Materials (MS sheet, fasteners, hinges, As agreed / required A Visual/ Physical / For each lot received at SR / LB Review of test report
Tech Specs and Const. Drawings 
jambs, lock strike plate etc test report site
ii Flush Door shutters, teak beading A EIC Approved For each lot received at SR Review of test report
source and review site IS 2202, Tech Specs and Const.
of MTC/ test Drawings
reports
iii Hollow metal doors (material and dimensions) A Visual/ For each lot received at Review of test report
As agreed / required Physical/Test site Tech Specs and Const. Drawings 
report
iv Acceptance As agreed / required B Visual/ Physical Random Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR/LB
6.2 Anodised aluminium works
i Materials- Aluminium sections, alkali resistant paint A For each lot received at IS: 1948, IS: 1949, IS:733, IS1285,
Visual/ Physical / SR / LB Review of test report
As agreed / required test report site IS:1868, IS:11857/ Tech Specs and  For aluminium door/windows, check for
Const. Drawings anodisation as per Tech. Spec
ii Particle Door A EIC Approved For each lot received at SR Review of test report
IS:12823 (phenol formaldehyde sythentic
source and review site
As agreed / required resin, BWP type), Tech Specs and Const. 
of MTC/ test
Drawings
reports
iii Acceptance As agreed / required B Visual/ Physical Random Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
Page 7 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
6.3 Fire proof doors
i Source of supply A Review of For each source SR Procured from Approved parties as per
purchase order relevant IS/Tech, The
(unpriced copy) / door drawing proposed for supply should
IS:3614 (pt 1&2) Tech Specs and Const.
As agreed / required drawings of  have been tested and approved by CBRI
Drawings
suppliers / Roorkee for the similar dimensions for
certificate of CBRI minimum 2 hours fire rating.
ii Receipt inspection A Visual/ Physical/ For each lot received at IS:3614 (pt 1&2) Tech Specs and Const. SR
As agreed / required Review of MTC site 
Drawings
iii B Visual / physical Random IS:3614 (pt 1&2) Tech Specs and Const. SR
Finishing and acceptance As agreed / required
Drawings
6.4 Rolling shutters
i Surface finish and thickness of plate of Physical / visual / Random for each lot of IS: 6248 / Tech Specs and Const.
As agreed / required A SR 
approved make and DFT review of MTC delivery Drawings
ii Physical and Random
Finishing and acceptance As agreed / required B Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
acceptance
6.5 Steel windows / Grills/ Louvre
i Physical / visual / Each lot of delivery IS: 1038 / IS:1361, IS: 7452 and Tech
Material fabrication and fixtures As agreed / required A SR 
review of MTC Specs and Const. Drawings
ii Visual / physical Random IS: 1038 / IS:1361, IS: 7452 and Tech SR
Finishing and acceptance As agreed / required B 
6.6 Glass and glazing
i Material B EIC Approved For each lot received at SR
Clear float glass, wired glass,
source and review site IS: 14900, IS:1081, IS: 3548, IS:5437
tinted glass, curtain glass, As agreed / required 
of MTC/ test Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
hermetically sealed glass
reports
ii Installation finishing and acceptance B Visual/ Physical Random SR Leak proof installation with neoprene
As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings gasket
6.8 Reflective toughened glass
i Material A Review of MTC For each lot received at SR
site
ii B Visual / physical Random SR
Installation finishing and acceptance As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
6.9 False Ceiling

i Materials ( gypsum glass, glass fibre A Visual / physical / For each lot received at SR Compare MTC with technical specification
IS:2095, IS:8183, Tech Specs and Const.
membrane, fibre board acoustical tiles As agreed / required MTC site  and requirement
Drawings
etc)
ii Installation finishing and acceptance As agreed / required B Visual / physical Random Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
6.10 WATER PROOFING
Review for each type of SR Experienced workers under supervisors
Methodology for the application of water
As required B treatment Tech Specs and Const. Drawings  recommended/ appointed by manufacturer
proofing system
to be deployed
6.10.1 General Requirement- Water Proofing
EIC Approved For each lot received at
Polyurethene based coating,
source and review site ASTM C-836, ASTM C898 and Tech MTC shall contain all the parameters
i polyester scrim cloth, extruded Material As agreed / required A SR 
of MTC/ test Specs /Const. Drawings specified in the technical specifications
HD dimpled polyurethene
reports
Physical 100% ASTM C898, Tech Specs and Const.
ii Acceptance of water proofing work As agreed / required B
Drawings
Page 8 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
6.10.2 Roof / Basement Treatment
i Graded under bed Levels / slopes As required C Physical 100% Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
EIC Approved Each lot of delivery
source and review
ii Elastomaric coatings Material- Primer coat, finishing coat As required B Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
of MTC/ test
reports
Materials - PCC, chicken wire mesh, Review of MTC Each lot of delivery
iii Wearing course As required B Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
elastomeric sealant
iv Acceptance of water proofing work As agreed / required B Physical 100% Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
6.11 Fencing and Gates
PVC coated chain link fencing A EIC Approved Each batch of delivery SR/MTC
(IS 2720), Welded wire mesh source and review
MTC shall contain all the parameters
i (IS 1566), Reinforced barbed Materials As agreed / required of MTC/ test Tech Specs and Const. Drawings 
specified in the technical specifications
tape galvanised (IS 2629) etc. reports
Structural steel, painting A EIC Approved Each batch of delivery SR/MTC

system, caster wheel, ball and source and review MTC shall contain all the parameters
ii Materials As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings 
bearing, fixtures and fasteners of MTC/ test specified in the technical specifications
reports
Alignments, erection painting, DFT etc. B Physical / Each installation
iii As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
measurements
Acceptance of the installation and B Physical / Each installation
iv As agreed / required Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
working measurements
6.12
FLOOR FINISHES AND ALIED WORKS
6.12.1 Cement Concrete Flooring

i Glass/ PVC strips in joints As agreed / required B Physical Random in each shift Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
ii Finishing and acceptance As agreed / required B Physical 100% Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
6.12.2 Tiles
Ceramic, vitrified, glass EIC Approved
mosaic, acid alkali resistant, source and review IS:13755, IS:1237, IS:8042, Tech Specs MTC shall contain all the parameters
i Materials As agreed / required A Each lot of delivery SR 
heavy duty cement concrete of MTC/ test and Const. Drawings specified in the technical specifications
tiles reports
IS: 1443, Tech Specs and Const.
ii Finishing and acceptance As agreed / required B Physical 100% SR
Drawings
6.12.3 Interlocking Blocks
EIC Approved
source and review BS:6717, Tech Specs and Const. MTC shall contain all the parameters
i Materials As agreed / required A Each lot of delivery SR 
of MTC/ test Drawings specified in the technical specifications
reports
BS:7533 (Pt 3), Tech Specs and Const.
ii Finishing and acceptance As agreed / required B Physical 100% SR
Drawings
6.12.4 Kota Stone, Granite and Marble
Quality, texture, thickness, colour for
i each lot of delivery from approved As agreed / required B Physical Each batch of delivery Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
source
6.12.5 Metallic / non-metallic hardener
i Material As agreed / required B Physical Each batch of delivery Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
Page 9 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
6.12.6 Acid / alkali and oil resistant high built seamless epoxy based resin and treatment
Bricks, vitreous tiles, mortar, sealing, EIC Approved
Experienced workers under supervisors
paints, coatings, sheets, fillers etc source and review
i Material As agreed / required A Each batch of delivery Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR  recommended/ appointed by manufacturer
of MTC/ test
to be deployed
reports
Surface preparation B Physical Random in each shift Tech Specs and Const. Drawings, IS
ii As agreed / required
2395
iii Finishing and acceptance As agreed / required B Physical 100% Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
7.0 WATER SUPPLY / SANITORY INSTALLATIONS

7.1 Water supply fittings and fixtures
EIC Approved
IS:1239, IS:4736, IS:6745, IS:2633,
source and review Each lot of delivery as
i Materials GI/ MS pipes and fittings As agreed / required A IS:2629, Tech Specs and Const. SR 
of MTC/ test per Specifications
Drawings
reports
ii Disinfection Before use As agreed / required B Physical Each installation IS:2065, tech specs and const drawings SR
iii Hydraulic test Before use / leakage As agreed / required A Physical Each installation Tech specs and const drawings SR 
iv Acceptance and working As agreed / required B Acceptance Random Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
7.2 Sand cast iron / cast iron pipes
EIC Approved
source and review Each lot of delivery as IS: 1729, IS:1536, IS:1538, Tech Specs
i Material SCI / CI pipes and fittings / joints As agreed / required A SR 
of MTC/ test per Specifications and Const. Drawings
reports
ii Acceptance and leakage As agreed / required B Physical Random Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
7.3 Sanitary fittings and fixtures
Sanitory items and fixtures i.e. water
closets, urinals, wash basins, sinks, EIC Approved
mirrors, shelves, towel rail, soap source and review Each lot of delivery as
i Material As agreed / required B Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
containers, geyser, water cooler, etc, of MTC/ test per Specifications
water supply / sanitation pipes, manhole reports
cover and frames etc
Acceptance of installations of all sanitory
ii As agreed / required B Acceptance 100% Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
items and fixtures
7.4 RCC Pipes
EIC Approved
source and review Each lot of delivery as
i Material RCC pipes As agreed / required A IS: 458, Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
of MTC/ test per Specifications
reports
ii Acceptance and leakage As agreed / required B Physical Random Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR
7.5 Water Storage Tanks
EIC Approved
source and review Each lot of delivery as IS:12701, Tech Specs and Const.
i Material Over head / loft type As agreed / required A SR 
of MTC/ test per Specifications Drawings
reports
IS:12701, Tech Specs and Const.
ii Aceptance and leakage As agreed / required B Acceptance Random SR
Drawings
Page 10 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
8.0 SPECIAL ITEMS
8.1 Earthing Mat (Grounding System)
i Material Earthing mat A EIC Approved SR/MTC
source and review Each lot of delivery as As per relevant IS and Tech. Specs /
of MTC/ test per Specifications Manufacturer's, IS 3043
reports
ii Weld sizes & length Visual/Tape B Visual/ 100% Low hydrogen electrode as per NTPC
Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
Measurement approval shall be used.
iii D P test DP test Kit A Physical 10% at random Tech Specs and Const. Drawings TR 
iv Earth test Earthing test kit A Physical 100% IS:3043, Tech Specs and Const. SR

Drawings, Relevant IS 3043
9.0 ANTI WEED TREATMENT

i Anti-weed treatment materials A Physical and MTC Each batch of delivery SR
Review
ii Execution of treatment B Physical Random check for each SR
treatment
10.0 FOUNDATION SYSTEM
10.1 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS
Foundation excavation - Location, Physical Each location As per technical specifications and
i As required / agreed B SR lines and levels to be checked
Layout, size, depth etc construction drawings
Foundation casting - Layout, Shape, Physical Each foundation
As per technical specifications and lines and levels to be checked. Concrete
ii dimensitions, Reinforcement, concreting, As required / agreed B SR
construction drawings Grade to be checked as per Mix Design
curing etc
11.0 ROAD WORKS

11.1 Construction of Sub-Grade and earthen/hard soulders
i Standard proctor Test A Physical One in every 2000 cum As per Tech Specs and Const. SR/TR  In cutting or existing levelled ground -
As per IS: 2720 for each type and source Drawings,Section 900 of MOSRTH quantum of check shall be one per 1000
of fill materials specification, IS 2720 (Pt.VII) SQM
ii Moisture content of fill before compaction B Physical One in every 2000 cum As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings, SR/TR In cutting or existing levelled ground -
As per IS: 2720 for each type and source Section 900 of MOSRTH specification, IS quantum of check shall be one per 1000
of fill materials 2720 (Pt.II) SQM
iii Dry density by core cutter method A Physical One in every 500 SQM SR/TR 
As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings, Both for embankment and cut formation
---- OR---- area for each compacted
As per IS: 2720 Section 900 of MOSRTH specification, IS quantum of check - One in every 1000
Dry density in place by sand layer.
2720 (Pt. XXIX)/ IS 2720 (Pt. XXVIII), SQM area for each compacted layer.
displacement method
Physical One in every 500 SQM
iv Lines, grade and cross section As required / agreed B As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR Template, straight edge
area
11.2 Water Bound Macadam (Non-Bituminous) for base course and sub-base course
i Aggregate Impact value Agrregate Impact value A Physical One test per 200 cum of As perTech Specs and Const. Drawings, SR 
Test Apparatus Test aggregate Section 900 of MOSRTH specification,
ii Grading B Physical One test per 100 cum of As perTech Specs and Const. Drawings, SR
Set of IS Sieves
aggregate Section 900 of MOSRTH specification,
iii Flakiness index and elongation index B Physical One test per 200cun of As perTech Specs and Const. Drawings, SR
Flakiness test gauge
agregate Section 900 of MOSRTH specification,
iv Atterberg Limits of binding material Atterberg limits A Physical One test per 25 cum of As perTech Specs and Const. Drawings, SR 
determination binding material Section 900 of MOSRTH specification,
v Atterberg Limits of portion of agreggate Atterberg limits A Physical One test per 100cum of As perTech Specs and Const. Drawings, SR 
passing 425 micron sieve determination aggregate Section 900 of MOSRTH specification,
Physical One in every 500 SQM SR
vi Camber, surface, slope As required / agreed B As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings Template, straight edge
area
11.3 Bituminous Macadam for base and binder course
Page 11 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
i Quality of binder A Physical No. of samples per Lot & SR 
As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
Penetrometre with St. tests as per IS:73,
Section 900 of MOSRTH specification, IS
needle IS:217, IS:8887 as
73
applicable
ii Aggregate Impact Value / Los angeles A Physical Once per source SR 
Aggregate Impact As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
abrasion value
ValueTest apparatus Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
iii Flakiness Index and elongation index of B Physical One test per 50 cum of SR
aggregates Flakiness test gauge aggregate
Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
iv Stripping value of aggregate (Immersion B Physical Initialy one set of 3 SR
tray test) representative specimen As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
As required / agreed per source, and on every Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
change of source.
v Water sensitivity of mix A Physical Initialy one set of 3 SR 
representative specimen
As required / agreed per source, and on every
change of source.
vi Grading of aggregates B Physical Two test per day per SR

plant both on individual As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
Set of Sieves constituents and mixed Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
aggregate from dryer
vii Water absorption of aggregate Initially one set of 3 SR
change of source.
viii Soundness ( Magnesium and Sodium A Physical Once per source by SR 

Sulphate) As required as per each method and on As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
IS:2386 every change of source Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
ix Percentage of fractured faces B Physical When gravel is used one SR

test per 50cum of As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
As required / agreed
aggregates Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
x Binder content and aggregate grading A Physical Periodic, subject to a SR 

Bitumen extractor min of two tests per day
per plant
xi Control of Temperature of binder and B Physical At regular close intervals SR
aggregate for mixing and of the mix at Thermometer
the time of laying and rolling
xii Rate of spread of mixed materials B Physical Regular control through SR
As required / agreed checks of layer thickness
xiii Density of compacted Layer A Physical One test per 250 sqm of As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings, SR 
area Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
11.4 Bituminous Surfacing - Open graded premix carpet and Seal coat
i Quality of binder A Physical No. of samples per Lot & SR 
Penetrometre with St. IS 73,Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
tests as per IS:73,
needle Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
IS:217, IS:8887 as
ii Aggregate Impact Value / Los angeles A Physical One test per 50 cum of SR 
Aggregate Impact As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
abrasion value aggregate
ValueTest apparatus Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
Page 12 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
iii Flakiness Index and elongation indexof B Physical One test per 50 cum of SR
aggregates Flakiness test gauge aggregate
iv Stripping value of aggregate (Immersion B Physical Initialy one set of 3 SR

tray test) representative specimen
change of source.
v Water absorption test A Physical Initialy one set of 3 SR 

per source, and on every
change of source.
vi Water sensitivity of mix A Physical Initialy one set of 3 SR 

change of source.
vii Grading of aggregates B Physical One test per 25 cum of SR

Set of Sieves aggregates
viii Soundness ( Magnesium and Sodium A Physical Once per source by SR 

Sulphate) As required as per each method and on As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
IS:2386 every change of source Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
ix Polished stone value B Physical As required SR

As required as per As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
BS:812(Part 114) Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
x Temperature of binder at application B Physical At regular close intervals SR

Thermometer
xi Binder content A Physical One test per 500 cum& SR 
Bitumen extractor not less than two tests
per day
xii Rate of spread of materials B Physical One test per 500 cum SR
As required / agreed and not less than 2 tests
per day
xiii Percentage of fractured faces A Physical When gravel is used one SR 
Bitumen extractor test per 50cum of
aggregates
11.5 Tack Coat/ Prime coat/ fog coat
i A Physical No. of samples per Lot & SR 
Penetrometre with tests as per IS:73, IS 73,Tech Specs and Const. Drawings,
Standard needle IS:217, IS:8887 as Section 900 of MOSRTH specification
ii Temperature of binder at application B Physical applicable

At regular close intervals As per Tech Specs and Const. Drawings, SR
Thermometer
iii Rate of spread of binder B Physical One test per 500 cum SR
As required / agreed and not less than 2 tests
per day
Page 13 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
11.6 RCC Pavements Concrete - Material, Mix design, Trial - - Refer FQP for concrete - - FQP for Concrete Works shall be
Mixes, Production, Transportation, Works application for all concrete works
Refer FQP for concrete Works, , Tech
Placement, Compaction, Curing, Test on As required / agreed
Specs and Const. Drawings, IRC & MOST
green concrete, Test on hardened
concrete etc.
11.7 Alignment, Level, Surface regularity and rectification
i Horizontal alignment, Surface levels and B Physical As per section 900 of SR
Surface regularity As required / agreed MOSRTH specification
ii Rectification B Physical Each rectification SR 
12.00 STRUCTURAL STEEL MATERIAL

ii Structural steel procured from NTPC A Review For each batch of each SR
approved sources- Mechanical (YS, section delivered at site Correlated MTC shall be verified. In the
Technical Specification and Construction
Material UTS, Elg, UT if specified),,and Chemical  event of non submission of MTC , sample
Drawings, IS 2062
properties (CE as per IS) shall be selected by FQA for testing
12.01 PRE-WELDING REQUIREMENTS
i Welding Procedure Specification * - A Review Each Welding Process WPS *To be approved by CQA
(WPS*) 
Drawings, ASME-IX/ AWS D 1.1
ii PQR and Welder's Qualification Physical Each welder PQR/ WQR, AWS-D1.1/ASME-IX, Test
- A Technical Specifi- cation and Construction Report 
Drawings
iii Welding consumables B Physical Random in each shift Approved WPS, Latest NTPC SR
- 
Rationalized list of Electrodes.
12.02 FIT-UP
i Marking and Cutting B Visual & Each plate/ Section SR
Tape, ruler etc Measurement
Drawings/ Approved cutting plan
ii Match markings for trial assembled B Physical Each fit-up Technical Specification and Construction SR
components -
Drawings
iii Weld Fit Up- Edge Preparation/ Gap/ B Physical Each fit-up Technical Specification and Construction SR If required suitable stiffners shall be
Alignment Tape, ruler etc  provided to prevent deflection.
Drawings, IS 7215
i Sequence of welding B Physical Random in each shift SR

-
Drawings, Agreed scheme
ii Removal/ grinding of temporary B Measurement All cleats/ attachments Technical Specification and Construction SR
attachments - Drawings, Approved Drg.
iii Completeness after welding- B Visual Each structure SR

Dimensions/ distortion component Technical Specification and Construction
Weld gauge 
Drawings, IS 822
Page 14 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
12.03 NON DESTRUCTIVE AND DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
12.03.01 FILLET WELDS
i size and visual examination B Visual/ 100% SR As per requirement of NTPC Engineer
Measurement As per technical specifications and
As required/ agreed
construction drawings, IS 822, AWS D 1.1
ii Macro-etch Examination on production B Physical Main fillet weld with min SR

test coupons one joint per built up As per technical specifications and
As required/ agreed beam, columns construction drawings, IS 822, AWS D 
1.1
iii Dye Penetration Test B Physical 5% of Weld length with As per technical specifications and SR
As required/ agreed min. 300mm at each construction drawings, IS 822, AWS D
loaction 1.1
12.03.02 BUTT WELDS
i Visual examination B Visual Random in each shift As per technical specifications and SR As per requirement of NTPC Engineer
As required/ agreed construction drawings, IS 822, AWS D
1.1
ii DPT B Physical 100% on all butt welds IR All butt welds to be back gouged before
As per technical specifications and
after back gouging on DPT
As required/ agreed construction drawings, IS 822, AWS D
root run and 10% on
1.1
final weld.
iii Mechanical testing on production test B Physical Min. one joint per built IR Test on production test coupons
coupons up beams, coloums As per technical specifications and
As required/ agreed construction drawings, IS 822, AWS D 
1.1
iv Radiography Test A Physical 10% weld length of each IR Wherever RT is not feasible UT to be
welder. carried out. In case of failure of any welds
As per technical specifications and in SPOT/RT or UT the % of retesting shall
As required/ agreed construction drawings, IS 822, AWS D  be doubled at that particular loaction.
1.1 Acceptance criteria of NDT on welds shall
be as per AWS D1.1.
12.04 FULL PENETRATION WELDS (OTHER THAN BUTT WELDS)

Ultrasonic Testing A Physical 10% UT on full IR In case of failure of any welds in
penetration joints As per technical specifications and SPOT/RT or UT the % of retesting shall
As required/ agreed construction drawings, IS 822, AWS D  be doubled at that particular loaction.
1.1 Acceptance criteria of NDT on welds shall
be as per AWS D1.1.
12.05 FOUNDATION CHECKS
i Dimensions and levels- Shape, lines B Physical/ Each Foundation SR

(including diagonal checks) Theodolite, Tape etc Measurement Tech Specs and Const. Drawings 
ii Foundation Bolts and Embedments- Theodolite, Tape, B Physical/ Each Foundation SR

Verticality, Levels, pitch distance Piano wires etc Measurement
12.06 PRE-ASSEMBLY CHECKS

i Punch Erection marks and match marks B Visual/ Physical Each structural member Markings for -
on members Assembly designation, Part number,
- Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
Weight, Any other important
identifications.
ii Pre-assembly as per match mark B Visual/ Physical Each structural member
Page 15 of 16
check Norms Record
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D* 10
iii Camber, sweep and total length after B Visual/ Physical Each structural member SR
Theodolite, Tape,
trial assembly of structure. Tech Specs and Const. Drawings 
plumb, piano wires etc
iv Control assembly check at shop B Visual/ Physical Every first and tenth set
Theodolite, Tape,
of identical structure Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
12.07 ERECTION CHECKS
i Alignment, slopes, level, tolerances of B Measurement Each structural member SR
Theodolite, Tape,
erected member Tech Specs and Const. Drawings 
ii Tightening of bolts/ Torque including Wrench/ Torque B Visual/ Physical Each structural member SR
foundation bolts with lock nuts wrench if specified
iii Acceptance of erected structure B Visual/ Physical Each erected structure SR
Theodolite, Tape, Tech Specs and Const. Drawings, IS

plumb, piano wires etc 7215 and IS 12843
12.08 PAINTING SYSTEM
i Paining Materials and accessories A Review of MTC Each batch of delivery SR/MTC Mfr.’s T.C. shall be correlated with the
- Tech Specs and Const. Drawings 
consignment received.
ii Submission of painting methodology B For Review of Before start of painting
painting system work
iii Surface prepration B Physical /visual Each Erection Mark Tech Specs and Const. Drawings, SR
Relevant code/ standards
iv Primer Thickness Elcometer B Measurement Each Erection Mark Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
v DFT of paint Elcometer B Measurement Each Erection Mark Tech Specs and Const. Drawings SR 
vi Acceptance of painted surfaces B Visual and Each Erection Mark SR
Elcometer Tech Specs and Const. Drawings
measurement
LEGEND: D * Records, indentified with “Tick” () shall be essentially included by supplier in QA documentation. DOC. NO.: CS - Project Code - XXX-X-QVC-G-001 REV: 0
Legend to be used: Class # : A = Critical, B=Major, C=Minor; SR, TR, MTC, LB
Manufact Main-supplier Categorization Witnessing & Accepting (As per NTPC QA&I System) For NTPC USE
urer/ Sub- Category ‘A’ FQA Engineer in association with Executing Engineer, Category ‘B’ Executing Engineer, Category
supplier ‘C’ Executing Engineer ;SR = Site Register , TR= Test Report,MfrTC = Manufacturer's Test Certificate
Signature This document shall be read in conjunction with NTPC Tech. Specifications, BOQ, Drawings REVIEWED BY APPROVED BY APPROVAL SEAL
Page 16 of 16
Project : DARLIPALLI-I (2X800MW) DOC.NO. : 9549-572-QVE-Q-R0
1 OF 8
Package : Switchyard Package INDICATIVE VENDOR LIST FOR ITEMS REQUIRING SUB- REV.NO. : 0
VENDOR / QUALITY PLAN APPROVAL
Supplier : DATE : 22.04.2014
Package No.: CS-9549-572 PAGE :
QP # Sub-
QP/ 9549-572- Supplier
Acceptable Supplier as per Data
S.N. Item Description Insp. QVE- Place approval Remark
Base
Cat. Q- status/
category
A.ELECTRICAL ITEMS
1 Circuit Breaker upto 765kV I 010 ALSTOM T&D FRANCE A
(Item subject to Sub QR approval) ABB VADODARA A
ALSTOM T&D KANCHIPURAM A
FOR 132KV
SIEMENS AURANGABAD A
CGL NASHIK A
2 ISOLATOR UPTO 765KV I 020 GR POWER HYDERABAD A
(HCB / TANDEM) HIVELM CHENNAI A
(Item subject to Sub QR approval) SIEMENS HYDERABAD A
IST
FOR 132KV
S&S PONDICHERRY A
SWITCHGEAR AND STRUCTURALS HYDERABAD A
ALSTOM T&D ITALY A
3 CT UPTO 765KV I 030 ALSTOM T&D BRAZIL A
(Item subject to Sub QR approval)
EL BHEL BHOPAL A
MEHRU BHIWADI A
VISHAL TRANSFORMERS MEERUT A
FOR 132KV
HEPTACARE MEERUT A
TIV
ABB VADODARA A
CGL NASHIK A
4 CVT UPTO 765KV I 040 BHEL BHOPAL A
(Item subject to Sub QR approval) CGL NASHIK A
FOR 132KV
ICA
MEHRU BHIWADI A
ALSTOM T&D HOSUR A
ABB VADODARA A
ALSTOM T&D FRANCE A
IND
FORMAT NO:QS-01-QAI-P-1/F3-R0 Engg. Div./QAI

2 OF 8
QP # Sub-
Base
Cat. Q- status/
category
5 SURGE ARRESTOR UPTO I 050 LAMCO HYDERABAD A
765KV RATING OBLUM HYDERABAD A
FOR 132KV
(Item subject to Sub QR approval) ELEKTROLITES JAIPUR A
CGL NASIK A
SIEMENS GERMANY A
6 WAVE TRAP UPTO 765KV I 060 ALSTOM T&D BRAZIL A
ALSTOM T&D HOSUR A
FOR 132KV
BPL PALGHAT A
7 POST INSULATOR UPTO I 070 MODERN INSULATOR ABU ROAD A
IST
765 KV SARVANA GLOBAL CUDDALORE A
IEC BHOPAL A FOR 132KV
ADITYA BIRLA HALOL A
WSI CHENNAI A
8 CLAMPS & CONNECTORS & II 080 KLEMMEN ENGG CHENNAI A
WELDING SLEEVES UPTO
765 KV
EL RUL
MILIND
KOLKATA
MUMBAI
A
A
EXALT MUMBAI A
FOR 132KV
ITPPL MUMBAI A
TIV
EMTT KOLKATA A
PEE VEE ENGG BANGALORE A
MEGHA ENGG CHENNAI A
TYCO AUSTRIA A
9 ACDB / DCDB II 090 C&S NOIDA A
ICA
PYROTECH UDAIPUR A
SCHNEIDER NASHIK A
SPACEAGE SWITCHGEAR GURGAON A
UNILEC ENGG GURGAON A
JAKSON GREATER NOIDA A
IND

3 OF 8
QP # Sub-
Base
Cat. Q- status/
category
10 BMK'S/ JB'S (ALL TYPES) II 100 C&S NOIDA A
/ LIGHTING PANELS/ PYROTECH UDAIPUR A
SCHNEIDER NASHIK A
SPACEAGE SWITCHGEAR GURGAON A
JAKSON GREATER NOIDA A
11 INSULATOR HARDWARE, II 110 RASHTRA UDYOG KOLKATA A
CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES & EMTT KOLKATA A
EARTHWIRE ACCESSORIES NUTAN ENGG MUMBAI A
ITPL MUMBAI A
IST
TAG CORPORATION CHENNAI A
KLEMMEN ENGG CHENNAI A
EMI TRANSMISSION MUMBAI A
DISC INSULATOR/ PIN
12 I 120 IEC BHOPAL A
INSULATOR
EL ADITYA BIRLA RISHRA (W.B.) A
SARVANA CUDDALORE A
IMPERIAL CERAMICS BIKANER A UPTO 90KN
BHEL BANGALORE A
TIV
WSI CHENNAI A
GS FLAT/ 40MM DIA M.S.ROD/
M.S EARTH RODS /U CLAMP/ GI
MAIN CONTRACTOR APPROVED
13 EARTH PIPE / GI PIPE / GI III A
SOURCES
ICA
CONDUIT (INCLUDING BENDS) /

PVC PIPES
IND

4 OF 8
QP # Sub-
Base
Cat. Q- status/
category
14 CABLE TRAY, BENDS, I 125 INAR PROFILES ANAKAPALLY A
PLATES ANAND UDYOG MUMBAI A
PATNY SYSTEMS HYDERABAD A
STEELITE MUMBAI A
VATCO MUMBAI GALVANISING AT
UNITECH FABRICATORS KOLKATA A NTPC approved sources
PRIMIER POWER PRODUCTS KOLKATA A
ANIL STEELS SONIPAT A
INDL. PERFORATION KOLKATA A
IST
JAMNA METAL DELHI / KUNDLI A
15 ACSR CONDUCTOR I 130 SMITA GHAZIABAD A
GUPTA POWER INFRA BHUBANESWAR A
GALAXY SANGLI A
HIRA CABLES HIRAKUD A
EL SARAVATHY
HINDUSTAN VIDYUT PRODUCTS
BANGALORE
FARIDABAD
A
A
VADODARA /
APAR INDUSTRIES A
SILVASSA
TIV
JSK SILVASSA A
GS EARTHWIRE / LIGHTING MAIN CONTRACTOR APPROVED
16 III A
WIRE SOURCES
17 1.1KV GRADE POWER, I 140 POLYCAB DAMAN A
CONTROL CABLES KEI BHIWADI A
ICA
VIKAS CABLE DELHI A

GUPTA POWER INFRA BHUWANESHWAR A
GEMSCAB BHIWADI A
RAVIN PUNE A
PARAMOUNT BHIWADI A
IND
CORDS CABLE BHIWADI A

RALLISON BHIWADI A

5 OF 8
QP # Sub-
Base
Cat. Q- status/
category
18 CABLE GLANDS III COMET (COSMOS) MUMBAI A
SUNIL & CO KOLKATA A
SMI MUMBAI A
19 CABLE LUGS III DOWELS MUMBAI/SILVASSA/ A
3D UMBERGAON A
CHETNA NASIK A
20 LIGHTING FIXTURES & III CGL MUMBAI A
LUMINARIES PHILIPS PUNE A
WIPRO MUMBAI A
IST
BAJAJ DAMAN A
Vendor should have valid
21 LIGHTING POLE III BIS approved Vendors as per IS-2713 A
BIS licence.
22 INDUSTRIAL RECEPTACLES III SCHNEIDER NASIK A
BCH FARIDABAD A
EL LEGRAND
BEST & CROMPTON
MUMBAI
CHENNAI
A
A
CONTROL DEVICE KOLKATA A
23 SUB STATION AUTOMATION I 150 ALSTOM T&D CHENNAI A
TIV
SYSTEM ABB PEENYA A
BCU, GRP, ENERGY METER,
SCHNEIDER NOIDA A
NUMERICAL RELAYS
For Control & Relay
SWITCHYARD PROTECTION BHEL BHOPAL A
Panel
ICA
(Item subject to Sub QR approval) SIEMENS KALWA A

IND

6 OF 8
QP # Sub-
Base
Cat. Q- status/
category
COMPONENTS FOR CONTROL & * 1.Control measure of
RELAY PANELS, PROTECTION item covered in quality
24 *
PANELS, ISLANDING SCHEME & plan of main item.
BAY CONTROL UNIT : 2. Mandatory spares/
items not covered in the
Quality Plan shall be
a ENERGY METER * SEMS UDAIPUR A
treated as Cat-III
b FIBRE OPTIC CABLE * BIRLA ERICSSON REWA A
IST
FINOLEX PUNE A
AKSH OPTIFIBRE BHIWARI A
c EVENT LOGGER * ALSTOM T&D UK / FRANCE A
HATHWAY UK A
d GPS TIME * ARBITER USA A
SYNCHRONISATION EQUIPMENT
EL HOPF
HATHWAY
GERMANY
UK / USA
A
A
SERTEL CHENNAI A
e RELAY TEST KIT * OMICRON USA/AUSTRALIA A
TIV
SCOPE T & M PUNE A
f DISTURBANCE RECORDER * ALSTOM T&D USA A
SIEMENS GERMANY A
g LARGE VIDEO SCREEN (LVS) * DELTA CHINA/GURGAON A
BARCO NOIDA A
ICA
PLANNAR USA A
SWEDEN/
h RELAYS * ABB A
BANGALORE
(Item subject to Sub QR approval) ALSTOM T&D UK/CHENNAI A
(NUMERICAL AND AUXILLARY) SCHNEIDER UK A
IND
SIEMENS GERMANY A

7 OF 8
QP # Sub-
Base
Cat. Q- status/
category
25 SF6 GAS FILLING AND III ENERVAC CANADA NOTED
EVACUATING PLANT, GAS DILO GERMANY NOTED
RECYCLING & PURIFYING VACCUUM PLANT INDUSTRIES PUNE NOTED
PLANT, GAS LEAKAGE
AI QUALITEK USA NOTED
DETECTOR
OPERATIONAL ANALYSER WITH
26 III SCOPE T & M PUNE NOTED
DCRM KIT
27 ALUMINIUM TUBE I 170 HINDALCO RENUKUT A
INDALCO ALUPURAM A
IST
CENTURY EXTRUSION KOLKATA A
BANCO VADODARA A
JINDAL BANGALORE A
SUDAL NASIK A
28 LEAKAGE CURRENT ANALYSER III SCOPE T & M PUNE A
FOR SURGE ARRESTOR
EL TRANSINOR NORWAY A
ISA ITALY A
29 MCC (FIXED TYPE) II 190 MAKTEL VADODARA A
C&S NOIDA A
TIV
JAKSON G NOIDA A
UNILEC GURGAON A
SIEMENS MUMBAI A
GEPC BANGALORE A
ICA
30 LT MOTOR III CGL AHMEDNAGAR A

MARATHON KOLKATA A
BBL MUMBAI A
SIEMENS MUMBAI A
ABB FARIDABAD A
IND

8 OF 8
QP # Sub-
Base
Cat. Q- status/
category
31 LIGHTING MAST II 200 BAJAJ PUNE A
(TUBULAR) PHILIPS KOLKATA A
32 AC KIOSK I 210 U-FOAM HYDERABAD A
I COMM TEL HYDERABAD A
JINDAL MECTEC GURGAON A
35 AAC BULL CONDUCTOR I 220
36 LONG ROD INSULATOR I 230
37 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE I 240 DELTON FARIDABAD A
PARAMOUNT KHUSHKHERA A
IST
CORDS CABLE BHIWADI A
POLYCAB DAMAN A
KEI BHIWADI A
GUPTA POWER KHURDA A
ELKAY TELELINKS FARIDABAD A
EL THERMO CABLES HYDERABAD A
Note:
1. SYSTEM SUPPLIERS/SUB-SUPPLIERS APPROVAL STATUS CATEGORY(SHALL BE FILLED BY NTPC)
A-For this items proposed vendor is acceptable to NTPC.To be indicated with letter "A" in the list along with condition of approval,if any
TIV
DR-For these items "Detailed required for NTPC review.To be identified with letter "DR" in the list.
NOTED- For these items vendors are approved by Main Supplier & accepted by NTPC without specific vendor approval from NTPC.To be identified with
2. QP / INSPN CATEGORY
CAT-I :For these items the Quality Plans approved by NTPC & final acceptance will be on physical inspection witness by NTPC
ICA
CAT-II :For these items the Quality Plans approved by NTPC.However no physical inspection shall be done by NTPC.The final acceptance by NTPC shall be on
docoments as per approved QP
CAT-III :For these items Main supplier approves the Quality Plans.The final acceptance by NTPC shall be on basis of certificate of conformance by the main
3. UNITS/WORKS : Place of manufacturing Place of Main Supplier of multi units/works.
IND

PROJECT: DARLIPALLI STPP STAGE I LIST OF ITEMS REQUIRING QUALITY PLAN AND SUB- SUPPLIER APPROVAL NTPC DOC CS-9549-572-2
(2X800 MW) NO
PACKAGE: SWITCHYARD REV. NO. 0
MAIN SUPPLIER: SUB SYSTEM: CIVIL WORKS DATE
CONTRACT NO.: CS-9549-572-2
SR. NO. ITEM QAP / INSP. QAP PROPOSED SUB SUPPLIER PLACE OF APPROVAL REMARKS
CAT NO. MANUFACTURING STATUS /
CATEGORY
1. CEMENT III - CCI - N
GUJARAT AMBUJA - N
JK LAXMI - N
JAYPEE - N
GRASIM - N
BIRLA - N
LAFARGE - N
ACC - N
SHREE - N
INDIA CEMENT - N
PENNA CEMENT - N
MADRAS CEMENT - N
PRISM - N
ULTRATECH - N
ORIENT - N
MANCHERIAL - N
JSW - N
ANDHRA CEMENT - N
PARASHAKTI - N
SAGAR - N
MAIHAR - N
MANIKGARH - N
2. CONSTRUCTION CHEMICALS - III - SIKA INDIA LTD - N
ADMIXTURES, PLASTISIZERS, CICO TECHONOLOGIES LTD - N
RETARDERS
WATER PROOFING COMPOUNDS FOSROC CHEMICALS (I) PVT - N
LTD
Important: See Notes at the end of this document page 1 of 7

(2X800 MW) NO
CATEGORY
GROUTS BASF - N
3. FALSE CEILING - GLASS III - SAINT GOBAIN NEW DELHI N

REINFORCED GYPSUM SYSTEM, HUNTER DOUGLOUS MUMBAI N
MINERAL FIBRE BOARD SYSTEM,
PREPAINTED COIL COATED STEEL TIGER STEEL PUNE/MUMBAI N
SYSTEM INTERARCH NOIDA N
LLOYD INSULATION - N
MG INDUSTRIES FARIDABAD N
ARM STRONG NEW DELHI N
4. PAINT AND PAINTING SYSTEM III - BERGER - N
SHALIMAR PAINTS - N
JENSON AND NICHOLSON - N
KANSAI NEROLAC - N
AKZO NOBEL - N
ASIAN PAINTS - N
5. GALVANISED STEEL STRUCTURE I - GOOD LUCK STEEL TUBES SIKANDRABAD A
(LATTICE & PIPE ) RICHARDSON & CRUDDAS NAGPUR A
(1972) LTD
VIJAY TRANSMIISION P. LTD RAIPUR A
NEW MODERN MAYURBHANJ A
TECHNOMECH (OR)
NAMPA STEEL HOWRAH A
R.S. INFRAPROJECTS PVT. SURAJPUR A
LTD
PIONEER FABRICATOR MEERUT A* *Galvanising to be
done by M/s Vinayak
Transco Ltd,
Modinagar

(2X800 MW) NO
CATEGORY
UNITECH POWER NAGPUR A
TRANSMISSION LTD.
UNIQUE STRUCTURES & RAIPUR A
TOWERS LTD.
VATCO ELEC-POWER PVT. NAVIMUMBAI A Galvanising at
LTD. Sigma Galvaniser,
Navi Mumbai
R.S. INFRAPROJECTS PVT. GHAZIABAD A
LTD
ADVANCE STEEL TUBE , SAHIBABAD A
SANGAM STRUCTURES LTD. ALLAHABAD A
ASSOCIATED POWER VADODARA A
STRUCTURES
6. TRANSMISSION LINE TOWER I UNITECH POWER NAGPUR A
STRUCTURES TRANSMISSION LTD.
7. ELECTROFORGED GRATING II INDIANA GRATING PUNE A
PREMIER POWER HOWRAH A
PRODUCTS (CALCUTTA) PVT
LTD
GREATWELD PUNE A
BHOLA RAM STEELS PATNA A
PINAX STEEL PATNA A
KANADE ANAND UDYOG THANE A
8. GI PIPES III - BIS APPROVED SOURCES - N
HAVING VALID BIS LICENCE
9. PVC WATER STOP III - DURON POLYVINYLS PVT. GURGAON N
LTD
KANTA RUBBER HYDERABAD N
MARUTI RUBBER NOIDA N
JYOTI POLYVINYL VADODARA N

(2X800 MW) NO
CATEGORY
DEEP-JYOTI RUBBER PVT NOIDA N
LTD
10. BITUMEN ASPHALT III - ALL GOVERNMENT - N
REFIINARIES
11. PLASTIC/ PVC PIPES III - BIS APPROVED SOURCES - N
12. BITUMEN IMPREGNATED FIBER III - BIS APPROVED SOURCES - N
BOARD JOINT FILLER, HAVING VALID BIS LICENCE
BITUMEN SEALING COMPOUND
13. CERAMIC / VITRIFIED TILES III - KAJARIA - N
SOMANY - N
SPARTEK INDIA - N
NITCO - N
ORIENT BELL - N
MARBITO N
RESTILE - N
JOHNSON - N
14. ACID / ALKALI RESISTANCE TILES, III - CARBORANDUM UNIVERSAL CHENNAI N
AR BRICKS, PELICAN BHIWADI N
AR CEMENT (POTASSIUM SILICATE
BASED CEMENT MORTAR, PHENOLIC CAMBRIAN ALWAR N
BASED RESIN CEMENT) KERATECH VADODARA N
AR BITUMASTIC
CHAMPION CERAMICS CHAMPA N
SUNSHINE CERAMICS CHAMPA N
MAHAKOSHAL POTTRIES KATNI N
PERFECT ACID WARE JABALPUR N

(2X800 MW) NO
CATEGORY
15. FIRE PROOF DOORS III - NAVAIR INTERNATIONAL NEW DELHI N
LTD.
SHAKTI MET DOOR HYDERABAD N
SUPER STEEL DELHI N FOR SINGLE
LEAF ONLY
SIGNUM FIRE PROTECTION NAGPUR N
RADIANT SAFE DOORS AHMEDABAD N
16. PARTICLE BOARDS, PLYWOOD, MDF III - NOVAPAN - N
ECOBOARD - N
BHUTAN BOARD - N
KITPLY - N
CENTURY - N
GREEN PLY - N
DUROPLY - N
MERINO - N
17. ALUMINUM SECTIONS III - HINDALCO - N
INDALCO - N
BALCO (VEDANTA) - N
NALCO - N
JINDAL - N
18. HIGH SOLID CONTENT LIQUID III - STP - N
APPLIED URETHANE BASED
IWL INDIA LTD - N
ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE FOR
WATER PROOFING LLOYDS - N
CICO TECHONOLOGIES LTD - N
MK PETRO - N

(2X800 MW) NO
CATEGORY
19. PVC COATED GI CHAIN LINK III SAUDAGAR MAL
FENCING MAMMANLAL PVT LTD N
MECAFERRI N
20. FOUNDATION BOLTS II - MAIN CONTRACTOR’S N
APPROVED SOURCES
21. POLYTHENE WATER STORAGE III - BIS APPROVED SOURCES
TANKS HAVING VALID BIS LICENCE
- N
22. RCC PIPES III - BIS APPROVED SOURCES
- N
23. HEXAGONAL BOLTS, NUTS, SPRING II - MAIN CONTRACTOR’S N
WASHERS, PLAIN WASHERS APPROVED SOURCES
24. CI PIPES III - BIS APPROVED SOURCES N
LEGENDS:
1. SYSTEM SUPPLIER/SUB-SUPPLIER APPROVAL STATUS CATEGORY (SHALL BE FILLED BY NTPC)
A – For these items proposed vendor is acceptable to NTPC. To be indicated with letter “A” in the list along with the condition of approval, if any.
DR – For these items “Details required” for NTPC review. To be identified with letter “DR” in the list.
'N' NOTED – For these items vendors are approved by Main Supplier and accepted by NTPC without specific vendor approval from NTPC. To be identified with
‘NOTED.’
2. QP/INSPN CATEGORY:
CAT-I : For these items the Quality Plans are approved by NTPC and the final acceptance will be on physical inspection witness by NTPC.
CAT-II : For these items the Quality Plans approved by NTPC. However no physical inspection shall be done by NTPC. The final acceptance by NTPC shall be
on the basis review of documents as per approved
CAT-III : For these items Main Supplier approves the Quality Plans. The final acceptance by NTPC shall be on the basis certificate of conformance by the main
supplier.
UNITS/ WORKS : Place of manufacturing Place of Main Supplier of multi units/works.

(2X800 MW) NO
SR. NO. ITEM QAP / INSP. QAP PROPOSED SUB SUPPLIER PLACE OF
APPROVAL REMARKS
CAT NO. MANUFACTURING
STATUS /
CATEGORY
NOTE 1: For the items placed in CAT-III for Civil Works, the review and final acceptance shall be done by NTPC-EIC/ FQA on the basis of certificate of
conformance submitted by the main supplier/ main contractor.
NOTE 2:
i) This list has been compiled based on the names of suppliers / sub vendors proposed by the Bidders / Main Contractors to NTPC for various Corporate Civil
packages awarded in the past based on respective Technical Specifications / Bill of Quantities / Tender Documents. This list is not exhaustive. Listed sub-
suppliers may or may not have supplied the material to NTPC in the past.
ii) The purpose of this list is not to limit the sub vendors but to provide general guidance to the prospective Bidders / Main Contractors. However this list is
indicative in nature and may undergo revision for future packages based on the performance feedback received from NTPC sites / other agencies about the
supplier / sub vendors / supplied material. Moreover listed suppliers may or may not be able to supply the material as per current Tech Specifications / Bill
of Quantities / Tender Documents for the present package. Bidder is required to enquire before finalizing the suppliers / sub vendors for the present
contract to meet provisions of the current Tech Specs / BOQ / Tender Documents. Moreover some of these listed sub-suppliers might have stopped
manufacturing the identified items. It is also possible that some of the listed manufacturers/suppliers do not exist now. Bidder to make necessary enquiry
before submitting bids. Bidders / Contractors are free to propose names of suppliers / sub vendors for various items as per their procurement policy to
NTPC for considering supplies for the present Contract.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
QUALITY ASSURANCE & INSPECTION MODULE NO. SQE 13
L.T POWER CABLES
(1.1 KV PVC & XLPE CABLES)
LT Power Cables
Routine & Acceptance Tests as per

feature as per NTPC specification
looseness, gap between two wires
Attributes /
T.S & elongation before & after
Anti termite coating on wooden

marking/ surface finish/ cable
Characteristics
Armour coverage, cross over,

Hot Set Test/ Eccentricity &
Constructional requirements
relevant standard & NTPC

Sequential marking/ Batch
ageing on outer sheath &

Spark Test(as applicable)
Dimension/surface finish
Lay length & Sequence

Chemical Composition
Mechanical properties
Make, Type & T.C as
per relevant standard
Electrical properties
Thermal stability
specification
FRLS Tests
insulation
Ovality
Item / Components /
drums
length
Sub System Assembly
Aluminum (IS-8130) Y Y Y Y Y
XLPE Compound (IS-7098) Y Y Y Y Y
PVC insulation Compound (IS: 5831) Y Y Y Y Y
FRLS PVC Compound Y Y Y Y Y
(IS-5831, ASTM-D2843, IS10810( Part 58),
IEC-60754 Part-1)
Extrusion & curing /Manufacturing of Core Y Y Y Y
( PVC / XLPE)
Core Laying Y
Armour wire/strip Y Y Y
Inner sheath Y Y
Armouring Y Y
Outer Sheathing Y Y
Power Cable (Finished) (IS-5831, ASTM-D2843, Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
IS10810( Part 58), IEC-60754 Part-1, IEC 60332
part III cat B)
Wooden drum(IS-10418) /Steel Drum Y Y Y
DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I Bid Doc. No. TECHNICAL PART-IV Page

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI 1 of 5
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE
L.T POWER CABLES
Notes:
1. This is an indicative list of tests / checks. The manufacturer is to furnish a detailed Quality Plan indicating the practice and procedure along with
relevant supporting documents.
2. Make of all major Bought out items will be subject to NTPC approval.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE
L.T POWER CABLES
ROUTINE TESTS Following routine tests shall be carried out on each drum of finished cables for all types (PVC /
XLPE insulated) & sizes.
1) Conductor Resistance test
2) High voltage test
ACCEPTANCE TESTS Following Acceptance tests shall be carried out on each size of each type (PVC / XLPE
insulated) of cables, in the offered lot.
A) For Conductor (as per sampling plan mentioned in IS: 1554 / 7098)
1) Annealing test (Copper)
2) Tensile Test ( Aluminum)
3) Wrapping Test ( Aluminum)
4) Resistance test
B) For Armour Wires / Formed Wires ( If applicable ) (as per sampling plan mentioned in IS: 1554 / 7098)
1. Measurement of Dimensions
2. Tensile Tests
3. Elongation Test
4. Torsion Test For Round wires only
5. Wrapping Test
6. Resistance Test
7. Mass of Zinc coating test For G S wires / Formed wires only
8. Uniformity of Zinc coating For G S wires / Formed wires only
9. Adhesion test For G S wires / Formed wires only
10. Freedom from surface defects
C ) For PVC / XLPE insulation & PVC Sheath (as per sampling plan mentioned in IS: 1554 / 7098)
1) Test for thickness

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE
L.T POWER CABLES
2) Tensile strength & Elongation before ageing (for tests after ageing see “D”)
3) Hot set test (For XLPE insulation)
D) Ageing test:
Criteria Condition Test Requirements Remarks
PVC insulation & Samples as per relevant IS, from each All sizes which The size which has In case the size does
outer sheath: size of cables in the offered lot, shall be meet the criteria maximum negative not meet the
tested for tensile strength & elongation deviation from type requirement in
(before ageing). Tensile & elongation test report values will accelerated ageing
testing shall preferably be done with be put on accelerated test then all sizes
a computerized machine. ageing test. The (which had met the
The values will be compared with samples shall be aged criteria) will be put
corresponding values mentioned in the in air oven at on ageing test as per
Type Test report accepted by NTPC. temperature of IS.
These values of Tensile Strength & 130ºc+/- 2ºc for 5
Elongation (before ageing) should be hours and tested for
within +/ - 15% of the corresponding TS & elongation.
values of Type Test report. (Please note Acceptance norms
that test values should be more than the shall be as per IS.
minimum values indicated in relevant
standard). Sizes which do not Every size will be put
meet the criteria on ageing test as per ----
IS.
XLPE insulation
Samples as per relevant IS, from each size of cables in the offered lot,will be put on ageing test as per IS.
E) Following tests will be carried out on completed cables as per IS on each size of each type (PVC / XLPE insulated)
1) Insulation resistance test ( Volume resistivity method )

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE
L.T POWER CABLES
F) Following tests shall be carried out on only one size of offered lot (comprising of all sizes & types)
1) Thermal stability test on PVC insulation and outer sheath
2) Oxygen index test on outer sheath
3) Smoke density rating test on outer sheath
4) Acid gas generation test on outer sheath
G) Flammability test as per IEC 60332 - Part- 3 (Category- B) on completed cables as per following sampling plan:
This test will be carried out using composite sampling i.e. irrespective of size;
cables of one particular type (i.e. armoured PVC insulated, unarmoured PVC
insulated, armoured XLPE insulated, unarmoured XLPE insulated) will be
bunched together, as per calculations in line with the IEC. All sizes of PVC &
XLPE insulated, armoured & unarmoured cables shall be covered.
For one particular type, cables with OD less than or equal to 30 mm shall be
clubbed together in touching formation while cables with OD greater than 30 mm
shall be clubbed together leaving a gap equal to OD of cable having least
diameter. Cable OD shall be taken as nominal overall diameter as per NTPC
approved datasheet.
H) Following tests shall be carried on one length of each size of each type (PVC / XLPE insulated) of offered lot:
1) Constructional / dimensional check, surface finish, length measurement, sequence
of cores, armour coverage, Gap between two consecutive armour wires / formed
wires, Sequential marking, drum / Batch (outer sheath extrusion batch )number
marking on sheath
2) Measurement of Eccentricity & Ovality

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE

L.T CONTROL CABLES
(1.1 KV PVC CABLES)
Control Cables
Routine & Acceptance Tests as per

feature as per NTPC specification
looseness, gap between two wires
Attributes /
T.S & elongation before & after
Anti termite coating on wooden

marking/ surface finish/ cable
Characteristics
Armour coverage, cross over,
Constructional requirements
relevant standard & NTPC

Sequential marking/ Batch
ageing on outer sheath &

Spark Test(as applicable)
Dimension/surface finish
Lay length & Sequence

Chemical Composition
Mechanical properties
Make, Type & T.C as
per relevant standard
Electrical properties
Thermal stability
specification
FRLS Tests
insulation
Item / Components /
drums
length
Sub System Assembly
Copper (IS-8130) Y Y Y Y Y
PVC insulation Compound (IS: 5831) Y Y Y Y Y
FRLS PVC Compound Y Y Y Y Y
(IS-5831, ASTM-D2843, IS10810( Part 58),
IEC-60754 Part-1)
Extrusion & curing /Manufacturing of Core Y Y Y
Core Laying Y
Armour wire/strip Y Y Y
Inner sheath Y Y
Armouring Y Y
Outer Sheathing Y Y
Finished Cable (IS-5831, ASTM-D2843, Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
IS10810( Part 58), IEC-60754 Part-1, IEC 60332
part III cat B)
Wooden drum(IS-10418) /Steel Drum Y Y Y

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE

L.T CONTROL CABLES
(1.1 KV PVC CABLES)
Notes:
1. This is an indicative list of tests / checks. The manufacturer is to furnish a detailed Quality Plan indicating the practice and procedure along with
relevant supporting documents.
2. Make of all major Bought out items will be subject to NTPC approval.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE

L.T CONTROL CABLES
(1.1 KV PVC CABLES)
ROUTINE TESTS Following routine tests shall be carried out on each drum of finished cables for all sizes.
1) Conductor Resistance test

ACCEPTANCE TESTS Following Acceptance tests shall be carried out on each size of cables, in the offered lot.
A) For Conductor (as per sampling plan mentioned in IS: 1554)

1) Annealing test (Copper)
2) Resistance test
B) For Armour Wires / Formed Wires ( If applicable ) (as per sampling plan mentioned in IS: 1554)
1. Measurement of Dimensions
2. Tensile Tests
3. Elongation Test
4. Torsion Test For Round wires only
5. Wrapping Test
6. Resistance Test
7. Mass of Zinc coating test For G S wires / Formed wires
only
8. Uniformity of Zinc coating For G S wires / Formed wires
only
9. Adhesion test For G S wires / Formed wires
only
10. Freedom from surface defects
C) For PVC insulation & PVC Sheath (as per sampling plan mentioned in IS: 1554)
1) Test for thickness
2) Tensile strength & Elongation before ageing (for tests after ageing see “D”)

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE

L.T CONTROL CABLES
(1.1 KV PVC CABLES)
D) Ageing test:
Criteria Condition Test Requirements Remarks
PVC insulation & Samples as per relevant IS, from All sizes which The size which has maximum In case the size
outer sheath: each size of cables in the offered meet the criteria negative deviation from type does not meet the
lot, shall be tested for tensile test report values will be put requirement in
strength & elongation (before on accelerated ageing test. accelerated ageing
ageing). Tensile & elongation The samples shall be aged in test then all sizes
testing shall preferably be air oven at temperature of (which had met
done with a computerized 130ºc+/- 2ºc for 5 hours and the criteria) will
machine. tested for TS & elongation. be put on ageing
The values will be compared with Acceptance norms shall be as test as per IS.
corresponding values mentioned per IS.
in the Type Test report accepted
by NTPC. These values of Tensile Sizes which do not Every size will be put on
Strength & Elongation (before meet the criteria ageing test as per IS. ----
ageing) should be within +/ -
15% of the corresponding values
of Type Test report. (Please note
that test values should be more
than the minimum values
indicated in relevant standard).
E) Following tests will be carried out on completed cables as per IS on each size:
1) Insulation resistance test ( Volume resistivity method )
F) Following tests shall be carried out on only one size of offered lot (comprising of all sizes):
1) Thermal stability test on PVC insulation and outer sheath
2) Oxygen index test on outer sheath

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE

L.T CONTROL CABLES
(1.1 KV PVC CABLES)
3) Smoke density rating test on outer sheath

4) Acid gas generation test on outer sheath
G) Flammability test as per IEC 60332 - Part- 3 (Category- B) on completed cable will be carried out as per following
sampling plan:
This test will be carried out using composite sampling i.e. irrespective of
size; cables of one particular type (i.e. armoured, unarmoured) will be
bunched together, as per calculations in line with the IEC. All sizes of
armoured & unarmoured cables shall be covered.
H) Following tests shall be carried on one length of each size (armoured & unarmoured) of offered lot:
1) Constructional / dimensional check, surface finish, length measurement,
sequence of cores, armour coverage, Gap between two consecutive
armour wires / formed wires, Sequential marking, drum / outer sheath
extrusion’s batch number marking
2) Measurement of Eccentricity & Ovality

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
QUALITY ASSURANCE

(CABLING,EARTHING,LIGHTNING PROTECTION)
ATTRIBUTES /
CHARACTERISTICS
Constructional feature as per NTPC Specification

Acceptance tests as per relevant standard &
Routine tests as per relevant standard &
Paint shade, paint thickness, adhesion
Bought out items/Bill of material

Galvanise Test (If Applicable)
Pre-treatment of sheet
Deflection test*
Surface finish
IP protection
specification
specification
Proof load*
Dimension
Functional
HV & IR
ITEMS/COMPONENTS /
SUB SYSTEMS
Wall Mounted-Lighting Panel (IS- Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

513, IS:5, IS:2629, 2633, 6745)
Switch box/junction box/ Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Receptacles Panel (IS-513, IS:5,
IS:2629, 2633, 6745)
Cable glands(BS-6121) Y Y
Cable lug(IS-8309) Y Y
Lighting wire(IS-694) Y Y
Flexible conduits Y Y Y
Conduits(Galvanise & Epoxy) IS- Y Y Y Y Y
9537 & IS-2629,2633 ,6745
RCC Hume Pipe (IS-458) Y
Cable termination & straight Y Y Y
through joint (VDE-0278)
Cable Trays, Flexible supports Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
system & accessories IS-513,
2629,2633,6745
Trefoil clamp Y Y
GI flats for earthing & lighting Y Y Y Y Y
protection (IS 2062, 2629,
6745,2633)
GI wire (IS-280) Y Y
Fire Sealing System ( BS –476) Y Y Y
Note:1.This is an indicative list of tests /checks. The manufacturer is to furnish a detailed Quality Plan indicating the
practice and procedure along with relevant supporting documents.
2.* Deflection Test on cable trays and Proof Load test on cable trays support system will be as per details given in
the NTPC technical specification & approved MQP. The above acceptance tests shall be done only on one sample
from each size of offered lot.
3. Make of all items will be subject to NTPC approval.
DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I(2X800MW) Bid Doc. No. TECHNICAL PART-IV Page

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE CS-9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI 1 of 1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
QUALITY ASSURANCE & INSPECTIONMODULE NO. SQE 17

STATION LIGHTING
Item Components
Routine Test as per relevant std aad

Paint Shade Thickness Adhesion &
Bought Out Items/ Bill of Material

Sub System
Acceptance Test as per relevant

Functional Check as per spec.
Assembly
Constructional Feature as per
Item to conform to relevant

Make, Type , Rating/ TC
Pre-Treatment of sheat
Attributes
Characteristics
Galvanise Test
std and spec

NTPC spec.
Dimension
HV & IR
standard
IP Test
Finish
spec
Luminaries (IS-10322 Part- Y Y Y Y Y
5 Sec.1)
Electronic Ballast Y Y Y
Y
Lighting Wire (IS-694) Y
Y
Fans (IS-374) Y
Y
Pole (IS-2713) Y Y Y Y
Y
Lamps (IS-9800, IS-9974) Y Y Y
Lighting Mast (with raise Y Y Y Y Y
& lower lantern type) Y
Wall Mounted Lighting Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Panel (IS-513, IS-5)
Switch Box/ Junction Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Box/Receptacles/ Local
Push Button
Station,Lighting Panel (IS-
513, 2629, 2633, 4759,
6745)
Cable Gland (BS-6121) Y Y Y
Cable Lug (IS-8309) Y Y Y
Flexible Conduit Y
Y
Lighting Transformer (IS- Y Y Y
1117)
Epoxy & Galvanised Y Y Y
Conduit (IS-9537, 2629, Y
2633, 4759, 6745)
Notes:
1. This is an indicative list of tests / checks. The manufacturer is to furnish a detailed Quality Plan
indicating the practice and procedure along with relevant supporting documents.
2. Make of all major Bought Out Items will be subject to NTPC approval.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
QUALITY ASSURANCE & INSPECTION MODULE NO. SQE20

SWITCHYARD
SWITCHYARD SQE_20
Attributes / Make, model, Routine & Functional
Characteristics Type & Rating, Acceptance requirements as per
Test Certificate Test as per IS / NTPC Specification
IEC
Items/Components
Sub Systems
Circuit Breaker (IEC:62271-100) Y Y Y

Hollow insulator
Y Y Y
(IEC:233/ IS:5621)
Isolator (IEC:62271-102) Y Y Y
Current Transformer (IEC:60044/BS:3938/IS2705/ Y Y
Y
IEC: 61869)
Capacitor Voltage Tramsformer
Y Y Y
(IEC:186A / 358/IS3156/IEC60044/ IEC: 61869)
Bus Post Insualtor
Y Y Y
(IEC:168 / 815 / IS:2544)
Disc,Pin & String Insualtor
Y Y Y
(IEC:383 / IS:731)
Long Rod Insualtor (IEC:433) Y Y Y
Surge Arrestor (IEC:99-4/IS:3070) Y Y Y
Hardware fittings for Insulator
Y Y Y
(IS:2486 / BS:3288)
Spacers, Clamps & Connector
Y Y Y
(IS:10162 / 5561/ 617)
Aluminium Tube
Y Y Y
(IS:5082 / 2673 / 2678)
Wave Trap
Y Y Y
(IEC:353 / IS:8792 / 8793)
Conductor (IS:398) Y Y Y
Galvanised Steel Structures
Y Y Y
(IS:2062/2629/4759/6745)
Vibration Damper (IS:9708) Y Y Y
Sag Compensating Spring
Y Y Y
DIN:2089/2096 IS:3195 / 7906
Control & Relay Panel Y Y Y
SF6 Gas filling & evacuating plant Y Y Y
SF6 Gas Leak Detector Y Y Y
Leakage Current Analyser Y Y Y
Nitrogen Gas Filling Device Y Y Y
Protection Relays Y Y Y
Event Logger Y Y Y
Operation Analyser Y Y Y
Disturbance Recorder Y Y Y
Tariff Metering System Y Y Y
Synchronising Trolly Y Y Y

QUALITY ASSURANCE
QUALITY ASSURANCE & INSPECTION MODULE NO. SQE20

SWITCHYARD
Attributes / Make, Type Routine & Functional

Characteristics Rating,and Acceptance requirements as per
Model, Test Test as per NTPC Specification
Certificates relevant IS/IEC
Items/Components
Sub Systems
Relay Test Kit Y Y Y
Lighting Panels Y Y Y
Surge Monitor Y Y Y
Notes : 1) This is an indicative list of test/checks. The manufacture is to furnish a detailed

Quality Plan indicating the practice and procedure along with relevant supporting
documents during QP finalisation for all items.
2) All major Bought Out Items will be subject to NTPC approval.

PART- IV
CHAPTER – G2
ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION
WORK SPLIT RESPONSIBILITIES
Chapter-G2
ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION WORK

SPLIT RESPONSIBILITIES
1.00.00 GENERAL
1.01.00 The following shall supplement the conditions already contained in the other
parts of these specifications and documents and shall govern that portion of
the work or this contract to be performed at site.
1.02.00 The Contractor upon signing of the contract shall, in addition to a Project Co-
ordinator, nominate another responsible officer as his representative at site
suitably designated for the purpose of overall responsibility and co-ordination
of the works to be performed at site. Such person shall function from the site
office of the Contractor during the pendency of contract.
2.00.00 REGULATION OF LOCAL AUTHORITIES AND STATUTES
2.01.00 The Contractor shall comply with all the rules and regulations of local
authorities during the performance of his field activities. He shall also comply
with the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 and the Payment of Wages Act (both of
the Government of India) and the rules made thereunder in respect of any
employee or workman employed or engaged by him or his sub-Contractor.
2.02.00 All registration and statutory inspection fees, if any, in respect of his work
pursuant to this contract shall be to the account of the Contractor. However,
any registration, statutory inspection fees lawfully payable under the provisions
of the any statutory laws and its amendments from time to time during erection
in respect of the plant equipment ultimately to be owned by the Employer, shall
be to the account of the Employer. Should any such inspection or registration
need to be re-arranged due to the fault of the Contractor or his Sub-contractor,
the additional fees to such inspection and/or registration shall be borne by the
Contractor.
3.00.00 EMPLOYER’S LIEN ON EQUIPMENT
3.01.00 The Employer shall have lien on all equipment including those of the
Contractor brought to the site for the purpose of erection, testing and
commissioning of the plant. The Employer shall continue to hold the lien on all
such equipment throughout the period of contract. No material brought to the
site shall be removed from the site by the Contractor and/or his Sub-
contractors without the prior written approval of the Project Manager.
4.00.00 INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES
4.01.00 The provisions of the clause entitled Inspection, Testing and Inspection
Certificates under General Technical Requirements in Chapter-G1 shall also
be applicable to the erection portion of the works. The Project Manager shall
have the right to re-inspect any equipment though previously inspected and
approved by him at the Contractor’s works, before and after the same are
erected at site. If by the above inspection, the Project Manager rejects any

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
equipment, the Contractor shall make good for such rejections either by
replacement or modification/ repairs as may be necessary to the satisfaction of
the Project Manager. Such replacements will also include the replacements or
re-execution of such of those works of other Contractors and/or agencies,
which might have got damaged or affected by the replacements or re-work
done to the Contractor’s work.
5.00.00 ACCESS TO SITE AND WORKS ON SITE
5.01.00 Suitable access to and possession of the Site shall be afforded to the
Contractor by the Employer in reasonable time.
5.02.00 The works so far as it is carried out on the Employer’s premises, shall be
carried out at such time as the Employer may approve and the Employer shall
give the Contractor reasonable facilities for carrying out the works.
5.03.00 In the execution of the works, no person other than the Contractor or his duly
appointed representative, Sub-contractor and workmen, shall be allowed to do
work on the site, except by the special permission, in writing of the Project
Manager or his representative.
6.00.00 CONTRACTOR’S SITE OFFICE ESTABLISHMENT
6.01.00 The Contractor shall establish a site office at the site and keep posted an
authorised representative for the purpose of the Contract. Any written order or
instruction of the Project Manager or his duly authorised representative, shall
be communicated to the said authorised resident representative of the
Contractor and the same shall be deemed to have been communicated to the
Contractor at his legal address.
7.00.00 DISCIPLINE OF WORKMEN
7.01.00 The Contractor shall adhere to the disciplinary procedure set by the Project
Manager in respect of his employees and workmen at site. The Project
Manager shall be at liberty to object to the presence of any representative of
employee of the Contractor at the site, if in the opinion of the Project Manager
such employee has mis-conducted himself or is incompetent or negligent or
otherwise undesirable and then the Contractor shall remove such a person
objected to and provide in his place a competent replacement.
8.00.00 CONTRACTOR’S FIELD OPERATION
8.01.00 The Contractor shall keep the Project Manager informed in advance regarding
his field activity plans and schedules for carrying out each part of the works.
Any review of such plan or schedule or method of work by the Project Manager
shall not relieve the Contractor of any of responsibilities towards the field
activities. Such reviews shall also not be considered as an assumption of any
risk or liability by the Project Manager or the Employer or any of his
representatives and no claim of the Contractor will be entertained because of
the failure or inefficiency of any such plan or schedule or method of work
reviewed. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safe ty, adequacy
and efficiency of plant and equipment and his erection methods.
8.02.00 The Contractor shall have the complete responsibility for the conditions of the
work-site including the safety of all person employed by him or his Sub-con-

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
tractor and all the properties under his custody during the performance of the
work. This requirement shall apply continuously till the completion of the
Contract and shall not be limited to normal working hours. The construction
review by the Project Manager is not intended to include review of Contractor’s
safety measures in, or of near the work-site, and their adequacy or otherwise.
9.00.00 PHOTOGRAPHS AND PROGRESS REPORT
9.01.00 The Contractor shall furnish three (3) prints each to the Project Manager of
progress photographs of the work done at site. Photographs shall be taken as
and when indicated by the Project Manager or his representative. Photographs
shall be adequate in size and number to indicate various stages of erection.
Each photograph shall contain the date, the name of the Contractor and the
title of the photograph.
9.02.00
The above photographs shall accompany the monthly progress report detailing
out the progress achieved on all erection activities as compared to the
schedules. The report shall also indicate the reasons for the variance between
the scheduled and actual progress and the action proposed for corrective
measures, wherever necessary.
10.00.00 MAN-POWER REPORT
10.01.00 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager, on the first day of every
month, a man hour schedule for the month, detailing the man hours scheduled
for the month, skill-wise and area-wise.
10.02.00 The Contractor shall also submit to the Project Manager on the first day of
every month, a man power report of the previous month detailing the number
of persons scheduled to have been employed and actually employed, skill-
wise and the areas of employment of such labour.
11.00.00 PROTECTION OF WORK
11.01.00 The Contractor shall have total responsibility for protecting his works till it is
finally taken over by the Project Manager. No claim will be entertained by the
Employer or the Project Manager for any damage or loss to the Contractor’s
works and the Contractor shall be responsible for complete restoration of the
damaged works to original conditions to comply with the specification and
drawings. Should any such damage to the Contractor’s Works occur because
or other party not being under his supervision or control, the Contractor shall
make his claim directly with the party concerned. If disagreement or conflict or
dispute develops between the Contractor and the other party or parties
concerned regarding the responsibility for damage to the Contractor’s Works
the same shall be resolved as per the provisions of the Clause 7.0 above
entitled “Co-operation with other Contractors.” The Contractor shall not cause
any delay in the repair of such damaged Works because of any delay in the
resolution of such disputes. The Contractor shall proceed to repair the Work
immediately and no cause thereof will be assigned pending resolution of such
disputes.
12.00.00 EMPLOYMENT OF LABOUR
12.01.00 The Contractor will be expected to employ on the work only his regular skilled
employees with experience of his particular work. No female labour shall be

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
employed after darkness. No person below the age of eighteen years shall be
employed.
12.02.00 All travelling expenses including provisions of all necessary transport to and
from site, lodging allowances and other payments to the Contractor’s
employees shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
12.03.00 The hours of work on the Site shall be decided by the Employer and the
Contractor shall adhere to it. Working hours will normally be eight (8) hours per
day - Monday through Saturday.
12.04.00 Contractor’s employees shall wear identification badges while on work at Site.
12.05.00 In case the Employer becomes liable to pay any wages or dues to the labour
or any Government agency under any of the provisions of the Minimum Wages
Act, Workmen Compensation Act, Contact Labour Regulation Abolition Act or
any other law due to act of omission of the Contractor, the Employer may
make such payments and shall recover the same from the Contractor’s bills.
13.00.00 FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
13.01.00 Tools, tackles and scaffoldings
The Contractor shall provide all the construction equipments, tools, tackles and
scaffoldings required for pre-assembly, erection, testing and commissioning of
the equipments covered under the contract. He shall submit a list of all such
materials to the Project Manager before the commencement of pre-assembly
at site. These tools and tackles shall not be removed from the site without the
written permission of the Project Manager.
13.02.00 First-aid
The Contractor shall provide necessary first-aid facilities for all his employees,
representatives and workmen working at the site. Enough number of
Contractor’s personnel shall be trained in administering first-aid.
13.03.00 Cleanliness
13.03.01 The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the entire area allotted to him
clean and free from rubbish, debris etc. during the period of contract. The
Contractor shall employ enough number of special personnel to thoroughly
clean his work-area at least once in a day. All such rubbish and scrap material
shall be stacked or disposed in a place to be identified by the Project Manager.
Materials and stores shall be so arranged to permit easy cleaning of the area.
In areas where equipment might drip oil and cause damage to the floor
surface, a suitable protective cover of a flame resistant, oil proof sheet shall be
provided to protect the floor from such damage.
13.03.02 Similarly the labour colony, the offices and the residential areas of the
Contractor’s employees and workmen shall be kept clean and neat to the
entire satisfaction of the Project Manager. Proper sanitary arrangements shall
be provided by the Contractor, in the work-areas, office and residential areas
of the Contractor.
14.00.00 LINES AND GRADES

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
All the works shall be performed to the lines, grades and elevations indicated
on the drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible to locate and lay-out the
Works. Basic horizontal and vertical control points will be established and
marked by the Project Manager at site at suitable points. These points shall be
used as datum for the works under the contract. The Contractor shall inform
the Project Manager well in advance of the times and places at which he
wishes to do work in the area allotted to him so that suitable datum points may
be established and checked by the Project Manager to enable the Contractor
to proceed with his works. Any work done without being properly located may
be removed and/or dismantled by the Project Manager at Contractor’s
expense.
15.00.00 FIRE PROTECTION
15.01.00 The work procedures that are to be used during the erection shall be those
which minimise fire hazards to the extent practicable. Combustible materials,
combustible waste and rubbish shall be collected and removed from the Site at
least once each day. Fuels, oils and volatile or flammable materials shall be
stored away from the construction and equipment and materials storage areas
in safe containers. Untreated canvas, paper, plastic or other flammable flexible
materials shall not at all be used at Site for any other purpose unless otherwise
specified. If any such materials are received with the equipment at the site, the
same shall be removed and replaced with acceptable material before moving
into the construction or storage area.
15.02.00 Similarly corrugated paper fabricated cartons etc. will not be permitted in the
construction area either for storage or for handling of materials. All such
materials used shall be of water-proof and flame resistant type. All the other
materials such as working drawings, plans, etc. which are combustible but are
essential for the works to be executed shall be protected against combustion
resulting from welding sparks, cutting flames and other similar fire sources.
15.03.00 All the Contractor’s supervisory personnel and sufficient number of workers
shall be trained for fire-fighting and shall be assigned specific fire protection
duties. Enough of such trained personnel must be available at the site during
the entire period of the contract.
15.04.00 The Contractor shall provide enough fire protection equipment of the types and
number for the warehouses, office, temporary structures, labour colony area,
etc. Access to such fire protection equipment, shall be easy and kept open at
all time.
16.00.00 SECURITY
The Contractor shall have total responsibility for all equipment and materials in
his custody stores, loose, semi-assembled and/or erected by him at site. The
Contractor shall make suitable security arrangements including employment of
security personnel to ensure the protection of all materials, equipment and
works from theft, fire, pilferage and any other damages and loss. All materials
of the Contractor shall enter and leave the project site only with the written
permission of the Project Manager in the prescribed manner.
17.00.00 CONTRACTOR’S AREA LIMITS

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
The Project Manager will mark-out the boundary limits of access roads,
parking spaces, storage and construction areas for the Contractor and the
Contractor shall not trespass the areas not so marked out for him. The
Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that none of his personnel move out
of the areas marked out for his operations. In case of such a need for the
Contractor’s personnel to work out of the areas marked out for him the same
shall be done only with the written permission of the Project Manager.
18.00.00 CONTRACTOR’S CO-OPERATION WITH THE EMPLOYER
In case where the performance of the erection work by the Contractor affects
the operation of the system facilities of the Employer, such erection work of the
Contractor shall be scheduled to be performed only in the manner stipulated
by the Project Manager and the same shall be acceptable at all times to the
Contractor. The Project Manager may impose such restrictions on the facilities
provided to the Contractor such as electricity, water, etc. as he may think fit in
the interest of the Employer and the Contractor shall strictly adhere to such re-
strictions and co-operate with the Project Manager. It will be the responsibility
of the Contractor to provide all necessary temporary instrumentation and other
measuring devices required during start-up and operation of the equipment
systems which are erected by him. The Contractor shall also be responsible
for flushing and initial filling of all the oil and lubricants required for the
equipment furnished and erected by him, so as to make such equipment ready
for operation. The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying such flushing
oil and other lubricants unless otherwise specified elsewhere in documents
and specifications.
19.00.00 PRE-COMMISSIONING TRIALS AND INITIAL OPERATIONS
The pre-commissioning trials and initial operations of the equipment furnished

and erected by the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor as
detailed in relevant clauses in Technical Specification. The Contractor shall
provide, in addition, test instruments, calibrating devices, etc. and labour
required for successful performance of these trials. If it is anticipated that the
above test may prolong for a long time, the Contractor’s workmen required for
the above test shall always be present at Site during such trials.
20.00.00 MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE
20.01.00 All the equipment furnished under the Contract and arriving at site shall be
promptly received, unloaded and transported and stored in the storage spaces
by the Contractor.
20.02.00 Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the
Project Manager immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for
the purpose of Project Manager’s information only. The Contractor shall submit
to the Project Manager every week a report detailing all the receipts during the
week. However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any shortages or
damage in transit, handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment at
site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the trans-
porters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor.
20.03.00 The Contractor shall maintain an accurate and exhaustive record detailing out
the list of all equipment received by him for the purpose of erection and keep
such record open for the inspection of the Project Manager.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
20.04.00 All equipment shall be handled very carefully to prevent any damage or loss.
No bare wire ropes, slings, etc. shall be used for unloading and/or handling of
the equipment without the specific written permission of the Project Manager.
The equipment stored shall be properly protected to prevent damage either to
the equipment or to the floor where they are stored. The equipment from the
store shall be moved to the actual location at the appropriate time so as to
avoid damage of such equipment at site.
20.05.00 All electrical panels, controls gear, motors and such other devices shall be
properly dried by heating before they are installed and energised. Motor
bearings, slip rings, commutators and other exposed parts shall be protected
against moisture ingress and corrosion during storage and periodically
inspected. Heavy rotating parts in assembled conditions shall be periodically
rotated to prevent corrosion due to prolonged storage.
20.06.00 All the electrical equipment such as motors, generators, etc. shall be tested for
insulation resistance at least once in three months from the date of receipt till
the date of commissioning and a record of such measured insulation values
maintained by the Contractor. Such records shall be open for inspection by the
Project Manager.
20.07.00 The Contractor shall ensure that all the packing materials and protection
devices used for the various equipments during transit and storage are
removed before the equipment are installed.
20.08.00 The consumables and other supplies likely to deteriorate due to storage must
be thoroughly protected and stored in a suitable manner to prevent damage or
deterioration in quality by storage.
20.09.00 All the materials stored in the open or dusty location must be covered with
suitable weather-proof and flameproof covering material wherever applicable.
20.10.00 If the materials belonging to the Contractor are stored in areas other than
those earmarked for him, the Project Manager will have the right to get it
moved to the area earmarked for the Contractor at the Contractor’s cost.
20.11.00 The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage
facilities to store all equipment which require indoor storage. Normally, all the
electrical equipments such as motors, control gear, generators, exciters and
consumables like electrodes, lubricants etc. shall be stored in the closed
storage space . The Project Manager, in addition, may direct the Contractor to
move certain other materials, which in his opinion will require indoor storage,
to indoor storage areas which the Contractor shall strictly comply with.
21.00.00 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
21.01.00 The field activities of the various contractors executing different contracts for
the project, will be coordinated by the Project Manager and the Project
Manager’s decision shall be final in resolving any disputes or conflicts between
the Contractor and other Contractors and tradesmen of the Employer
regarding scheduling and coordination of work. Such decision by the Project
Manager shall not be a cause for extra compensation or extension of time for
the Contractor.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
21.02.00 The Project Manager shall hold weekly meetings of all the Contractors working
at Site, at a time and place to be designated by the Project Manager. The
Contractor shall attend such meetings and take notes of discussions during the
meeting and the decisions of the Project Manager and shall strictly adhere to
those decisions in performing his Works. In addition to the above weekly
meeting, the Project Manager may call for other meeting either with individual
contractors or with selected number of contractors and in such a case the
Contractor if called, will also attend such meetings.
21.03.00 Time is the essence of the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for
performance of his works in accordance with the specified construction
schedule. If at any time, the Contractor is falling behind the schedule, he shall
take necessary action to make good for such delays by increasing his work
force or by working overtime or otherwise accelerate the progress of the work
to comply with the schedule and shall communicate such actions in writing to
the Project Manager, satisfying that his action will compensate for the delay.
The Contractor shall not be allowed any extra compensation for such action.
21.04.00 The Project Manager shall however not be responsible for provision of
additional labour and/or materials or supply or any other services to the
Contractor except for the co-ordination work between various Contractors as
set out earlier.
22.00.00 FIELD OFFICE RECORDS
The Contractor shall maintain at his site office up-to-date copies of all
drawings, specifications and other contract documents and any other
supplementary data complete with all the latest revisions thereto. The
Contractor shall also maintain the continuous record of all changes to the
above contract documents, drawings, specifications, supplementary data, etc.
effected at the field. On completion of his total assignment under the contract,
the Contractor shall incorporate all such changes on the drawings and other
project engineering data to indicate ‘as installed’ conditions of the equipment
furnished and erected under the contract. Such drawings and project
engineering data shall be submitted to the Project Manager in required number
of copies.
23.00.00 CONTRACTOR’S MATERIALS BROUGHT ON TO SITE
23.01.00 The Contractor shall bring to site all equipment, components, parts, materials,
including construction equipment, tools and tackles for the purpose of the
works under intimation to the Project Manager. All such goods shall, from the
time of their being brought vest in the Employer, but may be used for the
purpose of the works only and shall not on any account be removed or taken
away by the Contractor without the written permission of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall nevertheless be solely liable and responsible for any loss
or destruction thereof and damage thereto.
23.02.00 The Employer shall have a lien on such goods for any sum or sums which may
at any time be due or owing to him by the Contractor, under, in respect of or by
reasons of the contract. After giving a fifteen (15) days notice in writing of his
intention to do so, the Employer shall be at liberty to sell and dispose off any
such goods, in such manner as he shall think fit including public auction or
private treaty and to apply the proceeds in or towards the satisfaction of such
sum or sums due as aforesaid.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
23.03.00 After the completion of the works, the Contractor shall remove from the site
under the direction of the Project Manager the materials such as construction
equipment, erection tools and tackles, scaffolding etc. with the written
permission of the Project Manager. If the Contractor fails to remove such
materials, within fifteen (15) days of issue of a notice by the Project Manager
to do so then the Project Manager shall have the liberty to dispose off such
materials as detailed under clause 23.02.00 above and credit the proceeds
thereto to the account of the Contractor.
24.00.00 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY
24.01.00 The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from his
operations. He shall also be responsible for protection of all persons including
members of public and employees of the Employer and the employees of other
Contractors and Sub-Contractors and all public and private property including
structures, building, other plants and equipments and utilities either above or
below the ground.
24.02.00 The Contractor will ensure provision of necessary safety equipment such as
barriers, sign-boards, warning lights and alarms, etc. to provide adequate
protection to persons and property. The Contractor shall be responsible to give
reasonable notice to the Project Manager and the Employers of public or
private property and utilities when such property and utilities are likely to get
damaged or injured during the performance or his Works and shall make all
necessary arrangements with such Employers, related to removal and/or
replacement or protection of such property and utilities.
25.00.00 PAINTING
All exposed metal parts of the equipment including pipings, structures railings
etc. wherever applicable, after installation unless otherwise surface protected,
shall be first painted with at least one coat of suitable primer which matches
the shop primer paint used, after throughly cleaning all such parts of all dirt,
rust, scales, greases, oils and other foreign materials by wire brushing,
scraping or sand blasting and the same being inspected and approved by the
Project Manager for painting . Afterwards, the above parts shall be finished
painted with two coats of allowed resin machinery enamel paints. The quality
of the finish paint shall be as per the standards of ISI or equivalent and to be of
the colour as approved by the Project Manager.
26.00.00 INSURANCE
In addition to the conditions covered under the Clause entitled “Insurance” in

Section GCC, Conditions of Contract, the following provisions will also apply to
the portion of work to be done beyond the Contractor’s own or his
subcontractor’s manufacturing works.
26.01.00 Workmen’s Compensation Insurance
This insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims applicable under
the workmen’s Compensation Act, 1948 (Government of India). This policy
shall also cover the Contractor against claims for injury, disability disease or
death of his or his Sub-Contractor’s employees, which for any reason are not

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
covered under the Workmen’s Compensation Act 1948. The liabilities shall not
be less than:
Workmen’s Compensation As per Statutory Provisions

Employee’s liability As per Statutory Provisions
26.02.00 Comprehensive Automobile Insurance
This insurance shall be in such a form to project the Contractor against all
claims for injuries, disability, disease and death to members of public including
the Employer’s men and damage to the property of other arising from the use
of motor vehicles during on or off the Site operations, irrespective of the
Employership of such vehicles the liability covered shall be as herein indicated
Fatal Injury : Rs. 100,000/- each person

: Rs. 200,000/- each occurrence
Property Damage : Rs. 100,000/- each occurrence
26.03.00 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
26.03.01 The insurance shall protect the Contractor against all claims arising from
injuries, disabilities, disease or death of members of public or damage to
property of others, due to any act or omission on the part of the Contractor, his
agents, his employees, his representatives and Sub-Contractor, his agents, his
employees, his representatives and Sub-Contractors or from riots, strikes and
civil commotion. This insurance shall also cover all the liabilities of the
Contractor arising out of the Clause entitled “Defence of Suits” in Section
GCC, Conditions of Contract.
26.03.02 The hazards to be covered will pertain to all the works and areas where the
Contractor, his sub-contractors , his agents and his employees have to
perform work pursuant to the Contract.
26.03.03 The above are only illustrative list of Insurance covers normally required and it
will be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain all necessary insurance
coverage to the extent both in time and amount to take care of all his liabilities
either direct or indirect, in pursuance of the Contract.
27.00.00 UNFAVOURABLE WORKING CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall confine all his field operations to those works which can
be performed without subjecting the equipment and materials to adverse
effects during inclement weather conditions, like monsoon, storms, etc. and
during other unfavourable construction conditions. No field activities shall be
performed by the Contractor under conditions which might adversely affect the
quality and efficiency thereof, unless special precautions or measures are
taken by the Contractor in a proper and satisfactory manner in the
performance of such Works and with the concurrence of the Project Manager.
Such unfavourable construction conditions will in no way relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility to perform the Works as per the schedule.
28.00.00 PROTECTION OF MONUMENTS AND REFERENCE POINTS

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
The Contractor shall ensure that any finds such as relic, antiquity, coins,
fossils, etc. which he may come across during the course of performance of
his works either during excavation or elsewhere, are properly protected and
handed over to the Project Manager. Similarly the Contractor shall ensure that
the bench marks, reference points, etc., which are marked either with the help
of Project Manager or by the Project Manager shall not be disturbed in any
way during the performance of his works. If, any work is to be performed which
disturb such reference, the same shall be done only after these are transferred
to other suitable locations under the direction of the Project Manager. The
Contractor shall provide all necessary materials and assistance for such
relocation of reference points etc.
29.00.00 WORK & SAFETY REGULATIONS
As per annexure – I
30.00.00 FOREIGN PERSONNEL
30.01.00 The Contractor shall submit to the Employer data on all personnel he proposes
to bring into India for the performance of the Works under the Contract, at least
sixty (60) days prior to their departure to India. Such data will include for each
person the name, his present address, his assignment and responsibility in
connection with the works, and a short resume of his qualification, experience,
etc. in relation to the work to be performed by him.
30.02.00 Any person unsuitable and unacceptable to the Employer shall not be brought
to India. Any person brought to India, if found unsuitable or unacceptable by
the Employer, the Contractor shall within a reasonable time make alternate
arrangements for providing a suitable replacement and repatriation of such
unsuitable personnel.
30.03.00 No person brought to India for the purposes of the works shall be repatriated
without the consent of the Employer in writing, based on a written request from
the Contractor for such repatriation giving reasons for such an action to the
Project Manager. The Employer may give permission for such repatriation
provided he is satisfied that the progress of work will not suffer due to such
repatriation.
30.04.00 The cost of passports, visas and all other travel expenses to and from India,
incurred by
the Contractor shall be to his account. The Employer will not provide any
residential accommodation and/or furniture for any of the Contractor’s
personnel including foreign personnel and Contractor shall make his own
arrangements for such facilities in the area allotted at Site, to him by the
Employer for that purpose.
30.05.00 The Contractor and his expatriate personnel shall respect all Indian Acts,
Laws, rules and regulations and shall not in any way interfere with Indian politi-
cal and religious affairs and shall conform to any other rules and regulations
which the Government of India, the Employer and the Project Manager may
establish from time to time, on them. The Contractor’s expatriate personnel
shall work and live in close co-operation and coordination with their co-workers
and the community and shall not engage themselves in any other employe-
ment neither part-time or full-time nor shall they take part in any local politics.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
30.06.00 The Employer shall assist the Contractor, to the extent possible, in obtaining
necessary permits to travel to India and back, by issue of necessary
certificates and other information needed by the Government agencies.
31.00.00 CODE REQUIREMENTS
The erection requirements and procedures to be followed during the

installation of the equipment shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian
Boiler Regulations, ASME codes and accepted good project manageering
practice, the Project Manager’s drawings and other applicable Indian recog-
nised codes and laws and regulations of the Government of India.
32.00.00 FOUNDATION DRESSING & GROUTING
32.01.00 The surfaces of foundations shall be dressed to bring the top surface of the
foundations to the required level, prior to erection of equipment/equipment
bases.
32.02.00 All the equipment bases and structural steel base plates, shall be grouted and
finished as per these specifications unless otherwise recommended by the
equipment manufacturer.
32.03.00 The concrete foundation surfaces shall be properly prepared by chipping,

grinding as required to bring the type of such foundation to the required level,
to provide the necessary roughness for bondage and to assure enough
bearing strength. All laitance and surface film shall be removed and cleaned.
32.04.00 Grouting Mix
The Grouting mixture shall be composed of portland cement, sand and water.
The portland cement to be used shall conform to ISI No. 269 or equivalent
sand shall conform to ISI No. 383/2386 or equivalent. The grout proportions
for flat bases where the grouting space does not exceed 35 mm shall be 50 kg
bag of cement to 75 kg of sand. Only the required quantity of water shall be
added so as to make the mix quaky and flowable and the mix shall not show
excess water on top when it is being puddled in place. For thicker grout beds
upto 65 mm, the amount of sand shall be increased to 105 Kg per bag of
cement. Bases which are hollow and are to be filled full of grouting shall be
filled to a level of 25 mm above the outside rim with a mortar mix in the
volumetric proportions of one part of cement and 1.5 part sand and 1.5 part 6
mm granite gravel. An acceptable plasticiser may be added to the grout mixes
in a proportion recommended by the plasticisers manufacturer. All such grouts
shall be throughly, mixed for not less than five minutes in an approved
mechanical mixer and shall be used immediately after mixing.
32.05.00 Placing of Grout
32.05.01 After the base has been prepared, its alignment and level has been
checked/approved and before actually placing the grout, a low dam shall be
set around the base at a distance that will permit pouring and manipulation of
the grout. The height of such dam shall be at least 25mm above the bottom of
the base. Suitable size and number of chains shall be introduced under the
base before placing the grout, so that such chains can be moved back and
forth to push the grout into every part of the space under the base.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
32.05.02 The grout shall be poured either through grout holes it provided or shall be
poured at one side or at two adjacent sides giving it a pressure head to make
the grout move in a solid mass under the base and out in the opposite side.
Pouring shall be continued until the entire space below the base is thoroughly
filled and the grout stands at least 25 mm higher all around than the bottom of
the base. Enough care should be taken to avoid any air or water pockets
beneath the bases.
32.06.00 Finishing of the Edges of the Grout
The poured grout should be allowed to stand undisturbed until it is well set.
Immediately thereafter, the dam shall be removed and grout which extends
beyond the edges of the structural or equipment base plates shall be cut off,
flushed and removed. The edges of the grout shall then be pointed and
finished with 1:2 cement mortar pressed firmly to bond with the body of the
grout and smoothed with a tool to present a smooth vertical surface. The work
shall be done in a clean and scientific manner and the adjacent floor spaces,
exposed edges of the foundations, and structural steel and equipment base
plates shall be thoroughly cleaned of any spillage of the grout.
32.07.00 Checking of Equipment After Grouting
After the grout is set and cured, the Contractor shall check and verify the
alignment of equipments, alignment of shafts of rotating machinery, the slopes
of all bearing pedestals, centering of rotors with respect to their sealing bores,
couplings, etc. as applicable and the like items to ensure that no displacement
had taken place during grouting. The values recorded prior to grouting shall be
used during such post grouting check- up and verifications. Such pre and post
grout records of alignment details shall be maintained by the Contractor in a
manner acceptable to the Project Manager.
33.00.00 SHAFT ALIGNMENTS
All the shafts of rotating equipment shall be properly aligned to those of the
matching equipments to as perfect an accuracy as practicable. The equipment
shall be free from excessive vibration so as to avoid overheating of bearings or
other conditions which may tend to shorten the life of the equipment. All bear-
ings, shafts and other rotating parts shall be thoroughly cleaned and suitably
lubricated before starting.
34.00.00 DOWELLING
All the motors and other equipment shall be suitable dowelled after alignment
of shafts with tapered machined dowels as per the direction of the Project
Manager.
35.00.00 CHECK OUT OF CONTROL SYSTEMS

After completion of wiring,cabling furnished under separate specification and
laid and terminated by the Employer, the Contractor shall check out the
operation of all control systems for the equipment furnished and installed
under these specifications and documents.
36.00.00 COMMISSIONING SPARES

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
36.01.00 It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all commissioning

spares including consumable spares like indicating lights/lamps, diodes, fuses
recorder charts,ink pads/pens etc. required for initial operation till the
equipment is declared by the Employer as having satisfactorily completed the
Trial Operation. The Contractor shall have full responsibilities to supply all
commissioning spares so that initial operation do not suffer for want of
commissioning spares. All commissioning spares shall be deemed to be
included in the scope of the Contract and the cost of the same shall be
included in the bid price.
These spare will be received and stored by the Contractor atleast 3 months
prior to the schedule date of commencement of trial operation of the respective
equipment and utilised as and when required.
37.00.00 CABLING
37.01.00 All cables shall be supported by conduits or cable tray run in air or in cable
channels. These shall be installed in exposed runs parallel or perpendicular to
dominant surfaces with right angle turn made of symmertical bends for fittings.
When cables are run on cable trays, they shall be clamped at a minimum
intervals of 2000mm or otherwise as directed by the Project Manager.
37.02.00 Each cable, whether power or control, shall be porvided with a metallic or
plastic tag of an approved type, bearing a cable reference number indicated in
the cable and conduit list (prepared by the Contractor), at every 5 meter run or
part thereof and at both ends of the cable adjacent to the terminations. Cable
routing is to be done in such a way that cables are accessible for any
maintenance and for easy identification.
37.03.00 Sharp bending and kinking of cables shall be avoided. The minimum radii for
PVC insulted cables 1100 V grade shall be 15 D where D is the overall
diameter of the cable. Installation of other cables like high voltage, coaxial,
screened, compensating, mineral insulated shall be in accordance with the
cable manufacturer’s recommendations. Wherever cables cross roads and
water, oil, sewage or gaslines, special care should be taken for the protection
of the cables in designing the cable channels.
37.04.00 In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable
one or two straight through joints to be made, should the cable develop fault at
a later date.
37.05.00 Control cable terminations shall be made in accordance with wiring diagrams,
using identifying codes subject to Project Manager’s approval. Multicore
control cable jackets shall be removed as required to train and terminate the
conductors. The cable jacket shall be left on the cable, as far as possible, to
the point of the first conductor branch. The insulated conductors from which
the jacket is removed shall be neatly twined in bundles and terminated. The
bundles shall be firmly but not tightly tied utilising plastic or nylon ties or specif-
ically treated fungus protected cord made for this purpose. Control cable
conductor insulation shall be securely and evenly out.
37.06.00 The connectors for control cables shall be covered with a transparent
insulating sleeve so as to prevent accidental contact with ground or adjacent
terminals and shall preferably terminate in Elmex terminals and washers. The

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
insulating sleeve shall be fire resistant and shall be long enough to over pass
the conductor insulation. All control cables shall be fanned out and connection
made to terminal blocks and test equipment for proper operation before cables
are corded together.

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
ANNEXURE-I
CORPORATE SAFETY DEPARTMENT

SAFETY CLAUSES IN GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
I. General
i) The contractor shall comply with all the requirements of “The Building and Other
Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment & Conditions of Service) Act,” 1996 and
its Central Rule 1998 / State Rules and any other statutory requirements as applicable.
ii) The Contractor shall follow NTPC Safety Rules as issued from time to time with respect to
safety in construction & erection.
iii) The contractor shall have the approved Safety, Health and Environment (SHE) Policy in
respect of Safety and health of Building Workers and it shall be circulated widely and
displayed at conspicuous place in Hindi and local language understood by the majority of the
workers. A copy of the safety policy should be submitted to Engineer in charge.
iv) The contractor shall submit the safety plan comprising of methods to implement the Safety
Policy/ Rules, Risk assessment and ensuring Safety at work areas, Safety audits,
inspections and its compliance, Supervision and responsibility to ensure Safety at various
levels, Safety training to employees, review of Safety and accident analysis, ensure Health
and Safety Procedures to prevent accidents to Engineer I/c for approval as per the format of
Safety plan as annexed at Appendix – I.
v) The Contractors shall ensure proper safety of all the workmen, materials, plant and
equipment belonging to him or to the Employer or to others, working at the Site.
vi) All equipments used in construction and erection by the contractor shall meet BIS /
International Standards and where such standards do not exist, the Contractor shall ensure
these to be absolutely safe. All equipments shall be strictly operated and maintained by the
contractor in accordance with manufacturer’s operation manual. The contractor should also
follow Guidelines / Rules of the Employer in this regard.
vii) The Contractors shall provide suitable latest Personal Protective Equipments of prescribed
standard to all their employees and workmen according to the need. The Engineer I/c shall
have the right to examine these safety equipments to determine their suitability, reliability,
acceptability and adaptability. The contractor should also ensure these before their use at
worksite.
viii) The Contractor shall provide safe working conditions to all workmen and employees at his
workplace including safe means of access, railings, stairs, and ladders, scaffolding, work
platforms, toe boards etc. The scaffoldings shall be erected under the control and
supervision of an experienced and competent person. For erection of scaffolds, access,
work platforms etc. shall be good and the contractor shall use standard quality of material.
ix) The Contractor shall follow and comply with all the Safety Rules, standards, code of
practices of NTPC and relevant provisions of applicable laws pertaining to the safety of
workmen, employees, plant and equipment as may be prescribed from time to time without
any protest or contest or reservation. In case of any unconformity between statutory
requirement and the Safety Rules of the Employer referred above, the latter shall be binding
on the Contractor unless the statutory provisions are more stringent. As and when required
he can refer / obtain copy of NTPC safety documents as stated above.

SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI ANNEXURE-I TO
(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 1 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
x) The contractor shall have his own arrangements with nearby hospitals for shifting and
treatment of sick and injured.
The medical examination of the workers employed in hazardous areas shall be conducted
as per Rule 223 0f The Building and Other Construction Worker (Regulation of Employment
and Condition of Service) Central Rule 1998 Their health records shall be maintained
accordingly and to be submitted to Engineer I/c when asked for. If any worker found
suffering from occupational health hazard, the worker should be shifted to suitable place of
working and properly treated under intimation to Engineer I/c. The medical fitness certificate
to be submitted to Engineer (I/c).
xi) First Aid boxes equipped with requisite articles as specified in the Rule 231 of The Building
and Other Construction Worker (Regulation of Employment and Condition of Service)
Central Rule 1998 shall be provided at construction sites for the use of workers. Training
has to be provided on first aid to workmen & office bearers working at site.
a. Emergency Action Plan
The contractor shall prepare an emergency action plan approved by his competent authority
to handle any emergency occurred during construction work. Regular mock drills shall be
organized to practice this emergency plan. The Emergency Action Plan should be widely
circulated to all the employees and suitable infrastructure shall be provided to handle the
emergencies.
b. Scaffolding
The contractor shall take all precautions to prevent any accidental collapse of scaffolding or
fall of persons from scaffolding. The contractor should ensure that scaffolding are designed
by a competent person and it erection and repairs should be done under the expert
supervision. The scaffolding shall meet the required strength and other requirements for the
purpose for which the scaffold is erected. The material used for scaffold should conform to
the BIS / International standards.
c. Opening
The contractor shall ensure that there is no opening in any working platform/any floor of the
building, which may cause fall of workers or material. When ever an opening on a
platform/any floor of the building is unavoidable, the opening should be suitably fenced and
necessary measures for protection against falling objects or building workers from such
platform are taken by providing suitable safety nets, safety belts or other similar means.
d. Explosives
The contractor shall take all precautions while handling, using, storing or transporting of all
explosives. Before usage of any explosive necessary warning / danger signals be erected at
conspicuous places to warn the workers and general public. The contractor should strictly
ensure that all measures and precautions required to be complied for use, handling, storing or
transportation of explosives under the rules framed under the Explosives Act, 1884.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 2 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
II. Coffer Dam and Caissons
The contractor shall ensure that the cofferdam and caissons are of good construction and
adequate strength. The cofferdam and caissons should be provided with adequate means for
workers to reach safely at the top of such dams in the event of an in rush of water. The
workers should be allowed to work in a cofferdam or caisson only after inspection and found
safe by engineer (I/c). Such inspection report is to be maintained in a Register.
Where the workers are employed to work in a compressed air environment at the work site of
coffer dam or caissons, a construction Medical Officer assisted by a Nurse or trained first aid
attendant should be available at all the times during such work.
III. Fencing of Machinery
The contractor shall provide suitable fencing or guard to all dangerous and moving parts of
machinery.
The contractor shall not allow any of the employees to clean, lubricate, repair, adjust or
examine during machinery in motion, which may cause injury to the person.
IV. Carrying of Excessive Weight by a Worker
The worker shall not be allowed to lift by hand or carry over his head, back or shoulder more
than the maximum limit set by the prescribed rules for the construction Workers.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 3 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
V. Dangerous and Harmful Gases / Equipment
The contractor shall ensure that the workers are not exposed to any harmful gases during any
construction activity including excavation, tunneling, confined spaces etc.
The contractor should not allow any worker to go into the confined space unless it is certified
by Engineer (I/c) to be safe and fit for the entry to such work place. Proper record and work
permits should be followed to carry out such works.
VI. Overhead Protection
The contractor shall ensure that any area exposed to risk of falling materials, articles or
objects is roped off or cordoned off or otherwise suitably guarded from inadvertent entry of
any person.
Wherever there is a possibility of falling of any material, equipment or construction workers
while working at heights, a suitable and adequate safety net should be provided. The safety
net should be in accordance with BIS Standards.
VII. Working at Heights

All working platforms, ways and other places of construction work shall be free from
accumulations of debris or any other material causing obstructions and tripping.
Wherever workers are exposed to the hazard of falling into water, the contractor shall provide
adequate equipment for saving the employees from drowning and rescuing from such
hazards. The contractor shall provide boat or launch equipped with sufficient number of life
buoys, life jackets etc. manned with trained personnel at the site of such work.
Every opening at elevation from ground level through which a building worker, vehicle,
material equipment etc. may fall at a construction work shall be covered and/or guarded
suitably by the contractor to prevent such falls.
Wherever the workers are exposed to the hazards of falling from height, the contractor shall
provide full harness safety belts fitted with fall arresting systems to all the employees working
at higher elevations and life line of 8 mm diameter wire rope with turn buckles for anchoring
the safety belts while working or moving at higher elevations. Safety nets shall also be
provided for saving them from fall from heights and such equipment should be in accordance
with BIS standards.
Wherever there is a possibility of falling of any material, equipment or construction workers

while working at heights, a suitable and adequate safety net should be provided. The safety
net should be in accordance with BIS Standards.
The contractor shall provide standard prefabricated ladders on the columns where the
workers are required to use them as an access for higher elevations till permanent staircase
is provided. The workers shall be provided with safety belts fitted with suitable fall arresting
system (Fall arrestors) for climbing/getting down through ladders to prevent fall from height.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 4 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
VIII. Handling of Hazardous Chemicals
The Contractor will notify well in advance to the Engineer I/c of his intention to bring to the
Site any container filled with liquid or gaseous fuel or explosive or petroleum substance or
such chemicals which may involve hazards. NTPC shall have the right to prescribe the
conditions, under which such container is to be stored, handled and used during the
performance of the works and the Contract shall strictly adhere to and comply with such
instructions. The Engineer I/c shall have the right at his sole discretion to inspect any such
container or such construction plant / equipment for which material in the container is required
to be used and if in his opinion, its use is not safe, he may forbid its use. No claim due to
such prohibition shall be entertained by NTPC and NTPC shall not entertain any claim of the
Contractor towards additional safety provisions / conditions to be provided for / constructed.
Further, any such decision of the Engineer I/c shall not, in any way, absolve the Contractor of
his responsibilities and in case, use of such a container or entry thereof into the Site area is
forbidden by NTPC, the Contractor shall use alternative methods with the approval of the
NTPC without any cost implication to the NTPC or extension of work schedule.
Where it is necessary to provide and / or store petroleum products or petroleum mixtures and
explosives, the Contractor shall be responsible for carrying-out such provision and / or
storage in accordance with the rules and regulations laid down in Petroleum Act 1934,
Explosives Act 1948, and Petroleum and Carbide of Calcium Manual published by the Chief
Inspector of Explosives of India. All such storage shall have prior approval of the Engineer
I/c. In case any approvals are necessary from the Chief Inspector (Explosives) or any
statutory authorities, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the same.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safe storage of his and his Sub-contractor’s
radioactive sources in accordance with BARC/DAE (Bhabha Atomic Research Centre/
Department of Atomic Energy, Govt. of India) Rules and other applicable provisions. All
precautionary measures stipulated by BARC/DAE in connection with use, the contractor
would take storage and handling of such material.
The contractor shall provide suitable personal protective equipments to the workers who are
handling the hazardous and corrosive substances including alkalis and acids.
As a precautionary measure the contractor should keep the bottles filled with distilled water in
cupboard / Boxes near work place for emergency eye wash by worker exposed to such
hazardous chemicals.
IX. Eye Protection
The contractor shall provide suitable personal protective equipment to his workmen
depending upon the nature of hazards and ensure their usage by the workers engaged in
operations like welding, cutting, chipping, grinding or similar operations which may cause
injuries to his eyes.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 5 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
X. Excavation
The contractor shall take all necessary measures during excavation to prevent the hazards of
falling or sliding material or article from any bank or side of such excavation which is more
than one and a half meter above his footing by providing adequate piling, shoring, bracing etc.
against such bank or sides.
Adequate and suitable warning signs shall be put up at conspicuous places at the excavation
work to prevent any persons or vehicles falling into the excavation trench. No worker should
be allowed to work where he may be stuck or endangered by excavation machinery or
collapse of excavations or trenches.
XI. Electrical Hazards
The contractor should ensure that all electrical installations at the construction work comply
with the requirements of latest electricity acts / rules.
The contractor shall take all adequate measures to prevent any worker from coming into
physical contact with any electrical equipment or apparatus, machines or live electrical circuits
which may cause electrical hazards during the construction work. The contractor shall provide
the sufficient ELCBs / RCCBs for all the portable equipments, electrical switchboards,
distribution panels etc. to prevent electrical shocks.
The contractor should ensure use of single / double insulated hand tools or low voltage i.e.,
110 volts hand tools.
The contractor should also ensure that all temporary electrical installations at the construction
works are provided with earth leakage circuit breakers.
XII. Vehicular Traffic
The contractor should employ vehicle drivers who hold a valid driving license under the Motor
Vehicles Act, 1988.
XIII. Lifting Appliances, Tools & Tackles, Lifting Gear And Pressure Plant & Equipment
etc.
The contractor shall ensure all the lifting appliances, tools & tackles including cranes etc.,
lifting gear including fixed or movable and any plant or gear, hoists, Pressure Plant and
equipment etc. are in good condition and shall be examined by competent person and only
certified shall be used at sites. Periodical Examination and the tests for all lifting / hoisting
equipment & tackles shall be carried out. A register of such examinations and tests shall be
properly maintained by the Contractor and will be promptly produced as and when desired by
the Engineer I/c or by the person authorized by him.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 6 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
XIV. Excessive Noise, Vibration
The contractor shall take adequate measures to protect the workers against the harmful effect
of excessive noise or vibration. The noise should not exceed the limits prescribed under the
concerned rules, Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000.
XV. Electrical Installation
The Contractor shall not interfere or disturb electric fuses, wiring and other electrical
equipment belonging to the Employer or other contractors under any circumstances,
whatsoever, unless expressly permitted in writing by the Engineer I/c to handle such fuses,
wiring or electrical equipment.
Before the Contractor connects any electrical appliances to any plug or socket belonging to
the other contractor or the NTPC, he shall
Satisfy the Engineer I/C that the appliance is in good working condition;
Inform the Engineer I/C of the maximum current rating, voltage and phases of the
appliances;
Obtain permission of the Engineer I/C detailing the sockets to which the appliances may be
connected.
The Engineer I/C will not grant permission to connect until he is satisfied that:
The appliance is in good condition and is fitted with suitable plug; having earth connection
with the body.
Wherever armored / metallic sheathed multi core cable is used, the same armored / sheathed
should be connected to earth.
No repair work shall be carried out on any live equipment. The Engineer I/c must declare the
equipment safe and a permit to work shall be issued by the NTPC / contractor as the case
may be to carry out any repair / maintenance work. While working on electric lines /
equipments whether live or dead, suitable type and sufficient quantity of tools will have to be
provided by the contractor to electricians / workmen / Officers.
The contractor shall employ necessary number of qualified, full time Electricians / Electrical
Supervisors to maintain his temporary electrical installation.
The installations are provided with suitable ELCBs and RCCBs wherever required.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 7 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
XVI. Safety Organisation
I The contractor employing more than 250 workmen whether temporary, casual, probationary,
regular or permanent shall employ at least one full time safety officer exclusively to
supervise safety aspects of the equipments and workmen, who will coordinate with the NTPC
Safety Officer. Further requirement of safety officers, if any, shall be guided by Rule 209 of
The Building and Other Construction Worker (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of
Service) Central Rule 1998. In case the work is being carried out through subcontractor, the
employees / workmen of the sub contractor shall also be considered as the contractor’s
employees/workmen for the above purpose.
II In case of contractor deploying less than 250 workmen he should designate one of his Engr /
supervisor or the contractor himself (if he is directly supervising the work) as safety officer in
addition to his existing responsibilities. The Engr./ supervisor should get at least 2days safety
training from any reputed organization or from NTPC before resuming the work. If already
trained in past the declaration along with Trg. certificate to be furnished to NTPC safety
officer.
The name and address of such Safety Officer of the Contractor will be promptly informed in
writing to the EIC with a copy to the Project Safety Officer before he starts work or
immediately after any change of the incumbent is made during currency of the Contract.
XVII. Reporting of Accident and Investigation
I In case any accident occurs during the construction / erection or other associated activities
undertaken by the Contractor thereby causing any near miss, minor or major or fatal injury to
his employees due to any reason, whatsoever, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
to promptly inform the same to the Engineer I/C, NTPC Safety Officer with a copy to NTPC
Head of Project in the prescribed form and also to all the authorities envisaged under the
applicable laws.
XVIII. Right to stop Work
I The Engineer I/C shall have the right at his sole discretion to stop the work, if in his opinion
the work is being carried out in such a way that it may cause accidents and endanger the
safety of the persons and / or property, and / or equipments. In such cases, the contractor
shall be informed in writing about the nature of hazards and possible injury / accident and he
shall comply to remove shortcomings promptly. The Contractor after stopping the specific
work can, if felt necessary appeal against the order of stoppage of work to the Project
Manager within 3 days of such stoppage of work and decision of the Project Manager in this
respect shall be conclusive and binding on the Contractor.
II The Contractor shall not be entitled for any damages / compensation for stoppage of work,
{Sub-Clause XVIII (I)} due to safety reasons and the period of such stoppage of work shall not
be taken as an extension of time for Completion of the Facilities and will not be the ground for
waiver of levy of liquidated damages.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 8 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
XIX. Fire Protection
I The contractor shall provide sufficient fire extinguishers at place /s of work. The fire
extinguishers shall be properly maintained as per relevant BIS Standards. The employees
shall be trained to operate the fire extinguishers / equipment.
XX. Penalties
If the Contractor fails in providing safe working environment as per the Safety Rules of NTPC
or continues the work even after being instructed to stop the work by the Engineer I/C as
provided in Clause XVIII (1) above, the Contractor shall be penalized at the rate of Rs.
25,000/- per day or part thereof till the instructions are complied with and so certified by the
Engineer I/C. However, in case of accident, the provisions contained in Sub-Clause XX (II)
below shall also apply in addition to the penalties mentioned in this sub-clause.
If the Contractor does not take all safety precautions and / or fails to comply with the Safety
Rules as prescribed by the Employer or under the applicable law for the safety of the plant
and equipment and for the safety of personnel and the contractor does not prevent hazardous
conditions which cause injury to this own employees or employees of other contractors, or
NTPC’s employees or any other person who are at the Site or adjacent thereto, the
Contractor shall be responsible for payment of penalty to NTPC as per the following
schedule:-
a) Fatal injury or accident causing Penalty @10% of contract These are

death value or applicable for
Rs. 5,00,000/- per person, death to any
which ever is less. person
whosoever.
b) Major injuries or accident causing Penalty @ 2 1/2 % of contract These are

25% or more permanent value or applicable for
disablement to workmen or Rs. 1,00,000/- per person injury to any
employees which ever is less person
whosoever.
Permanent disablement shall have the same meaning as indicated in The Workmen’s
Compensation Act’ 1923. The penalty mentioned above shall be in addition to the
compensation payable to the workmen / employees under the relevant provisions of the
Workmen’s Compensation Act’ 1923 and rules framed there under or any other applicable
laws as applicable from time to time.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 9 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
If any contractor worker found working without using the safety equipment like safety helmet,
safety shoes, safety belts, etc. or without anchoring the safety belts while working at height
the Engineer I/c / Safety Officer of NTPC shall have the right to penalize the contractor for Rs.
200/- per person per day and such worker shall be sent out of the workplace immediately and
shall not be allowed to work on that day. Engineer I/c / Safety Officer of NTPC will also issue
a notice in this regard to the contractor.
If two or more fatal accidents occur at same NTPC site under the control of contractor
during the period of contract and he has
(1 ) not complied with keeping adequate PPEs in stock or
(2 ) defaulted in providing PPEs to his workmen
(3) not followed statutory requirements / NTPC safety rules
(4 ) been issued warning notice/s by NTPC head of the project on non observance of
safety norms
(5) not provided safety training to all his workmen,
the contractor can be debarred from getting tender documents in NTPC for two years
from the date of last accident.
The safety performance will also be one of the overriding criteria for evaluation of overall
performance of the contractors by NTPC. The contractor shall submit the accident data
including fatal / non-fatal accidents for the last 3 years where he has undertaken the
construction activities Projects-wise along with the tender documents. This will also be
considered for evolution of tender documents. If the information given by the contractor found
incorrect, his contract will be liable to be terminated.
XXI. Award
If the Contractor’s performance on safety front is found satisfactory i.e. without any
fatal/reportable accident in the year of consideration; he may be considered for suitable award
“ACCIDENT FREE SAFETY MERITORIOUS AWARD” as per scheme of the employer.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 10 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
SAFETY PLAN
01. Safety Policy of the Contractor to be enclosed

02. When was the Safety Policy last reviewed
03. Details of implementation procedure / methods to
implement Safety Policy / Safety Rules
04. Name, Qualification, experience of Safety Officer
05. Review of Accidents Analysis Method, Methods to
ensure Safety and Health
06. Unit executive responsible to ensure Safety at various
levels in work area
07. List of employees trained in safety employed before

execution of the job. Give the details of training
08. Safety Training Targets, Schedules, methods
Adopting to providing safety training to all employees
09. Details of checklist for different jobs / work and
responsible person to ensure compliance (copy of
checklist to be enclosed)
10. Regular Safety Inspection Methods and Periodicity
and list of members to be enclosed
11. Risk Assessment, Safety Audit
by Professional Agencies, Periodicity
12. Implementation of Recommendations of Audit /
Inspections. Procedures for implementation
and follow up
13. Provision for treatment of injured persons at work site
14. Review of overall safety by top Management and
Periodicity
15. System for Implementation of Statutory legislations
16. Issue of PPEs to employees, Periodicity / stock on
hand etc.

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 G2 - 11 of 11
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
ANNEXURE-II
LIST OF TENDER DRAWINGS
SL. TITLE DRAWING NO.
No.
1. General Layout Plan Darlipalli STPP Stage-I 9549-999-POC-F-001, Rev 8
(2x800MW)
2. 765 kV & 132 kV Single Line Diagram 9549-572-POE-A-001, Rev 0
3. GA drawing for 765/132 kV Switchyard 9549-572-POE-A-002, Rev 0
4. 132 kV Sub-station layout for Make up water sub- 9549-572-POE-A-003, Rev 0

station
5. SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM 9549-572-POE-A-004, Rev. No. 0
ARCHITECTURE
6. MUP SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM 9549-572-POE-A-004A, Rev. No. 0
ARCHITECTURE
7. GENERATOR RELAY PANEL PROTECTION 9549-572-POE-A-005, Rev. No. 0
SLD
8. PROTECTION SLD FOR BR-TIE-GT DIA 9549-572-POE-A-006, Rev. No. 0
9. 765/132 KV IBT PROTECTIONSLD 9549-572-POE-A-007, Rev. No. 0
10. PROTECTION SLD FOR GT-TIE- LINE DIA 9549-572-POE-A-008, Rev. No. 0
11. PROTECTION SLD FOR IBT-TIE-LINE DIA 9549-572-POE-A-009, Rev. No. 0
12. 132/11.5/11.5KV STATION TRANSFORMER 9549-572-POE-A-010, Rev. No. 0

PROTECTION SLD
13. PROTECTION SLD FOR 31.5MVA,132/34.5KV 9549-572-POE-A-011, Rev. No. 0
MISC TRF BAY
14. PROTECTION SLD FOR 7.5MVA,132/11.5KV 9549-572-POE-A-012, Rev. No. 0
MAKE UP WATER TRANSFORMER BAY
15. PROTECTION SLD FOR 132KV LINE BAY 9549-572-POE-A-013, Rev. No. 0
(MUWPH LINE & STARTUP POWER LINE)
16. PROTECTION SLD FOR B/C & B/S BAY 9549-572-POE-A-014, Rev. No. 0
17. Typical detail of fencing 9549-572-POC-A-001, Rev. No. A
18. Typical details of road & drain 9549-572-POC-A-002, Rev. No. A
19. Typical details of cable trench 9549-572-POC-A-003, Rev. No. A
20. Switchyard control room Building - Ground floor 9549-572-POC-A-004, Rev. No. A
plan
21. Switchyard control room Building -Terrace level 9549-572-POC-A-005, Rev. No. A
plan
22. Switchyard control room Building - Elevation 9549-572-POC-A-006, Rev. No. A
and section
23. Preliminary Survey and Estimate of 132 kV
Transmission line for Make up Water Pump
House
DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I Bid Doc. No.: TECHNICAL PART-IV Page

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI ANNEXURE-II
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE TO
G2- 1 of 1
NTPC LIMITED
REPORT ON
PRELIMINARY SURVEY AND ESTIMATE OF 132 KV TRANSMISSION LINE
FOR MAKE UP WATER PUMP HOUSE, SUNDARGARH (ORISSA)
DECEMBER-2013
By
DESIGNERS’ CONSORTIUM
J - 256, Basement, Saket, New Delhi -110017
Phone: +91 11 46062 990 / 991
Telefax: +91 11 4606 2993
E-mail: [email protected]
SURVEY AND ESTIMATE OF 132 kV TRANSMISSION LINE FOR 2013
MAKE-UP WATER PUMP HOUSE FOR DARLIPALI STPP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
1. INTRODUCTION 2
2. SCOPE OF WORK 4
3. GEOGRAPHY OF THE PROJECT AREA 6
3.1 LOCATION
3.2 TERRAIN
3.3 HYDROLOGY
3.4 SEISMIC DETAILS
3.5 TOPOSHEETS INVOLVED
4. METHODOLOGY 9
4.1 RECONNAISSANCE SURVEY
4.2 BEE LINE
4.3 ROUTE ALIGNMENT SURVEY
5. SELECTION OF ROUTE 14
6. ROUTE ALTERNATIVES DESCRIPTION 17
6.1 SATELLITE IMAGERY
6.2 SALIENT FEATURES
7. SCHEDULE OF ANGLE POINTS 25

8. MAJOR CROSSINGS DETAILS 43
9. INFRASTRUCTURE DETAILS 44
10. COPMPARATIVE STATEMENT 46
11. CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION 48
12. INFRASTRUCTURE
VOID FACILITIES 50
13. DETAILED SURVEY & THEDOLITE SURVEY 53
14. TOWER QUANTITY ESTIMATES 55
ANNEXURE
A TOWER QUANTITY ESTIMATES ALTERNATE -2
DRAWINGS
ROUTE ALIGNMENT DRAWINGS
PROFILE & TOWER SPOTTING OF IMPORTANTS X-INGS
APPENDIX
A TOWER SCHEDULE OF IMPORTANT CROSSING
NTPC Ltd Page - 1 Designers’ Consortium

CHAPTER - 1
INTRODUCTION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Developing countries like India have to invest hugely on infrastructure
development. In order to meet the, day to day increasing demand of
power consumption, the government had initiated steps to increase the
power generation capacity. As part of this infra-structural development,
NTPC Ltd., (a government of India enterprises) entrusted with the
establishment of Super Thermal Power Project in the state of
Chhattisgarh in District Sundargarh. To fulfil the power requirement of
the make-up water pump house (i) 2 Nos. S/C 132 transmission lines
on towers outside the forest area and/or (ii) 1 Nos. D/C 132 kV
transmission lines on towers inside the forest area from Darlipali STPP
to makeup water pump house near Hirakund reservoir has been
initiated.
In view of the identification of best possible, most suitable and

economically least expensive route for construction of transmission
line, this route selection processes has been initiated. The project i.e.
the selection of best possible route of 132 kV transmission line out of
three alternatives route from Darlipali STPP to MUW P/H near
Hirakund reservoir 132kV has been assigned to M/s Designers’
Consortium by M/s NTPC Limited. This project covers bee line length
of 32.856km from Darlipali STPP to MUW P/H near Hirakund
Reservoir.
As transmission lines traverse across the wide country terrain, for

evacuation of power from switching station to load centres, the
topographical & geographical nature of the terrains play significant
influence in the project cost and implementation time. Hence it is
essential that at the planning stage itself various alternative routes and

technical solutions for transmission lines be examined in detail. For

undertaking such studies, the major requirement is to obtain adequate
information regarding physical constraints, environmental factors, etc.
along the route so that optimum solutions are identified. Subsequently,
during implementation of the project, it is required to obtain details
about terrain, soil conditions, ground water level, etc. along the route
for proper resource planning, costing, etc. as well as reduction in
implementation time. In recent times, remote sensing technology is
being used in this field by means of satellite imageries and GPS
equipments. Using GPS devices, it is possible to navigate any location
on the ground with reasonable accuracy out to sub centimetre level.

CHAPTER - 2
SCOPE OF WORK
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK

Scope of the Route Alignment Survey work has been defined as
follows
 Preliminary study of the route by means of imageries
 Identification of all topographical features along the bee line

within specified buffer width, as per the technical
specification
 Drafting three route alternatives
 Identification of all major crossings of route alternatives

which influence the route alignment
 Optimize of the route though walk over survey
 Selection of best feasible and economically viable route
Selected route has the following limitations

 The distance between terminal point specified shall be kept
shortest possible, consistent with the terrain that is
encountered
 The number of angle points shall be kept to a minimum
 The route should have minimum number of crossings of

Railway Lines, national/state Highways and Major River
crossings (Ground obstacle)

 The route should have minimum number of Power Line

crossings (Aerial obstacle)
 Route corridor should be free from settlements
 Route should be free from smoke emitting factories
 Route should be free from special cost zones
 Route should be as near as possible to the Bee-Line
 The route should avoid forest land, animal/bird sanctuary,

reserve coal belt area, oil pipe line/underground inflammable
pipe lines, etc.
 The route should be away from restricted areas such as civil

and military airfield, it should also avoid aircraft landing
approaches

CHAPTER - 3
GEOGRAPHY OF THE PROJECT AREA
3.0 GEOGRAPHY OF THE PROJECT AREA

3.1 LOCATION
Transmission lines for which the study of the route alternatives
is being done falls in the state of Orissa. It is situated in the east
central part of India and surrounded by following states:
 Jharkhand (North)
 Chhattisgarh (North West)
 West Bengal (East)
 Andhra Pradesh (South)

Toposheets are playing key role in fixing of transmission on line

route alignments and they are being used as the base data.
Toposheets are available with Survey of India at different scale viz:
 1 : 2,50,000
 1:50,0000
 1:25,000
As a standard practice 1: 50,000 scale toposheets are being
used for the purpose of route alignment.
3.2 TERRAIN
Most part of the terrain along the alignment is flat terrain and
being cultivated land except some patch of barren land and
social forestry. Most of the section of the terrain is nearby rieve
and Hirakund reservoir, due to which ground water table is
relatively high. Also, the area is well connected with good
weathered village, district and state highways.
3.3 HYDROLOGY
Hydrological survey has also been done by the survey team
during the course of walk over survey. From the careful study of
water levels of all major rivers, canals, nala and from the
information collected from the nearby village peoples, it has
been found that no river is navigable river and HFL level also
below the river /nala bund level.
3.4 SEISMIC DETAILS

In terms of seismic zones, Indian subcontinent terrain has been
classified into five seismic zones. This classification is based on
the magnitude of severity. The project area falls under Zone-3 of
seismic severity.

3.5 TOPOSHEETS INVOLVED

Even though the proposed route alternatives runs on different
sets of toposheet imageries, the following set of toposheets are
needed when considering the eight km buffer from the
alignments. Table enclosed show the list of topo sheets required
for the route alignment process.
Scale of Toposheets Series

1:50,000 : 64O/13, 64O/14

CHAPTER - 4
METHODOLOGY
4.0 METHODOLOGY
This is the initial phase of the route alignment survey. The route
alignment can be done with either of the below mentioned
technologies:
a) ALTM (Airborne laser Terrain Modeling)

b) Image Processing using high resolution satellite imageries
c) Image Processing using Survey of India Toposheet
imageries
All of above mentioned technologies need the base maps to

commence the reconnaissance survey. ALTM technology is the most
expensive as compared to the other two technologies. So from the
economical point of view, this is not viable. Image processing
technology using satellite imageries also become expensive, as
procuring the satellite images and processing of the same have its own
overheads. Survey of India supplied Toposheets are available either in
paper format or image format at a nominal price and processing of
these maps becomes much easier and least expensive.
4.1 RECONNAISSANCE SURVEY

Reconnaissance survey can also be called recci survey. As any
processes need objects, i.e. work can executed on object/data;
here too we need some sort of information to start the field work.
To start the field work we have been given the coordinates of
terminal points of the transmission line by the client NTPC.

Table enclosed below show the Geographical (Spherical) and

UTM (Zone 44Q) coordinates of both end of the line, i.e.
Switchyard at Darlipali STPP and make up water pump house
near Hirakund reservoir.
S. Location UTM Coordinate Geodetic

No. Name (44Q) Coordinate
Easting Northing Longitude Latitude

1 Switch Yard 798702 2431085 83°53'31.55"E 21°57'31.61"N
Darlipali
STPP
2 MUW P/H 796685 2398284 83°52'0.03"E 21°39'47.32"N
(Hirakund
reservoir)
Soon after getting the terminal point coordinates, bee line drown
on the Survey of India toposheet tiles map. List of toposheets
required for the project had been prepared before procurement
of toposheets is initiated.
Upon purchasing toposheet imageries from the respective

authorities, probably from regional Survey of India office, geo
referencing of the same has been started. Geo referencing is
nothing but a kind of image transformation; i.e. transferring the
based image into spherical / UTM coordinate system.
Upon geo referencing the imageries the same has been merged
with the help of the software which used for geo referencing.
Now the master map of the project areas has been available

with us for further processing. Three route alternatives have

been drawn on the imageries between the terminal points.
4.2 BEE LINE

Bee line is nothing but the shortest possible distance between
both terminal point of the alignment i.e the shortest distance
between Darlipali STPP and MUW P/H near Hirakund reservoir.
The proposed 132kV S/C transmission line in fact connects
Darlipali STPP and Water Pump House near Hirakund reservoir
in Orissa, length of Bee Line which connected both sub stations
has been measured as 32.856 km.
4.3 ROUTE ALIGNMENT SURVEY

Route alignment survey has been initiated on recci survey data.
To identify the angle point on the ground we need navigable
device, we have used hand held GPS device of 3m accuracy or
batter. The route has been defined in the navigable device by
importing all angle point coordinates to that device and now we
are ready to start field work.
Walk over survey has been conducted for all the three route
alternatives. WOS is nothing but conducting details field
investigation survey along the route with help of hand held GPS
receivers, deflection point coordinates extracted from the
tentative alignment has been used the reference.
Upon switching on the GPS receiver the surveyor wait for the
satellite signal. Once the GPS started tracking signal from
satellite the surveyor, who conducting walk over survey, go on
navigating along the route and record all angle point coordinates
and all other prominent objects along and across the route.

During the field work suitable of angle point location(s) have

been checked and same has been relocated to better location, if
it is required. In case of undulated terrain, angle point location
will be fixed such as that it will end up with minimum possible leg
extensions and revetment wall.
All topographical obstacles which influence the alignment will be

recorded and key plan of all topographical features will also be
prepared in the field. Obstacle can further be classified as
ground level obstacle and aerial obstacle and the same can be
listed as below
 EHV power transmission Lines

 High / Low voltage distribution Lines
 Telecommunication Lines
 Optical fibre cables
 Railway Tracks
 National Highways
 State Highways
 Rivers
 Settlements
 Reserved / Protected Forests
Tentative route alternatives have been optimized with the help of

walk over survey data by means of studying locations of all
major crossings. Route alignment methodology has been briefed
in the flow chart below


CHAPTER - 5
SELECTION OF ROUTE
5.0 SELECTION OF ROUTE

Route selection is combinations of reading the details from Toposheets
and superimposing walkover survey data into the Toposheets. Route
selection involves image processing and analysis of the data collected
though walk-over survey. Selected route should be easily
approachable from the point of view of construction and maintenance.
All towers in the selected route should be approachable throughout the
year.
Route has been finalized by keeping the following points in mind:

 The distance between the terminals points specified shall be
kept as shortest as possible, consistent with the terrain that is
encountered.
 Route should be as near as possible to the Bee Line.
 The number of angle points shall be kept to a minimum.
 The route should have minimum number of crossings of Major

Rivers, Railway Lines, National/State Highways, overhead
power line and communication lines.
 Marshy and low lying areas, river beds and earth slip zones
shall be avoided to minimize risk to the foundations.
 It would be preferable to utilize level ground for the alignment.
 Crossing of power lines shall be minimal. Alignment will be kept

at a safe distance from power lines to avoid induction problems
on the lower voltage lines. The actual horizontal/vertical

clearance as per the code requirements have to be maintained

based on the voltage levels of the crossing lines.
 Crossings with communication lines shall be minimized and it

shall be preferable at right angle. Proximity and parallelism with
telecom lines shall be eliminated to avoid danger of inducing
power frequency high voltages on communication lines.
 Areas subjected to flooding such as canal, nallah shall be

avoided.
 Restricted areas such as civil and military airfield shall be

avoided. Care shall be taken to avoid aircraft landing
approaches.
 Certain areas such as quarry sites, tea, tobacco and saffron

fields and rich plantations, gardens & nurseries, which will pose
the problems in acquisition of right-of-way and way-leave
clearance during construction and maintenance, should be
avoided.
 The alignment should be easily accessible both in dry and rainy

seasons to enable maintenance throughout the year.
 Angle points should be selected such that shifting of the point

within 100m radius is possible at the time of construction of the
line.

 The line routed should avoid large habitations, densely

populated areas, Forest, Animal/Bird sanctuary, reserve coal
belt areas, oil pipe line/underground inflammable pipe lines etc.
to the extent possible.

CHAPTER - 6
ROUTE ALTERNATIVES DESCRIPTION
6.0 ROUTE ALTERNATIVES DESCRIPTION

This section discusses the principal part of the route alignment
process. All topographical features / obstacles which influence the
alignment of route have also been discussed in section.
`
6.1 SATELLITE IMAGERY
Satellite Imagery of Makeup Water P/H site near Hirakund Reservoir

Satellite Imagery of Darlipali STPP Switch Yard
On the basis of the availability of the Toposheet of scale 1:50000, three

tentative route alignments shall be marked on the sheet. The route of
the transmission lines shall be such that total length of the line is
minimum and most economical as far as possible. The all major
crossing along with major / minor rivers / canal shall be crossed most
economically / minimum and without increasing the route length of the
line. The marked alignment of the sheet shall be verified on the ground
for its feasibility through walk over survey and best of the three
alignments shall be chosen for the Preliminary Survey. The details of
land along the route alignment are tabulated in the report. Also,
involvement Railway crossing details, Road crossing details, P&T and
Power line crossing details are mentioned in the report respectively.

The preliminary survey shall be carrying out on the recommended best

route using Total Station. To run the alignment/traversing, the Total
Station shall be used while the position of angle points shall be
determined using GPS of sub-meter accuracy for further use. The
alignment map to the scale 1:50000 and indicating main topographical
features within 8km of the alignment, important landmark, approach
road, nature of jungles, any obstruction in the right of way and other
information helpful and/or vital in the construction of the line should be
prepared. The maps prepared as above, shall be submitted in six
copies for approval from competent authority.
While, during the course of preliminary survey following consideration

may be taken:
i) The route should be short and as straight as possible.
ii) The normal ruling span for 132kv S/C Transmission Line may be
considered 305 meters.
iii) It is advantageous to lay the line near to or along the road. The
line should be approachable as far as possible.
iv) The number of angle towers should be minimum and within this,
the number of heavier angle towers shall be as small as
possible.
v) Crossing with permanent objects, such as Railway lines and

roads should be minimum and preferably at right angles
(reference shall be made to the appropriate Railway regulation
and I.E. Rules as well as Civil Authorities for protection to be
provided for Railway and Road crossings respectively.
vi) In the case of hilly terrain having short rises and falls in the
ground profiles, it is necessary to conduct detailed survey and
locate the tower position. The proposition should be most
economical and safe. Water logged, flood area and forest

should be avoided as far as possible. Environmental

considerations also should be taken into account.
vii) Marshy and low-lying areas, riverbeds and earth slip zones shall
be avoided to minimize risk to the foundations.
viii) It would be preferable to utilise level ground for the alignment.
ix) Areas subject to flooding such as nallah / natural drains shall be

avoided.
x) Crossing of power lines shall be minimum, alignment will be kept

at a safer distance from power lines to avoid induction problems
on the lower voltage lines.
xi) Angle point should be selected such that shifting of the point is
possible at the time of construction of the line.
xii) Adequate clearance as per Electricity Rules/Acts shall be

maintained.
xiii) The Transmission line routes shall be so chosen that it cause

least environmental and ecological disturbance in the area.
xiv) Preparation of alignment drawings showing important features of

the area connected with Transmission Line.
xv) Information considered necessary such as un avoidable earth

cutting, details required for getting way leave permission from
concerned authorities, Since after approval of routes, the
following information are to be furnished in details.
xvi) Suitable minimum clearance between the power and

telecommunication lines will have to be maintained and actual
data forth is will be intimated to the contractor by the Purchaser
engineer at the time of survey. Also adequate distance will have

to be maintained from accordance, defence establishments

factories, radio and telecommunication centre, water reservoir
and all other strategic installation.
xvii) The following types of towers shall be used: The stringing shall
be through ACSR wolf.
Type of Deviation Typical use

Tower limit
DA 0 to 2 a) To be used as tangent tower
a) Angle Tower with tension insulating string

b) Tension tower for uplift force resulting from an uplift
0 to 15 span up to 200m under broken wire.
DB degree c) Also to be designed for unbalanced tension resulting
from unequal ruling span of 305m and 150m on each
side
0 d) To be used as section tower
a) Angle tower with tension insulator string

b) Tension tower for uplift forces resulting from an uplift
15 to span Up to 200 meters under broken wire condition
DC 30 degree
c) Also to be designed for unbalanced tension resulting
from unequal ruling span of 305 m and 150 m on each
side of the tower
a) Angle tower with tension insulator string

b) Tension tower for uplift forces resulting from an uplift
30 to span up to 200 meters under broken wire condition
60 degree c) Also to be designed for the unbalanced tension
resulting unequal; ruling span of 305 m and 150 m on
DD each side of the tower
d) Dead end with 0 deg. To 15 deg. Deviation both on
line and substation (slack span)
0 degree e) Complete dead end
f) To be used near switchyard with reduced design and
90 degree span

6.2 Salient Feature Alternate Route – 1 (Line-1 & 2)

Toposheets Involved : 64O/13 & 64O/14
(1:50,000)
Toposheets Involved : NIL
(1:2,50,000)
No. of Angle Points : 25 Nos.
Bee Line Length : 32.856km
Major Crossings :
High Tension Lines : 4 Nos.
Railway Lines : 1 No.
National Highways : 1 No. (NH-200)
State Highways : NIL
River Crossings : NIL
Forest Area : Reserve Forest
Coal Belt : Present
Location of setting up stores : Brajrajnagar
Optimal working season : Middle of September to middle of
June can be considered as
optimal working season
Type of crops : Crops : Rice, Jute, Oil seeds,

Pulses, Coconut, Mesta,
Sugarcane, tea, Gram Mustard,
Maize, Sesame, Ragi, Potato &
Soybean
Details of State and Districts : State : Orissa

District: Sundergarh
Climate : Monsoon : End of June – Mid of

October
Temperature Range: 35-45oC in
Summer and 12-14oC in Winter

Salient Feature Alternate Route – 2 (Line-1 & 2)

Toposheets Involved : 64O/13,64O/14
(1:50,000)
(1:2,50,000)
Major Crossings :
National Highways : 1 No.- (NH-200)
River Crossings : NIL
Coal Belt : NIL

Soybean


October

Salient Feature Alternate Route – 3 (Line- 1 & 2)

Toposheets Involved : 64O/13,64O/14
(1:50,000)
(1:2,50,000)
Major Crossings :
National Highways : 1 No.- (NH-200)
River Crossings : IB River
Coal Belt : NIL

Soybean


October

CHAPTER - 7
SHEDULE OF ANGLE POINT
7.0 ANGLE POINT SCHEDULES

132kV Darlipali STPP to MUW P/H near Hirakund Reservoir (ALT-1 LINE-1)
Section Cumulative
S. Angle Angle of Easting Northing
Length Length Crossing Details
No. Point Deviation (m) (m)
(m) (m)
1 Gantry 00°00'00" 00 0.0 798702 2431085
868
28°24'20.08"L
2 AP-1 868 798116 2430446
T
445
44°55'35.55"R
3 AP-2 1312 797700 2430289
T
746
29°16'19.72"R
4 AP-3 2058 797447 2429587
T
839
10°50'58.07"R
5 AP-4 2897 797609 2428764
T
1215
6 AP-5 8°13'59.80"RT 4112 798064 2427637
870
52°39'21.54"L
7 AP-6 4983 798502 2426885
T
870
8 AP-7 55°48'1"RT 5852 798170 2426081
1409
9 AP-8 29°15'1.83"RT 7262 798945 2424904
1872
10 AP-9 40°25'29"LT 9133 800607 2424043
961
11 AP-10 45°43'4"LT 10095 800970 2423153
2254
AP-11
12 10°29'12"RT 12349 800070 2421086
(D/C)
RF-800m , 400kV (Bisra to Raipur) & 220kV (Budhipadar
240 to Korba) (Crossings through gantry by 4 'D' type tower)
AP-12
13 18°23'5"LT 12589 800022 2420851
(D/C)

220kv (Budhipadar to Raigarh) and NH-200 (Crossing

1238 through gantry by 2 'D' type tower)
14 AP-13 10°14'1"RT 13827 799441 2419758
2232
15 AP-14 13°20'18"LT 16059 798058 2418006

400 kV (Bisra to
165
Raipur)
9°58'54.78"
16 AP-15 16224 797951 2417880
RT
3339
17 AP-16 5°46'50.17" LT 19563 795453 2415665

South-East Central
248
Railway crossing
18 AP-17 5°38'28.63" LT 19811 795281 2415486
1944
19 AP-18 24°45'4"RT 21755 793968 2414051
3098
20 AP-19 11°38'20"LT 24853 793015 2411104
2662
21 AP-20 43°51'19"RT 27514 791703 2408789
2675
22 AP-21 17°26'22"RT 30189 792364 2406197
1897
23 AP-22 16°11'34"LT 32086 793362 2404584
742
24 AP-23 19°33'14"RT 32828 793561 2403869
2815
25 AP-24 7°42'24"LT 35643 795180 2401566
1810
26 AP-25 5°29'12"LT 37454 796013 2399959
1805
MUW
27 00°00'00" 00 39258 796685 2398284
P/H

Section Cumulative
S. Angle Angle of Easting Northing
Length Length Crossing Details
No. Point Deviation (m) (m)
(m) (m)
1 Gantry 00°00'00" 00 0 798656 2431129
862
2 AP-1 27°23'5.71" RT 862 798089 2430480

453
3 AP-2 44°17'12.65" LT 1315 797667 2430314

797
4 AP-3 31°59'55.74" LT 2112 797384 2429569

827
5 AP-4 9°51'17.47" LT 2940 797562 2428761

1227
6 AP-5 8°10'48.92" LT 4166 798027 2427626

856
7 AP-6 52°56'9.90" RT 5022 798461 2426888

866
8 AP-7 55°29'52.35" LT 5888 798130 2426088

1448
9 AP-8 29°44'23.56" LT 7336 798919 2424874

1861
10 AP-9 41°18'32.14" RT 9197 800574 2424022

942
11 AP-10 43°28'57.22" RT 10140 800929 2423149

2253
AP-11
12 10°29'12.80" LT 12393 800028 2421084
(D/C)
RF-800m , 400kV (Bisra to Raipur) & 220kV (Budhipadar
234 to Korba) (Crossings through gantry by 4 'D' type tower)
AP-12
13 18°23'5.64" RT 12627 799983 2420854
(D/C)
220kv (Budhipadar to Raigarh) and NH-200 (Crossing
1218 through gantry by 2 'D' type tower)

14 AP-13 8°15'23.07" RT 13845 799406 2419781

2230
15 AP-14 13°26'57.69" RT 16076 798027 2418028

400 kV (Bisra to
172
Raipur)
16 AP-15 9°58'54.78" RT 16248 797914 2417898
3326
17 AP-16 5°46'50.17" LT 19574 795421 2415697

South-East Central
249
Railway crossing
18 AP-17 5°38'28.63" LT 19823 795253 2415513
1958
19 AP-18 24°38'19.55" LT 21781 793932 2414068

3088
20 AP-19 11°23'17.44" RT 24868 792982 2411130

2693
21 AP-20 43°43'19.98" LT 27561 791664 2408782

2675
22 AP-21 16°59'13.27" LT 30236 792330 2406191

1904
23 AP-22 15°46'9.37" RT 32140 793322 2404566

731
24 AP-23 19°27'6.71" LT 32871 793519 2403862

2825
25 AP-24 7°41'5.15" RT 35697 795143 2401550

1810
26 AP-25 5°28'29.69" RT 37507 795976 2399943

1802
MUW
27
P/H
00°00'00" 00 39309 796649 2398271

Section Cumulative
S. Angle Angle of Easting Northing Crossing
Length Length
No. Point Deviation (m) (m) Details
(m) (m)
1 Gantry 00°00'00" 00 0 798702 2431085
2685
2 AP-1 42°1'25.31" LT 2685 797776 2428565

1242
3 AP-2 17°4'34.21" LT 3927 798239 2427412

286
4 AP-3 4°49'33" RT 4213 798419 2427190

220 kV (Budhipadar to
168
Basudhara)
5 AP-4 2°3'28" LT 4380 798535 2427069
2628
6 AP-5 54°42'36" RT 7009 800284 2425107

160
Basudhara)
7 AP-6 41°4'39" LT 7169 800248 2424951
1612
8 AP-7 10°55'31" LT 8781 801009 2423530

400 kV (Bisra to
161
Raipur)
9 AP-8 10°35'23" RT 8942 801109 2423404
1402
10 AP-9 00°00'00" 00 10344 802177 2422495

400 kV (Bisra to
163
Raipur)
11 AP-10 00°00'00" 00 10507 802300 2422388
1069
12 AP-11 47°38'29" LT 11577 803123 2421705

160
Korba)
13 AP-12 57°32'00" LT 11737 803131 2421545
565
14 AP-13 32°9'40" RT 12301 803621 2421265

679

15 AP-14 12980 803940 2420666

284
Raigarh) & NH-200
16 AP-15 26°0'17" RT 13264 804073 2420414
1632
17 AP-16 4°43'29" RT 14896 804126 2418784

105
B.Nagar)
18 AP-17 33°21'18" RT 15001 804138 2418680
450
19 AP-18 26°42'9" LT 15451 803935 2418277

2558 Paper Mill
20 AP-19 00°00'00" 00 18009 803932 2415720

South East Central Railway
242
Track
21 AP-20 00°00'00" 00 18250 803932 2415478
346
22 AP-21 37°14'19" RT 18596 803922 2415133

1197
23 AP-22 15°56'22" RT 19793 803171 2414201

342
24 AP-23 45°29'14" LT 20136 802885 2414013

473
25 AP-24 40°1'3" RT 20609 802765 2413555

365
26 AP-25 51°57'34" LT 20974 802467 2413344

176 220 kV (Budhipadar to IB)
27 AP-26 2°36'43" RT 21150 802461 2413168

332
28 AP-27 11°8'12" LT 21483 802430 2412837

187 132 kV (Budhipadar to MCL)
29 AP-28 47°43'29" RT 21670 802449 2412651

865
30 AP-29 30°33'00" RT 22534 801871 2412008

548
31 AP-30 42°26'45" LT 23083 801348 2411843

3787
32 AP-31 36°7'45" RT 26870 799452 2408565

33 AP-32 44°46'34" LT 27031 799304 2408500

3388
35 AP-33 16°7'16" LT 30420 798234 2405285

36 AP-34 23°18'2" RT 30583 798229 2405122

290
37 AP-35 25°39'00" LT 30873 798106 2404859

2 nos. of 220 kV [(i) Budhipadar to IB &
454
(ii) Budhipadar to Katapali]
39 AP-36 00°00'00" 00 31327 798113 2404405
1850
40 AP-37 45°37'44" LT 33178 798153 2402555

391
41 AP-38 21°57'31" RT 33568 798438 2402288

449 RF-500m (D/C)
42 AP-39 59°40'57" RT 34017 798627 2401881

525
43 AP-40 28°50'35" RT 34542 798311 2401462

709
44 AP-41 21°37'4" LT 35251 797684 2401131

1432
45 AP-42 40°40'54" LT 36682 796726 2400067

1783
MUW
46 00°00'00" 00 38466 796685 2398284
P/H

Section Cumulative
Length Length
(m) (m)
1 Gantry 00°00'00" 00 0 798740 2431073
2682
2 AP-1 42°1'25.31" LT 2682 797816 2428555

1211
3 AP-2 17°4'34.21" LT 3893 798272 2427433

285
4 AP-3 4°49'33" RT 4178 798459 2427218

160
Basudhara)
5 AP-4 2°3'28" LT 4338 798566 2427099
2665
6 AP-5 54°42'36" RT 7003 800335 2425106

185
Basudhara)
7 AP-6 41°4'39" LT 7188 800298 2424925
1559
8 AP-7 10°55'31" LT 8747 801043 2423555

400 kV (Bisra to
161
Raipur)
9 AP-8 10°35'23" RT 8908 801140 2423427
1406
10 AP-9 00°00'00" 00 10313 802212 2422518

400 kV (Bisra to
162
Raipur)
11 AP-10 00°00'00" 00 10475 802335 2422413
1093
12 AP-11 47°38'29" LT 11568 803169 2421707

162
Korba)
13 AP-12 57°32'00" LT 11730 803176 2421545
550
14 AP-13 32°9'40" RT 12280 803656 2421277

679

15 AP-14 00°00'00" 00 12959 803977 2420678

220 kV ( Budhipadar to
287
Raigarh ) & NH-200
16 AP-15 26°0'17" RT 13246 804111 2420425
1630
17 AP-16 4°43'29" RT 14876 804167 2418796

109
B.Nagar)
18 AP-17 33°21'18" RT 14986 804177 2418687
463
19 AP-18 26°42'9" LT 15449 803973 2418270

2562 PAPER MILL
20 AP-19 00°00'00" 00 18011 803969 2415709

South East Central Railway
232
Track
21 AP-20 00°00'00" 00 18243 803973 2415477
360
22 AP-21 37°14'19" RT 18602 803960 2415117

1210
23 AP-22 15°56'22" RT 19812 803171 2414201

342
24 AP-23 45°29'14" LT 20154 802885 2414013

484
25 AP-24 40°1'3" RT 20639 802791 2413538

26 AP-25 51°57'34" LT 20958 802535 2413348

168
27 AP-26 2°36'43" RT 21126 802528 2413180

338
28 AP-27 11°8'12" LT 21464 802463 2412848

192 132 kV (Budhipadar ti MCL)
29 AP-28 47°43'29" RT 21656 802486 2412657

905
30 AP-29 30°33'00" RT 22562 801895 2411971

545
31 AP-30 42°26'45" LT 23107 801370 2411823

3793
32 AP-31 36°7'45" RT 26901 799475 2408537

33 AP-32 44°46'34" LT 27060 799327 2408477

3360
34 AP-33 16°7'16" LT 30420 798274 2405286

35 AP-34 23°18'2" RT 30586 798265 2405121

293
36 AP-35 25°39'00" LT 30878 798145 2404854
447
2 Nos. of 220 kV [(i) Budhipadar to IB
& (ii) Budhipadar to Katapali]
37 AP-36 00°00'00" 00 31326 798153 2404407
1839
38 AP-37 45°37'44" LT 33165 798191 2402568

373
39 AP-38 21°57'31" RT 33538 798438 2402288

463 RF-500m (D/C)
40 AP-39 59°40'57" RT 34001 798664 2401884

554
41 AP-40 28°50'35" RT 34555 798341 2401434

709
42 AP-41 21°37'4" LT 35264 797713 2401105

1393
43 AP-42 40°40'54" LT 36658 796780 2400070

1786
MUW
44 00°00'00" 00 38443 796725 2398285
P/H

Section Cumulative
Length Length
(m) (m)
1 Gantry 00°00'00" 00 0 798702 2431085
1135
2 AP-1 29°9'51.65" RT 1135 799833 2430982

1781
3 AP-2 17°51'35.63" RT 2915 801290 2429970

1911
4 AP-3 5°50'37.65" RT 4827 802462 2428454

3170
5 AP-4 5°40'31.90" RT 7996 804127 2425757

400 kV (Bisra to
163
Raipur)
6 AP-5 3°27'6.37" RT 8160 804226 2425627
977
7 AP-6 1°16'41.91" RT 9137 804772 2424817

400 kV (Bisra to
286
Raipur)
8 AP-7 11°51'48.84" RT 9423 804937 2424583
IB River (600 m
976
Wide)
9 AP-8 49°39'6.58" RT 10400 805638 2423903
1492
10 AP-9 14°31'15.51" RT 11892 805356 2422438

650
11 AP-10 00°00'00" 00 12541 805397 2421790

220 kV (Budhipur to
164
Basudhara)
12 AP-11 3°23'42.02" RT 12706 805407 2421626
377
13 AP-12 3°30'13.94" RT 13082 805407 2421249

245
Korba)
14 AP-13 2°49'22.38" RT 13327 805419 2421004

192 NH-200
15 AP-14 7°4'7.32" RT 13519 805422 2420812

121
Raigarh)
16 AP-15 0°30'5.60" RT 13640 805423 2420691
1667
17 AP-16 0°57'23.65" RT 15307 805244 2419034

165
B.Nagar)
18 AP-17 0°4'54.12" RT 15472 805228 2418870
1035
19 AP-18 9°10'21" RT 16507 805112 2417842

2350
20 AP-19 14°5'27.83" RT 18857 805594 2415542

South-East Central Railway
186
crossing
21 AP-20 3°48'59.41" LT 19043 805660 2415368
272
22 AP-21 35°13'47.32" RT 19315 805592 2415105

IB River (250m
302
wide)
23 AP-22 33°7'27" RT 19617 805359 2414913
586
24 AP-23 5°9'37" RT 20202 804890 2414562

IB River (300m
486
wide)
25 AP-24 4°10'3.88" RT 20688 804491 2414285
1323
26 AP-25 29°40'38" LT 22011 803171 2414201

342
27 AP-26 45°29'14" LT 22353 802885 2414013

473
28 AP-27 40°1'3" RT 22826 802765 2413555

365
29 AP-28 51°57'34" LT 23192 802467 2413344

30 AP-29 2°36'43" RT 23368 802461 2413168

332
31 AP-30 11°8'12" LT 23700 802430 2412837

32 AP-31 47°43'29" RT 23887 802449 2412651

865
33 AP-32 30°33'00" RT 24752 801871 2412008

548
34 AP-33 42°26'45" LT 25300 801348 2411843

3787
35 AP-34 36°7'45" RT 29087 799452 2408565

36 AP-35 44°46'34" LT 29249 799304 2408500

3388
37 AP-36 16°7'16" LT 32637 798234 2405285

38 AP-37 23°18'2" RT 32800 798229 2405122

290
39 AP-38 25°39'00" LT 33090 798106 2404859

454
40 AP-39 00°00'00" 00 33544 798113 2404405
1850
41 AP-40 45°37'44" LT 35395 798153 2402555

391
42 AP-41 21°57'31" RT 35785 798438 2402288

449 RF-500m (D/C)
43 AP-42 59°40'57" RT 36234 798627 2401881

525
44 AP-43 28°50'35" RT 36759 798311 2401462

709

45 AP-44 21°37'4" LT 37468 797684 2401131

1432
46 AP-45 40°40'54" LT 38900 796726 2400067

1783
MUW
47 00°00'00" 00 40683 796685 2398284
P/H

Section Cumulative
Length Length
(m) (m)
1 Gantry 00°00'00" 00 0 798740 2431073
1105
2 AP-1 29°8'4.69" RT 1105 799844 2431020

1801
3 AP-2 17°52'11.82" RT 2906 801326 2429997

1922
4 AP-3 5°51'20.07" RT 4828 802498 2428473

3162
5 AP-4 4°5'46.88" LT 7990 804158 2425782

400 kV (Bisra to
165
Raipur)
6 AP-5 1°59'25.52" RT 8156 804255 2425648
976
7 AP-6 2°44'44.40" LT 9132 804798 2424836

400 kV (Bisra to
285
Raipur)
8 AP-7 10°37'34.05" LT 9417 804967 2424607
IB River (600 m
984
Wide)
9 AP-8 45°57'57.91" RT 10401 805669 2423917
1512
10 AP-9 14°7'17.39" LT 11913 805394 2422430.

639
11 AP-10 0°23'57.78" LT 12552 805434 2421792

220 kV (Budhipur to
166
Basudhara)
12 AP-11 3°45'18" RT 12718 805446 2421627
374
13 AP-12 3°22'9.96" LT 13092 805448 2421253

247
Korba)
14 AP-13 2°51'29.06" RT 13339 805458 2421007

195 NH-200
15 AP-14 0°2'17" RT 13533 805461 2420812

123
Raigarh)
16 AP-15 7°10'53.57" RT 13656 805463 2420690
1667
17 AP-16 1°39'1.12" LT 15323 805281 2419032

161
B.Nagar)
18 AP-17 1°54'55.08" RT 15484 805268 2418872
1043
19 AP-18 18°17'19.55" LT 16527 805152 2417836

2334
20 AP-19 8°7'2.57" LT 18861 805634 2415552

South-East Central Railway
187
crossing
21 AP-20 35°9'33.64" RT 19048 805699 2415376
308
22 AP-21 32°5'32.98" RT 19356 805618 2415078

306 IB River (250m wide)
23 AP-22 5°41'11.22" RT 19663 805383 2414883

593
24 AP-23 4°47'49.56" RT 20256 804908 2414528

483 IB River (300m wide)
25 AP-24 17°42'21" RT 20739 804510 2414253

1341
26 AP-25 29°40'38" LT 22080 803171 2414201

342
27 AP-26 45°29'14" LT 22422 802885 2414013

484
28 AP-27 40°1'3" RT 22906 802791 2413538

319
29 AP-28 51°57'34" LT 23225 802535 2413348


30 AP-29 2°36'43" RT 23393 802528 2413180

338
31 AP-30 11°8'12" LT 23731 802463 2412848

32 AP-31 47°43'29" RT 23924 802486 2412657
905
33 AP-32 30°33'00" RT 24829 801895 2411971

545
34 AP-33 42°26'45" LT 25375 801370 2411823

3793
35 AP-34 36°7'45" RT 29168 799475 2408537

36 AP-35 44°46'34" LT 29328 799327 2408477

3360
37 AP-36 16°7'16" LT 32688 798274 2405286

38 AP-37 23°18'2" RT 32853 798265 2405121

293
39 AP-38 25°39'00" LT 33146 798145 2404854

447
40 AP-39 00°00'00" 00 33593 798153 2404407
1839
41 AP-40 45°37'44" LT 35432 798191 2402568

373
42 AP-41 21°57'31" RT 35806 798438 2402288

463 RF-500m (D/C)
43 AP-42 59°40'57" RT 36268 798664 2401884

554
44 AP-43 28°50'35" RT 36822 798341 2401434

709
45 AP-44 21°37'4" LT 37531 797713 2401105

1393
46 AP-45 40°40'54" LT 38925 796780 2400070

1786
MUW
47 00°00'00" 00 40711 796725 2398285
P/H

CHAPTER - 8
MAJOR CROSSINGS DETAILS
8.0 MAJOR CROSSING DETAILS

Major crossing across route alternative have been tabulated as below:
Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3

S.No. Features
Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2
1 Route Length (km) 39.295 39.295 38.476 38.476 40.654 40.654

2 No. of Major Roads (NH ) 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 No. of River Crossings - - - - 3 3
4 No. of Power Line Crossing 4 4 11 11 9 9
No. of Railway line

5 1 1 1 1 1 1
Crossing
6 Forest (PF and RF) 800m 800m 500m 500m 500m 500m
50m to 50m to 50m to 50m to 50m to 50m to

7 Vicinity to approach roads
2km 2km 2km 2km 2km 2km

CHAPTER - 9
INFRASTRUCTURE DETAILS
9.0 INFRASTRUCTURE DETAILS

CROPS
Most part of the alignment passing through agricultural land as a result
of this crop compensation may play an important role during the
construction stage.
Crops like Mustard, Maize, Sesame, Potato and Soybean have been
cultivated all around the proposed corridor of alignment.
GROUND WATER TABLES

The ground water level is high due to rivers, canals and well connected
water channels around the route corridor. Entire route is accessible
through well connected road network
MINERALS
A lot of coal belt and some mineral zones found within the vicinity of
the route corridor which play a significant role in transmission route
decision.
CLIMATE
There will be moderated to normal rainfall during the monsoon and
during summer maximum temperature ranges between 35-46° C and the low
temperatures are usually between 12-14° C during winter and may drops
3-4° C.
ACCESSIBILITY
a. Entire route can easily be accessible during dry season
b. Around 80% of the route can be accessible during monsoon
c. 85% of the route can be accessible with truck / tractor for material
shipment

d. 5% of the route can only be accessible by labors for material

shipment
e. 5% of the route may face difficulty while transporting construction
material. 5% - 10% of the route may face ROW issues, there will be
no ROW issue for remain section of the route.

CHAPTER - 10
COMPARATIVE STATEMENT
10.0 COMPARATIVE STATEMENT

All three route alternatives have been checked in the field with the help
of hand held GPS navigation device. All major crossing such as Power
Line, Railway Line, National Highway and State Highway etc. have
been recorded.
Three route alternatives have been drafted with the help of

topographical points, major and minor obstacles which were collected
during walk over survey data. It has been concluded Route Alt-2 can
be selected for further activity, i.e. can be consider for construction.
Abstract of major crossings for all three alternative routes of Darlipali

STPP to MUW P/H of the proposed 132kV transmission line has been
enclosed in this section.
S. ALT 1 ALT 2 ALT 3

Crossing Features
No. (Line 1&2) (Line 1&2) (Line 1&2)
BEE Line Length
1 32.856 32.856 32.856
(km)
2 Route Length (km) 39.295 38.476 40.654
Plain
Hilly
Power Line
3
Crossing
66kV Line Crossing NIL NIL NIL
110kV Line Crossing NIL NIL NIL
132kV Line Crossing NIL 2 2
220kV Line Crossing 2 7 7
400kV D/C , S/C Line
2 2 2
Crossing
765kV S/C Line
NIL NIL NIL
Crossing
Railway Line
4 1 1 1
Crossing

National Highway
5 1 1 1
Crossing
State Highway
6 NIL NIL NIL
Crossing
7 River Crossing NIL NIL 3
8 Forest Crossing
Reserved Forest (km) 0.80 0.50 0.50
Protected Forest (km) NIL NIL NIL
No. of Angle Points

9 25 42 45
(Nos.)

CHAPTER - 11
CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION
11.0 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION

After detailed investigation of all three route alternatives based on the
field data, the following conclusions have been arrived.
 Route - 2 involves least route length when compared to Route –

1 and Route – 3. It states that construction and maintenance
cost well be lesser for Route – 2 then Route – 1 and Route – 3
 Route-2 is having 42 numbers of angle points where as Route –

1 is having 25 angle points while Route-3 is having 45 numbers.
 Route-1 and Route-2 are not crossing any river but Route-3 is
crossing river 3 times.
 Route – 2 involve lesser O & M cost as compared to Route – 1

and Route – 3.
 Route – 2 involves lesser forest as compared to Route – 1 and

Route – 3.
 Coal belt area exists near Route-1 which is not suitable for
construction site.
 From the above conclusion it has been understood that Route –

2 is the most economical from construction and maintenance
point of view. As for as the accessibility and general strata are
concerned, Route – 2 appears to be the best amount the three
alternatives, because Route – 2 is well connected with Metal
Road. As such, the route is most feasible not only from
construction point of view but for trouble and hassle free
operation & maintenance of the proposed transmission line.

Keeping the above factors in mind, we propose Route – 2 as the

final route and recommended Route – 2 for carrying out detailed
surveying activity. Approval of Route – 2 enable us to start the
detailed surveying activity.

CHAPTER - 12
INFRASTRUCTURE DETAILS
VOID
CHAPTER - 13
DETAILED SURVEY
13.0 DETAILED & THEODOLITE SURVEY
Ones the route is fixed/approved by the competent authority, the
preliminary route alignment on the selected route alignment of
Altenate-2 has been done using total station all along route. To achieve
relatively good approximation of the tower quantities, detailed survey of
the important crossings like river, railway lines, power line and national
highways has been done by picking up levels at every 20m interval or
less, depending upon the terrain. The data shall be collected in such a
fashion that it is being capable to be used by suitable software on Auto
CAD platform for the tower optimization. During the course of detailed
survey following points also shall kept in consideration:
i) Requirement of special tower, if any, for river/power line
crossing or actual site conditions demand.
ii) From the centreline of the route alignment 18 meter strip on both
side of centre line to be shown in protected/reserved forest area
where tree cutting is involved, classification of trees, its full
dimension are to furnished.
iii) Details of existing HV/LV Power Line and river crossings shall
be taken.
iv) Geographical details such as river flooding areas, water
reservoir or other settlement, agricultural lands, forest etc.

PROFILING & TOWER SPOTTING
Ground profile and tower spotting has been done using AutoCAD. The
route plan and level profile shall be plotted and prepared to the scale of
1:2000 horizontal and 1:200 vertical as per established procedure. If
the difference in levels were too high, the chart may be broken up
according to requirement. The chart shall progress from left to right.
The estimation of different type of tower foundations and towers, their
quantities, extensions if required, suitable ground clearance, observing
requisite safety clearance from buildings & power lines etc. along with
requirement of special tower, if any, for river/power line crossing or
actual site conditions demand shall be considered.
Tower schedule of proposed transmission line is enclosed as per
Appendix ‘A’. Based on this tower schedule, a bill of quantity were
prepared covering various types of towers and their body extensions
and are shown in Appendix ‘A’

CHAPTER - 14
TOWER QUANTITIES ESTIMATE
14.0 TOWER QUANTITES ESTIMATE
Base on angle point schedule and various crossing details en-route the
transmission line, an estimate of different types of tower quantities is prepared
and shown in Annexure ‘A’.
The Annexure also shows the Geodetic (Spherical) as well as Project (Grid)
coordinates of angle points for all three route alternatives. Whole project area
falls in UTM 45N Zone.

ANNEXURE
TOWER QUANTITIES ESTIMATE
ANNEXURE-A1
PRELIMINARY SURVEY OF 132 KV T/L FOR MAKE UP WATER P/H FOR DARIPALI STPP
ESTIMATED TOWER QUANTITY OF ALTERNATIVE ROUTE - 2 (Line - 1)

Section Geodetic Coordinates UTM Coordinate Tower quantity
S. Angle Angle of Cumulative (44Q) Major Crossing Avarage
Length
No. Point Deviation Chainage (m) Easting Northing Details A B C D Section Span (m)
(m) Longitude Latitude
(m) (m) Type Type Type Type Tower
1 S/Y 00°00'00" 00 0 83°53'31.55"E 21°57'31.61"N 798703 2431085 1
2685 9 268
2 AP-1 42°1'25.31" LT 2685 83°52'57.66"E 21°56'10.31"N 797777 2428565 1
1242 4 248
3 AP-2 17°4'34.21" LT 3927 83°53'12.99"E 21°55'32.59"N 798239 2427412 1
286 286
4 AP-3 4°49'33" RT 4213 83°53'19.11"E 21°55'25.25"N 798419 2427190 1

2 Nos. of
168 220 kV ( Budhipadar to Basudhara ) 168
Ganty
5 AP-4 2°3'28" LT 4380 83°53'23.07"E 21°55'21.25"N 798535 2427069 1
2628 8 292
6 AP-5 54°42'36" RT 7009 83°54'22.43"E 21°54'15.51"N 800284 2425107 1

2 Nos. of
Ganty
7 AP-6 41°4'39" LT 7169 83°54'21.68"E 21°54'12.60"N 800248 2424951 1
1612 5 269
8 AP-7 10°55'31" LT 8781 83°54'47.57"E 21°53'23.76"N 801009 2423530 1

2 Nos. of
161 400 kV (Bisra to Raipur) 161
Ganty
Sheet 1 of 6
ANNEXURE-A1

Length
9 AP-8 10°35'23" RT 8942 83°54'50.47"E 21°53'20.41"N 801109 2423404 1
1402 4 280
10 AP-9 00°00'00" 00 10344 83°55'26.82"E 21°52'50.46"N 802177 2422496 1

2 Nos. of
Gantry
11 AP-10 00°00'00" 00 10507 83°55'31.05"E 21°52'46.90"N 802301 2422389 1
1069 3 267
12 AP-11 47°38'29" LT 11577 83°55'59.27"E 21°52'23.18"N 803123 2421705 1

2 Nos. of
160 220 kV ( Budhipadar to Korba ) 160
Gantry
13 AP-12 57°32'00" LT 11737 83°55'59.34"E 21°52'20.26"N 803131 2421545 1
565 1 282
14 AP-13 32°9'40" RT 12301 83°56'16.26"E 21°52'9.59"N 803621 2421265 1
679 2 226
15 AP-14 00°00'00" 00 12980 83°56'26.97"E 21°51'49.94"N 803940 2420666 1

2 Nos. of
284 220 kV ( Budhipadar to Raigarh ) & NH-200 1 142
Gantry
16 AP-15 26°0'17" RT 13264 83°56'31.42"E 21°51'41.69"N 804073 2420415 1
1632 5 272
Sheet 2 of 6
ANNEXURE-A1

Length
17 AP-16 4°43'29" RT 14896 83°56'32.18"E 21°50'48.69"N 804126 2418784 1

2 Nos. of
105 132 kV (Budhipadar to B.Nagar) 105
Gantry
18 AP-17 33°21'18" RT 15001 83°56'32.52"E 21°50'45.30"N 804138 2418680 1
450 1 225
19 AP-18 26°42'9" LT 15451 83°56'25.20"E 21°50'32.37"N 803935 2418278 1
2558 PAPER MILL 8 284
20 AP-19 00°00'00" 00 18009 83°56'23.39"E 21°49'9.28"N 803932 2415720 1
242 SOUTH-EAST CENTRAL RAILWAY TRACK 242
21 AP-20 00°00'00" 00 18250 83°56'23.25"E 21°49'1.43"N 803933 2415478 1
346 346
22 AP-21 37°14'19" RT 18596 83°56'22.68"E 21°48'50.22"N 803923 2415133 1
1197 3 299
23 AP-22 15°56'22" RT 19793 83°55'55.91"E 21°48'20.41"N 803171 2414201 1
342 342
24 AP-23 45°29'14" LT 20136 83°55'45.84"E 21°48'14.48"N 802885 2414013 1
473 1 237
Sheet 3 of 6
ANNEXURE-A1

Length
25 AP-24 40°1'3" RT 20609 83°55'41.36"E 21°47'59.68"N 802765 2413555 1
365 365
26 AP-25 51°57'34" LT 20974 83°55'30.86"E 21°47'53.01"N 802467 2413344 1

2 Nos. of
176 220 kV (Budhipadar to IB) 176
Gantry
27 AP-26 2°36'43" RT 21150 83°55'30.53"E 21°47'47.30"N 802461 2413168 1
332 332
28 AP-27 11°8'12" LT 21483 83°55'29.15"E 21°47'35.85"N 802430 2412837 1

2 Nos. of
187 132 kV (Budhipadar ti MCL) 187
Gantry
29 AP-28 47°43'29" RT 21670 83°55'29.57"E 21°47'30.90"N 802449 2412651 1
865 865
30 AP-29 30°33'00" RT 22534 83°55'9.25"E 21°47'9.98"N 801871 2412008 1
548 1 274
31 AP-30 42°26'45" LT 23083 83°54'50.95"E 21°47'4.94"N 801348 2411843 1
3787 3787
32 AP-31 36°7'45" RT 26870 83°53'42.27"E 21°45'19.34"N 799452 2408565 1
Sheet 4 of 6
ANNEXURE-A1

Length
33 AP-32 44°46'34" LT 27031 83°53'37.68"E 21°45'17.60"N 799304 2408500 1
3388 11 282
35 AP-33 16°7'16" LT 30420 83°52'58.39"E 21°43'33.81"N 798234 2405285 1

2 Nos. of
Gantry
36 AP-34 23°18'2" RT 30583 83°52'58.16"E 21°43'29.10"N 798229 2405122 1
290 290
37 AP-35 25°39'00" LT 30873 83°52'53.66"E 21°43'20.05"N 798106 2404859 1

2 nos. of 220 kV [(i) Budhipadar to IB & (ii) Budhipadar to 3 Nos. of
454 1 227
Katapali] Gantry
39 AP-36 00°00'00" 00 31327 83°52'53.61"E 21°43'5.30"N 798113 2404405 1
1850 6 264
40 AP-37 45°37'44" LT 33178 83°52'53.80"E 21°42'5.18"N 798153 2402555 1
391 391
41 AP-38 21°57'31" RT 33568 83°53'3.54"E 21°41'56.33"N 798438 2402288 1
449 RF-500m (D/C) 449
42 AP-39 59°40'57" RT 34017 83°53'9.84"E 21°41'43.00"N 798627 2401881 1
525 1 262
Sheet 5 of 6
ANNEXURE-A1

Length
43 AP-40 28°50'35" RT 34542 83°52'58.59"E 21°41'29.58"N 798311 2401462 1
709 2 236
44 AP-41 21°37'4" LT 35251 83°52'36.58"E 21°41'19.20"N 797684 2401131 1
1432 4 286
45 AP-42 40°40'54" LT 36682 83°52'2.60"E 21°40'45.22"N 796726 2400067 1
1783 5 297
MUW
46 00°00'00" 00 38466 83°52'0.03"E 21°39'47.32"N 796685 2398284 1
P/H
Tower
Type of Tower Total
Quantity
A Type 85
B Type 3
130
C Type 8
D Type 34
Sheet 6 of 6
ANNEXURE-A2
Section Geodatic Coordinates UTM Coordinate (44Q) Tower quantity

Angle Angle of Cumulative Major Crossing Avarage
S.No. Length
Point Deviation Chainage (m) Northing Details A B C D Section Span (m)
(m) Longitude Latitude Easting (m)
(m) Type Type Type Type Tower
1 S/Y 00°00'00" 00 0 83°53'32.86"E 21°57'31.21"N 798741 2431074 1
2682 9 268
2 AP-1 42°1'25.31" LT 2682 83°52'59.04"E 21°56'9.99"N 797817 2428556 1
1211 4 242
3 AP-2 17°4'34.21" LT 3893 83°53'14.16"E 21°55'33.27"N 798272 2427434 1
285 285
4 AP-3 4°49'33" RT 4178 83°53'20.54"E 21°55'26.17"N 798460 2427219 1

2 Nos. of
Ganty
5 AP-4 2°3'28" LT 4338 83°53'24.18"E 21°55'22.22"N 798567 2427099 1
2665 8 296
6 AP-5 54°42'36" RT 7003 83°54'24.06"E 21°54'15.03"N 800335 2425106 1

2 Nos. of
Ganty
7 AP-6 41°4'39" LT 7188 83°54'23.26"E 21°54'11.99"N 800298 2424925 1
1559 5 260
8 AP-7 10°55'31" LT 8747 83°54'48.66"E 21°53'24.49"N 801043 2423555 1

2 Nos. of
Ganty
Sheet 1 of 6
ANNEXURE-A2

S.No. Length
9 AP-8 10°35'23" RT 8908 83°54'51.38"E 21°53'21.38"N 801140 2423427 1
1406 4 281
10 AP-9 00°00'00" 00 10313 83°55'28.07"E 21°52'51.17"N 802213 2422518 1

2 Nos. of
Gantry
11 AP-10 00°00'00" 00 10475 83°55'32.27"E 21°52'47.68"N 802335 2422413 1
1093 3 273
12 AP-11 47°38'29" LT 11568 83°56'0.10"E 21°52'23.20"N 803169 2421707 1

2 Nos. of
162 220 kV ( Budhipadar to Korba ) 162
Gantry
13 AP-12 57°32'00" LT 11730 83°56'0.11"E 21°52'20.40"N 803176 2421545 1
550 1 275
14 AP-13 32°9'40" RT 12280 83°56'17.51"E 21°52'9.98"N 803657 2421278 1
679 2 226
15 AP-14 00°00'00" 00 12959 83°56'28.26"E 21°51'50.33"N 803977 2420679 1

2 Nos. of
287 220 kV ( Budhipadar to Raigarh ) & NH-200 1 143
Gantry
16 AP-15 26°0'17" RT 13246 83°56'32.75"E 21°51'42.00"N 804111 2420425 1
1630 5 272
Sheet 2 of 6
ANNEXURE-A2

S.No. Length
17 AP-16 4°43'29" RT 14876 83°56'33.61"E 21°50'49.05"N 804167 2418796 1

2 Nos. of
109 132 kV (Budhipadar to B.Nagar) 109
Gantry
18 AP-17 33°21'18" RT 14986 83°56'33.89"E 21°50'45.50"N 804177 2418687 1
463 1 232
19 AP-18 26°42'9" LT 15449 83°56'26.53"E 21°50'32.11"N 803973 2418271 1
2562 PAPER MILL 8 285
20 AP-19 00°00'00" 00 18011 83°56'24.69"E 21°49'8.90"N 803970 2415709 1
232 SOUTH-EAST CENTRAL RAILWAY TRACK 232
21 AP-20 00°00'00" 00 18243 83°56'24.68"E 21°49'1.37"N 803974 2415477 1
360 360
22 AP-21 37°14'19" RT 18602 83°56'23.99"E 21°48'49.70"N 803961 2415118 1
1210 3 303
23 AP-22 15°56'22" RT 19812 83°55'55.91"E 21°48'20.41"N 803171 2414201 1
342 342
24 AP-23 45°29'14" LT 20154 83°55'45.84"E 21°48'14.48"N 802885 2414013 1
484 1 242
Sheet 3 of 6
ANNEXURE-A2

S.No. Length
25 AP-24 40°1'3" RT 20639 83°55'42.25"E 21°47'59.11"N 802791 2413538 1
26 AP-25 51°57'34" LT 20958 83°55'33.23"E 21°47'53.10"N 802535 2413348 1

2 Nos. of
168 168
Gantry
27 AP-26 2°36'43" RT 21126 83°55'32.87"E 21°47'47.64"N 802528 2413180 1
338 338
28 AP-27 11°8'12" LT 21464 83°55'30.23"E 21°47'35.93"N 802463 2412848 1

2 Nos. of
Gantry
29 AP-28 47°43'29" RT 21656 83°55'30.62"E 21°47'31.05"N 802486 2412657 1
905 905
30 AP-29 30°33'00" RT 22562 83°55'10.06"E 21°47'8.76"N 801895 2411971 1
545 1 273
31 AP-30 42°26'45" LT 23107 83°54'51.70"E 21°47'4.28"N 801370 2411823 1
3793 3793
32 AP-31 36°7'45" RT 26901 83°53'43.44"E 21°45'18.63"N 799475 2408537 1
Sheet 4 of 6
ANNEXURE-A2

S.No. Length
33 AP-32 44°46'34" LT 27060 83°53'38.61"E 21°45'16.87"N 799327 2408477 1
3360 11 280
34 AP-33 16°7'16" LT 30420 83°52'59.74"E 21°43'33.59"N 798274 2405286 1

2 Nos. of
Gantry
35 AP-34 23°18'2" RT 30586 83°52'59.54"E 21°43'28.89"N 798265 2405121 1
293 293
36 AP-35 25°39'00" LT 30878 83°52'55.02"E 21°43'19.87"N 798145 2404854 1

2 nos. of 220 kV [(i) Budhipadar to IB & (ii) Budhipadar to 3 Nos. of
447 1 224
Katapali] Gantry
37 AP-36 00°00'00" 00 31326 83°52'55.00"E 21°43'5.34"N 798153 2404407 1
1839 6 263
38 AP-37 45°37'44" LT 33165 83°52'55.13"E 21°42'5.58"N 798191 2402568 1
373 373
39 AP-38 21°57'31" RT 33538 83°53'3.54"E 21°41'56.33"N 798438 2402288 1
463 RF-500m (D/C) 463
40 AP-39 59°40'57" RT 34001 83°53'11.13"E 21°41'43.07"N 798664 2401884 1
554 1 277
Sheet 5 of 6
ANNEXURE-A2

S.No. Length
41 AP-40 28°50'35" RT 34555 83°52'59.61"E 21°41'28.65"N 798341 2401434 1
709 2 236
42 AP-41 21°37'4" LT 35264 83°52'37.57"E 21°41'18.34"N 797713 2401105 1
1393 4 279
43 AP-42 40°40'54" LT 36658 83°52'4.48"E 21°40'45.28"N 796780 2400070 1
1786 5 298
MUW
44 00°00'00" 00 38443 83°52'1.42"E 21°39'47.33"N 796725 2398285 1
P/H
Tower
Type of Tower Total
Quantity
A Type 85
B Type 3
130
C Type 8
D Type 34
Sheet 6 of 6
DRAWINGS
ALTERNATE ROUTE ALIGNMENT
SWITCH
YARD
64O/13
AP-1
AP-1
AP-2
AP-2
AP-3
AP-4
AP-1
AP-3
AP-5 AP-2 RF
RO
RF AP-3
AP-4
UT
AP-6
E-
3
AP-7
2 - RF
E AP-4
T U AP-5
R O
AP-5
AP-8 AP-6 AP-6
TL AP-7
KV TL
V
400 0K
40
AP-9 AP-8
AP-7
AP-8 22
R
0K
IVE
AP-10 V
TL
.R
E-1
I.B
AP-9
AP-10
UT
AP-9
RO
220KV
TL AP-10
AP-11
AP-12 AP-11
AP-11 (D/C) AP-13 AP-12
AP-13
AP-12 (D/C) AP-14 POWER
AP-14 SUB -STATION
NH-200 AP-15
RF AP-15
PIPE LINE
AP-13 L
KVT
220
AP-16 132KV TL
AP-16 AP-17
AP-17
AP-18
AP-14
AP-15 POWER AP-18
SUB-STATION
PAPER
MILL
AP-17 AP-16 AP-19
AP-20 AP-19
AP-20
AP-21
AP-21
AP-22
SOUTH-EAS AP-23
T CENTRAL AP-24
AP-18 RAILWAY AP-22(25)
AP-23(26)
T L
AP-24(27) 132KV
AP-25(28)
AP-26(29)
RF
AP-27(30)
AP-28(31)
AP-29(32)
AP-30(33)
TL
AP-19
V
.856 KM)
0K
22
BEE LINE (32
COAL BELT
AP-20
AP-32(35) AP-31(34)
TOPOSHEET
64O/13 64O/14
TL LEGENDS :-
KV
0
22 V TL ALTERNATIVE ROUTE-1
AP-21
0K ALTERNATIVE ROUTE-2
64O/14 22
ALTERNATIVE ROUTE -3
AP-33(36) PIPELINE
AP-34(37)
AP-35(38) BEE LINE
AP-22
ANGLE POINT
AP-36(39)
AP-23
POWER LINE
LAKE / RIVER
RESERVED FOREST
NH-200
AP-37(40) RAILWAY TRACK
AP-38(41)
AP-39(42)
POWER
AP-24 SUB-STATION
AP-40(43)
AP-41(44)
Project
AP-42(45)
AP-25
Section
Dwg. Tittle
FOR THE DESIGNERS' CONSORTIUM

FOR NTPC
Surveyed by Checked by
Checked by Recommended by
PUMP Submitted by
HOUSE Approved by
Scale 1 : 50000 Drawing No.

ANNEXURE-III
ADDITIONAL INFORMTION TO BIDDER
SL. TITLE NO.OF

No. PAGES
1. External Approach Roads 7
DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I Bid Doc. No.: TECHNICAL PART-IV Page

(2X800MW) CS-9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI ANNEXURE-III
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE TO
G2- 1 of 1
EXTERNAL APPROACH ROAD
Route 1: Four (4) Lane Road - Off take from NH 200 to plant Area. May take 2 - 3 years
for completion. Involves Land Acquisition. To be executed by RWD -
Jharsuguda.
Route 2: Jharsuguda - Gandhi Chowk - Plant Area - This road can be used for
movement of trucks. This road is preferable to those approaching from
Sambalpur and Raigarh. This is also the shortest route from Jharsuguda
Railway Station. The plant is at a distance of 27.00 km from Jharsuguda
Railway Station via Gandhi Chowk. Travelling northward from railway station
and for 1.50 km, a sharp left turn from Beheramal Chowk, Gandhi Chowk is at
a distance of 11.0 km. Right Turn at Gandhi Chowk and travel through Rajpur
and Koilagarh to reach Tileimal. From Tileimal (ash dyke), travel through
kaccha road for almost 3.0 km to reach plant area.
Route 3: Sundargarh - Ujjalpur - Sargipali - Podhamundi Chowk - Plant Area - This

road is also basically for transportation of materials and movement of trucks.
This road shall be preferable for those approaching from Rourkela. Bypass
Road is available near Toll Gate to Sundargarh Ujjalpur Road. Bypass Road is
at a distance of 26.50 km from Jharsuguda Railway Station. Travelling further
it reaches Ujjalpur at 17.30 km from Bypass Start. Left turn at Ujjalpur and
travel via Sargipali, Zinc Nagar, Podhamundi Chowk and Kheradega to reach
Plant Area.
Route 4: Sundargarh - Ujjalpur - Surguda - Kalobahal Chowk - Podhamundi Chowk

- Plant Area - This road will be suitable for movement of all types of trucks
and trailers. Till Ujjalpur, route is same as in Route 3. Instead of left turn at
Ujjalpur as in Route 3, travel straight for 8.5 km to reach Surguda. Left turn at
Surguda and travel for 9.5 km to reach Kalobahal Chowk via Deuli. Left turn at
Kalobahal Chowk and travel via Anlabahal and Boromunda to reach
Podhamundi Chowk (Confluence to Ujjalpur Darlipali Road). Right turn and
travel for 3.0 km via Kheradega to reach Plant Area.
Route 5: Bhasma Road - Bhasma Bridge under construction. May take 1 year or more
for completion.
1
ROUTE - 2
APPROACH ROUTE TO PLANT FROM GANDHI CHOWK
Chainage
Location
(km)
0.00 Jharsuguda Railway Station
1.50 Beheramal Chowk
12.90 Gandhi Chowk
16.90 Rajpur
20.80 Koilagarh
24.10 Tileimal; Kaccha Road Starts
26.90 Borobhagar; Entrance to Ash Pipe Corridor
1. Single Lane Road from Gandhi Chowk to Plant Area.

2. Gandhi Chowk is a busy market place and manoeuvring long trailers along this
road is difficult.
3. The road is narrow in some places in Rajpur and is not suitable for passage of
trailer.
4. Strength of Bridge over Basundhara near Rajpur has to be ascertained and Hume
Pipe Bridge in same area has to be strengthened.
5. Causeway near Koilagarh is liable to get submerged during rains and will be a
blockade for vehicular movement.
6. Hume Pipe Bridge near Koilagarh has to be strengthened and height would have
to be increased to prevent overflow during rainy season.
7. Also there is a sharp bend at an inclined upward slope just after the bridge which
is not suitable for trailer turning.
8. Barely 20 m from this sharp turn there is another sharp turn towards Koilagarh
Village which is impossible as per preliminary assessment.
9. Following these “S” type curves, the vehicles will have to pass through inhabited
areas.
10. 11 Kv lines are passing above the roads just preceding Tileimal Village and to
facilitate safe movement of vehicles, these 11 KV lines clearance need to be
increased.
11. Service Lines are crossing at very low height in the villages en route to Darlipali
which will cause hindrance in transportation.
2
ROUTE - 3
APPROACH ROUTE TO PLANT FROM UJJALPUR SARGIPALLI
Chainage
Location
(km)
26.60 Bypass Road Start near Sundargarh Toll Gate
32.30 Bypass Exit to Ujjalpur Road
43.30 Ujjalpur
56.20 Township Entrance Point
1. Ujjalpur turning is very sharp. Long trailers cannot turn at this point. As such this
route is not feasible on preliminary assessment.
2. Single Lane Road from Ujjalpur to Plant Area.
3. 11 kv Electric Lines (6 / 7 locations) at Sargipali and Zinc Nagar are at low
heights which would hamper the movement of vehicles.
4. Service lines (LT lines) crossing the road are at low heights in Sargipali and other
villages en-route.
3
ROUTE - 4
APPROACH ROUTE TO PLANT THROUGH JUNGLE
Chainage
Location Remarks
(km)
26.60 Bypass Road Start near Sundargarh Toll Gate No Upgradation
32.30 Bypass Exit to Ujjalpur Road Required
43.90 Ujjalpur
52.40 Surguda; Turning to Kalobahal Chowk
61.90 Kalobahal Chowk; Left Turn to Anlabahal
5 Km Narrow Damaged Black
65.50 Right Turn at Anlabahal towards Boromunda
Top Single Lane Road
66.90 Bituminous Road Ends;
Boromunda; Left turn to road towards
67.90
Bijadih
5.5 Km Kaccha Single Lane
69.00 Right turn for Ujjalpur Darlipali Road
Road
Podhamundi Chowk; Confluence to Ujjalpur
72.40
Darlipali Road; Kaccha road ends
75.80 Township Entrance Point Single Lane Road
1. Road till Kalobahal Chowk is good and does not need any repair
2. Single Lane Road from Kalobahal Chowk to Podhamundi Chowk (10.50 km) the
road needs to be strengthened and black topping is to be done to facilitate
movement of heavy vehicles.
3. In the same stretch there are also a number of culverts and bridges which need
to be strengthened to facilitate movement.
4. This road is best of all options as this does not involve any villages en route and
as such over head electric lines are minimal.
4
ROUTE - 5
APPROACH ROUTE TO PLANT THROUGH BHASMA BRIDGE
Chainage
(km) Location

12.10 Right turn to Bhasma Bridge; Kaccha Road
12.60 Bhasma Bridge Starts
13.20 Bridge End
14.40 Abankela
15.20 Remeda
16.10 Kaccha Road ends
19.10 Road to Remeda; Turn to Sargipali
20.00 Gultha
23.60 Mudaga Village
26.70 Zinc Nagar Bypass Starting Turn; Kaccha Road
28.20 Jargan
29.20 Confluence to Ujjalpur Darlipali Road
35.40 Proposed Township Entrance
1. Single Lane Road from Bhasma to Township Entrance.

2. Approach Road to and off Bhasma Bridge is not available.
3. Bridge Construction incomplete. 4 Spans left.
4. Present temporary road is not suitable for heavy traffic.
5. Kaccha Road from Bhasma turning for 4.00 km.
6. Low Height LT Lines at some points.
7. Service lines in some areas.
8. Kaccha Road from Zinc Nagar Bypass to Jargan. Needs to be strengthened.
9. Culverts and Hume Pipe Culverts and Bridges along the route to be strengthened
to sustain heavy moving loads.
5
ACCESS ROADS SUMMARY
a) Long term- 04 lane Route No 1 ( Refer Enclosed drawing)
approach road Survey completed by RWD Jharsuguda. DPR to be submitted by the
from NH-200 to agency. Involves land acquisition. May take 2-3 years.
site from
sambalpur/
Jharsuguda side-
15 km
b) From sambalpur/ Route No 2 ( Refer Enclosed drawing)
Jharsuguda side-
RWD Single lane road. Requires strengthening (including
- Gandhi Chowk to culverts) for intermediate type of road. Not suitable for long
ash dyke-10 km trailer. Strengthening estimate requested from RWD, Sundargarh.
To be taken up on Deposit Work Basis.
Diversion to be covered under ash dyke package. Till the time of

- Ash dyke to plant-
this diversion, this road needs strengthening under Site
3 KM Package as the road falls under NTPC land.
c) From Rourkela/ Route No 3 ( Refer Enclosed drawing)

Sundargarh side-
- Ujjalpur to
Podhamundi PWD(R&B) Single lane road. Requires strengthening for
intermediate type of road. Not suitable for long trailer
Chowk to
Strengthening estimate requested from PWD. To be taken up on
township -
deposit work basis.
10+3=13 km Covered under Site Leveling And Infra Works Package (1.4 km).
- Township(
existing road) to
plant -1.4 KM
d) From Rourkela/ Route No 4 ( Refer Enclosed drawing)
Sundargarh side-
- Ujjalpur to
Podhamundi
Chowk to plant
via Kalobahal :
17 km two lane 17 km two lane stretch is in good shape.
road
+10.50 km single 10.50 km RWD Single lane road. Requires strengthening for
lane kaccha road intermediate type of road. Suitable for long trailer.
Strengthening estimate requested from RWD. To be taken up on
deposit work basis.
+ From
Covered under c) above
Podhamundi
Chowk to
township to plant
e) From Rourkela/ Route No 5 ( Refer Enclosed drawing)
Sundargarh side-
-Bhasma road-25 Bridge on IB river is under construction. Therefore not being
km pursued at this stage.
6
7
PART- IV
CHAPTER – G3
LIST OF STANDARDS
CHAPTER – G3
LIST OF STANDARDS
1. Circuit Breaker IEC:62271-100,

IS:13118, IEC:427
2. Isolator IEC:62271-102
3. Current Transformer IEC:60044 or
IS:2705, BS:3938
4. Capacitor Voltage Transformer IEC:186, IEC:186A&186B
IEC:358, IS:3156
5. Surge Arrestor IEC:99-4 and IS:3070
6. Common clauses for switchgear IEC:694
7. Post Insulator IEC:168 or IS:2544
8. Gas Cylinders IS:4379, IS:7285
9. SF6 gas IEC:376A & 376B
10. Piping material for fire protection IS:3589, IS:1239
11. Degree of Protection IS:3589, IS:1239
12. Specification for zinc IS:209
13. Methods of Chemical Analysis IS:406
14. Procelain insulators for Overhead power lines IS:731, BS:137(Part-I&II)
with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 volts IEC:274, IEC:385
15 Methods of high voltage testing IS:2071
16. Specification for conductor and earthwire IS:2121 (Part-I)
accessories for overhead power line armour
rods, binding wires, and tapes for conductor
17. Specification for Insulators fittings for IS:2486
Overhead Power lines with a nominal voltage
greater than 1000V
- General Requirements and IS:2486 PartI,
BS:3288
- Dimensional Requirement IS:2486 PartII, IEC-120
- Locking Devices IS:2486 PartIII, IEC-372
18 Recommended practice for hot dip IS:2629
galvanisation of iron and steel
19 Testing of uniformity of zinc coated articles IS:2633
20 Hexagonal Bolts and Nuts IS:3138, ISO:R947 &
ISO:R272
21 Characteristics of string insulator units IS:3188, IEC:304
22. ISO Metric Screw Threads IS:4218, ISO:R68,
SR-26, R-262,
R-965
23. Determination of weight of coating on zinc IS:6745
coated iron & steel articles
24. Methods of RIV test on HV insulators IEC:437
25. Methods for Switching Impulse test on HV IEC:506
insulators.
26. Thermal Mechanical Performance test on IEC:575
string insulators units.
27. Radio Interference Voltage of high voltage IS:8263/NEMA publication
Appratus Method of measurements No.107/1964,CISPR
28. Electrical relays for power system protections IS:3231, IEC-60255 Pt I to III,
BS:142
29. Indicating Intruments BS-89, IS:1248,
IEC:5, IS:2419
30. Recorders BS-90, IS:6236,
IEC258
31 Energy meters BS-5585,IS:722,IEC:521
IEC:60687, 62052,62053
32. General requirements for switchgear and IS:4237
control gear for voltage not exceeding 1kV.
33. Marking and arrangements for switchgear IS:375
busbars, main connection and auxiliary
DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I (2X800MW) Bid Doc. No. TECHNICAL PART-IV Page
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE CS-9549-572-2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION-VI G3- 1 of 6
34. Specification for static protection relay IS:8686

35. Cross link polythelene PVC cable for working 7096 (Part-I)
voltage upto and including 1100 volts.
36. Conductors for insulated electrical cables IS:8130
and flexible cords.
37. Recommended current rating for cables IS:3961
38 Specification for copper and copper alloy tubes BS:2871
39. PVC insulation and sheath of electrical cables IS:5831
40. Mild steel wires,strips and tapes for armouring IS:3975
of cables
41. PVC insulated electric cables for voltages IS:1554 (Part-I), IS:894
upto and including 1100 volts
42. Cables IEEE:383,ASTMD
2893
43. Glands BS 6121
44. Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring IS:9537 (Part 2)
45. Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring IS:3480
46. Fitting for rigid steel conduits for elect. wiring IS:2667
47. Accessories for rigid steel conduits for IS:3837
electrical wiring
48. Mild steel tube . IS:1239.
49. Specification for concrete pipes IS:458
50 Guide for safety procedures and practices in IS:5216
practices in electrical works
51. MS wire for general engineering purpose IS:280
52. Compression type tubular terminal end for IS:8309
aluminium conductors insulated cables.
53. Soldering and welded type terminal end for IS:8394
conductors of insulated cables
54. Cold rolled carbon sheet steel IS:513
55. Indian Electricity Act.
56. Indian Electricity Rules.
57. National Electricity Safety code IEEE 80
58. Installation & Maintenance of cables IS:1255
59. Colours for ready mixed paints & enamels IS:5
60. Code of practice for earthing. IS:3043
61. Code of practice for protection of building IS:2309
and allied structure against lightning.
62. Specification for hollow column insulators IS:5621, IEC233
63. Specification for bushings. IS:2099, IEC 137
64. Requirements for profile of insulators IEC 815
65. Requirements for boxes, cabinets IS:5133, IEC 439
66. Degree of protection provided by enclosures IS:4691
for motors
67. Test on motors IS:325, IS:12075
68. Ferrules IS:10942.
69. Specifications for fuses IS:9224, IS:8724
70. Requirements for electric power connectors IS:5561
71. GLS lamps IS:418
72. Water tight electric fitting IS:3553
73. Adopters for flexible steel conduits IS:4649
74. Specification for structural steel standard quality IS:226
75. Method of chemical analysis of pig iron, cast IS:228
iron, plain carbon and low alloy steel
76. Code of practice for use of structural steel in IS:802(1977)
overhead trans. line towers.
Part I - Loads and permissible stress.
Part II - Fabrication, galvanising.
Inspection & packing
77. Code of practice for use of steel tubes in IS:806
general building construction
78. Specification for single coil rectangular IS:3063
section washers for bolts, nuts and screws
79. Code of practice for Ultrasonic testing by IS:3664
pulse Echo method
80. Specification for hot dip coating on structural IS:4759
steel and other allied products
81. Specification for hot dip galvanised coatings IS:1367

on fasteners
82. Specification for hexagon bolts for steel IS:6639
structure
83. Specification for Rolled Steel IS:808
84. Specification for covered electrodes for metal IS:814
arc welding of structural steel
85. Code of practice for manual metal arc welding IS:816
for general construction in mild steel.
86. Code of practice for manual metal arc welding IS:9595
of mild steel.
87. Specification for steel tubes for structural IS:1161
purposes.
88. Recommended practice for Radiographic IS:1182
examination of fusion welded butt joints in
steel plates.
89. Specification for hexagonal bolts, screws nuts IS:1363
and lock nuts grade C
90. Specification for bolts, screws, nuts and lock IS:1364
nuts (Grade A&B)
91. Technical supply conditions for threaded steel IS:1367
fasteners.
92. Code for practice for finishing of Ferrous IS:1477
metal in building (painting and allied finishes)
93. Method of Tensile Testing of steel products IS:1599
other than sheet, wire and Tube.
94. Method of Tensile Testing of steel products IS:1608
other than strip, wire and tube.
95. Specification for Line Pipe. IS:1978
96. Specification for structural steel IS:2062
Fusion welding quality.
97. Code of practice for Radiographic Testing IS:2595
98. Plugs and sockets. IS:1293
99. Switches for domestic and similar purposes. IS:3854.
100. Code of practice for elect. wiring installation IS:732
101. Guide of practice for general construction IS:5571
for hazardous areas
102. Code of practice for general construction in IS:800
steel
103. Code of practice for phosphating of iron & steel IS:6005
104 Water proof electric lighting fittings IS:3526
105. Dust proof electric lighting fitting IS4012
106 Dust tight electric lighting fittings IS:4013
107. Industrial luminaire with metal reflectors IS:1777
108. Industrial lighting fitting with plastic reflectors IS:3287
109. Specification for flood light IS:10322
110. Specification for decorative lighting outfits IS:5077
111. Specification for new insulating oils. IS:335
112. Specification for wrought aluminium and IS:2678
aluminium alloys drawn tube.
113. Dimensions for wrought aluminium and IS:2673
aluminium alloys, extruded round tube
114. Wrought aluminium and Aluminium alloy bars, IS:5082
rods, tubes and sections for electrical purposes
115. Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide, zinc IS:2074
chrome priming
116. Spacers and spacer dampers for twin horizontal IS:10162
bundle conductors
117. Method of measurement of building and civil IS:1200
engineering works Part-I earthwork
118. Safety code for excavation work. IS:3764.
119. Code for practice for earthwork on canals. IS:4701
120. Specification for paving Bitumen IS:73
121. Specification for low density polythene films IS:2508
122. Methods fo test for polythene moulding IS:2530
materials and polytheylene compounds.
123. Ordinary and low heat portland cement IS:269
124. Coarse and fine aggregates from natural IS:383

sources for concrete.
125. Cpde of practice for plain and reinforced IS:456
concrete.
126. Methods of test for strength of concrete IS:516
127. Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete IS:1199
128. Pre-formed fillers for expansion joints in IS:1838
concrete non-extruding and resilient type
(bitumen impregnated filler)
129. Specific Gravity, density, voids absorption IS:2386 (Part-III)
and bulking.
130. General requirements for concrete vibrators IS:2505
immersion type.
131. Screed board concrete vibrators. IS:2506
132. Concrete vibrating tables. IS:2514
133. Methods of sampling and test (physical and IS:3025
chemical) for water used in industry)
134. Code of practice for concrete structures for IS:3370
the storage of liquids.
135. Methods of tests for routine control for water IS:3342
used in industry.
136. Form vibrators for concrete IS:4656
137. Admixture of concrete IS:9103
138. Cold worked steel high strength deformed IS:1786
bars to concrete reinforcement.
139 Code of practice for bending and fixing of IS:2502
bars for concrete reinforcement
140. Integral cement water proofing compound IS:2645
141. Line traps. IEC:353, IS:8792, IS:8793
142. Planning of (single side band) power line IEC:663
carrier system
143. Coupling device for power line carrier system IEC 481
144. Recommended value for characteristic input IEC 495
and single side band power line carrier terminals
145. Installation of line traps. IS 9859
146. Specification for static protective relays IEC-255 (Part-5 & 6),
IS-8686
147. Surge withstand capability & dielectric strength ANSI, IEEE-C37.90
148. Control switches (LV switching devices for IEC:337
control and auxiliary circuits)
149. Transducers IEC-688-1
150. BPU/BCU IEC 61850, 60870
Lighting Fixtures and Accessories
IS:418 Tungsten filament general service electric lamps.

IS:1258 Bayonet lamp holders.
IS:1534 Ballast for fluorescent lamps.
IS:1569 Capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent, high pressure
mercury vapour and low pressure sodium vapour discharge
lamp circuit.
IS:1777 Industrial luminaire with metal reflectors.
IS:1913 General and safety requirements for luminairies.
IS:2148 Flame proof enclosures of electrical apparatus.
IS:2215 Starters for fluorescent lamps.
IS:2418 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting services.
IS:3323 Bi-pin lamp holders for tubular fluorescent lamps.
IS:3324 Holders for starters for tubular fluorescent lamps.
IS:3646 Code of practice for interior illumination.
IS:4013 Dust-tight electric lighting fittings.
IS:6616 Ballasts for high pressure mercury vapour lamps.
IS:8224 Electric Lighting fittings for Division 2 areas.
IS:9900 High-pressure mercury vapour lamps.
IS:9974 High pressure Sodium vapour lamps.
IS:10276 Edison screw lamp holders.
IS:10322 Luminaires.
IS:13021 AC Supplied Electronic Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps.
Lighting Panels, Switch-boxes, Receptacles and Junction Boxes
IS:1293 Plugs & socket outlets of rated voltage upto and Including 250
volts & rated current upto and including 16 Amps.
IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low-voltage
switchgear and control gear.
IS:2551 Danger notice plates.
IS:13947 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear
IS:3854 Switches for domestic and similar purposes.
IS:6875 Control switches (switching devices for control and auxiliary
circuits including contactor relays) for voltages upto and including
1000 V AC and 1200 V DC.
IS:13703 Low voltage fuses for voltages not exceeding 1000V AC or
1500 V DC.
Conduits, Pipes and Accessories
IS:2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring.

IS:3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
IS:9537 Conduits for electrical installations.
Lighting Wires/Cables
IS:694 PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including 1100 V
IS:3961 Recommended current ratings for cables.(PVC Insulated and
PVC sheathed heavy duty cables and light duty cables).
IS:8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
IS:10810 Methods of tests for cables.
Electrical Installation Practices & Miscellaneous
IS:5 Colour for ready mixed paints & enamels.

IS:280 Mild steel wires for general engineering purposes.
IS:374 Electric ceiling type fans & regulators.
IS:732 Code of practice for electrical wiring installations.
IS:802 Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead transmission line
towers-Fabrication Galvanising, nspection & packing.
IS:1255 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power cables Upto and
including 33KV rating.
IS:1944 Code of practice for lighting of public thorough fare.
IS:2062 Steel for general structural purposes.
IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot-dip galvanising of iron and steel.
IS:2633 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles.
IS:2713 Tubular steel poles for overhead power lines.
IS:3043 Code of practice for earthing.
IS:3646 Code of practice for interior illumination.
IS:5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work.
IS:5571 Guide for selection of electrical equipments for hazardous areas.
IS:5572 Classification of Hazardous areas (other than Mines)having flammable gases
and Vapours for electrical installation.
IS:6665 Code of practice for industrial lighting.
National Electrical Code.

Indian Electricity Rules.
Indian Electricity Act.
BS:6121 Mechanical cable glands.

IS : 5 Colo urs f or ready-m ixed paints and enam els.
IS: 694 PVC ins ulated cables f or work ing vo ltages upto and inc luding
1100V.
IS : 722 A.C. E lectricit y Met ers
IS : 1248 E lectrica l Ind icat ing instruments
IS : 13947 Degree of protect ion provided by enc losures for low
voltage Switchgear and Cont rol gear
P art -1
IS : 13947 A.C. circuit B reakers
P ART-2
IEC-947-2
IS : 2551 Danger Notice Plates
IS : 2629 Hot dip galva nising
IS : 2705 Current Transform ers
IS : 13947 Contactors and motors st arter for vo ltages
P art 4 not exceeding 1000 V AC or 1200 V DC
S ec-1
(IEC-947-4-1)
IS : 3043 Code of practice for earthing.
IS : 3072 Code of practice for installat io n and m aintena nce of S witchgear
IS : 3156 V oltage Transform ers
IS : 3202 Code of practice for clim ate proofing of electrical equipm ent.
IS : 3231 E lectrica l rela ys for power system protection.
IS : 13947 Air-Break S witches, air break disconnectors, air break
P ART-3 disconnector and fuse com binat io n units for voltages not
e xceed ing 1000V AC or 1200 V DC.
IS : 13947 General R equirem ents for S witchgear and Control gear Part – I
IEC -947-I for voltages not e xceed ing 1000 V.
IS : 5082 W rought Alum inium and Aluminium a lloys f or elect r ica l
pur poses.
IS : 6005 Code of practice of phosphat ing of iron and steel.
IS : 13947 LV switchgear and Control gear Control current devices
P art-5 Sec1 and swit ching e lem ent.
IEC-947-5-1
IS : 8623 S pecificat io n for factory built assem blies of Swit chgear
(3 parts) & Control gear for voltages upto and inc lud ing 1000 V
IEC 439-1 AC & 1200 V DC .
439-2
439-3
IS : 8686 S tatic Relays
IS : 13703 / HR C Cartridge fuses
IEC-269
IS : 10118 Code of practice for selectio n, installat ion a nd m ain
(4 parts) tenance of swit chgear and cont rol gear.
IS : 11171 S pecificat io n for dry type transform ers.
IS : 11353 Guide f or uniform system of mark ing a nd ident if icat ion of
cond uctors and apparatus term inals .
IS : 12021 S pecificat io n of control t ransf orm ers for switchgear and
Control gear for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC.
NTPC Limited

(2X800MW)
ATTACHMENT-12 TO
SECTION – VII
TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS

FOR
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
NTPC Limited

(2X800MW)
ATTACHMENT-12 TO
SECTION – VII
TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS

FOR
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE
(This document is meant for the exclusive purpose of bidding against this specification and shall not be transferred,
reproduced or otherwise used for purposes other than that for which it is specifically issued.)
DATA
REQUIREMENTS
PART-A
BIDDER SHALL FILL UP THE

FOLLOWING DATA IN ‘PART A’
FOR EACH TYPE AND RATING OF
THE EQUIPMENTS ALONG WITH
THE BID.
CONTENT
(Bidder shall fill up the following data in ‘Part-A’ for each type and rating of the
equipments along with the BID)
Clause no. Description Page No.
CHAPTER –E1: CIRCUIT BREAKER 1-6
CHAPTER –E2: DISCONNECTORS/ISOLATORS 1-4
CHAPTER –E3: INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS 1-4
CHAPTER –E4: SURGE ARRESTOR 1-2
CHAPTER –E5: POST INSULATOR 1-3
CHAPTER—E6: WAVE TRAP 1-1
CHAPTER –E7: LIGHTING 1-2
CHAPTER –E8: VOID ----
CHAPTER– E9: VOID ----
CHAPTER –E10: SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM 1-4
CHAPTER –E11: LT POWER AND CONTROL CABLES 1-2
CHAPTER –E12: REQUIREMENTS OF AUXILIARY ITEMS 1-3
CHAPTER –E13: INSULATORS FOR CHAPTER E1 TO E6 & E12 1-5
CHAPTER –E14: MOTORS FOR CHAPTER E1&E2 1-2

PART - A
CHAPTER – E1
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CLAUSE BIDDER'S NAME
NO.
E1
EHV CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(Bidder to fill up seperately for each type of breaker)
1. General
a) Name & country of the

Manufacturer ............................................
b) Type of Circuit breaker ............................................
c) Manufacturer's type designation ............................................
d) Standards Applicable ............................................
e) Rated Voltage (KV) ............................................
f) Rated Current ............................................
i) Under normal condition (Amps) ............................................
ii) Under site conditions (Amps) ............................................
g) Rated frequency (Hz) ............................................
h) Number of poles ............................................
i) Whether 3 poles or single pole unit ............................................
j) Whether dead tank or live tank ............................................

design
k) No. of breaks per pole ............................................
2. Guaranteed Ratings ............................................
a) Rated short circuit breaking

current ............................................
i) Symmetrical component
at highest system voltage (kA) ............................................
ii) DC Component (%) ............................................

DARLIPALLI STPP-1(2X800MW) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER - E1
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION- VII PART-A PAGE 1
NO.
iii) Asymmetrical breaking
current at highest system
voltage (kA) ............................................
b) Rated Making capacity ............................................
i) at higher rated voltage

(kA peak) ............................................
ii) at lower rated voltage ............................................

(kA peak)
c) Maximum break time for any

current upto rated breaking
current (ms) ............................................
i) For Test duties 2,3 & 4

at rated values ............................................
ii) For other duties at limiting

conditions of voltage and
pressure ............................................
d) Closing times (ms) ............................................
e) Minimum opening time under
any condition with limiting

voltage and pressure (ms) ............................................
f) Maximum opening time under

g) First pole to clear factor ............................................
h) Short time current rating (kA) ............................................
i) 1 Second ............................................
ii) 3 Second ............................................
i) Rated operating duty ............................................
j) Maximum line charging breaking

current with temporaty over voltage
NO.
up to 1.4 p.u. (kA) ............................................
k) Maximum arc duration and

corresponding current under
lockout pressure. ............................................
l) Pre-insertion resistor (if applicable) ............................................
i) Value / pole (Ohms)/with

tolerance ............................................
ii) Minimum and maximum

duration of insertion per
pole (ms) ............................................
iii) Thermal rating for the

C-1m-0-CO-2m-C-1m-O-CO
for terminal fault considering
maximum resistance and
time setting ............................................
iv) Thermal rating for the same

duty as (iii) above for
reclosing against trapped
charges ............................................
3. Dielectric with-stand of Complete
Breaker ............................................
a) One minute dry & wet power

frequency withstand voltage ............................................
i) Between live terminal and

ground (kV rms) ............................................
ii) Between terminals with

NO.
breaker contacts open
(kV rms) ............................................
b) 1.2/50 micro second impulse

withstand test voltage ............................................

ground (kV peak) ............................................

(kV peak) ............................................
c) 250/2500 micro second impulse

switching surge withstand test
voltage ............................................

ground (kV peak) ............................................

(kV peak) ............................................
d) Total creepage distance ............................................
i) To ground (mm) ............................................
ii) Between terminals (mm) ............................................
4. Operating Mechanism ............................................
a) Type of operating mechanism

for ............................................
i) Closing ............................................
ii) Opening ............................................

NO.
5. Quenching Media
a) Quantity of SF6 per

pole at rated pressure (Kg) ............................................
b) Guaranteed maximum
leakage rate per year ............................................
c) Rated pressure of SF6

in operating chamber
(Kg/cm2) ............................................
d) Limit of pressure at
which breaker operates
correctly (Kg/cm 2) ............................................
6. Constructional Details .
a) Type and capacity of device
used to obtain uniform voltage
distribution between breaks ............................................
b) Number of auxiliary contacts

per pole provided ............................................
i) NO ............................................
ii) NC ............................................
iii) Adjustable ............................................

NO.
7. Detailed Literature ............................................
(Whether the following are

enclosed)
a) Type test reports Yes/No
b) OGA drawing of breaker Yes/No

PART - A
CHAPTER – E2
DISCONNECTOR
NO.
E2
EHV DISCONNECTORS/ISOLATORS
(Bidder shall furnish the dta for each type of DS separaetely)
1. General .......................................

Manufacturer .......................................
b) Manufacturer's type designation .......................................
c) Standard Applicable .......................................
d) Rated Voltage (KV) .......................................
e) Rated Current (Amps) .......................................
i) Under normal .......................................
ii) Under site conditions .......................................

at 50 deg C ambient
f) Number of poles .......................................
g) Whether all 3 poles are

ganged mechanically .......................................
h) Pole to pole spacing .......................................
2. Guaranteed Ratings .......................................
a) Rated short time

current of Isolator .......................................
i) for 1 sec. (kA rms) .......................................
ii) for 3 sec. (kA rms) .......................................
iii) Dynamic current .......................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER - E2

NO.
b) Opening Time of
i) Isolator (sec) .......................................
ii) Earth switch (sec) .......................................
c) Closing time of .......................................
i) Isolator (sec) .......................................
3. Dielectric with-stand capacity of

Completely assembled Isolator and
earth switch .......................................
a) One minute power frequency

withstand test voltage (kV) rms .......................................
i) against ground (kV peak) .......................................
- dry (kV rms) .......................................
- Wet (kV rms) .......................................

withstand test voltage .......................................
i) against ground
(kV peak) .......................................
ii) across open contacts

(kV peak) .......................................
c) 250/2500 micro second

voltage (dry & wet) .......................................
i) against ground
(kV peak) .......................................

(kV peak) .......................................

NO.
d) Corona extinction voltage
(kV rms) .......................................
e) Radio interference level

at 1.1 x Um/3 (in micro volts)
for frequency between 0.5
MHz to 2.0 MHz .......................................
f) Total creepage distance

to ground (mm) .......................................
4. Operating Mechanism .......................................
a) Type and rating (KW) of

motor .......................................
b) Rated voltage of motor .......................................
4.1 Interlockings .......................................
a) Whether mechanical/
constructional interlock
between Isolator and Earth Yes/No
switch provided .......................................
b) Whether interlock coil is

continuously rated .......................................
5 Constructional Features
a) Main contacts .......................................

i) Type of contacts .......................................
ii) Contact area (cm2) .......................................
iii) Material of contacts .......................................
iv) Contact pressure (Kg/cm2) .......................................
v) Maximum current density

under normal current
carrying capacity
(Amp/cm2) .......................................
NO.
vi) Thickness of silver
plating .......................................
b) Auxiliary contacts on
Isolator .......................................
i) Total number .......................................

i) NO .......................................
iii) NC .......................................
iv) Adjustable .......................................
v) Make before break .......................................
vi) Rated voltage (volts) .......................................
vii) Rated continuous

current (Amps) .......................................
i) Rated DC breaking
current with 20 ms
time constant (A) .......................................
c) Auxiliary contacts on
earth switch .......................................
i) Total number .......................................
i) NO .......................................
iii) NC .......................................
iv) Adjustable .......................................
v) Rated Voltage (volts) .......................................
vi) Rated continuous

current (Amps) .......................................
vii) Rated DC breaking

current with 20 ms
time constant (A) .......................................
e) Whether details of
enclosed Yes/No
PART - A
CHAPTER – E3
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER
NO.
E-3
EHV INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER

(Bidder to fill up the data for each type of CT/CVT seperately)
A. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
1. Name & country of the

Manufacturer .......................................
2. Manufacturer's type designation .......................................
3. Standard applicable .......................................
4. Rated frequency (Hz) .......................................
5. Rated Voltage (KV) .......................................
6. i) Rated continuous normal

current (A) .......................................
ii) Rated thermal current (A) .......................................
7. Short time current

withstand for 1 sec. (kA) .......................................
8. Dynamic current withstand

(kA peak) .......................................
9. 1.2/50 micro second impulse

withstand voltage (kv peak) .......................................
10. 250/2500 micro second

switching withstand voltage
(kV peak dry and wet) .......................................
11. One minute dry & wet power

(kV rms) .......................................
12. No. of cores per CT .......................................
13. Transformation Ratio .......................................
14. Number of secondary turns .......................................

NO.
15. Rated Out put (VA) at
different taps. .......................................
16. Accuracy class .......................................
17. Knee - point voltage (volts)

at different taps .......................................
18. Secondary data .......................................
a) Secondary resistance at
different taps .......................................
b) Oversize factor and

transient error under
reclosing duty condition .......................................
19. Maximum exciting current at .......................................
a) 100% kpv (mA) .......................................
b) 25% kpv (mA) .......................................
c) 20% kpv (mA) .......................................
d) 10% kpv (mA) .......................................
20. Total creepage distance (mm) .......................................
21. a) No. of primary turns .......................................
b) Material and cross section

of primary .......................................
c) Whether bar type or ring

type primary .......................................

NO.
22. Total weight (Kg) .......................................
B. CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
1. General .......................................

Manufacturer .......................................
d) Rated Voltage (KV rms) .......................................
e) Number of secondaries .......................................
f) Rated frequency (Hz) .......................................
a) Rated output of each

secondary winding (VA) .......................................
b) Total simultaneous burden (VA) & Accuracy .......................................
c) Accuracy class .......................................
d) Rated voltage factor .......................................
i) Continuous .......................................
ii) 5 seconds .......................................
iii) 30 seconds .......................................
e) Capacitance .......................................
i) of high voltage capacitor

(Pieco farads) .......................................
ii) of intermediate voltage capacitor .......................................

(Pieco farads)

NO.
iii) for carrier frequency
coupling (Pieco Farads) .......................................
f) i) Natural frequency of
coupling (kHz) .......................................
ii) Self tuning frequency

of CVT (khz)
(Capacitor Part only) .......................................
g) One minute power frequency
test voltage of secondary

winding (kV rns) .......................................
h) One minute power frequency

test voltage of H. F.
terminal (kV rms) .......................................
i) One minute power frequency

test voltage of capacitor
(kV rms ) (dry & wet) .......................................
j) 1.2/50 micro second impulse

withstand test voltage of
capacitor (kV peak) .......................................
k) 250/2500 micro second impulse

voltage of capacitor(dry wet)
(kV peak) .......................................
3. Construction details
a) Total weight (Kg) .......................................

PART - A
CHAPTER – E4
SURGE ARRESTER
NO.
E-4
EHV SURGE ARRESTERS
SURGE ARRESTERS
1.0 GENERAL ................................................

Manufacturer ................................................
b) Manufacturer's type designation ................................................
c) Applicable Standard ................................................
2.0. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
a) Arrester class and type ................................................
b) Rated arrester Voltage (KV) ................................................
c) Maximum continuous operating

voltage (COV) at design
ambient temperature ................................................
d) Nominal discharge current

(8/20 micro sec. wave ) (kA) ................................................
e) i) Minimum discharge
capability (kj/kV) referred
to rated voltage at minimum
of discharge characteristics ................................................
ii) Line Discharge class,

as per IEC ................................................
f) Maximum equivalent front of

wave protection level (dis-
charge voltage with 0.5 x
1.5 micro sec, 10 kA impulse
current) ................................................
g) i) Minimum switching
surge residual voltage
at 1 kA (kVp) ................................................

NO.
ii) Maximum switching surge
residual voltage at
1 kA (kVp) ................................................
h) Maximum residual voltage

for 8/20 micro sec current
wave ................................................
i) at 50% nominal
discharge current (kVp) ................................................
ii) at 100% nominal

iii) at 200% nominal


(dry) withstand voltage of
arrester (kV rms) ................................................
j) Impulse withstand test

voltage of arrester housing
with 1.2/50 micro sec wave,
(kVp) ................................................
k) Impulse current withstand ................................................
i) High current short

duration (4/10 micro
sec. wave ) kAp ................................................
ii) Low current short

duration ( A peak) ................................................
l) Pressure relief class ................................................

......
.
3.0 EXTERNAL INSULATION

withstand voltage of arrester
housing dry & wet (kV rms) ................................................

PART - A
CHAPTER – E5
POST INSULATOR
NO.
E-5
EHV INSULATORS
A. BUS POST INSULATOR
(Bidder shall furnish these data for solid core Insulators for
Disconnecting switches, bus support, etc. separately)
1. Manufacturer's Name .........................................
2. Country of Manufacturer .........................................
3. Type of Insulator (Product No.) .........................................
4. Applicable Standards .........................................
5. Height of complete stack (mm) .........................................
6. Total Creepage distance (mm) .........................................
7. Power frequency withstand .........................................

voltage of insulator with
corona ring
i) Dry (kV rms) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV rms) .........................................
8. 1.2/50 micro sec. impulse

withstand voltage (kVp)
of insulator with corona ring .........................................
i) Dry (kV rms) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV rms) .........................................
9. Radio Interference Voltage
at 1.1 Um/(micro volts) for
frequency between 0.5 to

2.0 MHz .........................................

NO.
10. Cantilever strength .........................................
i) Upright (kg) .........................................
ii) Under (kg) .........................................
C. STRING INSULATOR
(Bidder shall furnish this data separately for each voltage rating)
1. Manufacturer .........................................
a) Insulator .........................................
b) Hardware .........................................
3. Type of Insulator .........................................
a) Ball & Socket/other .........................................
b) Normal/antifog .........................................
4. Creepage distance .........................................

voltage
a) Each Disc .........................................
i) Dry (kV) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV) .........................................

NO.
b) Complete String (Kg) .........................................
i) Dry (kV) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV) .........................................
6. Impulse withstand voltage .........................................
a) Each Disc
i) Negative (kVp) .........................................
i) Positive (kVp) .........................................
ii) Negative (kVp) .........................................
7. Switching Surge Withstand .........................................
Complete String (kVp) .........................................
8. Electro Mechanical Strength Yes/No
Complete String (Kg) .........................................
i) Single tension .........................................
ii) Double tension .........................................

PART - A
CHAPTER – E6
WAVE TRAP
NO.
E-6
WAVE TRAPS
(Bidder to furnish data for each type and rating separately)
1. Name of Manufacturer and country .........................................
2. Type .........................................
3. System Voltage rating .........................................
4. Continuous current rating at 50 oC

ambient .........................................
5. Maximum Symmetrical short

circuit current rating for 1 sec.
duration .........................................
6. Rated Inductance .........................................
7. Blocking Range .........................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER -E6

SW ITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION-VII PART-A PAGE 1
PART - A
CHAPTER – E7
LIGHTING
CLAUSE NO. BIDDER'S NAME ____________________
E-7
LIGHTING
The following technical data shall be submitted by the Contractor
against each item for each type/rating/size for Employer's approval.
1.00.00 Lighting Panel
a) Make ..........................................
b) Country of Manufacture ..........................................
c) Applicable Standard ..........................................
d) Rated voltage ..........................................
f) No. of outgoing feeders & rating ..........................................
2.00.00 Lighting fixtures & accessories
(for each type of fixture)
a) Make of lighting fixture ..........................................
b) Maker's type designation ..........................................
c) Applicable standard ..........................................
2.01.00 Lamps
i) Make & Type ..........................................
ii) Applicable standard ..........................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER- E7

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION-VII PART-A PAGE 1

a) Make ..........................................
b) Type ..........................................
d) Pole height ..........................................
4.00.00 Lighting Masts

a) Make ..........................................
b) Type ..........................................
d) Thickness of sections ..........................................
e) Thickness of galvanise/coating ..........................................
f) Type of construction ..........................................
g) Overall height ..........................................
h) Weight ..........................................
i) Finish ..........................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER- E7

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION-VII PART-A PAGE 2
PART - A
CHAPTER – E8
VOID
PART - A
CHAPTER – E9
VOID
PART - A
CHAPTER – E10
CLAUSE NO. BIDDER’S NAME
1 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM (SAS) FOR

I 765/132 kV SWITCHYARD
a SAS Manufacturer’s Name
b Make/Model No
Bidder to state any constraints imposed by proposed system as
c regards to expansion and integration of third party IEDs
Guaranteed annual system availability
2 Communication Network
a) Communication protocol used for :
Data communication speed for Substation Network / Inter bay
b) Bus
Interface with Owner’s OPC-compliant DCS/RLDC/OS control
room provided in line with the requirements of technical
c) specification
3 Gateways (Each type)
a) Protocols supported by each type
4 Bay Control Units (BCU)
a) Make and type of BCU
5 Bay Protection Unit (BPU) for 765 kV/132kV Lines MAIN-1 MAIN-2
a) Make and type of Main I/Main II Numerical Relay offered
b) Operating principle
6 Auto Reclose and Synchronizing Check Relay
a) Name and manufacturer of relay
7 Stand alone/Built-in Digital Fault Recorder for 400/66 kV
Lines
b) Whether software for analysis of fault data provided
8 Distance to Fault Recorder
a) Name and manufacturer of the equipment
b) Distance to fault accuracy in % including all measurement errors
II RELAYS COMMON TO LINE BAY, GT BAY & BUS COUPLER BAY BPU
1 Local Breaker Back-up Protection (50 LBB)
2 765 kV ‘Tee’ Protection (87TT-I, 87TT-II) 87TT-I 87TT-II
3 Bus bar Protection for EHV Bus Bar
b) Whether duplicated & De-centralized architecture provided?
III Transformer/Reactor Protection
1 Differential Protection
a) Name and manufacturer of the relay
b) Is the function immune to DC offset component
c) Relay is IEC61850 compliant
2 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800 MW) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER E-10 PAGE 1

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION VII PART-A
3 Over current Protection
Name and manufacturer of the relay

a)
4 Directional Back-up O/C and E/F Protection Function
5 Earth Fault Protection
6 Over fluxing protection
b) Whether inverse time operating characteristics provided?
IV OTHER SWITCHYARD ITEMS
1 Time Synchronization Equipment
a) Name and manufacturer of the item
b) Accuracy
2 Active and Reactive Energy Meters (ABT type)
a) Name, type and manufacturer of the item
b) Dummy Panels provided as per spec

3 Frequency Relay [ISU/F] (For Islanding Scheme) – Bus section specific
b) No of stages
4 Dynamic Relay Test Kit
Suitable to accept the fault data stored in line protection relay,
dist recorder of generator/ line in for dynamic testing
b) on relays and replay the DR files
All software and PC etc required has been provided along
c) with licenses
d) Aux items like phantom load, test plugs, tool kits etc provided
V Bay Protection Units for Main Generator Circuits

1 Generator Differential Protection (87G)
2 Generator 100% Stator E/F/ Protection (64G2)
3 Generator Stator Standby E/F Protection (64G1)
4 Generator Inter Turn Fault Protection (95 G)
5 Generator Over Voltage Protection (59 G)
6 Generator Under Frequency Protection (81 G)

7 Generator Low Forward Power or Reverse Power Interlock

Protection
b) Power Setting Range
8 Generator Loss of Excitation Protection
9 Generator Negative Phase Sequence Protection (46 G)
10 Generator Pole slipping Protection (98G)
11 Generator Backup Impedance Protection (21 G)
12 Generator Rotor Earth Fault Protection
13 Generator back-energization Protection (50GDM)
Confirm that the protection based on two different operating
b) principles are provided
14 Generator VT Fuse Failure Relay (60 G)
15 Generator Transformer Differential Protection
16 Generator and Generator Transformer Over- fluxing
Protection (99G/99GT )
17 Generator Transformer Back Up Earth fault Protection (51
NGT)
18 Unit Transformer Differential Protection (87UT)
Name and manufacturer of the relay
a)
19 Unit Transformer Back Up Over Current Protection (51UT)
c) Name and manufacturer of the relay
20 Unit Transformer Back Up Earth Fault Protection (51NUT)
21 Unit Transformer Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64 RUT)
22 Coupling Relays for Generator Breaker
b) Rated DC voltage of Coil
23 DISTURBANCE RECORDER FOR GENERATOR FAST SLOW
a) Name & manufacturer of DR
b) Scan rate
Whether fault data is made available in IEEE-COMTRADE
c) format and available through MMI for Owner’s analysis?
d) Whether necessary software for analysis provided?
24 Generator ABT Energy Meter/ UT Active Energy Meters

a) Name & manufacturer of the meters
b) Accuracy
Phasor measurement system
a Make
b No of Voltage and current channels supported
c Make of Industrial grade router
d Make of standalone GPS for PMU
25 Phasor measurement system
a Make
b No of Voltage and current channels supported
c Make of Industrial grade router
d Make of standalone GPS for PMU
26 Excitation Transformer Differential Protection (87ET)
27 Excitation Transformer
Back Up Over Current Protection (51ET)

PART - A
CHAPTER – E11
LT POWER AND CONTROL CABLE
NO.
E-11
POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
(The following technical data shall be submitted

by the Bidder for each type and size of the cable)
1. Maker's Name & country of

Manufacturer .................................................
2. Manufacturer's type & designation .................................................
3. Applicable Standard .................................................
4. Rated Voltage (Volts) .................................................
5. Conductor
a) Material (Copper or
aluminium) .................................................
b) Grade .................................................
c) Normal cross section

area (Sq. mm) .................................................
d) Number and diameter
6. Insulation
Nominal thickness of
insulation (mm) .................................................
7. Inner Sheath
a) Material .................................................
b) Thickness of sheath .................................................
c) Tolerance on thickness
of inner sheath .................................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW ) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER -E 11

SW ITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION VII PART-A PAGE 1
NO.
8. Armour
Type and material of

armour .................................................
9. Outer Sheath
.................................................
a) Material .................................................
c) Thickness of sheath .................................................
10. Test Voltage .................................................
a) High Voltage test (kV) .................................................
b) Water immersion test

voltage (kV) .................................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW ) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER -E 11

PART - A
CHAPTER – E12
REQUIREMENT OF AUXILIARY ITEMS
NO.
E - 12
EHV SWITCHYARD
AUXILIARY ITEMS
A. CONTROL CABINETS
(Bidder shall furnish this data for each equipment marshalling

box/operating mechanism box separately i.e.Bay Marshalling
Box, cabinets of breakers, disconnecting switches,
instrument transformers, lighting panels, etc.)
1. Manufacturer's Name and

country of origin .........................................
2. Design ambient air
temperature (oC) .........................................
3. Standards Applicable .........................................
4. Thickness of sheet steel

(mm) and whether cold
rolled or hot rolled .........................................
5. Degree of protection provided .........................................
6. Shede of finish paint as per RAL .........................................
a) Outside .........................................
b) Inside .........................................
B. TERMINAL CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS, AND SPACERS
(Bidder shall furnish this data for Terminal clamps and

connector separately for each type and equipment)

address .........................................

NO.
C. INSULATOR HARDWARE
(Bidder shall furnish this data separtely for each

type and rating)
1. Manufacturer .........................................
3. Ultimate Strengths .........................................
Complete Assembly (Kg) .........................................
D. TUBULAR BUS CONDUCTOR
1. Manufacturer .........................................
3. Material .........................................
4. Size of Tubular Bus

Conductor (mm) .........................................
a) Pipe Size (IPS) (mm) .........................................

b) Outside diameter (mm) .........................................
c) Tolerance on outside
E. MOOSE CONDUCTOR
1. Manufacturer .........................................
3. O.D. and cross section ........................................
4. Material .........................................
5. Weight per kM ........................................
6. UTS .........................................

NO.
F. EARTHWIRE
1. Manufacturer .........................................
4. Material .........................................
5. Weight per kM ........................................
6. UTS .........................................

PART - A
CHAPTER – E13
INSULATORS FOR
CHAPTER E1 TO E6 & E12
NO.
E - 13
EHV INSULATORS FOR CHAPTER E1 TO 6&12
A. BUSHING / HOLLOW INSULATORS
(Bidder shall furnish these data for each equipment separately i.e
. for circuit Breakers, Instrument Transformer, Surge Arrestors, etc.)
3. Type .........................................
5. i) Height .........................................
ii) Diameter (Top) .........................................
iii) Diameter (Bottom) .........................................
a) Total (mm) .........................................
7. Rated Voltage .........................................

voltage for 1 min. (kv rms)
i) Dry .........................................
ii) Wet .........................................

withstand voltage (kVp) .........................................
10. 250/2500 Micro sec. switching

impulse withstand voltage (kVp) .........................................
i) Dry .........................................
ii) Wet .........................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW ) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER -E13

NO.
11. Weight (Kg) .........................................

12. Cantilever Strength (Kg) .........................................
13. OGA drawing enclosed Yes/No
B. BUS POST INSULATOR
5. No. of units per Stack .........................................
6. Diameter & No. of Bolts .........................................
ii) Top .........................................
ii) Bottom .........................................
7. Bolt circle diameter (mm) .........................................
ii) Top .........................................
iii) Bottom .........................................

corona ring
i) Dry (kV rms) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV rms) .........................................

NO.
i) Dry (kV rms) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV rms) .........................................
12. Min. Corona Extinction Voltage (kV) .........................................

2.0 MHz .........................................
14. Weight of complete stack (kg) .........................................
i) Upright (kg) .........................................
ii) Under (kg) .........................................
16. Tensile Strength (kg) .........................................
17. Torsional strength (kg/m) .........................................
18. Compression strength (kg) .........................................
20. Type test report enclosed Yes/No
C. STRING INSULATOR
1. Manufacturer .........................................
a) Insulator .........................................
b) Hardware .........................................

NO.
b) Normal/antifog .........................................
4. Insulating Material .........................................
5. No. of units per String .........................................
6. Size of each unit .........................................
a) Diameter of disc (mm) .........................................
b) Spacing between
adjacent Units (mm) .........................................
7. Weight .........................................
a) Each Disc (Kg) .........................................
a) Each Disc (Kg) .........................................

voltage
a) Each Disc .........................................
i) Dry (kV) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV) .........................................
i) Dry (kV) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV) .........................................

NO.
a) Each Disc .........................................
i) Positive (kVp) .........................................

ii) Negative (kVp) .........................................
i) Positive (kVp) .........................................
ii) Negative (kVp) .........................................
a) Each Disc (kVp) .........................................
b) Complete String (kVp) .........................................
12. Power Frequency Puncture

withstand voltage of each
disc (kV rms) .........................................
13. Elector Mechanical Strength Yes/No
a) Each Disc (Kg) .........................................
i) Single tension .........................................

PART - A
CHAPTER – E14
MOTORS FOR CHAPTER E1 &E2
NO.
E-14
MOTORS FOR CHAPTER E1 & E2

(Bidder shall fill up thedata for Circuit breakers and Isolator and earth switches seperately)
1. a) Manufacturer ..........................................
b) Equipment ..........................................
c) Motor type ..........................................
d) Frame size & type designation ..........................................
e) Applicable standard to which motor conforms ..........................................
f) Rated output at 50 deg. C outside

air ambient temperature(KW) ..........................................
g) Max. power input to the driven

equipment at design duty point (KW) ..........................................
h) Max. power input to the driven equipment (KW)

over entire operating range.
i) At rated speed ..........................................
ii) AT 103% speed ..........................................
i) Class and type of insulation
j) Type of enclosure, and method of cooling ..........................................
k) Degree of protection ..........................................
l) Rated voltage and frequency (HZ)
m) Rated speed ..........................................
n) Efficiency at design duty point ..........................................

(without -ve tolerance)

SW ITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION -VII PART-A PAGE 1
NO.
o) Power factor at design duty point ..........................................
p) Type of mounting ..........................................
q) Type of terminal box for stator leads ..........................................
r) Bearing type ..........................................

SW ITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION -VII PART-A PAGE 2
DATA
REQUIREMENTS
PART-B
BIDDER SHALL FILL UP THE

FOLLOWING DATA IN ‘PART B’
FOR EACH TYPE AND RATING OF
THE EQUIPMENTS DURING
ENGINEERING
CONTENT
(Bidder shall fill up the following data in ‘Part-B’ for each type and rating of the
equipments during engineering)
Clause no. Description Page No.
CHAPTER –E1: CIRCUIT BREAKER 1-13
CHAPTER –E2: DISCONNECTORS/ISOLATORS 1-6
CHAPTER –E3: INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS 1-6
CHAPTER –E4: SURGE ARRESTOR 1-6
CHAPTER –E5: POST INSULATOR 1-5
CHAPTER—E6: WAVE TRAP 1-4
CHAPTER –E7: LIGHTING 1-16
CHAPTER –E8: VOID -----
CHAPTER– E9: VOID -----
CHAPTER –E10: SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM 1-50
CHAPTER –E11: LT POWER AND CONTROL CABLES 1-6
CHAPTER –E12: REQUIREMENTS OF AUXILIARY ITEMS 1-6
CHAPTER –E13: INSULATORS FOR CHAPTER E1 TO E6 & E12 1-5
CHAPTER –E14: MOTORS FOR CHAPTER E1&E2 1-2

PART - B
CHAPTER – E1
CIRCUIT BREAKER
NO.
E1
EHV CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(Bidder to fill up seperately for each type of breaker)
1. General

Manufacturer ............................................
b) Type of Circuit breaker ............................................
c) Manufacturer's type designation ............................................
d) Standards Applicable ............................................
e) Rated Voltage (KV) ............................................
f) Rated Current ............................................
i) Under normal condition (Amps) ............................................
ii) Under site conditions (Amps) ............................................
g) Rated frequency (Hz) ............................................
h) Number of poles ............................................
i) Whether 3 poles or single pole unit ............................................
j) Whether dead tank or live tank ............................................

design
k) No. of breaks per pole ............................................
2. Guaranteed Ratings ............................................
a) Rated short circuit breaking

current ............................................
i) Symmetrical component
at highest system voltage (kA) ............................................
ii) DC Component (%) ............................................

LDARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW ) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER-E1
SW ITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION VII PART-B PAGE 1
NO.
iii) Asymmetrical breaking
current at highest system
voltage (kA) ............................................
b) Rated Making capacity ............................................
i) at higher rated voltage

(kA peak) ............................................
ii) at lower rated voltage ............................................

(kA peak)
c) Maximum break time for any

current upto rated breaking
current (ms) ............................................
i) For Test duties 2,3 & 4

at rated values ............................................
ii) For other duties at limiting

conditions of voltage and
pressure ............................................
d) Closing times (ms) ............................................
e) Minimum opening time under any condition with
limiting voltage and pressure (ms) ............................................
f) Maximum opening time under

g) First pole to clear factor ............................................
h) Short time current rating (kA) ............................................
i) 1 Second ............................................
ii) 3 Second ............................................
i) Rated operating duty ............................................
j) Maximum breaking Capacity

under Kilimeteric faults and
rated TRV characteristic
(kA peak) ............................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW ) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER-E1
NO.
k) Maximum breaking capacity under

phase opposition (kA peak) ............................................
l) Maximum line charging breaking

current with temporaty over voltage
up to 1.4 p.u. (kA) ............................................
m) Maximum over voltage (p.u.) on

switching transformer on no load
and corresponding charging current ............................................
n) Maximum period between closing

of first contact & last contact in
a pole (ms) ............................................
o) Maximum pole discrepancy (ms) ............................................
p) Maximum arc duration and

corresponding current under
lockout pressure. ............................................
q) Pre-insertion resistor (if applicable) ............................................
i) Value / pole (Ohms)/with

tolerance ............................................
ii) Minimum and maximum

duration of insertion per
pole (ms) ............................................
iii) Thermal rating for the

C-1m-0-CO-2m-C-1m-O-CO
for terminal fault considering
maximum resistance and
time setting ............................................
iv) Thermal rating for the same

duty as (iii) above for
reclosing against trapped
charges ............................................

NO.
r) Small fault current breaking
capacity (kA peak) ............................................
s) Maximum temperature rise for

main contacts over an ambient
temperature of 50 oC ............................................
t) Rated voltage & pick up range

for trip coil (volts) ............................................
u) Rated voltage & pick up range

for closing coil (volts) ............................................
v) Rated pressure and limits of

pressure of operating mechanism. ............................................
w) Rated pressure and limits of

pressure of extinguishing medium. ............................................
x) Minimum dead time for ............................................
i) Three phase reclosing (ms) ............................................
ii) Single phase reclosing (ms) ............................................
y) Data of restriking voltage ............................................
i) Amplitude Factor ............................................
ii) Phase factor ............................................
iii) Natural frequency ............................................
iv) Rate of rise of restriking

voltage ............................................
z) Maximum over voltage recorded

white switching off shunt reactors
of 50 mvAR capacity ............................................
3. Dielectric with-stand of Complete

Breaker ............................................
a) One minute dry & wet power

frequency withstand voltage ............................................

NO.

ground (kV rms) ............................................

(kV rms) ............................................

withstand test voltage ............................................

ground (kV peak) ............................................

(kV peak) ............................................
c) 250/2500 micro second impulse

voltage ............................................

ground (kV peak) ............................................

(kV peak) ............................................

(kV rms) ............................................
e) Maximum radio interference

voltage (microvolts) at 1.1 x
Um/3 for frequency between
0.5 MHz to 2.0 MHz ............................................
f) Total creepage distance ............................................
i) To ground (mm) ............................................
ii) Between terminals (mm) ............................................
4. Operating Mechanism ............................................
a) Type of operating mechanism

for ............................................

NO.
i) Closing ............................................
ii) Opening ............................................
b) Normal power consumption

(w) at rated voltage of ............................................
i) Trip coil ............................................
ii) Closing coil ............................................
4.1 Pneumatic operating mechanism ............................................
a) Rated operating pressure

(kg/sq.cm) ............................................
b) Rated of pressure for

(kg/sq.cm) ............................................
i) Closing ............................................
ii) Opening ............................................
c) Air Consumption at rated

pressure for ............................................
i) Closing (m3) ............................................
ii) Opening (m3) ............................................
iii) Close -Open (m3) ............................................
d) Pressure drop/metre length

of piping ............................................
e) Number and Capacity (m3)

of breaker local air storage
receivers ............................................
f) No. of close operations for

which sufficient air as available
in local receiver ............................................
g) Capacity of compressor
(m3/hr) and working pressure
(kg/cm2) ............................................

NO.
h) Maximum time for which
compressor can operate
continuously (Minutes) ............................................
i) Time to fill ............................................
i) Air receiver after one

C-O operation (Minutes) ............................................
ii) For making up of losses

occuring in 4 hours (Minutes) ............................................
j) Pressure at which compressor ............................................
i) Starts (kg/cm2) ............................................
ii) Stops (Kg/cm2) ............................................
k) Material of compressed air ............................................

piping
l) Inner & outer dia of

piping (mm) ............................................
m) Whether time totaliser

for the compressor provided ............................................
n) Safety valve blow off

at (Kg/Cm2) ............................................
o) Alarm switch closes

(Kg/Cm2) ............................................
i) Closing ............................................
ii) Opening ............................................
iii) Auto reclose ............................................
4.2 Hydraulic operating mechanism ............................................
a) Rated pressure of oil in

operating cylinder (Kg/cm2) ............................................

NO.
b) Limits of pressure (Kg/cm2) ............................................
c) Quantity of oil (litre) ............................................
d) Details of monitoring
arrangement for hydraulic
pressure ............................................
e) No. of close-open operation

possible after loss of AC
supply to drive motor ............................................
f) Pressure drop starting

from lowest pressure at
which motor starts for ............................................
i) C-operation ............................................
i) O-operation ............................................
iii) CO-operation ............................................
iv) O-CO-operation ............................................
v) 2CO-operation ............................................
g) Time required to make up

pressure upto loss of nitrogen
pressure after ............................................
i) C-operation ............................................
i) O-operation ............................................
iii) CO-operation ............................................
iv) O-CO-operation ............................................
v) 2CO-operation ............................................
h) Life expectancy & guaranteed

leakage rate of nitrogen
accumulators ............................................
4.3 Spring charged mechanism ............................................

NO.
a) Number of close open operations
possible after failure of AC supply
to motor ............................................
b) Time required for motor to

charge the closing spring
(minutes) ............................................
c) Whether indication of spring

charged condition provided
in central control cabinet ............................................
4.4 Motor Data
a) Type ............................................
b) Rating at site conditions

(kW) ............................................
c) Rated voltage (V) ............................................
d) Full load current (A) ............................................
5. Quenching Media
a) Quantity of SF6 per

pole at rated pressure (Kg) ............................................
b) Guaranteed maximum
leakage rate per year ............................................
c) Rated pressure of SF6

in operating chamber
(Kg/cm2) ............................................
d) Limit of pressure at
which breaker operates
correctly (Kg/cm 2) ............................................
e) Standard to which SF6

gas complies ............................................
f) Capacity & filling ratio of

containers in which SF6
gas would be shipped (m3)
and the corresponding
pressure (Kg/cm2) ............................................
NO.
g) Whether breakers are despatched filled with

SF6 or required to be
filled at site ............................................
h) Type and make of SF6 pipe

coupling used ............................................
i) Type and make of mandatory

maintenance equipment (if applicable) ............................................
i) SF6 gas filling and

evacuation plant (portable) ............................................
ii) SF6 gas filtering, drying,

storage and recycling plant ............................................
iii) Operation analyser ............................................

iv) SF6 gas leak detector ............................................
v) Nitrogen filling device
(if applicable) ............................................
j) Type and material of gaskets

used to ensure gas tight joints
............................................
k) Type and make of ............................................
i) Densimeter ............................................
ii) Pressure gauge ............................................
l) Densimeter settings ............................................
i) Lockout ............................................
ii) Alarm ............................................
6. Constructional Details ............................................
a) Seismic level for which breaker

is designed ............................................
b) Noise level in (dB) at distance

of (m)

NO.
i) 0 ............................................
ii) 50 ............................................
iii) 100 ............................................
iv) 150 ............................................
c) Whether arcing contacts

provided Yes/No
d) Type and material of

main contacts and arcing
contacts ............................................
e) Whether main contacts

silver plated Yes/No
f) Contact pressure on main

contacts (Kg/cm2) ............................................
g) Contact separation in arcing

position (mm) ............................................
h) Whether pressure relief device

for each gas chamber of SF6
CB provided ............................................
i) Rate of contact travel ............................................
i) Opening (m/sec) ..........................................
ii) Closing (m/sec) .........................................
j) Type and capacity of device
used to obtain uniform voltage

distribution between breaks ............................................
k) Overvoltage withstand capability

of grading components (kV rms) ............................................
i) Continuous ............................................

NO.
ii) 10 minutes ............................................
iii) 1 minutes ............................................
iv) 5 seconds ............................................
l) Number of auxiliary contacts

per pole provided ............................................
i) NO ............................................
ii) NC ............................................
iii) Adjustable ............................................
m) Rated voltage of auxiliary

contacts (V) ............................................
n) Current capacity of Aux. contacts ............................................
i) Continuous (Amps) ............................................
ii) DC breaking with 20 ms

time constant (A) ............................................
7. Detailed Literature ............................................

enclosed)
b) Operation manual for breaker Yes/No
c) OGA drawing of breaker Yes/No
d) Details of SF6 gas filling,

evacuating, filtering, drying
storage & recycling plant Yes/No
e) Details of SF6 gas leak

NO.
detector Yes/No
f) Details of operations Analyser Yes/No
g) Details of Nitrogen filling device Yes/No
h) Leaflets & literature bringing

out salient feature s of
equipment offered Yes/No
i) Data on capabilities of circuit

breaker in terms of time and
number of operations at duties
ranging from 100% fault currents
to load currents of the lowest
possible value without requiring
any maintenance or checks Yes/No
j) Curves supported by test data

indicating the opening time
under close open operation
with combined variation of
trip coil voltage & pneumatic/
hydraulic pressure Yes/No

PART - B
CHAPTER – E2
DISCONNECTOR
NO.
E2
EHV ISOLATORS
(Bidder shall furnish the dta for each type of DS separaetely)
1. General .......................................

Manufacturer .......................................
d) Rated Voltage (KV) .......................................
e) Rated Current (Amps) .......................................
i) Under normal .......................................
ii) Under site conditions .......................................

at 50 deg C ambient
g) Number of poles .......................................
h) Whether all 3 poles are

ganged mechanically .......................................
i) Pole to pole spacing .......................................
a) Rated short time

current of Isolator .......................................
i) for 1 sec. (kA rms) .......................................
ii) for 3 sec. (kA rms) .......................................
iii) Dynamic current .......................................

NO.
b) Opening time of .......................................
i) Isolator (sec) .......................................
c) Closing time of .......................................
i) Isolator (sec) .......................................
d) Temperature rise over 50oC

ambient temperature corres-
ponding to maximum continuous
current (oC) .......................................
3. Dielectric with-stand capacity of

Completely assembled Isolator and
earth switch .......................................

withstand test voltage (kV) rms .......................................
i) against ground (kV peak) .......................................
- dry (kV rms) .......................................
- Wet (kV rms) .......................................

withstand test voltage .......................................
i) against ground
(kV peak) .......................................

(kV peak) .......................................
c) 250/2500 micro second

voltage (dry & wet) .......................................
i) against ground
(kV peak) .......................................

NO.
(kV peak) .......................................

(kV rms) .......................................
e) Radio interference level

at 1.1 x Um/3 (in micro volts)
for frequency between 0.5
MHz to 2.0 MHz .......................................
f) Total creepage distance

to ground (mm) .......................................
4. Operating Mechanism .......................................
a) Rated torque of the

mechanism .......................................
b) Type and rating (KW) of

motor .......................................
c) Rated voltage of motor .......................................
d) Full load current (A) .......................................
4.1 Interlockings .......................................
a) Whether mechanical/
between Isolator and Earth Yes/No
switch provided .......................................
b) Details of electrical interlock

enclosed for .......................................
i) Isolator .......................................
ii) Earth Switch .......................................
c) Arrangement provided to
prevent electrical or manual
operation unless interlock
conditions are satisfied .......................................
d) Whether interlock coil is

continuously rated .......................................
NO.
e) Rated D.C. control voltage
and variation allowed .......................................
f) Power consumption (watts) .......................................
4.2 Controls .......................................
a) Rated D. C. control
voltage (Volts) .......................................
b) Limits of voltage .......................................
c) Power consumption of
control coils (W) .......................................
5 Constructional Features
a) Whether position of earth

switch can be interchanged
at site to either side of pole Yes/No
b) Main contacts .......................................
i) Type of contacts .......................................
ii) Contact area (cm2) .......................................
iii) Material of contacts .......................................
iv) Contact pressure (Kg/cm2) .......................................
v) Maximum current density

under normal current
carrying capacity
(Amp/cm2) .......................................
vi) Thickness of silver

plating .......................................
c. Auxiliary contacts on
Isolator .......................................
i) Total number .......................................

i) NO .......................................
iii) NC .......................................

NO.
iv) Adjustable .......................................
v) Make before break .......................................
vi) Rated voltage (volts) .......................................
vii) Rated continuous

current (Amps) .......................................
i) Rated DC breaking
current with 20 ms
time constant (A) .......................................
d) Auxiliary contacts on
earth switch .......................................
i) Total number .......................................
i) NO .......................................
iii) NC .......................................
iv) Adjustable .......................................
v) Rated voltage (volts) .......................................
vi) Rated continuous

current (Amps) .......................................
vii) Rated DC breaking

current with 20 ms
time constant (A) .......................................
e) Whether counter balance

spring provided for
isolator and earth swtich .......................................
6. Literature .......................................
Whether the following are

enclosed:

b) OGA drawing for Isolator Yes/No
with & without earth
switches
NO.
c) Operation manual Yes/No
d) Details of motor operating mechanism Yes/No
e) Leaflets & literature bringing out Yes/No
salient feature of equipments offered
f) Whether details of constructional Yes/No
interlock enclosed.

PART - B
CHAPTER – E3
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER
NO.
E-3
EHV INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER

(Bidder to fill up the data for each type of CT/CVT seperately)
A. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
1. Name & country of the

Manufacturer .......................................
2. Manufacturer's type designation .......................................
3. Standard applicable .......................................
4. Rated frequency (Hz) .......................................
5. Rated Voltage (KV) .......................................
6. i) Rated continuous normal

current (A) .......................................
ii) Rated thermal current (A) .......................................
7. Short time current

withstand for 1 sec. (kA) .......................................
8. Dynamic current withstand

(kA peak) .......................................
9. 1.2/50 micro second impulse

withstand voltage (kv peak) .......................................
10. 250/2500 micro second

switching withstand voltage
(kV peak dry and wet) .......................................
11. One minute dry & wet power

(kV rms) .......................................
12. No. of cores per CT .......................................
13. Transformation Ratio .......................................
14. Number of secondary turns .......................................

NO.
15. Rated Out put (VA) at
different taps. .......................................
16. Accuracy class .......................................
17. Knee - point voltage (volts)

at different taps .......................................
18. Secondary data .......................................
a) Secondary resistance at
different taps .......................................
b) Oversize factor and

transient error under
reclosing duty condition .......................................
19. Maximum exciting current at .......................................
a) 100% kpv (mA) .......................................
b) 25% kpv (mA) .......................................
c) 20% kpv (mA) .......................................
d) 10% kpv (mA) .......................................
20. Instrument security factor

at different ratios .......................................
21. Radio interference

voltage at 1.1 x Um/3 (microvolts)
for frequency between 0.5 MHz to
2.0 MHz .......................................
22. Whether auxiliary CT/reactor

provided for metering winding Yes/No
23. Corona extinction voltage

(kV rms) .......................................
24. Partial discharge level

(pico coulombs) .......................................
25. Total creepage distance (mm) .......................................

NO.
26. a) No. of primary turns .......................................
b) Material and cross section

of primary .......................................
c) Whether bar type or ring

type primary .......................................
27. Whether CT is suitable for

transportation horizontally Yes/No
28. Composite error at rated

burden and at .......................................
a) 20% rated current .......................................
b) 120% rated current .......................................
29. Composite error at 25% rated

burden and at .......................................
a) 20% rated current .......................................
b) 120% rated current .......................................
30. Quality of oil per CT

(litres) .......................................
31. Whether
-spark gap/surge
arrester provided at the
primary Yes/No
- power factor measurement terminal provided Yes/No
32. Standard to which oil

conforms generally .......................................
33. Whether current transformers

are hermetically sealed Yes/No
34. Total weight (Kg) .......................................

35. Transport weight (Kg) .......................................
36. Temperature rise over an
ambient temp. of 50 oC (oC) .......................................

NO.
37. Whether CT characteristic
curves enclosed Yes/No
38. Type Test Reports enclosed Yes/No
B. CAPACTIOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
1. General .......................................

Manufacturer .......................................
d) Rated Voltage (KV rms) .......................................
e) Number of secondaries .......................................
a) Rated output of each

secondary winding (VA) .......................................
b) Total simultaneous burden (VA) .......................................
c) Accuracy class .......................................
d) Rated voltage factor .......................................
i) Continuous .......................................
ii) 5 seconds .......................................
iii) 30 seconds .......................................
e) Capacitance .......................................
i) of high voltage capacitor

(Pieco farads) .......................................

NO.
ii) of intermediate voltage capacitor .......................................

(Pieco farads)
iii) for carrier frequency
coupling (Pieco Farads) .......................................
f) i) Natural frequency of
coupling (kHz) .......................................
ii) Self tuning frequency

of CVT (khz)
(Capacitor Part only) .......................................
g) Band width (kHz) .......................................
h) Temperature rise over

ambient temperature at
50oC (oC) .......................................

test voltage of secondary
winding (kV rns) .......................................
j) One minute power frequency

test voltage of H. F.
terminal (kV rms) .......................................
k) One minute power frequency

test voltage of capacitor
(kV rms ) (dry & wet) .......................................
l) 1.2/50 micro second impulse

withstand test voltage of
capacitor (kV peak) .......................................
m) 250/2500 micro second impulse

voltage of capacitor(dry wet)
(kV peak) .......................................
n) Corona extinction voltage

(kV rms) .......................................
o) Radio interference voltage

at 1.1 x Um/3(micro volts) for

NO.
frequency between 0.5 MHz to
2.0 MHz .......................................
3. Constructional Details .......................................
a) Total weight (Kg) .......................................
b) Quantity of oil (litres) .......................................
c) Whether CVTs are

hermetically sealed Yes/No
d) Standard to which oil

Conforms generally .......................................
4. Literature .......................................

enclosed)
b) OGA drawing Yes/No
c) Characterstic curves Yes/No

PART - B
CHAPTER – E4
SURGE ARRESTER
NO.
E-4
EHV SURGE ARRESTERS
SURGE ARRESTERS
1.0 GENERAL ................................................

Manufacturer ................................................
b) Manufacturer's type designation ................................................
c) Applicable Standard ................................................
2.0. ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
a) Arrester class and type ................................................
b) Rated arrester Voltage (KV) ................................................
c) Maximum continuous operating

voltage (COV) at design
ambient temperature ................................................
d) Nominal discharge current

(8/20 micro sec. wave ) (kA) ................................................
e) i) Minimum discharge
capability (kj/kV) referred
to rated voltage at minimum
of discharge characteristics ................................................
ii) Line Discharge class,

as per IEC ................................................
f) Maximum equivalent front of

wave protection level (dis-
charge voltage with 0.5 x
1.5 micro sec, 10 kA impulse
current) ................................................
g) i) Minimum switching
surge residual voltage
at 1 kA (kVp) ................................................

NO.
ii) Maximum switching surge
residual voltage at
1 kA (kVp) ................................................
h) Maximum residual voltage

for 8/20 micro sec current
wave ................................................
i) at 50% nominal
ii) at 100% nominal

iii) at 200% nominal


(dry) withstand voltage of
arrester (kV rms) ................................................
j) Impulse withstand test

voltage of arrester housing
with 1.2/50 micro sec wave,
(kVp) ................................................
k) Impulse current withstand ................................................
i) High current short

duration (4/10 micro
sec. wave ) kAp ................................................
ii) Low current short

duration ( A peak) ................................................
l) Maximum internal ionisation

at 50 Hz voltage equal to ................................................
i) 1.05 COV ................................................
ii) 1.0 COV ................................................
m) Reference voltage and

corresponding reference
current of arrester ................................................

NO.
n) Maximum internal leakage ................................................
current at (mA)
i) COV ................................................
ii) 1.1 COV ................................................
iii) COV at 150 deg. C ................................................
iv) Reference voltage ................................................
o) Pressure relief class ................................................
p) Are the protection levels

affected by pollution of
external insulation ................................................
q) Energy absorption capability

in KJ per operation of the
arrester, during a switching
surge discharge ................................................
r) Maximum amount of energy

that may be dispatched into
the arrester during discharge
assuming that discharge takes
place within 1 min period and
state the switching surge
current ................................................
s) Internal pressure required

to operate pressure relief
device as a percentage of
burst pressure of procelain ................................................
t) Dynamic overvoltage
withstand KVp ................................................
i) For 3 peaks ................................................
ii) For 0.01 sec ................................................
iii) For 0.1 sec. ................................................
iv) For 1 sec. ................................................

NO.
u) Minimum prospective
symmetrical fault current
(kA rms) ................................................
v) Rejection rate of ZnO

blocks during manufacturing
and operation for the past
three years (%) seperately ................................................
w) Rated voltage of ZnO ................................................

disc (kV)
i) No. of Zno discs ................................................

in a unit
ii) No. of units/arrester ................................................
iii) Height /Thickness of

ZnO discs (mm) ................................................
iv) Diameter of ZnO

disc (mm) ................................................
3.0 EXTERNAL INSULATION
a) Type ................................................
b) Applicable standard ................................................
c) Impulse voltage withstand

test voltage of housing with
1.2/50 micro sec wave (mm) ................................................
d) One minute power frequency

withstand voltage of arrester
housing dry & wet (kV rms) ................................................
e) Total creepage distance of

arrester housing (mm) ................................................
f) Cantilever strength of
complete arrewster (Kg) ................................................

NO.
4. LITERATURE
Whether following are enclosed
a) A description of design and

construction of the arrester.
This shall include the diameter,
thickness and rating of ZnO
block being used. Yes/No
b) Evidence of stability of blocks

over its designed lifetime Yes/No
c) Sectional view of arrester

showing details of electrical
contact between blocks and
the location of pressure relief
device. Yes/No
d) Detail/description and details in

respect of failure mode of
operation , heat removal,
thermal time constant of
arrester. Yes/No
e) Description and details of

operation of discharge counter,
leakage current monitor and
leakage current analyzer Yes/No
f) Description of the effects of

contamination on operation
of arrester and design features
incorporated to minimise these
effects. Yes/No
g) Description of operation of
pressure relief device and the
operation of surge arrestor during
impulse voltage discharge and
transmission line discharge Yes/No
h) Type test reports Yes/No
i) OGA drawing of arrester Yes/No
j) Volt -amp characteristics

of arrestor Yes/No

NO.
k) Calculations for energy

capability of arrester Yes/No
l) Temporary overvoltage withstand

characteristics of arrester. Yes/no
21. Deflection of tubular bus

conductor for 12.5 m span (mm) ...........................................
22. Data applicable to Corona shields (if applicable) ...........................................
a) Material ...........................................
b) Type of fitting (Internal/External) ...........................................
c) Dimensional drawing furnished ...........................................

PART - B
CHAPTER – E5
POST INSULATOR
NO.
E-5
EHV INSULATORS
(Bidder shall furnish these data for each equipment

separately i.e. for circuit Breakers, Instrument Transformer,
Surge Arrestors, etc.)
3. Type .........................................
5. i) Height .........................................
ii) Diameter (Top) .........................................
a) Total (mm) .........................................
7. Rated Voltage .........................................

i) Dry .........................................
ii) Wet .........................................


i) Dry .........................................

NO.
ii) Wet .........................................
11. Weight (Kg) .........................................

ii) Top .........................................
ii) Bottom .........................................
ii) Top .........................................
iii) Bottom .........................................

corona ring
i) Dry (kV rms) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV rms) .........................................

NO.

i) Dry (kV rms) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV rms) .........................................

2.0 MHz .........................................
i) Upright (kg) .........................................
ii) Under (kg) .........................................
C. STRING INSULATOR
1. Manufacturer .........................................
a) Insulator .........................................
b) Hardware .........................................

NO.
b) Normal/antifog .........................................
6. Size of each unit .........................................
b) Spacing between
7. Weight .........................................
a) Each Disc (Kg) .........................................
a) Each Disc (Kg) .........................................

voltage
a) Each Disc .........................................
i) Dry (kV) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV) .........................................

NO.
i) Dry (kV) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV) .........................................
a) Each Disc .........................................
i) Positive (kVp) .........................................

ii) Negative (kVp) .........................................
i) Positive (kVp) .........................................
ii) Negative (kVp) .........................................
a) Each Disc (kVp) .........................................

disc (kV rms) .........................................
a) Each Disc (Kg) .........................................
i) Single tension .........................................

PART - B
CHAPTER – E6
WAVE TRAP
NO.
E-6
WAVE TRAPS
(Bidder to furnish data for each type and rating separately)
1. Name of Manufacturer and country .........................................
2. Type .........................................
3. System Voltage rating .........................................
4. Continuous current rating at 50 oC

ambient .........................................
5. Continuous current rating at 65oC

ambient .........................................
6. Maximum Symmetrical short

circuit current rating for 1 sec.
duration .........................................
7. Asynnetric Peak value of first half

wave of rated short time current .........................................
8. Rated Inductance .........................................
9. Blocking Range .........................................
10. Minimum Guatanteed Resistive

component in blocking Frequency
Range .........................................
11. Type of Tuning .........................................
12. Variation in 50 Hz Impedance per

DegreeCentrigrade Variation in
ambient Temperature .........................................
13. Variation in resonant Frequency

Band per degree Centrigrade
variation in ambient Temperature .........................................
14. Details of protection of Capacitor

and coils against voltage surges
Indicate type of protective device. .........................................

SWITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION VII PART-B PAGE 1
NO.
15. Basic Insulation Level .........................................
16. Standard nominal Discharge current

of Protective Device or 8/20 micro
Second wave impulse .........................................
17. Parameter of Protecive Device

(Gapped Arreator) .........................................
a) Rated voltage .........................................
b) Minimum discharge capacity

referred to rated voltage (kj/kV) .........................................
c) Maximum equivalent front

of wave protection level
at a discharge voltage with
0.5 x 1.5 microsec (10kA
impulse current) .........................................
d) i) Maximum Switching
Surge residual voltage
at 1 kA (kVp) .........................................
ii) Minimum Swtiching

Surge residual voltage
at 1 kA (kVp) .........................................
e) Maximum Residual Voltage

of Protective Device for 8/20
micro impulse discharge
current of .........................................
i) 5, 000 Amps .........................................
ii) 10, 000 Amps. .........................................
18. Parametears of gapless

Arrester filled in as per data
sheets of surge Arrester (E 15) Yes/No
19. Class of Insulation of line

trap as per Table - 1 of
IEC 353 .........................................
20. Temperature rise in line

trap under rated continuous

NO.
current .........................................
21. Visual corona extinction voltage .........................................
22. Radio Interference Voltage at

1.1 Um/3 (microvolts) for
frequency between 0.5
MHz to 2.0 MHz .........................................
23. Type of mounting .........................................
24. Maximum working stress .........................................
25. Ultimate tensile strength .........................................
26. Material of main coil .........................................
27. Net Weight .........................................
28. Whether corona rings

are provided? Yes/no
29. Whether bird barriers

are provided? Yes/No
30. Over all dimensions .........................................
a) Diameter .........................................
b. Height .........................................
31. No. of turns in line trap main coil

and no. of layers .........................................
32. Type of conductor whether

solid or stranded .........................................
33. Overall conductor size .........................................
34. Cross-sectional area of conductor .........................................
35. Type of construction number of

coils and whether open type or

NO.
covered with insulating material) .........................................
36. Type & material of turn to turn

spacers .........................................
a) Matearial .........................................
b) Type of fitting (Internal/External) .........................................
c) Dimensional drawing furnished .........................................
37. External finish of Wave Trap (color etc.) .........................................

PART - B
CHAPTER – E7
LIGHTING
E-7
LIGHTING
The following technical data shall be submitted by the Contractor
against each item for each type/rating/size for Employer's approval.
1.00.00 Lighting Panel
a) Make ..........................................
b) Country of Manufacture ..........................................
c) Applicable Standard ..........................................
d) Rated voltage ..........................................
e) Current rating
i) Incomer ..........................................
ii) Outgoing feeders ..........................................
f) No. of outgoing feeders & rating ..........................................
g) Busbars ..........................................
i) Current rating ..........................................
ii) Size and material ..........................................
iii) Temp rise over ambient of ..........................................

500 C
h) Thickness of sheet steel ..........................................
i) Degree of protection ..........................................
j) Colour of finish paint ..........................................
i) Inside ..........................................
ii) Outside ..........................................
k) Overall dimensions ..........................................
l) Weight ..........................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER-E7

2.00.00 Miniature circuit breaker ..........................................
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type designation ..........................................
iii) Applicable standard ..........................................
iv) Rated voltage & frequency ..........................................
v) Rated current at 500C ambient ..........................................
vi) Breaking capacity at 0.6 p.f. ..........................................
vii) Type of tripping device ..........................................
viii) No. of poles ..........................................
ix) Overall dimensions ..........................................
3,00.00 Isolator ..........................................
i) Make ..........................................
iv) Rated voltage ..........................................
v) Rated current at 500 C ambient ..........................................
vi) No of poles ..........................................
vii) Category ..........................................
4.00.00 Fuses
i) Make ..........................................

iv) Type ..........................................
v) Rated Voltage ..........................................
vi) Rated Current ..........................................
vii) Rupturing capacity ..........................................
5.00.00 Contactor
i) Make ..........................................
iv) Rated voltage ..........................................
v) Rated current at 500 C ambient ..........................................
vi) Coil voltage ..........................................
vii) No. of NO/NC contacts ..........................................
viii) Rated burden ..........................................
ix) Duty class ..........................................
6.00.00 Synchronous timer
i) Make ..........................................
iv) Rating ..........................................
v) Coil voltage ..........................................
vi) Timing range ..........................................
vii) No. of contacts ..........................................

r) Terminal Blocks
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
iii) Current rating
a) Incomer terminal ..........................................
b) Out going terminal ..........................................
iv) Voltage Grade ..........................................
v) Applicable standard ..........................................
vi) Material ..........................................
7.00.00 Lighting fixtures & accessories

(for each type of fixture)
a) Make of lighting fixture ..........................................
b) Maker's type designation ..........................................
d) Nominal working voltage & frequency ..........................................
e) Max. permissible voltage variation (+_%) ..........................................
f) Max. permissible frequency variation (+-%) ..........................................
g) Power factor at nominal voltage ..........................................
h) Size of conduit entry ..........................................
i) Size & material of earthing terminal ..........................................
j) Max size of no. of wires possible to terminate ..........................................

on each fixture terminal.
k) Weight of fixture ..........................................

7.01.00 Lamps
i) Make & Type ..........................................
iii) Nominal voltage & rating ..........................................
iv) Lamp lumen output at design ..........................................

temp.
- after 100 burning hours ..........................................
- after 2000 burning hours ..........................................
- at the end of life period ..........................................
v) Average expected life at ..........................................

nominal voltage
vi) Average expected life at ..........................................

110% nominal voltage
7.02.00 Copper Ballast
i) Make & Type ..........................................
iv) Class of insulation ..........................................
v) Tap setting range ..........................................
vi) Average expected life at ..........................................

nominal voltage
vii) Power loss at nominal voltage & ..........................................

frequency
7.03.00 Electronic Ballast

i) Make & Type ..........................................
iv) Operating frequency ..........................................
v) Degree of protection ..........................................
vi) Average expected life at nominal ..........................................

voltage
vii) Power loss at nominal voltage & ..........................................

frequency
7.04.00 Igniter
i) Make & Type ..........................................
7.05.00 Capacitor
i) Make & Type ..........................................
iii) Rating ..........................................
iv) Nominal voltage ..........................................
v) Capacitance ..........................................
7.06.0 Reflector
i) Material ..........................................
ii) Thickness ..........................................
7.07.00 Diffuser/Louvre material ..........................................

s) Starter
i) Make & Type ..........................................
8.00.00 Portable emergency lighting
a) Make ..........................................
b) Applicable Standard ..........................................
c) Type designation ..........................................
d) Rating ..........................................
e) Nominal working voltage ..........................................
f) Time requirement for charging ..........................................
g) Total duration for which out put will ..........................................

be available in emergencey
h) Luminaure Type ..........................................
i) Enclosure ..........................................
j) Type fo charging device used ..........................................
k) Battery
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
iii) Voltage Rating ..........................................
iv) Capacity, AH ..........................................
l) Charging device ..........................................

i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
m) Lamp
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
iii) Rating & Voltage ..........................................
n) Expected life of the unit
o) Approx. weight of unit ..........................................
i) Without battery ..........................................
ii) Total weight ..........................................
p) Finish ..........................................
q) Overall dimensions ..........................................
9.00.00 Hand Lamp
a) Make ..........................................
b) Type ..........................................
c) Rating ..........................................
d) Nominal voltage ..........................................
f) Transformer rating ..........................................
g) Lamp rating & voltage ..........................................
10.00.00 Switch Box
a) Make ..........................................
b) Type ..........................................

c) Thickness of sheet steel ..........................................
d) Material & thickness of front cover
e) Construction (deep drawn/welded) ..........................................
f) Switch ..........................................
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
iii) Current rating & voltage ..........................................
iv) Applicable standard ..........................................
g) Sockets
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
iii) Current rating ..........................................
h) Terminal Blocks ..........................................
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
iv) Voltage grade ..........................................
vi) Material ..........................................
i) Surface finish ..........................................

11.00.00 Receptacles
a) Make ..........................................
b) Type ..........................................
c) Rating ..........................................
d) Applicable standard ..........................................
e) Degree of protection ..........................................
g) Enclosure (sheet steel/ ..........................................

diecast aluminium)
h) Switch
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Rating ..........................................
iii) Type ..........................................
v) Switch cat no. ..........................................
i) Terminal blocks
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
vi) Voltage grade ..........................................
j) Surface finish

12.00.00 Junction Boxes
a) Make ..........................................
b) Type ..........................................
d) Degree of protection ..........................................
e) Type of construction ..........................................

(Dep drawn/welded)
f) Thickness of sheet steel ..........................................
g) Fuse
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
iii) Rating ..........................................
v) Rupturing capacity ..........................................
h) Terminal Blocks
i) Make ..........................................
ii) Type ..........................................
iii) Rating ..........................................
iv) Current rating ..........................................
v) Voltage grade ..........................................

vi) Applicable Standard
i) Surface finsih
13.00.00 Rigid steel conduits/fitting & accessories
a) Make ..........................................
b) Applicable standard ..........................................
c) Type ..........................................
d) Size ..........................................
e) Material of coating ..........................................
i) Inside surface ..........................................
ii) Outside surface ..........................................
f) Standard length of conduit ..........................................
g) Wall thickness ..........................................
h) Outer dia ..........................................
i) Inner dia ..........................................
14.00.00 Flexible Conduits

a) Make ..........................................
b) Applicable standard ..........................................
c) Type/Material specification ..........................................
d) Nominal Inner dia ..........................................
e) Outer dia ..........................................

f) Size ..........................................
g) Minimum thickness of coating ..........................................
h) Wall thickness ..........................................
i) Standard length of conduit ..........................................
j) Degree of protection ..........................................
15.00.00 Lighting Wires

a) Make ..........................................
b) Type designation ..........................................
d) Voltage grade ..........................................
e) Size ..........................................
f) Conductor material ..........................................
g) No. of standard ..........................................
h) Conductor dia ..........................................
i) Conductor resistance at 200 C ..........................................
j) Insulation material ..........................................
k) Current rating at 500 C ..........................................

l) Insulation thickness ..........................................
m) Colour of insulation ..........................................
n) Volume resistivity at 27 0 C ..........................................
o) Wire dia (over all dia) ..........................................
p) Standard spool length ..........................................

a) Make ..........................................
b) Type ..........................................
d) Pole height ..........................................
e) Material and dimensions ..........................................

of different section
f) Overhang length ..........................................
g) Swaged/stepped
h) Painting
i) Inside ..........................................
ii) Outside ..........................................
i) Weight ..........................................
17.00.00 Lighting Masts

a) Make ..........................................
b) Type ..........................................

d) Thickness of sections ..........................................
e) Thickness of galvanise/coating ..........................................
g) Overall height ..........................................
h) Weight ..........................................
i) Finish ..........................................
18.00.00 Fans
a) Make ..........................................
b) Type ..........................................
d) Rated voltage ..........................................
e) Motor rating ..........................................
f) Efficiency ..........................................
g) Power factor ..........................................
h) Class of insulation ..........................................
i) Speed ..........................................
J) Winding material ..........................................

k) Surface finish ..........................................
l) Type of regulator ..........................................
m) No of steps of regulator ..........................................
n) Material of
i) Housing ..........................................
ii) Blades ..........................................
o) Whether the fan and regulator are ISI marked ..........................................

PART - B
CHAPTER – E8
VOID
PART - B
CHAPTER – E9
VOID
PART - B
CHAPTER – E10
CLAUSE BIDDER’S NAME
NO.
CHAPTER –E11
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM (SAS) FOR

765/132kV SWITCHYARD
1.00.00 General Technical Details and Drawings
1.01.00 SAS Manufacturer’s Name

……………………………….
1.02.00 Make/Model No
……………………………….
1.03.00 Place of Manufacture
……………………………….
1.04.00 Detailed descriptions of SAS proposed by the Bidder
including SAS architecture drawing covering all
salient features of hardware, software, system
configuration for each system/sub-system testing,
documentation, post commissioning support facilities,
etc. furnished at
Complete Bill of Materials including all hardware Page No …… Sec No …….

1.05.00 items/equipment and accessories (including
maintenance and test equipment) furnished at
Bidder to state any constraints imposed by proposed Page No …… Sec No …….

system as regards to expansion
1.06.00
a) Addition of BCUs
b) Addition of OWSs and peripherals (like

CRT/Keyboard, printers) Page No …… Sec No …….
c) Addition of discreet numerical relays

Page No …… Sec No …….
d) Increase in communication through put
e) Memory addition
f) Software license as per clause 4.00.00 of Page No …… Sec No …….
Technical Specification
On-line removal/replacement of BCUs/BPUs possible Page No …… Sec No …….
without switching off power supply to the
corresponding rack & without affecting SAS operation
1.07.00
Guaranteed annual system availability (refer to
2.02.00) Yes/No ……………………..
Supporting calculations for 1.08.00 above enclosed.

1.08.00
……………………………….
Self Diagnostics
DARLIPALLI STPP-I (2X800MW) ATTACHMENT-12 CHAPTER E-10 PAGE 1
SWITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION-VII PART-B
NO.
1.09.00 Confirm that on-line self diagnostics have been Yes/No ……………………..
provided at :
1.10.00
- Control Level 2 for HMI and its components
including substation
Level / Inter bay (BCU/BPU) Level LAN
- Control Level 1 for each BCU and individual

numerical relays comprising various BPUs
Performance figures during system worst case Yes/No ……………………..

conditions
Overall display response time (alarms, status, Yes/No ……………………..

analogues)
1.11.00
Expected LAN loading
Expected CPU usage of workstations and controllers

1.11.01
Detailed calculation of DC and AC SAS load Page No …… Sec No …….
requirement
1.11.02 Page No …… Sec No …….
Power Fail Auto Restart (PFAR) facility provided
1.11.03 Page No …… Sec No …….
Accuracy in terms of time for all devices within
1.11.04 substation with time synchronization (in line with Page No …… Sec No …….
Clause 1.09.00 of Technical Specification)
1.11.05 Bidder to confirm strict compliance to specification Yes/No ……………………..

requirements
1.12.00
Clause by clause compliance statement to Chapter
10 of the SAS specification
……………………………….
1.13.00 Detailed description of method of interlocking
operation
Yes/No ……………………..
Detailed description of interface provided to
1.14.00 Generation Plant SAS/SCADA, including information
required from third party devices to facilitate this Page No …… Sec No …….
interface
1.15.00
Spares and Repairs : Page No …… Sec No …….
1.16.00 State availability of spares in country and spares

holding in country of origin
Maximum repair turnaround time


NO.
1.17.00 Define the proposed repair strategy
1.17.01 Recommended spares list
List of reference sites in operation for more than 1 Page No …… Sec No …….
1.17.02 year
1.17.03 Statement confirming the design life of the system
and/or any restrictions/proposed corrective action in
this regard (refer to 1.15.00) Page No …… Sec No …….
1.17.04
1.18.00
1.19.00
2.00.00 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) for SAS
2.01.00 Bidder to confirm the compliance of HMI to

specification requirements Yes/No ……………………..
2.02.00 No. of Operator’s Workstations (OWS) provided in

offered SAS
……………………………….
2.03.00 No of Engineering Workstations provided in offered
SAS ……………………………….
Interchangeability of OWS as per the requirements of

2.04.00 specification Yes/No ……………………..
Bidder to confirm that no single failure in Substation

2.05.00 Controller shall lead to non-availability of more than
one OWS
Yes/No ……………………..
Operating system for Operator’s/Engineering
2.06.00 Workstation
……………………………….
2.07.00 Workstations Operator’s/Programmer’s/Others
2.07.01 Make / Model No ……………………………….

2.07.02 Processor ……………………………….
2.07.03 Clock speed
NO.
……………………………….
2.07.04 Hard disk size
……………………………….
2.07.05 CD-ROM Drive & DVD Drive
……………………………….
2.07.06 RAM
2.07.07 Please indicate each workstation includes the ……………………………….

following :
a) CRT
Yes/No : Yes/No : Yes/No
b) Function keyboard
c) Mouse
CRTs
2.07.08
a) Make/Model No
……………………………….
b) Size of screen
……………………………….
c) SVGA monitor
Yes/No
d) Suitable for table-top arrangement
Printers
Yes/No
2.07.09
a) Make/Model No
Colour Laser B&W Laser
b) Speed of print (B&W)
……………………………….
c) Speed of print (colour)
……………………………….
Keyboards
……………………………….
2.07.10 a) Make/Model No
b) Membrane type
……………………………….
Laptop (Notebook) PC
Yes/No
2.08.00 a) Make/Model No
b) Processor
c) Clock speed ……………………………….
d) Hard disk size ……………………………….
e) CD-ROM drive size ……………………………….

NO.
f) RAM ……………………………….
Rear Project Mimic Display Unit ……………………………….
Make and type of MIMIC
……………………………….
2.10.00
Country of manufacture
2.10.01
Reference standards
2.10.02
Service intervals of lamps used and details of
operating cost of unit
2.10.03
Overall dimensions of MIMIC and number of
2.10.04 sub-modules used, if any
2.10.05
3.00.00 Communication Network
3.01.00 Data communication speed for Substation LAN ……………………………….

3.02.00 Provide drawing of data communication bus for :
a) Substation network
b) Interbay (BCU/BPU) bus including details of
cable type, armouring, etc
Data cable for substation network as well as Interbay
3.03.00 (BCU/BPU) bus is armoured as per 8.02.00 & 8.03.00
Yes/No
Communication protocol used for :
3.04.00
a) Devices at Control Level 1 as per specification
(i.e. BCU & BPU)
……………………………….
b) Substation Level LAN at Control Level 2 as per
specification
Data communication speed for Substation Network & ……………………………….

Interbay Bus
3.05.00
Interface with Owner’s OPC-compliant DCS provided ……………………………….
NO.
3.06.00 in line with the requirements of technical specification

Yes / No
3.07.00 Gateways (Each type)
3.07.01 Protocols supported by each type ……………………………….

3.07.02 No. of communication Ports
……………………………….
3.07.03 Details of communication Ports
……………………………….
4.00.00 Bay Control Units (BCU)
4.01.00 Make and type of BCU offered for:
400kV Bays
……………………………….
4.02.00 No of BCU offered for each 400kV bay
……………………………….
4.03.00 No of analog inputs in each BCU
……………………………….
4.04.00 No of digital inputs in each BCU
……………………………….
4.05.00 No of digital outputs in each BCU
……………………………….
4.06.00 Accuracy of analog measurements in BCU :
a) Voltage
b) Current ……………………………….
c) Frequency ……………………………….
d) Power ……………………………….
Bay mimic provided on BCU display ……………………………….

4.07.00
Time resolution, in ms, for events/alarms acquired by Yes/No
4.08.00 BCU
Built-in functions provided (if any) (list out)

……………………………….
4.09.00
Detailed Technical Catalogue for offered BCU
4.10.00 enclosed ……………………………….
Synchronization
4.11.00 Yes/No
i) Angle range
NO.
ii) Frequency (slip) range Yes/No

iii) Voltage range
iv) Synchronization source (Line/Phase) ……………………………….
……………………………….
……………………………….
……………………………….
4.00.00 Bay Protection Unit (BPU) for Lines Main-I Main-II
4.01.01 765 kV Lines
a) Make and type of Main I/Main II Numerical

Relay offered
b) Country of manufacture
c) Hardware version number ……………………………….
d) Firmware version number ……………………………….
e) Mean-time between failures ……………………………….

f) Rated Voltage Vn (phase-to-neutral) ……………………………….
g) Rated Current In
……………………………….
h) Rated Frequency
……………………………….
i) Overvoltage capability - continuous
……………………………….
j) Overvoltage capability – 3s
………………………………
k) Burden on voltage transformers (VA per phase)
………………………………
l) Overcurrent capability - continuous
………………………………
m) Overcurrent capability – 1s
n) Burden on current transformers (VA per phase)

………………………………
o) Reference standards ………………………………
p) Operating principle ………………………………
q) Is it a full scheme design i.e. six measuring ………………………………

systems for each zone

NO.
r) Operation indicator provided separately for Yes/No Yes/No

phase & zone of operation, power swing
block/trip, SOTF, A/R Block, etc
Yes/No Yes/No
s) Maximum operating time for a source to line
impedance ratio equal to 15 and fault at Zone 1
reach setting
t) Setting range (Ohmic, time & angular) : ……………………………….
- Zone 1
- Zone 2 ……………………………….
- Zone 3 ……………………………….
- Additional Zones, if available ……………………………….

u) Maximum resetting time
……………………………….
v) Setting range of offset feature
……………………………….
w) Suitable for single and three phase trip?
……………………………….
x) Shape of characteristics for :
- Earth faults Yes/No Yes/No
- Phase faults
y) Required minimum voltage at relay terminals ……………………………….

z) Fault resistance coverage
……………………………….
aa) Zero sequence compensation range (Z0/Z1)
……………………………….
bb) Whether mutual compensation module for
double circuit lines included? ……………………………….
cc) Available compensation setting range ……………………………….
dd) Self monitoring and cyclical test facilities

available? Yes/No Yes/No
ee) Display on demand of various measured

……………………………….
parameters, alarms, clock, settings, etc
available?
ff) Facility for synchronization of internal clock with Yes/No Yes/No

GPS, in line with specification requirement

NO.
provided
Yes/No Yes/No
gg) Built-in functions provided :
– Local overvoltage function

Yes/No Yes/No
– Compensate overvoltage function
- Voltage setting range
- Drop off/pick up ratio
- Timer setting range Yes/No Yes/No
- Open jumper protection Yes/No Yes/No

…………………………….
- Power swing blocking
……………………………….
- Weak in-feed tripping logic
……………………………….
- Echo function
Yes/No Yes/No
- CVT fuse failure function
Yes/No Yes/No
- Switch onto fault function
Yes/No Yes/No
Yes/No Yes/No
- Digital fault recording function
Yes/No Yes/No
- Trip coil supervision function
Yes/No Yes/No
- Distance to fault locator function
Yes/No Yes/No
hh) List out the user-configurable carrier-aided
scheme logics (such as PUTT, POTT, Direct Yes/No Yes/No
Transfer Trip, etc) and non-carrier aided
schemes such as Zone 1 extension etc,
provided Yes/No Yes/No
ii) Multiple settings group feature available Yes/No Yes/No

(indicate the number of available setting groups)
jj) Back-up earth fault protection functions provided ……………………………….

……………………………….
kk) Dead Line Charging feature provided ……………………………….
……………………………….
ll) Communication ports – number and type
mm) Relay operating and analysis software ……………………………….

NO.
nn) Built-in sequence of event recording Yes/No Yes/No
- Resolution Yes/No Yes/No

- Number of stored events
……………………………….
oo) Built-in oscillography
……………………………….
pp) Self supervision
4.01.02 Yes/No Yes/No
132kV Lines
……………………………….
a) Make and type of Main I/Main II Numerical ……………………………….
Relay offered
Yes/No Yes/No
Yes/No Yes/No
c) Hardware version number
d) Firmware version number
e) Mean-time between failures

……………………………….
f) Rated Voltage Vn (phase-to-neutral)
……………………………….
g) Rated Current In
h) Rated Frequency
……………………………….
i) Overvoltage capability - continuous ……………………………….
j) Overvoltage capability – 3s ……………………………….
k) Burden on voltage transformers (VA per phase) ……………………………….

l) Overcurrent capability - continuous ……………………………….
m) Overcurrent capability – 1s
………………………………
………………………………
o) Reference standards
………………………………
p) Operating principle
………………………………
q) Is it a full scheme design i.e. six measuring
systems for each zone ………………………………
r) Operation indicator provided separately for
phase & zone of operation, power swing ………………………………
NO.
block/trip, SOTF, A/R Block, etc

………………………………
s) Maximum operating time for a source to line
impedance ratio equal to 15 and fault at Zone 1
reach setting ………………………………
t) Setting range (Ohmic, time & angular) : ………………………………
- Zone 1
Yes/No Yes/No
- Zone 2
- Zone 3
Yes/No Yes/No
- Additional Zones, if available
u) Maximum resetting time

……………………………….
v) Setting range of offset feature
w) Suitable for single and three phase trip?

……………………………….
x) Shape of characteristics for :
- Earth faults ……………………………….
- Phase faults ……………………………….
y) Required minimum voltage at relay terminals ……………………………….
z) Fault resistance coverage ……………………………….

aa) Zero sequence compensation range (Z0/Z1)
……………………………….
bb) Whether mutual compensation module for
Yes/No Yes/No
double circuit lines included?
cc) Available compensation setting range
dd) Self monitoring and cyclical test facilities ……………………………….

available?
……………………………….
ee) Display on demand of various measured
parameters, alarms, clock, settings, etc ……………………………….
available?
ff) Facility for synchronization of internal clock with ……………………………….

GPS, in line with specification requirement
provided ……………………………….

NO.
gg) Built-in functions provided :

Yes/No Yes/No
- Local overvoltage function
……………………………….
- Voltage setting range
- Drop off/pick up ratio Yes/No Yes/No
- Timer setting range
- Open jumper protection

Yes/No Yes/No
- Power swing blocking
- Weak in-feed tripping logic

Yes/No Yes/No
- Echo function
- CVT fuse failure function

Yes/No Yes/No
- Switch onto fault function
……………………………….
……………………………….
- Digital fault recording function
……………………………….
- Trip coil supervision function
Yes/No Yes/No
- Distance to fault locator function
Yes/No Yes/No
hh) List out the user-configurable carrier-aided
scheme logics (such as PUTT, POTT, Direct
Transfer Trip, etc) and non-carrier aided Yes/No Yes/No
schemes such as Zone 1 extension etc,
provided Yes/No Yes/No
ii) Multiple settings group feature available Yes/No Yes/No

(indicate the number of available setting groups)
Yes/No Yes/No
jj) Back-up earth fault protection functions provided
Yes/No Yes/No
kk) Dead Line Charging feature provided
Yes/No Yes/No
mm) Communication ports – number and
type Yes/No Yes/No
mm) Relay operating and analysis software Yes/No Yes/No
nn) Built-in sequence of event recording

……………………………….
NO.
- Resolution ……………………………….
- Number of stored events ……………………………….
……………………………….
oo) Built-in oscillography
pp) Self supervision

……………………………….
Yes/No Yes/No
Yes/No Yes/No
……………………………….
……………………………….
Yes/No Yes/No
……………………………….
……………………………….
Yes/No Yes/No
Yes/No Yes/No
4.02.00 Open Jumper Protection
a) Built-in or stand alone ……………………………….

b) If stand alone, manufacturer’s name, type and
designation
……………………………….
c) Operating principle
……………………………….
d) Operation indicator provided
Yes/No
e) Setting range
……………………………….
f) Timer setting range
……………………………….
g) Drop off/pick up ratio
……………………………….
h) Built-in fault recording feature available for Open
Jumper Protection function
Yes/No
4.03.00 Power Swing Blocking Relay

NO.
a) Name and country of

manufacturer
..........................................
b) Manufacturer's type and
designation
..........................................
c) Reference standards
..........................................
d) Operating principle
..........................................
e) Numerical
Yes/no
f) Operation indicator provided?
Yes/No
g) Setting range (Ohmic, time
& angular)
i) Ohmic
ii) Angular
..........................................
iii) Time
..........................................
..........................................
4.04.00 Fuse Failure Relay
a) Name and country of

manufacturer ..........................................
b) Manufacturer type and ..........................................

designation
c) Contacts-Self reset/hand reset

..........................................
d) Operation indicator provided?
Yes/No
e) Operating time
..........................................
f) Whether monitors all 3 phases
..........................................
g) Whether operates on earth faults?
Yes/No
h) Whether activates B/up O/C and E/F Protection
Yes/No
i) Numerical
Yes/no

NO.
4.05.00 Line Over Voltage Relay (59 L)
a) Manufacturer & country

of manufacturer ..........................................
b) Type designation ........................................
c) Hardware version number ........................................
d) Firmware version number ........................................
e) Mean-time between failures .......................................
f) Rated voltage ........................................
g) Setting ranges ........................................
h) Drop off/pick up ratio ........................................
i) Timer setting range .......................................
j) Numerical Yes/no
k) no. of Voltage stages

………………………
l) no. of time stages
………………………
4.06.00 Auto Reclose and Synchronizing Check Relay
4.06.01 a) Recloser Manufacturer’s name, type and

designation
……………………………….
……………………………….
……………………………….
……………………………….
……………………………….
f) Rated Voltage Vn (phase-to-neutral)
……………………………….
g) Rated Current In
……………………………….
h) Rated Frequency

NO.
i) Overvoltage capability - continuous ………………………………

j) Overvoltage capability – 3s ………………………………
………………………………
l) Over current capability - continuous
………………………………
m) Over current capability – 1s
………………………………
………………………………
………………………………
………………………………
q) Suitable for single as well as three phase
reclosure
……………………………….
r) Single Phase Dead Time Setting Range
Yes/No
s) Three Phase Dead Time Setting Range
……………………………….
t) Reclaim Time Setting Range
……………………………….
u) Single shot or multi-shot
……………………………….
v) Synchronism check ‘window’ time
……………………………….
w) Communication ports – number and types
x) Relay operating and analysis software

……………………………….
y) Self supervision ……………………………….
z) Built-in sequence of event recording ……………………………….
- Resolution Yes/No
Yes/No
aa) Built-in oscillography
……………………………….
……………………………….
Yes/No
4.06.02 a) Synchronizer Manufacturer’s name, type and

designation ……………………………….
NO.
……………………………….
……………………………….
g) Rated Current In ……………………………….
h) Rated Frequency ……………………………….

i) Overvoltage capability - continuous ………………………………
………………………………
………………………………
………………………………
………………………………
………………………………
………………………………
q) Range of angle at closure

………………………………
r) Slip frequency setting range ……………………………….
s) Dead line/bus voltage range ……………………………….
t) Line line/bus voltage range ……………………………….

u) Delta synchronizing voltage amplitude ……………………………….
v) Synchronizing voltage source (line/phase)
……………………………….
w) Manual close permission selection options
……………………………….
x) Automatic reclose permission selection options
……………………………….
y) Operation indicator provided
……………………………….

NO.
……………………………….
Yes/No
4.06.03 Dead Line Charging Feature

designation
……………………………….
c) Whether two sets of relays present
Yes/No
d) Whether each set able to monitor the three
phase voltage?
Yes/No
e) Setting of the relay set connected to Line CVT
……………………………….
f) Setting of the relay set connected to Bus CVT
……………………………….
g) Operating time
……………………………….
h) Resetting time
……………………………….
i) Principle of operation
……………………………….
4.07.00 Stand alone/Built-in Digital Fault Recorder
a) Manufacturer’s name, type and designation

……………………………….
……………………………….
d) Firmware version number ……………………………….
g) Rated Current In ……………………………….

h) Rated Frequency
……………………………….
………………………………
NO.
………………………………
………………………………
………………………………
n) Burden on current transformers (VA per phase) ………………………………
p) Operating principle ………………………………
q) Bidder to confirm compliance to requirements of ………………………………

technical specification
……………………………….
r) Scan rate range
i) Selectable dual scan rate

Yes/No
s) No of analog channels offered
……………………………….
t) No of digital channels offered
Yes/No
u) By how many numbers can the channels be
expanded : ……………………………….
- Analog channels ……………………………….

- Digital channels
……………………………….
v) Following starting sensors provided :
- Threshold (voltage, current & frequency) ……………………………….
- Rate of change of voltage & frequency
w) Pre-fault memory (in milliseconds) Yes/No
x) Post-fault memory (in milliseconds) Yes/No
y) Frequency response ……………………………….
z) Resolution of digital channels (in ms) ……………………………….

aa) Amplitude resolution ……………………………….
bb) Memory capacity in solid state non-volatile
memory ……………………………….

NO.
cc) Provision for time synchronization of internal ……………………………….

clock with GPS, in line with the specification
requirement provided
……………………………….
dd) Whether fault data is available in
IEEE/COMTRADE format at Substation Level
for analysis as per the requirements of technical Yes/No
specification
ee) Whether alarm output contacts provided for

power supply fail, processor fail, memory fail, Yes/No
printer fail, etc provided
ff) Whether software for analysis of fault data

provided
gg) Detailed technical literature enclosed Yes/No
hh) Communication ports – number and type
ii) Self supervision Yes/No
Yes/No
……………………………….
……………………………….
Yes/No
4.08.00 Distance to Fault Recorder
a) Built-in (with in DFR) or stand alone ……………………………….

designation
……………………………….
c) Country of manufacture
……………………………….
d) Hardware version number
……………………………….
e) Firmware version number
……………………………….
f) Mean-time between failures
……………………………….
g) Rated Voltage Vn (phase-to-neutral)
……………………………….
h) Rated Current In
NO.
………………………………
h) Rated Frequency
………………………………
………………………………
k) Burden on voltage transformers (VA per phase) ………………………………
l) Over current capability - continuous ………………………………
m) Over current capability – 1s ………………………………
n) Burden on current transformers (VA per phase) ………………………………

……………………………….
q) Whether “Online” type
……………………………….
r) Whether both phase to phase fault and phase to
earth fault measuring units included ……………………………….
s) Provision for mutual zero sequence

compensation provided Yes/No
t) Accuracy for all types of faults and fault levels

Yes/No
u) Whether direct display unit provided
……………………………….
v) Technical literature enclosed
Yes/No
v) Communication ports – number and type
Yes/No
x) Self supervision
……………………………….
t) Guaranteed distance to fault accuracy in %
including all measurement errors
Yes/No
……………………………….
4.09.00 High Speed Trip Relay
a) Name and country of manufacturer ……………………………….

b) Manufacturer’s type and designation
……………………………….
NO.
……………………………….
d) No of contacts :
i) Normally open
ii) Normally closed ……………………………….
e) Contacts manual resetting feature from ……………………………….

Substation Level as well as BCU Level provided
f) Operation indicator provided Yes/No
g) i) Operating time at rated voltage (maximum) Yes/No
ii) Operating range of voltage ……………………………….

h) Whether supervisory relays included ……………………………….
i) Operating range of voltage Yes/No
……………………………….
5.00.00 RELAYS COMMON TO LINE BAY, GT BAY & BUS COUPLER BAY BCU
5.01.00 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay

designation
……………………………….
……………………………….
d) Operation indicator provided
Yes/No
e) Whether pre-close and post-close supervision
provided?
Yes/No
g) Time delay
……………………………….
5.02.00 Local Breaker Back-up Protection (50 LBB)
a) Manufacturer’s name, type and designation ……………………………….

NO.
b) Country of manufacture ……………………………….

c) Hardware version number ……………………………….
……………………………….
……………………………….
f) Duplicated
Yes/No
g) Build specify location
……………………………….
h) Rated Voltage Vn (phase-to-neutral)
……………………………….
i) Rated Current In
……………………………….
j) Rated Frequency
……………………………….
k) Over current capability - continuous
l) Over current capability – 1s

……………………………….
m) Burden on current transformers (VA per phase) ……………………………….
n) Reference standards ……………………………….
o) Operating principle ……………………………….

p) Operation indicator provided ……………………………….
q) Setting ranges : Yes/No
i) Current
……………………………….
ii) Time
……………………………….
r) Operating time
……………………………….
s) Resetting time
……………………………….
u) Communication ports – number and types
……………………………….
v) Relay operating and analysis software
……………………………….
w) No of binary outputs
Yes/No
x) No of binary inputs
y) Self supervision ……………………………….

NO.
……………………………….
Yes/No
5.03.00 765 kV ‘Tee’ Protection (87TT-I, 87TT-II) 87TT-I 87TT-II
a) Manufacturer’s name, type and designation ……………………………….
b) Country of manufacture ……………………………….

……………………………….
……………………………….
……………………………….
f) No of analogue inputs (Minimum 3 windings)
……………………………….
g) Rated Current In
……………………………….
h) Rated Frequency
………………………………
li) Over current capability - continuous
………………………………
j) Over current capability – 1s
k) Burden on current transformers (VA per phase) ………………………………
l) Reference standards ………………………………
m) Operating principle ………………………………
n) Rated current and/or voltage ………………………………

n) Setting range
………………………………
o) Operating time at :
………………………………
i) 2 * setting
……………………………….
ii) 5 * setting
…………………………….
p) Communication ports – number and type
……………………………….
q) Relay operating and analysis software
……………………………….
r) Built-in sequence of event recording
……………………………….
- Resolution
NO.

Yes/No Yes/No
s) Self supervision
……………………………….
……………………………….
Yes/No Yes/No
6.00.00 Bus bar Protection for 400kV/220kV Bus bar Main 1

Main 2
a) Manufacturer’s name, type and designation of
bus bar protection relay
……………………………….
b) Is it complete numerical protection?
Yes/No Yes/No
……………………………….
d) Rated current/voltage
……………………………….
e) Setting ranges
……………………………….
f) Operating time at 5* setting value
……………………………….
g) Resetting time
……………………………….
h) No. of contacts (NO/NC)
……………………………….
i) Does the relay give 100% security and
reliability under all operating conditions and
up to 40kA fault level?
Yes/No Yes/No
j) CT secondary supervision and protection
against CT secondary open provided
Yes/No Yes/No
k) Does it require auxiliary CTs for ratio
correction?
Yes/No Yes/No
l) Does it require external CT switching relays?
No No
m) Self-monitoring diagnostic provided
Yes/No Yes/No
n) Country of manufacture
……………………………….
o) Hardware version number
……………………………….
p) Firmware version number
NO.
……………………………….
q) Mean-time between failures
……………………………….
r) Rated Frequency
………………………………
s) Selectable Internal or External breaker failure
per bay
Yes/No Yes/No
t) Overall Check Zone
Yes/No Yes/No
u) Bay Out of Service switches for each bay
Yes/No Yes/No
v) Over current capability - continuous
………………………………
w) Over current capability – 1s
………………………………
x) Burden on current transformers (VA per
phase)
………………………………
y) Reference standards
……………………………….
z) Bidder to confirm compliance to requirements
of technical specification
Yes/No
aa) Communication ports (number and type)
……………………………….
bb) Relay operating and analysis software
Yes/No
cc) Built-in sequence of event recording
Yes/No
- Resolution
- Number of stored events ……………………………….
……………………………….
dd) Self supervision
Yes/No
ee) Built-in oscillography
Yes/No
ff) Device status and operation indications
Yes/No
7.00.00 Time Synchronization Equipment
a) Manufacturer’s name and country of

manufacture ……………………………….
b) Type designation ……………………………….
NO.
c) Tested to all relevant standards and one copy

of test reports enclosed in the bid? Yes/No
d) Accuracy ……………………………….
e) All auxiliary systems and special cables, etc

required meeting the specification provided? Yes/No
f) Suitable protections provided against

lightning surges and over voltages? Yes/No
g) Details of output ports provided for time ………………………….

synchronization and their specification (such
as pps,ppm,pph etc,soft configurable,hard
configurable etc)
Yes/No
h) Is output signal programmable at site?
Active and Reactive Energy Meters

8.00.00 (KWH & KVARH)
a) Shall be microprocessor-based conforming to IEC …………………

60687 /IEC 62052-11/IEC 62053-22 / IS 14697 …
b) Shall carry out measurement of active energy (both

import and export ) and reactive energy (both import
…………………
and export ) by 3 phase, 4 wire principle suitable for
balanced/ unbalanced 3 phase load.
c) Shall have an accuracy of energy measurement of at

least Class 0.2 for active energy and at least Class 0.5 …………………
for reactive energy according to IEC 60687, and shall …..
be connected to Class 0.2 CT cores and Class 0.2 VT
windings.
d) The active and reactive energy shall be directly …………………

computed in CT & VT primary ratings. …
e) The reactive energy shall be recorded for each

metering interval in four different registers as MVARh
(lag) when active export, MVARh (Lag) when active
…………………
import, MVARh (lead) when active export, MVARh
…
NO.
(Lead) when active import.
f) Two separate registers shall be provided to record …………………

MVARH when system voltage is 103% and when
system voltage is 97%. …
g) Shall compute the net MWh and MVARh during each

successive 15-minute block metering interval along
with a plus/minus sign, instantaneous net MWh, …………………
instantaneous net MVARh, average frequency of each …
15 minutes, net active energy at midnight, , net reactive
energy for voltage low and high conditions at each
midnight.
h) Each energy meter shall have a display unit with a

seven digit display unit. It shall display the net MWh and
MVARh with a plus/minus sign and average frequency …………………
during the previous metering interval; peak MWh
demand since the last demand reset; accumulated total
…..
(instantaneous) MWh and MVARh with a plus/minus
sign, date and time; and instantaneous current and
voltage on each phases.
i) All the registers shall be stored in a non-volatile memory. Meter

registers for each metering interval, as well as accumulated totals, shall
…………………
be downloadable. All the net active/reactive energy values displayed or …..
stored shall be with a plus /minus sign for export/import.
i) At least the following data shall be stored before

being over-written for the following parameters.
Parameters details Min No of days
1. Net MWH 15 min block 40 days in

meter ………………….
.
2. Aver Freq 15 min block 40days in meter
…………………
3. Net MVARH for V > 103% 15min block 40days in meter …..
4. Net MVARH for V < 97% 15min block 40days in meter …………………
5. Cumulative 10 days in meter/ …………………

Net MWH at every midnight 40 days in PC
6. Cumulative 10 days in Meter/

Net MVARH for V> 103% 40 days in PC ………………….
at every midnight .
7. Cumulative 10 days in Meter /

Net MVARH for V < 97% 40 days in PC …………………
At every midnight …..

NO.
8. Date and time blocks of VT failure on any phase.

…………………
j) Shall have a built in clock and calendar with an

accuracy of less than 15 seconds per month drift …………………
without assistance of external time synchronizing pulse.
k) Date/time shall be displayed on demand. The clock

shall be synchronized by GPS time synchronization
equipment being supplied by the bidder.
…………………
l) The voltage monitoring of all the three voltages shall be
provided and alarm contacts provided to signal failures
to the Substation Automation System, as well as alarm
contact to indicate meter healthy status. The meter shall
be suitable to operate with power drawn from the VT …………………
supplies. The burden of the meters shall be less than 2
…….
VA.
m) The power supply to the meter shall be healthy even

with a single-phase VT supply. An automatic backup, in
the event of non-availability of voltage in all the phases,
shall be provided by a built in long life battery and shall
not need replacement for at least 10 years with a
…………………
continuous VT interruption of at least 2 years. Date and
time of VT interruption and restoration shall be …
automatically stored in a non-volatile memory.
n) Shall have an optical port on the front of the meter for

data collection from either a hand held meter reading
instrument (MRI) having a display for energy readings
or from a notebook computer with suitable software .
The bidder shall supply the MRI and/or notebook
complete with all optical interface unit required.
………………….
o) A dedicated Metering Master Station (MMS), hardwired .
to all the energy meters in bidder’s scope shall be
provided. The MMS shall be complete to offer the
following functionality:
 To automatically downloaded the meter data from

each meter point at scheduled daily intervals
………………….
.
 To create calculated metering points by addition,
subtraction, and applying multiplication factors to
meter points
 To present the demand of each meter point and …………………

calculated meter points in graphical format over …..
specified intervals.

NO.
 To calculate the total energy exchanged on meter …………………

points or calculated meter points for different …
time-of-use periods over specified intervals.
 To export meter data to Excel format for external

analysis. …………………
…
p) The meter shall have means to test MWh and MVARh
accuracy and calibration at site in-situ and test terminal
blocks shall be provided for the same. …………………
…
q) Each meter shall have an unique identification code
provided by the owner and shall e permanently marked
on the front of the meter and stored in the non volatile
memory of the meter. …………………
…
9.00.00 Frequency Relay [ISU/F] (For Islanding Scheme)
a) Manufacturer & country of manufacturer ............................
b) Type designation .....................
c) Rated frequency .....................
d) Setting Range ..........................
e) Drop off pick up ratio ..............................
f) No. of stages ..........................
g) Numerical Yes/No
h) df/dt element Yes/No
I) separate trip relay provided Yes/No
j) Operating time of trip relay ..............................
10.00.00 Dynamic Relay Test Kit
a) Name and country of manufacturer ................................

..........
b) Type designation
................................
c) Whether Modular in construction? ..........
d) Suitable to accept the fault data stored in line Yes/No.

NO.
protection relay, dist. recorder of generator/

line in for dynamic testing on relays
................................
e) Number of modules provided .......
i) Current
ii) Voltage ................................

.........
iii) Any other
Yes/No.
f) All software and PC etc. required has
been provided
g) Aux. items like phantom load, test plugs, tool kits etc Yes/No
provided
11.00.00 Panels
a) Manufacturer & country of manufacturer ..........................
b) IP Standard ..........................
c) Lockable front Plexiglas door provided. Yes/No
12.00.00 Bay Protection Units for Main Generator Circuits
12.01.00 Manufacturer’s name, type and designation of relays

providing following protection functions:
a) Generator Differential protection (87G) …………………………………….
b) Stator E/F Protection (64G1) …………………………………….
c) Stator Standby E/F Protection (64G2) …………………………………….
d) Inter-turn Fault Protection …………………………………….
e) Loss of Field Protection (40G1 & 40G2) …………………………………….
f) Back up Impedance Protection (21G) ……………………………………
g) Negative Sequence Current Protection (46G) …………………………………….

NO.
h) Low Forward Power Protection (37G1 and 37G2) ……………………………………
i) Rotor E/F Protection …………………………………..
j) Over voltage Protection …………………………………..
k) Over fluxing Protection for GT (99GT) ……………………………………
l) Overall Differential Protection ……………………………………
m) Overhead Line Connection Differential Protection ……………………………………
n) B/U E/F Protection on GT HV Neutral …………………………………….
o) Generator Under Frequency Protection ……………………………………
p) Generator Pole Slipping (98G) ……………………………………
q) Accidental Back Energization (50GDM) ……………………………………
r) GT Differential Protection …………………………………….
s) VT fuse Failure Protection ……………………………………
t) Unit Transformer Differential Protection …………………………………….
u) Unit Transformer LV REF …………………………………….
v) Unit Transformer B/U E/F Protection …………………………………….
w) Unit Transformer Instantaneous / Delayed O/C ……………………………………

Protection
12.02.00 Bidder to confirm that all numerical relays providing the

above protection functions shall be configured into two
protection groups operating on two separate DC
supplies, in line with the requirements specified in the
technical specification Yes / No Yes / No
12.03.00 Also provide the following information for each separate

device:
- Country of manufacture ………………………………………
- Hardware version number ………………………………………

NO.
- Firmware version number ………………………………………
- Mean-time between failures ……………………………………..
- Rated Voltage Vn (phase-to-neutral) ……………………………………….
- Rated Current In ………………………………………
- Rated Frequency ………………………………………
- Overvoltage capability – continuous ………………………………………
- Overvoltage capability – 3s ……………………………………….
- Burden on voltage transformers (VA per phase) ……………………………………….
- Over current capability – continuous ……………………………………….
- Over current capability – 1s ………………………………………..
- Burden on current transformers (VA per phase) ………………………………………..
- Reference standards ……………………………………….
- Operating principle ……………………………………….
- Relay operating and analysis software ………………………………………
- Self supervision ………………………………………..
- Built-in sequence of event recording ………………………………………..
- Built-in oscillography ……………………………………….
- Device operation and status information ……………………………………….
12.04.00 Generator Differential Protection (87G)

a)Rated current and (or) voltage (a.c.)
........................................…………
b) Rated d. Voltage ..........................................
c) Operating time at ..........................................
i) 2 * setting ..........................................
ii) 5 * setting ..........................................

NO.
d) Operating principle ..........................................
e) Tuned to system frequency? Yes/No Yes / No
f) Setting Range ..........................................
g) Non linear voltage limiting

Resistors Provided? Yes/No Yes / No
12.05.00 Generator Stator Standby Earth Fault

Protection (64G2)
a) Operating principle ..........................................
b) Rated D.C. Voltage ..........................................
c) Setting Range ..........................................
d) Time setting range ..........................................
e) Tuned to system frequency? Yes / No Yes / No
12.06.00 Generator Inter Turn Fault Protection (95 G)
a) Operating principle ..........................................
b) Setting Range ..........................................
c) Rated D.C. Voltage ..........................................
d) Burden ..........................................
e) Drop off to pick up ratio ..........................................
f) Tuned to system frequency? Yes/No
12.07.00 Generator Over Voltage Protection (59 G)
a) Rated voltage ..........................................

NO.
b) Setting Range ..........................................
c) Drop off pick up ratio ..........................................
d) Timer setting range ..........................................
12.08.00 Generator Under Frequency Protection (81 G)
a) Rated frequency ..........................................
b) Setting Range ..........................................
c) Drop off pick up ratio ..........................................
d) No. of stages ..........................................
12.09.00 Generator Low Forward Power or Reverse

Reverse Power Interlock Protection
a) Rated D.C. voltage ..........................................
b) Power Setting Range ..........................................
c) Timer setting range ..........................................
12.10.00 Generator Loss of Excitation Protection

a) Rated current and (or) voltage (AC) ..........................................
b) Operating principle ..........................................
c) Setting Range ..........................................
d) Offset feature ..........................................
e) Mho circle ..........................................
f) Timer setting range ..........................................
g) Under voltage relay setting range ..........................................
12.11.00 Generator Negative Phase Sequence

NO.
Protection (46 G)
a) Rated current and (or) voltage (A.C.) ..........................................
b) i) Alarm current setting range ..........................................
ii) Alarm time setting range ..........................................
c) Trip setting range ..........................................
12.12.00 Generator Pole slipping Protection (98G)
b) Operating principle ..........................................
c) Setting Ranges ..........................................
d) Supervising relay included Yes/No
12.13.00 Generator Backup Impedance Protection (21 G)
b) Rated D.C. voltage ..........................................
c) Setting Range ..........................................
d) Timer setting range ..........................................
12.14.00 Generator VT Fuse Failure Relay (60 G)
c) Rated voltage ..........................................
d) Setting Range ..........................................
e) Timer setting range ..........................................

NO.
f) Drop off/pick up ratio ..........................................
12.15.00 Transformer Differential Protection

c) Rated current ..........................................
d) Rated D.C. voltage ..........................................
e) Whether second harmonic Yes/No

restraint feature is provided? ..........................................
f) Operating time of differential

unit at 2 * setting current ..........................................
i) With restraint ..........................................
ii) Without restating ..........................................
g) Whether three instantaneous

units provided? Yes/No
h) Bias setting range ..........................................
i) Operating current setting ..........................................
j) Resetting time ..........................................
12.16.00 Generator and Generator Transformer Over-

fluxing Protection (99G/99GT )
c) Rated voltage ..........................................
d) Principle of operation ..........................................
e) Whether inverse time operating

characteristics provided? Yes/No
f) Setting range ..........................................

NO.
i) v/f ratio ..........................................
ii) time for alarm ..........................................
iii) time for tripping ..........................................
g) Whether different time

multiplier settings provided? Yes/No
h) Maximum operating time ..........................................
i) 1.4 times the rated value of v/f ..........................................
ii) 1.5 times the rated value of v/f ..........................................
i) Accuracy of operating time ..........................................
j) Resetting ratio ..........................................
k) Reset time ..........................................
12.17.00 Generator Transformer Back Up Earth fault

Protection (51 NGT)
c) Rated voltage ..........................................
d) Setting ranges ..........................................
e) Definite minimum time

at 10 times setting current ..........................................
12.18.00 Unit Transformer Differential Protection (87UT)
c) Rated current ..........................................
d) Rated D.C. voltage ..........................................
e) Whether second harmonic

NO.
restraint feature is provided? Yes/No
f) Operating time of differential

unit at 2 * setting current ..........................................
i) With restraint ..........................................
ii) Without restraint ..........................................
g) Whether three instantaneous

units provided? Yes/No
h) Bias setting range ..........................................
i) Operating current setting ..........................................
j) Resetting time ..........................................
12.19.00 Unit Transformer Back Up Over Current

Protection (51UT)
a) Manufacturer & country of

manufacturer ..........................................
c) Rated voltage ..........................................
d) Setting ranges ..........................................
i) definite time unit ..........................................
ii) high set unit ..........................................
12.20.00 Unit Transformer Back Up Earth Fault

NO.
Protection (51NUT)
c) Rated voltage ..........................................
d) Setting ranges ..........................................
i) definite time unit ..........................................
ii) high set unit ..........................................
12.21.00 Unit Transformer Restricted Earth Fault

Protection (64 RUT)
c) Rated voltage ..........................................
e) Burden ..........................................
f) Operating time at 2 * setting ..........................................
g) Setting ranges ..........................................
12.22.00 Generator Transformer Bay Circuit Breaker

Local Breaker Back Up Protection Relay (50Z)
c) Operating principle ..........................................
d) Contacts-Self reset/hand reset ..........................................
e) Operation indicator provided? ..........................................
f) Operating time ..........................................
g) Resetting time ..........................................
h) Setting range ..........................................
i) Current ..........................................

NO.
ii) Time ..........................................
12.22.01 Generator 100% Stator Earth Fault

Protection (64G1)
c) Rated voltage ..........................................
e) Burden ..........................................
12.22.02 Generator Rotor Stator Earth Fault

Protection (64G1)
c) Rated voltage ..........................................
e) Burden ..........................................
f) Range
…………………………….
12.23.00 Generator Trip Relays
c) Rated voltage d.c. ..........................................
d) Operating range of voltage ..........................................
e) Operating time at rated voltage ..........................................
f) No. of contacts available ..........................................
g) Whether supervisory relays included Yes/No Yes/No
12.24.00 Interposing Relays for Generator Breaker

NO.
c) Rated d.c. voltage ..........................................
d) Burden ..........................................
e) Operating principle ..........................................
f) No. of contacts ..........................................
i) Normally open ..........................................
ii) Normally closed ..........................................
g) Satisfactorily operates for

voltage variation - 20% to 25%? Yes/No
f) Provided with diode rated for

5A and peak inverse voltage
of 48 V DC. Yes/No
12.25.00 Flag Relays
a) Manufacturer & country

of manufacturer ..........................................
c) Whether hand rest Yes/No
d) No. of elements ..........................................
e) No. of contacts ..........................................
i) Normally open ..........................................
ii) Normally closed ..........................................
12.26.00 DISTURBANCE RECORDER FOR GENERATOR

NO.
a) Name & country of manufacturer ..........................................
b) Manufacturer's type designation ..........................................
c) Overall dimensions in mm ..........................................

(maximum)
d) Scan rate for ..........................................
i) Slow scan ..........................................
ii) Fast scan ..........................................
e) No. of analogue recording ..........................................

channels
f) No. of event recording channels ..........................................
g) By how many numbers can ..........................................

the channels be expanded?
i) Analogue channels ..........................................
ii) Event channels ..........................................
h) Whether all starting sensors Yes/No

provided?
i) Linearity Error (%) ..........................................
j) i) Pre-fault memory (milli seconds) …………………………………

ii) Post fault memory (seconds) ..........................................
k) Frequency Response (Hz)
i) slow scan ..........................................

NO.
ii) fast scan ..........................................
l) Resolution of the event channels

(ms) ..........................................
m) i) Resolution ..........................................
a) Time ..........................................
b) Amplitude ..........................................
n) Memory capacity for one record of slow scan ..........................................

at scan rate of 2.0 Hz
o) Memory capacity for one record of fast scan ..........................................

at scan rate of 2000 Hz
p) Whether detailed literature Yes/No

enclosed?
q) Time display present Yes/No
r) i) Total no. of modules used ..........................................
ii) Details of modules ..........................................
s) i) Details of time generator and Yes/No

synchronization facility enclosed?
ii) Time synchronization with the external Yes/No.

time synchronization equipment provided
t) Whether man-machine interface

as specified, provided? Yes/No
u) Whether fault data is made available in

IEEE-COMTRADE format and available

NO.
through MMI for Owner’s analysis? Yes/No
v) Whether necessary software for analysis Yes/ No.

provided?
w) Whether interface provided for remote Yes/No

transmission of fault data?
x) Whether alarm output contacts provided for Yes/No.

Power supply fail, processor fail, memory fail,
printer fail etc. as specified, provided?
y) Whether interface provided for remote Yes/No.

transmission of fault data
z) All necessary transducers, as specified, Yes/No.
provided?
12.27.00 Generator ABT Type Energy Meters
a) Name & country of manufacturer ................................…………………
b) Manufacturer's type designation ................................…………………
c) Completely type tested to IEC:687? Yes/No
d) i) Type of measurement
(3 phase, 4 wire, balanced /unbalanced
power)
i) Whether 3 element …………………………………………
e) Accuracy ...............................………………….
f) Input aux. transformers provided for both ................................……………….

current circuits?
g) Provided with built-in clock? ...............................…………………
h) Whether time synchronization through external

time synchronization equipment under supply
provided? ...............................………………… i)
Number of digits up to which meter can register

NO.
without requiring to reset ...............................…………………

j) Data recorded in Non-volatile memory Yes/No.
i) Burden
i) Current coil ...............................…………………
ii) Voltage coil ...............................…………………

k) Limits of error at unity pf and
0.5 pf for KWH and KVARH
meters
i) at 125%, 25% 10% and

5% rated current ...............................…………………
ii) at 100% rated current ...............................…………………
l) Short time rating

i) Current coil ...............................…………………
ii) Voltage coil ...............................…………………
iii) Time ...............................…………………
m) Whether monitoring of all three voltages & Yes/No.
record of time for loss of any voltage
input provided?
n) Testing facilities provided? ...............................………………….
o) Capacity of non-volatile memory for recording …………………………………………
active & reactive energy export & import

p) Is it possible to read the energy meter in shut-down
…………………………………………
feeder shut-down state.
12.28.00 Transformer(s)/Reactor(s) Protections
I) Differential Protection (87T/87R)
b) Operating time at
i. 2 * setting

NO.
ii. 5 * setting
c) Operating principle ..........................................
d) Tuned to system frequency ..........................................
e) Setting Range
f) Non linear voltage limiting resistors provided?
g) Is the function immune to DC offset component
h) Relay is IEC 61850 compliant
ii) Restricted Earth Fault
c) Operating time at
i. 2 * setting
ii. 5 * setting
d) Relay is IEC 61850 compliant
iii) Directional Back-up Over current and Earth Fault protection
b) Burden
c) Current Setting Ranges
Definite Time Unit …………………………….
High Set Unit ……………………………..

NO.
d) Time setting ranges
e) Is it triple pole type
f) Numerical?
g) Relay is IEC 61850 compliant
iv) Earth Fault Protection
b)Burden
c) Current Setting ranges
d) Time setting range
e) Relay is IEC 61850 compliant
v) Over fluxing protection
b) Rated voltage
..........................................
c) Principle of operation ..........................................
d) Whether inverse time operating

characteristics provided? Yes/No
e) Setting range ..........................................
f) v/f ratio ..........................................
i) time for alarm ..........................................
ii) time for tripping ..........................................
g) Whether different time

NO.
multiplier settings provided? Yes/No
h) Maximum operating time ..........................................
i) 1.4 times the rated value of v/f ..........................................
ii) 1.5 times the rated value of v/f ..........................................
i) Accuracy of operating time ..........................................
j) High Set element provided
kj) Resetting ratio ..........................................
l) Reset time ..........................................
m) Relay is IEC61850 compliant
vi) Instantaneous over current protection
a) Manufacturer and Country of manufacturer
b) Type designation
d) Burden
e) Setting ranges
f) Operating time
g) Is it triple pole type yes/no
h) Numerical yes/no
vii) Over current protection
b) Burden

NO.
c) Current Setting Ranges
d) Time setting ranges
e) Is it triple pole type
f) Numerical?
g) Relay is IEC 61850 compliant

PART - B
CHAPTER – E11
LT POWER AND CONTROL CABLE
NO.
E-11
POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
(The following technical data shall be submitted

by the Bidder for each type and size of the cable)
1. Maker's Name & country of

Manufacturer .................................................
2. Manufacturer's type & designation .................................................
3. Applicable Standard .................................................
4. Rated Voltage (Volts) .................................................
5. Suitable for earthed or unearthed

system? .................................................
6. Continuous current rating when

laid in air in an ambient temp. of
50o C and for maximum conductor
temp. 85 oC for HR - PVC cable
and 70o for PVC cable .................................................
7. Rating factors applicable to the

current ratings given in Clause
1.6 for the following variations/
conditions of installation. .................................................
a) Variation in ambient air

temp. from 30oC to 55 o C
in steps of 5oC .................................................
b) Group rating factors for

different spacing of cables
installed in horizontal
cable trays, arranged
in vertical tiers, under the
following methods of
laying (in trefoil formation
of single core cable) .................................................
i) Cables laid in formed

concreted trenches
with restricted air
circulation .................................................

NO.
ii) Cables laid in Cover-

head cable trays .................................................
8. Continuous current rating when
laid burried in ground under the
following conditions of laying .................................................
i) Reference ground
temperature 30oC .................................................
ii) Maximum conductor

temperature 70deg C
for PVC 85 deg C for
HR-PVC .................................................
iii) Thermal Resistivity of
soil 150oC cm/w .................................................
iv) Depth of laying (to the .................................................

highest point) 900 mm
9. Rating Factors applicable to the

current rating given in clause 8
for the following variations/
conditions of installation
a) Variation in ground temp.

from 25oC to 50oC in
steps of 5oC .................................................
b) Variation in thermal
resistivity of the soil in
the range 100/120/150/
200/250/300 deg. C
cm/w .................................................
c) Group rating factor for

different spacing of cables
installed horizontally (in
trefoil formation for
single core cables) .................................................
d) Variation in depth of burial

in the range 600 mm to
1150 mm .................................................
10. Short Circuit Capacity

NO.
a) Short circuit Amp. (rms) kA .................................................
b) Duration of short circuit Sec. .................................................
c) Conductor temp. allowed for the

short circuit duty, deg. C .................................................
d) Formula relating short

circuit current (rms)
and duration (Sec.) .................................................
11. Loss tangent at normal frequency .................................................
12. Conductor
a) Material (Copper or
aluminium) .................................................
b) Grade .................................................
c) Normal cross section

area (Sq. mm) .................................................
d) Number and diameter

of wire (No. / mm) .................................................
e) Form of Conductor .................................................
f) Approximate dia over

conductor (mm) .................................................
g) Direction of lay of
Standard layers .................................................
13. Conductor resistnace (DC) at 20oC

per 1000 metres (ohm) .................................................
14. Conductor resistance (AC) at

maximum operating temp. per
1000 metres (ohms/km) .................................................
15. Reactance per phase at 50 Hz

per 1000 metres (Ohms / km) .................................................
16. Capacitance at 50 Hz per 1000

metres (Micro Farads / km) .................................................

NO.
17. Insulation
a) Composition of insulation .................................................
b) Nominal thickness of
insulation (mm) .................................................
c) Tolerance on thickness
of insulation .................................................
d) Minimum volume resist-
ivity at 85oC for HR-PVC
cable and at 70oC for PVC
cable (ohm / cm) .................................................
e) Minimum volume resisti-

vity at 20oC (ohm-cm) .................................................
18. Inner Sheath
a) Material .................................................
b) Extruded or Wrapped? .................................................
c) Calculated diameter over

the laid up cores (mm) .................................................
d) Thickness of sheath .................................................
e) Tolerance on thickness
of inner sheath .................................................
19. Armour
a) Type and material of

armour .................................................
b) Direction of lay of
armouring .................................................
c) Normal diameter of cable

over inner sheath (under
armour), mm .................................................
d) Nominal diameter of round

armour wire .................................................

NO.
e) Number of armour wires .................................................
f) A.C. resistance of armour

wires at 60oC .................................................
g) Short circuit capacity of

the armour along with
formula relating short
circuit current and
duration .................................................
h) D.C. resistance at 20oC .................................................
20. Outer Sheath .................................................
a) Material .................................................
b) Calculated diameter
under the sheath .................................................
c) Thickness of sheath .................................................
d) Tolerance on thickness
of seath .................................................
e) Guaranteed value of
minimum oxygen index
of outer sheath .................................................
f) Colour of sheath .................................................
21. a) Overall diameter of cable

(mm) .................................................
b) Tolerance on overall
diameter (mm) .................................................
22. Weight per 1000 metres (Kg) .................................................
23. Recommended minmum installation

radius .................................................
24. Safe pulling force when pulled

by pulling eye on the conductor
(Kg) .................................................

NO.
25. Cable Drums
a) Weight of cable drum

with cables (Kg) .................................................
b) Maximum / standard
length per drum for
each size of cable
(single length) with
plus or minus 5%
tolerance (metre) .................................................
26. Test Voltage .................................................
a) High Voltage test (kV) .................................................
b) Water immersion test

voltage (kV) .................................................
27. Whether progressive sequential Yes/No

marking on outer sheath provided .................................................
28. Core numbering in case of Yes/No

control cables provided .................................................
29. Minimum bending radius

permissible .................................................

PART - B
CHAPTER – E12
REQUIREMENT OF AUXILIARY ITEMS
NO.
E - 12
EHV SWITCHYARD
AUXILIARY ITEMS
A. CONTROL CABINETS
(Bidder shall furnish this data for each equipment marshalling

box/operating mechanism box separately i.e.Bay Marshalling
Box, cabinets of breakers, disconnecting switches,
instrument transformers, lighting panels, etc.)

country of origin .........................................
2. Indoor/Outdoor application .........................................
3. Design ambient air

temperature (oC) .........................................
4. Standards Applicable .........................................
5. Thickness of sheet steel

(mm) and whether cold
rolled or hot rolled .........................................
6. Degree of protection provided .........................................
7. Colour of finish paint IS:5 .........................................
a) Outside .........................................
b) Inside .........................................
8. Busbars .........................................
a) Material & Size .........................................
b) Temperature rise at rated

current over specified
ambient (oC) .........................................
c) Continuous current rating (A) .........................................
d) One second current

ranting (KA) .........................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2x800MW) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER -E12
NO.
9. Control Wiring .........................................
a) Size of Conductor .........................................
i) For CT circuits .........................................
ii) for other circuits .........................................
b) Conductor Solid/stranded .........................................
10. Terminal Blocks .........................................
a) Make & Type .........................................
b) Current rating .........................................
i) Power terminals (A) .........................................
ii) Other terminals (A) .........................................
11. Space heater rating at 240 VAC .........................................
12. Control cabinet drawing enclosed Yes/No
13. Type test report Yes/No
B. TERMINAL CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS, AND SPACERS
(Bidder shall furnish this data for Terminal clamps and

connector separately for each type and equipment)

address .........................................
3. Type .........................................
4. For connection to .........................................
a) Conductor size and

arrangement .........................................
b) Equipment terminal
size and arrangement .........................................

NO.
5. Bitmetalic Liners if any

and its thickness .........................................
6. Rated Current (A) .........................................
7. a) Rated terminal load (kg) .........................................
b) Factor of safety .........................................
8. Minimum thickness of any

part (mm) .........................................
9. Weight clamp complete with

hardware (kg) .........................................
10. Maximum temperature rise

over reference ambient temperature
of 50oC when crrying rated current .........................................
11. Radio interference voltage at

1.1 Um/3 (micro volts ) for
frequency between 0.5 MHz
to 2.0 MHz .........................................
12. Corona extinction voltage

(KV rms) .........................................
15. Maximum allowable span on

equipment terminal pad and
with rated fault current of
40 KA rms with specified
phase to phase spacing .........................................
16. Rated terminal load .........................................
C. INSULATOR HARDWARE
(Bidder shall furnish this data separtely for each

type and rating)
1. Manufacturer .........................................

NO.
3. Material .........................................
a) Ferrous Parts .........................................
b) Nuts & Bolts .........................................
c) Cotter Pins .........................................
d) Split Pins .........................................
e) Strain and Suspension

clamps .........................................
4. Ultimate Strengths .........................................
a) Complete Assembly (Kg) .........................................
b) Suspension clamps (kg) .........................................
c) Strain clamp (Kg) .........................................
d) D - Shackle (Kg) .........................................
e) Ball eye (Kg) .........................................
f) Ball clevis (kg) .........................................
g) Clevis eye (Kg) .........................................
h) Socket eye (Kg) .........................................
I) Socket clevis (Kg) .........................................
j) Yoke Plate (Kg) .........................................
5. Magnetic power loss of the

suspension clamp assembly
at 600 A .........................................
6. Magnetic power loss of the

drop clamp assembly at 600 A .........................................
D. TUBULAR BUS CONDUCTOR
1. Manufacturer .........................................
3. Material .........................................

NO.
4. Size of Tubular Bus
Conductor (mm) .........................................
a) Pipe Size (IPS) (mm) .........................................

b) Outside diameter (mm) .........................................
c) Tolerance on outside
diameter (%) .........................................
d) Minimum thickness (mm) .........................................
e) Area (Sq. mm). .........................................
5. Moment of Inertia (mm4) .........................................
6. Section Modulus (mm3) .........................................
7. Radius of gyration (mm) .........................................
8. Natural Frequency of
vibration for the sIte
conditions (c/s) .........................................
9. Reactance per phase for

configuration at site (ohms) .........................................
10. Conductivity of IACs(%) .........................................
11. D.C. Resistance at 20oC .........................................
12. Constant mass temperature

co-efficient of resistance .........................................
13. Weight (Kg/m) .........................................
14. Current rating at site conditions

(Amps) .........................................
15. Tubular bus conductor

temperature due to short
circuit (oC) .........................................
16. Short circuit rating for 1

second (kA) .........................................
17. Corona Extinction voltage (kV) .........................................

NO.
18. Radio Interference at 1.1 Um/3

for frequency between
0.5 MHz to 2.0 MHz .........................................
19. Yield Strength at tensile stress

of 1335 Kg/cm2 for aluminium
tubular bus conductors (Kg) .........................................
20. Minimum Breaking Strength

at tensile stress of 1545 Kg/cm
for Alumin ium tubular bus
conductors (Kg) .........................................
21. Deflection of tubular bus

conductor for 12.5 m span (mm) .........................................
22. Data applicable to Corona Bells .........................................
a) Material .........................................
b) Type of fitting (Internal/External) .........................................
c) Dimensional drawing furnished .........................................
E. MOOSE CONDUCTOR
1. Manufacturer .........................................
4. Material .........................................
5. Weight per kM ........................................
6. UTS .........................................
F. EARTHWIRE
1. Manufacturer .........................................
4. Material .........................................
5. Weight per kM ........................................
6. UTS .........................................

PART - B
CHAPTER – E13
INSULATORS FOR
CHAPTER E1 TO E6 & E12
NO.
E-13
EHV INSULATORS FOR CHAPTER E1 TO 6&12
(Bidder shall furnish these data for each equipment separately i.e
. for circuit Breakers, Instrument Transformer, Surge Arrestors, etc.)
3. Type .........................................
5. i) Height .........................................
ii) Diameter (Top) .........................................
a) Total (mm) .........................................
7. Rated Voltage .........................................

i) Dry .........................................
ii) Wet .........................................


i) Dry .........................................
ii) Wet .........................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER -E-13

SW ITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION-VII PART -B PAGE 1
NO.
11. Weight (Kg) .........................................

ii) Top .........................................
ii) Bottom .........................................
ii) Top .........................................
iii) Bottom .........................................

corona ring
i) Dry (kV rms) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV rms) .........................................

NO.
i) Dry (kV rms) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV rms) .........................................

2.0 MHz .........................................
i) Upright (kg) .........................................
ii) Under (kg) .........................................
C. STRING INSULATOR
1. Manufacturer .........................................
a) Insulator .........................................
b) Hardware .........................................

NO.
b) Normal/antifog .........................................
6. Size of each unit .........................................
b) Spacing between
7. Weight .........................................
a) Each Disc (Kg) .........................................
a) Each Disc (Kg) .........................................

voltage
a) Each Disc .........................................
i) Dry (kV) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV) .........................................
i) Dry (kV) .........................................
ii) Wet (kV) .........................................

NO.
a) Each Disc .........................................
i) Positive (kVp) .........................................

ii) Negative (kVp) .........................................
i) Positive (kVp) .........................................
ii) Negative (kVp) .........................................
a) Each Disc (kVp) .........................................

disc (kV rms) .........................................
a) Each Disc (Kg) .........................................
i) Single tension .........................................

PART - B
CHAPTER – E14
MOTORS FOR
CHAPTER E1 & E2
NO.
E-14
MOTORS FOR CHAPTER E1 & E2

(Bidder shall fill up thedata for Circuit breakers and Isolator and earth switches seperately)
1. a) Manufacturer ..........................................
b) Equipment ..........................................
c) Motor type ..........................................
d) Frame size & type designation ..........................................
e) Applicable standard to which motor conforms ..........................................
f) Rated output at 50 deg. C outside

air ambient temperature(KW) ..........................................
g) Max. power input to the driven

equipment at design duty point (KW) ..........................................
h) Max. power input to the driven equipment (KW)

over entire operating range.
i) At rated speed ..........................................
ii) AT 103% speed ..........................................
i) Class and type of insulation
j) Type of enclosure, and method of cooling ..........................................
k) Degree of protection ..........................................
l) Rated voltage and frequency (HZ)
m) Rated speed ..........................................
n) Efficiency at design duty point ..........................................

(without -ve tolerance)
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW ) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER - E14

SW ITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION -VII PART-B PAGE 1
NO.
o) Power factor at design duty point ..........................................
p) Type of mounting ..........................................
q) Type of terminal box for stator leads ..........................................
r) Bearing type ..........................................
DARLIPALLI STPP-I(2X800MW ) ATTACHMENT 12 CHAPTER - E14

SW ITCHYARD PACKAGE TO SECTION -VII PART-B PAGE 2

TS-NTPC Darlipali PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TS-NTPC Darlipali PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TS-NTPC Darlipali PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NTPC Limited

(A Government of India Enterprise)

DARLIPALLI STPP STAGE-I

DARLIPALLI STPP STAGE-I

S. No. Chapter Description

2 PART-II ELECTRICAL & CIVIL

3 PART-III TRANSMISSION LINES

4 PART-IV GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

PART CHAPTER DESCRIPTION NO. OF

Chapter – E1 Circuit Breakers 20

Chapter – E3 Instrument Transformers 13

Chapter – E4 Surge Arrestor 7

Chapter – E5 Post Insulator 4

Chapter – E6 Wave Trap 3

Chapter – E10 Substation Automation System (SAS) 67

Chapter – E11 LT Power and Control Cables 3

Chapter – E12 Requirements of Auxiliary Items 19

Chapter – E13 Installation 19

Chapter – E14 Site Testing and Commissioning 3

Chapter-T1 Transmission line towers 18

Chapter-T2 Tower Foundations 10

Chapter-T3 Tower line erection and Stringing 7

Chapter-T4 Line material 9

Chapter-T5 Line material Testing 16

PART - IV GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Appendix - I Sampling Testing and Quality Assurance 15

Annexure - II List of Specialist Institutes/Organisation for 3

Annexure - V Indicative Field Quality Plan 16

Indicative Vendor List For Items Requiring Sub 8

Chapter- G2 Additional Construction Work Split 15

Annexure - II List of Tender Drawings 23

Annexure - III Additional Information to Bidders 7

Chapter – G3 Codes and Standards 6

1.00.00 Intent of Specification 1

2.00.00 Project Information 2

3.00.00 Scope of Work 2

5.00.00 Type Test Requirements 17

6.00.00 Requirements in Respect of Supply Items 19

ANNEXURE-I : Project Synopsis- Darlipalli STPP-I (2X800MW) 23

APPENDIX- I : The criteria for Wind Resistant Design 24

APPENDIX- II : The criteria for Earthquake Resistant Design 26

SUB SECTION – GENERAL

1.00.00 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION

a) Complete design and engineering of all the systems, sub-systems, equipment,

Detailed scope of work under this package is listed at clause 3.00.00.

1.05.00 Whenever a material or article is specified or described by the name of a particular

DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I

also be considered, provided sufficient information is furnished so as to enable the

2.00.00 PROJECT INFORMATION

3.00.00 SCOPE OF WORK

DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I

I) Execution of following bays at 765 kV Switchyard

i. Two (2) Nos. of Generator Transformer bays.

IV) Execution of following 132 kV transmission lines(with ACSR panther

DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I

The scope includes supply, erection, testing and commissioning of 132 kV

DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I

DARLIPALLI STPP Stage-I

- Substation Automation System for 765/132KV switchyard and Make-up Water